Discovery 4 - LR4 2010-2012 - Sec4 & 5

4: Electrical
412: Climate Control System

412-00: Climate Control System - General Information
Specification
Diagnosis and Testing
Climate Control System
General Procedures
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
(82.30.02)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Commissioning
412-01: Air Distribution and Filtering
Specification
Description and Operation
Air Distribution and Filtering
Removal and Installation
Driver Side Register Trim Panel (76.46.12)
Passenger Side Register Trim Panel (76.46.13)
Pollen Filter (80.15.42)
Plenum Chamber (80.15.62)
412-02A: Heating and Ventilation
Heating and Ventilation
Heating and Ventilation
Blower Motor (80.20.15)
Heater Core (80.20.29) - LHD AWD
Heater Core (80.20.29) - RHD AWD
412-02B: Auxiliary Heating
Specification
Auxiliary Heater
Fuel Fired Booster Heater
General Procedures
Auxiliary Heater Remote Transmitter Programming
Fuel Fired Booster Heater (80.40.01) - TDV6 2.7L Diesel
Fuel Fired Booster Heater - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Fuel Fired Booster Heater Glow Plug And Burner Assembly - TDV6 2.7L
Diesel
Fuel Fired Booster Heater Glow Plug And Burner Assembly - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel
412-03A: Air Conditioning - TDV6 2.7L Diesel
Specification
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor (82.10.20)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Transducer (82.20.38)
Condenser Core (82.15.07)
Evaporator Core (82.25.20) (82.25.22)
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (82.25.01)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Pulley
412-03B: Air Conditioning - V6 4.0L Petrol
Specification
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor (82.10.20)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Pulley
Evaporator Core (82.25.20) (82.25.22)
412-03C: Air Conditioning - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor
Evaporator Core (82.25.20) (82.25.22)
412-03D: Air Conditioning - V8 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor
Condenser Core
Condenser Fan
Evaporator Core (82.25.20) (82.25.22)
412-03E: Auxiliary Climate Control
Specification
Auxiliary Climate Control
Auxiliary Climate Control
Heater Core (82.26.19)
Evaporator Core (82.26.20)
Auxiliary Climate Control Assembly (82.26.22)
Auxiliary Blower Motor (82.26.33)
Auxiliary Temperature Blend Door Actuator (82.26.34)
Auxiliary Blend Door Actuator (82.26.35)
Auxiliary Blower Motor Control Module (82.26.45)
412-04: Control Components
Control Components
Control Components
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (80.40.31)
Climate Control Assembly
Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator (80.10.36) - LHD AWD
Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator (80.10.36) - RHD AWD
Driver Side Temperature Blend Door Actuator (80.10.37) - LHD AWD
Driver Side Temperature Blend Door Actuator (80.10.37) - RHD AWD
Instrument Panel Blend Door Actuator (80.20.09) - LHD AWD
Instrument Panel Blend Door Actuator (80.20.09) - RHD AWD
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor (82.20.93)
Passenger Side Temperature Blend Door Actuator (80.10.38) - LHD AWD
Passenger Side Temperature Blend Door Actuator (80.10.38) - RHD AWD
Recirculation Blend Door Actuator - LHD AWD
Recirculation Blend Door Actuator - RHD AWD
Sunload Sensor (82.20.92)
413: Instrumentation and Warning Systems
413-01: Instrument Cluster
Specification
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster (80.20.01.99) (88.20.01)
Instrument Cluster Lens
413-06: Horn
Horn
Horn
413-08: Information and Message Center
Information and Message Center
Information and Message Center
413-09A: Warning Devices
Specification
Low Tire Pressure Module (86.54.05)
413-09B: Engine Protection System
Specification
Engine Protection System Module
413-13: Parking Aid
Specification
Parking Aid
Parking Aid
Parking Aid Camera
Parking Aid Camera Module
Parking Aid Module (86.54.10)
Parking Aid Speaker (86.54.19)
Front Parking Aid Camera
Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Rear Inner Parking Aid Sensor (86.54.23)
Rear Outer Parking Aid Sensor (86.54.24)
Side Parking Aid Camera
414: Battery and Charging System
414-00: Battery and Charging System - General Information
Specification
Battery Care Requirements
Quiescent Drain
Battery Report Form – In Service Batteries Only
Charging System
General Procedures
Battery Charging
414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables
Specification
Battery
Battery Tray (76.10.30)
Auxiliary Battery Tray (76.10.31)
Battery (86.15.01)
414-02A: Generator and Regulator - TDV6 2.7L Diesel
Specification
Generator
Generator
Generator (86.10.02)
414-02B: Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
System Operation and Component Description
Generator
Generator
414-02C: Generator and Regulator - V6 4.0L Petrol
Specification
Generator
Generator
Generator (86.10.02)
414-02D: Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Generator
Generator
415: Information and Entertainment Systems
415-00: Information and Entertainment System - General Information
Navigation System Map Updates
Cellular Phone
Information and Entertainment System
Navigation System
415-01A: Audio Unit
Specification
Audio System
Audio Unit
Audio Unit Fascia
Compact Disc (CD) Changer
Audio Amplifier (86.50.36)
Subwoofer Amplifier
Rear Auxiliary Audio Controls
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Television (TV) Module
415-01B: Information and Entertainment System
Audio System
Speakers
415-02: Antenna
Antenna
Antenna
415-03: Speakers
Specification
Speakers
Front Door Speaker (86.50.10)
Rear Door Speaker (86.50.12)
Instrument Panel Speaker (86.50.11)
Quarter Panel Speaker (86.50.48)
Tailgate Speaker (86.50.47)
415-07: Video System
Video System
Video System
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player
Video Display
417: Lighting
417-01: Exterior Lighting
Specification
Exterior Lighting
Headlamps
Headlamp Leveling
Stoplamps
Turn Signal, Cornering and Hazard Lamps
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Rear Fog Lamps
Reversing Lamps
Trailer Lamps
Autolamps
General Procedures
Headlamp Adjustment (86.40.17)
Front Fog Lamp Adjustment
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Adjustment
Stoplamp Switch (70.35.42)
Headlamp Assembly (86.40.49)
Side Turn Signal Lamp (86.40.53)
Rear Lamp Assembly (86.40.70)
Front Fog Lamp (86.40.96)
High Mounted Stoplamp (86.41.32)
Adaptive Front Lighting Module (86.54.06)
Headlamp Switch
Approach Lamp - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera
417-02: Interior Lighting
Specification
Interior Lighting
Interior Lighting
417-04: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
418: Electrical Distribution
418-00: Module Communications Network
Specification
Communications Network
Battery Junction Box (BJB) (86.70.55) - V6 4.0L Petrol
Battery Junction Box (BJB) (86.70.55) - V8 5.0L Petrol
Battery Junction Box (BJB) (86.70.55) - TDV6 2.7L Diesel
Battery Junction Box (BJB) (86.70.55) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Central Junction Box (CJB) (86.70.56)
418-02: Wiring Harnesses
Specification
Wiring Harness
General Procedures
Wiring Harness Repair
Engine Wiring Harness (86.70.17) - V6 4.0L Petrol
Engine Wiring Harness (86.70.17) - V8 5.0L Petrol
Engine Wiring Harness (86.70.17) - TDV6 2.7L Diesel
Engine Wiring Harness (86.70.17) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Liftgate Wiring Harness (86.70.84)
Frame Wiring Harness - Vehicles Built From: 01/2007
Front Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness - Front Section
Front Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness - Main Body Section
Left Hand Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness
Right Hand Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness
Rear Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness
Parking Aid Camera Signal Filter
Front Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness – Bumper Section
Rear Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness – Liftgate Section
Side Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness – Front Door Section
Suspension Air Supply Unit Wiring Harness
419: Electronic Feature Group
419-01A: Anti-Theft - Active
Specification
Anti-Theft - Active
Hood Switch (86.77.20)
Antenna (86.77.31)
Anti-Theft Alarm Horn with Integral Battery
419-01B: Anti-Theft - Passive
Specification
Anti-Theft - Passive
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Module (86.77.07)
419-02: Remote Convenience
Universal Transmitter
Universal Transmitter
419-07: Navigation System
Navigation System
Navigation System Compact Disc (CD) Unit (86.53.01)
Navigation System Display Module
Navigation System Traffic Amplifier (86.53.23)
Navigation System Antenna (86.53.61)
Navigation System Module
419-08: Cellular Phone
Specification
Cellular Phone
Cellular Phone Antenna (86.53.11) - Vehicles With: Metal Roof Panel
Cellular Phone Antenna (86.53.11) - Vehicles With: Glass Roof Panel
Microphone
Cellular Phone
Transceiver Module
419-10: Multifunction Electronic Modules
Driver Door Module (DDM)
Driver Seat Module (DSM)
Driver Seat Module (DSM)
419-12: Winch
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Winch
Winch
Winch Motor
5: Body and Paint
501: Body and Paint
501-02: Front End Body Panels
Specification
Fender (76.10.24)
Fender Splash Shield (76.10.48)
Engine Undershield (76.10.50)
501-03: Body Closures
Specification
Body Closures
General Procedures
Liftgate Alignment (76.28.31)
Fuel Filler Door Assembly (19.55.04)
Fuel Filler Interlock Catch (19.55.17)
Liftgate (76.28.29)
501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation
Specification
Engine Cover (12.30.50) - V6 4.0L Petrol
Engine Cover (12.30.50) - V8 5.0L Petrol
Engine Cover (12.30.50) - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Rear Quarter Trim Panel (76.13.12)
A-Pillar Trim Panel (76.13.26)
Cowl Side Trim Panel (76.13.27)
B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (76.13.28)
B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (76.13.29)
D-Pillar Trim Panel (76.13.30)
C-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (76.13.34) (76.13.37)
C-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (76.13.35)
Front Door Trim Panel (76.34.01)
Rear Door Trim Panel (76.34.04)
Liftgate Trim Panel (76.34.11)
Tailgate Trim Panel (76.49.23)
Scuff Plate Trim Panel (76.49.54)
Headliner (76.64.15)
Loadspace Trim Panel RH (76.19.22)
Front Door Trim Veneer
Rear Door Trim Veneer
501-08: Exterior Trim and Ornamentation
A-Pillar Moulding LH
Front Fender Moulding (76.43.54)
Rear Quarter Panel Moulding (76.43.55)
Radiator Grille (76.55.03)
Rear Quarter Window Moulding
Door Window Moulding
501-09: Rear View Mirrors
Specification
Rear View Mirrors
Interior Mirror (76.10.51)
Exterior Mirror Control Switch
Exterior Mirror (76.11.10) - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera
Exterior Mirror (76.11.10) - Vehicles Without: Parking Aid Camera
Exterior Mirror Glass (76.11.08)
Exterior Mirror Cover
Exterior Mirror Motor (76.11.09)
501-10: Seating
Specification
Seats
Seats
Front Seat Cushion (78.10.12/99)
Front Seat (78.10.44/99)
Third Row Seat (78.10.39)
Rear Seat (78.10.70/78.10.71) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Rear Seat (78.10.70/78.10.71) - Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Front Seat Cushion Cover (78.30.01)
Front Seat Cushion Heater Mat (78.30.23)
Third Row Seat Cushion Cover (78.40.06)
Third Row Seat Cushion (78.40.52)
Rear Seat Cushion Cover (78.40.70) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Rear Seat Cushion Cover (78.40.70) - Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Front Seat Track Motor (78.70.25)
Front Seat Height Adjustment Motor (78.70.27)
Front Seat Tilt Motor (78.70.29)
Front Seat Recliner Motor (78.70.34)
Front Seat Control Switch (78.70.89)
Front Seat Backrest Cover (78.90.08)
Third Row Seat Backrest Cover (78.90.17)
Front Seat Backrest Heater Mat (78.90.36)
Rear Seat Backrest Cover (78.90.72) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Rear Seat Backrest Cover (78.90.72) - Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Seat Track - Vehicles Without: Power Seats
Seat Track - Vehicles With: Power Seats
Front Seat Track
Front Seat Manual Height Adjustment Lever
501-11: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Specification
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Fixed Window Glass
General Procedures
Door Window Motor Initialization
Front Door Window Glass
Rear Door Window Glass (76.31.02)
Liftgate Window Glass (76.31.22)
Rear Door Fixed Window Glass (76.31.31)
Windshield Glass (76.81.01)
Glass Roof Panel (76.81.05)
Rear Quarter Window Glass (76.81.20)
Front Door Window Regulator and Motor
Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor (86.25.05)
Front Door Window Control Switch
Rear Door Window Control Switch
501-12: Instrument Panel and Console
Specification
Instrument Panel
Floor Console
Overhead Console
Floor Console (76.25.01)
Floor Console Upper Section
Instrument Panel Upper Section (76.46.04)
Instrument Panel (76.46.23/99)
Instrument Panel Driver Side Reinforcement
Instrument Panel Passenger Side Reinforcement (76.46.32)
Instrument Panel Center Reinforcement
Glove Compartment (76.52.03)
Instrument Panel Console Switch Assembly
Cool Box
Overhead Console (76.25.02)
501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
Specification
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
General Procedures
Tailgate Striker Adjustment (76.28.03)
Liftgate Striker Adjustment (76.37.28)
Ignition Lock Cylinder (57.40.28)
Hood Latch Release Handle (76.16.30)
Front Door Latch (76.37.12)
Rear Door Latch (76.37.13)
Liftgate Latch (76.37.19)
Door Lock Cylinder (76.37.39)
Tailgate Latch (76.37.83)
Exterior Front Door Handle (76.58.07)
Exterior Rear Door Handle (76.58.02)
Liftgate Latch Actuator (86.26.27)
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module
501-16: Wipers and Washers
Specification
Wipers and Washers
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Washer Reservoir (84.10.03)
Windshield Washer Pump (84.10.21)
Rain Sensor (84.12.11)
Front Wiper Pivot Arm (84.15.02)
Windshield Wiper Motor (84.15.12)
Headlamp Washer Jet (84.20.08)
Headlamp Washer Pump (84.20.21)
Rear Wiper Pivot Arm (84.35.01)
Rear Window Wiper Motor (84.35.12)
501-17: Roof Opening Panel
Specification
Roof Opening Panel
Roof Opening Panel
General Procedures
Roof Opening Panel Blind Rewind Procedure
Roof Opening Panel Alignment (76.84.82)
Power Roof Opening Panel Initialization
Lifter Arms
Roof Opening Panel (76.84.01)
Roof Opening Panel Glass (76.84.03)
Roof Opening Panel Motor (76.84.07)
Roof Opening Panel Module (76.84.46)
Roof Opening Panel Blind
Driver Side Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose
Passenger Side Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose
501-19: Bumpers
Specification
Front Bumper
Front Bumper Cover
Front Bumper Lower Cover
Rear Bumper Cover (76.22.74)
501-20A: Safety Belt System
Specification
Safety Belt System
Front Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.13)
Second Row Center Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.20) - Vehicles With:
60/40 Split Seat
Second Row Center Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.20) - Vehicles With:
40/20/40 Split Seat
Second Row Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.23)
Third Row Safety Belt Retractor (76.73.28)
Front Safety Belt Buckle (76.73.30)
Rear Safety Belt Buckle (76.73.30) - Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Rear Safety Belt Buckle LH (76.73.60) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Rear Safety Belt Buckle RH (76.73.62) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Rear Center Safety Belt Buckle (76.73.64) - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split
Seat
501-20B: Supplemental Restraint System
Specification
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Driver Air Bag Module (76.74.01)
Passenger Air Bag Module (76.74.02)
Rear Side Air Curtain Module (76.74.04)
Front Impact Severity Sensor (76.74.08)
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Switch (76.74.19)
Clockspring (76.74.20)
B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (76.74.23)
C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (76.74.24)
Front Door Side Impact Sensor (76.74.25)
Side Air Bag Module (76.74.30)
Side Air Curtain Module (76.74.40)
Restraints Control Module (RCM) (76.74.68)
Occupant Classification Sensor (76.74.76)
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Position Sensor
501-25A: Body Repairs - General Information
Body Repairs
501-25B: Body Repairs - Corrosion Protection
Corrosion Protection
501-25C: Body Repairs - Water Leaks
Water Leaks
501-26: Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks
Body and Frame
501-27: Front End Sheet Metal Repairs
Specification
Front End Sheet Metal
Hood Latch Panel (76.16.22)
Front Crossmember (77.20.25)
Front Side Member (77.30.22/23)
Front Side Member Section (77.30.20/21)
Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement
Fender Apron Panel
Fender Apron Panel Section
Front Wheelhouse
Front Wheelhouse Reinforcement
Front Wheelhouse Section
Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement Front Section
Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement Rear Section
501-28: Roof Sheet Metal Repairs
Roof
Roof Panel
501-29: Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs
Specification
Side Panel Sheet Metal
Rocker Panel (77.40.60)
A-Pillar Outer Panel
Side Panel (77.40.01)
B-Pillar Outer Panel
A-Pillar Reinforcement
B-Pillar Reinforcement
Side Panel Front Section
501-30: Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs
Specification
Rear End Sheet Metal
Quarter Panel (77.40.09)
Inner Quarter Panel (77.40.37)
Water Drain Panel
Rear Wheelhouse Outer (77.40.36)
Rear Lamp Mounting Panel (77.80.25)
Back Panel (77.80.20)
Rear Floor Panel Section (77.70.02)
Rear Crossmember
Rear Side Member
Quarter/Side Panel Rear Section LH
Rear Side Member Section (77.70.07)
D-Pillar Inner Lower Panel
D-Pillar Closing Panel
502: Frame and Mounting
502-02: Full Frame and Body Mounting
Specification
General Procedures
Tow Bar Mounting Check
Transmission Support Crossmember (76.10.09 or 76.10.92) - TDV6 2.7L
Diesel/V6 4.0L Petrol
Transmission Support Crossmember (76.10.09 or 76.10.92) - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel
Transmission Support Crossmember (76.10.09 or 76.10.92) - V8 5.0L
Petrol
Rear Crossmember
Body - V6 4.0L Petrol/V8 5.0L Petrol
Body - TDV6 2.7L Diesel/TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Published: 11-May-2011
Climate Control System - General Information -
General Specification
Type Description
Heating, ventilation and air Centrally mounted with offset (handed) blower unit
conditioning unit: Dual zone with side to side temperature control
Located behind right hand rear quarter panel. Includes heater,
Front unit - Manual evaporator, in-line TVX, blower motor and drain tube. Air intake is 100%
version recirculation.
Front unit Automatic
Temperature Control
(ATC) version
Rear unit
Compressor Clutchless, belt driven from engine with electronically controlled outputs.
Published: 27-Feb-2014
Climate Control System - General Information - Climate Control
System
Principle of Operation
For a detailed description of the Climate Control System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
in the workshop manual. REFER to:
Air Distribution and Filtering (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Description and Operation),
Heating and Ventilation (412-02A Heating and Ventilation, Description and Operation),
Air Conditioning (412-03A Air Conditioning - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and Operation),
Auxiliary Climate Control (412-03E Auxiliary Climate Control, Description and Operation).
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel familiar with both vehicle system and the charging
and testing equipment. All operations must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open flame and
heat sources.
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control
modules does not guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being
tested and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
1. Verify the customer concern
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity

Visual Inspection
Mechanical Electrical
Coolant level Fuse(s)
Hose(s) Wiring harness
Coolant pump Electrical connectors
Control flap(s) Blower
Duct(s) Air conditioning compressor
Vent(s) Electric cooling fan
Cabin air filter Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATCM)
Drive belt Refrigerant pressure sensor
Air conditioning compressor
Thermostatic expansion valve
Evaporator
Receiver drier
Air conditioning condenser
Refrigerant pipes
Auxiliary drive belt
Fuel fired booster heater
Fuel fired booster heater fuel pump
Fuel fired booster heater fuel pipes
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before
proceeding to the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively
check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for
the specific customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required
Distribution motor self-test
The motor and flap operation can be checked using the on-board distribution motor self-test function.
The self-test can be initiated by pressing and holding the ECON and RECIRC buttons while turning the ignition
switch to the ON position.
The control module will then compare the current motor position with the values stored in the module and will
indicate an error by flashing the ECON LED (light emitting diode).
If there are no errors, the LED will go out and the system will function normally.
To confirm that there are no errors, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then back to the ON position.
Observe the operation of the programmed defrost LED.

If there are errors present, the programmed defrost LED will flash and the system will attempt to calibrate
itself.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Causes Action

No climate The system Check the motors and levers at the heating and ventilation assembly for
control function, is in damage/foreign objects jamming the movement of the flaps. For
flashing LED at calibration additional information on the self-calibration process, see the distribution
start-up mode motor self-test above
Air conditioning Refrigerant GO to Pinpoint Test A.

performance poor undercharged
or inoperative Refrigerant
overcharged
Thermostatic
expansion
valve faulty
Receiver
drier
restricted
Water in
refrigerant
Air conditioning Electric Test the operation of the electric cooling fan
operates briefly cooling fan Check the air conditioning condenser for external obstructions
and then inoperative
switches off Air
conditioning
condenser
airflow
obstructed
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : PRELIMINARY TESTS

TEST CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
A1: PRELIMINARY TEST 1
NOTES:
This test is performed with the engine not running.
Normal pressure for a correctly charged and switched off system is approximately 4.5 bar on both gauges
(system equalised).
1 Close the valves on the air conditioning station
2 Connect the air conditioning station to the vehicle charging ports
3 Check the pressure values
Is a pressure registered on both gauges?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to Pinpoint Test D.
PINPOINT TEST B : FUNCTIONALITY TESTS

B1: FUNCTIONALITY TEST 1
NOTES:
Normal pressures for a correctly charged and working system are 1.0 bar to 2.0 bar (low) and 11.0 bar to
15.0 bar (high).
Normal temperature (measured at the center air vent) for a correctly charged and working system is -7°C
to -2°C when ambient temperature is 20°C.
1 Close the valves on the air conditioning station
2 Connect the air conditioning station to the vehicle charging ports
3 Open all doors and the tailgate
4 Start the engine
5 Set the temperature to the lowest setting (all zones)
6 Set the fan speed to maximum
7 Set the recirculate switch to off
8 Insert a temperature probe into the centre air vent
9 Raise engine speed to 1500rpm and maintain this speed for 5 minutes
10 Check the temperature value
Are the pressure readings stable and in the green 'normal' region of the gauge?
Yes
Air conditioning system operating normally
No
Air conditioning system fault present. GO to Pinpoint Test C.
PINPOINT TEST C : GAUGE TESTS

TEST DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
CONDITIONS
C1: GAUGE TEST 1
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.
Did the gauges register a change in pressure when the air conditioning was switched on?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the Automatic Temperature
Control Module (ATCM) for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
C2: GAUGE TEST 2
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.
Are the pressure gauge readings fluctuating?
Yes
Moisture present in the air conditioning system. Recover the refrigerant. Install a new
receiver drier. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and evacuate and
recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to C3.
C3: GAUGE TEST 3
NOTES:
This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.
15.0 bar (high).
Are the pressure gauge readings too low?
Yes
GO to C4.
No
GO to C6.
C4: GAUGE TEST 4
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine not running.

1 Stop the engine
2 Using the manufacturer approved refrigerant leak detector, check for a refrigerant leak
Was a refrigerant leak detected?
Yes
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant. Repair as
necessary. Evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to C5.
C5: GAUGE TEST 5

1 Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant
Was the weight of the recovered refrigerant less than specified for the air conditioning system?
Yes
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and evacuate and recharge the air
conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new receiver drier. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
C6: GAUGE TEST 6
NOTES:
This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.
15.0 bar (high).
Are the pressure gauge readings too high?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
Test inconclusive. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
C7: GAUGE TEST 7

1 Stop the engine
2 Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant
Was the weight of the recovered refrigerant more than specified for the air conditioning system?
Yes
No
Install a new thermal expansion valve. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
and evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
PINPOINT TEST D : NITROGEN LEAK TESTS

CONDITIONS
D1: NITROGEN LEAK TEST
CAUTION: When charging the system with nitrogen, the pressure should be regulated to 7.0 bar.

1 Charge the air conditioning system with nitrogen
2 Isolate the nitrogen supply
3 Monitor the pressure gauge and check for leaks
Has the source of the leak been identified?
Yes
Rectify the leak as necessary. Install a new receiver drier. Refer to the relevant section of
the workshop manual and evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint
Test B.
No
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-
00. REFER to: (100-00 General Information)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Climate Control Module (HVAC) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Fuel Fired Booster Heater Module (AHCM) (Description and
Operation).
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
General Procedures
WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel familliar with both vehicle system and the charging
and testing equipment. All operations must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open flame and
heat sources.
NOTE: The receiver drier need only be changed under the following circumstances: There is dirt in the
refrigerant circuit (eg. compressor seizure); the system is leaking and refrigerant has been lost to atmosphere;
refrigerant circuit has been open more than 24 hours due to repair.
1. Refrigerant recovery: Remove the dust

covers from the high and low pressure
connections.
2. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate

connections.
3. Open the valves on the connections.
4. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
5. Turn the process switch to the correct position.
6. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.
7. WARNING: Refrigerant must always be recycled before

re-use to ensure that the purity of the refrigerants high
enough for safe use in the air conditioning system.
Recycling should always be carried out with equipment
which is design certified by Underwriter Laboratory Inc. for
compliance with SEA J1991. Other equipment may not
recycle refrigerant to the required level of purity. R143a
Refrigerant Recover Recycling Recharging station must not
be used with any other type of refrigerant. Refrigerant
R134a from domestic and commercial sources must not be
used in motor vehicles air conditioning systems.
Allow the system to recover the refrigerant from the

system.
8. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.
9. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
10. Close the valves on the connections.
11. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.
12. Install the dust covers to the connectors.
13. Open the tap at the rear of the station to drain the
refrigerant oil.
14. Measure and record the quantity of refrigerant oil recovered

from the system.
15. Close the tap at the rear of the station.
16. Evacuation: Remove the dust covers from the high and low
pressure connections.
17. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate
connections.
18. Open the valves on the connections.
19. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
20. Turn the process switch to the correct position.
21. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.
22. Allow the station to evacuate the A/C system.
23. CAUTION: The system must be evacuated immediatley

before recharging commences. Delay between evacuation
and recharging is not permitted
Recharging: Close the valves on the refrigerant station.
24. Close the valve on the oil charger.
25. Disconnect the yellow line from the refrigerant station.
26. Remove the cover from the oil charger.
27. Pour the correct quantity of refrigerant oil into the oil
charger.
28. Install the cover to the oil charger.
29. Connect the yellow line to the refrigerant station.
30. Open the valve on the oil charger.
31. Move the pointer on the refrigerant gauge to mark the

position of the refrigerant drop.
32. Slowly open the correct valve on the refrigerant to allow the
vacuum to pull the refrigerant into the system.
33. Close the valve on the refrigerant station when the correct
amount of refrigerant has been drawn into the air
conditioning system.
34. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
35. Close the valves on the connections.
36. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.

Published: 15-Nov-2013
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor Commissioning
General Procedures
Activation
CAUTION: Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the component.
1. Set the ignition to the on position, make sure the air

conditioning (A/C) is in the off position.
2. Start the engine and allow to run for a minimum of 5

minutes.
3. Set the heater controls to 22°C, with the fan speed set to
75%.
4. Switch on the A/C system.
5. Open all air vents in the dashboard.
6. Run the A/C system for a minimum of 5 minutes, while the

engine is still at idle speed.
7. Once this is achieved the compressor is stabilized, with the

oil being distributed evenly throughout the system.
This section contains no data
Air Distribution and Filtering - Air Distribution and Filtering
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
NOTE: LHD installation shown, RHD similar
Item Part Number Description

1 - Side window ducts
2 - Windshield duct
3 - Windshield vent
4 - Instrument panel register duct
5 - Side window vent
6 - Instrument panel register
7 - Cabin air filter
8 - Front passenger footwell duct
9 - Second row footwell duct
10 - Second row register
11 - Second row register duct
12 - Driver lap register
13 - Driver footwell duct
14 - Driver lap register duct
15 - Heater outlet manifold
16 - Windshield duct
GENERAL
The air distribution and filtering system controls the distribution and quality of air supplied to the vehicle interior. The
system consists of:
Air ducts.
Air registers and vents.
A cabin air filter.
AIR DUCTS
The air ducts distribute the air from the heater to the various registers and air vents around the vehicle interior. The
air ducts for the instrument panel registers, the driver lap register and the second row registers are connected to the
heater outlet manifold on top of the heater. The air ducts for the front and second row footwells are connected direct
to outlet ports on the heater. The air ducts for the windshield vents and the side window vents form part of the
structure of the instrument panel.
AIR REGISTERS AND VENTS
The air registers allow occupants to control the flow and direction of air from the air ducts. The driver lap register
has moveable vanes to regulate the flow and direction of the air. The instrument panel and second row registers
each have a thumbwheel to regulate flow, and moveable vanes to control direction.
The air vents are fixed outlets either integrated into the end of the air duct or installed in the trim panel connected to
the air duct.
CABIN AIR FILTER
The cabin air filter is installed in the air inlet duct and is either a pollen filter or a pollen and odor filter. The pollen
filter removes particulates, and the pollen and odor filter removes particulates and unpleasant odors, from the fresh
and recirculated air entering the blower.
Air Distribution and Filtering - Driver Side Register Trim Panel
Removal
1. Remove the driver side register trim panel.
Release the 2 clips.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the

component is removed for access only.
Remove the register.

3. Remove the headlamp switch.

Remove the 4 Torx screws.
Installation
1. Install the headlamp switch.
Tighten the Torx screws.
2. Install the register.

Secure with the clips.
3. Install the driver side register trim panel.

Connect the electrical connector.
Air Distribution and Filtering - Passenger Side Register Trim Panel
Removal
1. Remove the passenger side register trim panel.

Remove the register.

3. Remove the cup holder.

Installation
1. Install the cup holder.
2. Install the register.

3. Install the passenger side register trim panel.

Air Distribution and Filtering - Pollen Filter
Removal
1. Open the glove compartment to the service
condition.
Release the glove compartment latch
stops.
2. Remove the pollen filter housing cover.
3. Remove the pollen filter.
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Clean the component mating faces.
Air Distribution and Filtering - Plenum Chamber
Removal
1. Remove the A-pillar mouldings.
For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Moulding LH
(501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
2. Remove the windshield wiper arms.

For additional information, refer to: Front Wiper Pivot Arm
(501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
3. Release the hood seal from the plenum

chamber.
4. Remove the plenum chamber panel.


Remove the clips from the plenum chamber

panel.
Installation
Heating and Ventilation - Heating and Ventilation
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) installation shown, LHD (left-hand drive) similar

1 - Blower relay
2 - Blower control module
3 - Blower
4 - Air inlet duct
5 - Heater
6 - Ventilation outlets
GENERAL
The heating and ventilation system controls the temperature and flow of air supplied to the vehicle interior. The
system consists of:
An air inlet duct.

A blower.
A blower control module.
A blower relay.
A heater.
Two ventilation outlets.
Fresh or recirculated air flows into the heater assembly from the inlet duct. The blower, and ram effect when the
vehicle is moving, forces the air through the heater assembly. Air from the cabin exhausts through the ventilation
outlets.
AIR INLET DUCT
NOTE: RHD version shown, LHD mirror image

1 - Recirculation door motor
2 - Recirculation door arm
3 - Recirculation motor arm
4 - Evaporator drain tube
5 - Blower
6 - Air inlet duct
7 - Recirculation air inlet
The air inlet duct is installed behind the instrument panel, on the front passenger side, and connected between the
plenum chamber below the windshield and the heater.
The plenum chamber is formed by the upper and lower cowl and a plenum molding. Grilles in the plenum molding
allow fresh air into the plenum chamber. From the plenum chamber, the air passes through a water separator and
into the fresh air inlet of the air inlet duct.
The air inlet duct incorporates a grille to provide the inlet for recirculated air from the vehicle interior. The air inlet
duct also accommodates:
The cabin air filter.

For additional information, refer to: Air Distribution and Filtering (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering,
Description and Operation).
The blower.
The blower control module.
The outlet from the air inlet duct forms the rear wall of the heater, enclosing the evaporator and incorporating the
two evaporator drain outlets. Drain tubes connect the evaporator drain outlets to the transmission tunnel, to direct
the water that condenses on the evaporator overboard.
A recirculation door is installed between the fresh and recirculated air inlets, to control the source of incoming air. A
lever on the recirculation door is driven by the recirculation door motor. Operation of the recirculation door motor is
automatically controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module and manually controlled by a switch on
the ATC module control panel.
For additional information, refer to: Control Components (412-04 Control Components, Description and Operation).
Fresh or recirculated air enters the air inlet duct and passes through the cabin air filter to the hub of the blower.
From the blower, the air flows to the outlet of the air inlet and into the heater. The blower, and ram effect from the
forward motion of the vehicle, forces the air through the air inlet duct.
Air Flow Through Air Inlet Duct

1 - Upper cowl
2 - Water separator
3 - Recirculation door
4 - Cabin air filter
5 - Blower
6 - Air inlet duct casing
7 - Lower cowl
8 - Plenum molding
BLOWER
The blower is installed in the air inlet duct, below the cabin air filter, and consists of an open hub, centrifugal fan
powered by an electric motor. Operation of the blower is controlled by the ATC module, using the blower relay in the
BJB (battery junction box) and the blower control module. The blower control module is installed in the air inlet duct
downstream of the blower, where any heat generated during operation is dissipated by the air flow. A wiring harness
on the air inlet duct connects the recirculation door motor, blower and blower control module to the vehicle wiring.
When the blower is required, the ATC module energizes the coil of the blower relay. The energized blower relay
supplies battery power to the blower motor, which is connected to ground through the blower control module. The
speed of the blower is controlled by the blower control module, the blower motor control module regulates the
voltage in response to the voltage signal from the linear ATC module. To change the blower motor voltage, ATC
module will change the working cycle linear voltage signal.
When the blower is in the automatic mode the ATC module determines the blower speed required from the comfort
algorithms. When the blower is in the manual mode, the ATC module operates the blower at one of seven fixed
speeds as selected on the control panel.
HEATER
NOTE: RHD unit shown, LHD units similar

1 - Coolant outlet pipe
2 - Coolant inlet pipe
3 - Windshield distribution door motor
4 - RH (right-hand) temperature blend motor
5 - Heater core
6 - Heater casing
7 - LH (left-hand) temperature blend motor (automatic system only)
8 - Evaporator
9 - Face and feet distribution door motor
The heater controls the temperature of the air supplied to the distribution ducts, as directed by the ATC module. The
heater is installed on the vehicle center-line, between the instrument panel and the engine bulkhead. The heater
consists of a casing, formed from a series of plastic molding, which contains an evaporator, heater core and control
doors. Internal passages integrated into the casing guide the air through the casing and separate it into two flows,
one for the LH outlets and one for the RH outlets.
When the A/C (air conditioning) system is operating, the evaporator cools the air entering the heater.
The heater core provides the heat source to warm the air being supplied to the distribution ducts. The heater core is
an aluminum two pass, fin and tube heat exchanger, installed across the width of the heater housing. Two aluminum
tubes attached to the heater core extend through the engine bulkhead to connect with the engine cooling system.
When the engine is running, coolant is constantly circulated through the heater matrix by the coolant pump. On
vehicles with a FFBH (fuel fired booster heater), when the FFBH is active the coolant flow is assisted by an electric
circulation pump.
For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Heater (412-02B Auxiliary Heating, Description and Operation).
Two temperature blend doors, one LH and one RH, regulate the flow of air through the heater core to control the
temperature of the air leaving the heater. On the automatic system, the two temperature blend doors operate
independently to allow different temperatures to be set for the LH and RH outlets. On the manual system, the
temperature blend doors are coupled together and produce a common temperature for the LH and RH outlets.
Air Flow Through Heater

1 - Windshield distribution door
2 - Face and feet distribution door
3 - Heater casing
4 - Front footwell outlet
5 - Rear footwell outlet
6 - Heater core
7 - Temperature blend door
8 - Air inlet duct casing
9 - Evaporator
Stepper Motors
On the automatic system, separate stepper motors operate the RH and the LH side temperature blend doors. On the
manual system, a single stepper motor operates both the RH and the LH temperature blend doors.
The distribution doors in the heater are also operated by stepper motors. One for the windshield distribution door and
one for the face and feet distribution door.
If a stepper motor is to be replaced, ensure it is replaced with the correct replacement part. Although similar in
appearance, each of the stepper motors is different and faults will occur if an incorrect motor is fitted.
Operation of the distribution and temperature blend door stepper motors is controlled by the ATC module, which is
connected to the stepper motors by a LIN (local interconnect network) bus.
All of the stepper motors contain microprocessors, which store positional information. To enable the ATC module to
move the stepper motors correctly it requires the following information:
The travel range, end to end, of each motor.

Where each motor is on its range.
Approximately 2 minutes after the vehicle ignition is switched off, the climate control system powers down. At this
point, the ATC module stores the position of each stepper motor in its memory. Each of the stepper motors also
stores its own position in its memory. When the ignition is next switched on, all of the stepper motors send positional
information to the ATC module via the LIN bus. This information is compared with the positional information stored
within the ATC module memory.
In normal circumstances, the information sent by the stepper motors matches that held in the ATC module memory.
In this instance, the ATC module recognizes there are no problems with the system and starts normally. If however,
there are differences, the ATC module carries out a calibration routine.
The stepper motor calibration routine will normally take about 15 seconds to complete, but can take up to
approximately 2 minutes in certain circumstances. During this period:
The programmed de-frost LED (light emitting diode) on the ATC module panel will flash.
All other climate control operations will be suspended.
The programmed de-frost LED will stop flashing after 2 minutes, regardless of whether the exercise was successful
or not so it is important to check that calibration has been carried out successfully. To do this:
1. Switch the ignition off.

2. Switch the ignition back on.
3. Check for a flashing programmed de-frost LED.
If calibration has been successful, the programmed de-frost LED will not flash and the system will return to normal
operation. If flashing does occur, more investigation will be required .
Automatic Calibration: The ATC module will automatically initiate a calibration routine every 175 hours of vehicle
life. This occurs approximately 1 minute after the ignition has been switched off once 175 hours is reached. In this
instance, the programmed de-frost LED will not blink.
Forced Calibration: The ATC module can be manually forced to carry out a calibration routine on the stepper
motors. This can be carried out by holding down the ECON and recirculation buttons on the ATC module panel while
simultaneously switching the ignition on. The ATC module will now carry out a calibration routine on the stepper
motors, but will flash the ECON LED rather than the programmed de-frost LED.
Stepper Motor Diagnostics
Fault diagnosis on the heater stepper motors falls into two main groups:
Electrical fault: A DTC (diagnostic trouble code) will be raised and logged in the ATC module memory.
Mechanical fault: The programmed de-frost LED will blink to indicate the ATC module is attempting to carry
out a calibration routine.
A calibration routine will be initiated by the ATC module if any of the following occur:
One or more of the stepper motors is replaced.

The ATC module is replaced.
A foreign object enters the system and causes a stepper motor to stall.
Stepper motor related DTCs are stored in the ATC module memory and can be retrieved using T4.
For additional information, refer to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
Diagnosis and Testing).
VENTILATION OUTLETS
The ventilation outlets promote the free flow of air through the passenger compartment. The outlets are installed in
the LH and RH rear quarter body panels, behind the tail lamps.
Each ventilation outlet consists of a grille covered by soft rubber flaps and is effectively a non-return valve. The flaps
open and close automatically depending on the differential between cabin and outside air pressures.
Heating and Ventilation - Heating and Ventilation
Principles of Operation
For a detailed description of the heating and ventilation system and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Heating and Ventilation (412-02A Heating and
Ventilation, Description and Operation).
modules does not guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being
checked and/or the donor vehicle.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.

Visual Inspection
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) belt Fuses
Refrigerant Electrical harnesses
Heater control flaps Harness connectors
Ducting Blower motor
Cabin air filter Cooling fan
Coolant level Actuators
Compressor
Cooling fan
proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC
Index.
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Climate Control Module (HVAC) (100-00 General
Information, Description and Operation).
Heating and Ventilation - Blower Motor
Removal
1. Remove the glove compartment.
For additional information, refer to: Glove Compartment
(501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and
Installation).
2. Remove the passenger side closing trim panel.

Release the clip.
Remove the 2 screws.
3. Position the footwell duct aside for access.

Release the clip.
4. Remove the blower motor.

Installation
1. CAUTION: Fixings must be started by hand to avoid

damaging threads.
Install the blower motor.

Tighten the screws.
2. Secure the footwell duct.

Install the clip.
3. Install the closing trim panel.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
4. Install the glove compartment.

Installation).
Heating and Ventilation - Heater Core LHD AWD
Removal
1. Drain the cooling system.
For additional information, refer to: Cooling System Partial
Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03D Engine Cooling - V8
5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
2. Remove the instrument panel passenger side reinforcement.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel

Passenger Side Reinforcement (501-12 Instrument Panel
and Console, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the heater core upper and lower pipes.

Position a container to collect the fluid.
Loosen the 4 screws and remove the
clips.
Remove and discard the 4 O-ring seals.
4. Remove the heater core.
Installation
1. Install the heater core.
2. Install the heater core upper and lower pipes.

Clean the components.
Install the new O-ring seals.
Install the clips and tighten the screws.
Remove the container.
3. Install the instrument panel passenger side reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel
Passenger Side Reinforcement (501-12 Instrument Panel
and Console, Removal and Installation).
4. Refill the cooling system.

Heating and Ventilation - Heater Core RHD AWD
Removal
2. Remove the instrument panel driver side reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Driver
Side Reinforcement (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,
Removal and Installation).
3. NOTE: LHD illustration shown, RHD is

similar.
Remove the driver side footwell duct.

4. Remove the heater core upper and lower pipes.

Loosen the 4 screws and remove the
clips.
5. Remove the heater core.
Installation
2. Install the heater core upper and lower pipes.

Install the clips and tighten the screws.
Remove the container.
3. Install the driver side footwell duct.
Tighten the screws.
4. Install the instrument panel driver side reinforcement.


Auxiliary Heating -
Torque Specifications
Description Nm lb-ft
Fuel fired booster heater exhaust bracket bolt 10 7
Fuel fired booster heater 10 7
Published: 04-Jul-2011
Auxiliary Heating - Auxiliary Heater
COMPONENT LOCATIONS

1 - FFBH (fuel fired booster heater) fuel line connection to fuel tank
2 - FFBH auxiliary fuel pump
3 - FFBH changeover valve
4 - FFBH
5 - FFBH receiver
INTRODUCTION
Auxiliary heating is provided by a FFBH (fuel fired booster heater), which boosts the temperature of the engine
coolant. Fuel for the FFBH is taken from the vehicle fuel tank, through a fuel line attached to the fuel pump module.
An auxiliary fuel pump supplies the fuel at low pressure to the FFBH. In the FFBH, the fuel is burned and the
resultant heat output is used to heat the engine coolant.
For remote operation, the system includes a FFBH receiver and a remote handset.
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP
The auxiliary fuel pump regulates the fuel supply to the FFBH. The pump is a self priming, solenoid operated plunger
pump, controlled by a pulse width modulation (PWM) signal from the control module in the FFBH. When the pump is
de-energized, it provides a positive shut-off of the fuel supply.
Sectioned View of Auxiliary Fuel Pump

1 - Fuel line connector
2 - Non return valve
3 - Solenoid coil
4 - Plunger
5 - Filter insert
6 - Fuel line connector
7 - O-ring seal
8 - Spring
9 - Piston
10 - Bush
The solenoid coil of the auxiliary fuel pump is installed around a housing which contains a plunger and piston. The
piston locates in a bush, and a spring is installed on the piston between the bush and the plunger. A filter insert and
a fuel line connector are installed in the inlet end of the housing. A non return valve and a fuel line connector are
installed in the fuel outlet end of the housing.
While the solenoid coil is de-energized, the spring holds the piston and plunger in the closed position at the inlet end
of the housing. An O-ring seal on the plunger provides a fuel tight seal between the plunger and the filter insert,
preventing any flow through the pump. When the solenoid coil is energized, the piston and plunger move towards the
outlet end of the housing, until the plunger contacts the bush; fuel is then drawn in through the inlet connection and
filter. The initial movement of the piston also closes transverse drillings in the bush and isolates the pumping
chamber at the outlet end of the housing. Subsequent movement of the piston then forces fuel from the pumping
chamber through the non return valve and into the line to the FFBH. When the solenoid de-energizes, the spring
moves the piston and plunger back towards the closed position. As the piston and plunger move towards the closed
position, fuel flows past the plunger and through the annular gaps and transverse holes in the bush to replenish the
pumping chamber.
FFBH (Fuel Fired Booster Heater)
FFBH (up to VIN: 581076)

1 - Electrical connectors
2 - Air inlet
3 - Exhaust pipe
4 - Coolant outlet connection
5 - Coolant inlet connection
6 - Exhaust muffler
7 - Fuel supply line
FFBH (VIN onwards: 581077)
1 - Air inlet pipe
2 - Electrical connectors
3 - Exhaust muffler
4 - Exhaust pipe
5 - Changeover valve (if fitted)
6 - Coolant outlet connection
7 - Coolant inlet connection
8 - Fuel supply line
9 - Coolant circulation pump
Sectioned View of FFBH (up to VIN: 581076)

1 - Combustion air fan
2 - Coolant outlet
3 - Coolant inlet
4 - Burner insert
5 - Heat exchanger
6 - Temperature sensor
7 - Exhaust outlet
8 - Fuel inlet
9 - Fuel evaporator
10 - Air inlet
Sectioned View of FFBH (VIN onwards: 581077)
1 - Combustion air fan
2 - Coolant inlet
3 - Coolant outlet
4 - Burner insert
5 - Coolant temperature sensors
6 - Heat exchanger
7 - Exhaust outlet
8 - Fuel inlet
9 - Control unit
10 - Air inlet
11 - Fuel evaporator
12 - Glow plug / flame sensor
Coolant Circulation Pump
The coolant circulation pump is installed at the coolant inlet to the FFBH to assist the coolant flow through the FFBH
and the vehicle heater core. The pump runs continuously while the FFBH is in standby or active operating modes.
While the FFBH is inactive, coolant flow is reliant on the engine coolant pump. Operation of the FFBH coolant
circulation pump is controlled by a power feed direct from the FFBH control module.
Combustion Air Fan
The combustion air fan regulates the flow of air into the FFBH to support combustion of the fuel supplied by the
auxiliary fuel pump and to purge and cool the FFBH after operation.
Burner Housing
The burner housing contains the burner insert and also incorporates connections for the exhaust pipe, the coolant
inlet from the coolant circulation pump and the coolant outlet to the vehicle heater core.
The burner insert incorporates the fuel combustion chamber, an evaporator and a glow pin and flame sensor. Fuel
from the auxiliary fuel pump is supplied to an evaporator mat, where it evaporates and enters the combustion
chamber to mix with air from the combustion air fan. The glow pin/flame sensor provides the ignition source of the
fuel: air mixture and, once combustion is established, monitors the flame.
Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger transfers heat generated by combustion to the coolant. Two sensors are installed in the heat
exchanger casing to provide the control module with inputs of coolant temperature. The control module uses the
temperature inputs to control system operation.
Air Inlet Pipe
The air inlet pipe delivers air to the combustion chamber for fuel ignition.
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
The exhaust pipe and muffler directs exhaust combustion gases to atmosphere. Exhaust vapor may be visible when
the FFBH is running, depending on atmospheric conditions.
Control Module
The control module controls and monitors operation of the FFBH system. An internal flow of air from the combustion
air fan ventilates the control module to prevent it overheating.
The control module communicates with other systems on the vehicle over the medium speed CAN (controller area
network) bus.
FFBH Control Module Harness Connector C0925 (up to VIN: 581076)
FFBH Control Module Harness Connector C0925 Pin Details (up to VIN: 581076)
Pin No. Description Input/Output
1 Not used -
2 Not used -
3 Not used -
4 Medium speed controller area network (CAN) bus low Input/Output
5 Auxiliary fuel pump power feed Output
6 Not used -
7 Medium speed CAN bus high Input/Output
8 Not used -
FFBH Control Module Harness Connector C0925 (VIN onwards: 581077)
FFBH Control Module Harness Connector C0925 Pin Details (VIN onwards: 581077)
1 Not used -
2 WBUS diagnostic (Telestart signal) Input/Output
3 Not used -
4 Medium speed CAN bus low Input/Output
5 Auxiliary fuel pump power feed Output
6 Not used -
7 Medium speed CAN bus high Input/Output
8 Not used -
FFBH Control Module Harness Connector C0926
FFBH Control Module Harness Connector C0926 Pin Details

1 Permanent battery power supply Input
2 Ground Output
Changeover Valve
The changeover valve is a normally open solenoid valve installed between the supply and return sides of the heater
coolant circuit. When de-energized, the changeover valve connects the heater coolant circuit to the engine coolant
circuit. When energized, the changeover valve isolates the heater coolant circuit from the engine coolant circuit.
The changeover valve is controlled by a power feed from the ATC (automatic temperature control) module.
FFBH Receiver
The FFBH receiver translates the FFBH request radio signals, relayed from the TV (television) antenna amplifier, into a
voltage output to the FFBH unit. When a request for parked heating is received, the FFBH receiver outputs a battery
power feed to the FFBH unit. When a request to switch off parked heating is received, the FFBH receiver disconnects
the power feed.
The FFBH receiver has a permanent power feed from the BJB (battery junction box) and is connected to the TV
antenna amplifier by a coaxial cable.
FFBH Remote Handset
Item Description
1 On button
2 Off button
3 LED (light emitting diode)
4 Antenna
The FFBH remote handset allows parked heating to be remotely controlled up to a minimum of 100 m (328 ft) from
the vehicle. 'On' and 'off' buttons activate and de-activate parked heating.
An LED:
Flashes green when parked heating is active.

Flashes red after a start selection, if communication has not been established with the vehicle.
Flashes orange when the remote handset battery needs replacing.
The FFBH remote handset is powered by a 3.3 V CR1/3N battery located under a cover on the rear of the handset.
Remote Handset Pairing:
Each remote handset must be 'paired' to the receiver to enable communications. Each handset has a unique
identification number which is stored by the receiver. The receiver can store up 3 handset identification numbers. If a
fourth handset is paired to the receiver, the receiver will replace the first paired handset number with that for the
fourth handset in the receiver memory. Subsequently, the first paired handset will no longer be paired and will not be
recognized by the receiver.
The following procedure details the pairing process:
NOTE: The pairing process relies on the FFBH receiver having the power supply removed and then the power
supply re-instated. The fuse method is the easiest method but it can also be achieved by battery disconnection or
removal of the harness connector from the receiver unit.
Remove mini-fuse F2 5A (telestart fuse) from the BJB

Wait for a minimum of 5 seconds
Replace fuse to position F2 5A in the BJB
Within 5 seconds of replacing the fuse (and restoring the receiver power supply), press and hold the remote
handset OFF button
Confirmation of successful pairing is displayed by the remote handset LED illuminating in a red color for 2
seconds.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired connections; D = High speed CAN bus; F = RF transmission; N = Medium speed CAN
bus; P = MOST bus
1 - FFBH remote handset
2 - TV antenna
3 - TV tuner module
4 - FFBH receiver
5 - FFBH
6 - CJB (central junction box)
7 - FFBH coolant circulation pump
8 - Changeover valve (if fitted)
9 - FFBH fuel pump
10 - Touch screen display
11 - ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor
12 - Ambient air temperature sensor
13 - ECM (engine control module)
14 - IAM (integrated audio module)
15 - ATC module
16 - Instrument cluster
17 - Integrated control panel
18 - BJB
19 - Battery
OPERATION
The FFBH system operates in two modes:
Provides additional heating by boosting heater performance while the engine is running.
If fitted; parked heating heats the passenger compartment or engine while the vehicle is parked with the
engine off.
The ATC module disables FFBH operation if battery voltage is too low, as determined from an ambient air
temperature, dependent voltage-map. Where fitted, the battery monitoring system can also disable FFBH operation
based on the battery charge state with the engine off.
Parked Heating/Ventilation
Parked heating works in conjunction with parked ventilation. When parked heating/ventilation is selected, the vehicle
interior is either heated by parked heating or cooled by parked ventilation, depending on the ambient temperature.
Parked heating occurs if the ambient temperature is less than 16 °C (61 °F); parked ventilation occurs if the ambient
temperature is 16 °C (61 °F) or more.
Parked heating/ventilation is controlled by direct selection on the (TSD) Touch Screen Display. This is achieved by
using the TSD to program one or two 'on/off' cycle start-times per day, and one 'on/off' cycle start-time further in
the future.
The direct selection and programmed time modes of operation are selected when the engine is stopped and the
smart key is in the vehicle. The key can then be removed and the vehicle locked. Any timed event will automatically
run without the key inside the vehicle.
In all operating modes, to prevent excessive drain on the battery, parked heating/ventilation is automatically de-
activated after:
20 minutes in moderate climate conditions, and

after 30 minutes in climates where the ambient temperature regularly falls below minus 25 °C (minus 13 °F).
Parked ventilation is automatically de-activated when the ignition is switched on.
When programmed start times for parked heating/ventilation are entered on the TSD, the times are stored in the
CJB.
If the engine is started while parked heating is on and:
the engine coolant temperature is equal to or more than the heater coolant temperature, parked heating is
switched off.
the engine coolant temperature is less than the heater coolant temperature, parked heating remains on until
the engine coolant temperature reaches the heater coolant temperature. The changeover valve also remains
closed until the engine coolant temperature reaches the heater coolant temperature.
Parked heating/ventilation can also be operated by using the FFBH remote handset.
Programmed Parked Heating/Ventilation
At a programmed parked heating/ventilation start time, the EJB (engine junction box) sends a start signal to the ATC
module on the medium speed CAN.
On receipt of the message:
If the ambient temperature is less than 16 °C (61 °F) and more than -20 °C (-4 °F), the ATC module initiates
parked heating and:
- Energizes the changeover valve.
- Sends a CAN bus message to activate the FFBH.
- Operates the blower at 47% of the maximum speed.
- Operates the distribution doors in the heater assembly to direct the air to the footwells for
approximately 30 seconds, then to either only the windscreen, or to both the footwells and the
windscreen, depending on the ambient air temperature.
- Flashes the auto blower LED at 2 Hz.
- If the ambient temperature is -20 °C (-4 °F) or below, the ATC module sends a CAN bus message to
activate the FFBH, but leaves the changeover valve de-energized and does not operate the blower or
distribution doors. Heated coolant is circulated around the engine and heater core(s) to heat the engine
and improve engine starting.
- Once the FFBH coolant temperature is above a suitable threshold the cabin blower is switched on and
cabin heating commenced.
If the ambient temperature is 16 °C (61 °F) or more, the ATC module initiates parked ventilation and:
- Operates the blower at 47% of maximum speed.
- Operates the distribution doors in the heater assembly to direct the air to the face level outlets.
- Flashes the A/C (air conditioning) distribution LED at 2 Hz.
After 20 minutes in moderate climate conditions and after 30 minutes in climates where the ambient temperature
regularly falls below minus 25 °C (minus 13 °F), the ATC module stops the parked heating/ventilation:
If parked heating is active, the ATC module:

- Sends a CAN bus message to de-activate the FFBH.
- Switches off the blower.
- Returns the distribution doors to the previous settings.
- After 3 minutes, de-energizes the changeover valve.
If parked ventilation is active, the ATC module:
- Switches off the blower.
- Returns the distribution doors to the previous settings.
Remotely Selected Parked Heating/Ventilation
When parked heating/ventilation is selected 'on' with the remote handset, the request is received by the FFBH
receiver via the TV antenna and TV antenna amplifier. The FFBH receiver relays the request as a hardwired signal to
the FFBH control module. On receipt of the request, the FFBH control module sends the request to the ATC module on
the CAN bus. The ATC module then determines if parked heating or ventilation is required.
Operation of the FFBH is controlled by a status message from the automatic temperature control (ATC) module to the
control module. A similar status message, from the control module to the ATC module, advises the ATC module of the
current operating status of the FFBH.
While the engine is running, if the ambient air temperature is less than 9 °C (48 °F) and the engine coolant
temperature (ECT) is less than 75 °C (167 °F) the ATC module changes the status message from 'heater off' to
'supplemental heat'. The control module then changes the status message it sends the ATC module to 'supplemental
heat' and starts the FFBH. The control module will not start the FFBH, or will discontinue operation, if any of the
following occur:
The control module is in the error lockout mode (see Diagnostics, below).
A crash message is received from the restraints control module (RCM).
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Description and Operation).
A low fuel level message is received from the instrument cluster.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message
Center, Description and Operation).
The engine is not running, or stops running for approximately 4 seconds. The time delay is included for stall
protection.
If the control module does not start the FFBH, or discontinues operation, the status message to the ATC module
remains at, or changes to, 'heater off'. If the ambient air temperature increases to 9 °C (48 °F), or the ECT increases
to 75 °C (167 °F), the ATC module cancels supplementary heating, by changing the status message to the control
module back to 'heater off'. The control module then cancels FFBH operation and changes the status message to the
ATC module to 'heater off'.
The FFBH is controlled at one of two heat output levels, 2.8 kW at part load combustion and 5 kW at full load
combustion. The control module transmits the FFBH coolant temperature to the ATC module.
Start Sequence: At the beginning of a start sequence, the control module energizes the glow pin function of the
glow pin and flame sensor, to pre heat the combustion chamber, starts the combustion air fan at slow speed and
energizes the coolant circulation pump. After approximately 30 seconds, the control module energizes the auxiliary
fuel pump at the starting sequence speed. The fuel delivered by the auxiliary fuel pump evaporates in the combustion
chamber, mixes with air from the combustion air fan and is ignited by the glow pin and flame sensor. The control
module then progressively increases the speed of the auxiliary fuel pump and the combustion air fan. Once
combustion is established the control module switches the glow pin and flame sensor from the glow pin function to
the flame sensing function to monitor combustion. From the beginning of the start sequence to stable combustion at
full load takes approximately 240 seconds.
Coolant Temperature Control: While the FFBH is running, the control module cycles the FFBH between full load
combustion, part load combustion and a control idle phase of operation, depending on the temperature of the coolant
in the heat exchanger.
Switching Point Diagram

Switching Point
Figure Item No. Description Temperature, °C (°F)
1 Full load to part load 84 (183)
2 Part load to control idle 88 (190)
3 Control idle to part load 78 (172)
4 Part load to full load 74 (165)
After the start sequence, the control module maintains full load combustion until the coolant temperature reaches
switching point temperature 1. At this temperature, the control module decreases the speed of the auxiliary fuel
pump and the combustion air fan to half speed, to produce part load combustion. The control module maintains part
load combustion while the coolant temperature remains between switching point temperatures 2 and 4. At part load
combustion the temperature of the coolant will increase or decrease depending on the amount of heat required to
heat the vehicle interior. If the coolant temperature decreases to switching point temperature 4, the control module
increases the speed of the auxiliary fuel pump and the combustion air fan to full speed, to return to full load
combustion. If the coolant temperature increases to switching point temperature 2, the control module enters a
control idle phase of operation.
On entering the control idle phase, the control module immediately switches the auxiliary fuel pump off, to stop
combustion, and starts a timer for the combustion air fan. After a 2 minute cool down period, the control module
switches the combustion air fan off and then remains in the control idle phase while the coolant temperature remains
above switching point temperature 3. If the coolant temperature decreases to switching point temperature 3, the
control module initiates a start to part load combustion. A start to part load combustion takes approximately 90
seconds.
In order to limit the build up of carbon deposits on the glow pin and flame sensor, the control module also enters the
control idle phase if continuous combustion time exceeds 72 minutes (at part load, full load or a combination of
both). After the cool down period, if the coolant is still in the temperature range that requires additional heat, the
control module restarts the FFBH.
Shutdown: To stop the FFBH, the control module de-energizes the auxiliary fuel pump to stop combustion, but
continues operation of the combustion air fan and the coolant circulation pump for a time, to cool down the FFBH.
The cool down time is 100 seconds if the FFBH was operating at part load combustion and 175 seconds if the FFBH
was operating at full load combustion.
DIAGNOSTICS
The control module monitors the FFBH system for faults. Any faults detected are stored in a volatile memory in the
control module, which can be interrogated by approved diagnostic equipment via the medium speed CAN bus. A
maximum of three faults and associated freeze frame data can be stored at any one time. If a further fault is
detected, the oldest fault is overwritten by the new fault.
The control module also incorporates an error lockout mode of operation that inhibits operation to prevent serious
faults from causing further damage to the system. In the error lockout mode, the control module immediately stops
the auxiliary fuel pump, and stops the combustion air fan and coolant circulation pump after a cool down time of
approximately 2 minutes. Error lockout occurs for start sequence failures, combustion flameouts, heat exchanger
casing overheat and if battery voltage is out of limits. The error lockout mode can be cleared using approved
diagnostic equipment.
Start Failure and Flameout: If a start sequence fails to establish combustion, or a flameout occurs after
combustion is established, the control module immediately initiates another start sequence. The start failure or
flameout is also recorded by an event timer in the control module. The event timer is increased by one after each
start failure or flameout, and decreased by one if a subsequent start is successful. If the event timer increases to
three (over any number of drive cycles), the control module enters the error lockout mode.
Heat Exchanger Casing Overheat: To protect the system from excessive temperatures, the control module enters
the error lockout mode if the heat exchanger coolant temperature exceeds 125 °C (257 °F).
Battery Voltage Limits: 10.25 - 15.5 volts.

Published: 28-Aug-2012
Auxiliary Heating - Fuel Fired Booster Heater
For a detailed description of the fuel fired booster heater system and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Auxiliary Heater (412-02B Auxiliary Heating,

Visual Inspection
Fuel fired booster heater assembly Fuses
- Coolant inlet/outlet Harnesses
- Exhaust Electrical connector(s)
- Fuel inlet Control module(s)
- Air inlet
Auxiliary fuel pump and lines
Auxiliary coolant pump
Index.
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Fuel Fired Booster Heater Control Module (FFBH) (100-
00, Description and Operation).
Auxiliary Heating - Auxiliary Heater Remote Transmitter
Programming
General Procedures
Activation
NOTE: A second or third hand held transmitter can be programmed using this method.
1. NOTES:
Use a coin or similar implement to

remove and install the battery cover.
Make sure that correct battery polarity is

maintained.
Remove and install the transmitter battery.
2.
3.
4. Remove fuse 2 (5 Amp) from the battery
junction box (BJB).
5. NOTE: This completes the programming

procedure.
Install fuse 2 (5 Amp), and within 5 seconds

press the OFF button on the transmitter for at
least 1 second.
6. To confirm whether the programming procedure has

completed correctly, push the off button. If a continuous
red light is displayed on the transmitter, the programming
procedure was successful. If a flashing red light is
displayed, the procedure was unsuccessful, or the
transmitter is not in range. In this case, make sure the
transmitter is within the recommended range and repeat the
above procedure from step 4.
Auxiliary Heating - Fuel Fired Booster Heater TDV6 2.7L Diesel
Removal
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00
Charging System - General Information, Specifications).
2. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle

stands.
Raise and support the vehicle.
3. NOTE: Wheel shown removed for clarity.
Carefully release the wheel arch liner, to allow

access to the fuel fired burner heater (FFBH)
exhaust clamp retaining bolt.
4. NOTE: Components removed for clarity.
Release the exhaust clamp.
5. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or

removing components, ensure the area around
the joint faces and connections are clean. Plug
open connections to prevent contamination.
Disconnect the fuel fired booster heater fuel

line.
Release the clip.
6. Lower the vehicle.
7. Release the power steering fluid reservoir.
8. Disconnect the fuel fired booster heater inlet

and outlet coolant hoses.
Clamp the hoses to minimise coolant
loss.
9. Remove the fuel fired booster heater.

Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors.
Remove the 3 bolts.
Release the fuel pipe from the clip.
Installation
1. Install the fuel fired booster heater.
Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Connect the electrical connectors.
Secure the fuel pipe in the clip.
2. Connect the fuel fired booster heater coolant hoses.

Remove the clamps.
3. Connect the fuel fired booster heater fuel hose.

Secure with the clip.
4. Raise the vehicle.
5. Tighten the exhaust clamp.

Tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
6. Secure the wheel arch liner.

Install the two retaining screws.
Install the clip.
8. Install the power steering fluid reservoir.
9. Connect the battery ground cable.

10. Connect exhaust extraction hoses to the tail pipes.
11. Remove the engine cover.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover - TDV6
3.0L Diesel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
12. Loosen the coolant expansion tank bleed screw.
13. Loosen the cylinder head bleed hose bleed

screw.
15. Tighten the bleed screws to 14 Nm (10 lb.ft).
16. Fill the cooling system, keeping coolant to the upper level
mark of the expansion tank, until a steady stream of
coolant is seen returning to the tank.
17. NOTE: When the coolant bleed is complete and prior

to installing the expansion tank cap, top up the expansion
tank to 30mm above the maximum level.
Install the coolant expansion tank cap.
18. WARNING: Release the cooling system pressure by

slowly turning the expansion tank cap a quarter of a turn.
Cover the expansion tank cap with a thick cloth to prevent
the possibility of scalding. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in personal injury.
Start and run the engine.

Hold the engine speed at 3,000 RPM for one minute.
Return the engine to idle for five minutes.
Hold the engine speed at 3,000 RPM for one minute.
Run the engine until the thermostat opens.
Remove coolant expansion tank cap, allow float to
settle and top-up coolant if required. Install cap.
19. Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
20. Install the engine cover.

21. Check and top-up the coolant if required.

Auxiliary Heating - Fuel Fired Booster Heater TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:
Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
1. Refer to: Specifications (414-00, Specifications).

stands.
3. NOTE: Wheel shown removed for clarity.
Carefully release the wheel arch liner, to

allow access to the fuel fired burner
heater (FFBH) exhaust clamp retaining
bolt.
4.
NOTE: Components removed for

clarity.
Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
coolant.
Clamp the hoses to minimize coolant

loss.
7.
8.
removing components, ensure the area around
the joint faces and connections are clean. Plug
open connections to prevent contamination.
10. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

2. Refer to: Engine Cover - 3.0L V6 - TdV6 (501-05, Removal
and Installation).
3.
4.
5.
6. CAUTIONS:
Anti-freeze concentration must be

maintained at 50%.
Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.
Fill the coolant expansion tank until coolant

appears through the bleed ports.

coolant.

8.
Set the heater controls to maximum.
9.
Start the engine and continue to fill the coolant until
the maximum level is reached.

coolant.

11. Increase engine speed to 2500rpm and cycle between this

and idle.
12.
Continue to top-up with coolant with the engine at
idle.
13. CAUTION: Correct installation of the

Coolant expansion tank cap can be obtained by
tightening the cap until an audible click is
heard.
14. Allow the engine to idle, until hot air is emitted at the face
registers.
15. Once the front heater is warm, check if the rear heater is
warm (if equipped). If no heat is felt, increase the engine
speed to 3000 rpm for 30 seconds and return to idle.
16. CAUTION: Switch off the engine and allow the coolant
temperature to go cold.
17. Visually check the engine and cooling system for signs of
coolant leakage.
18. WARNING: When releasing the cooling system

pressure, cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a thick
cloth.
CAUTIONS:
Since injury such as scalding could be caused by

escaping steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling
system is cool prior to carrying out this procedure
Make sure the coolant level remains above the "COLD

FILL RANGE" lower level mark.
NOTE: When the cooling system is warm, the coolant

will be approximately 10mm above the upper level mark on
the expansion tank with the cap removed.
Check and top-up the coolant if required.
19. Refer to: Engine Cover - 3.0L V6 - TdV6 (501-05, Removal

and Installation).
Auxiliary Heating - Fuel Fired Booster Heater Glow Plug And Burner
Assembly TDV6 2.7L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:

stands.
3. Refer to: Fuel Fired Booster Heater (412-02B, Removal and

Installation).
4. 7.5 Nm
5.
6. 10 Nm
7. 10 Nm
8.
9.
10.
11.
12. 7 Nm
Installation
2. Refer to: Fuel Fired Booster Heater (412-02B, Removal and

Installation).
Auxiliary Heating - Fuel Fired Booster Heater Glow Plug And Burner
Assembly TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal

stands.
3. Refer to: Fuel Fired Booster Heater - 3.0L V6 - TdV6 (412-

02B, Removal and Installation).
4. NOTE: Where installed.
10 Nm
5. 7.5 Nm
6.
7. 10 Nm
8. 10 Nm
9.
10.
11.
12.
13. 7 Nm
Installation
2. Refer to: Fuel Fired Booster Heater - 3.0L V6 - TdV6 (412-

02B, Removal and Installation).
Air Conditioning - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
Lubricant
Item Specification
Compressor oil Denso ND-8 PAG oil
Total system capacity:
Front 130 cm³ (4.5 fluid ounces)
Rear 170 cm³ (5.9 fluid ounces)
Additional amount of oil to be added to system if a component is replaced:
Condenser 40 cm³ (1.4 fluid ounces)
Evaporator - Front or rear 40 cm³ (1.4 fluid ounces)
Pipe or hose 10 cm³ (0.35 fluid ounces)
System Refrigerant Specification/Capacity
Item Specification
Refrigerant type R134A
2.7 litre - Front system only fitted 550 grammes (10.25 ounces)
2.7 litre - Front and rear systems fitted 810 grammes (28.35 ounces)
4.0 and 4.4 litre - Front system only fitted 600 grammes (21.16 ounces)
4.0 and 4.4 litre - Front and rear systems fitted 900 grammes (31.83 ounces)
Item Description
Compressor:
Make Denso
Type 7SEU17
Sensor locations:
Ambient temperature sensor At the front of the vehicle
Smog sensor At the front of the vehicle adjacent to the ambient temperature sensor
ICS/humidity sensor On the instrument panel adjacent to the steering column
Solar sensor On the vehicle centre line on top of the instrument panel
Pressure transducer In A/C line - LH side of engine compartment
Compressor mounting bolts 25 18
Receiver/drier mounting bolts 10 7
Refrigerant line bolts 10 7
Condenser core bolts - Not 2.7 litre 10 7
Radiator bolts 25 18
A/C pipe bolts 25 18
Coolant expansion tank bolts 10 7
Heater housing to bulkhead Torx bolts 6 4
Adaptor panel nuts 6 4
Air conditioning lines to bulkhead bolt 6 4
Air conditioning lines to body nut 6 4
Instrument panel Torx bolts 25 18
Instrument panel carrier to bulkhead Torx bolt 25 18
* Steering column intermediate shaft nut 22 16
Ground cables to passenger side lower A-pillar nuts 10 7
Ground cables to driver side lower A-pillar nuts 10 7
Pressure transducer 10 7
* New nut must be fitted
Air Conditioning - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Air Conditioning
COMPONENT LOCATION 2.7L TdV6

1 - Evaporator
2 - Thermostatic expansion valve
3 - Low pressure line
4 - air conditioning (A/C) compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
7 - High pressure line
8 - Low pressure servicing connection
9 - Refrigerant pressure sensor (reference)
10 - High pressure servicing connection
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
COMPONENT LOCATION 4.0L NA V6
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
GENERAL
The A/C system transfers heat from the vehicle interior to the outside atmosphere to provide the heater assembly
with dehumidified cool air. The system consists of:
A compressor.
A condenser.
A receiver drier.
A thermostatic expansion valve.
An evaporator.
Low and high pressure refrigerant lines.
The system is a sealed, closed loop, filled with a charge weight of R134a refrigerant as the heat transfer medium. Oil
is added to the refrigerant to lubricate the internal components of the compressor.
Operation of the air conditioning system is controlled by the automatic temperature control (ATC) module. The A/C
compressor circulates the refrigerant around the system by compressing low pressure, low temperature vapor from
the evaporator and discharging the resultant high pressure, high temperature vapor to the condenser.
The A/C compressor is a variable displacement unit which is driven by the engine accessory drive belt. On 2.7L/4.0L
and 5.0L vehicles, the A/C (air conditioning) compressor is permanently driven directly from the pulley. On 3.0L
diesel vehicles the A/C compressor is driven via an electro-magnetic clutch.
To protect the refrigerant system from excessive pressure, a pressure relief valve is installed in the outlet side of the
A/C compressor. The pressure relief valve vents excess pressure into the engine compartment.
For additional information, refer to: Control Components (412-04, Description and Operation).
A/C COMPRESSOR
2.7L TdV6

1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
4 - Pressure relief valve
5 - Electronic control valve connector
The A/C compressor fitted to 2.7L TdV6 petrol vehicles is a variable displacement unit. The secondary accessory
drive belt, driven by the engine crankshaft, drives the A/C compressor via a pulley. Operation of the compressor is
controlled by an electronic control valve working in conjunction with the ATC (automatic temperature control) module.
The A/C compressor is a 7 cylinder swash plate unit with a minimum displacement of 1.6 cm 3/rev (0.10 in3/rev) and
maximum displacement of 171 cm 3/rev (10.43 in3/rev). The ATC module automatically adjusts the displacement of
the A/C compressor between the minimum and maximum values, to match the thermal load of the evaporator. By
matching refrigerant flow and the thermal load of the evaporator, the ATC module maintains cabin comfort whilst also
considering fuel economy.
To protect the refrigerant system from unacceptably high pressure, a pressure relief valve is installed in the outlet
side of the A/C compressor. The pressure relief valve is set to open at 3.5 to 4.3 MPa (508 to 623lbf/in2) and vents
excess pressure into the engine compartment. The pressure relief valve closes again when the pressure decreases to
3.01 MPa (436 lbf/in2).
The pulley of the A/C compressor incorporates a mechanical torque limiter, which disconnects the drive plate from
the compressor shaft if torque increases to a level that indicates imminent compressor seizure.
3.0L TdV6
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
6 - electromagnetic clutch connector
The A/C compressor fitted to 3.0L TdV6 diesel vehicles is a variable displacement unit. The secondary accessory drive
belt, driven by the engine crankshaft, drives the A/C compressor via a pulley and an electromagnetic clutch.
Operation of the clutch is controlled by a power feed from the ATC module.
maximum displacement of 163 cm 3/rev (9.95 in3/rev). The ATC module automatically adjusts the displacement of the
A/C compressor between the minimum and maximum values, to match the thermal load of the evaporator. By
side of the A/C compressor. The pressure relief valve is set to open at 3.5 to 4.1 MPa (508 to 595 lbf/in2) and vents
3.1 MPa (449 lbf/in2).
The clutch of the A/C compressor incorporates a thermal cut-off fuse, which disconnects the power feed from the ATC
module if the temperature increases to 182 ± 5 o C (360 ± 9 o F).
4.0L NA V6
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
The A/C compressor fitted to 4.0L NA V6 petrol vehicles is a variable displacement unit. The secondary accessory
controlled by an electronic control valve working in conjunction with the ATC module.
3.01 MPa (437 lbf/in2).
5.0L NA V8
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
The A/C compressor fitted to 5.0L V8 petrol vehicles is a variable displacement unit. The secondary accessory drive
belt, driven by the engine crankshaft, drives the A/C compressor via a pulley. Operation of the compressor is
3.1 MPa (449 lbf/in2).
CONDENSER
NOTE: 5.0L NA V8 version shown other installations similar

1 - right-hand (RH) end tank
2 - Condenser core
3 - left-hand (LH) end tank
4 - High pressure line connector block
5 - Condenser attachment brackets
6 - Receiver drier pipes
7 - Receiver drier attachment bracket
The condenser transfers heat from the refrigerant to the surrounding air to convert the high pressure vapor from the
compressor into a liquid. The condenser is installed immediately in front of the radiator. Two brackets on each end
tank of the condenser attach the condenser to clips on the end tanks of the radiator.
The condenser is classified as a sub-cooling condenser and consists of a fin and tube heat exchanger core installed
between two end tanks. Divisions in the end tanks separate the heat exchanger into a four pass upper (condenser)
section and a two pass lower (sub-cooler) section. A connector block on the left end tank of the condenser provides
connections for the high pressure lines from the A/C compressor and the evaporator. Two pipes at the bottom of the
right end tank of the condenser provide connections for the receiver drier.
RECEIVER DRIER
1 - Receiver drier
2 - Clamp
3 - Condenser RH end tank
4 - O-ring seals
5 - Inlet pipe
6 - Outlet pipe
7 - Collar
8 - Bolt
The receiver drier removes solid impurities and moisture from the refrigerant, and provides a reservoir for liquid
refrigerant to accommodate changes of heat load at the evaporator.
The receiver drier is attached to the two stub pipes on the right end tank of the condenser. A collar, located on lands
on the stub pipes and secured with a bolt, attaches the stub pipes to the receiver drier. A clamp secures the body of
the receiver drier to a bracket welded to the right end tank of the condenser. The inlet and outlet ports of the
receiver drier are the same size, so care must be taken to install the receiver drier the correct way round on the stub
pipes; to assist with installation, the inlet port is identified with the word IN etched into the receiver drier.
Refrigerant entering the receiver drier passes through a filter and a desiccant pack, then collects in the base of the
unit before flowing through the outlet stub pipe back to the condenser. The desiccant and the filter are non-
serviceable; the complete unit must be replaced when a change of desiccant is required.
THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE

1 - Metering valve
2 - Housing
3 - Diaphragm
4 - Temperature sensitive tube
5 - Outlet passage from evaporator
6 - Inlet passage to evaporator
The thermostatic expansion valve meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator, to match the refrigerant flow
with the heat load of the air passing through the evaporator.
The thermostatic expansion valve is a block type valve located behind the heater assembly, and attached to the inlet
and outlet ports of the evaporator. The thermostatic expansion valve consists of an aluminum housing containing
inlet and outlet passages. A ball and spring metering valve is installed in the inlet passage and a temperature sensor
is installed in the outlet passage. The temperature sensor consists of a temperature sensitive tube connected to a
diaphragm. The bottom end of the temperature sensitive tube acts on the ball of the metering valve. Pressure on top
of the diaphragm is controlled by evaporator outlet temperature conducted through the temperature sensitive tube.
The bottom of the diaphragm senses evaporator outlet pressure.
Liquid refrigerant flows through the metering valve into the evaporator. The restriction across the metering valve
reduces the pressure and temperature of the refrigerant. The restriction also changes the liquid stream of refrigerant
into a fine spray, to improve the evaporation process. As the refrigerant passes through the evaporator, it absorbs
heat from the air flowing through the evaporator. The increase in temperature causes the refrigerant to vaporize and
increase in pressure.
The temperature and pressure of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator act on the diaphragm and temperature
sensitive tube, which regulate the metering valve opening and so control the volume of refrigerant flowing through
the evaporator. The warmer the air flowing through the evaporator, the more heat available to evaporate refrigerant
and thus the greater the volume of refrigerant allowed through the metering valve.
EVAPORATOR
The evaporator is installed in the heater assembly between the blower and the heater matrix, to absorb heat from the
exterior or recirculated air. Low pressure, low temperature refrigerant changes from liquid to vapor in the evaporator,
absorbing large quantities of heat as it changes state.
Most of the moisture in the air passing through the evaporator condenses into water, which drains out of the heater
and through the floorpan, to the underside of the vehicle, through two drain tubes.
REFRIGERANT LINES
To maintain similar flow velocities around the system, the diameter of the refrigerant lines varies to suit the two
pressure/temperature regimes. The larger diameters are installed in the low pressure/temperature regime and the
smaller diameters are installed in the high pressure/temperature regime.
Low and high pressure charging connections are incorporated into the refrigerant lines for system servicing. Where
auxiliary A/C is installed, connections for the auxiliary refrigerant lines are incorporated near the engine bulkhead.
Under normal operating conditions, the smaller diameter pipes (A/C compressor discharge, liquid refrigerant) are hot
to the touch and the larger diameter pipes (A/C compressor suction, gaseous refrigerant) are cold to the touch.
SYSTEM OPERATION
To accomplish the transfer of heat, the refrigerant is circulated around the system, where it passes through two
pressure/temperature regimes. In each of the pressure/temperature regimes, the refrigerant changes state, during
which process maximum heat absorption or release occurs. The low pressure/temperature regime is from the
thermostatic expansion valve, through the evaporator to the compressor; the refrigerant decreases in pressure and
temperature at the thermostatic expansion valve, then changes state from liquid to vapor in the evaporator, to
absorb heat. The high pressure/temperature regime is from the compressor, through the condenser and receiver drier
to the thermostatic expansion valve; the refrigerant increases in pressure and temperature as it passes through the
compressor, then releases heat and changes state from vapor to liquid in the condenser.
A/C SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
NOTE: A = Refrigerant liquid; B = Refrigerant vapor; C = Air flow

1 - Evaporator
3 - High pressure connection with auxiliary climate control (where fitted)
5 - Refrigerant pressure sensor
6 - Cooling fan
7 - Condenser
8 - Receiver drier
9 - A/C compressor
11 - Low pressure connection with auxiliary climate control (where fitted)
12 - Blower
For a detailed description of the air conditioning system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Air Conditioning (412-03 Air Conditioning - 2.7L Diesel,

Visual Inspection
Auxiliary drive belt condition and tension Fuses
Compressor condition and installation Harnesses
Condenser condition and installation/blockage Electrical connector(s)
Air conditioning hoses and pipes Relays
Receiver/drier condition and installation Sensors
Cooling fan Control panel(s)
check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

Poor or no Drive belt Check the drive belt condition and tension (see visual inspection). Check the
cooling fault compressor operation (observe the compressor as the engine is idling with the air
Compressor conditioning switched on. If the compressor runs erratically or does not run. Carry
fault out the distribution motor self test. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
Distribution section. Check for sensor DTCs. Refer to the DTC index. Check the refrigerant
motor/flap system using your charging station.
fault
Refrigerant
leak
In-vehicle
temperature
sensor fault
Refrigerant
pressure
sensor fault
Noise Drive belt Confirm the air conditioning as the source of the noise by listening for the noise
fault with the air conditioning switched off. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
Compressor section. Check the refrigerant system using your charging station.
fault
Compressor
pulley
fouling
Refrigerant
overcharged
Water Heater Check for coolant loss. Pressure test the cooling system as necessary. Check and
entry into matrix leak clear the evaporator drain tubes as necessary.
cabin Blocked
evaporator
drain tubes
DTC Index
00.
Air Conditioning - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor
Removal
1. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle

supported only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on
safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Jacking (100-02 Jacking
and Lifting, Description and Operation).

For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00,
Specifications).

4. Recover the air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant.

For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (412-00 Climate
Control System - General Information, General Procedures).
5. Remove the auxiliary battery tray.

For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Battery Tray
(414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and
Installation).
6. Remove the accessory drive belt.

For additional information, refer to: Accessory Drive Belt
(303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
7. Remove the LH front wheel and tire.
8. Remove the front LH fender splash shield.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Splash Shield
(501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
9. Remove the fender splash shield lower trim

panel.
Remove the 4 clips.
10. Remove the upper arm and brake line heat

shields for access.
Remove the 3 nuts.
Remove the 3 bolts.
11. Release the charge air cooler inlet pipe.
Remove the two retaining bolts.
Remove the retaining nut.
12. Disconnect the charge air cooler inlet hose.

Loosen the clip.
13. Disconnect the charge air cooler inlet hose.

Loosen the clip.
14. CAUTIONS:
Immediately cap all refrigerant lines to

prevent ingress of dirt and moisture.
Care must be taken to avoid damage to

the mating surfaces.
Release the A/C low-pressure pipe from the
compressor.
Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Using a suitable tie strap, secure the
A/C low-pressure pipe aside.
15. Release the power steering pump support

bracket.
Reposition the charge air cooler inlet
pipe to gain access to the power
steering pump retaining bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
16. CAUTIONS:
Immediately cap all refrigerant lines to

prevent ingress of dirt and moisture.
Care must be taken to avoid damage to

the mating surfaces.
Disconnect the A/C compressor high-pressure

pipe.
Remove the LH retaining bolt.
Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
17. Reposition the A/C compressor high-pressure pipe.

18. Release the power steering pump.
Collect the support bracket.
19. Using a suitable tie strap, secure the power

steering pump.
20. Remove the A/C compressor.

Disconnect the A/C compressor
electrical connector.
Remove the three retaining bolts.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Lubricate the new seals with clean
refrigerant oil.
Install the A/C compressor.

Install the three retaining bolts.
Connect the A/C compressor electrical connector.
2. Secure the power steering pump.

Remove and discard the tie strap.
Install the support bracket.
3. Reposition the A/C compressor high-pressure pipe.
4. Connect the A/C compressor high-pressure pipe.

Remove the blanking caps from the ports.
Install a new O-ring seal.
Tighten the retaining bolt to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5. Install the power steering pump rear bolts.

Reposition the charge air cooler inlet pipe to gain
access to the power steering pump retaining bolts.
6. Connect the A/C compressor low-pressure pipe.

Tighten the retaining bolt to 9 Nm (7 lb.ft).
7. Connect the charge air cooler inlet hose.

Tighten the clips.
8. Secure the charge air cooler inlet pipe.

Install the two retaining bolts.
Install the retaining nut.
9. Install the upper arm and brake line heat shields.

Install the 3 bolts.
Install the 3 nuts.
10. Install the fender splash shield lower trim panel.

Install the 4 clips.
11. Install the front LH fender splash shield.

12. Install the wheel and tire.

Tighten nuts to 140 Nm (103 lb.ft).
13. Install the accessory drive belt.

(303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
14. Install the auxiliary battery tray.

Installation).
15. Recharge the A/C system



Specifications).
Air Conditioning - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure
Transducer
Removal
Specifications).
2. Recover the A/C refrigerant.

3. CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting or removing the

components, ensure the area around the joint
faces and connections are clean. Plug open
connections to prevent contamination.
To prevent damage to components, use

an additional wrench when loosening or
tightening unions.
Remove the A/C pressure transducer.

Remove and discard the seal.
Installation
1. Install the A/C pressure transducer.
Install a new seal.
Tighten the transducer to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2. Recharge the A/C system.


Specifications).
Air Conditioning - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Condenser Core
Removal
refrigerant circuit ( eg. compressor seizure ). The system is leaking and refrigerant has been lost to atmosphere.
Refrigerant circuit has been open more than 24 hours due to repair.

safety stands.

Specifications).

4. Remove the cooling fan lower shroud.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan Shroud
(303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
5. Remove the radiator grille.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator Grille (501-08
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
6. Release the coolant expansion tank.

Remove the 2 bolts.
7. CAUTION: Immediately cap all refrigerant

lines to prevent ingress of dirt and moisture.
Disconnect the A/C condenser refrigerant lines.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Discard the O-ring seals.
8. Remove the radiator securing pegs.
9. Remove the radiator upper deflector.

10. Release the power steering fluid cooler.
Release it from 3 clips.
11. Release the front differential breather line.
12. Remove the power steering fluid cooler line

clip.
13. Tie the engine air intake duct towards the engine.
14. Tie the fuel fired booster heater coolant lines towards the
engine.
15. Move the radiator towards the engine.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Lift it clear of its mountings.
Tie the radiator towards the engine.
16. Remove the A/C condenser.

Remove the bolt.
Release it from the 4 clips
Installation
1. Install the A/C condenser.
2. Position the radiator.

Lift the radiator onto its mountings.
3. Position the front differential breather line.
4. Install the power steering fluid cooler line clip.
5. Secure the power steering fluid cooler line.

Secure in the 3 clips.
6. Install the radiator upper deflector.
7. Install the radiator securing pegs.
8. Secure the coolant expansion tank.

Tighten the 2 bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
9. Connect the A/C condenser refrigerant lines.

Install new O-ring seals.
10. Install the radiator grille.

Installation).
11. Install the cooling fan lower shroud.

Installation).
12. Fill the A/C system.
Air Conditioning - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Evaporator Core
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover - 2.7L V6
- TdV6 (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
2. Evacuate the A/C system.


safety stands.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling System
Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03A Engine Cooling -
TDV6 2.7L Diesel, General Procedures).
5. Remove the driver side front seat.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat (501-10
Seating, Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the floor console.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12
Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
7. Remove the instrument panel upper section.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Upper
Section (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal
and Installation).
8. Release the 3 ground cables from the driver

side lower A-pillar.
Remove the 2 nuts.
9. Disconnect the 5 electrical connectors from the

driver side lower A-pillar.
10. Disconnect the 3 electrical connectors.

11. Release the 3 ground cables from the
passenger side lower A-pillar.
Remove the 2 nuts.
12. Disconnect the 5 electrical connectors from the passenger

13. Disconnect the central junction box (CJB) three

electrical connectors.
14. Disconnect 2 electrical connectors from the instrument

panel center reinforcement.
15. CAUTION: Cover fiber optic cable

connectors to minimize dust ingress and avoid
bending the cables in a radius of less than 30
mm.
If installed, disconnect the instrument panel

center reinforcement fibre optic cables.
16. Remove the heater housing center ducts.
17. Disconnect the steering column intermediate

shaft from the steering column.
Note the fitted position.
Remove the special bolt and discard the
nut.
18. Release the heater housing from the

instrument panel carrier.

For additional information, refer to: Plenum Chamber (412-
01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal and Installation).
20. Remove the instrument panel carrier to

bulkhead Torx bolt.
21. With assistance, remove the instrument panel.
Remove the 6 Torx bolts.

removing the components, make sure the area
around the joint faces and connections are
clean. Plug open connections to prevent
contamination.
Disconnect 2 heater hoses from the bulkhead.


Release the 2 A/C refrigerant lines.

Remove the nut and bolt.
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
24. Remove the 2 adapter panels.

Remove the 4 nuts.
25. Disconnect 2 drain tubes from the heater
housing.
26. Remove the driver side footwell duct.

27. Remove the passenger side footwell duct.

28. Driver side: Remove the heater housing to
bulkhead Torx bolt.
29. Passenger side: Remove the heater housing to

bulkhead Torx bolt.
With assistance, remove the heater and
evaporator core housing.
30. Remove the A/C control module.
31. Disconnect the evaporator core temperature

sensor electrical connector.
32. Disconnect the electrical connector.
33. Detach the wiring harness.
34. Remove the bolt from the support bracket.
35. Remove the heater and evaporator core

housing.
Remove the 8 clips.
Carefully release the 2 clips.
36. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve.
37. Remove the evaporator core.

Release the temperature sensor.
Installation
1. Install the evaporator core.
Secure the temperature sensor.
2. Secure the heater core housing.

Install the clips.
3. Install the thermostatic expansion valve.

Tighten the bolts to 3.5 Nm (2.5 lb.ft).
4. Install the wiring harness.
5. Install and tighten the bolt.
6. Connect the temperature sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the CC module.

Tighten the bolts.
8. Passenger side: Install the heater housing to bulkhead Torx

bolt and tighten to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
With assistance, install the heater and evaporator
core housing.
9. Driver side: Install the heater housing to bulkhead Torx bolt

and tighten to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
10. Install the footwell ducts.

11. Connect the drain tubes to the heater housing.
12. Install the adapter panels.

Tighten the nuts to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
13. Secure the A/C refrigerant lines.

Tighten the bolt to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
Tighten the nut to 6 Nm.
14. Connect the bulkhead heater hoses.
15. With assistance, install the instrument panel.

Tighten the Torx bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
16. Install the instrument panel carrier to bulkhead Torx bolt

17. Install the plenum chamber panel.

18. Secure the heater housing.

Tighten the screws.
19. Connect the steering column intermediate shaft.

Install the special bolt and tighten the new nut to 22
Nm (16 lb.ft).
20. Install the heater housing center ducts.
21. Connect the instrument panel center reinforcement fibre

optic cables.
22. Connect the instrument panel center reinforcement electrical

connectors.
23. Connect the CJB electrical connectors.
24. Connect the electrical connectors to the passenger side

lower A-pillar.
25. Connect the ground cables to the passenger side lower A-

pillar.
26. Connect the electrical connectors to the driver side lower A-

pillar.
27. Connect the ground cables to the driver side lower A-pillar.
28. Connect the 3 electrical connectors.
29. Install the instrument panel upper section.

and Installation).
30. Install the floor console.

31. Install the front seat.




and Installation).
Air Conditioning - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal

and Installation).

Remove the thermostatic expansion valve.

Remove the cover.
Remove the 2 Allen bolts.
Installation
Tighten the Allen bolts to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
Install the cover.

and Installation).

Compressor Pulley
Removal
NOTES:
Components removed for clarity.

Specifications).
2. Remove the cooling fan.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03A
Engine Cooling - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
3. Using a suitable tool, release the hub locking

stud.
Rotate the fixing clockwise to release
the hub.
If required, use a suitable tool to
prevent the hub from rotating.
4. NOTE: Using a 3/8 square drive wrench, rotate the

tensioner counter clockwise.
Release the accessory drive belt from the A/C compressor

pulley.
5. Remove and discard the hub assembly.

Rotate the pulley counter-clockwise,
until the hub is released from the pulley.
Discard the rubber dampers.
6. Remove and discard the spacer.
7. Remove and discard the drive pulley.

Remove and discard the circlip.
Clean the compressor mating surface.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the circlip is fitted in

the correct orientation.
Install the drive pulley.

Install the circlip.
2. Install the spacer.
Make sure the spacer is fully seated.
3. Install the 6 rubber dampers to the hub

assembly.
Make sure the dampers are installed in
4. NOTE: Apply a suitable water based lubricant to the

rubber dampers and to the mating surfaces on pulley.
Install the hub assembly.

Push the hub assembly onto the pulley, and rotate
clockwise to screw it onto the compressor shaft.
5. NOTE: Tighten counterclockwise.
Using a suitable tool, tighten the hub locking stud.

Prevent the pulley rotating by hand.
Tighten to 3.5 Nm (2.6 lb.ft)
6. Install the auxiliary drive belt.
7. Install the cooling fan.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03A
Installation).

Specifications).
Air Conditioning - V6 4.0L Petrol -
Lubricant
Item Specification
Compressor oil Denso ND-8 PAG oil
Front 130 cm³ (4.5 fluid ounces)
Rear 170 cm³ (5.9 fluid ounces)
Additional amount of oil to be added to system if a component is replaced:
Condenser 40 cm³ (1.4 fluid ounces)
Evaporator - Front or rear 40 cm³ (1.4 fluid ounces)
Pipe or hose 10 cm³ (0.35 fluid ounces)
System Refrigerant Specification/Capacity
Item Specification
2.7 litre - Front system only fitted 550 grammes (10.25 ounces)
2.7 litre - Front and rear systems fitted 810 grammes (28.35 ounces)
4.0 and 4.4 litre - Front system only fitted 600 grammes (21.16 ounces)
4.0 and 4.4 litre - Front and rear systems fitted 900 grammes (31.83 ounces)
Item Description
Compressor:
Make Denso
Type 7SEU17
Sensor locations:
Ambient temperature sensor At the front of the vehicle
Smog sensor At the front of the vehicle adjacent to the ambient temperature sensor
ICS/humidity sensor On the instrument panel adjacent to the steering column
Solar sensor On the vehicle centre line on top of the instrument panel
Pressure transducer In A/C line - LH side of engine compartment
Compressor mounting bolts 25 18
Receiver/drier mounting bolts 10 7
Refrigerant line bolts 10 7
Condenser core bolts - Not 2.7 litre 10 7
Radiator bolts 25 18
A/C pipe bolts 25 18
Adaptor panel nuts 6 4
Air conditioning lines to bulkhead bolt 6 4
Air conditioning lines to body nut 6 4
Ground cables to passenger side lower A-pillar nuts 10 7
Ground cables to driver side lower A-pillar nuts 10 7
Pressure transducer 10 7
Air Conditioning - V6 4.0L Petrol - Air Conditioning

1 - Evaporator
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
GENERAL
A compressor.
A condenser.
A receiver drier.
An evaporator.
A/C COMPRESSOR
2.7L TdV6

1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.01 MPa (436 lbf/in2).
3.0L TdV6
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.1 MPa (449 lbf/in2).
4.0L NA V6
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.01 MPa (437 lbf/in2).
5.0L NA V8
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.1 MPa (449 lbf/in2).
CONDENSER

2 - Condenser core
RECEIVER DRIER
1 - Receiver drier
2 - Clamp
4 - O-ring seals
5 - Inlet pipe
6 - Outlet pipe
7 - Collar
8 - Bolt

1 - Metering valve
2 - Housing
3 - Diaphragm
EVAPORATOR
REFRIGERANT LINES
SYSTEM OPERATION

1 - Evaporator
6 - Cooling fan
7 - Condenser
8 - Receiver drier
9 - A/C compressor
12 - Blower
For a detailed description of the air conditioning system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Air Conditioning (412-03 Air Conditioning - 4.0L,

Visual Inspection
Compressor condition and installation Harnesses
Condenser condition and installation/blockage Electrical connector(s)
Receiver/drier condition and installation Sensors
Symptom Chart

Poor or no Drive belt Check the drive belt condition and tension (see visual inspection). Check the
cooling fault compressor operation (observe the compressor as the engine is idling with the air
Compressor conditioning switched on. If the compressor runs erratically or does not run. Carry
fault out the distribution motor self test. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
Distribution section. Check for sensor DTCs. Refer to the DTC index. Check the refrigerant
motor/flap system using your charging station.
fault
Refrigerant
leak
In-vehicle
temperature
sensor fault
Refrigerant
pressure
sensor fault
Noise Drive belt Confirm the air conditioning as the source of the noise by listening for the noise
fault with the air conditioning switched off. Refer to the relevant workshop manual
Compressor section. Check the refrigerant system using your charging station.
fault
Compressor
pulley
fouling
Refrigerant
overcharged
Water Heater Check for coolant loss. Pressure test the cooling system as necessary. Check and
entry into matrix leak clear the evaporator drain tubes as necessary.
cabin Blocked
evaporator
drain tubes
DTC Index
00.
Air Conditioning - V6 4.0L Petrol - Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor
Removal
Specifications).

safety stands.


(303-05, Removal and Installation).
5. Remove the accessory drive belt tensioner.

Remove the bolt.
6. Remove the oil level indicator and tube.

For additional information, refer to: Oil Level Indicator and
Tube (303-01, In-vehicle Repair).
7. Remove the LH front wheel.

Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the A/C

compressor.
Remove the 2 bolts.
9. Disconnect the A/C clutch electrical connector.

10. NOTE: 1 A/C compressor bolt will remain
captive until the mounting bracket is removed.
Release the A/C compressor.

Remove the 3 bolts.
11. Remove the A/C compressor mounting bracket.

Remove the 2 bolts.
12. Remove the A/C compressor.
Installation
1. Position the A/C compressor to the engine.
If a new compressor is being installed, the required
amount of refrigerant oil must be drained from it.
2. Install the A/C compressor mounting bracket.

3. Secure the A/C compressor.

4. Connect the A/C clutch electrical connector.

refrigerant oil.
Connect the refrigerant lines.

6. Install the front wheel.

Tighten the wheel nuts to 140 Nm (103 lb.ft).
8. Install the oil level indicator and tube.

For additional information, refer to: Oil Level Indicator and
Tube (303-01, In-vehicle Repair).
9. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner.




Specifications).
Air Conditioning - V6 4.0L Petrol - Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure
Transducer
Removal
Specifications).

3. CAUTIONS:


tightening unions.

Installation
Install a new seal.


Specifications).
Pulley
Removal
NOTES:
Components removed for clarity.

Specifications).
2. Using a suitable tool, release the hub locking

stud.
Rotate the fixing clockwise to release
the hub.
If required, use a suitable tool to
prevent the hub from rotating.
3. NOTES:
This step requires the aid of another technician.
Using a 3/8 square drive wrench, rotate the tensioner

counter clockwise.
Release the accessory drive belt from the A/C compressor

pulley.
4. Remove and discard the hub assembly.

Rotate the pulley counter-clockwise,
until the hub is released from the pulley.
Discard the rubber dampers.
5. Remove and discard the spacer.
6. Remove and discard the drive pulley.

Remove and discard the circlip.
Clean the compressor mating surface.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the circlip is fitted in

Install the drive pulley.
Install the circlip.
2. Install the spacer.

Make sure the spacer is fully seated.
3. Install the 6 rubber dampers to the hub

assembly.
Make sure the dampers are installed in
4. NOTE: Apply a suitable water based lubricant to the

rubber dampers and to the mating surfaces on pulley.
Install the hub assembly.

Push the hub assembly onto the pulley, and rotate
clockwise to screw it onto the compressor shaft.
5. NOTE: Tighten counterclockwise.
Using a suitable tool, tighten the hub locking stud.

Prevent the pulley rotating by hand.
Tighten to 3.5 Nm (2.6 lb.ft)
6. Install the auxiliary drive belt.

Specifications).
Air Conditioning - V6 4.0L Petrol - Condenser Core
Removal
refrigerant circuit ( eg. compressor seizure ). The system is leaking and refrigerant has been lost to atmosphere.
Refrigerant circuit has been open more than 24 hours due to repair.

Specifications).


Disconnect the A/C pipes.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Install blanking caps to the exposed
ports.
4. Remove the viscous fan assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03C
Engine Cooling - V6 4.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5. Remove the lower fan shroud.

Release it from the 4 clips
Release the coolant hose.

Installation).

8. Remove the radiator air deflector.
9. NOTE: Always protect the cooling pack

elements to prevent accidental damage.
Release the radiator for access.

Remove the 2 bolts.
10. Remove the power steering fluid cooler.

11. Remove the condenser core.
Remove the bolt.
Installation
1. Install the condenser core.
Secure in the clips.
Tighten the screws.
Install the bolt and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2. Install the power steering fluid cooler.

Secure the clips.
3. Install the reflector air deflector.
4. Install the radiator.


refrigerant oil.
Connect the A/C pipes.

Install the bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

Installation).
8. Install the lower fan shroud.

Position the locating pegs.
Secure the hose to the fan cowl.
9. Install the viscous fan assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03C
Engine Cooling - V6 4.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).


Specifications).
Air Conditioning - V6 4.0L Petrol - Evaporator Core
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover - V6 4.0L
Petrol (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).


safety stands.

Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03C Engine Cooling - V6



and Installation).

Remove the 2 nuts.


Remove the 2 nuts.




mm.


nut.



bulkhead Torx bolt.

contamination.




Remove the 4 nuts.
housing.


bulkhead Torx bolt.

bulkhead Torx bolt.


housing.
Remove the 8 clips.

Installation

Install the clips.


Tighten the bolts.

core housing.








Tighten the screws.

Nm (16 lb.ft).

optic cables.

connectors.

lower A-pillar.

pillar.

pillar.

and Installation).




Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03C Engine Cooling - V6

and Installation).
Air Conditioning - V6 4.0L Petrol - Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal

and Installation).


Remove the cover.
Installation
Install the cover.

and Installation).

Published: 18-Oct-2013
Air Conditioning - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Lubricant
Item Specification
Air conditioning (A/C) compressor oil type Sanden SPA2 oil
A/C compressor oil - vehicles fitted with 2 zone 80ml
A/C compressor oil - vehicles fitted with 4 zone 130 ml
Refrigerant
NOTE: For NAS vehicles.
Item Specification
Refrigerant type R1234yf
Refrigerant - vehicles fitted with 2 zone - vehicles with 3.0 diesel 600 grammes
Refrigerant - vehicles fitted with 2 zone - vehicles with 3.0L/5.0L 650 grammes
Refrigerant - vehicles fitted with 4 zone 900 grammes
Refrigerant
NOTE: For ROW vehicles.
Item Specification
Description Nm lb-ft lb-in
A/C compressor bolts 25 18 221
A/C discharge line to compressor bolt 18 13 159
A/C suction line to compressor bolt 18 13 159
A/C suction line bracket bolts 6 4 53
A/C discharge line to condenser bolt 6 4 53
A/C liquid line to condenser bolt 6 4 53
A/C condenser manifold to radiator bolt 10 7 88
Condenser to radiator bolt - vehicles with 5.0L 10 7 88
Condenser to radiator bolt - vehicles with 3.0 diesel 5 4 44
Evaporator line to evaporator core bolt 6 4 53
Evaporator line bracket nut 6 4 53
A/C liquid line to front evaporator line bolt - vehicles fitted with 4 zone 18 13 159
A/C suction line to front evaporator line bolt - vehicles fitted with 4 zone 18 13 159
A/C lines to rear evaporator bolts - vehicles fitted with 4 zone 9 7 80
A/C pressure transducer 10 7 88
Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) to refrigerant line clamp bolts 5 4 44

1 - Evaporator
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
GENERAL
A compressor.
A condenser.
A receiver drier.
An evaporator.
A/C COMPRESSOR
2.7L TdV6

1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.01 MPa (436 lbf/in2).
3.0L TdV6
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.1 MPa (449 lbf/in2).
4.0L NA V6
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.01 MPa (437 lbf/in2).
5.0L NA V8
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.1 MPa (449 lbf/in2).
CONDENSER

2 - Condenser core
RECEIVER DRIER
1 - Receiver drier
2 - Clamp
4 - O-ring seals
5 - Inlet pipe
6 - Outlet pipe
7 - Collar
8 - Bolt

1 - Metering valve
2 - Housing
3 - Diaphragm
EVAPORATOR
REFRIGERANT LINES
SYSTEM OPERATION

1 - Evaporator
6 - Cooling fan
7 - Condenser
8 - Receiver drier
9 - A/C compressor
12 - Blower
For additional information.

REFER to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Compressor
Removal
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

stands.
2. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding

(303-03B Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General
Procedures).
3. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05B Accessory Drive -

TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,

Evacuation and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System -
General Information, General Procedures).
5. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - TDV6 3.0L

Diesel (307-02C Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - TDV6
3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
6.

coolant.
8.
9.

coolant.
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations
may occur, but the essential information is
always correct.
11. Torque: 6 Nm
12. Torque: 9 Nm
13. Torque: 9 Nm
14. Torque: 9 Nm
15.
16. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed.

Use new blanking caps.
A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
Torque: 18 Nm
coolant.
18.
19. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Air Conditioning - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure
Transducer
Removal

3. CAUTIONS:


tightening unions.

Installation
Install a new seal.


Air Conditioning - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Condenser Core
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Radiator (303-03B

Installation).
2. TORQUE: 5 Nm
Installation
Air Conditioning - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Evaporator Core
Removal

safety stands.

Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03B Engine Cooling -



and Installation).

Remove the 2 nuts.


Remove the 2 nuts.




mm.


nut.



bulkhead Torx bolt.
21. Disconnect both exhaust gas recirculation

(EGR) coolant cross-over pipe hoses.
22. Remove the EGR coolant cross-over pipe.

Remove the 2 bolts.

contamination.



Remove the 4 nuts.

housing.


bulkhead Torx bolt.
bulkhead Torx bolt.


housing.
Remove the 8 clips.

Installation

Install the clips.


Tighten the bolts.

core housing.




15. Install the EGR coolant cross-over pipe.

Secure the clips.
Connect the hoses and secure with the clips.




Tighten the screws.

Nm (16 lb.ft).

optic cables.

connectors.

lower A-pillar.

pillar.
pillar.

and Installation).




Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03B Engine Cooling -
Air Conditioning - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal

and Installation).


Remove the cover.
Installation
Install the cover.

and Installation).

Air Conditioning - V8 5.0L Petrol -
Lubricant
Item Specification
Air conditioning (A/C) compressor oil type Sanden SPA2 oil
A/C compressor oil - vehicles fitted with 2 zone 80ml
A/C compressor oil - vehicles fitted with 4 zone 130 ml
Refrigerant
NOTE: For NAS vehicles.
Item Specification
Refrigerant type R1234yf
Refrigerant
NOTE: For ROW vehicles.
Item Specification
A/C compressor bolts 25 18 221
A/C discharge line to compressor bolt 18 13 159
A/C suction line to compressor bolt 18 13 159
A/C suction line bracket bolts 6 4 53
A/C discharge line to condenser bolt 6 4 53
A/C liquid line to condenser bolt 6 4 53
A/C condenser manifold to radiator bolt 10 7 88
Condenser to radiator bolt - vehicles with 5.0L 10 7 88
Condenser to radiator bolt - vehicles with 3.0 diesel 5 4 44
Evaporator line to evaporator core bolt 6 4 53
Evaporator line bracket nut 6 4 53
A/C liquid line to front evaporator line bolt - vehicles fitted with 4 zone 18 13 159
A/C suction line to front evaporator line bolt - vehicles fitted with 4 zone 18 13 159
A/C lines to rear evaporator bolts - vehicles fitted with 4 zone 9 7 80
A/C pressure transducer 10 7 88
Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) to refrigerant line clamp bolts 5 4 44

1 - Evaporator
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
1 - Evaporator
4 - A/C compressor
5 - Condenser
6 - Receiver drier
GENERAL
A compressor.
A condenser.
A receiver drier.
An evaporator.
A/C COMPRESSOR
2.7L TdV6

1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.01 MPa (436 lbf/in2).
3.0L TdV6
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.1 MPa (449 lbf/in2).
4.0L NA V6
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.01 MPa (437 lbf/in2).
5.0L NA V8
1 - Pulley
2 - Outlet port
3 - Inlet port
3.1 MPa (449 lbf/in2).
CONDENSER

2 - Condenser core
RECEIVER DRIER
1 - Receiver drier
2 - Clamp
4 - O-ring seals
5 - Inlet pipe
6 - Outlet pipe
7 - Collar
8 - Bolt

1 - Metering valve
2 - Housing
3 - Diaphragm
EVAPORATOR
REFRIGERANT LINES
SYSTEM OPERATION

1 - Evaporator
6 - Cooling fan
7 - Condenser
8 - Receiver drier
9 - A/C compressor
12 - Blower

REFER to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Removal

stands.
2. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and

Bleeding - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03B, General Procedures).

4. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05D Accessory Drive -

V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
5. Remove the LH front road wheel.
Torque: 140 Nm
6.

coolant.
coolant.
Torque: 10 Nm
9. CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are

sealed. Use new blanking caps.
10. Torque: 18 Nm
11. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that all openings are sealed.

Use new blanking caps.
A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
Torque:
M8 18 Nm
M6 6 Nm
12.
13. Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Air Conditioning - V8 5.0L Petrol - Condenser Core
Removal
Refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging

System - General Information, Specifications).

stands.

4. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and

Bleeding - V8 5.0L Petrol (303-03B, General Procedures).
5. Refer to: Radiator Grille (501-08, Removal and Installation).
6. Refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03D Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L

Petrol, Removal and Installation).
7.
8.
9.
10.
11. CAUTION: Always plug any open

12.

contamination.
Torque: 10 Nm
14.
15.
16.
17. CAUTION: Always protect the cooling pack

elements to prevent accidental damage.
Torque: 25 Nm
18. Torque: 10 Nm
19. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Air Conditioning - V8 5.0L Petrol - Condenser Fan
Removal
Refer to: Specifications (414-00, Specifications).

stands.
3. Refer to: Hood Latch Panel (501-02, Removal and

Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
Installation
1. To install reverse the removal procedure.

Air Conditioning - V8 5.0L Petrol - Evaporator Core
Removal
and Installation).


safety stands.




and Installation).

Remove the 2 nuts.


Remove the 2 nuts.




mm.


nut.



bulkhead Torx bolt.

contamination.




Remove the 4 nuts.
housing.


bulkhead Torx bolt.

bulkhead Torx bolt.


housing.
Remove the 8 clips.

Installation

Install the clips.


Tighten the bolts.

core housing.








Tighten the screws.

Nm (16 lb.ft).

optic cables.

connectors.

lower A-pillar.

pillar.

pillar.

and Installation).





and Installation).
Air Conditioning - V8 5.0L Petrol - Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal

and Installation).


Remove the cover.
Installation
Install the cover.

and Installation).

Air Conditioning - V8 5.0L Petrol - Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure
Transducer
Removal

3. CAUTIONS:


tightening unions.

Installation
Install a new seal.


Auxiliary Climate Control -
TVX assembly bolts 10 7
Auxiliary climate control assembly bolts 10 7
Auxiliary climate control sealing plate bolts 10 7
A/C pipe bolts 10 7
TVX assembly bolts 10 7
Auxiliary Climate Control - Auxiliary Climate Control
COMPONENT LOCATIONS

1 - Heater lines
2 - ACCM (auxiliary climate control module)
3 - Air distribution ducts
4 - Auxiliary climate control assembly
5 - Refrigerant lines
6 - Rear blower relay
GENERAL
The auxiliary climate control system provides additional air conditioning for the second and third row seat occupants.
The auxiliary climate control system consists of:
An auxiliary climate control assembly.

A refrigerant circuit.
A heating circuit.
A distribution system.
An ACCM.
The automatic temperature control (ATC) module, of the main air conditioning system, is also used in the control of
the auxiliary climate control system.
Cabin air is recirculated through the auxiliary climate control assembly, where the air is temperature regulated and
then directed through the distribution system to registers in the roof, on the C pillars and on the left side of the
loadspace. The volume, temperature and distribution of the air from the auxiliary climate control assembly can be
manually controlled by the ACCM or automatically controlled by the ATC module.
AUXILIARY CLIMATE CONTROL ASSEMBLY

1 - Casing
2 - Distribution door motor
3 - Blower inlet
4 - Solenoid valve
6 - Evaporator connector block
7 - Distribution door
8 - Footwell outlet
9 - Evaporator temperature sensor
11 - Blower
13 - Heater core inlet pipe
14 - Heater core outlet pipe
15 - Evaporator outlet pipe
16 - Evaporator inlet pipe
17 - Heater core
18 - Temperature blend door motor
19 - Face level outlet
The auxiliary climate control assembly is a reheat unit, which cools the air to a constant value then reheats it as
necessary to produce the required temperature. The assembly is installed on the left side of the loadspace, behind
the rear quarter panel. A grille in the rear quarter panel allows air to flow from the loadspace into the auxiliary
climate control assembly.
The auxiliary climate control assembly consists of a casing, formed from a series of plastic molding, which contains:
A blower
A blower control module
An evaporator
A heater core
A temperature blend door
A distribution door
An evaporator temperature sensor.
Refrigerant and coolant lines from the engine compartment are connected to pipes from the evaporator and the
heater core immediately below the loadspace floor. Where the pipes, and the evaporator drain tube, pass through the
loadspace floor, the aperture is sealed by a seal plate.
Internal passages, integrated into the casing of the auxiliary climate control assembly, guide the air from the blower
through the evaporator and heater core to the distribution outlets.
The temperature blend door regulates the flow of air through the heater core to control the temperature of the air
leaving the auxiliary climate control assembly. A stepper motor installed on the rear of the casing operates the
temperature blend door.
The distribution door regulates the flow of air through the face level outlet and the foot level outlet. A stepper motor
installed on the top of the casing operates the distribution door.
The temperature blend stepper motor and the distribution stepper motor are both connected to a Local Interconnect
(LIN) bus, which also connects the ACCM with the ATC module. Each stepper motor incorporates a microprocessor
which operates the motor in response to LIN bus messages from the ACCM. The stepper motors are powered by a
feed from the ATC module, and share a ground connection with the rear blower control module.
The ACCM determines the positions of the distribution and temperature blend doors by using either their closed or
open position as a datum and memorizing the steps that it drives the individual stepper motors. Each time the ACCM
is activated by the ATC module, it checks the memorized position of the stepper motors against fixed values for the
current distribution and temperature settings on the control panel. If there is an error, the ACCM calibrates the
applicable stepper motor, to re-establish the datums, by driving them fully closed or open before re-setting them to
their nominal selected position. A calibration run can also be invoked using T4.
Air Flow Through Auxiliary Climate Control Assembly

1 - Temperature blend door
2 - Auxiliary climate control assembly casing
3 - Face level outlet
4 - Distribution door
5 - Heater core
6 - Evaporator
8 - Blower
The blower is in the air inlet of the auxiliary climate control assembly, and consists of an open hub, centrifugal fan
powered by an electric motor. Operation of the blower is controlled by the ACCM, using the rear blower relay in the
battery junction box (BJB) and the blower control module. The blower control module is installed in the auxiliary
climate control assembly downstream of the blower, where any heat generated during operation is dissipated by the
air flow. A wiring harness on the auxiliary climate control assembly connects the blend door motor, distribution door
motor, blower and blower control module to the vehicle wiring.
Blower Control Module
When the blower is required, the ACCM energizes the coil of the rear blower relay. The energized rear blower relay
supplies battery power to the blower motor, which is connected to ground through the blower control module. The
speed of the blower is controlled by the blower control module, which regulates the blower motor voltage in response
to a pulse width modulation (PWM) signal from the ACCM. To vary the blower motor voltage the ACCM varies the
duty cycle of the signal.
Evaporator Temperature Sensor

The evaporator temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient (NTC) thermistor installed in the auxiliary
climate control assembly on the downstream side of the evaporator. The evaporator temperature sensor supplies a
temperature signal to the ACCM.
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
Two refrigerant lines, low pressure and high pressure, connect the evaporator in the auxiliary climate control
assembly to the front air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant system. On the auxiliary climate control assembly, a solenoid
valve and a thermostatic expansion valve control the flow of refrigerant through the evaporator.
Refrigerant Lines

1 - In-line connections
3 - Connections to auxiliary climate control assembly
The refrigerant lines are routed around the left rear wheel arch and along the left-hand (LH) underside of the vehicle,
and connected to the front A/C refrigerant system at the rear of the engine compartment. The refrigerant lines
consist of sections of aluminum alloy pipes. All except the front section of the pipes are insulated with foam rubber
sleeving.
Solenoid Valve
The solenoid valve allows the auxiliary climate control assembly to be isolated from the front A/C refrigerant system.
Operation of the solenoid valve is controlled by the ACCM switching a ground.
Thermostatic Expansion Valve

2 - Capillary tube
3 - Temperature bulb
The thermostatic expansion valve meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator, to match the heat load of the air
passing through the auxiliary climate control assembly.
The thermostatic expansion valve is installed in the inlet line to the evaporator. Liquid refrigerant flows through the
valve to the evaporator. The restriction across the valve reduces the pressure and temperature of the refrigerant and
changes it to a fine spray, which improves the evaporation process. Valve opening is controlled by the pressure in a
capillary tube containing a temperature sensitive fluid. One end of the capillary tube is connected to a diaphragm
housing on the thermostatic expansion valve, the other end of the capillary tube is sealed and attached to the
refrigerant outlet line of the evaporator. As the temperature of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator changes, a
corresponding change of capillary tube pressure and valve opening are produced. The warmer the refrigerant leaving
the evaporator becomes, the greater the volume of refrigerant allowed through the valve.
Evaporator
The evaporator is installed in the auxiliary climate control assembly between the blower and the heater matrix, to
absorb heat from the recirculated air. Low pressure, low temperature refrigerant changes from liquid to vapor in the
evaporator, absorbing large quantities of heat as it changes state. Most of the moisture in the air passing through the
evaporator condenses into water, which drains out of the auxiliary climate control assembly through the evaporator
drain tube.
HEATING CIRCUIT
Two heater lines, supply and return, connect the heater core in the auxiliary climate control assembly to the engine
cooling system. The heater lines are routed along the rear crossmember, around the right rear wheel arch and along
the RH underside of the vehicle. The heater lines are connected to the engine cooling system at the rear of the
engine compartment. The heater lines consist of sections of aluminum alloy pipes, insulated with foam rubber, which
are connected together with rubber hose joints. Quick release fittings connect the heater lines to the engine cooling
system.
Heater Lines

1 - Quick release connections to engine cooling system
2 - Quick release connections to main heater
4 - In-line connections
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
1 - Second row left face level air duct
2 - Cross-car air duct
3 - Second row right face level air duct
4 - Right C pillar air duct
5 - Third row right face level register
6 - Second row face level registers
7 - Third row foot level air duct
8 - Third row foot level registers
9 - Third row left face level register
10 - Left C pillar air duct
The distribution system consists of a network of air ducts that supply air from the outlets of the auxiliary climate
control assembly to registers installed in:
The headliner, to the left and right of the second row interior lamp, to provide face level ventilation for second
row seat occupants
The left and right C pillar finishers, to provide face level ventilation for third row seat occupants
The loadspace left side molding, to provide foot level ventilation for third row passengers.
The registers can all be adjusted to control the direction and volume of the air flow.
ACCM
1 - Electrical connector
2 - Blower switch
3 - Distribution switch
4 - Temperature switch
The ACCM allows manual adjustment of the output from the auxiliary climate control assembly. The ACCM is installed
in the headliner immediately behind the row 2 interior lamp. An integral control panel contains separate rotary
switches for temperature, distribution and blower speed. When the ACCM is in manual mode, amber light emitting
diode (LED)s in the switch surrounds illuminate to indicate the current settings of the system and function symbols in
the switch surrounds are illuminated when the side lamps or headlamps are on.
The ACCM is disabled when the auxiliary climate control switch on the ATC module is selected off. When the auxiliary
climate control switch is selected to automatic or manual, the ACCM is enabled by the connection of a power feed
from the ATC module. The same power feed also supplies the stepper motors in the auxiliary climate control
assembly.
When it is enabled, the ACCM operates as a slave unit to the ATC module. The ACCM sends status signals on the LIN
(local interconnect network) bus to the ATC module, which replies with command signals of the required temperature,
distribution and blower settings. The ACCM then outputs the necessary drive signals to the auxiliary climate control
assembly:
In the automatic mode, the command signals are derived from the comfort strategy in the ATC module. The
temperature setting is calculated from the mean of the two temperature settings on the ATC module.
In the manual mode, the command signals reflect the temperature, distribution and blower speed set by the
switches on the ACCM control panel. Temperature control by the auxiliary climate control system may be
compromised if the temperature settings on the ATC module are set to maximum hot or cold.
ACCM Harness Connector C0695
ACCM Harness Connector C0695 Pin Details

1 Power supply from ATC module Input
2 LIN bus Input/Output
3 Ground Output
4 Rear blower module power drive Output
5 Blower motor voltage sense Input
6 Cabin temperature sensor signal Input
7and 8 Not used -
9 Sensor ground Output
10 Rear blower relay coil drive Output
11 Solenoid valve drive Output
12 Evaporator temperature sensor signal Input
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired connection; O = LIN bus

1 - Battery
2 - Fuse 22B, central junction box (CJB)
3 - Rear blower relay
4 - Rear blower
5 - Rear blower control module
6 - Solenoid valve
7 - ACCM
9 - Temperature blend door motor
10 - Distribution door motor
11 - ATC module
12 - Fuse 51P, CJB
13 - Fusible link, 17E, BJB
Auxiliary Climate Control - Auxiliary Climate Control
For a detailed description of the auxiliary climate control system and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Auxiliary Climate Control (412-03E Auxiliary Climate
Control, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Air conditioning compressor condition and installation Harnesses
Air conditioning condenser condition and installation/blockage Electrical connector(s)
Air conditioning receiver/drier condition and installation Sensors
Symptom Chart

Poor or no Auxiliary drive Check the auxiliary drive belt condition and tension (see visual
cooling belt fault inspection)
Air conditioning Check the compressor operation (observe the compressor as the engine
compressor is idling with the air conditioning switched on
fault Carry out the distribution motor self test
Distribution Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
motor/flap fault Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATC) for related DTCs and
Refrigerant refer to the relevant DTC index
leak Check the refrigerant system using the charging station
In-vehicle
temperature
sensor fault
Refrigerant
pressure
sensor fault
Noise Auxiliary drive Confirm the air conditioning as the source of the noise by listening for
belt fault the noise with the air conditioning switched off
Air conditioning Check the refrigerant system using the charging station
compressor
fault
Air conditioning
compressor
pulley fouling
Refrigerant
overcharged
Water Heater matrix Check for coolant loss. Pressure test the cooling system as necessary
entry into leak Check and clear the evaporator drain tubes as necessary
cabin Blocked
evaporator
drain tubes
DTC Index
00.
Auxiliary Climate Control - Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal
WARNING: Eye protection must be worn.
1. Remove the climate control assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Climate
Control Assembly (412-03E Auxiliary Climate Control,

removing the components, ensure the area
contamination.
NOTE: The receiver drier need only be

changed under the following circumstances:
There is dirt in the refrigerant circuit ( eg.
compressor seizure ). The system is leaking
and refrigerant has been lost to atmosphere.
Refrigerant circuit has been open more than 24
hours due to repair.
Remove the TXV assembly.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the TXV assembly.
Tighten the screws.
2. Install the climate control assembly.

Auxiliary Climate Control - Heater Core
Removal


contamination.


Remove the 2 bolts.
3. CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage the

paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately
remove the coolant and clean the area with
water.
Remove the heater core.

Carefully release the clips.

Remove the heater core, inlet and outlet pipes.

Installation
1. Connect the heater core inlet and outlet pipes.
Position and secure in the clips.
Install the heater core.

Tighten the screws.

Auxiliary Climate Control - Evaporator Core
Removal


contamination.


Remove the 2 bolts.

water.
Remove the heater core.

Carefully release the clips.
4. Remove 1 screw from the air distribution servo.
5. Seperate the climate control unit.

Remove the 6 clips.
Remove the evaporator end trim.
Installation
Install the evaporator end trim
2. Assemble the climate control unit.

Secure the clips.
Install the screws.
Install the clips.
3. Install the distribution motor.

Tighten the screw.

Install the heater core.

Tighten the screws.

Auxiliary Climate Control - Auxiliary Climate Control Assembly
Removal
WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not remove the
filler cap from the coolant expansion tank while the system is hot.

Specifications).
2. Remove the LH C-pillar lower trim panel

For additional information, refer to: C-Pillar Lower Trim
Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).


safety stands.
5. Support the exhaust system. Release the

center, left and right rear mountings.
6. Remove the exhaust heat shield.

Remove the 4 nuts.
7. Remove the spare wheel and tire.
8. Clamp the relevant hose, to minimise coolant loss.
9. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing the

components, ensure the area around the joint faces and
connections are clean. Plug open connections to prevent
contamination.
NOTE: The receiver drier need only be changed under
the following circumstances: There is dirt in the refrigerant
circuit ( eg. compressor seizure ). The system is leaking
and refrigerant has been lost to atmosphere. Refrigerant
circuit has been open more than 24 hours due to repair.
Disconnect the A/C pipes.

Remove the 2 bolts.

water.
NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable

during this operation.
Disconnect the 2 coolant hoses.

11. Release the sealing plate.

Remove the 3 bolts.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
Connect and secure the electrical connectors.
2. Install the sealing plate.

3. Connect and secure the coolant hoses.

Secure the clips.
Remove the hose clamps.
4. Connect the A/C pipes.

Install the O-ring seals.
Tighten the 2 bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5. Install the heat shield.

Tighten the 4 nuts.
6. Secure the exhaust mountings.

8. Install the C-pillar lower trim panel.

and Installation).

Specifications).
10. Install the spare wheel and tire.

Stow the tool kit.
11. Connect the exhaust extraction hoses to the tail pipes.
12. Remove the coolant expansion tank cap.

Top-up the coolant.
13. Start and run the engine.

Hold the engine speed at 2,500 RPM for 30 seconds.
Return the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
Repeat the above procedure a further four times.
14. NOTE: When the coolant bleed is complete and prior

to installing the expansion tank cap, top up the expansion
tank 30mm above the maximum level.
Install the coolant expansion tank cap.
15. Run the engine until the thermostat opens.
16. Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
17. Check and top-up the coolant if required.

Auxiliary Climate Control - Auxiliary Blower Motor
Removal
Specifications).

and Installation).
3. NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Remove the blower motor.

Installation
1. Install the blower motor.
Tighten the screws.
Connect and secure the electrical connector.

and Installation).

Specifications).
Auxiliary Climate Control - Auxiliary Temperature Blend Door
Actuator
Removal

Remove the blend door motor.

Installation
1. NOTE: Align to the position noted on removal.
Install the blend motor.

Tighten the screws.

Auxiliary Climate Control - Auxiliary Blend Door Actuator
Removal
Specifications).

and Installation).
Remove the air distribution motor.

Installation
Install the distribution motor.

Tighten the screws.

and Installation).

Specifications).
Auxiliary Climate Control - Auxiliary Blower Motor Control Module
Removal
Specifications).

and Installation).
Remove the blower motor resistor.

Installation
Install the resistor.

Tighten the screws.

and Installation).

Specifications).
Published: 02-Dec-2011
Control Components - Control Components
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
NOTE: right-hand drive (RHD) installation shown; left-hand drive (LHD) installation similar

1 - Pollution sensor (Japan only)
2 - Sunlight sensor
3 - automatic temperature control (ATC) module
4 - Center instrument panel switch pack
6 - In-vehicle temperature sensor (all except Japan), or in-vehicle temperature and humidity
sensor (Japan only)
GENERAL
The control system operates the air conditioning (A/C) system and the heating and ventilation system to control the
temperature, volume and distribution of air from the heater.
The system is a dual zone system that automatically adjusts the temperature, volume and distribution of the air from
the heater to maintain the individual temperature levels selected for the left-hand (LH) and right-hand (RH) sides of
the passenger compartment. The system also has manual overrides for the intake air source, blower speed and air
distribution. The system includes:
An ATC module.
Center instrument panel switch pack
An ambient temperature sensor.
A refrigerant pressure sensor.
An evaporator temperature sensor.
An in-vehicle temperature sensor.
A sunlight sensor.
Vehicles in the Japan market also incorporate:
A pollution sensor.
A humidity sensor.
ATC MODULE
The ATC (automatic temperature control) module is mounted on the outboard end of the air inlet duct, behind the
front passenger side of the instrument panel.
The ATC module processes inputs from the center instrument panel switch pack, system sensors and the medium
speed controller area network (CAN) bus, then outputs the appropriate control signals to the A/C system and the
heating and ventilation system. In addition to controlling the A/C system and the heating and ventilation system, the
ATC module also controls the following:
The front seat heaters.

For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
The rear window heater.
For additional information, refer to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (501-11, Description and Operation).
The windshield heater.
The windshield washer jets and exterior mirror heaters.
For additional information, refer to: Rear View Mirrors (501-09, Description and Operation).
CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH PACK

1 - LH temperature switch
2 - LH front seat heater switch
3 - Automatic mode switch
4 - RH front seat heater switch
5 - RH temperature switch
6 - Heated windshield switch
7 - Heated rear window switch
8 - Defrost program switch
9 - Air recirculation switch
10 - A/C (air conditioning) control switch
11 - Blower control switch
12 - Windshield and side window distribution switch
13 - Rear environment
14 - Footwell distribution switch
15 - Face distribution switch
The switches on the Center instrument panel switch pack have the following functions:
LH and RH Temperature Switches: Adjusts the nominal temperature settings of the LH and RH sides of the
passenger compartment. The switch can rotate through 270°, between full cold and full hot. The switch
surrounds are graduated in 2° increments between 16 and 28 °C. Minor detents define 1 °C steps over the
range of the switch. Amber light emitting diode (LED)s in the switch surround illuminate to indicate the
temperature setting. When maximum cold is selected, the ATC module also automatically sets the air source
to recirculated air, blower speed to maximum and distribution to face. When maximum hot is selected, the
ATC module also automatically sets the air source to fresh air, blower speed to maximum and distribution to
footwell.
LH and RH Seat Heater Switches: Activates the heater elements in the seat cushion and seat back at one
of two heat levels. The first press of the switch energizes the heater elements at the higher heat setting and
illuminates two LEDs in the switch. A second press of the switch sets the heater elements to the lower heat
setting and extinguishes one of the LEDs. A further press of the switch de-energizes the heater elements and
extinguishes the second LED. The seat heaters remain on until selected off or the engine is turned off.
Blower Switch: For manual adjustment of blower speed. The switch can rotate through 240°, from off to
maximum speed. Eight primary detents define the off position and seven blower speeds. Minor detents define
small steps between the primary detents. When blower speed is manually adjusted, amber LEDs in the switch
surround illuminate to indicate the selected blower speed. The LEDs remain off when blower speed is under
automatic control.
Automatic Mode Switch: Activates the automatic modes for the A/C system, blower speed and distribution.
Separate amber LEDs in the automatic mode switch illuminate to show when the blower and the distribution
are in automatic mode. Manually selecting the blower speed or a distribution switch extinguishes the related
LED.
A/C control switch: Controls activation of the A/C compressor. Allows the A/C compressor to be selected off
for economy operation. A LED (light emitting diode) switch is illuminated when the A/C compressor is selected
on.
Defrost program switch: Activates a program that automatically selects: inlet air to fresh air; distribution to
screen only; blower to speed 5; rear screen heater on; windshield heater on (where fitted), A/C system to
automatic mode. An amber LED in the switch is illuminated while the defrost program is active.
Heated windshield switch: Energizes the windshield heater for a set time period, until the switch is pressed
again or until the engine stops, whichever occurs first. An amber LED in the switch is illuminated while the
heater is on.
Heated rear window switch: Enabled only with the engine running. Pressing the switch energizes the rear
window heater for a set time period, until the switch is pressed again or until the engine stops, whichever
occurs first. An amber LED in the switch is illuminated while the heater is on.
Air recirculation switch: For selection of fresh or recirculated air. On models without pollution sensing, an
amber LED in the switch is illuminated when recirculated air is selected. On models with pollution sensing, the
recirculation switch incorporates two amber LED. The first press of the switch sets the recirculation flaps to
automatic mode and illuminates one LED. A second press of the switch manually selects recirculated air and
illuminates the second LED. A further press of the switch manually selects fresh air and extinguishes the two
LEDs.
Distribution Switches (Windshield, Face and Footwell): For manual selection of air distribution in any
combination of windshield, face and footwell outlets. Each switch has a LED which illuminates when the related
distribution mode is selected.
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The ambient air temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient (NTC) thermistor that provides the ATC
module with an input of external air temperature. The sensor is attached to a bracket on the rear of the bumper
beam, on the vehicle center-line.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant pressure sensor provides the ATC module with a pressure input from the high pressure side of the
refrigerant system. The refrigerant pressure sensor is located in the refrigerant line between the condenser and the
thermostatic expansion valve.
The ATC module supplies a 5 V reference voltage to the refrigerant pressure sensor and receives a return signal
voltage, between 0 and 5 V, related to system pressure.
The ATC module uses the signal from the refrigerant pressure sensor to protect the refrigerant system from extremes
of pressure and to calculate A/C compressor load on the engine. The ATC module also transmits the A/C compressor
load value to the engine control module (ECM), via the medium speed CAN bus, instrument cluster and high speed
CAN bus, for use in controlling the speed of the engine cooling fan.
To protect the system from extremes of pressure, the ATC module sets the A/C compressor to the minimum flow
position if the pressure:
Decreases to 1.9 ± 0.2 bar (27.5 ± 3 lbf/in2); the ATC module loads the A/C compressor again when the
pressure increases to 2.8 ± 0.2 bar (40.5 ± 3 lbf/in2).
Increases to 33 ± 1 bar (479 ± 14.5 lbf/in2); the ATC module loads the A/C compressor again when the
pressure decreases to 23.5 ± 1 bar (341 ± 14.5 lbf/in2).
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The evaporator temperature sensor is a NTC thermistor that provides the ATC module with a temperature signal from
the downstream side of the evaporator. The evaporator temperature sensor is installed in the right side of the heater
assembly casing.
The ATC module uses the input from the evaporator temperature sensor to control the load of the A/C compressor
and thus, the operating temperature of the evaporator.
IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The in-vehicle temperature sensor is a NTC thermistor installed behind a grill in the instrument panel, on the inboard
side of the steering column. The sensor is connected to a tube, the other end of which is connected to a venturi on
the side casing of the heater. An air bleed from the heater, through the venturi, induces a flow of air down the tube,
which draws cabin air through the grill and over the sensor.
HUMIDITY SENSOR (WHERE FITTED)
The humidity sensor is a capacitive device integrated into the in-vehicle temperature sensor (see above).
The humidity sensor element is constructed from film capacitors on different substrates. The dielectric is a polymer
which absorbs or releases water proportional to the relative humidity of the air being drawn through the sensor, and
thus changes the capacitance of the capacitor. For protection, the sensor element is contained in a nylon mesh cover.
The humidity sensor and the in-vehicle temperature sensor are connected to a PCB (printed circuit board) inside the
sensor housing. The PCB is powered by a 5V feed from the ATC module. Separate signals of temperature and relative
humidity are transmitted from the PCB to the ATC module.
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
The sunlight sensor consists of two photoelectric cells that provide the ATC module with inputs of light intensity, one
as sensed coming from the left of the vehicle and one as sensed coming from the right. The inputs are a measure of
the solar heating effect on vehicle occupants, and are used by the ATC module to adjust blower speed, temperature
and distribution to improve comfort. The sensor is installed in the center of the instrument panel upper surface and is
powered by a 5V feed from the ATC module.
POLLUTION SENSOR (WHERE FITTED)
The pollution sensor allows the ATC module to monitor the ambient air for the level of hydrocarbons and oxidized
gases such as nitrous oxides, sulphur oxides and carbon monoxide. The sensor is attached to a bracket on the front-
end carrier, at the top left corner of the condenser.
The pollution sensor is powered by a battery voltage feed from the ATC module, and returns separate signals of
hydrocarbon and oxidized gases.
If there is a fault with the pollution sensor, the ATC module disables the automatic operation of the recirculation door.
SYSTEM OPERATION
A/C Compressor Control
The variable displacement A/C compressor is permanently driven by the engine. The flow of refrigerant through the
A/C compressor, and the resultant system pressure and evaporator operating temperature, is regulated by the
refrigerant solenoid valve. Operation of the refrigerant solenoid valve is controlled by the ATC module using a 400 Hz
pulse width modulation (PWM) signal. The duty cycle of the PWM signal is calculated using the following parameters:
A/C compressor torque.

A/C compressor torque maximum.
A/C cooling status.
A/C demand.
A/C refrigerant pressure.
Ambient air temperature.
Blower speed.
Engine cranking status.
Evaporator temperature.
Transmission gear status.
When A/C is selected, the ATC module maintains the evaporator at an operating temperature that varies with the in-
vehicle cooling requirement. The ATC module increases the evaporator operating temperature, by reducing the
refrigerant flow, as the requirement for air cooling decreases, and vice versa. During an increase of evaporator
operating temperature, to avoid compromising the dehumidification function, the ATC module controls the rate of
temperature increase, which keeps the cabin humidity at a comfortable level.
When the economy mode is selected, the PWM signal holds the refrigerant solenoid valve in the minimum flow
position, effectively switching off the A/C function.
The ATC module incorporates limits for the operating pressure of the refrigerant system. When the system
approaches the high pressure limit, the duty cycle of the PWM signal is progressively reduced until the system
pressure decreases. When the system pressure falls below the low pressure limit, the duty cycle of the PWM signal is
held at its lowest setting, so that the A/C compressor is maintained at the minimum stroke, to avoid depletion of
lubricant from the A/C compressor. The protection algorithm is calculated at a high rate, to enable early detection of
the rapid pressure changes possible if a system fault develops.
A/C Compressor Torque
The ATC module uses refrigerant pressure, evaporator temperature and engine speed to calculate the torque being
used to drive the A/C compressor. The calculated value is broadcast on the medium speed CAN bus for the ECM,
which uses the calculated value for idle speed control and fueling control. The ATC module also compares the
calculated value with a maximum A/C compressor torque value received from the ECM over the medium speed CAN
bus. If the calculated value exceeds the maximum value, the ATC module signals the refrigerant solenoid valve to
reduce the refrigerant flow and so reduce the torque being used to drive the A/C compressor. By reducing the
maximum A/C compressor torque value, the ECM is able to reduce the load on the engine when it needs to maintain
vehicle performance or cooling system integrity.
Idle Speed Control
In order to maintain A/C cooling performance, the ATC module requests an increase in engine idle speed if the
evaporator temperature starts to rise while the refrigerant solenoid valve is already set to the maximum flow rate.
The increase in engine idle speed is requested in three stages, using a medium speed CAN bus message to the ECM.
For additional information, refer to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - V6 4.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
The need for a change in idle speed is determined as follows:
If the evaporator temperature increases by 3 °C (5.4 °F), or to 6 °C (10.8 °F) above the target operating
temperature, over a 10 seconds period, the first stage of idle speed increase is requested.
When the first stage of idle speed increase is set, if the evaporator temperature increases by 3 °C (5.4 °F), or
increases to 12 °C (21.6 °F) above the target operating temperature, over a 9 seconds period, the second
stage of idle speed increase is requested.
When the second stage of idle speed increase is set, if the evaporator temperature increases by 3 °C (5.4 °F),
or increases to 15 °C (27 °F) above the target operating temperature, over a 10 seconds period, the third
stage of idle speed increase is requested.
When an idle speed increase is set, if the evaporator temperature decreases by 3 °C (5.4 °F) over a 10
seconds period, the next stage down of idle speed increase is requested.
Electrical Load Management
The ATC module manages the vehicle electrical loads to:
Maintain the vehicle battery in a healthy state of charge.

Ensure adequate power is available for defrost demisting during engine warm-up.
Ensure adequate power is available for A/C during extended periods with the engine at idle speed.
To maintain system voltage within acceptable limits.
To provide adequate power to meet customer expectations.
Electrical load management is achieved by increasing the engine idle speed and controlling the electrical load of
systems that do not affect the driveability or safety of the vehicle.
During the engine warm-up period, the ATC module manages the electrical load to make sure that the battery
voltage is maintained above a pre-determined level. The battery voltage level that is maintained and the duration of
the start period varies with ambient air temperature and engine coolant temperature (ECT). After the engine warm-
up period, the ATC module manages the electrical load to make sure that the requested electrical load does not
exceed the generator output.
The duration of the engine warm-up period depends on the ambient air temperature and the ECT, as detailed in the
following table:
Engine Warm-up Times
Ambient Air Temperature, °C ECT, °C (°F)
(°F) <10 >10 to <30 (>50 to >30 to <60 (>86 to >60
(<50) <86) <140) (>140)
Warm-up Period, Minutes
>10 (>50) 15 15 15 15
>5 to <10 (>41 to <50) 15 15 15 15
>0 to <5 (>32 to <41) 10 15 15 15
>-10 to <0 (>14 to <32) 10 10 15 15
<-10 (<14) 5 5 10 15
The ATC module calculates the electrical load from the battery voltage and generator output voltage, and compares
the result against the maximum load available from the generator. The calculation is averaged across the first 20
seconds after the engine starts, and subsequently averaged every 60 seconds. When the engine is turned off, the
ATC module stores the status of the electrical load management for 20 seconds. If the engine is re-started within the
20 seconds, the ATC module resumes electrical load management using the stored status. If the engine is re-started
after the 20 seconds, the timers are reset and the ATC module re-calculates the status.
If the electrical load is more than the maximum load available, the ATC module requests an increase of engine idle
speed using the medium speed CAN bus message to the ECM. If an electrical load imbalance remains after an
increase in engine idle speed, or if the electrical load is more than the capacity of the charging system, the ATC
module reduces the electrical load by reducing the power of some vehicle systems or inhibiting their operation. The
number of systems controlled depends on the electrical load reduction required. The systems controlled and the order
in which their power is reduced or they are inhibited are contained in three priority tables. The table used depends on
the ambient air temperature, battery temperature and ECT:
The cold start table is used when the ambient air temperature is less than 5 °C (41 °F) and the ECT is less
than 30 °C (86 °F).
The hot start table is used when the ambient air temperature is 5 °C (41 °F) or more and the ECT is less than
30 °C (86 °F).
The continuous table is used when battery temperature is more than 5 °C (41 °F) and the ECT is more than
50 °C (122 °F).
If none of the above conditions are met, the ATC module adopts the last used table.
Cold Start Electrical Load Management
Priority System
Power Reduction Inhibited
1 - Air suspension
2 - Front seat heaters
3 - Entertainment system
- 4 Front seat heaters
5 - Rear window heater
6 - Windshield washer jet and exterior mirror heaters
- 7 Windshield washer jet and exterior mirror heaters
8 - Windshield heater
9 - Climate control blower
- 10 Rear window heater
- 11 Windshield heater
Hot Start Electrical Load Management
Priority System
- 1 Front seat heaters; windshield washer jet and exterior mirror heaters
4 - Air suspension
- 6 Windshield heater
- 7 Rear window heater
Continuous Electrical Load Management
Priority System
- 1 Front seat heaters
4 - Air suspension
Engine idle speed changes, and electrical load changes of systems not under direct control of the ATC module (air
suspension and entertainment), are initiated using the appropriate medium speed CAN bus message. When partial
operation is requested:
The air suspension system still performs height changes but reduces air compressor operation by not
replenishing the reservoir.
The entertainment system restricts the maximum volume level and reduces the output frequency bandwidth.
Cooling Fan Control
The ATC module determines the amount of condenser cooling required from the refrigerant pressure, since there is a
direct relationship between the temperature and pressure of the refrigerant. The cooling requirement is transmitted to
the ECM in a medium speed CAN bus message. The ECM controls the condenser cooling using the cooling fan. For
additional information, refer to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - V6 4.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).
Air Temperature Control
Air from the evaporator enters the heater assembly, where temperature blend doors direct a proportion of the air
through the heater core to produce the required discharge air temperature. The two temperature blend doors operate
independently to enable independent temperature selection for the left and right sides of the vehicle interior. The
temperature blend doors are operated by stepper motors. The stepper motors are controlled by the ATC module.
The ATC module calculates the stepper motor position required to achieve the selected temperature and compares it
against the current position, which is stored in memory. If there is any difference, the ATC module signals the stepper
motor to adopt the new position.
Air temperature is controlled automatically unless maximum heating or maximum cooling is selected. The required air
temperature may be adjusted between 16 °C (61 °F) and 28 °C (82 °F) using the air temperature control switches.
The control algorithms then attempt to maintain the desired set temperature.
Turning the temperature switches fully counterclockwise gives maximum available cooling. Turning the temperature
switches fully clockwise gives maximum available heating. When maximum cooling or maximum heating is selected,
the comfort algorithm adopts an appropriate strategy for the air distribution, blower speed,
A/C and air source functions, except where a function is under manual control.
The temperature control of one zone can be compromised by the other zone being set to maximum heating or
maximum cooling. True maximum heating or maximum cooling can only be obtained with both controls set to the
same maximum state.
When the economy mode is selected, the automatic temperature control function still operates, but with no cooling
capability the minimum discharge temperature achievable will be ambient air temperature plus any heat pick up in
the air intake path.
Air Distribution Control
When the A/C is in the automatic mode, the ATC module automatically controls air distribution according to a comfort
strategy. Automatic control is overridden when one of the manual modes is selected. Air distribution remains
manually controlled until the automatic mode is selected again. The distribution doors are operated by two stepper
motors, which are controlled by the ATC module.
Blower Control
When A/C is selected or the blower speed is manually selected, the ATC module energizes the coil of the blower relay
in the battery junction box (BJB). The energized blower relay supplies battery power to the blower motor, which is
grounded through the blower control module. The speed of the blower is controlled by a PWM signal from the ATC
module to the blower control module. The blower control module regulates the blower motor voltage in relation to the
PWM signal.
When the blower is in the automatic mode the ATC module determines the blower speed required from the comfort
algorithms. When the blower is in the manual mode, the ATC module operates the blower at one of seven fixed
speeds as selected on the center instrument panel switch pack.
Maximum Defrost
The maximum defrost function automatically provides the maximum defrosting of the vehicle. When the maximum
defrost function is selected, the ATC module configures the control system as follows:
Automatic mode off.

Air inlet to fresh air, manual control.
Selected temperature unchanged, automatic control.
Air distribution set to screen mode, manual control.
Blower speed set to speed 5, manual control.
Rear screen heater and windshield heater (if applicable) selected on.
A/C mode in automatic.
The maximum defrost function is cancelled by one of the following:
Selecting any distribution switch. The system response will be identical to the normal manual distribution
control operation.
Selecting the automatic switch. This will restore the system to fully automatic operation.
Selecting the maximum defrost switch again. This returns the system to the state in use immediately before
the maximum defrost function was first selected.
Turning the engine off.
The blower speed can be adjusted manually without terminating the maximum defrost function.
Intake Air Control
The source of intake air is automatically controlled unless overridden by manual selection of recirculation. Under
automatic control the ATC module determines the required position of the recirculation door from the comfort strategy
and the input from the pollution sensor (if fitted). The recirculation door is operated by an electric motor, which is
controlled by hardwired analogue signals from the ATC module. A potentiometer in the motor supplies the ATC
module with a position feedback signal for closed loop control.
Provided the intake air has not been manually selected to recirculation, the ATC module adjusts the recirculation door
to reduce the ram effect produced by the forward motion of the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is turned off, the ATC module evaluates the ambient air temperature. If the ambient air
temperature is less than a pre-determined value, the intake air source is set to recirculation, to prevent the ingress
of damp air while the vehicle is parked.
When the vehicle is in the transportation mode, the ATC module sets the intake door to recirculation every time the
engine is turned off, regardless of the ambient air temperature.
Pollution Sensing
With a pollution sensor fitted to the vehicle, the ATC module controls the intake air source to reduce contamination of
the intake air by external pollutants. This function is fully automatic, but can be overridden by manual selection of
the intake air source.
Humidity Sensing
With a humidity sensor fitted, the ATC module controls the moisture content of the air in the vehicle. This is achieved
by raising the evaporator temperature to increase the humidity of the air entering the vehicle, and reducing the
evaporator temperature to reduce the humidity of the air entering the vehicle.
Front Seat Heaters
The front seat heaters are enabled when Power mode 6 engaged, and operate at one of two temperature settings.
With the first press of a front seat heater switch the ATC module adopts the higher temperature setting, supplies a
power feed to the related front seat heater elements and illuminates two amber LEDs in the switch. At the second
press of the switch the ATC module adopts the lower temperature setting and extinguishes one of the LEDs. At the
third press of the switch the ATC module de-energizes the heater elements and extinguishes the second LED. The
seat heaters remain on until selected off or the engine is turned off.
The ATC module receives an input from a temperature sensor in each front seat, and regulates the power feed of the
heater elements to control the seat temperature at the appropriate temperature setting between 35 and 45 °C (95
and 113 °F). The actual temperature settings vary with the type of seat covering, to allow for the different heat
conduction properties of the different materials.
When the front seat heaters are activated at the higher temperature setting, the ATC module automatically resets
them to the lower temperature after a time delay. The length of the time delay depends on the in-vehicle
temperature.
Temperature Reset Time Delay
In-vehicle <-15 (5) -15 to -10 -10 to 0 (14 0 to 15 (32 15 to 25 (59 >25
Temperature, °C (5 to 14) to 32) to 59) to 77) (77)
(°F)
Time Delay, minutes Remains at higher temperature until 20 15 10 5 3
manually de-selected
To protect the heater elements, the ATC module disables front seat heating if battery voltage exceeds 16.5 ± 0.3 V
for more than 5 seconds. Front seat heating is re-enabled when battery voltage decreases to 16.2 ± 0.3 V.
The ATC module monitors the power feeds to the heater elements and disables the applicable front seat heating if a
short or open circuit is detected. The ATC module also disables seat heating if the seat temperature rises significantly
above the target temperature setting.
The plausibility of the temperature sensor inputs is also monitored by the ATC module. When seat heating is selected,
if one of the temperature sensor inputs is within 5 °C (9 °F) below the target temperature, the ATC module monitors
the sensor input for a temperature increase and checks that it is between the minimum and maximum working
temperatures. If a temperature sensor input is at the high end of the working range, while the ambient air
temperature and the engine temperature are within 10 °C (18 °F) of each other, the ATC module disables front seat
heating until the input decreases below the target temperature setting. The ATC module interprets a temperature
sensor input value of -45 °C (-49 °F) or below as an open circuit, and temperature sensor input value of 100 °C (212
°F) or more as a short circuit.
Rear Window Heater
The ATC module controls operation of the rear window heater using medium speed CAN messages to operate the rear
window heater relay in the central junction box (CJB). The control module in the CJB interprets the CAN messages
and switches the ground connection of the relay coil to operate the rear window heater. While the rear window heater
relay is energized, a battery power feed is connected to the rear window heater elements. Rear window heater
operation is only enabled when the engine is running.
The ATC module operates the rear window heater in heating cycles of varying power and time. The heating cycle
used depends on the ambient air temperature and whether it is the initial or subsequent operation during the current
Power mode cycle.
When the rear window heater switch is pressed, the ATC module illuminates an LED in the switch and initiates the
appropriate heating cycle. The LED remains illuminated until the rear window heater is selected off, the heating cycle
is completed or the engine stops. If the engine stalls or turned off, rear window heating resumes if the engine is re-
started within 20 seconds.
On the initial selection of rear window heating, the ATC module uses a short or long defrost phase at full power,
followed by a low power phase. The defrost phase used depends on the ambient temperature. During the low power
phase, the rear window heater relay is cycled off for 80 seconds and on for 40 seconds.
On subsequent operations, during the same Power mode cycle, the ATC module operates the rear window heater at
full power for a fixed time period.
Rear Window Heating Phases
Phase Time, minutes
Short defrost (-5°C (23°F) and above) 10
Long defrost (less than -5°C (23°F)) 15
Low power 20
Subsequent operation 10
Windshield Heater
The ATC module controls operation of the windshield heater using the windshield heater relay in the BJB. The ATC
module switches the ground connection of the relay coil to operate the windshield heater. While the windshield heater
relay is energized, a battery power feed is connected to each of the two windshield heater elements. Windshield
heater operation is only enabled when the engine is running.
The ATC module operates the windshield heater in heating cycles of varying power and time. The heating cycle used
depends on the ambient air temperature and whether it is the initial or subsequent operation during the current
Power mode cycle.
When the windshield heater switch is pressed, the ATC module illuminates a LED in the switch and initiates the
appropriate heating cycle. The LED remains illuminated until the windshield heater is selected off, the heating cycle is
completed or the engine stops. If the engine stalls or turned off, windshield heating resumes if the engine is re-
started within 20 seconds.
On the initial selection of the windshield heater, the ATC module uses a short or long defrost phase at full power,
followed by a low power phase. The defrost phase used depends on the ambient temperature. During the low power
phase, the windshield heater relay is cycled off for 80 seconds and on for 40 seconds.
On subsequent operations, during the same Power mode cycle, the ATC module operates the windshield heater at full
power for a fixed time period.
Windshield Heating Phases
Phase Time, minutes
Short defrost (-5 °C (23 °F) and above) 3
Long defrost (less than -5 °C (23 °F)) 5
Low power 10
Subsequent operation 3
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired connections; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus
1 - Face and feet distribution motor
2 - LH temperature blend motor
3 - Recirculation motor
4 - Windshield distribution motor
5 - RH temperature blend motor
6 - A/C compressor solenoid valve
7 - Sunlight sensor
8 - Pollution sensor
10 - In-vehicle temperature sensor (all except Japan) or in-vehicle temperature and humidity
sensor (Japan only)
13 - ATC module
14 - ECM
15 - ECT sensor
18 - BJB (battery junction box)
19 - CJB
20 - Blower
21 - Center instrument panel switch pack
Control Components - Control Components
For a detailed description of the climate control system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Control Components (412-04 Control Components,

Visual Inspection
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) belt Fuses
Refrigerant Electrical harnesses
Heater control flaps Harness connectors
Ducting Blower motor
Cabin air filter Cooling fan
Coolant level Actuators
Compressor
Cooling fan
Index.
DTC Index
00.
Control Components - Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal
1. Remove the front spoiler.
For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Lower
Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the ambient air temperature sensor.

Release the clip.
Installation
Control Components - Climate Control Assembly
Removal
NOTES:
Make sure that the gear selector lever is in position N before removing any components.
1. Refer to: Floor Console Upper Section (501-12 Instrument

Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
2. Torque: 2.5 Nm
3. CAUTION: When installing the lower

locating tang of the trim panel, make sure the
floor console is not damaged. If necessary
protect the surrounding areas using masking
tape.
NOTES:
LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.
Remove in the sequence shown.
To install, reverse the removal sequence.

4. CAUTION: When installing the lower
locating tang of the trim panel, make sure the
floor console is not damaged. If necessary
protect the surrounding areas using masking
tape.
NOTES:
Remove in the sequence shown.
5. Torque: 2.5 Nm
6. Torque: 2.5 Nm
7.
8.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that all the clips are correctly

installed.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Control Components - Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator LHD
AWD
Removal
Installation).

Release the clip.

Remove the clip.
4. Remove the passenger side footwell duct

elbow.
5. Remove the defrost vent/register blend door

actuator.
Installation
1. Install the defrost vent/register blend door actuator.
Tighten the screws to 1 Nm.
2. Install the passenger side footwell duct elbow.

Tighten the screws.
3. Install the passenger side footwell duct.

Install the clip.
4. Install the passenger side closing trim panel.

Install the interior lamp.
Secure the clip.

Installation).
Control Components - Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator RHD
AWD
Removal

3. Remove the defrost door actuator.

Installation
1. Install the defrost door actuator.
Tighten the screws.

Tighten the screws.

Control Components - Driver Side Temperature Blend Door
Actuator LHD AWD
Removal
2. NOTE: RHD illustration shown, LHD is

similar.

3. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations

always correct.
Remove the temperature blend door actuator.

Installation
1. Install the temperature blend door actuator.

Tighten the screws.

Control Components - Driver Side Temperature Blend Door
Actuator RHD AWD
Removal

3. Remove the temperature blend door actuator.

Installation
Tighten the screws.

Tighten the screws.

Control Components - Instrument Panel Blend Door Actuator LHD
AWD
Removal

always correct.


always correct.
Remove the instrument panel blend door

actuator.
Installation
1. Install the instrument panel blend door actuator.

Tighten the screws.

Control Components - Instrument Panel Blend Door Actuator RHD
AWD
Removal
Installation).

Release the clip.

Remove the clip.

elbow.
5. Remove the instrument panel blend door

actuator.
Installation
1. Install the instrument panel blend door actuator.
Tighten the screws.

Tighten the screws.

Install the clip.

Secure the clip.

Installation).
Control Components - In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Removal
1. Fully extend the steering column for access.
2. Remove the instrument panel access panel.

3. Remove the steering column upper shroud.

4. Remove the steering column lower shroud.

Release the steering column adjustment
lever.
5. Remove the center console upper finisher trim.

6. Remove the audio unit bezel.
7. Remove the instrument panel centre finisher.

8. Release the steering column gaiter panel.
9. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor.

Disconnect the hose.
Installation
1. Install the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
Connect the hose.
Secure the clips.
2. Install the steering column gaiter panel.

3. Install the instrument panel centre finisher.
4. Install the audio unit bezel.
5. Install the center console upper finisher trim.
6. Install the steering column shrouds.
7. Install the instrument panel access panel.

Control Components - Passenger Side Temperature Blend Door
Actuator LHD AWD
Removal
Installation).

similar.
Remove the passenger side closing trim panel.

Release the clip.

similar.
Remove the passenger side footwell duct.

Remove the clip.

similar.
Remove the passenger side footwell duct

elbow.

Installation

Tighten the screws.

Install the clip.

Tighten the screws.
Secure the clip.

Installation).
Control Components - Passenger Side Temperature Blend Door
Actuator RHD AWD
Removal
Installation).

Release the clip.

Remove the clip.

elbow.

Installation
Tighten the screws.

Tighten the screws.

Install the clip.

Secure the clip.

Installation).
Control Components - Recirculation Blend Door Actuator LHD AWD
Removal
Specifications).
2. Make the SRS system safe.

For additional information, refer to: Standard Workshop
Practices (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).

and Installation).

similar.
Remove the recirculation blend door actuator.

Installation
1. Install the recirculation blend door actuator.
Align the control arm to the recirculation blend door.
Install the 3 screws.

and Installation).

Specifications).
Control Components - Recirculation Blend Door Actuator RHD AWD
Removal
Specifications).

Operation).

and Installation).
4. Remove the recirculation blend door actuator.

Installation
1. Install the recirculation blend door actuator.
Align the control arm to the recirculation blend door.
Install the 3 screws.

and Installation).

Specifications).
Control Components - Sunload Sensor
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Installation
Instrument Cluster -
Steering column switch assembly 3 2
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster
OVERVIEW
A new instrument cluster is introduced where in addition to the larger speedometer and tachometer gauges the
cluster also incorporates a Thin Film Transistor (TFT) 5” high-definition display unit.
Instrument cluster overview

1 - Tachometer
2 - Clock
3 - Message center
4 - External temperature
5 - Speedometer
6 - Fuel gauge
7 - Total distance odometer and trip recorder
8 - Gear selector position display
9 - Temperature gauge
The TFT display incorporates a ‘Message Center’ that communicates vehicle information and status data to the driver.
Menus displayed in the message center allow access to a number of vehicle functions through the guidance of the
message center menus. The driver operates the message center using the ‘menu control’ located on the right-hand-
side of the steering wheel. Refer to the ‘Information and Message Center’ section for further information.
The instrument cluster features a number of warning indicators, where in addition to those located within the
speedometer and tachometer gauges, another six indicators are positioned within the TFT unit above the message
center.
DESCRIPTION
Warning Indicators – ROW Diesel Shown

1 - Automatic high beam active warning - green
2 - Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning - amber
3 - Brake system warning – amber
4 - Brake system warning - red
5 - Park brake system warning - red
6 - Left-hand turn signal indicator - green
7 - Warning/information - amber
8 - Glow plug warning / Low fuel warning (dual function indicator) – amber
9 - Check engine MIL warning - amber
10 - Charge indicator - red
11 - Oil pressure warning - red
12 - Critical warning - red
13 - Right-hand turn signal indicator - green
14 - Side lamps - green
15 - Seat belt warning - red
16 - Adaptive Speed Control active - amber
17 - Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) warning - amber
18 - Rear fog lamps active - amber
19 - Tire pressure monitoring warning - amber
20 - Speed control active - green
21 - Ambient light sensor (reference only)
22 - Forward alert active - green
23 - Hill Descent Control (HDC) active - green
24 - Airbag warning secondary - amber
25 - Front fog lamps active - green
26 - High beam warning - blue
27 - Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) off warning - amber
28 - Low range selected - green
29 - Security Light Emitting Diode (LED) - red
30 - Trailer warning - green
31 - Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) active warning - amber
Warning Indicators – NAS Gasoline Shown
1 - Automatic high beam active warning - green
2 - Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning - amber
3 - Brake system warning USA only – amber/red
4 - Brake system warning Canada only - amber/red
5 - Park brake system warning Canada only - red
6 - Park brake system warning USA only – red
7 - Left-hand turn signal indicator - green
8 - Warning/information - amber
9 - Glow plug warning / Low fuel warning (dual function indicator) – amber
10 - Check engine MIL warning - amber
11 - Charge indicator - red
12 - Oil pressure warning - red
13 - Critical warning - red
14 - Right-hand turn signal indicator - green
15 - Side lamps - green
16 - Seat belt warning - red
17 - Adaptive Speed Control active - amber
18 - Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) warning - amber
19 - Rear fog lamps active - amber
20 - Tire pressure monitoring warning - amber
21 - Speed control active - green
22 - Ambient light sensor (reference only)
23 - Forward alert active - green
24 - Hill Descent Control (HDC) active - green
25 - Airbag warning secondary - amber
26 - Front fog lamps active - green
27 - High beam warning - blue
28 - Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) off warning - amber
29 - Low range selected - green
30 - Security Light Emitting Diode (LED) - red
31 - Trailer warning - green
32 - Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) active warning - amber
Stepper motors are used to actuate the mechanical speedometer and tachometer gauges to provide a smooth and
progressive response.
The warning indicators above the message center are functioned using Thin Film Transistor (TFT) technology. LEDs
are used to illuminate the warning indicators in the speedometer and tachometer gauges and provide backlight
illumination of the instrument cluster.
A single ambient light sensor is used to measure cabin lighting and adjust the backlight brightness of the instrument
cluster accordingly. The instrument cluster also incorporates an anti-glare coating.
When the vehicle is locked the TFT unit goes off. When the vehicle is unlocked, a welcome screen is displayed
featuring a Land Rover logo and an image of the vehicle, together with the current date and odometer information.
The coolant temperature and fuel quantity gauges are the default display when the stop/start button is pressed.
These can be overwritten by different permutations of screens which are available to cover numerous vehicle
functions through a menu selection. Refer to the ‘Information and Message Center’ section for further information.
Thin Film Transistor Display Unit

1 - Warning Indicators – this area cannot be overwritten by other information
2 - Message Center – this area can be overwritten by other information
3 - Gear Selection and Digital Speedometer Display - this area cannot be overwritten by
other information
OPERATION
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN; N = Medium Speed CAN; O = LIN Bus;
1 - Battery
2 - Battery Junction Box (BJB)
3 - Steering-column-lock module
4 - Clockspring
5 - Medium-speed CAN bus connection to other vehicle systems
7 - High-speed CAN bus connection to other vehicle systems
8 - Tailgate ajar switch
9 - Engine coolant level sensor
10 - Fuel level sensor
11 - Front brake-pad wear sensor
12 - Rear brake-pad wear sensor
13 - Central Junction Box (CJB)
14 - Washer fluid level sensor
15 - Brake fluid level sensor
16 - Safety belt – occupant detection pressure sensor
17 - Exterior light control switch
The instrument cluster receives a permanent fused supply from the Battery Junction Box (BJB).
The cluster is connected to other vehicle systems and control modules via the:
medium speed CAN bus,

high speed CAN bus and
LIN bus connections
However, some vehicle sensors are hardwired directly to the instrument cluster.
The steering lock control module is connected to a hardwired connection to the instrument cluster. Security
information from other control modules is passed via the network buses and when the conditions are correct the
instrument cluster instructs the steering lock control module to unlock the steering column.
The clockspring is connected to the instrument cluster on a LIN bus connection. The LIN bus passes driver selections
made on the steering wheel mounted switches to the instrument cluster for processing and transmission to other
control modules.
For a detailed description of the instrument cluster system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster,
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage.

Visual Inspection
Electrical
Battery
Fuses
Wiring harness
Damaged, loose or corroded connectors
Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
Instrument Cluster (IPC)
Central Junction Box (CJB)
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Index.
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Instrument Cluster (IPC) (100-00 General Information,
Published: 11-Jan-2012
Removal

Battery and Charging System - General Information,
Specifications).
3. Remove the steering wheel.
4. Remove the headlamp switch trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Side Register Trim
Panel (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal and
Installation).
5. Remove the instrument panel access panel.



Disconnect the electrical connectors.
8. Remove the audio unit control trim panel.
Remove the 2 retaining screws.
9. Remove the steering column side trim panel.

Release the clips.
steering column multifunction switches.

clockspring.
12. Remove the steering column switch assembly.

13. Remove the steering column gaiter panel.
14. Remove the instrument cluster trim panel.

Release the 2 retaining tangs.
15. Remove the instrument cluster.

Installation
1. Install the instrument cluster.
Tighten the screws.
2. Install the instrument cluster trim panel.

Secure the 2 clips.
Secure the 2 tangs.
3. Install the steering column gaiter panel.

4. Install the steering column switch assembly.

5. Connect the clockspring and multifunction switch electrical

connectors.
6. CAUTION: When installing the lower locating tang of the

trim panel, make sure the floor console is not damaged. If
necessary protect the surrounding areas using masking tape.
NOTES:
Make sure that all the clips are correctly installed.
Install the steering column side trim panel.

7. Install the audio unit control trim panel.

Install the 2 retaining screws.

9. Install the instrument panel access panel.

10. Install the headlamp switch trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Side Register Trim
Panel (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal and
Installation).
11. Install the steering wheel.

Specifications).
13. Using the diagnostic tool, configure the instrument cluster.

Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster Lens
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that the dial indicators are not moved during the removal and installation of the lens.
If this occurs, you must not attempt to reset them using your hands as this will affect the calibration of the
instrument cluster and will require a full instrument cluster calibration to be carried out.
1. Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster,

2. CAUTION: To prevent static damage to

the circuits, place the instrument cluster inside
the electro static discharge bag and use the
gloves provided during this procedure.
3. NOTE: Gently release by pressing down

on the white part of the clips.
4. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the

circuit board.
NOTE: Gently release by pressing down

on the black part of the clips.
5. Remove the instrument cluster lens from the
electro discharge bag and discard.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the

circuit board.
Gently install the clips.
2. Gently install the clips and remove the

instrument cluster from the electro discharge
bag.
3. Copy the serial number, build date and
assembly number from the old label onto the
new label.

Horn - Horn

1 - Steering wheel horn switches
3 - Fuse 12
4 - Horn - Low tone
5 - Horn - High tone
GENERAL
Two horns are fitted to the vehicle; a high tone and a low tone. The horns are mounted on brackets, which are
attached to the front end carrier assembly, on each side of the radiator.
The horns are operated by pressing one of the two horn switches, located on each side of the driver airbag, on the
steering wheel.
The horns are also used by the vehicle alarm system. When the alarm system requires the horns to operate, the
Central Junction Box (CJB) provides a ground to the horn relay solenoid, closing the relay contact which in turn
supplies battery voltage to operate the horns.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
The horn circuit is permanently connected to battery voltage and therefore the horns can be operated at any time,
irrespective of ignition switch position.
The horns are controlled by a relay which is an integral part of the CJB. The relay contact and solenoid is connected
to the vehicle battery via a fusible link (Link 17) in the battery junction box and a fuse (F12) in the CJB. The horn
switches, when pressed, complete a ground to the relay which energises the solenoid. The energised solenoid closes
the relay contact and battery voltage is supplied to each of the horns. When the horn switch is released, the ground
for the solenoid is broken, the solenoid is de-energised and the relay contact opens, cutting the voltage supply to the
horns.
Horn - Horn
For a detailed description of the horn system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Horn (413-06 Horn, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Horn(s) condition and installation Battery condition and state of charge
Fuses
Relay
Electrical connections
Horn switches
Clockspring
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Symptom Chart

Horn(s) Low battery voltage Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
operate with Horn circuit short circuit to manual and test the battery
a muffled ground, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
tone power, open circuit, high horn circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
Horn(s) resistance to power, open circuit, high resistance
inoperative Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
check the Central Junction Box (CJB) for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB) (100-00, Description and
Operation).
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center
OVERVIEW
A new instrument cluster is introduced where in addition to the larger speedometer and tachometer gauges the
cluster also incorporates a TFT (Thin Film Transistor) 5” high-definition display unit.
Instrument Cluster Overview

1 - Tachometer
2 - Clock
3 - Message center
4 - External temperature
5 - Speedometer
6 - Fuel gauge
7 - Total distance odometer and trip recorder
8 - Gear selector position display
9 - Engine temperature gauge
The TFT display incorporates a ‘Message Center’ that communicates vehicle information and status data to the driver.
Menus displayed in the message center allow access to a number of vehicle functions through the guidance of the
message center menus. The driver operates the message center using the ‘menu control’ located on the right-hand-
side of the steering wheel.
The instrument cluster also features a number of warning indicators, where in addition to those located within the
speedometer and tachometer gauges, another six indicators are positioned within the TFT unit above the message
center. Refer to the ‘Instrument Cluster’ section for further information.
The TFT display unit comprises three distinct areas, as shown below:
Thin Film Transistor Display Unit

1 - Warning Indicators – this area is fixed and cannot be overwritten
2 - Message Center – this area can be overwritten by other information
3 - Gear Selection and Digital Speedometer Display - this area is fixed and cannot be
overwritten
MESSAGE CENTER
The coolant temperature and fuel quantity gauges are the default display in the message center when the stop/start
button is pressed. These can be overwritten through the guidance of message center menus, to obtain different
permutations of screens which are available to communicate vehicle information and status data to the driver.
Menu Control
The driver operates the message center using the ‘menu control’ located on the right-hand-side of the steering
wheel. A preference menu is available which allows the driver to personalize certain features and functions in the
message center.
Messages displayed in the message center are mainly generated by the instrument cluster which monitors system
status via the medium-speed and high-speed CAN (controller area network) bus systems. Other system control
modules are also capable of generating messages to communicate system status. Some messages are accompanied
by a chime, which is requested by the control module generating the message and functioned by the instrument
cluster via the integral sounder.
The driver can view system status messages which are current in the instrument cluster RAM (random access
memory), by pressing and releasing the menu control to display current messages in priority order; refer to ‘Warning
Messages’.
Vehicle Information and Settings Menu
Menu selections are made using the menu control to highlight the required menu option. Once the required option is
highlighted that option can be selected by pressing the ‘OK’ button. The screen will then display a sub-menu, or
activate the selected item where applicable.
Vehicle Information and Settings Menu

Scroll arrows to the left of the menu indicate that there are further menu items either above or below the currently
viewed menu items. If the arrow is displayed brightly there are additional menu items available. If the arrows appear
dim, there are no additional items. For example, the engine oil level display by can be accessed by selecting ‘Service
Manual’ and then selecting ‘Oil Level Display’.
Engine Oil Level Display
To close the main menu, press the left button on the menu control. To close sub-menus press and hold the left
button on the menu control.
The menu will close automatically if:
no action is taken with the main menu within 10 seconds

action is taken with the main menu and it is then left for 4 minutes
If a further action is taken within the four minutes period, the timer will reset and a further four minutes will have to
elapse before the menu closes automatically.
The following table contains an overview of the information and settings menu and option displays:
Close - Close the vehicle settings and information menu.

Menu
Show - Display all active warning messages.
Warnings
Vehicle Forward Enable/disable the forward alert feature of the adaptive cruise control system.
Set-up Alert
Speed Enable/disable over speed warning and set the monitored speed.
Warning
High Beam Enable/disable the operation of the automatic headlamp high beam feature. Configure
Assist system for driving on the alternate side of road.
Note: Headlamps still need to be manually adjusted.
Alarm This setting allows you to temporarily disable the vehicle's interior space protection and tilt
Sensors sensor the next time the vehicle is locked with Smart Key. This setting is automatically
enabled when the vehicle is unlocked with the Smart Key.
Reverse-dip Enable/disable automatic dipping of exterior mirrors when reverse gear is selected.
Mirror
Drive-away Enable/disable automatic locking off the doors when the vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h (5
Locking mph).
2-Stage Enable/disable the single-point entry door unlocking feature.
Unlocking
Headlamp Enable/disable the headlamp delay feature. Configure the amount of time the headlamps
Delay will remain on: 30, 60, 120 or 240 seconds.
TPM Load Change the monitored tire pressures for the vehicle loading conditions:
Setting
Heavy Load
Light Load
Trip Trip A Enable/disable display of Trip A readings.

Computer
Trip B Enable/disable display of Trip B readings.
Trip Auto Enable/disable display of Trip Auto readings.
Units Select the units to be displayed by the trip computer:
Miles, MPH, MPG

Miles, MPH, MPL
Km, km/h, l/100 km
Display Language Select the language for text displayed in the message center.
Settings
Temperature Select the units for the external temperature reading:
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Service VIN Display Displays the Vehicle Identification Number.

Menu
Oil Level Displays the oil level display.
Display
HBA Change sensitivity of High Beam Assist system:
Sensitivity
Normal Mode
Alternate Mode
Warning Messages
Warning messages are displayed in the message center when a fault is detected or an alert state is triggered. There
are three categories of messages that may be displayed in the message center; the driver is made aware of the
message by an accompanying warning indicator illuminating.
The warning indicators illuminate in one of three colors, which indicate the level of importance of the warning as
follows:
Critical = red indicator accompanied with and audible alert

Warning = amber indicator
Information = green indicator.
NOTE: Messages are displayed in order of importance with ‘Critical’ messages taking priority.
Priority Group ‘P1’ Critical - This group includes messages which have a direct affect on the driving ability and safety
of the vehicle. This type of message requires an urgent and immediate reaction from the driver in response to the
message. P1 messages are also accompanied by an appropriate warning indicator symbol and an audible alert. If
more than one P1 message is present, each message is displayed in turn at 3 second intervals. Critical messages are
displayed in the message center until either the fault condition that caused the message has been rectified or the
message is suppressed by using the menu control on the steering wheel. Critical messages can also be recalled by
using the menu control. If a critical message has been suppressed the accompanying warning symbol will remain
illuminated to indicate that a problem exists.
Priority Group ‘P2’ Warning - This group includes messages which do not directly affect driving ability or safety of
the vehicle. P2 messages are also accompanied by appropriate warning indicator symbol. This message must be
noted by the driver and the cause rectified as soon as possible. Each message is indicated once for a maximum of 23
seconds. Warning messages are displayed in the message center until either the fault condition that caused the
message has been rectified or the message is suppressed by using the menu control on the steering wheel. Warning
messages can also be recalled by using the menu control. If a warning message has been suppressed the warning
symbol will remain illuminated to indicate that a problem exists.
Priority Group ‘P3’ Information – This group displays messages which relate to fluid levels 'LOW WASHER FLUID' for
example, or when an alert state is triggered when driving the vehicle. For example, cancelling cruise control will
display the message ‘CRUISE CANCELLED’. Depending on the message, some are only displayed at the end of a
journey to avoid irritation to the driver. Information messages are displayed for four seconds before extinguishing.
Information Message
The messages are displayed in a language applicable to the vehicle market configuration and can be changed using
the instrument cluster menu. The following list shows the possible messages which can be displayed.
NOTE: If the instruction given in the 'Action' column does not resolve the message display, use the Workshop
Manual Diagnosis and Testing section for the applicable vehicle system to determine the fault and perform any
additional action required.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
The ambient temperature is displayed in the right-hand position at the top of the message center. The temperature
can be displayed in Fahrenheit or Centigrade and this is selectable by the driver using the instrument cluster menu.
ODOMETER AND TRIP METER
Trip Meter
The odometer is located in a central position at the bottom of the message center. In addition to displaying the total
distance the vehicle has traveled. Short presses of the ‘I’ button, on the end of the 'left-hand' steering column
multifunction switch will scroll through the following statistics:
Odometer
Trip distance
Trip average speed
Trip average fuel consumption
Instantaneous, short term average, fuel consumption
Range available from remaining fuel
Blank display
There are three trip memories available: A, B and Auto. The instrument cluster menu is used to select which trip
recording is displayed.
The Auto trip is always available and is reset each time the engine is started and the vehicle moves. Previous trips
can be added to form a continuous trip recording by pressing and holding the trip button when the automatic trip
information is displayed. The message center will confirm that the previous journey information has been added and
pressing and holding the trip button for 1 second will add the data. The previous trip information can also be deleted
by pressing and holding the trip button when the automatic trip information is displayed. The message center will
confirm deletion of the previous journey data and pressing and holding the trip button for 1 second will delete the
previous trip information.
Trip A and B can be reset by the driver at any time. When the required trip information is displayed, pressing and
holding the trip button for 2 seconds will erase the previous trip information stored. Resetting trip A or B will not
affect the other trip information, for example, if trip A is reset, trip B will retain its information until it is reset.
GEAR POSITION DISPLAY
Gear Position Display

The gear position shows the current selector position: P, R, N, D or S.
When the transmission is in manual 'CommandShift' mode, the display will show the currently selected gear S1, S2,
S3, S4, S5 or S6.
The gear position is illuminated in response to 'CAN' bus messages from the TCM (transmission control module).
The instrument cluster has no control over the gear position display and obtains the information by monitoring the
controlling CAN bus messages. If the instrument cluster detects ten incorrect CAN bus messages, 'TRANS. FAILSAFE
PROG' is illuminated in the message center.
If a correct CAN bus message is received when the ignition is next switched on, the error is erased and the message
removed.
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR
A service interval message will automatically appear in the message center when a pre-determined distance or time
before a scheduled service is reached. The kilometer or mileage countdown is controlled by the engine management
system and is adjusted to allow for driving style and conditions to gauge when the appropriate service becomes
necessary.
Service Interval Message
The service indicator displays information calculated by the ECM (engine control module) to the remaining distance to
the next service based on the amount of fuel used since the last service interval indicator reset.
The ECM counts down the distance to engine service and the instrument cluster rounds this down to the nearest 50
miles. The fuel used based count down starts from 3200 miles displaying the required figure in the trip computer
message center, for example 'Service Required in 1950 miles'.
When the ECM has calculated the distance to service is 0 miles, the ECM will request the instrument cluster to display
'Service Required' in the message center.
The ECM also monitors and calculates when the time to the next oil service is required, 'Service Required' is
displayed in the message center. This message takes priority over the distance to service calculation.
The service information is displayed in the message center for 4 seconds at each ignition cycle. There is no minus
figure if the service distance is exceeded, 'Service Required' is displayed until the ECM service counter is reset using
an approved diagnostic system.
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center
For a detailed description of the information and entertainment system and operation, refer to the relevant
Description and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Information and Message Center (413-08
Information and Message Center, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Message center screen Fuses
Wiring harness
Electrical connector(s)
Battery condition, state of charge
Instrument Cluster (IC)
Index.
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Instrument Cluster (IPC) (100-00 General Information,
Warning Devices -
Low tire pressure module bolts 10 7
Warning Devices - Low Tire Pressure Module
Removal
NOTE: If the tire pressure module is to be replaced then T4 must be connected and the correct procedures
adhered to, prior to battery disconnection.

Specifications).
2. Remove the LH A-pillar upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel
(501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the LH B-pillar upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Upper Trim
and Installation).
4. Remove the LH C-pillar upper trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: C-Pillar Upper Trim
and Installation).
5. Remove the LH sun visor.

Remove the cover.
6. Remove the sun visor retaining clip.

Release the screw cover.
Remove the screw.
7. Remove the LH passenger assist handles.

Carefully release the 6 screw covers.
8. Release the LH side of the headliner.
9. Remove the low tire pressure module.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the low tire pressure module.
2. Secure the LH side of the headliner.

Carefully secure the clips.
3. Install the LH passenger assist handles.

Install the screws.
Install the screw covers.
4. Install the sun visor retaining clip.

Install the screw.
Install the screw cover.
5. Install the LH sun visor.

Install the screws.
6. Install the LH C-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).
7. Install the LH B-pillar upper trim panel.
and Installation).
8. Install the LH A-pillar upper trim panel.

Installation).

Specifications).
Engine Protection System -
Passive anti-theft system (PATS) module bolts 10 7
Parking Aid -
Parking aid module nuts 5 4
Parking Aid - Parking Aid
Parking Aid Component Location

2 - Parking aid sounder
3 - Rear sensors
4 - Parking aid module
5 - Parking aid switch
6 - Front sensors
7 - Touch screen display (TSD)
INTRODUCTION
The parking aid system provides an audible warning to the driver when any obstacles are in the path of the vehicle
during a forward (if front sensors fitted) or reversing manouevre. The purpose of the system is to assist the driver
when parking or manoeuvring in restricted space. It is not designed as a crash avoidance system or a replacement
for visual interpretation by the driver.
All vehicles are fitted with rear parking aid sensors. Higher specification vehicles may be fitted with both front and
rear sensors.
The system comprises 4 ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumper, 4 ultrasonic sensors in the front bumper (if fitted), a
control module, a fascia mounted control switch, a rear sounder unit and a front sounder unit (integral with the
instrument cluster).
If an obstacle is sensed by the rear parking aid sensors, the rear sounder unit will emit a tone. If an obstacle is
sensed by the front parking aid sensors (if fitted), the front sounder unit will emit a tone.
The PDC audio tone pitch is different between the front and rear, the rear tone is a higher pitch than the front.
The parking aid system operates using ultrasonic signals which are transmitted by the sensors. The reflected echo
from this output is received by the sensors and used by the control module to calculate the distance from an object.
The fascia mounted control switch allows the driver to activate/deactivate the parking aid system if operation is
required or not required.
NOTE: The control switch is only fitted to vehicles with front and rear parking aid sensors.
CONTROL MODULE
The parking aid control module is located in the left hand rear quarter panel, behind the side trim panel. The control
module uses a single microprocessor to perform the following tasks:
Control of the ultrasonic sensors

Monitoring of the sensors
Evaluation of received echo signals from the sensors
Noise and disturbance suppression
Control of the parking aid sounders
Monitoring of the sounders and associated wiring
Control and monitoring of the switch status LED (light emitting diode) and associated wiring
Evaluation and monitoring of the control inputs
Management of diagnostic and test functions
Monitoring of power supply
Communication via diagnostic link.
The control module is connected to the vehicle electrical system by either 3 (vehicles fitted with front and rear
sensors) or 2 (vehicles fitted with rear sensors only) multiplug connectors.
Inputs and Outputs
The module receives inputs from the following:
Reverse selected - CAN (controller area network) message from transmission control module (automatic
transmission) or transfer box control module (manual transmission).
Forward gear selected (not in reverse or neutral) - CAN message from transmission control module (automatic
transmission) or transfer box control module (manual transmission).
Parking aid switch
Trailer fitted - CAN message for CJB (central junction box)
Ignition - power supply
The module outputs signals to the following:

Sensors - power and ground connections
Sensors - digital signal - transmit and receive signals
Rear sounder - varying frequency output
Front sounder - CAN message to instrument cluster
Parking aid switch - power supply for switch LED operation
PARKING AID SENSORS

1 - De-coupling ring
2 - Front parking aid sensor
3 - De-coupling ring
4 - Rear parking aid sensor
Four sensors are positioned in the rear bumper and the front bumper (if fitted). Each sensor housing has two raised
location keys which locate in corresponding grooves in the sensor housing and sets the correct orientation for the
sensor bodies.
Each sensor has a three pin connector which connects into a common harness linking all four sensors. This harness is
connected to the main vehicle body harness for the rear sensors or the engine compartment harness for the front
sensors. The three pins are for sensor negative and positive feeds and a signal line.
CONTROL SWITCH
The parking aid switch, located in the center console, is non-latching with an integral LED. The switch receives a 12V
output to drive the LED when required. The switch is also connected to ground. When the switch is operated, the
momentary completion of the ground is interpreted by the parking aid module as a signal to enable or disable the
parking aid system.
NOTE: The control switch allows the driver to activate/deactivate the parking aid system if operation is required
or not required.
Parking Aid Sounder
Rear parking aid sounder

The parking aid sounder is controlled by the parking aid module and emits a series of tones of varying frequency to
inform the driver of the distance between the vehicle and a detected object.
The rear parking aid sounder is located in the left-hand side of the luggage compartment, behind the side trim panel,
below the window. The sounder is secured with two, self tapping screws into the body. The sounder is connected to
the parking aid module via a harness connector.
The front parking aid uses the instrument cluster sounder and is activated by CAN messages from the parking aid
module to the instrument cluster.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN; N = Medium Speed CAN bus

1 - Battery
2 - Battery Junction Box (BJB)
3 - Parking aid module
5 - Rear parking aid sounder
6 - Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) module
8 - ABS module
9 - Transmission control module
10 - Transfer box control module
11 - Left outer front sensor
12 - Left inner front sensor
13 - Right inner front sensor
14 - Right outer front sensor
15 - Left outer rear sensor
16 - Left inner rear sensor
17 - Right inner rear sensor
18 - Right outer rear sensor
19 - Parking aid switch
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Vehicles Fitted With Automatic Transmission
If reverse (R) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on, both the front (if fitted) and rear parking aid
sensors will become operational. If a forward drive gear is subsequently selected, the front and rear parking aid
sensors will remain operational until vehicle speed increases above 16 km/h (10 mph), park (P) is selected or the
PDC control switch is pressed.
If drive (D) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on the parking aid system will have to be activated
by pressing the PDC control switch.
NOTE: The PDC system can not be activated whilst the vehicle is in park (P).
Vehicles Fitted With Manual Transmission
If reverse (R) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on, both the front (if fitted) and rear parking aid
sensors will become operational. If a forward drive gear is subsequently selected, the front and rear parking aid
sensors will remain operational until vehicle speed increases above 16 km/h (10 mph), or the PDC control switch is
pressed.
If a forward gear is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on the parking aid system will have to be
activated by pressing the PDC control switch.
Audible Warnings
The control module processes the distance readings from the ultrasonic parking aid sensors to determine if there are
any objects within the detection areas. If there are no objects no audible warning is produced. If an object is
detected, repeated audible warnings are produced via the PDC sounders. The time delay between the audible
warnings decreases as the distance between the detected object and the vehicle decreases until eventually a
continuous tone is emitted from the sounders.
Distance Calculation for Audible Warnings
The detection ranges of the sensors are shown in the table below.
Item Number Sensor Location Maximum Detection Range Audio Tone Continuous Audio Tone
1 Rear/Front Outer Approximately 600 mm (24 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
2 Rear Inner Approximately 1800 mm (71 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
3 Front Inner Approximately 800 mm (31 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
After the initial detection of an object, if there is no decrease in the distance between an object and the central
sensors, the time delay between the audible warnings remains constant. If an object is detected by one of the corner
sensors only, the audible warnings stop after approximately 3 seconds if there is no change in the distance between
an object and the corner sensor.
Detection Calculation
When operating in the combined transmitter and receiver mode, the sensor outputs a number of ultrasonic pulses and
receives the reflected echo signal. The control module amplifies the received echo signals and compares them with a
preprogrammed threshold to calculate the distance to the object. This is achieved by determining the elapsed time
between the transmission and reception of the ultrasonic signal.
When operating in receiver mode, the sensor receives echo signals transmitted by an adjacent sensor. This mode is
used to improve the accuracy of the system.
The detection cycle consists of the control module operating 1 sensor in the combined transmitter and receiver mode
and transmitting a number of pulses. The control module then switches the transmitting sensor and the adjacent
sensor(s) to receiver mode. After a short time delay this sequence is repeated using a different sensor to transmit
the ultrasonic signal. This sequence is completed in 100 ms. The control module uses several measurements of the
same sensors to remove errors from the calculation.
If the detected object is directly behind a sensor, the distance is calculated using the time between the transmission
and reception of the ultrasonic signal. If the object is positioned between 2 sensors, the control module uses both
signals to determine the correct distance using triangulation.
To perform the triangulation calculation, the control module must know the distance between the individual sensors in
the bumper. This information is stored in the control module memory. From the received distance signal from each
sensor and using the known distance between adjacent sensors, the control module can calculate the minimum
distance from the vehicle to the detected object.
If an obstacle is sensed by the rear parking aid sensors, the rear sounder will emit a tone. If an obstacle is sensed
by the front parking aid sensors (if fitted), the front sounder will emit a tone.
When approaching several objects within detection range, the control module recognises the distance from the vehicle
to the nearest object.
The PDC module will prioritise the objects detected, the nearest object detected will take priority and the
corresponding audio outputs will be emitted. For example if 2 objects are detected (one front one rear) the nearest
detected object will take priority and relevant audible tone will be heard.
If two objects are detected at equal distance (one front one rear) the audible tones will alternate between the front
and rear sounders.
The parking aid module receives a signal on the CAN from the CJB when a trailer is fitted. When this signal is
detected, the parking aid module suspends operation of the rear parking aid sensors.
NOTE: The ignition needs to be cycled once the trailer has been disconnected to activate the rear parking aid
system.
Diagnostics
The control module has a diagnostic connection via the medium speed CAN bus to enable faults to be retrieved using
the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment. Additionally an on-board diagnostic routine within the control module
constantly monitors the system and alerts the driver to a system fault by emitting a 3 second continuous tone
through the rear sounder when the ignition is switched on. If front parking aid sensors are fitted, the control switch
LED will also flash 6 times.
LO-LINE CAMERA SYSTEM
A shielded co-axial cable connection between the camera and the Touch Screen Display (TSD) is used for the video
image transmission.
The camera receives power at all times when the ignition is in power mode 6. When reverse gear is selected, the CJB
transmits a reverse selected signal on the medium speed CAN bus message to the integrated audio module (IAM).
When reverse gear is deselected, the camera image remains on the TSD for 10 seconds after the transmission has
been put into drive 'D'. This is to prevent the TSD switching between screens if the vehicle is being manoeuvred into
a parking space. If the vehicle forward speed exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph) within the 10 second period, the camera
image is removed from the TSD.
If the TSD display is switched off, the camera image will be automatically displayed when reverse gear is selected.
When reverse gear is deselected and the 10 second period has expired, the TSD will revert back to its switched off
state.
Rear View Camera

The rear view camera provides additional information to the driver when reversing the vehicle. When reverse gear is
selected the camera integrated into the tailgate handle assembly, automatically displays a wide-angle color image of
the view from the rear of the vehicle onto the TSD.
The rear view images are overlaid with:
Dashed lines representing the perimeter of the vehicle.

Fixed solid lines representing the vehicle’s axle width.
The camera is connected to the vehicle harness by one 3 pin connector for the power, ground and the video co-axial
cable.
The image captured by the camera is mirrored to give the driver a true representation of the rear view on the TSD.
NOTE: The lo-line camera has no “intelligence” and simply transmits a video signal through the coaxial cable.
The display of the camera image is controlled solely by the TSD dependant on reverse gear. The camera system has
no diagnostic information available through the Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN; I = CVBS Composite Video; N = Medium Speed CAN P = Most
1 - Battery
3 - Rear view camera
4 - To MOST ring
5 - TSD
6 - TCM (transmission control module)
7 - Transmission selector lever
8 - ABS (anti-lock brake system) module
HI-LINE CAMERA SYSTEM
Proximity Camera Component Location

1 - Right-hand mirror camera
4 - Left-hand mirror camera
5 - Control module
6 - Left-hand-front bumper camera
7 - Right-hand-front bumper camera
OVERVIEW
The proximity camera system provides the driver with a visual-aid when maneuvering the vehicle at low speeds. The
system uses a dedicated control module to capture the camera data and display the resulting images on the TSD
(Touch Screen Display), providing the driver with a 360° view around the vehicle. The camera system is also
supported by various driving-aid features where graphical information and warnings are superimposed onto the
images displayed on the TSD.
The proximity camera system uses five VGA (Video Graphic Array) resolution cameras:
two mounted in the front bumper

one mounted in each door mirror
one mounted in the rear tailgate handle assembly.
Camera Coverage Zones

1 - Front camera coverage zone
2 - Right-hand mirror camera coverage zone
3 - Rear camera coverage zone
4 - Left-hand mirror camera coverage zone
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Proximity Camera Control Module

1 - Power supply, ground and BUS connector
2 - Connection to touch screen display
3 - Five camera connections
The proximity camera control module is located under the left-hand-front seat; connections to the module include:
medium speed CAN network

five camera inputs
video signal output to the TSD
power supply and ground.
The control module gathers the camera images and analyses and alters them by adjusting perspectives and applying
corrections. The resulting processed images are then relayed to the touch screen display via the NTSC (National
Television System Committee) analogue video line.
The control module also adds guidance and warning overlays to the camera images to create the various driving-aid
features supported by the camera proximity system; for example, visual direction is made available when reversing
the vehicle.
The module communicates with each individual camera via the LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection. This
data link transmits diagnostic information, for example camera serial numbers and fault notifications to the control
module. Camera adjustments, for instance a correction to color-balance are also communicated via the LIN bus link
to the camera.
NOTE: Care must be taken when routing, disconnecting and reconnecting the camera harnesses.
Cameras
The system uses five VGA resolution cameras, permanently powered whenever the ignition is 'on'. Each camera
provides an image covering a zone approximately 130° wide by 112° deep and is capable of capturing approximately
thirty frames per second.
The cameras employ high-quality digital, HDR (High Dynamic Range) imaging, which is a set of techniques that
allows a greater range of luminance between light and dark areas of an image scene. This allows HDR to more
accurately represent the varying intensity levels found in the image scenes that can range from direct sunlight to
deep shadows.
NOTE: Reversing lights are crucial to successful night operation of the rear view camera.
Front Camera mounting

1 - Camera ‘break free’ bracket
2 - Camera
To reduce the cost of accident repair the mounting of the front bumper cameras feature a ‘snap free’ bracket. On
impact, the bracket will release the camera preventing damage to the camera itself. Depending on the severity of the
accident it may also be possible to reuse the brackets as they are manufactured from a memory type plastic.
The front cameras are not ‘handed’ so therefore interchangeable. This is also applicable for the door-mirror cameras,
although these cameras do feature the approach lighting LED integral within the camera body.
The positioning accuracy of all the cameras is crucial for the successful operation of the proximity camera system.
The camera housings are manufactured using metal to maintain a structural stability in high-ambient temperatures.
Without this stability a loss of image focus would be a possibility, therefore care must be taken when mounting the
cameras in ensuring they sit correctly into their locations. Secure mounting of the cameras provides an initial ‘build
up’ tolerance accurate to 2mm. In the event of camera replacement a calibration routine must be performed.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN; O = LIN Bus; AD = NTSC Signal; AE = LVDS Signal.

1 - Battery
2 - BJB
3 - Steering wheel angle sensor
4 - Front bumper camera
5 - Front bumper camera
6 - Proximity camera control module
7 - Mirror camera
8 - Mirror camera
10 - Touch Screen Display (TSD)
SYSTEM OPERATION
Automatic Operation
All markets except Japan
When reverse gear is selected the rear camera view is shown.

The images will automatically switch off when the vehicle speed exceeds 18 km/h (11 mph) or a forward gear
has been selected for more than five seconds.
Japanese Specification Vehicles Only
When either Drive (D) or Reverse (R) are selected the relevant camera view for the direction of movement is
shown.
When ‘Reverse’ is selected rear camera and RH (right-hand) mirror camera views will be shown.
When ‘Drive’ is selected front camera and RH mirror camera views will be shown.
The images will automatically switch off when the vehicle speed exceeds 18 km/h (11 mph), the automatic
camera function will only operate once per ignition cycle.
Manual Operation
The camera views can be accessed by selecting the ‘Cameras’ icon on the ‘Navigation’ home screen on the
TSD.
Selecting Views
Displayed on the home page are real-time images transmitted from each of the five cameras.
Any two of the images can be selected and enlarged to view side-by-side on the screen.
When viewing any two images, any single image can then be selected to view as a full screen image which
can be zoomed and panned around using the magnifier and arrow icons.
Manual Proximity View
Selecting proximity view from the camera home screen will display a combination of three images, from both
front cameras and the passenger side door mirror camera. These images provide the driver with an enhanced
view of the area forward and opposite the driver.
Rear View Camera

The rear view camera provides additional information to the driver when reversing the vehicle. When reverse gear is
selected the camera integrated into the tailgate handle assembly, automatically displays a wide-angle color image of
the view from the rear of the vehicle onto the TSD.
The rear view images are overlaid with:
Dashed lines representing the perimeter of the vehicle.

Solid lines representing the predicted trajectory of the vehicle; calculated from the steering wheel angle
sensor.
Colored bars represent the amount of distance between the vehicle and the object being approached. Working
in conjunction with the standard ‘rear parking aid’ this adds a visual representation to the existing audible
warning. The distance data is received from the parking aid module via the medium speed CAN.
The reversing-aid graphics can be disabled in the settings menu or by touching the TSD whilst reverse gear is
selected and the camera view is displayed.
Reversing Visual Warnings

1 - Object being approached - ‘yellow strip’ with steady intermittent warning tone
2 - Object being approached - ‘orange strip’ with faster intermittent warning tone
3 - Object being approached - ‘red strip’ with continuous warning tone
The rear view image will not be displayed when any of the following apply:
Drive is selected for longer than 5 seconds.

Drive is selected and the vehicle speed is greater than 18 km/h (11 mile/h).
Special Views
The special views are a selection of pre-set views that provide the driver with some useful driving aids. These can be
considered as a shortcut to some pre-determined images that have been developed to assist the driver in various
situations:
Curb view: downward view from the two door mirror cameras.
Junction view: outward view from the two front cameras.
Trailer view: rear camera view of trailer being towed.
System Calibration
This level of accuracy must be maintained after any service procedures are performed on the vehicle that affects the
proximity camera system. Should the control module or any one of the cameras require replacement, static re-
calibration must be carried out using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment.
Camera replacement is detected by the proximity camera control module, through the recognition of a new serial
number during the ‘camera count’ procedure that takes place during the ‘ignition on’ phase via the LIN. This
detection will log a DTC (diagnostic trouble code) advising a calibration routine should be performed.
Alignment adjustments to the cameras are performed using the diagnostic equipment and the vehicle’s TSD (touch
screen display). During the calibration procedure, setup software in the control module overlays fine colored lines on
the TSD highlighting reference points on the bodywork. For example, the mirror camera image must capture the side
repeater indicator, the shut-line of the doors and the lower sill trim.
Direction arrows are pressed to shift the image in the desired direction to meet the reference points viewed on the
TSD.
Adjustments include:
Up
Down
Left
Right
Rotation
When the reference points correspond exactly, the setting is saved and the calibration procedure is complete for that
camera.
NOTE: If body repairs are performed that affect the camera system, a calibration procedure must be executed
after the repairs are completed.
System Fault
In the event of camera fault, a DTC is logged in the proximity camera control module and an icon is presented to the
driver on the TSD (touch screen display) where the camera image would normally be viewed.
TOW HITCH ASSIST
The rear view camera provides additional information to the driver when hitching a trailer to the vehicle. When
reverse gear is selected the camera integrated into the tailgate handle assembly, automatically displays a wide-angle
color image of the view from the rear of the vehicle onto the TSD (touch screen display).
Within the settings menu the driver can activate the Hitch Guidance and Auto-towball Zoom feature. Hitch guidance
provides a trajectory line indicating the path of the towball in relation to the steering angle applied to the vehicle.
‘Auto-towball Zoom’ initiates an automatic image zoom when the trailer is within 60cm of the towball to allow more
accurate alignment of vehicle to trailer.
1 - Touch Screen Display – Auto towball Zoom feature
2 - Tow ball trajectory line
3 - Automatic zoom
TOW ASSIST
Tow Assist aids the driver with the reversing of a trailer by displaying information on the TSD (touch screen display).
The system uses a tracking target sticker attached to the trailer to monitor and predict the direction of the trailer.
Calculations are made by the proximity camera control module, based on the relationship of angles between the
vehicle and trailer and the current steering wheel position.
Tow Assist becomes active when a trailer is attached to the vehicle and the trailer electrical plug is attached to the
vehicle socket. The CJB detects the connection has been made and sends a message via the medium speed CAN to
the proximity camera control module.
NOTE: If the connection is not detected, setup can be manually prompted by touching the ‘Tow Assist’ icon on
the ‘Camera’ menu.
Tow Assist – New Trailer
When the CJB detects the trailer electrical plug has been connected, the trailer setup screen is displayed
automatically on the TSD with the question: ‘Has a trailer been connected?’
Selecting ‘Yes’ will bring up the first of a number of trailer setup screens. On first use the setup screens take the user
through a series of configuration options for the connected trailer. To configure a new trailer select ‘Add New’ and
then ‘OK’.
Trailer Setup – Step 1 of 6
Choose from the list of generic trailer descriptive names for the trailer attached, then select ‘Next’.
Position the trailer straight behind the vehicle, to allow more accurate positioning of the target. Stick the self
adhesive tracking target to the front of the trailer within the orange highlighted zone displayed, then select
‘Next’.
The highlighted zone will turn green when the target sticker is correctly positioned.
Tracking target sticker

Select the correct number of axles for the chosen trailer, then select ‘Next’.
Select the preferred camera view for use with this trailer, then select ‘Next’.
NOTE: The Side Cameras view is more suited to tall and/or long trailers for example caravans. The Reverse
Camera view is more suited to small and/or short trailers.
Using the numeric pad, enter the Hitch Length of the trailer, then select ‘Next’.
NOTE: Hitch Length is the distance from the hitch point to the pivot point of the trailer. The pivot point will vary
depending on the number of axles, and will be:
the center-line of the axle on a single axle trailer,

the mid-point between the axles on a twin axle trailer,
the center line of the center axle on a triple axle trailer.
Using the distance adjustment buttons, set the orange overlay graphics at the width of the trailer wheels and
then select ‘Finish’.
NOTE: The orange overlay graphics determine the position of the trailer reverse guidance lines.
A confirmation message will appear to show that the trailer information has been retained.
Finally, highlight the trailer that has been memorized, and select ‘OK’.
NOTE: In order to learn the central position of the trailer, the vehicle must be driven forwards at less than
15mph with the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position. There is currently no confirmation for when this
process has completed, however the status can be derived by selecting Reverse gear and noting the presence of
message 'Trailer tracking in progress'. Whilst tracking feature is learning the central position, the trailer trajectory
lines will appear in a light blue color, when process is complete they will change to a dark purple color.
The Tow Assist feature is now ready to use.
Tow Assist – Previously Saved Trailer
When the CJB detects the trailer electrical plug has been connected, the trailer setup screen is displayed
automatically on the TSD with the question: ‘Has a trailer been connected?’
Selecting ‘Yes’ from the previous screen brings a list of pre-set, or previously saved, trailers. Highlight the required
trailer, and select ‘OK’.
NOTE: In order to learn the central position of the trailer, the vehicle must be driven forwards at less than
15mph with the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position. There is currently no confirmation for when this
process has completed, however the status can be derived by selecting Reverse gear and noting the presence of
message 'Trailer tracking in progress'. Whilst tracking feature is learning the central position, the trailer trajectory
lines will appear in a light blue color, when process is complete they will change to a dark purple color.
The Tow Assist feature is now ready to use.

Parking Aid - Parking Aid
For a detailed description of the Park Distance Control (PDC) system, characteristics and limitations refer to the
relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop manual. REFER to: (413-13)
Parking Aid (Description and Operation),

Parking Aid (Description and Operation).
PDC System On-Board self-test
As part of the strategy of the system if any DTC’s are detected, a long high-pitched tone approx 3 seconds will
sound and the PDC switch (where fitted) indicator LED will flash 6 times at ignition on.
If a fault is present when the PDC system is activated then the PDC switch (where fitted) status LED will
flash 6 times indicating an issue with front or rear PDC sensors, wiring switch, PDC control module or
hard wired sounders.
The rear PDC sounder/rear audio system will emit an error tone for approx 3 seconds at ignition on if a
fault is detected with the front or rear sensors, the switch, or if there is a controller area network (CAN)
bus error.
(Only applicable to vehicles fitted with front PDC and a hard wired rear PDC sounder). If there is a fault
with the rear PDC sounder the error tone will come from the front PDC sounder unit (integral with the
instrument cluster).
Audible and Visual Warnings when PDC System is in Error State
Rear PDC
Fitted and
No PDC
Switch Front and Rear PDC Fitted with PDC Switch
Fitted Rear PDC Fitted and PDC Switch Fitted Fitted
A long high- A long high-pitched error tone will sound A long high-pitched error tone will sound
pitched error at ignition on for approx 3 seconds and at ignition on for approximately 3 seconds
tone will the PDC switch indicator LED will flash 6 and the PDC switch indicator LED will flash
sound at times at ignition on. Every time the PDC 6 times at ignition on. Every time the PDC
Ignition On system is activated within the same system is activated within the same
for approx 3 ignition cycle, PDC switch indicator LED ignition cycle the PDC switch indicator LED
seconds will flash 6 times will flash 6 times
CAUTIONS:
If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty,
refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component.
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is not acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the
donor vehicle.
Do not apply any grease based products to any PDC connector or pins.
NOTES:
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from
the scan tool to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra
information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
When performing electrical voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to
three decimal places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the
resistance of the DMM leads into account.
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.
If diagnostic trouble codes are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an
intermittent concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
3. Ensure that the PDC sensor face is clear of contamination that could affect the performance of the sensor.
Visual Inspection
PDC sensor condition/damaged Battery
PDC sensor installation and holder Fuse(s)
PDC sensor alignment Relays
PDC sensor contamination Wiring harness
Bumper cover(s) Electrical connector(s)
Vehicle ride height Front PDC sensor(s)
Non standard/non manufacturer approved accessories fitted Rear PDC sensor(s)
PDC switch and LED
PDC control module
PDC sounder
Audio system
5. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) and refer to the DTC
Index.
Symptom Chart
CAUTION: Do not apply any grease based products to any PDC connector or pins.
NOTES:
Please note if this diagnosis is being carried out on a vehicle without a hard wired parking aid speaker,
ensure the in car infotainment system is fully functional and configured correctly
PDC sensors that are painted incorrectly and not to the manufacturer standards, will not be considered in
any warranty claim

Front or rear PDC Clean front or rear PDC sensors
NOTE: sensors dirty Check the front or PDC rear sensor position
Permanent/Intermittent Front or rear PDC Check the front or rear PDC sensor are correctly
fault sensor position installed
incorrect Check front or rear PDC sensor coupling rings are
PDC system not Front or rear PDC installed/installed correctly
functioning correctly. sensor incorrectly Ensure all PDC system connectors are correctly latched
(No DTC's displayed) installed Remove PDC sensor and ensure correctly painted PDC
Front or rear PDC sensor is installed
sensor coupling - PDC sensors that are painted incorrectly and
rings not not to the manufacturer standards, will not be
installed/incorrectly considered in any warranty claim
installed
PDC control
module or PDC
sensor connector
not fully latched
PDC sensors
painted without
being removed
from the bumper
assembly or not
painted to the
manufacturer
specification
PDC sensors Ensure the sensors are a tight fit in the holder and
NOTE: incorrectly locked. Ensure the sensors are central in the holder
Permanent/Intermittent mounted and bumper and at the correct angle
fault Incorrect vehicle Ensure vehicle ride height is within the specified limits.
ride height Rectify as required
PDC system not Dirty PDC sensor Clean the sensor face as required. Defrost the sensor
functioning correctly. face. Ice/snow and dry as required. Clear any debris from the sensor
(No DTC's displayed). covered sensor. and holder as required. Water flowing over the sensor
System characteristics Debris trapped is a system limitation. (no action required)
or environmental between PDC Check for non standard, bumper, exhausts/tailpipe,
effects sensor and PDC tow bar or external spare wheel mounting that may
sensor body. be being detected by the PDC system. Rectify as
Heavy rain or required
water splash from Ensure the area around the vehicle is clear of any
the ground obstacles, move the vehicle to a suitable area before
Non standard, continuing diagnosis
bumper, Ensure no exhaust gas or warm area clouds are in the
exhausts/tailpipes, area around the PDC sensor detection range
tow bar or external Ensure the vehicle is on level ground and clear of any
spare wheel ramps, potholes or speed bumps, move the vehicle to
mounting a suitable area before continuing diagnosis
Area around Remove PDC sensor and ensure correctly painted PDC
vehicle is not clear sensor is installed
of obstacles such - PDC sensors that are painted incorrectly and
as channels, not to the manufacturer standards, will not be
gutters or other considered in any warranty claim
items on the
ground
Exhaust gas and
warm air clouds
creating ghost
echoes
Vehicle not on level
ground or next to
a gradient
PDC sensors
painted without
being removed
from the bumper
assembly or not
painted to the
manufacturer
specification
PDC sensors are being Possible issue with sensor When either no/intermittent operation has been
returned with no faults connectors not latched reported the following action should be taken
found or signs of water correctly Using Datalogger identify the position of the suspect
ingress/corrosion PDC sensor within the bumper
1. Visually locate the position of the suspect PDC
sensor. Inspect and provide details in claim if the
sensor has any sign of physical damage
2. Remove the bumper. Disconnect the wiring at the
main harness connector. Inspect the main harness
connectors and terminals for signs of damage, backed
out pins, corrosion and water ingress, or damage to
the seals. Provide details in claim if any of the above
symptom's are present
3. Attempt to remove the harness connector from the
suspect PDC sensor without using the connector latch
i.e. lightly pull back on ALL wires together, ensuring
the harness is held close to the back of the connector,
not elsewhere on the wiring harness. DO NOT apply
excessive force. If the connector can be removed
without using the latch, provide details in claim if
connector is loose. If the connector is fully latched,
disconnect it from the sensor
4. Inspect and provide details in claim if the suspect
sensor harness connector has any sign of water
ingress/corrosion
5. Inspect and provide details in claim if the suspect
PDC sensor harness connector shows any sign that
the terminals have backed-out of the connector or for
any damage to the terminal seals. Replace/repair the
harness as required and proceed
6. Remove the suspect PDC sensor from the bumper.
Inspect the PDC sensor connector for signs of water
ingress/corrosion. Provide details in claim if
corrosion/water ingress is present
7. Exchange the suspect PDC sensor with another PDC
sensor within the bumper that is performing correctly.
Reconnect all sensors and reconnect the bumper main
harness connector. Repeat step 1. Confirm if the
original fault now appears at the new position of the
suspect PDC sensor, if so, proceed to step
8. If not, carry out the appropriate open circuit and
short circuit checks between the original suspect PDC
sensor harness connector and the PDC control module
9. Refit the PDC sensors to their original position in
the bumper
10. Reconnect the PDC sensor to the bumper harness
connector. Reconnect main harness connector and
refit the bumper
11. Repeat Step 1. If fault is still present, replace
only the faulty sensor
PINPOINT TEST A : PDC SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
A1: PERMANENT FAULT
1 When the PDC system is activated, there is a vibration on the PDC sensor membrane. This
can be verified by touching the PDC sensor face with a hard item such as a pencil, ball-pen,
small screwdriver, or fingernail. Ensure no damage is caused to sensor painted
surface.
Are the PDC sensor(s) vibrating?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A5.
A2: SENSORS VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
1 Clean the PDC sensor face.
PDC system functioning correctly?
Yes
No further action required.
No
GO to A3.
1 Check PDC sensors correctly mounted. PDC sensor holder correctly mounted. PDC sensor
decoupler ring fitted or fitted correctly. PDC sensor positioning correct. PDC sensor painted
without being removed from the bumper assembly or not painted to manufacturer
specification. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to A4.
1 Carry out speaker test. Only applicable to vehicles with rear hard wired PDC speakers. Check
the PDC speaker wiring circuit and connector. Rectify as required. Check and install a new
PDC speaker as required. Vehicles with audio PDC. Confirm audio system is functioning
correctly. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.
PDC system functioning correctly.
Yes
A5: SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
1 Isolate the fault to front or rear PDC sensors
Are all rear PDC sensors vibrating?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
GO to A10.
A6: FRONT SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
1 Check the PDC control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car
configuration file as required.
Yes
No
GO to A7.
1 Check the correct PDC control module is installed to the vehicle.
Yes
No
GO to A8.
1 If all 4 front PDC sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power
supply. Check main PDC harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as
required.
Yes
No
GO to A9.
1 Check and install a new PDC control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
the installation of a new module/component.
Yes
A10: REAR SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PDC FAULT
1 Check the PDC control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car
configuration file as required.
Yes
No
GO to A11.
1 If all 4 rear PDC sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power
supply. Check main PDC harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as
required.
Yes
No
GO to A12.
1 Check and install a new PDC control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
the installation of a new module/component.
Yes
PINPOINT TEST B : PDC SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
B1: PDC SYSTEM GIVES WARNING SIGNAL WITHOUT OBSTACLE
1 Clean the PDC sensor face. Check for any damage to the PDC sensor face. Rectify as
required. Snow, water or ice on sensor face. PDC sensor face has been repainted to the
incorrect thickness. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to B2.
1 Ensure the vehicle ride height is within manufacturer specified limits. Rectify as required.
Yes
No
GO to B3.
1 Check for any non standard accessories are not fitted, such as tow bar, bike rack, body kit,
modified exhaust, lighting or licence plate holder.
Yes
No
GO to B4.
1 Limitations or characteristics of the PDC system such as vehicle on a gradient, exhaust gas
vapour, signal reflection.
Yes
No
For a detailed description of the PDC system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual. REFER to: (413-13)
Parking Aid (Description and Operation).
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Parking Aid Module (PAM) (100-00, Description and
Operation).
Parking Aid - Parking Aid Camera
Removal
NOTES:
The ignition must be switched off.
1. Refer to: Liftgate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2. Torque: 10 Nm
3. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage

the wiring harnesses.
Installation

Published: 11-Apr-2012
Parking Aid - Parking Aid Camera Module
Removal
NOTES:

2. Move the front seat to the fully forward and fully raised
positions to allow access.

Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: If a new component has been installed,

configure using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.

Parking Aid - Parking Aid Module
Removal
1. Remove the C-pillar lower trim panel.
and Installation).
2. Remove the parking aid module.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the parking aid module.

and Installation).
Parking Aid - Parking Aid Speaker
Removal
and Installation).
2. Remove the loadspace trim mounting bracket.

3. Remove the rear parking aid speaker.

Installation
Parking Aid - Front Parking Aid Camera
Removal
NOTES:

stands.
2. Refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal

and Installation).
3. CAUTIONS:
LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
Make sure that the component is correctly

located on the locating dowels.
Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harnesses.
Installation


Published: 04-Mar-2013
Parking Aid - Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
Refer to: Specifications (414-00 Battery and Charging System -

General Information, Specifications).

stands.
3. Refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and

Installation).
4.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If a new sensor is installed, make sure that the

area illustrated is the only area painted. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the component malfunctioning.
NOTE: On vehicles that are equipped with black or

unpainted bumpers, the sensor(s) do not require painting.
Parking Aid - Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
NOTES:
RH illustration shown, LH is similar.

stands.
Remove the front wheel and tire.
2. Refer to: Front Fender Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and

3. Torque: 1 Nm
4.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If a new sensor is installed, make sure that the

area illustrated is the only area painted. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the component malfunctioning.
NOTE: On vehicles that are equipped with black or

unpainted bumpers, the sensor(s) do not require painting.

Parking Aid - Rear Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
1. Remove the rear bumper cover.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper (501-19,
2. Remove the parking aid sensor.

3. Remove the parking aid sensor trim panel.

Installation
1. Install the parking aid sensor trim panel.
2. Install the parking aid sensor.
3. Install the rear bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper (501-19,
Parking Aid - Rear Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Removal

safety stands.
2. Release the 5 exhaust hangers.

Support the exhaust assembly.


Installation
Parking Aid - Side Parking Aid Camera
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

2. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the

component.

harnesses.
Torque: 0.5 Nm
Installation


Published: 14-Jun-2011
Battery and Charging System - General Information -
Battery
Item Specifications
All Gasoline (Petrol) Models:
Type Maintenance free lead-calcium
Capacity 690 amps - 75 amp/hour
Reserve capacity 150 minutes @ 25 amps
Diesel Models:
Type Maintenance free lead-calcium
Capacity 825 amps - 90 amp/hour
Reserve capacity 190 minutes @ 25 amps
Battery Disconnect/Connect
CAUTION: The vehicle status and battery condition must be established before attempting battery
disconnect/connect. Reference must be then made to the following table to establish the relevant procedure to
be followed.
Vehicle status Battery charged Battery discharged

Procedure Procedure
Engine running 1
Vehicle powered down, locked and alarmed 2 3
Vehicle unlocked 4 5
Procedure 1
Disconnect battery Connect battery
1. If possible, apply parking 1. Ensure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
brake or alternatively, chock
wheels
2. Switch off ignition 2. Connect battery leads - GROUND lead last
3. Wait 2 minutes for engine 3. Switch on ignition
management system to 'power
down'
4. Open the hood 4. Operate parking brake switch several times until parking brake warning lamp
is extinguished
5. Disconnect battery - 5. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power window up to hard stop,
GROUND lead first release switch, reapply and hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch
should now work
Procedure 2
1. Unlock the vehicle and disarm the alarm using the 'plip' 1. Ensure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
button
2. Enter the vehicle, turn the ignition key to position II, 2. Connect battery leads - GROUND lead last
apply the parking brake or chock the wheels and then turn
the ignition key to position 0. Remove the key to 'power
down' the ICE system
3. Wait 2 minutes for engine management system to 3. Switch on ignition
'power down'
4. Open the hood 4. Operate parking brake switch several times until
parking brake warning lamp is extinguished
5. Disconnect battery - GROUND lead first 5. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power
window up to hard stop, release switch, reapply and
hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch
should now work
NOTE: 1. Disconnect battery - The door unlock process initialises the ICE system.
Procedure 3
1. Unlock the vehicle from the left hand front door using 1. Ensure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
the key
2. Enter the vehicle, turn the ignition key to position II, 2. Connect battery leads - GROUND lead last
3. Wait 2 minutes for engine management system to 3. Switch on ignition
'power down'
4. Open the hood 4. Operate parking brake switch several times until
5. Disconnect battery - GROUND lead first 5. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power
should now work
NOTES:
1. - Disconnect battery - The door unlock process initialises the ICE system
1. Connect battery - If there is insufficient capacity in the battery to disarm the alarm, the alarm may
sound on reconnection of the battery - Step 3 will disarm the alarm
Procedure 4
1. Enter the vehicle, turn the ignition key to position II, 1. Ensure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
2. Wait 2 minutes for engine management system to 2. Connect battery leads - GROUND lead last
'power down'
3. Open the hood 3. Switch on ignition
4. Disconnect battery - GROUND lead first 4. Operate parking brake switch several times until
5. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power
should now work
Procedure 5
1. Enter the vehicle, turn the ignition key to position II, 1. Ensure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
2. Wait 2 minutes for engine management system to 2. Connect battery leads - GROUND lead last
'power down'
3. Open the hood 3. Switch on ignition
4. Disconnect battery - GROUND lead first 4. Operate parking brake switch several times until
5. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power
should now work
NOTE: 1. Disconnect battery - If the remote control module (RCM) is not functioning, it will be necessary
to manually unlock the vehicle using the key.
Vehicle Jump (Emergency) Starting - Using Another Vehicle
Carry out the following operations in the sequence given
1. Connect one end of the BLACK (-) booster cable to the GROUND (-) battery terminal of the DONOR vehicle
2. Connect the other end of the BLACK (-) booster cable to a good earth point e.g. unpainted metal surface or
engine mounting at least 0.5 m (20.0 in) from the battery or fuel lines on the DISABLED vehicle
3. Connect one end of the RED (+) booster cable to the positive (+) battery terminal of the DONOR vehicle
4. Connect the other end of the RED (+) booster cable to the positive (+) battery terminal of the DISABLED
vehicle
5. Start the engine of the DONOR vehicle and allow it to idle for a few minutes
6. Start the engine of the DISABLED vehicle
7. Allow engines of both vehicles to idle for a few minutes then switch off the engine of the DONOR vehicle
8. Disconnect the RED (+) booster cable from the battery of the PREVIOUSLY DISABLED vehicle
9. Disconnect the RED (+) booster cable from the battery of the DONOR vehicle
10. Disconnect the BLACK (-) booster cable from the earth point of the PREVIOUSLY DISABLED vehicle
11. Disconnect the BLACK (-) booster cable from the battery of the DONOR vehicle
WARNINGS:
During normal use, batteries emit explosive hydrogen gas sufficient to cause severe explosions and capable
of causing serious injury - keep sparks and naked lights away from the engine compartment.
DO NOT attempt to start the disabled vehicle if it is suspected that the electrolyte in the battery is frozen.
Suitable eye protection must be worn when working in the vicinity of the battery.
Take care when working near rotating parts of the engine.

Prior to attempting to start the disabled vehicle, ensure that the parking brake is applied or suitably chock
the wheels. Ensure that 'P' - PARK - Automatic Gearbox or NEUTRAL - Manual Gearbox is selected.
CAUTIONS:
Ensure that all electrical loads are switched OFF prior to connecting booster cables and disconnect booster
cables prior to using any electrical equipment.
Ensure that the battery of the DONOR vehicle is of 12 volt capacity and that all electrical loads on the
disabled vehicle are switched OFF prior to connecting booster cables.
Ensure that there is no physical contact between the donor and disabled vehicles other than the booster
cables.
Vehicle Jump (Emergency) Starting - Using a Slave Battery/Starting Aid
Carry out the following operations in the sequence given
1. Connect the end of the BLACK (-) booster cable to the ground (-) battery terminal of the vehicle
2. Connect the end of the RED (+) booster cable to the positive (+) battery terminal of the vehicle
3. Start the engine of the vehicle and allow it to idle
4. Disconnect the RED (+) booster cable from the battery terminal of the vehicle
5. Disconnect the BLACK (-) booster cable from the battery terminal of the vehicle
WARNINGS:
During normal use, batteries emit explosive hydrogen gas sufficient to cause severe explosions and capable
of causing serious injury - keep sparks and naked lights away from the engine compartment.
DO NOT attempt to start the disabled vehicle if it is suspected that the electrolyte in the battery is frozen.
Suitable eye protection must be worn when working in the vicinity of the battery.
Take care when working near rotating parts of the engine.
Prior to attempting to start the disabled vehicle, ensure that the parking brake is applied or suitably chock
the wheels. Ensure that 'P' - PARK - Automatic Gearbox or NEUTRAL - Manual Gearbox is selected.
CAUTIONS:
Ensure that all electrical loads are switched OFF prior to connecting booster cables and disconnect booster
cables prior to using any electrical equipment.
Ensure that the slave battery/starting aid are of 12 volt capacity and that all electrical loads on the disabled
vehicle are switched OFF prior to connecting booster cables.
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Battery Care
Requirements
1. INTRODUCTION
This document sets out the requirements for care and maintenance of batteries and thereby the standard of
battery care at dealers and retailers for new vehicles
This applies to all types of 12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries used in Jaguar and Land Rover vehicles whether they are
conventional flooded technology or Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM – also known as Valve Regulated Lead Acid
(VRLA)) technology and also applies to both Primary and Auxiliary Batteries. AGM batteries offer improved
resistance to cycling as seen in stop start applications.
In order to prevent damage to the battery and ensure a satisfactory service life, all processes detailed within this
document must be rigorously adhered to.
It is equally important therefore to note the following key points:
All new vehicles leave the factory with either a transit relay installed and/or have a transit mode
programmed into the vehicle control modules. The transit relay must be removed and the transit mode
disabled (where applicable) using an approved diagnostic system, NOT MORE THAN 72 HOURS before
the customer takes delivery.
The battery can be discharged by the following mechanisms:
- Self Discharge: -A lead acid battery will very slowly discharge itself due to its own internal
chemical processes whether it is connected to a vehicle or not.
- Quiescent Discharge: - The vehicle electrical systems when connected to the battery will draw
charge from the battery.
12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries rely on internal chemical processes to create a voltage and deliver current. These
processes and the internal chemical structure of the battery can be damaged if the battery is allowed to
discharge over a number of weeks / months, or is left in a discharged state for a lengthy time period.
On vehicles with conventional ignition keys, these must not be left in the ignition lock barrel when
the transit relay has been removed, otherwise quiescent current will increase and the battery will
discharge more rapidly.
For keyless vehicles, the Smart Key must be stored at least 5m away from the vehicle when the vehicle
is parked or stored.
AGM Batteries are fully sealed and cannot have the electrolyte level topped up.
NOTE: Dealers and retailers involved in the storage / handling of vehicles and replacement batteries have a
responsibility to ensure that only a fully charged battery may be processed through the distribution selling chain.
2. GENERAL RULES FOR BATTERY CARE
2.1 Dealer Demonstration Vehicles
Vehicles used as dealer demonstrator(s), in a showroom, must be connected to a showroom conditioner capable
of delivering 50 Amps. This will prevent the battery from being damaged.
2.2 Software Reflash, SDD work or Ignition On related workshop activities
Due to the high electrical current demand and high depth of Discharge that can occur during vehicle software re-
flash activities, SDD work or ignition on related work in the workshop, vehicles that are undergoing such
activities MUST have a power supply capable of delivering 50 Amps or more.
2.3 Extended Vehicle Rework
For any extended vehicle rework that results in consuming vehicle power, either the battery should be
disconnected or a suitable power supply connected.
2.4 Jump Starting New vehicles before they have been delivered to the customer
It is the dealer / retailers responsibility to make sure the battery is not allowed to go flat by following the
instructions and processes defined in this manual.
However, if circumstances dictate that a new vehicle must be jump started due to a flat battery whilst the
vehicle is in the dealer / retailers care, the battery on this vehicle must be replaced with a new one
prior to delivery to the customer at the dealer / retailers liability.
The vehicle should also undergo investigation as to why the battery went flat.
Do not connect the jump starting cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery. Always connect to the
recommended earth point. As defined in the owners handbook or service documentation for that vehicle.
2.5 AGM Batteries
AGM batteries must not be charged above 14.8 Volts. Doing so will damage them.
AGM Batteries must be tested with a capable battery tester as detailed in the equipment section
(Section 5) of this procedure.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should the battery be disconnected with the engine running because under
these conditions the alternator can give a very high output voltage. This high transient voltage will damage the
electronic components in the vehicle. Loose or incomplete battery connections may also cause high transient
voltage.
3. HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS:
BATTERY CELLS CONTAIN SULPHURIC ACID AND EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES OF HYDROGEN AND OXYGEN
GASES. IT IS THEREFORE ESSENTIAL THAT THE FOLLOWING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
Batteries emit highly explosive hydrogen at all times, particularly during charging. To prevent any potential
form of ignition occurring when working in the vicinity of a battery:
Do not smoke when working near batteries.

Avoid sparks, short circuits or other sources of ignition in the battery vicinity.
Switch off current before making or breaking electrical connections.
Ensure battery charging area is well ventilated.
Ensure the charger is switched off when: a) connecting to a battery; b) disconnecting from the battery.
Always disconnect the ground cable from the battery terminal first and reconnect it last.
Batteries contain poisonous and highly corrosive acid. To prevent personal injury, or damage to clothing or
the vehicle, the following working practices should be followed when topping up, checking electrolyte specific
gravity, removal, refitting or carrying batteries:
Always wear suitable protective clothing (an apron or similar), safety glasses, a face mask and suitable
gloves.
If acid is spilled or splashed onto clothing or the body, it must be neutralized immediately and then rinsed
with clean water. A solution of baking soda or household ammonia and water may be used as a
neutralizer.
In the event of contact with the skin, drench the affected area with water. In the case of contact with the
eyes, bathe the affected area with cool clean water for approximately 15 minutes and seek urgent
medical attention.
If battery acid is spilled or splashed on any surface of a vehicle, it should be neutralized and rinsed with
clean water.
Heat is generated when acid is mixed with water. If it becomes necessary to prepare electrolyte of a
desired specific gravity, SLOWLY pour the concentrated acid into water (not water into acid), adding small
amounts of acid while stirring. Allow the electrolyte to cool if noticeable heat develops. With the exception
of lead or lead-lined containers, always use non-metallic receptacles or funnels. Do not store acid in
excessively warm locations or in direct sunlight.
Due to their hazardous contents, the disposal of batteries is strictly controlled. When a battery is scrapped,
ensure it is disposed of safely, complying with local environmental regulations. If in doubt, contact your local
authority for advice on disposal facilities.
4. BATTERY CARE REQUIREMENTS
4.1 RECEIPT OF A NEW VEHICLE
Within 24 hours of receipt of a new vehicle, a battery condition check must be carried out in accordance with the
battery test process utilizing an appropriate tester as outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this
procedure.
NOTE: The midtronics code must be recorded on the form.
Any actions must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the determining battery condition
section (Section 6) of this procedure. The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which
is part of the new vehicle storage document.
For additional information, refer to: New Vehicle Storage Form (100-11, Description and Operation).
4.2 NEW VEHICLE STORAGE
If the vehicle is to be stored the transit relays MUST be refitted and / or the vehicle put into transport mode.
Transit relay removal / vehicle placed in normal mode should only be completed a maximum of 72 hours prior to
handover to customer
For vehicles without either a transit mode or transit relay the battery negative cable must be DISCONNECTED
from the battery.
The battery must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and MUST be re-charged after every 90 day period.
4.3 PDI / DELIVERY TO CUSTOMER
Before the vehicle is handed over to the customer and as part of the PDI, the condition of the battery needs to
be confirmed. The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing an
appropriate tester as outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
4.4 REPLACEMENT BATTERIES FOR SERVICE
All service replacement batteries must have the battery condition checked within 24 hours of receipt and
controlled on a ‘First In First Out’ basis to ensure batteries are not allowed to age unnecessarily.
For batteries in storage and not yet fitted to a vehicle, they must be stored in a dry environment, not in direct
sunlight or under any direct heat source. Any batteries exhibiting any forms of damage or corrosion must not be
fitted to any vehicle. Any batteries which are dropped must be scrapped, this applies even if no external damage
is apparent.
The battery condition must be checked every 30 days in accordance with the battery test process utilizing an
appropriate tester as outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
section (Section 6) of this procedure.The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which
4.5 BATTERY MAINTENANCE
Any battery whether it is in a vehicle or a replacement part must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and
MUST be re-charged after every 90 day period.
4.6 BATTERY TEST PROCESS
It is recommended that this test is conducted at least 24 hours after the vehicle engine has been run or the
battery charged to avoid the need of surface charge removal. If time constraints make this unacceptable then
the surface charge must be removed.
Surface Charge Removal
A vehicle which has had its battery charged or been driven in a 24 hour period before the test, must have its
surface charge removed.
Turn on the ignition but do not start the vehicle

Switch on the headlamps on high beam for a minimum 3 minutes
Switch off the headlamps
Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before recording test results for any battery measurements
Battery Test
The battery may be tested either on a bench or on the vehicle.
The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing an appropriate tester
as outlined in the equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
CAUTION: DO NOT connect the tester to any other circuit or chassis point other than the battery negative
terminal.
5. EQUIPMENT
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements. Please refer to the
approved equipment document.
In the case of batteries fitted to a new vehicle at the dealership, battery condition should be measured using the
appropriate hand-held Midtronics tester as follows:
Battery
Type Battery Tester Battery Tester
Jaguar Land Rover
Flooded Midtronics MCR 394 & 494 Midtronics EXP1080 & Midtronics MCR 393 & 493 Midtronics EXP1080 &
GR1/GRX GR1/GRX
AGM Midtronics EXP1080, GR1/GRX Midtronics EXP1080, GR1/GRX
The test results must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage
document.
NOTE: All equipment must be calibrated
6 DETERMINING BATTERY CONDITION
TESTER RESULTS ACTION

GOOD BATTERY Return to service.
GOOD RE-CHARGE Fully charge battery and return to service.
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Fully charge battery. Remove surface charge. Re-test battery. If same result replace
battery.
REPLACE BATTERY OR Verify surface charge removed. Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test. If result
BAD CELL BATTERY repeats after surface charge removal, replace battery. DO NOT RECHARGE.
UNABLE TO DO TEST Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test.
7 BATTERY CHARGING
It is essential that a suitably ventilated defined area exists in each dealership / retailer for battery charging.
CAUTION: It is very important that when charging batteries using the traction charger or other stand-alone
chargers that the charger is set for the correct type of battery before charging commences. If the wrong switch
is selected the result would be a battery that is not charged fully and / or overheating can occur. Follow the
manufacturers operating instructions.
Batteries MUST BE tested and if necessary charged every 30 days and charged after 90 days irrespective of any
test. It is recommended that dealers / retailers always have fully charged batteries ready for use.
CAUTION: Do not charge AGM batteries with voltages over 14.8 Volts as this will damage the battery.
A designated controlled area must be allocated for scrap batteries and clearly controlled as such.
To bring a discharged but serviceable battery back to a fully charged condition proceed as follows:
Check and if necessary top-up the battery electrolyte level. (Flooded maintainable batteries only)
Charge the battery using a charger as detailed in the approved equipment document following the
manufacturers operating instructions.
NOTE: When using the Midtronics Diagnostic Charger, automatic mode must always be used. After charging
and analysis, the charger may display ‘Top-Off Charging’, Hit STOP To End. Do not stop charging until the
current falls to 5A or less, otherwise the battery will not be fully charged.
Following charging a post charge battery condition test must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in
the determining battery condition section (Section 6) of this procedure.
8 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
If it is determined that a battery requires replacement, always refer to the appropriate section of the workshop
manual for instructions on removing and installing the battery from the vehicle.
On in service vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the BMS module must be reset following
the installation of a new battery. The BMS module reset procedure must be performed using an approved
diagnostic system.
9 CONFIRMING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
WARNINGS:
BEFORE CHECKING AND TOPPING-UP THE BATTERY ELECTROLYTE, REFER TO THE HEALTH AND SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS SECTION.
AGM TECHNOLOGY BATTERIES ARE FULLY SEALED FOR LIFE AND NO ATTEMPT SHOULD BE MADE TO
CHECK OR TOP UP THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL.
On certain types of battery the electrolyte level may need to be checked.
Make sure the battery is of a type suitable for topping up. These types of batteries will have cell plugs
visible on the top face of the battery or a removable access panel to allow access to the cells.
On batteries with a clear or opaque case and level marks, check the electrolyte level by visual inspection
of the maximum level indicator mark on the battery casing indicating adequate level above the battery
separators.
On batteries with black cases, remove the cell plugs or access panel and ensure the electrolyte level is
level with the indicator in the cell hole. A flashlight may be required to see the electrolyte level on this
type of battery.
If the electrolyte level is low, top-up using distilled water.
NOTE: Maintenance free and Valve Regulated (AGM) batteries are sealed and therefore cannot be topped
up.
CAUTION: DO NOT overfill.

Battery and Charging System - General Information - Quiescent Drain
VEHICLE QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING
On vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the diagnostic routine for quiescent drain testing in
the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system should be utilized.
If a customer complains of a vehicle battery that discharges continuously or when left for a prolonged period of
time, it is recommended that a quiescent drain test is performed as described below.
The battery drain should be measured using the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system or a Digital
Multi-Meter (DVOM). A procedure for quiescent drain measurement using the diagnostic system is available in the
Diagnosis and Testing section of the Workshop Manual. The vehicle should be in the locked/armed state (for
example vehicle alarm fully armed), all doors, engine and luggage compartment lids are open and latched (so as
to appear closed from an electrical point of view). The test should take place after the vehicle has entered
shutdown mode. The time taken for this to occur after the ignition is switched off varies according to model
(Refer to the Topix On line resource for details).
When the vehicle is armed, the effect of the security system Light Emitting Diode (LED) flashing is to cause a
pulsation in the measured current drain. In this case, either the average current should be taken (using a Digital
Multi- Meter (DVOM) with an averaging system) or the current reading taken, ignoring the brief high current
peaks.
EQUIPMENT
Approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system with current probeOR Digital Multi-Meter (DVOM) with current
probe.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
Using an Approved Jaguar or Land Rover Diagnostic System.
1. Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
2. Connect the current probe to the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system
3. Calibrate the probe
4. Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
5. Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
Using a digital multimeter
Do not use an in-line DVOM to measure the quiescent drain on vehicles fitted with an electronic throttle (for
example Range Rover 2002MY onwards). The current exceeds the maximum amount the fuse in the DVOM is
capable of handling.
1. Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
2. Connect the current probe to the digital multmeter
3. Calibrate the probe
4. Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
5. Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING
1. Switch ignition to ‘on’ or select ignition mode in keyless vehicles and switch to ‘off’ (do not crank)
2. Remove key from ignition switch (if equipped)
3. Open and latch all doors, hood and luggage compartment lid
4. Lock the vehicle using the remote function on the remote handset. (Single lock only to avoid volumetric
alarm arming)
5. Remove any other potential electrical drains such as accessories plugged into accessory sockets
6. Record the amperage readings after the shutdown period referenced in the Topix on line resource for
details. Note all cars from 10MY onwards should be less than 30mA after 30 minutes
7. Record the final reading on the battery report form
The preferred method of testing following an excessive current consumption figure is to use a current probe
around individual junction box leads to the various suspected circuits to identify a potential cause. This is in
preference to the old method of removing fuses for the following reasons:
The drain may be caused by a module remaining active and preventing the quiescent drain from reducing
to normal levels
The drain may be caused by a relay winding that is activated. Pulling the fuse can allow this to ‘reset’
and the drain will be lost and go un-diagnosed
Land Rover Quiescent Drain Values
SHUT DOWN PERIOD TYPICAL VALUES BATTERY DRAIN

MODEL (minutes) (mA)
Range Rover (LM) - Up to 2009MY 30 <30
20 (after lock/arm condition) <30
Range Rover (LM) - From 2010MY ²
33 (unlocked) <30
Range Rover (LG) From 2013MY <10 (after lock/arm <20
condition) ²
<20 (unlocked) <20
Range Rover Sport (LS) - Up to 2007MY 30 <30
Range Rover Sport (LS) - From 2007MY to 30 <30
2010MY
33 (unlocked) <30
Range Rover Sport (LS) - From 2010MY 10 (after lock/arm condition) <20
²
30 (unlocked) <20
Range Rover Evoque (LV) - From 2012MY 20 (after lock and arm <20
condition) ²
<20 (unlocked) <20
Discovery 3/LR3 (LA) - Up to 2007MY 30 <30
Discovery 3/LR3 (LA) - From 2007MY to 30 <30
2010MY
33 (unlocked) <30
Discovery 4/LR4 (LA) - From 2010MY <20 (after lock/arm <20
condition) ²
<20 (unlocked) <20
Freelander (LN) - Up to 2007MY 30 <30
Freelander 2/LR2 (LF) - From 2007MY 35 (single locked or <25
unlocked)
15 (double locked) <25
Defender (LD) - 1998MY to 2007MY 30 <25
Defender (LD) - from 2007MY <30 <30
Discovery Series 2 (LT) 30 <30
NOTE:
1. The total current drain will be higher if certain approved accessories are fitted (for example: tracker, trailer
module, etc.)
2. Applies to vehicles without Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Vehicle shut-down period with TPMS is
approximately 15 minutes.
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Battery Report
Form – In Service Batteries Only
BATTERY REPORT FORM - IN SERVICE BATTERIES ONLY
NOTE: Fields marked with * are mandatory and must be completed.
General Information
*Vehicle Identification Number (VIN): *Repair Vehicle Model:
*Mileage: Date: Engine type:
Customer Questions
*1: What is the customer’s reason for dealer visit? (tick symptoms as Non Crank but Warning Other:
appropriate) crank non start message
*2: How long was the vehicle left prior to issue. *
*3: How was the car left (Locked/unlocked) *
*4: How did you access to the vehicle Key fob Manual Handle pull
key
*5: Has the vehicle required assistance for battery issues previously? Yes No
*6: Is the vehicle used? (tick symptoms as appropriate) Daily Every Weekly Less than
other day weekly
*7: Average journey length *
*8: How many starts do you typically do in a day *
*9: Did the customer see any instrument pack warnings prior to the *
issue?
*10: Have any of the features been used without Radio Power CD DVD USB or TV Rear seat
the engine running in the last 3 days (if fitted?) point IPOD entertainment
accessory connection
11: Customer comments:- Please add any additional comments that *
are relevant.
Diagnostics (Battery Testing) - - - -
1: Loose battery clamps Yes * No *
2: Loose hold down clamps Yes * No *
3: Corroded terminal posts Yes * No *
4: Physical damage/leaks Yes No *
5: Low electrolyte (Flooded batteries only) Yes * No *
6: Battery Date Code *
7: FEAD belt tension OK * Not OK *
8: Quiescent Drain mA *
9: Vent tube correctly installed Yes * No *
10: Number of Times Battery Charged: *
10: Vent tube correctly installed Yes No
11: Remove the Surface (414-00 battery care requirements) Yes * No *
12: Battery voltage *
13: Midtronics test code before charging (EXP-1080) *
13a: If Midtronics indicates that the battery needs re-charging, charge *
the battery following instructions on the recommended battery
charger
13b: Midtronics test code after charge *
13c: Midtronics test code result after charge *
13d: If "good and re-charge" charge the battery following instructions *
on the recommended battery charger
13e: If "charge and re-test" for both before and after the charge *
renew the battery
13f: Only renew the battery if "renew battery", "bad cell" or charge *
and re-test has been displayed twice.
Technician Comments:- Please add any additional comments that are relevant.
*
*
*
*
*
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Charging
System
For a detailed description of the charging system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to:
Generator (414-02B Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation),
Generator (414-02D Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Generator (414-02D Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Generator (414-02D Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Generator Generator
Auxiliary drive belt Battery
Auxiliary drive belt tensioner Starter motor
Generator pulley Harnesses and connectors
Check the security of the generator fittings Fuses
Charge warning indicator function
Symptom Chart

Charge warning indicator Bulb/circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
does not come on fault check the Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs
Generator and refer to the relevant DTC index
fault
Controller
Area
Network
(CAN) circuit
fault
Engine
Control
Module
(ECM) fault
Charge warning indicator Auxiliary Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
stays on / battery drive belt generator circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
discharges broken to power, open circuit, high resistance
Generator Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
pulley check the Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs
slipping on and refer to the relevant DTC index
shaft Check the auxiliary drive belt condition and tension
Generator Check that the pulley does not rotate independently of
fault the generator
Battery cable
fault
Controller
Area
Network
(CAN) circuit
fault
Engine
Control
Module
(ECM) fault
Charge warning indicator Auxiliary Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
intermittent drive belt generator circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
slipping to power, open circuit, high resistance
Battery cable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
fault check the Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs
Generator and refer to the relevant DTC index
wiring fault Check the auxiliary drive belt condition and tension
Generator Check that the pulley does not rotate independently of
fault the generator
Controller
Area
Network
(CAN) circuit
fault
Battery discharges without Battery fault Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
the charge warning Battery and test the battery
indicator staying on quiescent Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
drain and test the battery quiescent drain
Intermittent Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
generator check the Engine Control Module (ECM) for related DTCs
fault and refer to the relevant DTC index
Noise (mechanical) Auxiliary Check the auxiliary drive belt condition and tension
drive belt Remove the auxiliary drive belt and check that the
slipping generator rotates freely
Generator
fault
DTC Index
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - TDV6 3.0L Diesel , DTC: Engine Control Module (PCM) (Description
and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - V8 5.0L Petrol, DTC: Engine Control Module (PCM) (Description and
Operation).
Battery, Mounting and Cables -
Item Specification
Vin Range: Up to 6A381322
Battery - 4.0 and 4.4 litre petrol engines:
Voltage 12
Capacity 75 amp/hour, 690 amps
Reserve capacity 150 minutes
Battery - 2.7 litre diesel engine:
Voltage 12
Vin Range: From 6A381323
Type Flooded Lead Acid
Voltage 12
Voltage 12
Vin Range: From AA000001
Voltage 12
Battery - 2.7 and 3.0 litre diesel engines:
Voltage 12
Vin Range: From BA587522 to CA617875
Voltage 12
Vin Range: From BA572502 to BA596276
Voltage 12
Vin Range: From BA596277 to DA652955
Type AGM
Voltage 12
Vin Range: CA617876 onward
Battery - 5.0 litre petrol engine:
Voltage 12
Reserve capacity H7 140 minutes
Reserve capacity H8 160 minutes
Vin Range: DA652956 onward
Type AGM
Voltage 12
Vin Range: EA000001 onward
Battery - 3.0 litre petrol engine:
Type AGM
Voltage 12
Secondary Battery
Item Specification
Vehicles with Stop/Start system
Voltage 12
Capacity 14 amp/hour
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Battery terminal nuts 5 - 44
Battery clamp bolts 5 - 44
Battery tray nuts 12 9 -
Secondary battery terminal nuts 6 4 -
Secondary battery clamp bolts 6 4 -
Secondary battery tray nuts 12 9 -
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery
For a detailed description of the battery system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables)
Battery and Cables (Description and Operation),

Battery and Cables (Description and Operation),
Battery and Cables (Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Generator Generator
Drive belt Battery
Drive belt tensioner Battery connections
Generator pulley Starter motor
Check the security of the generator fixings Harnesses and connectors
Fuses
Charge warning lamp function
4. If the cause is not visually evident check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
NOTES:
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. Match the five digits
from the scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits
give additional information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
When performing electrical voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to
three decimal places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the
resistance of the DMM leads into account.
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern
may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
00.
Midtronics EXP-1080 User Guide
Carry out the following: -
PINPOINT TEST A : VOLTAGE DROP

A1: GROUND CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
1 Start the engine, turn on the following:
(1) Air conditioning

(2) Blower fan on full speed
(3) Headlights on main beam
(4) Heated screen - rear
(5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
(6) Heated seats (if installed)
2 Connect the multimeter between the battery

negative terminal and the battery clamp as shown
in picture below (do not disconnect the battery at
this stage)
3 Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record
the reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return
the vehicle to an ignition off condition. Disconnect
the battery negative clamp, clean clamp and
terminal then reconnect and repeat test GO to A1.
A2: POWER CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
1 Start the engine, turn on the following:
(1) Air conditioning
(2) Blower fan on full speed
(3) Headlights on main beam
(4) Heated screen - rear
(5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
(6) Heated seats (if installed)
2 Connect the multimeter between the battery

positive terminal and the battery clamp as shown
in picture below (do not disconnect the battery at
this stage)
3 Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record
the reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
Carry out midtronics battery test procedure
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return
the vehicle to an ignition off condition. Disconnect
the battery power clamp, clean clamp and terminal
then reconnect and repeat test GO to A2.
Reference Description
1 LCD screen with main menu
2 Control panel (key board and power button)
3 Positive and negative fly leads
4 Fly leads connection
5 Temperature sensor
6 Infra-red sensor (data transfer for printer)
7 Amp hour
8 Battery rating (CCA)
9 Rating units
10 Battery type
The following steps must be carried out to ensure correct operation of the EXP-1080 during the battery test
procedure
Checks Action
Battery fluid leakage, check for battery fluid leaks or
damage to the battery casing NOTE: If visible damage to the case is evident do
not return battery under warranty
Replace the battery if there is any battery fluid leaks

evident
Battery vent pipe routing Check for routing, ensure there are no kinks
EXP-1080 fly lead, condition of clamps Clean or replace as required
EXP-1080 fly lead connection Confirm secure connection
NOTE: The Midtronics EXP-1080 is suitable for testing flooded and absorbed glass mat (AGM) type batteries
Typical Values
Amp Hour CCA (Cold Cranking Amps Rating Units

12 200 EN
70 760 SAE
80 700 SAE
80 800 SAE
90 800 SAE
95 850 SAE
90 950 SAE
105 950 SAE
Midtronics Battery Test Procedure
This midtronics battery test procedure will confirm the serviceability of the battery
1. Connect the fly-lead to the midtronics EXP-1080

2. Connect the fly-leads to the battery terminals
- Black lead to negative terminal
- Red lead to positive terminal
- Confirm the connections are secure
3. The EXP-1080 will power on automatically when connected to a battery, screen below is displayed
NOTE: MAIN MENU SCREEN
4. Main Menu. Select Battery test and press SELECT

NOTE: BATTERY LOCATION
5. Battery Location. Select either, Out of vehicle or In Vehicle as appropriate

Select Next
NOTE: BATTERY RATING
6. BATTERY RATING. Select the correct battery rating from the pre-installed list, (Goto step 10). Or,
To manually enter the correct battery type, specification and CCA rate. Scroll using the arrow keys on the
midtronics panel and select Other from the menu
Select Next
NOTE: BATTERY TYPE
7. Battery Type. Select the correct battery type (Regular or AGM)

- NOTE: All AGM batteries are marked (Refer to battery label)
Select Next
NOTE: RATING UNITS
8. Rating Units. Select the correct rating units. Refer to the battery label for correct specification.
Options EN, DIN, SAE
Select Next
NOTE: BATTERY RATING
9. BATTERY RATING. Scroll using the arrow keys on the midtronics panel, select the correct CCA rating
(For CCA refer to battery label)
Select Next
NOTES:
TEMPERATURE
Ensure that the temperature sensor does not touch any part of the battery or vehicle, this will cause
damage not be covered under the midtronics warranty and will require the unit to be returned to a service
center
10. Temperature. Aim the temperature sensor towards the battery casing (Maintain distance of 5cm)
Select Next
NOTE: TESTING
11. Testing. The screen displays clock hand's rotating, the EXP-1080 will automatically advance when
test has completed
NOTES:
SURFACE CHARGE
If there is no surface charge this step will not show. Go to next step
11a. Surface Charge. Ensure the ignition state is on. Switch on the headlights (high beam) until EXP-
1080 shows Turn off headlights then return ignition state to off
NOTES:
BATTERY CHARGE
If the state of charge is sufficient this step will not show. Go to next step
11b. Battery Charge. Select Before Charging if battery has not been on a recommended mains charger
for a minimum of 6 hours
Select After Charging if battery has been on a recommended mains charger for a minimum of 6 hours
NOTES:
DEEP SCAN TECHNOLOGY
This test is automated and will show if required. Go to next step
12. Testing. The EXP-1080 will carry out the deep scan test, then automatically advance when test has
completed
Number Description
1 Battery test result
2 CCA (Measured capacity rating)
3 Voltage
4 CCA (Manually entered)
5 Temperature
NOTE: RESULTS
Test Result Action

GOOD BATTERY Test complete no action required
GOOD - RE-CHARGE Charge battery using a recommended mains charger (minimum 50 amp) until charging
complete
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Charge battery using a recommended mains charger (minimum 50 amp) until charging
complete. Retest. If the result is the same replace battery
REPLACE BATTERY / Replace battery. Do Not Recharge
BAD CELL BATTERY
UNABLE TO COMPLETE Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test
TEST
NOTES:
TEST CODE
Battery test code, must be given if a battery, starter motor or generator is exchanged under warranty
NOTES:
STATE OF HEALTH
General health of the battery and its ability to deliver its specified performance compared with a new
battery
NOTES:
SOC (State Of Charge)
BATTERY STATE OF CHARGE
Results. From the result display use the arrow keys on the control panel to view the test code
The test code must be quoted with every battery claim under warranty
Flooded Battery Care Point
If the vehicle is equipped with a flooded battery, ensure the replacement battery is a flooded battery of the same
specification (cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery
Under no circumstances should you fit a flooded battery to a vehicle that originally had an AGM battery, unless
formally instructed by Jaguar/Land Rover
AGM Battery Care Point
If the vehicle is equipped with an absorbed glass mat (AGM) battery, ensure the replacement battery is a AGM
battery of the same specification (cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery,
unless formally instructed by Jaguar/Land Rover
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery Tray
Removal
1. Remove the battery.
For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01
Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the engine compartment upper heat

shield.
Remove the screw.
3. Remove the battery compartment side wall.

Release the battery positive cable and
grommet.
Release the four clips.
4. Release the heater pipes.

Remove the retaining screw.
5. Remove the battery tray.

Remove the three retaining nuts.
Installation
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Auxiliary Battery Tray
Removal
1. Remove the battery cover.

Specifications).
3. If installed, remove the auxiliary battery.

shield.
Remove the screw.
5. Remove the auxiliary battery compartment side

wall.
grommet.
Release the four clips.
6. Release the A/C pipes.

Remove the retaining screw.
Remove the three retaining nuts.
Installation
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery
Removal
1. Secure the hood in the service position.
Release the support struts.

Specifications).
4. Disconnect the battery positive cable.
5. Remove 2 bolts securing the battery clamp and

remove the clamp.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply petroleum jelly to the battery terminals.

Tighten the battery clamp bolts to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
Tighten the battery terminals to 5 Nm (4 lb.ft).
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 2.7L Diesel -
Item Specification
Generator:
Make/Type Denso SC2
Output 90/150 amps @ 25º C
Voltage control By Power Control Module (PCM)
Voltage setpoint regulation Controlled by Engine Management System (EMS)
* Battery harness connection nut 10 7
CAUTION: * Damage to the internal connections will result if this torque is exceeded
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 2.7L Diesel - Generator
GENERAL
The generator is located at the front RH side of the engine, in front of the RH cylinder head. The generator has
an output of 85/150 Amps and is manufactured by Denso. An eight-ribbed polyvee belt drives the generator
pulley, which in turn is driven from the engine crankshaft pulley.
The generator pulley incorporates a one-way clutch mechanism, which allows the pulley to free wheel, reducing
the amount of inertia applied to the engine during deceleration (coast).
The generator comprises a stator, a rotor, a rectifier pack and a regulator. There is a three-pin connector
(C0053) on the generator:
Pin 1 – Voltage reference line to the battery via the Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Pin 2 – Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal from the Engine Control Module (ECM) to the generator
(generator control)
Pin 3 – PWM signal from the generator to the ECM (generator monitoring)
The generator is connected to earth via its mountings.
The rotor comprises a field winding, wound around an iron core and mounted on a shaft. The iron core has
extensions at each end, which form North and South poles as current flows through the field winding. The rotor
is located inside the stator and is mounted on bearings for smooth running and to support the rotor due to the
high side loading applied by the drive belt tension.
The stator has three sets of coils made from copper wire. The three coil windings are connected in a 'star'
connection, where one end of the winding is connected to the other two windings. The output current is supplied
from the opposite end of each winding. Rotation of the rotor causes ac current to be produced in the coils.
The rectifier converts the ac current produced in the stator coils into dc (rectified) current required by the vehicle
electrical system. The rectifier comprises semi-conductor diodes mounted on a heatsink to dissipate heat. An
equal number of the diodes are on the negative and positive side, with an additional diode in the regulator to
control feedback through the battery voltage signal line. The rectifier also prevents current flow from the battery
to the generator when the output voltage is less than the battery voltage.
The 'smart' regulator controls the output voltage from the generator to protect the battery; at low temperatures
battery charge acceptance is very poor so the voltage needs to be high to maximise any re-chargeability, but at
high temperatures the charge voltage must be restricted to prevent excessive gassing with consequent water
loss. The EMS, which controls the regulator, will calculate the voltage set point required for the ensuing
conditions. The 'traditional' regulator controls voltage against generator temperature, which means the battery
temperature will lag a long way behind so there will be significant periods of operation when battery charging is
compromised. With this system, the EMS can set the voltage by inferring the battery temperature from
information received from it's various sensors, hence voltage will follow the battery's needs a lot more
accurately.
The regulator has transistors, which rapidly switch on and off to regulate the voltage output according to the
voltage sensed internally. The regulator also provides a PWM signal output to the ECM, which uses the signal to
adjust the idle speed under varying electrical loads.
Initially, the ignition switch supply provides an excitation current to the rotor at low generator speeds via
brushes, which contact slip rings at the end of the rotor shaft. As the generator speed increases the generator
becomes self-exciting.
The charge warning lamp function is transmitted to the EMS and then on to the Controller Area Network (CAN)
bus to the instrument pack.
LOAD MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The load management system comprises software resident in the Automatic Temperature Control Module
(ATCM).
For additional information, refer to: Control Components (412-04 Control Components, Description and
Operation).
Its purpose is to protect battery state-of-charge during abnormal usage of the vehicle. The system will request
the Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) ring and the air suspension to go into 'power save' mode, and
will modulate features such as seat heating and screen heating to prevent the battery being dragged down to a
point where the car becomes unoperational. A 'WARNING - LOW BATTERY' message will be displayed in the
message centre.
For further information,

REFER to: Charging System (414-00 Battery and Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the cooling fan shroud.

Installation).
3. Release the accessory drive belt.
4. Disconnect the generator harness.

Reposition the rubber insulator.
Remove the retaining nut.
5. Remove the three generator retaining bolts.

6. Remove the generator.
Reposition the generator.
Installation
1. Install the generator.
Reposition the generator.
2. NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts in the

sequence shown.
Install the three generator retaining bolts.

3. Connect the generator harness.
Tighten the retaining nut to 12 Nm (9 lb.ft).
Reposition the rubber insulator.
4. Attach the accessory drive belt.
5. Install the cooling fan shroud.

Installation).

Specifications).
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -

Generator retaining bolts 47 35 -
Battery positive cable retaining nut 12 9 -
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Generator - Component
Location
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Generator - Overview
OVERVIEW
The charging system consists of a 180 Amp output generator and regulator assembly. The generator and
regulator assembly generates electrical power for the vehicle electrical system and maintains the battery in a
charged state. When the engine is running the generator produces an alternating current, which is converted to a
direct current internally. The output from the generator is controlled by the voltage regulator (located inside the
generator) and then supplied to the battery through the main battery positive cable.
The generator is mounted on the front right side of the engine and driven at approximately 3 times engine speed
by the accessory drive belt.
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Generator - System
Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O =
LIN (local interconnect network) bus.
Item Description
1 Battery monitoring system module
2 Battery
3 BJB (battery junction box)
4 Generator and regulator
5 ECM (engine control module)
6 Instrument cluster
7 RJB (rear junction box)
System Operation
OPERATION
The output voltage required from the generator and regulator is calculated by the battery monitoring system.
Refer to: Battery and Cables (414-01, Description and Operation).
The battery monitoring system signals the calculated voltage to the ECM via the RJB and the instrument cluster. The
ECM then transmits the calculated voltage to the generator and regulator on the LIN (local interconnect network) bus
connection.
The ECM will over-ride the voltage value requested by the battery monitoring system if it detects a fault in the
generator and regulator. The ECM also signals the instrument cluster to display a warning message if it detects a
fault with the generator and regulator.
Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01, Description and Operation).
Component Description
DESCRIPTION
The regulator provides a controlled variable voltage output from the generator. Two electrical terminals are provided
on the outer casing of the generator. One terminal supplies the DC (direct current) voltage output from the generator
to the battery positive terminal. The second terminal provides the LIN bus connection between the regulator and the
ECM.

Testing).
Removal

stands.
3.
4. Torque: 47 Nm
6. Refer to: Engine Cover - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (501-05 Interior

Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
7. Refer to: Cooling Fan (303-03B Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L

Diesel, Removal and Installation).
8. Torque: 10 Nm
9.
10. Torque: 47 Nm

Torque: 47 Nm
12. Torque: 12 Nm
Installation
Generator and Regulator - V6 4.0L Petrol -
Item Specification
Generator:
Make/Type Denso SC2
Output 90/150 amps @ 25º C
Voltage control By Power Control Module (PCM)
Voltage setpoint regulation Controlled by Engine Management System (EMS)
* Battery harness connection nut 10 7
CAUTION: * Damage to the internal connections will result if this torque is exceeded
Generator and Regulator - V6 4.0L Petrol - Generator
The generator is located at the front RH side of the engine, in front of the RH cylinder head. The generator has
an output of 85/150 Amps and is manufactured by Denso. A six-ribbed polyvee belt drives the generator pulley,
which in turn is driven from the engine crankshaft pulley.
The generator comprises a stator, a rotor, a rectifier pack and a regulator. There is a three-pin connector
(C0053) on the generator:
Pin 1 – Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal from the generator to the Engine Control Module (ECM)
(generator monitoring)
Pin 2 – PWM signal from the ECM to the generator (generator control)
Pin 3 – Voltage reference line to the battery via the Battery Junction Box (BJB).
The generator is connected to ground via its mountings.
The rotor comprises a field winding, wound around an iron core and mounted on a shaft. The iron core has
extensions at each end, which form North and South poles as current flows through the field winding. The rotor
is located inside the stator and is mounted on bearings for smooth running and to support the rotor due to the
high side loading applied by the drive belt tension.
The stator has three sets of coils made from copper wire. The three coil windings are connected in a 'star'
connection, where one end of the winding is connected to the other two windings. The output current is supplied
from the opposite end of each winding. Rotation of the rotor causes ac current to be produced in the coils.
The rectifier converts the ac current produced in the stator coils into dc (rectified) current required by the vehicle
electrical system. The rectifier comprises semi-conductor diodes mounted on a heatsink to dissipate heat. An
equal number of the diodes are on the negative and positive side, with an additional diode in the regulator to
control the feedback through the battery voltage signal line. The rectifier also prevents current flow from the
battery to the generator when the output voltage is less than the battery voltage.
The 'smart' regulator controls the output voltage from the generator to protect the battery; at low temperatures
battery charge acceptance is very poor so the voltage needs to be high to maximise any re-chargeability, but at
high temperatures the charge voltage must be restricted to prevent excessive gassing at the battery with
consequent water loss. The EMS, which controls the regulator, will calculate the voltage set point required for the
ensuing conditions. The 'traditional' regulator controls voltage against generator temperature, which means the
battery temperature will lag a long way behind so there will be significant periods of operation when battery
charging is compromised. With this system, the EMS can set the voltage by inferring the battery temperature
from information received from it's various sensors, hence voltage will follow the battery's needs a lot more
accurately.
The regulator has transistors, which rapidly switch on and off to regulate the voltage output according to the
voltage sensed internally. The regulator also provides a PWM signal output to the ECM, which uses the signal to
adjust the idle speed under varying electrical loads.
Initially, the ignition switch supply provides an excitation current to the rotor at low generator speeds via
brushes, which contact slip rings at the end of the rotor shaft. As the generator speed increases the generator
becomes self-exciting.
The charge warning lamp function is transmitted to the EMS and then on to the Controller Area Network (CAN)
bus to the instrument pack.
LOAD MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The load management system comprises software resident in the Automatic Temperature Control Module
(ATCM).
For additional information, refer to: Control Components (412-04 Control Components, Description and
Operation).
Its purpose is to protect battery state-of-charge during abnormal usage of the vehicle. The system will request
the Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) ring and the air suspension to go into 'power save' mode, and
will modulate features such as seat heating and screen heating to prevent the battery being dragged down to a
point where the car becomes unoperational. A 'WARNING - LOW BATTERY' message will be displayed in the
message centre.

Testing).
Removal
Specifications).

(303-05C Accessory Drive - V6 4.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
3. Disconnect the generator electrical connectors.

Release the gaiter, remove the nut and
disconnect the cable.
4. Remove the generator.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts in the

sequence shown.
Install the generator.

2. Connect the generator electrical connectors.

Tighten the nut to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

(303-05C Accessory Drive - V6 4.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Specifications).
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol -

Generator retaining bolts 47 35 -
Battery positive cable retaining nut 12 9 -
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol - Generator - Component
Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol - Generator - Overview
OVERVIEW
On 5.0L V8 vehicles (naturally aspirated and supercharger), the charging system consists of a 150 Amp output
generator and regulator assembly. The generator and regulator assembly generates electrical power for the
vehicle electrical system and maintains the battery in a charged state.
When the engine is running the generator produces an alternating current, which is converted to a direct current
internally. The output from the generator is controlled by the voltage regulator (located inside the generator) and
then supplied to the battery through the main battery positive cable. The generator is mounted on the front right
side of the engine and driven at approximately 3 times engine speed by the accessory drive belt.
Generator and Regulator - V8 5.0L Petrol - Generator - System
Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O =
LIN (local interconnect network) bus
Item Description
1 Battery monitoring system module
2 Battery
3 BJB (battery junction box)
4 Generator and regulator
5 ECM (engine control module)
6 Instrument cluster
7 RJB (rear junction box)
System Operation
GENERAL
The output voltage required from the generator and regulator is calculated by the battery monitoring system. For
additional information refer to Battery, Mounting and Cables 414-01.
The battery monitoring system signals the calculated voltage to the ECM via the RJB and the instrument cluster. The
ECM then transmits the calculated voltage to the generator and regulator on the LIN bus connection.
The ECM will over-ride the voltage value requested by the battery monitoring system if it detects a fault in the
generator and regulator. The ECM also signals the instrument cluster to display a warning message if it detects a
fault with the generator and regulator. For additionalinformation refer to Instrument Cluster 413-01.
GENERATOR AND REGULATOR
The regulator provides a controlled variable voltage output from the generator. Two electrical terminals are provided
on the outer casing of the generator. One terminal supplies the DC (direct current) voltage output from the generator
to the battery positive terminal. The second terminal provides the LIN bus connection between the regulator and the
ECM.

Testing).
Removal

stands.
3. Torque: 62 Nm
4.

always correct.

Torque: 47 Nm
7. Torque: 12 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - General Information -
Navigation System Map Updates
Map Update Applicability

Pre -
Vehicle 10MY 10 MY 11 MY 12MY 13MY 14MY
XK DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD
F-Type - - - - - USB
XF DVD DVD DVD USB USB USB
XJ - USB USB USB USB USB
Freelander DVD DVD DVD DVD USB USB
Discovery 3 DVD - - - -
Discovery 4 - External HD Service External HD Service USB USB USB
Tool Tool
Range Rover Evoque - - - USB USB USB
Range Rover Sport DVD External HD Service External HD Service USB USB USB
(L320) Tool Tool
Range Rover Sport - - - - - USB
(L494)
Range Rover (L322) DVD External HD Service External HD Service External HD Service - -
Tool Tool Tool
Range Rover (L405) - - - - USB USB
Mapping Regions
Region Mapping Area
1 North America (USA, Canada and Mexico)
2 Western and Eastern Europe
3 Japan
4 Middle East (Bahrain, Jordan, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia and UAE
5 South Africa
6 South America (Brazil and Argentina)
7 Russia
8 Pacific (Australia and New Zealand)
9 South East Asia (Malaysia and Singapore)
DVD Map Updates
Vehicles equipped with the 'remote' navigation module are supplied with a DVD map update which is loaded into
and left in the navigation module. Map data is read directly from the DVD. This update can be carried out by the
customer.
External HD Service Tool Map Updates

Discovery 4, Range Rover Sport and Range Rover vehicles, equipped with a HDD (hard disc drive) integrated
into the touch screen, are updated at point of service. Dealers are supplied with a set of master pack map
update DVD's which are loaded onto the dealer Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment. The map
data is then loaded from the diagnostic equipment onto the navigation tool hard drive. The map data is loaded to
the touch s screen from the navigation tool hard drive.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
NOTE: The navigation update tool does not need the map data loading every time. This is only necessary
when a new map update DVD is released.
Using the approved Jaguar/Land Rover diagnostic equipment select the navigation update tool.
Select Setup on th navigation update tool.
Connect the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment using the
USB cable and press Continue proceed.
The navigation update tool will then check the connection.
Select your preferred language from the drop down menu then press Save and Continue Setup to
proceed.
When the navigation update tool confirms the initial setup is complete, press Continue to proceed.
The navigation update tool will the return to the main menu screen, select Load Map Data to proceed.
Disconnect then reconnect, the USB cable connecting to the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land
Rover approved diagnostic equipment, press Continue proceed.
The navigation update tool will then check the connection.

Insert map update disk 1 into the DVD drive of the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment
and press Continue proceed
The navigation update tool will then read the map data
Map data will then be copied from disk 1 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Insert map update disk 2 into the DVD drive and press Continue proceed
Map data will then be copied from disk 2 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Map data is now ready to be uploaded onto the navigation update tool, press Continue proceed.
The map data is now being uploaded onto the navigation update tool.
Map data upload is now complete.
Disconnect the navigation update tool from Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Connect the navigation update tool to the vehicle using the firewire cable.
Select Navigation using the touch screen display soft key.
Select Navigation Setup using the touch screen soft key.
Select Map Change using the touch screen.
Select map region using the touch screen display and press Map Data Update to continue.
The current map data version and the proposed update map data versions will now be shown, Select the
relevant region, using the related touch screen key to proceed.
Select OK to input the licence key using the touch screen.
Input the licence key using the touch screen display and press OK to continue.
Select OK using the touch screen.
The map update will begin.

When the map update is complete a message will be shown in the touch screen, select OK to continue
using the touch screen display soft key. The navigation system will restart with the new map data.
Disconnect the navigation update tool from the vehicle.
USB Map Updates
All Gen 2.1 equipped vehicles are supplied with a USB map updates, these updates can be carried out by the
customer.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
Start the engine.

Navigate to the touch screen Home Menu screen.
Insert the USB memory stick containing the map data into the vehicle USB port.
Press Continue on the touch screen to proceed with the installation of the map update.
using the touch screen enter the licence code and press OK to proceed.
NOTE: Selecting 'Cancel' returns to the 'Home Menu' screen, the map update will continue to run in
the background
The map update will begin and a message will be displayed in the touch screen display advising that
navigation is unavailable.
Map update progress can be viewed as a percentage of the completed download in the Home Menu
screen.
When the update is complete a message is displayed informing the user.
The navigation will restart upon completion of the map update.
NOTE: Remove USB stick immediately
Turn off the engine.

Exit, lock the vehicle and leave for at 15 minutes before using the navigation system.
Japanese Navigation
The Japanese satellite navigation system uses a separate navigation computer module.
The HDD in the ACM/IAM is not used for navigation downloads in this market.
Map updates are supplied in DVD format. The DVD is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is read directly
from the DVD.
Asia Navigation
The Asia market navigation system is an aftermarket unit.
Map updates are supplied in an SD card format. The SD card is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is
read directly from the SD card.
Cellular Phone
For a detailed description of the Cellular phone system and operation, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing
section of the workshop manual. REFER to:
Audio System (415-01 Audio Unit, Description and Operation),

Antenna (415-02 Antenna, Description and Operation),
Speakers (415-03 Speakers, Description and Operation),
Video System (415-07 Video System, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Check all information and entertainment system modules Fuses
Speakers Electrical harnesses
Switch(s) stuck or damaged Harness connectors
Touch screen display Battery condition, state of charge
4. If the cause is not visually evident, refer to the Symptom Chart below, alternatively check for Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Action
Unable to pair GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Not Auto Connecting GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Poor Quality Audio GO to Pinpoint Test C.
No Audio to 3rd Party GO to Pinpoint Test D.
No Audio from 3rd Party GO to Pinpoint Test E.
No Audio GO to Pinpoint Test F.
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Bluetooth Module - High Line (TEL) (100-00 General
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : UNABLE TO PAIR

CONDITIONS
A1: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
NOTE: Prior to continuing with any diagnosis, ensure that the Customer telephone and level of software is
included on the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the
bluetooth function is activated and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin area.
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is shown on vehicle display.
Is 'No Phone Fitted' displayed?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Locate the connected telephone and if not Customer telephone, disconnect from the system.
A2: TELEPHONE BLUETOOTH DEVICE SEARCH
1 Carry out Bluetooth device search using Customer handset.
Is 'Land Rover' identified in Bluetooth device list?
Yes
Select device from list, then continue with diagnosis.GO to A3.
No
Carry out further Bluetooth device search, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately
20 seconds between searches. If 'Land Rover' still not identified in Bluetooth device list, set
ignition status to OFF, wait approximately 30 seconds and set ignition status to ON. Carry
out further Bluetooth device search, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20
seconds between searches. If 'Land Rover' still not identified in Bluetooth device list, contact
your local in market support for further assistance.
A3: TELEPHONE HANDSET ERROR
1 Check for any error shown on the telephone handset when 'Land Rover' is selected from the
Bluetooth device list.
Was an error immediately shown on the telephone handset?
Yes
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt selection, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If error still being displayed, contact your
local in market support for assistance.
No
Enter PIN '2121' then continue with diagnosis.GO to A4.
A4: PIN ENTRY STATUS
1 Check for successful PIN entry.
Was PIN entry successful?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt PIN entry, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If PIN entry is still un-successful, contact
your local in market support for assistance.
A5: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is still shown on vehicle display.
Is 'No Phone Fitted' still displayed?
Yes
From the telephone handset, select the connect option for the 'Land Rover' device identified
in the Bluetooth device list. If 'No Phone Fitted' is still displayed, suspect a telephone handset
fault. Carry out Pinpoint test again using known good telephone handset.
No
The telephone is paired and connected to the system. No further action is required for this
symptom.
PINPOINT TEST B : NOT AUTOMATICALLY CONNECTING

CONDITIONS
B1: CUSTOMER TELEPHONE IN POSITION 1
bluetooth and auto connect functions are activated and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin
area.
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is in position 1 in the Bluetooth
Module device list.
Is the Customer telephone in position 1?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Advise Customer that delays in connection will occur if telephone is not listed in position
1.
B2: BLUETOOTH CONNECTION
1 Carry out checks to determine if Bluetooth connection to the vehicle has been achieved.
Has Bluetooth connection to the vehicle been achieved?
Yes
No further action is required for this symptom.
No
GO to B3.
B3: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'Land Rover' is shown in the Customer Bluetooth
telephone device display.
Is 'Land Rover' identified in the Customer Bluetooth device list?
Yes
Select the device to connect then follow pairing instructions.
No
Carry out the 'Unable to Pair' Pinpoint Test.GO to A.
PINPOINT TEST C : POOR QUALITY AUDIO

CONDITIONS
C1: SIGNAL STRENGTH
telephone is placed within the vehicle cabin area and is connected to the vehicle via bluetooth.
1 Check the signal strength displayed on the telephone handset.
Are at least two signal strength bars shown on the telephone handset display?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Suspect GSM Network issue. This can explain intermittent audio and dropped calls, and the
inability to initiate calls.
C2: POOR AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY ONLY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio from the Third Party only.
Is the poor audio from the Third Party only?
Yes
Suspect GSM Network issue. This can explain intermittent audio and dropped calls, and the
inability to initiate calls.
No
GO to C3.
C3: POOR AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY ONLY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio to the Third Party only.
Is the poor audio to the Third Party only?
Yes
Check and install a new microphone as necessary.
No
GO to C4.
C4: POOR AUDIO WITH VEHICLE STATIONARY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is poor audio when the vehicle is
stationary only.
Is the poor audio when the vehicle is stationary only?
Yes
Check and install a new microphone as necessary.
No
GO to C5.
C5: THIRD PARTY MOVING VEHICLE
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if the Third Party is in a moving vehicle.
Is the Third Party in a moving vehicle?
Yes
There are limitations to the way the system can improve audio, and in this situation it is not
possible to determine the source of the audio degradation.
No
GO to C6.
C6: CUSTOMER HEARING ECHO
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if the Customer is hearing an echo.
Is the Customer hearing an echo?
Yes
Echo from the Third Party is not vehicle failure, it is the Third Party set-up. No further action
is required for this symptom.
No
Contact your local in market support for assistance.
PINPOINT TEST D : NO AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY

CONDITIONS
D1: MICROPHONE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
1 Using the Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for any logged microphone DTCs
in Audio Front Control module.
Is DTC B1D79-01 logged?
Yes
Carry out diagnosis of electrical failure as advised in Action column of DTC Index.
No
PINPOINT TEST E : NO AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY

E1: 'IN CALL' DISPLAY
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'In Call' is shown on the vehicle display.
Is vehicle display showing 'In Call'?
Yes
No
Call has ended. No further action is required for this symptom.
PINPOINT TEST F : NO AUDIO

CONDITIONS
F1: AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the Third Party.
Is there Audio from the Third Party?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio From Third Party' Pinpoint test.GO to E.
F2: AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio to the Third Party.
Is there Audio to the Third Party?
Yes
GO to F3.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio To Third Party' Pinpoint test.GO to D.
F3: CD OR RADIO AUDIO
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the CD or Radio.
Is there Audio from the CD or Radio?
Yes
GO to F4.
No
Suspect MOST ring fault, refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check/rectify MOST ring as
necessary.
F4: TELEPHONE HANDSET AUDIO
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the telephone handset.
Is there Audio from the telephone handset?
Yes
Ensure vehicle is parked. Disconnect and reconnect handset. If issue not resolved, contact
your local in market support for assistance.
No
Contact you local in market support for assistance.
Information and Entertainment System
For a detailed description of the Information and Entertainment System, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (415-01B Information and Entertainment System)
Audio System (Description and Operation),

Speakers (Description and Operation).
checked and/or the donor vehicle
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests

Visual Inspection
Check all information and entertainment system modules Fuses
Compact disc player jammed, not loading Electrical harnesses
Scratched/dirty compact discs Harness connectors
Speakers Battery condition, state of charge
Switch(s) stuck or damaged
5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for
the specific customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required
Symptom Chart
Symptom Display Possible Causes Action

Poor audio quality (all Display normal MOST harness Check MOST harness connectors for
sources) connections security
loose Check MOST harness connectors for
MOST harness contamination
connections Check the routing of the MOST
contaminated harness
MOST harness
misrouted
- Too
many
bends
- Bend
radius
less than
25mm
Information and Touch screen MOST network REFER to: Communications Network
entertainment system displaying logo fault (418-00 Module Communications
inoperative or blank Network, Diagnosis and Testing).
No signal or Vehicle not in No fault to rectify

NOTE: Satellite Digital Acquiring USA The vehicle must have clear line of
Audio Service (SDARS) signal Poor signal sight to a satellite, which means
applies to NAS market reception being outside and having no
vehicles only Satellite Digital blockages between the vehicle and
Audio Service the satellite
No Satellite Digital Audio (SDARS) Using the manufacturer approved
Service (SDARS) channels system fault diagnostic system, check the Satellite
available Radio Control Module (SRCM) for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
Unsubscribed Channel 184 is No fault to rectify. Subscribe to

NOTE: Satellite Digital available Satellite Digital Audio Service
Audio Service (SDARS) without (SDARS) to resume service
applies to NAS market subscription for
vehicles only a limited period
(6 months)
Only one Satellite Digital
Audio Service (SDARS)
channel available (channel
184)
Unsubscribed Channel 184 is No fault to rectify. Subscribe to
NOTE: Satellite Digital available Satellite Digital Audio Service
Audio Service (SDARS) without (SDARS) to resume service
applies to NAS market subscription for
vehicles only a limited period
(6 months)
No Satellite Digital Audio
Service (SDARS) channels
available after 6 months
without subscribing
Unsubscribed Adult channels No fault to rectify. Subscribe to
NOTE: Satellite Digital blocked by Satellite Digital Audio Service
Audio Service (SDARS) subscription (SDARS) full package to receive adult
applies to NAS market type (family channels
vehicles only package)
Some Satellite Digital Audio

Service (SDARS)
unavailable
Unsubscribed Payment not No fault to rectify
NOTE: Satellite Digital made
Audio Service (SDARS)
applies to NAS market
vehicles only
Satellite Digital Audio

Service (SDARS) pay
channels unavailable
Pinpoint Tests For Suspected Loudspeaker Faults In Harman/Kardon Audio Systems
NOTE: See separate Pinpoint Tests (below) for sub-woofer faults
PINPOINT TEST A : NO SOUND OUTPUT FROM LOUDSPEAKER(S)

CONDITIONS
A1: NO SOUND OUTPUT FROM LOUDSPEAKER(S)
1 Check loudspeaker operation
Is the harness connector securely connected to the audio amplifier module and the loudspeaker
unit(s)?
Yes
Proceed to the next step GO to A2.
No
Reconnect wiring harness to audio amplifier module/loudspeaker unit(s)
1 Check integrated audio module (IAM) operation
Is the integrated audio module (IAM) operational?
Yes
No
Check the integrity of the power supply circuits/fuses to the integrated audio module and
rectify as required. Check the IAM for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
1 Check which loudspeakers are operational
Are all loudspeakers working?
Yes
No
Use the fader control to direct audio output to different loudspeaker locations to establish
which units are non-operational. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuits between the audio amplifier module and the affected loudspeaker units for short
circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. If fault persists,
replace non-operational loudspeaker unit(s) as required
1 Check for signs of water ingress
Does the loudspeaker drive unit show any signs of water damage?
Yes
Replace the loudspeaker unit(s) as required
No
Proceed to the next step GO to Pinpoint Test B.
PINPOINT TEST B : POOR OR WEAK SOUND OUTPUT FROM LOUDSPEAKER(S)

CONDITIONS
B1: POOR OR WEAK SOUND OUTPUT FROM LOUDSPEAKER(S)
1 Check connections to loudspeaker units
Are the connectors inserted securely into the loudspeaker units?
Yes
Proceed to the next step GO to B2.
No
Ensure all connectors are securely attached to the loudspeaker units
1 Check integrity of vehicle power supply fuses
Are the vehicle/audio amplifier module power supply fuses functional?
Yes
No
Replace fuse(s) as required
1 Check power and ground circuits to the infotainment system components
Are all the necessary power and ground feeds present?
Yes
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the infotainment power and ground circuits
for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required
1 Check power supply voltage at power supply connectors
Is the power supply voltage measured at the power supply connectors between 12 and 14 volts?
Yes
No further action
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the infotainment power supply circuits for
short circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Refer to
the relevant section of workshop manual and battery care manual. Check battery state of
charge and starting/charging system performance and rectify as required
PINPOINT TEST C : LOUDSPEAKER VIBRATING (BUZZING) EXCESSIVELY

CONDITIONS
C1: LOUDSPEAKER VIBRATING (BUZZING) EXCESSIVELY
1 Check for extreme bass/treble settings
Is the audio system output settings for bass and/or treble set too high?
Yes
Adjust settings to appropriate levels
No
Proceed to the next step GO to C2.
1 Check loudspeaker unit(s) fixing screws are securely fastened
Are all loudspeaker fixing screws fully secured to the surrounding trim?
Yes
No
Tighten the fixing screws to the correct torque as directed in the workshop manual
1 Check if the wiring harness is resting against the internal surface of the loudspeaker
Is there any cabling or other parts of the wiring harness resting against the internal surface of
the loudspeaker?
Yes
Re-route and secure the wiring harness so that it is not resting against any internal
surfaces of the loudspeaker
No
1 Check security of trim in the vicinity of the loudspeaker units
Is the trim secure in the vicinity of the loudspeaker units?
Yes
No further action
No
Secure loose trim components to ensure no vibration
C5: AUDIO OUTPUT DISTORTED
Yes
No
No further action
Pinpoint Tests For Suspected Sub-Woofer Faults In Harman/Kardon Audio Systems
NOTE: See separate Pinpoint Tests (above) for other loudspeaker faults
PINPOINT TEST D : NO SOUND OUTPUT FROM SUB-WOOFER

CONDITIONS
D1: NO SOUND OUTPUT FROM SUB-WOOFER
1 Check sub-woofer operation
Is the harness connector securely connected to the audio amplifier module and the sub-woofer
unit?
Yes
Proceed to the next step GO to D2.
No
Reconnect wiring harness to audio amplifier module/sub-woofer unit
1 Check integrated audio module (IAM) operation
Is the integrated audio module (IAM) operational?
Yes
No
Check the integrity of the power supply circuits/fuses to the integrated audio module and
rectify as required. Check the IAM for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
1 Check which sub-woofers are operational
Are all sub-woofers working?
Yes
No
Use the fader control to direct audio output to different sub-woofer locations to establish
which units are non-operational. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuits between the audio amplifier module and the affected sub-woofer units for short
circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. If fault persists,
replace non-operational sub-woofer unit(s) as required
1 Check for signs of water damage around sub-woofer unit(s)
Are there any signs of water damage around sub-woofer unit(s)?
Yes
Dis-assemble sub-woofer moulding and check loudspeaker condition. If the sub-woofer drive
unit shows signs of water damage, replace the sub-woofer unit(s) as required
No
1 Check for any visible loose components on sub-woofer drive unit
Are there any visible loose components (ie: loose wires) on the sub-woofer drive unit
Yes
Replace the sub-woofer unit(s) as required
No
No further action
PINPOINT TEST E : POOR OR WEAK SOUND OUTPUT FROM SUB-WOOFER(S)

CONDITIONS
E1: POOR OR WEAK SOUND OUTPUT FROM SUB-WOOFER(S)
1 Check connections to sub-woofer units
Are the connectors inserted securely into the sub-woofer units?
Yes
Proceed to the next step GO to E2.
No
Ensure all connectors are securely attached to the sub-woofer units
1 Check integrity of vehicle power supply fuses
Are the vehicle/audio amplifier module power supply fuses functional?
Yes
No
Replace fuse(s) as required
1 Check power and ground circuits to the infotainment system components
Are all the necessary power and ground feeds present?
Yes
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the infotainment power and ground circuits
for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required
1 Check power supply voltage at power supply connectors
Is the power supply voltage measured at the power supply connectors between 12 and 14 volts?
Yes
No further action
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the infotainment power supply circuits for
short circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Refer to
the relevant section of workshop manual and battery care manual. Check battery state of
charge and starting/charging system performance and rectify as required
PINPOINT TEST F : SUB-WOOFER VIBRATING (BUZZING) EXCESSIVELY

F1: SUB-WOOFER VIBRATING (BUZZING) EXCESSIVELY
Yes
No
Proceed to the next step GO to F2.
1 Check sub-woofer unit(s) fixing screws are securely fastened
Are all sub-woofer fixing screws fully secured to the surrounding trim?
Yes
Proceed to the next step GO to F3.
No
Tighten the fixing screws to the correct torque as directed in the workshop manual
1 Check security of trim in the vicinity of the sub-woofer units
Is the trim secure in the vicinity of the sub-woofer units?
Yes
No further action
No
Secure loose trim components to ensure no vibration
PINPOINT TEST G : SUB-WOOFER AUDIO OUTPUT DISTORTED

G1: SUB-WOOFER AUDIO OUTPUT DISTORTED
Yes
No
Proceed to the next step GO to G2.
G2: SUB-WOOFER AUDIO OUTPUT DISTORTED
1 Check if the distortion continues when sub-woofer casing is removed
Does the distortion continue when sub-woofer casing is removed?
Yes
Replace the sub-woofer unit(s) as required
No
No further action
DTC Index
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Audio Amplifier Module (AAM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Audio Front Control Module - High Line (ACM) (Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Audio Front Control Module - Low Line (ACM) (Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Bluetooth Module - High Line (TEL) (Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Digital Audio Broadcast Module (DABM) (Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Digital Audio Control Module C (DACMC) (Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) - Front Integrated
Control Panel (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIMB) (Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Module Name: Dual View Touch Screen (Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Image Processing Module B (IPMB) (Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Navigation Control Module (NAV) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Portable Audio Interface Module (APIM) (Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Rear Entertainment Module (REM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Satellite Digital Audio Radio System Module (SARM)
(Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Television Control Module (TVM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Multifunction Display Module (FCDIM) (Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Bluetooth Module - Mid Line (SPRM) (Description and
Operation).
Navigation System
For a detailed description of the navigation system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual.
REFER to: Navigation System (419-07, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Electrical
Battery
Fuses
- Central Junction Box
- Battery Junction Box
- Megafuses
Wiring harness
Damaged, loose or corroded connectors
Touch Screen (TS)
GPS antenna
TV antenna
Satellite antenna
FM antenna
Rear view camera
Microphone
Accessory USB unit
Steering wheel controls
Clock spring
Integrated Head Unit (IHU)
Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module
Wheel speed sensors
Vehicle Information and Communication System (VICS) receiver - Japan only
VICS beacon antenna - Japan only
Media Oriented System Transport (MOST) system
Gigabit Video Interface (GVIF)
Terrain Response (TR)
Mobile telephone
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Touch Screen (TS) and Navigation Diagnostics
Fault codes and diagnostics can be retrieved/achieved using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Hard Key Test
The hard key test is used to check the operation of the hard switches.
If switch operation is normal, the switch colour on the screen will change when a hard switch is pressed. (Power
switch operation cannot be checked on this screen.)
Touch Switch Test
The touch switch test calibrates the touch switch coordinates and checks touch switch operation.
Start Calibration - Calibrates the switch coordinates. Calibrate the coordinates by touching each of the "+" marks
in the four corners of the screen.
NOTE: Do not touch any locations other than the "+" marks. (Touching other locations may invalidate the
calibration.)
Touch Switch Check - Checks for deviation in the coordinates. Check the coordinates of the touched location by
verifying the displayed values. Touch and hold "press here" to return to the previous screen. If there is a large
deviation in the coordinates, calibrate the touch switch using the "Start Calibration" function.
DTC Information
Search for the meaning of the displayed DTC.
Vehicle Configuration
Display the status of each vehicle system.
Speed Lock Configuration - Display the status of compulsory navigation settings (setting status of switches that
cannot be operated) when driving.
Configurations
Display primary system information.
Vehicle Signals
Display the status of vehicle signals inputted to the Touch Screen (TS). These signals include:
Lights (on or off)

Ambient light sensor voltage
Backlight dimming duty
Graphic illumination dimming duty
Vehicle speed, GPS speed, MOST km/h
Battery voltage
Reverse gear / park brake position (electric park brake on or off)
Speed inhibit
MOST Fibre Optic Transceiver (FOT) temperature
Output audio allocation
Video Inputs Test
This screen will allow the testing of video inputs that are connected to the Touch Screen (TS). These include:
Rear view / proximity camera

TV/DVD
Self Test
Performs system self-diagnosis and displays the diagnostic results.
If an abnormality is present, a DTC is displayed.
MOST Test
Display the MOST connection status, and reception/transmission messages related to MOST.
"Mpr" displays the number of MOST devices existing on MOST. When "0" or "1" is displayed, communication is
not possible.
Colour bar
This function allows the technician to test the colours generated by the TSD. A second screen displays six solid
colours, selecting the colour will fill the screen with the chosen colour and pressing the TSD again will revert
back to the colour test screen.
Loading
Update the navigation program.
For details on the update method, refer to the "Navigation Update Tool" operation manual.
HDD information
Display information on the Hard Disc Drive (HDD).
SMART test (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology) is initiated from this screen
Vehicle information
Display information on the vehicle.
Car configuration - Displays information on vehicle environment settings.

- Unit (distance) - Units of distance
- Unit (time) - Units of time
- Language - Displayed language
- Fuel information - Remaining fuel quantity
- Mileage information - Vehicle mileage display
- Time information - Current time display
- Override information - Status of switch operation inhibitions (Setting status of switches that cannot
be operated.)
GPS information - Display GPS related information.
- Received position - Displays the latitude and longitude (displayed in degrees, minutes, and
seconds) for the position information calculated by GPS.
- Map matched position - Displays the latitude and longitude (displayed in degrees, minutes, and
seconds) for the position information being used for map matching.
- Satellites - Number of acquired satellites.
- Current address - Address of the current location.
- Satellite Information - Displays satellite information for up to 12 GPS satellite search targets.
- Measurement HDOP - Positioning accuracy.
- Status - Positioning status.
- Date - Displays the current date and time in the following order: day, month, year, hour, minute,
second. The year is displayed using the four-digit western calendar; time is displayed in Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT).
Vehicle sensor - Display vehicle signals inputted to the Touch Screen (TS).
- REV - Reverse signal status.
- Speed - Current vehicle speed.
- Speed pulse count - Speed pulse count value.
- Distance calibration - Learning information for distance calibration.
- Voltage/Offset - Gyro sensor output voltage value/voltage correction value.
- Relative bearing - Relative bearing (0° when navigation is started.)
- Gyro sense - Learning value for gyro sensitivity.
- Reset - Resets the gyro sensor relative bearing value.
RDS-TMC information - Display RDS-TMC related information.
- Date/time (GMT) - Date and time for the TMC signal.
- Frequency - TMC signal frequency.
- PI code - Personal identification code for the broadcast station.
- PS name - Broadcast station name.
- Country code - Database country code.
- LTN - Database location number (location table number.)
- Service ID - Service provider identification number.
- Air data - TMC data.
Microphone
Check the volume for the voice recognition microphone inputted to the Touch Screen (TS). These include:
PTT switch status - Checks the PTT switch connection. When the PTT switch is pressed, a signal will be
outputted, and the indicator displays in green.
Microphone input level judging - If a sampling of the user's voice command is at or above the threshold
value, the indicator displays in blue.
Microphone level - Displays the microphone input level.
Voice output check
Check the audio output.
ON (Normal) - Outputs ADPCM voice (1 kHz sine wave) for five seconds.
ON (Max) - Outputs ADPCM voice (maximum 1 kHz sine wave) for five seconds.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Cause Action

Black screen (navigation and audio screens do not Temperature in GO to Pinpoint Test
display.) passenger A.
compartment too low
Condensation in
passenger
compartment
Electrical harness
open/short circuit, dis-
connected
Component failure
The navigation screen does not display, even when Electrical harness GO to Pinpoint Test
the "NAVIGATION" button is pressed (screen does open/short circuit, dis- B.
not change.) connected
Component failure
The hard switches do not respond. Component failure GO to Pinpoint Test

Switch failure C.
The audio screen cannot be operated (does not Media Oriented System GO to Pinpoint Test
display.) Transport (MOST) D.
system
Electrical harness
connected
The screen does not dim. Electrical harness GO to Pinpoint Test
open/short circuit, dis- E.
connected
Component failure
Noise on the screen, screen colour is abnormal. Electrical harness GO to Pinpoint Test
open/short circuit, dis- F.
connected
Component failure
The touch switches do not respond. Electrical harness GO to Pinpoint Test

open/short circuit, dis- G.
connected
Component failure
There is considerable deviation between the Electrical harness GO to Pinpoint Test

displayed vehicle position and the actual position. open/short circuit, dis- H.
connected
Component failure
The GPS no reception mark does not disappear. Electrical harness GO to Pinpoint Test
open/short circuit, dis- I.
connected
Component failure
No reception from
satellite
No sound is emitted. Electrical harness GO to Pinpoint Test

open/short circuit, dis- J.
connected
Component failure
Incorrect system
settings
There is no navigation voice guidance. Volume level set too GO to Pinpoint Test
low K.
The amplifier and
speakers are
incorrectly connected
Voice recognition does not function. Electrical harness GO to Pinpoint Test

open/short circuit, dis- L.
connected
Component failure
The vehicle position rotates randomly. Electrical harness GO to Pinpoint Test

open/short circuit, dis- M.
connected
Component failure
Vehicle on a turntable
in a parking building
The vehicle mark display is unstable. Electrical harness GO to Pinpoint Test

open/short circuit, dis- N.
connected
Component failure
No reception from
satellite
The vehicle position does not update. HDD GO to Pinpoint Test

contaminated/damaged O.
Electrical harness
connected
Component failure
The map display is incomplete. HDD GO to Pinpoint Test

contaminated/damaged P.
Electrical harness
connected
Component failure
Calls cannot be received or placed with Bluetooth®; Incompatible GO to Pinpoint Test

Bluetooth® cannot connect with the vehicle. Bluetooth® telephone Q.
Incorrect initial
connection settings
Electrical harness
connected
Component failure
The map cannot be updated. Refer to the Refer to the

"Navigation Update "Navigation Update
Tool" operation manual Tool" operation
manual
An error screen displays on the navigation screen. Access to the map GO to Pinpoint Test
data has not been R.
granted
The dual view cannot be switched. Incorrect car GO to Pinpoint Test

configuration data S.
received
Media Oriented System
Transport (MOST)
system
Component failure
Pinpoint Tests
NOTES:
If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty,
refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval Program is
in operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component.
The built in diagnostics are accessed as follows:
1.With the vehicle at rest, place the ignition switch "ON", or start the engine.
2. Press and hold the TSD in the centre at the top of the screen for approximately 5 seconds and then
press and hold the TSD at the top left corner of the screen for approximately 5 seconds.
3. A 'Diag PIN Entry' box will appear' Type in the access code 753.
4.Once this code has been accepted the Diagnostic Menu screen will be displayed.
PINPOINT TEST A : BLACK SCREEN (NAVIGATION AND AUDIO SCREENS DO NOT DISPLAY.)
CONDITIONS
A1: THE SCREEN SAVER FUNCTION WORKS
1 Check the screen saver function works.
Does the screen saver function work?
Yes
Operation is normal.
No
Proceed to the next step.GO to A2.
A2: THE DISPLAY BACKLIGHT EMITS LIGHT
1 Check the display backlight emits light.
Does the display backlight emits light?
Yes
Proceed to the next step.
No
GO to A12.
A3: THE SCREEN IS TURNED OFF
1 Check the screen is not turned off.
Do the navigation and audio screens display when the screen is turned on?
Yes
No
GO to A4.
A4: THE VEHICLE INTERIOR TEMPERATURE IS -20°C OR LESS
1 Check the cabin internal temperature.
Is the cabin internal temperature -20°C or lower?
Yes
Raise the cabin internal temperature, re-test the vehicle.
No
GO to A5.
A5: CONDENSATION IS FORMING INSIDE THE VEHICLE
1 Check for condensation occurring inside the passenger compartment.
Is condensation occurring inside the passenger compartment?
Yes
Dry out the passenger compartment, re-test the vehicle.
No
GO to A6.
A6: THE LED FOR THE POWER SUPPLY BUTTON IS FLASHING. (RANGE ROVER ONLY)
1 Check the status of the audio power button LED.
Is the audio power button flashing?
Yes
Carry out MOST Ring diagnostics to locate fault.
No
GO to A7.
A7: ONLY THE NAVIGATION SCREEN OR AUDIO SCREEN IS BLACK
1 Check to see if only the navigation screen is blank.
Is only the navigation screen blank?
Yes
Check and install a new Touch Screen Display (TSD) as required. Refer to the new
module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
No
GO to A8.
A8: ONLY THE BACK MONITOR SCREEN IS BLACK
1 Check to see if only the audio screen is blank.
Is only the audio screen blank?
Yes
No
GO to A10.
A9: AFTER INITIATING THE "VIDEO INPUT TEST" DIAGNOSIS, VIDEO CAN BE DISPLAYED
1 Carry out the "Video Input Test" diagnosis' (PIN code 753).
Are the results of the "Video Input Test" diagnosis' normal?
Yes
Re-check the system.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the cameras control module.
A10: ONLY THE TV SCREEN IS BLACK
1 Check to see if only the TV screen is black.
Is only the TV screen blank?
Yes
No
GO to A12.
A11: AFTER INITIATING THE "VIDEO INPUT TEST" DIAGNOSIS, VIDEO CAN BE DISPLAYED
1 Carry out the "Video Input Test" diagnosis' (PIN code 753).
Are the results of the "Video Input Test" diagnosis' normal?
Yes
Re-check the system.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the TV control module.
A12: THE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE VISUAL NAVIGATION AND POWER SUPPLY WIRING HARNESS
AND CONNECTORS ARE CORRECT
1 Check the display and power supply harness, power, auxiliary and ground circuits, for short,
open circuits and are correctly connected.
Was a fault identified with the display and power supply harness, power auxiliary and ground
connections?
Yes
Rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
No
PINPOINT TEST B : THE NAVIGATION MAP SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY, EVEN WHEN THE
"NAVIGATION" BUTTON IS PRESSED (SCREEN DOES NOT CHANGE.)
NOTE: When re-confirming the symptoms after inspecting the wiring harness/connector, turn the ignition
status to OFF, wait for the Audio power button LED on the display to turn OFF, then turn the ignition status to
ON and run the diagnosis again from the beginning.
CONDITIONS
B1: NO RESPONSE TO PRESSING NAVIGATION MENU
NOTE: 15 minutes are required for the program to update. If the ignition is accidentally turned OFF, turn
the ignition ON again, and wait for 15 minutes.
1 Check that the ignition was not turned 'OFF' during a navigation software update.
Was the ignition turned 'OFF' during a navigation software update?
Yes
Wait for 15 minutes with the ignition ON. Then turn the ignition to OFF then ignition ON.
No
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of navigation system wiring harness
and connectors.
GO to B2.
B2: NO RESPONSE TO PRESSING NAVIGATION MENU
1 Wait for 15 minutes with the ignition ON. Then turn the ignition to OFF then ignition ON.
Does the navigation screen displays when the "NAVIGATION" button is pressed.
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : THE HARD SWITCHES DO NOT RESPOND.

CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK FOR FOREIGN OBJECTS
1 Check for foreign objects near to the button.
Are there any foreign objects close to the button causing it to be pressed?
Yes
Remove foreign objects and re-test vehicle.
No
GO to C2.
C2: DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS CHECK
1 Check to see if the display diagnostics can be displayed.
Can the display diagnostics be displayed?
Yes
No
C3: HARD KEY TEST
1 Carry out the display diagnostics hard key test.
Is the operation normal when carrying out the display diagnostics hard key test?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST D : THE AUDIO SCREEN CANNOT BE OPERATED (DOES NOT DISPLAY.)
CONDITIONS
D1: CD CHANGER CHECK
1 Check to see if a CD changer is installed.
Is a CD changer installed?
Yes
No
Normal operation, CD screen will not be displayed when there is no CD changer installed.
D2: THE AUDIO SCREEN DISPLAYS WHEN THE "AUDIO VIDEO" HARD SWITCH IS PRESSED.
1 The audio screen displays when the "AUDIO VIDEO" hard switch is pressed.
Does the audio screen displays when the "AUDIO VIDEO" hard switch is pressed?
Yes
No
Refer to the hard switches do not respond diagnosis.
D3: THE AUDIO SCREEN DISPLAYS WHEN "AUDIO VIDEO" ON THE "HOME MENU" IS PRESSED.
1 The audio screen displays when "Audio Video" on the "Home Menu" is pressed.
Does the audio screen displays when "Audio Video" on the "Home Menu" is pressed?
Yes
No
Refer to the touch switches do not respond diagnosis.
D4: EACH SWITCH (AM FM, CD, IPOD/USB, TV/DVD.) ON THE AUDIO SCREEN RESPONDS.
1 Each switch (AM FM, CD, iPod/USB, TV/DVD.) on the audio screen responds.
Does each switch (AM FM, CD, iPod/USB, TV/DVD.) on the audio screen respond?
Yes
No
GO to D5.
D5: THE IGNITION IS TURNED FROM IGNITION ON TO OFF, AND AFTER WAITING FOR
APPROXIMATELY 30 SECONDS, THE TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY (TSD) POWER SUPPLY LED WENT OUT.
WHEN THE IGNITION IS TURNED TO ON, THE AUDIO SCREEN CAN BE OPERATED.
1 The ignition is turned from Ignition ON to OFF, and after waiting for approximately 30
seconds, the Touch Screen Display (TSD) power supply LED went out.
When the ignition is turned to ON, can the audio screen be operated?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST E : THE SCREEN DOES NOT DIM.

CONDITIONS
E1: CHECK FOR FOREIGN OBJECTS
1 Check for foreign objects adhered to the display light sensor.
Range Rover - Top right of display
Discovery/Range Rover Sport - Instrument panel
Are there any foreign objects adhered to the display light sensor?
Yes
Remove foreign objects and re-test vehicle.
No
GO to E2.
E2: DISPLAY LIGHT SENSOR CHECK
1 Check to see if display screen switches to low light when sensor is covered.
Does the display screen switch to low light when the sensor is covered?
Yes
No
GO to E3.
E3: VEHICLE LIGHT SWITCH TESTS
1 Check to see if display screen switches to low light when the vehicle light switch is pressed.
2 When the vehicle exterior lights are switched on, check diagnostic menu "Vehicle Signals"
lights on the diagnostics screen is "ON."
Does the display screen switch to low light when the vehicle light switch is pressed?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST F : NOISE ON THE SCREEN; SCREEN COLOUR IS ABNORMAL.

CONDITIONS
F1: DISPLAY POWER AND GROUND CHECKS
1 Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check battery power and power ON relay voltage, and
ground resistance.
Is the battery power and power ON relay voltage between 10.5 and 16 volts, and continuity to
ground?
Yes
No
Check and rectify the vehicle wiring harness and connectors.
F2: CONTRAST CHECK
1 Check to see if the screen colour is normal when the screen setting (contrast) is re-ret to the
default values.
Is the screen colour normal with the default values?
Yes
No
GO to F3.
F3: CABIN INTERNAL TEMPERATURE CHECK
1 Check the cabin internal temperature.
Is the cabin internal temperature -20°C or lower?
Yes
Raise the cabin internal temperature and re-test.
No
GO to F4.
F4: ADDITIONAL SCREEN CHECKS
1 Check all other screens.
Are all other screens beside the navigation display screen normal?
Yes
No
GO to F5.
F5: COLOUR BAR CHECK
1 Carry out the display diagnostics colour bar check test.
Are the results of the display diagnostics colour bar check normal?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST G : THE TOUCH SWITCHES DO NOT RESPOND.

CONDITIONS
G1: TOUCH SWITCH TEST
1 The touch switches not responding on the navigation screen only
Are the touch switches not responding on the navigation screen only?
Yes
No
G2: TOUCH SWITCH CHECK
1 Carry out the touch switch check in the display diagnostics.
Are the results of the display diagnostics touch switch check normal?
Yes
Check the symptoms again.Operation is normal.
No
GO to G3.
G3: START CALIBRATION ROUTINE
1 Carry out the start calibration routine from the display diagnostics touch switch test.
Is normal operation resumed after correction?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST H : THERE IS CONSIDERABLE DEVIATION BETWEEN THE DISPLAYED

VEHICLE POSITION AND THE ACTUAL POSITION.
CONDITIONS
H1: GPS MARK DISPLAY CHECK
1 The GPS no reception mark is displayed.
Is the GPS no reception mark displayed on the display screen?
Yes
Refer to GPS no reception mark does not disappear diagnosis.
No
GO to H2.
H2: LOCATION CHECK
1 Check for symptom occurring in particular locations - parallel roads, elevated roads, loop
roads, parking centres (buildings) etc.
Does the symptom occur in a particular location?
Yes
In places where the vehicle position is hard to specify, the vehicle position may be matched
incorrectly and result in position discrepancies. Additionally, a new road layout will mean the
Gyro does not match the map position.
No
H3: DISTANCE CALIBRATION CHECK
NOTE: Refer to diagnostic menu "Vehicle Sensor" – Distance Calibration, this value should be
approximately 200mm, a large deviation from this value indicates a speed signal fault or incorrect wheel size.
1 Check to see if distance calibration is being performed.
Is distance calibration being performed?
Yes
Monitor the condition until distance calibration is complete (drive for over 10km/6.2 miles)
No
GO to H4.
H4: VEHICLE SIGNAL INSPECTION
1 Check vehicle sensor display screen, from vehicle information diagnostics menu for the
following: vehicle speed signal, REV: ON is indicated when the gear shift lever is in the REV
position and gyro sensor input status are normal.
Are the vehicle speed signal, REV signal, and gyro sensor input status normal?
Yes
GO to H5.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the integrity of the wiring harness and
connectors, and CAN circuit, to the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
H5: TIRE CHECK
1 Check to see if new tires have recently been installed.
Have new tires been recently installed?
Yes
From the navigation map screen, enter the navigation menu, select navigation setup then
select calibration, press ‘Distance’ then drive the vehicle for 10 to 20 km. Operation will
return to normal after performing distance calibration and driving the vehicle for 10 to 20
km.
No
Adjust the current location, and after the GPS no signal mark has disappeared, drive the
vehicle for a while to monitor conditions.
PINPOINT TEST I : THE GPS NO RECEPTION MARK DOES NOT DISAPPEAR.

NOTES:
Move the vehicle to an open area, radio waves from satellites may not be received inside buildings.
Correct the vehicle cursor to the current location.

CONDITIONS
I1: RETRO-INSTALL INSTALLATIONS CHECK
1 Check to see if there are any retro-install installations (anti-theft, radar, etc.)
Are there any retro-install installations?
Yes
GO to I2.
No
GO to I3.
I2: RETRO-INSTALL INSTALLATIONS RF CHECK
1 Turn power supply (including back-up power) to OFF status.
Does the GPS no reception mark disappear?
Yes
GPS reception may deteriorate when devices receiving radio waves are retro-installed. Alter
the position of the retro-install device, and re-test vehicle.
No
GO to I4.
I3: SATELLITE RECEPTION CHECKS
1 Check to see if a 'P' or 'T' is displayed in the 'STS' column of the navigation diagnostics GPS
information screen after 10 minutes have passed.
Is a 'P' or a 'T' displayed?
Yes
Wait for reception of another satellite so that position calculation can be performed.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit wiring diagrams and check the integrity of the wiring harness
and connectors to the GPS antenna.Proceed to the next step.
I4: GPS ANTENNA REPLACEMENT
1 Install a new GPS antenna.
Does the GPS no signal mark disappears when the GPS antenna is replaced.
Yes
Fault has been rectified.
No
PINPOINT TEST J : NO SOUND IS EMITTED.

CONDITIONS
J1: SOUND OUTPUT CHECK
1 Check sound output across all systems.
Is there no sound output across all systems?
Yes
GO to J2.
No
GO to J3.
J2: VOLUME LEVEL CHECK
1 Check the volume level is not set too low.
Is the volume level set too low?
Yes
Increase the volume level and re-test vehicle.
No
GO to J3.
J3: INTEGRITY OF AMPLIFIER AND SPEAKER WIRING.
1 The amplifier and speaker wiring harnesses are correctly connected.
Are the amplifier and speaker wiring harnesses correctly connected?
Yes
Check the MOST devices.GO to J4.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of amplifier and speaker wiring
harness and connections.
J4: ONLY VOICE RECOGNITION DOES NOT OUTPUT
1 Check to see if only voice recognition does not output.
Is there no output only from the voice recognition?
Yes
GO to J5.
No
Proceed to step 8.
J5: VOICE GUIDANCE
1 Check the volume level for voice guidance is not set too low.
Is the volume level for voice guidance set too low?
Yes
No
GO to J6.
J6: VOICE GUIDANCE SETTINGS
1 Check to see if the voice guidance is set to 'OFF' in the navigation settings.
Is the voice guidance set to 'OFF' in the navigation settings?
Yes
Set to 'ON' and re-test the vehicle.
No
GO to J7.
J7: ADDITIONAL ITEMS
1 Check to see if the following items apply.
There is no destination set

There is no movement along the route
Do the two items apply?

Yes
Normal operation, confirm customer symptom and re-test vehicle.
No
Check MOST connection at the Touch Screen Display (TSD), check the MOST
devices.Proceed to the next step.
J8: ONLY VOICE RECOGNITION DOES NOT OUTPUT
1 Check to see if only voice recognition does not output.
Is there no output only from the voice recognition?
Yes
Refer to the there is no navigation voice guidance diagnosis.
No
GO to J9.
J9: SOUND IS ONLY ABSENT WHEN USING THE AUDIO SYSTEM OR TELEPHONE.
1 Check to see if sound is only absent when using the audio system or telephone.
Does only the audio system or telephone sound not output?
Yes
Check MOST connection at the Touch Screen Display (TSD), check the MOST devices.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of wiring harness and
connections.
PINPOINT TEST K : THERE IS NO NAVIGATION VOICE GUIDANCE.

CONDITIONS
K1: SOUND MISSING AUDIO SYSTEM ONLY
1 Sound is only absent from the audio system (CD, radio.)
Is sound only absent from the audio system (CD, radio.)?
Yes
GO to K4.
No
K2: VOICE MISSING NAVIGATION SYSTEM ONLY
1 Voice is only absent from the navigation system.
Is voice only absent from the navigation system?
Yes
GO to K3.
No
GO to K3.
K3: NAVIGATION VOICE GUIDANCE CANNOT BE HEARD
1 Operate the navigation replay switch and raise the volume.
Can navigation voice guidance be heard after pressing the navigation replay switch, and raising
the volume?
Yes
No
K4: INTEGRITY OF AMPLIFIER AND SPEAKER WIRING.
1 The amplifier and speaker wiring harnesses are correctly connected.
Are the amplifier and speaker wiring harnesses correctly connected?
Yes
GO to K5.
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of amplifier and speaker wiring
K5: VOLUME LEVEL CHECK
1 Check the volume level is not set too low.
Is the volume level set too low?
No
No
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of complete audio system.
PINPOINT TEST L : VOICE RECOGNITION DOES NOT FUNCTION.

CONDITIONS
L1: AUDIO SOUND IS MUTED WHEN PTT SWITCH IS DEPRESSED
1 Check to see if the audio sound is muted when the PTT switch is depressed.
Is the audio sound muted?
Yes
GO to L3.
No
GO to L2.
L2: PTT SWITCH STATUS
1 Check to see if the PTT switch status is ok in the navigation diagnostics, manual check,
microphone test.
Is the PTT switch status, in navigation diagnostics, ok?
Yes
No
Replace the MOST master, or the gateway module.
L3: TALK BACK
1 Check to see if there is talk back when other voice recognition demands are executed.
Is there talk back?
Yes
System operation is normal, (advise change in manner of speech, as incorrect recognition is
occurring).
No
GO to L4.
L4: HARNESS/CONNECTOR CHECKS
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check integrity of Touch Screen Display (TSD)
Has a fault been identified with the Touch Screen Display (TSD) harness or connections?
Yes
Rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
No
PINPOINT TEST M : THE VEHICLE POSITION ROTATES RANDOMLY.

CONDITIONS
M1: VEHICLES CURRENT POSITION MARK TURNS ON ITS OWN
1 Determine if the ignition status was turned to Auxiliary or On, while the vehicle was on a
turntable in a parking building etc.
Was ignition status set to Auxiliary or On?
Yes
The angular speed of the vehicle at the time of the ignition status change will be logged as
the standard value. To re-set the standard value, turn ignition status to 'OFF' then to
'Auxiliary' or 'On' with the vehicle stationary. Re-test the vehicle.
No
PINPOINT TEST N : THE VEHICLE MARK DISPLAY IS UNSTABLE.

CONDITIONS
N1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
1 The vehicle speed signal is being properly inputted under "Vehicle Sensor" on the "Vehicle
information" diagnostics screen.
Is the vehicle speed input correctly? Note: MOST and navigation system module speeds are
approximately the same.
Yes
GO to N2.
No
Carry out MOST ring circuit checks.Check the Anti-Lock Brake System Module for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.Carry out network integrity tests using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
circuits if required. Repair wiring harness as required.Rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
N2: CHECK NUMBER OF SATELLITES
1 "0" is displayed in the "Satellites" column under "GPS Information" (on the "Vehicle
information" diagnostics screen.)
Is the number of satellites displayed on the screen 0?
Yes
No
GO to N3.
N3: CHECK IF SYMPTOMS ARE OCCURRING IN PARTICULAR LOCATIONS
1 Confirm if the 'car current position not stable' symptom is occurring in particular locations.
Is the 'car current position not stable' symptom occurring in particular locations?
Yes
System operation is normal. Signal reflections from buildings or a particular location may be
responsible.
No
PINPOINT TEST O : THE VEHICLE POSITION DOES NOT UPDATE.

CONDITIONS
O1: VEHICLE POSITION DOES NOT UPDATE
1 Check the GPS no reception mark.
Has the GPS no reception mark disappeared?
Yes
GO to O2.
No
1 Check the map screen scroll function.
Can the map screen be touched scrolled?
Yes
GO to O3.
No
Initiate the "SMART test" on the "HDD information" diagnostics screen.
1 The vehicle speed signal is being properly inputted under "Vehicle Sensor" on the "Vehicle
information" diagnostics screen.
Is the vehicle speed input correctly? Note: MOST and navigation system module speeds are
approximately the same.
Yes
No
Carry out MOST ring circuit checks.Check the Anti-Lock Brake System Module for related
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index.Carry out network integrity tests using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
circuits if required. Repair wiring harness as required.Rectify the fault and re-test the vehicle.
PINPOINT TEST P : THE MAP DISPLAY IS INCOMPLETE.

CONDITIONS
P1: MAP DISPLAY IS INCOMPLETE
1 Check to see if the map screen displays correctly when it is touch scrolled.
Does the map screen display correctly when it is touch scrolled?
Yes
GO to P2.
No
1 Check to see if the map screen scale can be reduced.
Can the map screen scale be reduced?
Yes
GO to P3.
No
1 Check to see if a point of interest search can be performed.
Can a point of interest search be performed?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST Q : CALLS CANNOT BE RECEIVED OR PLACED WITH BLUETOOTH®;

BLUETOOTH® CANNOT CONNECT WITH THE VEHICLE.
CONDITIONS
Q1: DISPLAY CHECK
1 Press the telephone button.
Is 'Telephone not connected' displayed on the screen?
Yes
GO to Q2.
No
Proceed to step 7.
Q2: BLUETOOTH® COMPATIBILITY CHECK
1 Check to see if the telephone handset is Bluetooth® compatible.
Is the telephone handset Bluetooth® compatible?
Yes
GO to Q3.
No
Use a Bluetooth® compatible telephone handset.
Q3: HANDSET POWER CHECK
1 Check to see if the handset is switched 'ON'.
Is the telephone handset switched 'ON'?
Yes
GO to Q4.
No
Switch handset 'ON' and re-test.
Q4: INITIAL CONNECTION SETTINGS
1 Check to see if the initial connection settings to the in-vehicle system have been performed.
Have the initial connection settings to the in-vehicle system been performed?
Yes
GO to Q5.
No
Perform the initial connection settings.
Q5: HANDSET COMMUNICATION CHECK
1 Check to see if the telephone handset recognizes the in-vehicle system.
Does the telephone handset recognize the in-vehicle system?
Yes
GO to Q6.
No
Re-test using a different Bluetooth® compatible telephone handset. If the fault is still
evident, suspect the telephone module. Refer to the new module/component installation note
at the top of this procedure.
1 Switch the Bluetooth® telephone handset 'OFF' then back 'ON' again.
Does the telephone handset recognize the in-vehicle system?
Yes
No
Suspect the telephone module. Refer to the new module/component installation note at the
top of this procedure.
1 Check to see if the telephone is within communications range.
Is the telephone within a 10 metre range of the bluetooth® telephone module?
Yes
GO to Q8.
No
Move the telephone handset to within a 10 metre range of the Bluetooth® telephone
module.
1 Check to see if when transmitting, the telephone handset is also receiving.
When transmitting, is the telephone handset also receiving?
Yes
No
Replace the telephone handset.
PINPOINT TEST R : AN ERROR SCREEN DISPLAYS ON THE NAVIGATION SCREEN.

CONDITIONS
R1: MAP DATA CANNOT BE READ
1 Access to the map data has not been granted.
Has new Touch Screen Display (TSD) been installed?
Yes
Initiate the "Map Lock routine."
No
Check that a valid activation code for the particular map version installed is available and is
being used, it may be necessary to purchase a new activation code from Navteq.If the
activation code is valid but map cannot be activated, check and install a new Touch Screen
Display (TSD) as required. Refer to the new module/component installation note at top of
DTC Index.Initiate the "Map Lock routine."
PINPOINT TEST S : THE DUAL VIEW CANNOT BE SWITCHED.
NOTE: Prior to troubleshooting, verify that the vehicle and the Touch Screen Display (TSD) are compatible
with Dual Directional View.
CONDITIONS
S1: AUDIO VIDEO HARD SWITCH CHECK
1 The audio screen displays when the "AUDIO VIDEO" hard switch is pressed.
Does the audio screen displays when the "AUDIO VIDEO" hard switch is pressed?
Yes
GO to S2.
No
Refer to the hard switches do not respond diagnosis.
S2: AUDIO SOURCE
1 TV or DVD is the audio source.
Does TV or DVD display?
Yes
GO to S3.
No
Switch the audio source to TV or DVD and carry out diagnosis again.
S3: VIDEO AND SOUND CORRECTLY DISPLAYED
1 Video with sound is displayed on the passenger side from the audio screen after the "AUDIO
VIDEO" hard switch is pressed.
Is video with sound displayed on the passenger side from the audio screen after the "AUDIO
VIDEO" hard switch is pressed?
Yes
No
GO to S4.
S4: VIDEO AND SOUND INCORRECTLY DISPLAYED
1 Video with sound is incorrectly displayed on the passenger side from the audio screen after
the "AUDIO VIDEO" hard switch is pressed
Is video with sound incorrectly displayed on the passenger side from the audio screen after the
"AUDIO VIDEO" hard switch is pressed?
Yes
Refer to the black screen (navigation and audio screens do not display) diagnosis.
No
GO to S5.
S5: VEHICLE CONFIGURATION
1 The following set values are present on the "Vehicle Configuration" diagnostics screen.
HLDF = Dual view

HLDF is fitted
Hand of Drive is correct for vehicle being tested
Are values present on the "Vehicle Configuration" diagnostics screen.

Yes
No
Contact dealer technical support to assist in re-configuring the Car Configuration File (CCF)
using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system. Clear the DTC, switch off the ignition
and allow sufficient time for the infotainment relay to power downCheck MOST connection at
the Touch Screen Display (TSD), check the MOST devices.
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to
Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Integrated Audio Module (IAM) - High Line (100-00,
Audio Unit -
Audio amplifier bolts 10 7
Audio Unit - Audio System

REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General
Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Audio Unit - Audio Unit
Removal
1.
2. Torque: 2.5 Nm
3.
similar.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9. Torque: 2.5 Nm
10.
11.
12. Torque: 2.5 Nm
13. Torque: 2.5 Nm

Torque: 2.5 Nm
Installation

Audio Unit - Audio Amplifier
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the RH front seat.


mm.
Remove the amplifier.

Remove the 4 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the amplifier.


Specifications).
4. Using the Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment, follow

the on-screen instructions and configure the audio unit
amplifier.
Information and Entertainment System - Audio System
LOW/MID LINE AUDIO SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Audio control switches
2 - DAB/SDARS tuner module
3 - AM (amplitude modulation)/FM (frequency modulation) diversity antenna amplifier
4 - FM antenna amplifier
5 - DAB antenna amplifier
6 - Portable audio module interface
7 - Power amplifier
8 - Head Unit (HU)
9 - Lower integrated control panel
10 - Display
11 - Clock spring
HEAD UNIT - AUDIO CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN; P = MOST

1 - Battery
5 - Clock spring
6 - Display
8 - Head Unit (HU)
9 - Power amplifier
10 - Speakers
11 - AM/FM antenna amplifier
HIGH LINE AUDIO SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Row two/three remote audio controls
3 - AM/FM diversity antenna amplifier
4 - FMantenna amplifier
6 - Portable audio interface consol
7 - Portable audio interface module
8 - Power amplifier
9 - Head Unit (HU)
13 - Clock spring
HEAD UNIT (HU) - AUDIO CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN; P = MOST

1 - Battery
2 - BJB
3 - CJB
8 - Portable audio interface consol
11 - Row two/three remote audio controls
12 - Speakers
13 - Portable audio interface module
14 - Power amplifier
15 - Head Unit (HU)
16 - Clock spring
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Head Units
The audio systems have three levels: low line, mid line and high line versions. All the audio systems (low, mid, high)
are based around a head unit which communicates on the Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) ring and the
medium speed controller area network (CAN) bus.
Low/Mid Line Head Unit
The Head Unit (HU) is located in the instrument panel and incorporates the following systems:
HD Radio (where fitted)

Bluetooth® receiver (telephone and audio streaming)
40 Gb Hard drive
USB controller (front)
Audio AUX
CD player
The low line HU contains the following functionality:
Radio tuner
Single disc compact disc (CD) player
Amplifier
The HU communicates with other vehicle systems on the CAN bus.
Transit Mode
Transit mode is used to reduce the vehicle battery current drain whilst the vehicle is being stored or transported.
Transit mode is entered/exited via a CAN signal from T4. In transit mode the following circuits will be disabled:
Amplifiers
Aux and phone call
Clock
Antenna power
light emitting diode (LED) illumination
In transit mode the CAN port and the ON/OFF switch are the only circuits that are left active.
The CAN port is left open to allow the EXIT from transit mode signal to be received. The ON/OFF switch is left active
to allow feedback to the driver via the HU liquid crystal display (LCD), that the unit is in Transit mode should the
driver attempt to power up the HU. This will only occur when the vehicle engine is running and the battery is above
12.3 Volts.
Radio Function
The radio tuner is located in the head unit. The radio is capable of receiving AM and FM waveband and can store 18
FM pre-sets and 12 amplitude modulation (AM) pre-sets. The AM presets are stored as follows:
European AM Preset Storage
6 MW
6 MWa
6 LW
6LWa
NAS AM Preset Storage
6 MW1
6 MW2
6 MWa
CD Function
The HU includes single play CD player. The CD player has all the usual functions of a CD player:
CD play
Previous/next track
Shuffle tracks
Load/eject CD
Scan
Repeat
High Line Head Unit
The high line HU contains the following functionality:
Radio tuner.
CD player (Six disc in dash changer).
Integrated telephone control.
Auxiliary input (for any device featuring a 3.5mm jack plug output).
The HU is woken up by CAN bus activity and is not woken up from the ignition aux position.
The HU is the Bus Master for the MOST system and contains the timing master for the MOST system.
Tuner
The HU incorporates a AM/frequency modulation (FM) tuner which allows for 18 FM pre-sets and 12 AM (6 MW and 6
LW) pre-set stations to be stored in the HU memory. The radio tuner also incorporates the following radio functions:
Auto tune
Traffic announcements (TA)
radio data system (RDS) EON function
Seek station
Tune up/down
CD Player
The CD player is a 6 disc in dash mounted device. The CD multi changer is capable of playing commercial CDs,
CDRs, CDRWs and MP3 discs.
Random Play
The Random feature only works on the CD, which has been selected. The Random feature plays all the tracks on the
selected CD in a random order. All the tracks on that disc will be played before a new random sequence is played. If
a new CD is selected while in random mode, the random mode will be cancelled and play will commence from track
1.
Repeat
The Repeat feature allows the current track to be repeated in an endless loop, when selected by the user.
MP3
The CD player has the capability to play MP3 files. The MP3 discs follow a format of folders and files within the
folder. It is also possible to place all the files in the root directory on the CD.
The random and repeat features follow the normal CD random and repeat feature functions.
Scan
Scan allows the user to play the first 10 seconds of each track on the CDs in the unit.
Automatic Volume Control-AVC
The AVC feature is designed to adjust output volume to compensate for the rising level noise of the vehicle as the
vehicle travels faster.
There are 10 settings for AVC, where 0 = off, 1 is the lowest setting (minimum volume change with speed and 9 the
maximum).
The vehicle speed signal is used to enable the HU to calculate the volume adjustment required. The vehicle speed
signal is received over the CAN from the anti-lock brake system (ABS) control module. The signal is an average of
the four wheel speed sensor signals.
Control of the AVC is carried out by the audio amplifier.
Should an invalid speed signal be received the AVC will not alter the output volume.
ICP (Integrated Control Panel)
The ICP duplicates many of the touch-screen audio user control features. Any volume setting made whilst in audio,
TV, phone, navigation or voice activation mode will be memorized for that system. The ICP communicates with the
IAM on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) . The IAM converts control/command signals from the ICP
and then distributes the information onto the MOST system to the audio system and other information and
entertainment systems. No configuration procedure is required if the ICP is replaced. There is no option to calibrate
the ICP using the Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Touch Screen Displays
Low/mid line display
High line display
The Touch Screen Display (TSD) is located in the center of the instrument panel and is the driver control interface
for the infotainment system. The TSD is connected to the MOST ring and communicates with the other components
in the audio/infotainment system.
The TSD also provides driver display and control of the audio system, telephone, the rear view camera, proximity
cameras, the Traffic Message Channel (TMC) and the navigation system.
The RSE and other systems are operated by 'virtual' buttons displayed on the touch screen.
Care should be taken with the TSD to ensure its correct operation
The screen should be cleaned with a lightly, water moistened cloth. Do not use chemical agents or domestic
products to clean the screen or any part of the surround.
Only use your finger to operate the touch screen. Ensure you only use one finger to avoid incorrect entries.
A short light press of the touch screen is sufficient. Excessive pressure can damage the screen.
Remote Audio Controls
The second and third row seat passenger can use standard headphones to listen to audio from any of the sources
fitted to the vehicle. These include:
Television
Compact Disc (CD)
Radio
DVD
AUX Input
There are four remote audio control modules, two in the rear doors incorporating the rear window switches and two
in the rear load space each side of the third row seats.
The remote audio control modules allow the user to select which source to listen to. The remote controls cannot
override what the driver has selected to listen to. If the driver is listening to a CD the rear passenger cannot control
the CD player.
The remote audio control modules allow the user to alter the volume in the head phones, change track/disc up/down
or repeat on a CD, change pre-set radio stations or tune up/down on the radio and television.
AMPLIFIERS
Harman Kardon High Line/Logic 7 Amplifier
The audio system has three amplification options:
Internal amplification
Harman Kardon
Harman Kardon Logic 7
The amplifier is located under the right-hand (RH) front seat and is connected to the audio system via the MOST
bus.
Speaker Connector C0491 for Harman Kardon Amplifier
Pin No Description Input/Output
1 left-hand (LH) rear door speaker - -
2 RH rear door speaker - -
3 Not used -
4 Not used -
5 LH front door speaker - -
6 RH front door speaker - -
7 Subwoofer left - -
8 Subwoofer right - -
9 LH rear door speaker + Output
10 RH rear door speaker + Output
11 Not used -
12 Not used -
13 LH front door speaker + Output
14 RH front door speaker + Output
15 Subwoofer left + Output
16 Subwoofer right + Output
Speaker Connector C0491 for Harman Kardon Logic 7 Amplifier
1 LH rear door speaker - -
2 RH rear door speaker - -
3 LH front bass speaker - -
4 RH front bass speaker - -
5 Rear surround left - -
6 Rear surround right - -
7 Subwoofer left - -
8 Subwoofer right - -
9 LH rear door speaker + Output
10 RH rear door speaker + Output
11 LH front bass speaker + Output
12 RH front bass speaker + Output
13 Rear surround left + Output
14 Rear surround right + Output
15 Subwoofer left + Output
16 Subwoofer right + Output
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 Headphone module 1 left channel Output
6 Headphone module 1 right channel Output
9 Not used -
10 Not used -
11 Not used -
12 Not used -
13 Not used -
14 Not used -
15 Headphone module 1 left ground -
16 Headphone module 1 right ground -
19 Not used -
20 Not used -
5 Headphone module 1 control signal Output
9 Not used _
10 Not used _
15 Headphone module 1 control ground -
19 Not used -
20 Not used -
1 LH front mid/high range speaker - -
2 RH front mid/high range speaker - -
3 Center fill speaker - -
4 Not used -
9 Not used -
10 Not used -
11 LH front mid/high range speaker + Output
12 RH front mid/high range speaker + Output
13 Center fill speaker + Output
14 Not used -
15 Headphone module 1 left channel ground -
19 Not used -
20 Not used -
9 Not used -
10 Not used -
12 Headphone module 3 right channel ground -
14 Headphone module 4 right channel -
19 Not used -
20 Not used -
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
Steering Wheel Audio Controls

1 - Search down
2 - Volume up
3 - Mode select
4 - Search up
5 - Volume down
6 - Gap decrease
7 - Gap increase
8 - Set or increase the speed
9 - Resume set speed
10 - Cancels without erasing memorised speed
11 - Decrease the speed
12 - Heated steering wheel
13 - Answer call/dial switch
14 - End/reject call switch
15 - Voice control
The HU can be remotely controlled via steering wheel mounted controls. The steering wheel controls are mounted to
the right hand side of the steering wheel.
The switches are a resistive ladder type. The HU supplies a reference voltage to the switches, which then return an
altered voltage to the HU depending on which switch is pressed.
The controls allow the user to adjust the volume, change CD tracks/radio pre-sets, answer and end a phone call
(where a phone is fitted) and use the voice recognition system.
SATELLITE DIGITAL AUDIO RADIO SERVICE (SDARS NAS only)
The SDARS systems operate in the S-Band frequency range (2.3 GHz) and, as a result of the use of satellite
transmission have the ability to provide CD quality audio broadcasts over very large areas (typically continents).
SDARS service providers transmit a signal from their up-link facility (which is the original point of transmission of
data, voice or other information through an antenna system) to a satellite where the signal is then down linked to
both the terrestrial repeater network and the individual SDARS car radios. The radio switches between the satellite
signal and the repeater signal depending on the strength of the signal at any given time.
Land Rover will be using the Sirius Satellite Radio service provider in the USA.
The Sirius SDARS systems comprise:
Satellites
Ground repeaters
Up-link ground stations
Radio receiver systems
The Sirius SDARS system uses three satellites on an inclined elliptical orbit. This ensures that each satellite spends
approximately 16 hours a day over the continent of the USA, with at least one satellite over the country at any one
time.
The satellites beam their signals down to the ground where the signal is picked up by receivers or is transmitted to
repeater stations to cover built up areas where the signal is obscured.
TRAFFIC MESSAGE CHANNEL (TMC)
The TMC system is a European only system whereby traffic information is received by the TMC tuner and used by
the navigation computer to recalculate the route being used to avoid the traffic disruption. This system information is
broadcast on the RDS data carriers.
Information and Entertainment System - Speakers
The speaker configuration depends on the level of audio and head unit fitted to the vehicle. The following details the
speaker configuration and control for each system.
LOW LINE AUDIO SYSTEM
Low Line Audio System Speaker Component Location

1 70451 Front RH door mid/bass speaker
2 - Front RH door tweeter
3 - Rear RH door full range speaker
4 - Rear LH door full range speaker
5 - Front LH door tweeter
6 - Front LH door mid/bass speaker
7 - Head unit
8 - Rear RH door tweeter
9 - Rear LH door tweeter
Low Line Audio System Speaker Control Diagram
NOTE: A= Hardwired
1 - Front LH tweeter
2 - Head unit
3 - Front RH tweeter
4 - Front RH mid/bass speaker
5 - Rear RH full range speaker
6 - Rear LH full range speaker
7 - Front LH mid/bass speaker
8 - Rear LH tweeter
9 - Rear RH tweeter
The low line audio speaker system is driven directly from the audio head unit
For additional information, refer to: Audio System (415-01B Information and Entertainment System, Description and
Operation).
.The system comprises:
Head unit
Two front door mounted mid/bass speakers (one per side)
Two front door mounted tweeters (one per side)
Two rear door mounted full range speakers (one per side)
Two rear door mounted tweeters (one per side)
HIGH LINE-HARMAN/KARDON AUDIO SYSTEM
High line-Harman/Kardon Audio System Speaker Component Location

3 - Rear RH mid/bass range
4 - Rear RH tweeter
5 - Sub-woofer
6 - Rear LH tweeter
7 - Rear LH mid/bass range
10 - High line amplifier
High line-Harman/Kardon Audio System Speaker Control Diagram
NOTE: A= Hardwired
2 - High line amplifier
5 - Rear RH tweeter
6 - Rear RH mid/bass speaker
7 - Sub-woofer
8 - Rear LH mid/bass speaker
9 - Rear LH tweeter
The High line-Harman/Kardon audio speaker system is driven by an amplifier located under the RH front seat. The
amplifier is controlled by the Integrated Head Unit (IHU) on the MOST bus and supplies 6x50 watts output, giving a
total system power rating of 300 watts
For additional information, refer to: Audio System (415-01B Information and Entertainment System, Description and
Operation).
. The system comprises:
Integrated Head Unit (IHU) Head unit.

Two front door mounted mid/bass range speakers (one per side).
Two front door mounted tweeters (one per side).
Two rear door mounted mid/bass range speakers (one per side).
Two rear door mounted tweeters (one per side).
A sub-woofer located in the lower tailgate.
An audio amplifier located under the front RH seat.
PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM - HARMAN/KARDON LOGIC7
Premium Audio - Harman/Kardon LOGIC7 Audio System Speaker Component Location

1 - Front RH bass speaker
3 - Front RH mid range speaker
4 - Rear RH mid/bass speaker
5 - Rear RH tweeter
6 - Rear RH surround speaker
7 - Rear LH surround speaker
8 - Sub-woofer
9 - Rear LH tweeter
10 - Rear LH mid/bass speaker
11 - Front LH mid range speaker
12 - Front LH bass speaker
14 - Premium amplifier
15 - Front centre fill speaker
Premium Audio - Harman/Kardon LOGIC7 Audio System Speaker Control Diagram
NOTE: A= Hardwired
2 - Front centre fill speaker
4 - Front RH mid range speaker
5 - Premium amplifier
6 - Front RH bass speaker
7 - Rear RH tweeter
8 - Rear RH mid/bass range speaker
9 - Rear RH surround speaker
10 - Sub-woofer
11 - Rear LH surround speaker
12 - Rear LH mid/bass range speaker
13 - Rear LH tweeter
14 - Front LH bass speaker
15 - Front LH mid range speaker
The Premium Audio - Harman/Kardon LOGIC7 audio speaker system is driven by an amplifier located under the RH
front seat. The amplifier is controlled by the Integrated Head Unit (IHU) on the MOST bus and supplies 12x50 watts
output, giving a total system power rating of 600 watts. The system comprises:
Integrated Head Unit (IHU) Head unit

Two front door mounted mid range speakers (one per side)
Two front door mounted bass speakers (one per side)
Two front door mounted tweeters (one per side)
Two rear door mounted mid/bass range speakers (one per side)
Two rear door mounted tweeters (one per side)
A sub-woofer located in the lower tailgate
Two rear surround speakers in the E post (one per side)
One centre fill speaker located in the centre of the instrument panel
Premium amplifier
Antenna - Antenna
Antenna Amplifier Component Location

1 FM Antenna
2 Suppressor
3 TV antenna amplifier
4 FM diversity antenna amplifier
7 - GPS antenna
8 - Rear screen mounted antennas
9 - Telephone and SDARS antennas
10 - VICS/ TMC antenna amplifier
11 - TV antenna amplifier
12 - Suppressor
13 - VICS antenna amplifier
14 - Side screen television antennas
Screen Antenna Layout
NOTE: A=Hardwired

2 LH Side screen antennas
3 RH Side screen antennas
5 - TV tuner module
6 - Integrated Head Unit (IHU)
9 - TV tune module
10 - FM Diversity tuning amplifier
11 - Rear screen antennas
12 - VICS/TMC tuner
13 - VICS/TMC antenna amplifier
15 - VICS antenna amplifier
16 - VICS tuner
The antenna systems fitted to the vehicle comprise:
AM (glass mounted)
FM (glass mounted)
FM diversity (glass mounted, where fitted)
TV (glass mounted, where fitted)
Multiband telephone antenna (roof mounted, where fitted)
GPS antenna (rear spoiler mounted, where fitted)
SDARS (roof mounted NAS only)
VICS antenna and beacon antenna (Japan only where fitted)
FM ANTENNAS
FM Antenna Amplifier
The AM/FM antennas are located in the side and rear widow. ON vehicles with the low line audio system the AM/FM
antenna is located in the RH rear side screen. On vehicles with a high line audio systems the system will be equipped
with FM diversity tuning. This system ensures that the strongest of two signals is used by the radio system to ensure
the best possible FM reception. The standard AM/FM antenna is screen mounted in the RH rear side window and is
connected to an antenna amplifier located above the screen. The diversity system uses the same side window
antenna and amplifier but also uses a rear heated screen element antenna and an FM antenna amplifier mounted at
the top of the rear screen in the tail gate.
TMC ANTENNA AMPLIFIER
The Traffic Message Channel (TMC) signals are received through the normal radio signals via the RDS network. The
signals are routed separately form the radio signals via a separate antenna amplifier located on the RH rear side
window.
For additional information, refer to: Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System, Description and Operation).
GPS ANTENNA
The GPS antenna is located in the RH side of the upper tailgate mounted spoiler. The GPS antenna is connected to
the navigation computer by a coaxial cable.
For additional information, refer to: Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System, Description and Operation).
TV ANTENNA
TV Antenna Amplifier
Where a television system is specified there are four TV antenna elements two in each of the rear side windows.
Each element has an antenna amplifier which is connected to the TV tuner module by a coaxial cable.
For additional information, refer to: Video System (415-07 Video System, Description and Operation).
MULTIBAND TELEPHONE ANTENNA
Multiband Telephone Antenna
The multiband telephone antenna is located in the roof mounted pod, which is located in the centre of the roof at the
rear of the vehicle and is connected directly to the Telephone Control Module (TCM) via a single coaxial cable.
For additional information, refer to: Cellular Phone (419-08 Cellular Phone, Description and Operation).
SATELLITE DIGITAL AUDIO RADIO SYSTEM (SDARS) ANTENNA (NAS ONLY)
SDARS antenna
The SDARS antenna is located in the roof mounted pod, which is located in the centre of the roof at the rear of the
vehicle. The SDARS antenna has two connections to the SDARS tuner, one for satellite transmissions the other for
terrestrial transmissions from repeater stations.
The antenna comprises two antenna elements:
A printed dipole antenna for receiving satellite signals

A printed monopole antenna for receiving terrestrial signals
The two antennas allow the system to receive SDARS transmissions in built up areas where signals form satellites
would normally be blocked.
For additional information, refer to: Audio System (415-01 Audio Unit, Description and Operation).
VICS ANTENNAS (Japan only)
VICS Beacon Antenna

The VICS control module uses the rear RH side window antenna to receive VICS information. The Control module
also uses an infra red beacon antenna located in the middle on top of the instrument panel adjacent to the sunlight
sensor.
For additional information, refer to: Navigation System (419-07 Navigation System, Diagnosis and Testing).
Antenna - Antenna

Speakers -
Tailgate speaker to casing bolts 10 7
Tailgate speaker to tailgate Torx screws 10 7
Speakers - Speakers

Speakers - Front Door Speaker
Removal
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Front Door Trim Panel
2. Remove the front door speaker wiring harness.
3. Remove the front door speaker.

Installation
1. Install the front door speaker.
Install the screws.
2. Install the front door speaker wiring harness.
3. Install the front door trim panel.

Speakers - Rear Door Speaker
Removal
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Door Trim Panel
2. Remove the speaker.

Installation
1. Install the speaker
Tighten the screws.
2. Install the rear door trim panel.

Speakers - Instrument Panel Speaker
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel speaker.
Remove the speaker grille.
Installation
Speakers - Quarter Panel Speaker
Removal
NOTE: The procedure to remove the quarter panel speaker is shown in the D-pillar trim panel procedure.
1. Remove the D-pillar trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: D-Pillar Trim Panel
Installation).
Installation
1. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
Installation).
Speakers - Tailgate Speaker
Removal
1. Remove the tailgate trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Tailgate Trim Panel
Installation).
2. Remove the tailgate speaker assembly.


Remove the tailgate speaker.

Remove the 6 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the tailgate speaker.
2. Install the tailgate speaker assembly.

3. Install the tailgate trim panel.

Installation).
Video System - Video System

1 - IAM (integrated audio module)
3 - ICP (integrated control panel)
4 - RH (right-hand) rear LCD screen
5 - right-hand (RH) row two remote audio controls
6 - TV Antenna
7 - TV Antenna
8 - RH row three remote audio controls
9 - DVD Changer
10 - Rear entertainment module
11 - Television tuner module
12 - TV Antenna
13 - TV Antenna
14 - left-hand (LH) row three remote audio controls
15 - Audio amplifier
16 - Audio/Video input/output panel
17 - LH (left-hand) rear LCD screen
18 - Portable audio module
19 - LH row two remote audio controls
Video System Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN Bus; P = MOST R = SPDIF (Sony); I = CVBS

1 - Battery
2 - EJB (engine junction box)
4 - ICP (integrated control panel)
5 - Audio/Video input/output panel
6 - DVD changer
7 - TV tuner
8 - TV antenna
9 - TV antenna
10 - TV antenna
11 - TV antenna
12 - Portable audio module
13 - RH rear LCD screen
14 - LH rear LCD screen
15 - Remote audio controls
16 - Speakers
17 - Amplifier
18 - Rear entertainment module
The Video system comprises:
Front screen (Navigation Touch screen Display TSD)

Television tuner module
Television antennas
Rear remote control headphone modules
TELEVISION
The television system receives television signals from television antennas in the rear side screens. The antennas are
connected to the television tuner via coaxial leads.
For additional information, refer to: Antenna (415-02 Antenna, Description and Operation).
Touch Screen Display
The Touch Screen Display (TSD) is located in the center of the instrument panel and is the driver control interface for
the infotainment system. The TSD is connected to the MOST ring and communicates with the other components in
the audio/infotainment system.
The TSD communicates with the RSE module via a co-axial cable. The TSD processes its own video for system
operation but receives the video image data from the RSE via the co-axial cable.
The TSD also provides driver display and control of the audio system, telephone, the rear view camera, proximity
cameras, the Traffic Message Channel (TMC) and the navigation system.
The RSE and other systems are operated by 'virtual' buttons displayed on the touch screen.
Care should be taken with the TSD to ensure its correct operation
The screen should be cleaned with a lightly, water moistened cloth. Do not use chemical agents or domestic
products to clean the screen or any part of the surround.
Only use your finger to operate the touch screen. Ensure you only use one finger to avoid incorrect entries.
A short light press of the touch screen is sufficient. Excessive pressure can damage the screen.
IAM (Integrated Audio Module)
The IAM is located in the Instrument panel and incorporates the following systems:
HD Radio (where fitted)

Bluetooth® receiver (telephone and audio streaming)
40 Gb Hard drive
USB controller (front)
Audio AUX
CD player
ICP (Integrated Control Panel)
The ICP duplicates many of the touch-screen audio user control features. Any volume setting made whilst in audio,
TV, phone, navigation or voice activation mode will be memorized for that system. The ICP communicates with the
IAM on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) . The IAM converts control/command signals from the ICP
and then distributes the information onto the MOST system to the audio system and other information and
entertainment systems.
No configuration procedure is required if the ICP is replaced. There is no option to calibrate the ICP using the Land
Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Rear Seat Entertainemnt Module
The Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) module is located in the rear RH side of the luggage compartment. The RSE
module is an interface between the video and audio inputs from other system components and the video display and
audio outputs.
The RSE module communicates with the audio systems via the MOST connection. Audio output from the DVD
autochanger or the AVIO panel is processed by the RSE module and passed on the MOST ring to the audio amplifier
to allow audio output to be played through the vehicle speakers or the headphones.
Video input from the TV tuner, DVD (digital versatile disc) autochanger and the Audio Video Input/Output (AVIO)
panel is also processed by the module and passed to the two RSE LCD (liquid crystal display) screens and the TSD on
separate video connections. The RSE module also controls the power supplies to the RSE LCD (liquid crystal display)
screens and relays the infra-red remote control signals received by the RSE LCD (liquid crystal display) screen infra-
red sensors to the DVD (digital versatile disc) autochanger. The infra-red signals are passed from the RSE LCD
(liquid crystal display) screens to the RSE module on a bus system known as the IS bus.
The RSE module has two modes of operation; engine running mode and reduced operation mode. With the engine
running the RSE module has full functionality. When the engine is not running the RSE module has reduced
functionality to prevent excessive drain on the vehicle battery. The reduced functionality comprises a reduced audio
volume and time limit on system operation.
The reduced audio volume is only active when the engine is not running. The audio volume is limited reduce battery
consumption. If the volume was set at a higher level than this when the engine was running, when the engine is
subsequently started, the volume level will gradually increase to the previously selected setting. This prevents the
user being distracted by a sudden increase in volume.
The time limit operation is active when the ignition is off and the system is manually switched on using the TSD. The
system will operate for a maximum of one hour. The battery voltage is continually monitored by the IHU. If the IHU
detects that the battery voltage has fallen to a predetermined level, the IHU will shut the infotainment system down
to prevent further battery drain. Once the system has shut down due to low battery voltage, it can only be restarted
when the engine is running and the battery voltage has risen above the threshold level for more than one minute.
Television Tuner
The television tuner module is located in the rear RH side of the luggage compartment. The television tuner is
connected to the rest of the video system on the MOST bus. Audio and control signals are passed on the MOST bus
while video is transmitted via a coaxial cable to the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
Television audio can be heard through the vehicle speakers and the remote control rear headphone modules. The
audio will continue to be heard whilst the vehicle is moving, however the television picture will stop displaying once
the vehicle starts to move.
NOTE: The television tuner module is located beneath the RHfront seat on Japanese specification vehicles.
DVD Autochanger
The DVD (digital versatile disc) autochanger is located in the rear RH side of the luggage compartment. The DVD
(digital versatile disc) player is a six disc design which will accept DVD (digital versatile disc) movies, video CD
(compact disc) (VCD) and music CD (compact disc) on CD-R or CD-RW. The discs are housed in a magazine to allow
six discs to be stored in the unit. Additional magazines can be purchased to allow greater flexibility. The magazine is
accessible via a sliding door on the front of the unit. An eject button, located behind the door automatically ejects the
magazine from the unit when pressed.
The DVD (digital versatile disc) autochanger is operated using a remote control unit supplied with the vehicle. The
remote control is an infra-red unit which transmits the infra-red signal to receivers located in each RSE LCD (liquid
crystal display) screen.
The DVD (digital versatile disc) autochanger receives the remote control information from the RSE LCD (liquid crystal
display) screens.
A Sony Philips Digital Interface Format (SPDIF) is used to output the audio from the DVD (digital versatile disc)
autochanger to the audio amplifier. The SPDIF is an optical system connected between the DVD (digital versatile
disc) autochanger and the audio amplifier. SPDIF is a standard audio file transfer format which allows the transfer of
digital audio signals from one device to another without having to be converted first to an analog format which
maintains the viability of the digital audio signal.
LCD Screens
The RSE LCD screens are located in the rear of the front seat head restraints. The screen is secured in the head
restraint with three screws which are covered by a removable surround. The screen is a 6.5 inch, auto dimming, high
resolution LCD (liquid crystal display) monitor, manufactured by Alpine
An infra-red receiver sensor is located centrally in the upper screen surround. The receiver sensor receives infra-red
transmissions from the DVD (digital versatile disc) remote control and passes them to the DVD (digital versatile disc)
autochanger, via the RSE module on a bus system known as the IS bus. All screen settings can be changed using the
RSE remote control.
The screen should be cleaned with a lightly, water moistened cloth. Do not use chemical agents or domestic products
to clean the screen or any part of the surround.
Each RSE LCD (liquid crystal display) screen is connected to the infotainment system using a 20 pin harness
connector.
Remote Control
The remote control for operation of the DVD autochanger is a universal type. A switch on the rear of the control
selects either the LH (left-hand) or RH (right-hand) screens and allows the individual settings for each screen to be
changed as required. The switch has a central position which disables the remote control and prevents battery drain.
The remote control transmits an infra-red signal in response to operation of a button. The infra-red signal is received
by a receiver sensor located on each RSE LCD (liquid crystal display) screen and is passed, via an IS bus to the RSE
module and from the RSE module on an Alpine proprietary bus known as the Ai Net, to the DVD (digital versatile
disc) autochanger. The remote control also allows selection of an auxiliary input from the AVIO panel (video or
games console) or selection of audio (radio or CD (compact disc) ).
The remote control is powered by two 'AAA' batteries located in the rear of the control and are accessible by
removing a sliding cover. When inserting the batteries it is important that the battery polarity is observed as marked
in the battery compartment. LED (light emitting diode) at the top left and right hand corner of the control indicates
that the remote control is operating when a button is pressed. Only one LED (light emitting diode) will illuminate
depending on which screen is selected. If the LED (light emitting diode) fails to illuminate when a button is pressed,
the battery voltage may be low or the switch on the rear of the control may be set in the central 'off' position.
Remote Audio Controls
The second and third row seat passenger can use standard headphones to listen to audio from any of the sources
fitted to the vehicle. These include:
Television
compact disc (CD)
Radio
DVD
AUX Input
There are four remote audio control modules, two in the rear doors incorporating the rear window switches and two
in the rear load space each side of the third row seats.
The remote audio control modules allow the user to select which source to listen to. The remote controls cannot
override what the driver has selected to listen to. If the driver is listening to a CD the rear passenger cannot control
the CD player.
The remote audio control modules allow the user to alter the volume in the head phones, change track/disc up/down
or repeat on a CD, change pre-set radio stations or tune up/down on the radio and television.
Video System - Video System
For a detailed description of the video system and operation, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section
of the workshop manual. REFER to: Video System (415-07 Video System, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Touch Screen (TS) installation and condition Fuses
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) screen installation and Electrical harnesses
condition Fibre optic cable harnesses
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) multi-changer installation Infotainment relay
and condition Display screens
Television antennae (two in each rear side window) DVD multi-changer
TV Control Module (TVCM)
Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module
(RSECM)
Television antenna amplifiers (4)
Remote control and batteries
check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

The DVD does DVD multi-changer fuse Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the DVD
not operate blown power circuit for short circuit to ground
No power to display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the DVD
screens player power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
Condensation resistance
Wait at least one hour for the condensation to dry out
Remote control Handset batteries low Check and renew the batteries as necessary
operation is on power Check and clean the receiver and transmitter as
unstable Remote control receiver necessary
sensor or transmitter is
dirty
There is no The display screen is Use the switch on the back of the handset to select the
picture set to an incorrect correct mode
mode
Playback does Disc is loaded upside- Check that the disc is correctly loaded
not start down Check that the disc format is compatible
An incorrect format of Cancel parental lock or check the rating of the disc
disc is loaded Press SET for at least 2 seconds to turn the setup menu
Parental lock is set off
The setup menu is
displayed
The picture is The disc is being fast The picture may be slightly distorted in fast forward or
unclear or noisy forwarded or rewound rewind modes
The vehicle battery Check the vehicle battery condition and state of charge
power is low
The image The disc is scratched Load an undamaged disc.

"freezes"
NO MAG is There is no magazine Load a magazine
displayed loaded into the DVD
multi-changer
NO DISC is There is no disc loaded Load a disc into the magazine

displayed into the magazine Clean the disc as necessary
The disc is dirty
REGIONAL The disc loaded does Load a disc which matches the regional code number
CODE not match the regional
VIOLATION is code number
displayed
VIDEO SIGNAL An NTSC disc is loaded Load a disc of the correct format
IS NOT into a PAL system, or
CORRECT is vice versa
displayed
HI TEMP is The system protective Turn the power OFF on the unit and then back on
displayed circuit is activated as it again. If the display does not clear, leave the power off
has detected a high until the temperature decreases and turn the power ON
temperature again
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Image Processing Module B (IPMB) (100-00 General
Video System - Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player
Removal
1. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel
RH (501-05, Removal and Installation).
2. Release the rear quarter trim panel mounting

bracket.
3. Remove the rear quarter trim panel mounting

bracket.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the fiber optic

cables are not bent to a radius of less than 25
mm.
Release the rear seat entertainment module.

Remove the 3 nuts. TORQUE: 10 Nm
Position aside.
5. Release the DVD player from the body.
6. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the fiber optic cables are

not bent to a radius of less than 25 mm.
Make sure that the optical connectors are

clean and free of foreign material.
Remove the DVD player.

7. Remove the DVD player mounting bracket.
Installation
Video System - Video Display
Removal
1. Remove the screen surround.
2. Release the video display.

3. Remove the video display.

Installation
Exterior Lighting -
Sealants
Item Land Rover Kit Part No.
High mounted stop lamp (HMSL) sealant BHM 705L
Bulb Type Rating

* Halogen headlamps - Low beam Halogen H7 55W
* Halogen headlamps - High beam Halogen H7 55W
+* Xenon headlamps - Low/High beam Xenon D2S 35W
Front fog lamps Halogen H11 55W
Rear fog lamps Bayonet 21W
Turn signal indicators - Front Bayonet 21W
Turn signal indicators - Rear Bayonet 21W
Turn signal indicators - Side Repeaters Capless 5W
Side lamps - Front Bayonet 5W
** Stop/Tail lamps Bayonet - Twin filament 21W/5W
High mounted stop lamp (HMSL) LED's -
License plate lamps Festoon 5W
Reverse lamps Bayonet 21W
Cornering lamp/Static bending lamp Halogen H8 35W
NAS - Side marker lamps - front/rear Capless 3W
WARNING: + Refer to the General Information - Electrical Precautions section of this manual prior to
carrying out any procedures on the Xenon headlamp system fitted to certain vehicles.
NOTES:
* NAS vehicles - Cornering lamps are not fitted to these vehicles.
** Note: 21W filament is not functional on lower tail lamp.

Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lighting Component Location

2 - Lighting control switch
3 - Left Hand (LH) steering column multifunction switch
4 - Rain/light sensor
5 - Auto high beam control module and image sensor
6 - Hazard warning lamp switch
7 - Side repeater turn signal indicator lamp
9 - High mounted stop lamp
10 - License plate lamps
11 - Reflector
12 - Rear lamp assembly
13 - Front fog lamp
14 - Headlamp assembly
15 - Stop lamp switch
16 - Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) control module
GENERAL
The exterior lighting system comprises the following exterior lamps:
Front and rear side lamps

License plate lamps
Side marker lamps (if fitted)
Front and rear turn signal indicator lamps
Side turn signal indicator lamps
Stoplamps and high mounted stop lamp
Reversing lamps
Rear fog lamps
Front fog lamps (if fitted)
Cornering/Static bending lamps (if fitted) - All except NAS
Low and high beam headlamps.
Exterior Bulb Type/Rating and LED Table
The following table shows the bulbs/LED's used for the exterior lighting system and their type and specification
(where applicable).
Bulb Type Rating

Halogen Headlamps - Low beam Halogen H7 55W
Xenon headlamps - Low/High Beam Xenon D3S 35W
Headlamps - High Beam Halogen H7 55W
Front fog lamps Halogen H11 55W
Rear fog lamps Bayonet P21 21W
Turn signal indicator lamps - Front PY24W 24W
Side repeater turn signal indicator lamps Capless W5W 5W
Turn signal indicator lamps - Rear 12 LED's -
Side lamps - Front - High specification Halogen and Xenon headlamps 10 LED's -
Side lamps - Front - Base Specification Halogen headlamps only Capless W5W 5W
Stop lamps 12 LED's -
Side lamps - Rear 12 LED's (each side lamp) -
High mounted stop lamp LED's -
License plate lamps Capless W5W 5W
Reverse lamps Bayonet P21 21W
Cornering lamp/Static bending lamp Halogen H8 35W
NAS - Side marker lamp - Front Capless W3W 3W
NAS - Side marker lamp - Rear Capless W5W Rear 5W
The bulbs and the Light Emitting Diode (LED)'s are driven by Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors
(MOSFET's) within the Central Electronics Module (CEM) which is an integral component of the Central Junction Box
(CJB). An exception to this is the front and rear position lamps, front fog lamps and the reversing lamps which are
supplied with power via relays within the CJB and are protected by conventional fuses.
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX
The CJB is located behind the glove compartment and is connected to the vehicle wiring harness with 8 multiplugs.
The CJB receives four permanent battery power supplies via the Engine Junction Box (EJB).
The lighting circuits are not all protected by conventional fuses as some are protected by MOSFET's. The control
circuitry within the CJB for each individual circuit can detect and isolate a problem circuit.
Failure of a lamp is not notified to the driver. If a turn signal indicator fails the turn signal warning indicator in the
instrument cluster will flash at double speed.
Input Signals for Lamp Control
The CJB receives inputs from the following switches:
Lighting control switch for side lamps, headlamps and auto headlamps (if fitted)
Momentary push switches for front and rear fog lamps
Left hand steering column multifunction switch for turn signal indicators and high beam/headlamp flash and
Auto High Beam system
Brake pedal switch
Momentary push switch for hazard warning.
The switches are supplied with a 10mA supply from the CJB and switch to ground when operated. The CJB detects
that a switch has been operated (ON) when its closing resistance is less than 100 Ohm and is detected as OFF when
its resistance is more than 10K Ohm.
The lighting control switch uses a binary system which is detected by the CJB which determines the selected position.
The output from the lighting control switch is shown in the following table:
Switch State Switch 1 Switch 2

Off 1 1
Side lamps 1 0
Headlamps 0 0
Auto headlamps 0 1
The CJB also receives ignition status via hard wired connections from the stop/start switch.
A reverse gear engaged signal is also received on the high speed Controller Area Network (CAN) bus from the
Transmission Control Module (TCM) to enable the CJB to activate the reverse lamps.
The CJB can receive a hazard warning indicator activation message from the Restraints Control Module (RCM), via the
high speed CAN bus, in the event of a crash. The CJB can also activate the hazard warning indicators to signify
vehicle locking to the driver.
On vehicles with Auto High Beam, the auto high beam control module outputs signals on the medium speed CAN bus
to the CJB to control the high beam headlamps. Power for the auto high beam control module is supplied via a relay
located in the EJB.
Circuit Protection
Operation of the lamps is performed using overload proof Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors
(MOSFETs). The MOSFETs can detect overload, load interruption with the lamps switched on and short circuit to
positive with the lamps switched off.
The MOSFETs are protected against short circuits, removing the requirement for the lamps circuits to be protected by
fuses. The MOSFETs respond to heat generated by increased current flow caused by a short circuit. Normally this
would cause the fuse to blow. The MOSFETs react to the heat increase and cut the supply to the affected circuit.
Once the fault has been rectified or the MOSFET has cooled, the MOSFET will automatically reset and operate the
circuit normally.
If an overload occurs, the current flow is dependant on the temperature of the related MOSFET and can be up to 20
times the rated current of the lamp. The MOSFET heats up and deactivates the load applied to the circuit. When the
MOSFET cools the circuit is once again reactivated. This thermal cycling occurs continuously in the event of an
overload occurring.
A number of lamps are controlled by relays and these circuits are protected by conventional fuses.
Bulb Monitoring
Bulb failure monitoring is performed by the CJB processor. The lamps are cold and warm monitored by the MOSFETs
in order to detect bulb failure.
NOTE: Relay controlled lamps have no diagnostic monitoring.
The CJB processor provides outputs to each MOSFET. The output switches the MOSFET to supply the required output
to power the applicable lighting circuit. The microprocessor evaluates the circuits by detecting the returned signals
from the controlling MOSFET.
When the bulb or LED is functioning normally, the output signal voltage from the controlling MOSFET is 0V. If a bulb
or LED in the circuit fails, an open circuit occurs and the MOSFET outputs a signal of 5V to the processor. The signal
is interpreted as a bulb or LED failure and generates a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) which can be retrieved using
an approved Land Rover diagnostic system.
Warm monitoring is performed continuously when the lights are switched on by evaluating the diagnostic output of
the MOSFET switches. Cold monitoring is performed at 32 second intervals when the lights are switched off. The
MOSFETs briefly switch on the lights for approximately 1 millisecond (this is insufficient to illuminate the bulb or LED)
and checks the bulb or LED as per warm monitoring.
Cold monitoring is not possible for the low/high beam headlamps of vehicles using xenon bulbs. On these vehicles the
cold monitoring of the low/high beam headlamps is switched off in the CJB. The CJB detects a failed xenon bulb via a
reduction in current flow to the affected headlamp's xenon control module.
When a xenon bulb fails, the control module's current consumption falls to 60mA, which the CJB detects as
unsuccessful bulb illumination.
Alarm Indications
The CJB can also display alarm visual indications for alarm arm, disarm and triggered conditions.
If the hazard warning lamps are active when a lock or unlock request is made, the hazard warning cycle is
interrupted to allow the visual indication of the requested lock cycle. When visual indication is completed, the hazard
warning operation will continue.
If the vehicle is involved in crash of a severity for the RCM to initiate deployment of the airbags, the control module
outputs a hazard warning lamps on request on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB. The hazard warning lamps will
be activated and will continue until the RCM outputs a message to deactivate the hazard warning lamps.
Redundant Data Storage
The CJB stores data relating to the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), total mileage and service interval indicator.
This data is received by the CJB from the instrument cluster and used as a back-up in the event of instrument cluster
replacement.
If the CJB is to be replaced, an approved Land Rover diagnostic system must be connected to the vehicle and the
CJB replacement procedure followed to ensure that the stored data is transferred to the new unit.
Low Voltage Operation
If the battery voltage falls below 11.2V, the CJB operates the minimum lighting to preserve the remaining battery
charge.
Crash Signal Activation
In the event of an accident of a severity to activate and deploy the airbags, the RCM requests various electrical
operations to assist with the crash situation. The RCM requests via the bus systems to the CJB to activate the hazard
warning lamps.
Security System Activation
In the event of the security system being triggered, the CJB requests activation of the hazard warning lamps.
Instrument Panel and Switch Illumination Dimming
The CJB controls the instrument cluster backlighting illumination and also illumination of all instrument panel
switches.
The CJB supplies a power output to all switch illumination bulbs at a voltage determined by the position of the
manual dimmer rheostat. The switch illumination is activated when the lighting control switch is in the side lamp or
headlamp position.
LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCH
The lighting control switch is located in the driver's side of the instrument panel, below the outer fresh air vent. The
switch contains a rotary switch for selecting the vehicle exterior lighting functions, a rheostat for instrument
illumination dimmer, a front fog lamp switch and a rear fog lamp switch.

1 - Lighting rotary control switch
2 - OFF position
3 - Side lamps position
4 - Headlamps position
5 - Instrument illumination dimmer control
6 - Headlamp leveling control (if fitted)
7 - Rear fog lamp switch
8 - Front fog lamp switch
9 - Auto headlamps position
The rotary side and headlamp control switch has 2 connections to the CJB. These 2 connections supply a hardwired
binary code to the CJB which correspond to the switch position selection made.
The front and rear fog lamp switches operate by completing earth paths for a reference voltage from the CJB when
the switch is pressed. The fog lamp switches are momentary, non-latching switches which briefly complete an earth
path which is sensed by the CJB.
Lighting Control Switch Illumination
The switch legends on the lighting control switch are illuminated at the same brightness as the instrument panel
switches when the lighting control switch is moved from the 'O' (off) position to the side, headlamp or AUTO
position.
Manual Headlamp Leveling Control (if fitted)
The manual headlamp leveling control is only available on vehicles with coil spring suspension and is used to lower
the headlamps when an excessive load is placed on the rear of the vehicle, altering the vehicle attitude and raising
the headlamp beam.
The control uses a rotary thumbwheel which is connected to a rheostat which gives a variable output to the leveling
Direct Current (DC) motors. The motors respond to the output and move to adjust the headlamp position as
required.
The control has three marked positions; 0 to 3. The rotary wheel moves in 6, half positions to give fine adjustment
control over the headlamp position. The positions relate to vehicle loading or driving conditions as follows: Position 0
is the normal position for unladen driving. Positions 1 to 3 lower the headlamp beam to compensate for a drop in
height of the rear of the vehicle.
0 = Driver only or driver and front seat passenger
0.5 = Driver, front seat passenger
1 = All seats occupied
1.5 = All seats occupied and maximum rear axle loading
2 = Driver only and maximum rear axle loading
3 = Can be used under certain driving conditions, i.e. off-road
Dimmer Control
The CJB provides a Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) output to control the illumination brightness of the instrument
panel and other fascia illumination. The dimmer switch operates using a rotary thumbwheel which is connected to a
rheostat.
The rheostat is a variable resistor which provides a high or low resistance according to its set position. The CJB
provides an output to the rheostat measure the voltage passing through to ground. The CJB measures this voltage
and uses it to calculate a PWM output of between 8 and 12V to determine the brightness of the illumination.
Automatic Headlamps
Refer to Automatic Headlamps in this section.
HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY

1 - Low beam headlamp
2 - Turn signal indicator lamp
3 - Side marker lamp (NAS only)
4 - Side lamp (base specification halogen headlamps only), cornering lamp (Xenon
headlamps) or cornering/static bending lamp (AFS headlamps)
5 - Side lamp LED's (high specification halogen and xenon headlamps only)
6 - High beam halogen 'fill-in' headlamp
7 - Locking plate
8 - Low beam halogen bulb (halogen headlamps) or xenon bulb (xenon headlamps)
9 - Vertical adjuster
10 - Waterproof breather
11 - High beam 'fill-in' lamp bulb
12 - Xenon control module (not fitted to halogen headlamps)
14 - Horizontal adjuster
15 - Side lamp or cornering/static bending lamp cover (hidden)
16 - Turn signal indicator lamp access cover (hidden)
Three types of headlamp are available; Halogen, Xenon or Xenon with Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS). The
headlamps share a common, clear lens.
The headlamps are located behind the front carrier assembly. Each headlamp is secured to the front carrier assembly
with two locking plates. The locking plate slides in grooves in the rear of the headlamp and two holes in each plate
locate on pins on the carrier. Each locking plate is pressed down to lock the pins in the locking plate holes. The
locking plates allow removal of the headlamp from the carrier for bulb changing without the requirement for special
tools.
The rear of the headlamp unit has removable access panels which allow access to the bulbs for replacement. A large
rubber cover allows access to the low/high beam bulb on both halogen and xenon headlamps. Another removable
rubber cover provides access to the high beam only halogen bulb which is retained by a push fit. A smaller cover can
also be rotated anti-clockwise to provide access to the turn signal indicator lamp bulb. The indicator bulb is a
PH24WY orange bulb and is clipped into the cover and is pulled to remove. Below this cover is a removable cover
which provides access to the side lamp bulb on halogen headlamps or the cornering lamp/static bending lamp bulb
on xenon headlamps and the side marker lamp bulb on NAS models. On xenon headlamps the side lamps are LED's
and therefore are not serviceable components.
The headlamps have two adjustment screws on the rear which allow for the manual setting of the vertical and
horizontal alignment. On NAS vehicles the headlamp is regarded as Visual Optically Left (VOL) aiming. The
adjustment screws have to be turned equal amounts to maintain the correlation in the vertical axis only. There is no
horizontal adjustment. Refer to the Service Repair Procedures manual for headlamp alignment data.
Each headlamp has an integral sixteen pin connector which provides inputs and outputs for the various functions of
the headlamp assembly. The usage of the pins differs between model variants, refer to the Electrical Reference
Library (ERL) for pin details.
The low beam headlamps are switched on when the ignition is in ignition mode 6 and:
the lighting control switch is in the headlamp position

the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB from the
rain/light sensor.
The low beam headlamps can also be operated by the headlamp delay feature.
The high beam headlamps are switched on when the ignition is in ignition mode 6 and:
the low beam headlamps are selected on in the headlamp position or activated via the AUTO feature
The left hand steering column multifunction switch is pushed forward away from the driver
The auto high beam system (if fitted) has switched on the high beam headlamps.
The high beam headlamps will be switched off when:
The left hand steering column multifunction switch is moved rearward towards the driver
The low beam headlamps are switched off
The ignition mode is changed to the accessory mode 4 or ignition off
The auto high beam system (if fitted) has switched off the high beam headlamps.
Common Headlamp Features
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp
The turn signal indicator lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly. The lamp is located
above the side lamp on halogen headlamps and the static bending/cornering lamp on Xenon headlamps. The turn
signal indicator lamp uses an PH24W orange colored bulb module. The module is fitted into a holder which is
connected via contacts on the headlamp housing to the main connector in the headlamp housing. The module is a
snap fit in the holder and needs to be pulled sharply to remove. The holder is fitted with a seal and is located into an
aperture in the headlamp housing and rotated to lock into position. Access to the holder requires removal of the
headlamp from the front carrier assembly and removal of the outer locking plate from the headlamp.
The turn signal indicator lamps are operated by the left hand steering column multifunction switch or by the hazard
flasher switch. The steering column multifunction switch is only active with the ignition in ignition mode 6, the hazard
flasher switch is active at all times. When active, the turn signal indicator lamps will flash at a frequency cycle of
400ms on and 400ms off.
If a bulb fails, the remaining turn signal indicator lamps bulbs continue to flash at normal speed. The turn signal
indicators in the instrument cluster will flash at double speed to indicate the failure to the driver.
Side Lamp - Base Specification Halogen Headlamps

The side lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly and is located below the turn signal
indicator lamp.
The side lamp uses a capless W5W wedge fitting bulb which locates into a holder which is connected via wires to the
main connector on the headlamp housing. The holder is a push fit into a receptacle in the headlamp housing. The
bulb is accessible via a removable cover at the rear of the headlamp housing. Access to the cover requires removal
of the headlamp from the front carrier assembly and removal of the outer locking plate from the headlamp.
The side lamps are operated by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The side lamps are
operational at all times and are not dependant on the ignition switch position. The side lamps will also be illuminated
when the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB from the
rain/light sensor.
Side Lamp - High Specification Halogen and Xenon Headlamps
The side lamps on halogen headlamps (except for base specification models) and on all Xenon headlamps are LED's
The 10 LED's are arranged around the outer part of the halogen fill-in lamp and the xenon projector module.
The side lamps are operated by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The side lamps are
operational at all times and are not dependant on the ignition switch position. The side lamps will also be illuminated
rain/light sensor.
Cornering Lamp - Xenon (non-AFS headlamps only)
NOTE: The cornering lamps are not fitted to NAS market vehicles
The cornering lamps are an optional feature designed to illuminate the direction of travel when cornering at low
speeds. The design of the lens projects a spread of light from the vehicle at approximately 45 degrees to the vehicle
axis.
The cornering lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly and shares the same housing and
reflector as the side lamp.
The cornering lamp uses a 35W Halogen H8 bulb which locates in a holder which is connected on the headlamp
housing. The holder is located in an aperture in the headlamp housing and rotated to lock. The bulb is accessible via
a removable cover at the rear of the headlamp housing.
The cornering lamps are controlled by the left hand steering column multifunction switch with the lighting control
switch in the headlamp position and the ignition in ignition power mode 6. The cornering lamps are supplied power
via the ignition circuit to ensure that they do not function with the headlamp delay feature. The cornering lamps are
deactivated if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h).
Only one cornering lamp will illuminate at any one time. If the left hand turn signal indicators are selected on, the
left hand cornering lamp will be illuminated and visa versa, providing the vehicle speed and lighting control switch
positions are correct. Cornering lamps are disabled when reverse gear is selected.
Cornering/Static Bending Lamps (Xenon AFS headlamps only)
NOTE: The cornering/static bending lamps are not fitted to NAS market vehicles
The cornering/static bending lamps are a standard feature on AFS headlamps designed to illuminate the direction of
travel when cornering at low speeds. The design of the lens projects a spread of light from the vehicle at
approximately 45 degrees to the vehicle axis. The static bending lamps are powered by the CJB and controlled by the
AFS control module. The cornering lamp functionality is controlled by the CJB as described for non-AFS headlamps.
The cornering lamp and static bending lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly.
The cornering/static bending lamp uses a 35W Halogen H8 bulb which locates in a holder which is connected via wires
to the main connector on the headlamp housing. The holder is located in an aperture in the headlamp housing and
rotated to lock. The bulb is accessible via a removable cover at the rear of the headlamp housing.
AFS Control
On headlamps with AFS, the cornering lamp function is as described previously for the Xenon non-AFS headlamps.
The static bending lamps operate with a steering angle sensor signal which is received by the AFS control module.
The AFS control module sends a static bending lamp on request to the CJB which activates the static bending lamp
bulb.
The static bending lamp operation is variable with the speed of the vehicle and the steering wheel angle. The static
bending lamps illuminate at 0 mph (0 km/h) when the steering wheel rotation reaches 20 degrees. At 43 mph (70
km/h) the static bending lamps will illuminate when the steering wheel angle reaches 10 degrees. The static bending
lamps will be switched off when the vehicle speed exceeds 43 mph (70 km/h).
The operation of the static bending lamps is controlled by the AFS control module. When the operation parameters of
the lamp are reached, the CJB fades the static bending lamp bulb on using a PWM voltage over a period of
approximately 2 seconds. When the lamp is switched off, the CJB fades the bulb off by decreasing the PWM voltage.
Halogen Headlamps
The halogen headlamps use a projector module for the low beam headlamp and a complex surface reflector for the
halogen high beam lamp. The low and high beam bulbs are quartz halogen H7, with a rating of 55W. The bulbs are
retained in the headlamp unit with conventional wire retaining clips.
The projector module comprises a reflector, the lens and the halogen bulb. The projector module only operates as a
low beam halogen headlamp.
The high beam lamp reflector is divided into separate parabolic segments, with each segment having a different focal
length.
The halogen headlamp uses a side lamp bulb which is located in the position used by the cornering/static bending
lamp on xenon headlamps. The lens pattern for the side lamp in this position differs from the lens pattern used for
the cornering/static bending lamp.
The halogen headlamps do not require adhesive decals to be applied to the clear outer lens to mask the beam cut-off
when driving in opposite drive hand markets. A tourist lever mechanism is located on the right hand side of the
projector module. This mechanism moves to blank off a portion of the beam spread to enable the vehicle to be
driven in opposite drive hand markets without applying blanking decals to the headlamp lens. The beam is changed
by removing the access cover at the rear of the lamp assembly and moving a small lever located near the bulb
holder, at the side of the projector module. Make sure that the headlamps are off before removing the access cover.
CAUTION: This lever can be very hot if the lamps have been operating. Allow sufficient time to cool before
operating the lever.
Xenon Headlamps
Safety Precautions
WARNING: The Xenon system generates up to 28000 volts and contact with this voltage could lead to fatality.
Make sure that the headlamps are switched off before working on the system.
The following safety precautions must be followed when working on the xenon headlamp system:
DO NOT attempt any procedures on the xenon headlamps when the lights are switched on.
Handling of the D3S Xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment, e.g. gloves and
goggles. The glass part of the bulb must not be touched.
Only operate the lamp in a mounted condition in the reflector.
The xenon headlamps use a complex surface reflector for the Halogen fill in high beam lamp only lighting unit, which
is of the same design as the high beam unit used on the Halogen headlamps. This type of reflector has the reflector
divided into separate parabolic segments, with each segment having a different focal length.
The high beam bulbs are quartz halogen H7, with a rating of 55W. The bulbs are retained in the headlamp unit with
conventional wire retaining clips.
The Bi-Xenon™ (the Bi-Xenon™ trademark is the property of Hella KGaA Hueck & Co., Germany) projector module
headlamp operates as both low beam and high beam headlamp unit. The Xenon lamp (or High Intensity Discharge
(HID) lamp), comprises an ellipsoidal lens with a solenoid controlled shutter to change the beam output from low to
high beam. The bulb is retained with a locking ring which must be rotated to facilitate removal of the D3S bulb.
NOTE: If the lighting control switch is in the OFF position, the xenon lamps do not operate when the high beam
'flash' function is operated. If the lighting switch is in the headlamps position or AUTO position with the low beam
lamps active, the xenon low beam will remain on when the high beam 'flash' function is operated.
The xenon headlamp system is controlled by the CJB using a control module for each headlamp and an igniter. The
control modules and the igniters provide the regulated power supply required to illuminate the xenon bulbs through
their start-up phases of operation.
Xenon/Halogen Headlamp Beam Comparison

A - Xenon
B - Halogen
The Xenon low/high beam headlamps use ellipsoidal technology for the lens and reflector providing improved night
time visibility compared to conventional halogen headlamps. The Xenon headlamps provide the following benefits
when compared to halogen headlamps:
Longer bulb life - Approximately 3 to 5 times longer than a halogen bulb

Increased light output - Xenon headlamps output 3 to 4 times more light on the road surface than halogen
headlamps
Blue/White light which is closer to natural daylight - Xenon lamps produce a blue/white light compared to a
yellow light produced by a halogen bulb
Improved night time driving visibility - Xenon lamps produce a wider and brighter beam in front of the vehicle
than conventional halogen bulbs
Lower running temperatures
Lower power consumption
Mercury free.
Xenon Headlamp Construction

1 - Bracket
2 - D3S xenon bulb
3 - D3S connector
4 - Swivel actuator (AFS lamp only)
5 - Solenoid
6 - Aspheric lens
7 - Shade
8 - Shade
9 - Lens support
The Xenon headlamp is a self contained unit located within the headlamp assembly. The unit comprises a reflector,
an adaptor ring, the lens, a shutter controller and the Xenon 35W D3S bulb, which as an assembly is known as the
projector module.
The reflector is curved and provides the mounting for the xenon bulb. The bulb locates in a keyway to ensure correct
alignment in the reflector and is secured by rotating a locking ring on the projector module to lock. The bulb has a
pin connector which is a push to lock fitting.
The shutter controller is a solenoid which operates the shutter via a lever mechanism. The shutter is used to change
the beam projection from low beam to high beam and visa versa.
A tourist lever mechanism is located on the right hand side of the projector module. This mechanism moves to blank
off a portion of the beam spread to enable the vehicle to be driven in opposite drive hand markets without applying
blanking decals to the headlamp lens. The beam is changed by removing the access cover at the rear of the lamp
assembly and moving a small lever located near the bulb holder, at the side of the projector module. Make sure that
the headlamps are off before removing the access cover.
The Xenon bulbs illuminate when an arc of electrical current is established between two electrodes within the bulb.
The xenon gas sealed in the bulb reacts to the electrical excitation and the heat generated by the current flow. The
xenon gas reaction to the controlled current flow between the electrodes produces the blue/white light.
To operate at full efficiency, the xenon bulb goes through three stages of operation before full output for continuous
operation is achieved. The three phases are; start-up phase, warm-up phase and continuous phase.
In the start-up phase, the bulb requires an initial high voltage starting pulse of 18000 to 28000 volts to establish the
arc. This is produced by the igniters. The warm-up phase begins once the arc is established. The Xenon control
modules regulate the supply to the bulbs to 2.6A which gives a lamp output of 75W. During this phase, the Xenon
gas begins to illuminate brightly and the environment within the bulb stabilizes ensuring a continual current flow
between the electrodes. When the warm-up phase is complete, the xenon control modules change to continuous
phase. The supply voltage to the bulb is reduced and the operating power required for continual operation is reduced
to 35W.
The Xenon system is controlled by the CJB, the two xenon control modules and the two igniters. The xenon control
modules (one per headlamp) receive an operating voltage from the CJB when the headlamps are switched on. The
modules regulate the power supply required through the phases of start-up.
The igniters (one per headlamp) generate the initial high voltage required to establish the arc. The igniters have
integral coils which generate high voltage pulses required for start-up. Once the xenon bulbs are operating, the
igniters provide a closed circuit for regulated power supply from the control modules.
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM (AFS)
The AFS is a system to improve driver visibility under differing driving conditions. AFS provides a larger visible area
which is illuminated when cornering by adjusting the position of the beam distribution on the road. Horizontal
adjustment is made automatically to the most suitable orientation for the driving conditions using steering angle and
information from other vehicle sensors.
AFS is only available with adaptive Bi-Xenon™ headlamps. The 'Xenon' module within the headlamp is controlled by
actuator motors which rotate the projector module on its horizontal axis to adjust the beam output to suit the
cornering conditions and vehicle inclination. Only the adaptive bi-xenon™ lamp projector module swivels, the non
adaptive xenon and halogen high beam lamp units remains static.
The AFS system is controlled by an AFS control module which is located at the bottom of the passenger side 'A' pillar.
The control module controls the horizontal alignment of the adaptive Bi-Xenon™ projector module. The operation of
the static bending lamp is controlled by the AFS control module, but powered by the CJB.
AFS Concept

A - Conventional headlamp beam distribution
B - AFS swivel headlamp beam distribution
AFS Control Module
The AFS control module is connected to the high speed CAN bus and receives inputs from other vehicle systems on
the status of the following parameters:
Steering angle - from steering angle sensor

Vehicle speed - from ABS module
Low beam status - from instrument cluster
Suspension height - from air suspension control module
Odometer value - for diagnostics only
Engine running - from ECM
Gear position - From transmission control module or transfer box control module
Engine crank - from ECM
Exterior/interior temperature - for diagnostics only.
The AFS will only operate when the AFS control module receives an engine running signal on the CAN bus. When the
engine running signal is received, the AFS control module performs an initialization routine which is only performed at
engine crank (power mode 9).
The AFS will also function when the lighting control switch is in the AUTO position and the AFS control module
receives a lights on signal from the rain/light sensor and an engine running signal.
The AFS control module then monitors the inputs from the other vehicle systems to control the AFS functionality
according to cornering angles and vehicle speed.
The AFS control module is connected to each headlamp on a private Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus. The AFS
control module then drives the DC motor actuators inside the headlamp assembly.
The AFS control module controls the swiveling angle of each projector module using speed and steering angle signals.
The angles of each projector module differ to give the correct spread of light, For example, when turning left, the Left
Hand (LH) projector module will have a greater swiveling angle than the Right Hand (RH) projector module
Reverse mode disables the swivel function when reverse gear is selected. The AFS projector modules move to their
central straight ahead position and the static bending lamp, if active, will go off. When reverse gear is deselected, the
AFS projector modules will move to a position to match the steering angle and the static bending lamp will illuminate
if the operating conditions are correct (for example vehicle speed above 1.86 mph (3 km/h).
Xenon Headlamp Assembly with AFS Construction
The AFS xenon headlamp construction is similar to the non-AFS xenon headlamp assembly. The AFS assembly
contains an additional carrier frame which provides the location for the AFS components. The remaining lamps are as
described previously for the Xenon headlamp assembly. The functionality of the static bending lamp on the AFS
headlamp is different from the functionality of the cornering lamp on the xenon headlamp.
The carrier frame has a radial bearing at the top and a thrust washer at the bottom which provide the horizontal
pivot points for the xenon projector module. The lamp module lower pivot has a splined end which locates in the
mating splines of the AFS horizontal actuator motor. The carrier frame is suspended on two flexible mountings at the
top which provide for the vertical pivot points for the xenon projector module which allow for the vertical adjustment
of the projector module. The bottom of the carrier frame is attached to the AFS vertical actuator motor.
The AFS actuator motors are dc motors which are driven by a power output from the CJB in response to signals from
the AFS control module.
The actuators contain a potentiometer which is connected via wires with gold plated connector pins to the AFS
control module. The two wires to each actuator provide a feedback signal to the AFS control module to give the
precise position of the xenon projector module.
The AFS control module receives vehicle speed signals from the ABS module to adjust the projector module vertically
to increase the beam range as the vehicle speed increases.
Initialization
When the AFS control module receives an engine running signal, the control module performs the initialisation
procedure which ensures that the headlamps are correctly aligned on their horizontal axis.
The AFS swivel initialization is completed in less than 1 second. The LH and RH AFS motors flick the headlamps to
calibrate the centre position of the headlamps.
Failure Mode
In the event of a failure of the AFS system, a warning indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated to warn the
driver. The AFS warning indicator illuminates when the ignition is in accessory power mode 4 or ignition power mode
6 and will flash continuously until the fault is rectified. The AFS warning indicator will also be illuminated if a failure
of the steering angle sensor or the vehicle speed signal is detected.
Illumination of the AFS warning indicator does not necessarily mean that there is a fault with the AFS system. The
fault may be caused by a failure of another system preventing the AFS system operating correctly.
The AFS control module performs a diagnostic routine every time AFS is requested. If any fault is found, the AFS
control module will suspend the operation of the AFS function.
If the AFS system has failed with the xenon projector module in a position other than the correct straight ahead
position, the AFS control module will attempt to drive the xenon projector module to the zero (straight ahead)
position. If this is not possible, the AFS control module will lower the projector module using the leveling actuator
motors to prevent excess glare to oncoming vehicles.
The AFS control module software can detect an internal failure of the control module control circuits. The control
module will power the projector modules to the zero position and prevent further operation.
Faults can be investigated by interrogating the AFS control module using an approved Land Rover diagnostic system
to check for fault codes.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMP OPERATION
The automatic headlamp function is a driver assistance system. The driver can override the system operation by
selection of side lamp or headlamp on if the ambient light conditions require front and rear lighting to be active. The
automatic headlamp system uses a light sensor and the CJB, which are connected via the LIN bus to control the
headlamp functionality.
A light sensor is incorporated in the rain/light sensor located on the inside of the windshield, below the rear view
mirror. The wiper system also uses the rain/light sensor for automatic wiper operation.
For additional information, refer to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Description and Operation).
The light sensor measures the ambient light around the vehicle in a vertical direction and also the angular light level
from the front of the vehicle. The rain/light sensor uses vehicle speed signals, wiper switch position and the park
position of the front wipers to control the system.
The automatic headlamp operation uses ambient light levels which are monitored by photodiode incorporated in the
rain/light sensor. The rain/light sensor sends a lights on/off request to the CJB on the LIN bus, which responds by
switching on the low beam headlamps, front side lamps and rear tail lamps.
The automatic headlamps are activated under the following conditions:
Twilight
Darkness
Rain
Snow
Tunnels
Underground or multistoried car parks.
Operation of the automatic headlamps requires the ignition to be in ignition mode 6, the lighting control switch to be
in the 'AUTO' position and a lights on request signal from the light sensor.
HEADLAMP LEVELING
Headlamp leveling provides for the adjustment of the vertical aim of the headlamps. The leveling system is primarily
required to minimise glare to other road users when a heavy load is in the rear of the vehicle.
Two systems of headlamp leveling are available; manual and static.
Manual Headlamp Leveling
Manual headlamp leveling is only available on vehicles with halogen headlamps and coil spring suspension.
The manual system comprises the following components:
Two headlamp leveling motors

Headlamp leveling rheostat rotary control.
When the ignition is in ignition mode 6, power is supplied to the lighting control switch via the ignition relay in the
battery junction box and to the headlamp leveling motor in each headlamp assembly via the CJB. When the lighting
control rotary switch is moved to the side lamp or headlamp position, the supply from the ignition relay is passed to
the leveling rotary control.
Movement of the leveling rotary control produces a variable voltage output, which is sensed by the motors. The
motors react to the supplied voltage and move the headlamp to the requested position which relates to the supplied
voltage from the leveling rotary control.
The headlamps can only be lowered from their unladen position to compensate for changes in vehicle attitude due to
loading.
Vehicle Headlamp Leveling
Vehicle headlamp leveling is only available on vehicles with air suspension.
Vehicle headlamp leveling is performed by the air suspension system and the air suspension control module. The
suspension system constantly monitors the vehicle attitude and adjusts the height of the front and/or rear of the
vehicle accordingly. This maintains the correct vehicle attitude and consequently maintains the correct headlamp
beam alignment.
The vehicle leveling system is fully automatic, therefore the lighting control switch does not have the manual leveling
rotary control.
HIGH BEAM ASSIST

1 - Rear view mirror calibration bracket
2 - Ambient light sensor (High beam assist)
3 - Rain/light sensor (Auto headlamps)
4 - Image sensor
5 - High beam assist control module (inside mirror body)
High beam assist is a driving aid which automatically controls the high beam function. If required, the system can be
overridden by the driver.
CAUTION: The high beam assist system is designed as a driving aid only. Should the road conditions require, it
is the driver’s responsibility to consider other road users and operate the high beam headlamps in a safe manner. In
certain circumstances the driver will be required to intervene.
High Beam Assist Warning Indicator

1 - Warning indicator (green)
The high beam assist system is controlled by a high beam assist control module which is located in the interior rear
view mirror body and by the CJB. The module and the CJB are connected via the medium speed CAN bus.
The high beam assist control module receives a power supply from the CJB when the ignition is in power mode 6
(ignition on). The rear view mirror also includes a low resolution camera (image) sensor which detects headlamps
and tail lamps of preceding vehicles. The sensor is connected to the control module which evaluates the image data,
checking for light intensity and location.
If conditions are correct, the control module will activate the high beam assist by sending a high or low beam request
message to the CJB via the medium speed CAN bus. The CJB then controls the shutter in the Xenon projector module
together with the high beam fill-in lamp.
High Beam Assist Operation
The high beam assist operates as part of the automatic headlight system. When driving at night with the lighting
control switch in the automatic position and the LH steering column multifunction switch in the central position, with
sufficient darkness (approximately 1 lux or less) and a suitable road speed, the high beam assist will automatically
operate the high beam lighting when necessary. A warning symbol in the instrument cluster confirms to the driver
when the high beam assist system is selected and enabled.
NOTES:
The function of the normal 'blue' high beam indicator remains unchanged and it always reflects the actual status
of the high beam lamps
The exterior lighting 'on' threshold for the auto headlamps system is approximately 100 lux which is measured
by the rain/light sensor. At light levels below this value the low beam headlamps and exterior lights will be switched
on. The high beam assist will not function until the light level has reached approximately 1 lux. At light levels above
1 lux high beam is not required and therefore is not activated.
Activation (system ready)
High beam assist will only activate and illuminate the warning indicator to show system is ready or 'primed' for high
beam control, when the following conditions are met:
High beam assist has been first 'enabled' via the instrument cluster menu
Lighting control switch is in the 'Auto' position
LH steering column multifunction switch in the central position
The ambient light level is below 100 lux – refer to 'Light Levels' section that follows
The system has not been overridden or cancelled – refer to 'Override' section that follows
The camera (image) sensor view is not blocked.
High Beam Control
When activated, high beam assist will switch the headlamps to high beam when all the following conditions occur:
No relevant oncoming traffic

No relevant preceding traffic
In non-urban environment, i.e. with no street lighting
Ambient light level is below 1 lux – refer to 'Light Levels' section that follows
Road speed is suitable – refer to 'Road Speed' section that follows.
Low Beam Control
When activated, high beam assist will switch the headlamps to low beam when any of the following conditions occur:
Relevant Oncoming traffic is present

Relevant Preceding traffic is present
In urban environment, i.e. with street lighting
Ambient light level is above 1 lux – refer to 'Light Levels' section that follows
Road speed is not suitable – refer to 'Road Speed' section that follows
Unrecognisable reflective inputs from road signs or markings – refer to 'System Limitations' section that
follows.
Light Levels
The exterior lighting 'on' threshold for the normal 'auto headlamps' feature is approximately 100 lux and is measured
by the windscreen mounted 'rain/light' sensor. When the light level falls to this value the low beam headlamps and
exterior lights will be switched on together with the high beam assist warning indicator.
This warns the driver that the system is activated and ready to automatically switch on the high beam headlamps
when the light level falls a little further to approximately 1 lux, as measured by the 'ambient light sensor' located in
the mirror body. High beam is generally not required with light levels above 1 lux.
Road Speed
A road speed signal is received by the CJB from the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module via the high speed CAN
bus. When the other activation conditions are correct, the CJB will switch the headlamps to high beam when the road
speed has increased above 40 km/h (25 mph).
When the road speed falls to below 24 km/h (15mph), the CJB will switch the headlamps to low beam. The 10 mph
(15 km/h) difference between the on and off road speed thresholds prevents the system continually switching
between high and low beam at low speeds.
Override
The driver can manually override the high beam assist system at any time. When the high beam assist system is
activated, pulling the LH steering column multifunction switch to the high beam 'flash' position or pushing it forward
to the high beam position will de-activate the system and the high beam assist warning indicator in the instrument
cluster will extinguish.
When the multifunction switch is returned to the central position, from a forward high beam position, the system is
re-activated and the high beam assist warning indicator will illuminate again.
Correct Performance
In addition, high beam assist will only exhibit best performance if all of the following conditions are met:
No false inputs are received by the camera (image) sensor, such as reflected light from certain static signs –
refer to 'System Limitations' section that follows
Headlamps are correctly aligned
High beam assist system has been set for correct 'hand of traffic' via the driver menu settings – refer to
'Setting Hand of Traffic' section that follows
Headlamps have been set for correct 'hand of traffic' via the mechanical tourist lever in headlamp casing –
refer to 'Setting Hand of Traffic' section that follows
Camera (image) sensor has been through a self learning 'auto aim' calibration procedure if any components
have been replaced – refer to 'Calibration' section that follows
There are no large reflective items, white papers, etc., sitting on top of the dash board in near view of the
camera (image) sensor, or stickers placed directly in front of the camera (image) sensor
Driver Menu Features
The high beam assist feature must first be enabled using the configuration menu available in the instrument cluster.
However if required, the high beam assist system can be permanently disabled leaving the basic 'Auto Lamps' system
still operative.
Within this menu the system can also be configured for driving on the alternate side of the road (Hand of Traffic).
This enables the system to be used in different regions and it's setting is important for correct operation.
Setting 'Hand of Traffic' and High Beam Assist 'Enable'
To set the high beam assist options the following steps must be sequenced:
With the ignition in power mode 6 (ignition on), and the engine not running, use the controls on the steering
wheel to select on the instrument cluster menu:
- Menu > Vehicle Set-up > High Beam Assist
Configure the 'Hand of Traffic' setting by selecting the appropriate 'Drive on Left' (of road) or 'Drive on Right'
(of road) to the applicable Market condition
Enable the feature by setting 'Activate Assist' if not already selected.
NOTES:
Enabling or disabling high beam assist will not affect the ‘Hand of Traffic’ settings once set.
The headlamps still require manual adjustment using the tourist lever for driving abroad in countries where the
alternate side of the road is used.
The instrument cluster menu also includes a 'High Beam Assist Sensitivity' selection. This is a requirement option for
NAS market vehicles only but it is not recommended for normal use and has been superseded.
NOTE: In other markets the 'Sensitivity' selection is greyed out and cannot be selected.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).
System Limitations
The high beam assist system can occasionally have difficulty distinguishing between light from other vehicles or
reflected light from static highly reflective road signs.
These situations may cause the high beam assist system to undesirably operate the high beam headlamps or take no
action at all. Examples of these situations are as follows:
Dips, hollows or crests in the road

Highly reflective static Road signs
Tight bends
Poorly illuminated vehicles e.g. cyclists or small mopeds
Motorway central barriers
Extreme weather conditions e.g. Fog, heavy snow
Exterior domestic or industrial lighting
Reflective Static Signs

1 - Red reflective signs could be detected as rear tail lamps
2 - Large reflective signs could affect the system
Manual Deactivation

1 - Vehicle equipped with high beam assist
2 - Oncoming vehicle headlamps can be seen by the driver before the high beam assist image
sensor detects the oncoming light input
There are situations when a driver is able to judge if a high beam deactivation is desirable before the high beam
assist system actually operates, for example over a crest of a hill. Headlamps from an oncoming vehicle can
sometimes be seen on the horizon prior to the detection sensor receiving an input. It is the driver's preference to
determine if early intervention is desired in this and similar situations.
System Diagnosis
NOTE: Windshield stickers, stone chips, dirt and general road film will affect the successful operation of the
image sensor if sufficient blocking is present. Avoid placing reflective objects on the instrument panel, for example
white paper which can affect the image sensor.
High beam assist has a self diagnosis capability by comparing data from the ambient light sensor input (located in
the rear view mirror) to light levels detected by the image sensor. If a deviation is detected it is assumed that the
ambient light available to the image sensor is being restricted by dirt or other blockage and the system will be
deactivated. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)'s are stored in the control module's memory and can be accessed using
an approved Land Rover diagnostic system. Within the diagnostic system is a procedure to test the basic operation of
the camera function.
In the event of a fault, the warning strategy to the driver is as follows:
Image sensor internal fault - green icon will extinguish with no additional message to driver
CJB has lost all communication with image sensor - green icon will extinguish with no additional message to
driver
Image sensor blocked - green icon will extinguish with an additional "High Beam Assist Sensor Blocked"
message within the message centre
System Calibration
To achieve effective operation of the high beam assist system, a calibration routine is performed on vehicle build and
system tolerances are set to an accuracy of +/- 0.2 degrees.
This initial calibration is a 'one time only' procedure. Should the high beam assist components or the windshield
require replacement at the dealership, an automatic calibration routine will be performed. This 'auto aim' calibration
procedure is a continual process that takes place during a normal drive cycle at night and could take between 10 - 30
minutes dependant on the following driving conditions:
If sufficient road markings (lane markings) are visible to the image sensor - approximately 10 minutes
If insufficient road markings are visible, the system uses the tail lights of preceding vehicles - approximately
30 minutes.
NOTES:
Until this calibration is complete the system may not react correctly during operation. This should be made clear
to the customer before vehicle handover. During any calibration or rectification work the headlamps should be
checked for correct alignment.
Due to mechanical calibration tolerance the correct mirror assembly must be used for the vehicle model types in
question and it is not exchangeable with other vehicle model types.
After any rectification work and before any calibration drives, the headlamps should be checked for correct
alignment.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)
For additional information, refer to: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (417-04 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL),
FRONT FOG LAMP (If Fitted)

1 - Vertical adjustment wheel
Front fog lamps are an optional fitment on low specification vehicles and a standard fitment on high specification
vehicles.
Two front fog lamps are located in apertures in the front bumper. The front fog lamps are located in the front
bumper. Each lamp is secured to three lugs in the bumper and retained with self tapping screws and fasteners. Each
lamp has an adjustment wheel which provide for the vertical alignment of the beam. Access to the adjustment wheel
requires removal of the lamp bezel.
The fog lamp uses a 55W halogen H11 bulb which is located in a holder. The holder is located in a hole in the rear of
the fog lamp housing and is turned to lock in position.
The front fog lamps are controlled by the lighting control switch. When the ignition is in ignition mode 6 and the
lighting control switch is in the side lamp or headlamp position, the lighting control fog lamp switch can be pushed to
activate the front fog lamps.
If the switch is pushed a second time the front fog lamps are switched off. A front fog lamp warning indicator is
illuminated in the instrument cluster when the front fog lamps are active.
If the fog lamps are active when the lighting control switch is moved to the off position or the ignition is switched off,
the fog lamps are de-activated and will need to be reselected on (if required) when the side lamps or headlamps are
next selected on.
Front Fog Lamps Functionality (NAS and Canadian Markets Only)
The front fog lamps are powered by an additional relay (relay 5) which is located in the EJB in the engine
compartment.
The front fog lamps operate as described previously but with the following differences which cover local laws
governing lamp usage.
If the low beam headlamps and the front fog lamps are on at the same time, when the high beam headlamps are
switched on, the front fog lamps will be automatically switched off. When the high beam headlamps are switched off,
the front fog lamps will be switched back on automatically.
NOTE: The front fog lamps will also be switched off if the headlamp high beam flash function is operated.
REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY

1 - Turn signal indicator lamp LED's
2 - Stop lamp LED's
3 - Side lamp LED's
4 - Side marker lamp (NAS only)
5 - Reverse lamp
6 - Fog lamp
7 - Side marker lamp bulb holder (NAS only)
8 - Location studs
9 - Attachment hole
10 - Attachment hole
12 - Reverse lamp bulb holder
13 - Fog lamp bulb holder
The rear lamp assembly is a one piece unit which contains a stop lamp, a rear side lamp, a turn signal indicator
lamp, a second rear side lamp, a reversing lamp and a fog lamp. Light Emitting Diode (LED)'s are used for the tail
lamp, stop lamp and turn signal indicator lamp. Reversing lamp and fog lamp use bayonet fitting bulbs. These are
located in holders which fit into the applicable hole in the lamp housing and are locked by rotating. Each bulb holder
is connected by wires to a connector on the rear of the lamp housing.
The rear lamp assembly is located in a recess in the vehicle body. Two studs on the outer edge of the lamp housing
locate in the vehicle body. The lamp is secured with two screws which are located on the inner edge of the lamp
housing, near the tailgate aperture.
Rear Stop Lamp

The upper lamp is the inner section of the upper of the two main lamps and uses 12 LED's.
The stop lamp is activated when the ignition is in ignition mode 6 and the brake pedal switch is active (by depressing
the brake pedal). The high mounted stop lamp will also be activated when the brake pedal is pressed.
The stop lamps can also be activated by the ABS when Hill Descent Control (HDC) is active. A signal from the ABS
module energises a relay which supplies power to the stop lamps and high mounted stop lamp.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control (206-09A Anti-Lock Control - Traction
Turn Signal Indicator Lamp
The turn signal indicator lamp is the inner section of the lower of the two main lamps and uses 12 LED's.
The turn signal indicator lamps are operated by the LH steering column multifunction switch or by the hazard flasher
switch. The steering column multifunction switch is only active with the ignition switch is in ignition mode 6, the
hazard flasher switch is active at all times. When active, the turn signal indicator lamps will flash at a frequency cycle
of 400ms on and 400ms off.
Side Lamp
The side lamp is the outer ring of both upper lamps and use 12 LED's in each lamp.
The lamps are operated by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The lamps are
operational at all times and are not dependant on the ignition switch position. The lamps will also be illuminated
rain/light sensor.
On NAS market vehicles a side marker lamp is incorporated into the side of the lamp assembly and uses a 5W
capless wedge bulb.
Reversing Lamp
The reversing lamp is located below the tail lamp and uses a 21W bayonet fitting bulb.
The reverse lamp is active when the ignition is in ignition mode 6 and the CJB receives a reverse selected signal on
the CAN bus. Both manual and automatic transmissions have a reverse switch which senses when reverse is selected.
Rear Fog Lamp
The rear fog lamp is located at the bottom of the rear lamp and uses a 21W bayonet fitting bulb.
The rear fog lamp is controlled by a non-latching switch on the lighting control switch. When the ignition is in ignition
mode 6 and the lighting control switch is in the side lamp or headlamp position, the rear fog lamp switch can be
pressed to activate the rear fog lamps. A second press of the switch will de-activate the rear fog lamps. A rear fog
lamp warning indicator is illuminated in the instrument cluster when the rear fog lamps are active.
If the rear fog lamps are active when the lighting control switch is moved to the off position or the ignition is
switched off, the fog lamps are de-activated and will need to be reselected on (if required) when the side lamps or
headlamps are next selected on.
SIDE REPEATER LAMP

1 - Side repeater
2 - Bulb holder
3 - Clip
The side repeater turn signal indicator lamps are located in the driver and passenger doors, below each door mirror.
The lamps are clipped into an aperture in the door panel and can be removed by sliding rearwards and releasing the
front edge of the lamp from the door. The side repeater lamps use a W5W capless bulb which is located in a holder.
The side repeater lamps have the same functionality as the front and rear turn signal indicator lamps and are
operated by the LH steering column multifunction switch or by the hazard flasher switch. The steering column
multifunction switch is only active with the ignition is in ignition mode 6, the hazard flasher switch is active at all
times. When active, the side repeater lamps will flash at a frequency cycle of 400ms on and 400ms off. If a lamp
bulb fails, the remaining turn signal indicator lamps continue to flash at the normal rate.
LEFT HAND STEERING COLUMN MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH

1 - RH turn signal lamp
2 - Headlamp flash
3 - LH turn signal lamp
4 - Headlamp high beam
The steering column multifunction switch is located on the left hand side of the steering column and controls the
following functions:
Headlamp low/high beam

Auto high beam function
Headlamp high beam flash
Left/right turn signal indicator lamps
Trip computer functions.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message
Center, Description and Operation).
The high beam on and flash functions are connected on separate wires to the CJB. When the switch is operated in
either position an earth path is completed which is sensed by the CJB which activates the selected function.
The turn signal indicator lamps are connected and operate in a similar way with the earth path completed through a
separate wire which is sensed by the CJB which activates the applicable turn signal indicator lamps. The turn signal
indicators have a 'lane change' feature which operates the turn signal indicators 3 times when the LH steering column
switch is operated against spring pressure and released. This feature is controlled by the CJB.
HAZARD FLASHERS
The hazard flashers are controlled by a non-latching switch in the centre of the instrument panel. The hazard flashers
operate at all times when selected and are not dependant on ignition mode.
When the hazard flashers are selected on, all of the front, rear and side turn signal indicator lamps operate as
previously described and both left and right turn signal warning indicator in the instrument cluster also flash. The
hazard warning flashers flash at a rate of 380ms on and 380ms off. When the hazard flashers are active, they
override any request for turn signal indicator lamp operation.
If a trailer is fitted, the trailer turn signal indicator lamps will flash at the same frequency as the vehicle indicators.
The trailer warning indicator in the instrument cluster will also flash. If a trailer bulb is defective, the trailer warning
indicator will not flash.
The hazard flashers can also be activated by a crash signal from the Restraints Control Module (RCM). This is
received by the CJB which activates the hazard flashers. The hazard flashers can be cancelled by changing the
ignition mode to accessory mode 4 or off or the crash mode is cancelled by the RCM.
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-
20B Supplemental Restraint System, Description and Operation).
LICENSE PLATE LAMPS

Two license plate lamps are fitted in the tailgate handle, above the license plate in the upper tailgate. Each lamp uses
a 5W capless wedge type bulb. The lamps are secured in the upper tail gate handle with integral clips. The lamps can
be released from the handle using a small, flat blade screwdriver.
The license plate lamps are active at all times when the side lamps or headlamps are switched on.
HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP

2 - Housing
The high mounted stop lamp is located in the upper tailgate. The stop lamp housing also provides location for the tail
door window washer jet.
The lamp comprises a plastic housing with a red coloured lens. The lamp is illuminated by a number of LED's.
The high mounted stop lamp is activated, along with the stop lamps, when the ignition is in ignition mode 6 and the
brake pedal switch is active (by depressing the brake pedal).
The high mounted stop lamp and the stop lamps can also be activated by the ABS when Hill Descent Control (HDC)
is active. A signal from the ABS module energises a relay which supplies power to the stop lamps.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Traction Control (206-09A Anti-Lock Control - Traction
TRAILER LIGHTING
Several different types of trailer socket can be fitted to the vehicle depending on market specifications. Refer to the
Electrical Reference Library for specific socket details.
The CJB monitors the turn signal lamps and can detect if more than two lamps are fitted (the side repeater turn
signal indicator lamps are not monitored). When a trailer is detected, the trailer warning indicator in the instrument
cluster will flash in synchronisation with the turn signal indicators.
If one or more of the turn signal indicator lamps on the vehicle or the trailer are defective, the trailer warning
indicator will not flash to alert the driver to the bulb failure.
DIAGNOSTICS
The diagnostic socket is located in the lower instrument panel closing panel, on the driver's side, below the steering
column. Various lighting system functions are monitored by different systems which can store fault information. This
can be retrieved using an approved Land Rover diagnostic system or other suitable scan tool.
AFS Control Module Fault Monitoring
The AFS control module has the capability to monitor faults within the AFS. The control module can store Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTC's) relating to the symptoms shown in the following table.
DTC Symptom Description Customer Symptom Possible Cause

LH or RH AFS actuator - Swivelling does not function Open circuit or short circuit
Communication failure to earth
LH or RH AFS Actuator Swivelling does not function Open circuit or short circuit
failure to earth
LH or RH Leveling Motor Leveling does not function Open circuit or short circuit
Failure to earth or 12V
CAN bus failure Swivelling and leveling do not function. Other vehicle Open circuit or short circuit
system functions perhaps also inoperative to earth or 12V
The CJB monitors the status of the lighting circuits, relays and switches. If a fault occurs, the CJB stores a fault code
applicable to the specific fault which can be retrieved using an approved Land Rover diagnostic system or other
suitable scan tool.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN Bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN Bus
1 - Battery
2 - LH side repeater turn signal indicator
3 - RH side repeater turn signal indicator
4 - LH Door module
5 - RH Door module
6 - License plate lamps (2 off)
8 - LH rear lamp assembly
9 - RH rear lamp assembly
10 - LH headlamp assembly
11 - RH headlamp assembly
13 - AFS control module
14 - Transfer box control module
15 - Transmission reverse switch (manual transmission only)
16 - Transmission Control Module (TCM) (Automatic transmission only)
18 - Engine Control Module (ECM)
19 - Stop lamp switch
20 - Auto high beam image sensor and control module
23 - LH steering column multifunction switch
24 - Hazard warning indicators switch
25 - Engine Junction Box (EJB)
26 - Auto high beam relay
AUTO HIGH BEAM CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN; N = Medium Speed CAN; O = LIN Bus

2 - LH steering column multifunction switch
3 - Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module
4 - Wheel speed sensor
5 - Rain/light sensor (Ref)
6 - Auto high beam control module and image sensor
8 - High beam warning indicator
9 - Auto high beam warning indicator
10 - LH headlamp assembly
11 - RH headlamp assembly
13 - Battery
15 - Auto high beam relay
Exterior Lighting - Headlamps
For a detailed description of the exterior lighting system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Exterior Lighting (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Description
and Operation).
Safety Information
WARNING: The xenon headlamp system generates up to 28,000 volts. Make sure that the headlamps are
switched off before working on the system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
The following safety precautions must be followed when working on the xenon headlamp system:
1. DO NOT attempt any procedures on the xenon headlamps when the lights are switched on.
2. Handling of the xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment, e.g. gloves and
goggles. The glass part of the bulb must not be touched.
3. Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
4. Only operate the lamp in a mounted condition in the reflector.
There are comprehensive instructions on the correct procedures for xenon headlamp system repairs in the
workshop manual, refer to section 100-00 - General Information, Standard Workshop Procedures.

Visual Inspection
Headlamp(s) condition and installation Fuses
Bulb(s) condition and installation Relays
Bulb holder(s) condition and installation Wiring harness
Lighting control switch condition and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Steering column left multifunction switch condition and Battery Junction Box (BJB)
installation Central Junction Box (CJB)
Headlamp Leveling Control Module
(HLCM)
Xenon Bulb Control Modules (XBCM)
Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control
module
Air suspension control module
Local Interconnect Network (LIN)
circuits
Symptom Chart

Low beam lamp(s) Bulb failure Check the bulb condition
inoperative Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse condition
High beam lamp(s) Circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the low/high
inoperative Lighting beam circuits for open circuit
control switch Test the operation of the lighting control switch
fault Test the operation of the steering column left multifunction
Steering switch fault
column left Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
multifunction the Central Junction Box (CJB) for related DTCs and refer to
switch fault the relevant DTC index
Low beam lamp(s) Incorrect bulb Check the bulb condition and rating
dim rating Check the tourist lever is set correctly
High beam lamp(s) Tourist lever Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the low/high
dim set in the beam circuits for high resistance
wrong Test the operation of the lighting control switch
position Test the operation of the steering column left multifunction
Circuit fault switch fault
Lighting
control switch
fault
Steering
column left
multifunction
switch fault
Low beam lamp(s) Circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the headlamp
stuck on Lighting low/high beam circuits for short circuit to power
High beam lamp(s) control switch Test the operation of the lighting control switch
stuck on fault Test the operation of the steering column left multifunction
Steering switch fault
column left Test the operation of the headlamp timer
multifunction Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
switch fault the Central Junction Box (CJB) for related DTCs and refer to
Headlamp the relevant DTC index
timer function
fault
Headlamp low/high Circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the low/high
beam switching Steering beam switching circuit for short circuit to ground, short
function inoperative column left circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
multifunction Test the operation of the steering column left multifunction
switch fault switch fault
Xenon lamp Test the operation of the xenon lamp shutter mechanism
shutter Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
mechanism the Central Junction Box (CJB) for related DTCs and refer to
fault the relevant DTC index
Warning indicator(s) Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)

inoperative Lighting Test the operation of the lighting control switch
control switch Test the operation of the steering column left multifunction
fault switch fault
Steering Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the warning
column left indicator circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
multifunction power, open circuit, high resistance
switch fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Circuit fault the Instrument Cluster (IC) for related DTCs and refer to the
Instrument relevant DTC index
cluster fault
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module A (HCM) (100-00 General
Information, Description and Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module B (HCM2) (100-00 General Information,
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling
For a detailed description of the headlamp leveling system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Headlamp leveling motor(s) and linkage(s) condition and Fuses
installation Wiring harness
Lighting control switch condition and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Steering column left multifunction switch condition and Battery Junction Box (BJB)
installation Central Junction Box (CJB)
(HLCM)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control
module
Air suspension control module
circuits
Symptom Chart

Headlamp Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s) condition
leveling Leveling motor/linkage Check the headlamp leveling motor and linkage
system fault condition
inoperative Headlamp leveling circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
Headlamp short circuit to ground, headlamp leveling circuit for short circuit to ground,
alignment open circuit, high open circuit, high resistance
incorrect resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Air suspension system check the air suspension control module for related
fault DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module A (HCM) (100-00 General
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module B (HCM2) (100-00 General Information,
Exterior Lighting - Stoplamps
and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Stop lamp condition and installation Fuses
Bulbs and installation Wiring harness
Bulb holders and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Brake pedal switch condition and installation Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Anti-lock Brake System control module (ABS)
Symptom Chart

Stop Bulb failure Check the bulb(s)
lamp(s) LED lamp failure Check the LEDs
inoperative Fuse(s) blown Check the fuses
Stop lamp circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
ground, short circuit to power, stop lamp circuit for short circuit to ground, open
open circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
Brake pedal switch fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
check datalogger signal - Brake Switch (0x0416)
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
check the Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
Stop Stop lamp circuit high resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
lamp(s) stop lamp circuit for high resistance
dim
Stop Brake pedal switch fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
lamp(s) Stop lamp circuit short circuit to check datalogger signal - Brake Switch (0x0416)
stuck on power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
stop lamp circuit for short circuit to power
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
check the Engine Control Module (ECM) for related
DTC Index
00.
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Turn Signal, Cornering and Hazard Lamps
and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Turn signal indicator lamp(s) condition and installation Fuses
Cornering lamp(s) condition and installation Wiring harness
Bulbs condition and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Bulb holders condition and installation Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Lighting control switch condition and installation Central Junction Box (CJB)
Steering column left multifunction switch condition and Steering Angle Sensor Module (SASM)
installation Anti-lock Brake System control module
Hazard warning lamp switch condition and installation (ABS)
(HLCM)
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Symptom Chart

Turn signal Bulb failure Check the bulb condition
indicator / hazard Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse condition
warning lamp(s) Turn signal indicator / hazard Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
inoperative warning lamp(s) circuit short the turn signal indicator / hazard warning
circuit to ground, open lamp(s) circuits for short circuit to ground, open
circuit, high resistance circuit, high resistance
Steering column left Test the operation of the steering column left
multifunction switch fault multifunction switch
Hazard warning lamp switch Test the operation of the hazard warning lamp
fault switch
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the Central Junction Box (CJB) for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
Turn signal Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating
indicator / hazard Turn signal indicator / hazard Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
warning lamp(s) warning lamp(s) circuit high the turn signal indicator / hazard warning
dim resistance lamp(s) circuits for high resistance
fault switch
Turn signal Turn signal indicator / hazard Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
indicator / hazard warning lamp(s) circuit short the turn signal indicator / hazard warning
warning lamp(s) circuit to power lamp(s) circuits for short circuit to power
stuck on Steering column left Test the operation of the steering column left
fault switch
index
Warning Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)

indicator(s) Steering column left Test the operation of the steering column left
inoperative multifunction switch fault multifunction switch
fault switch
Warning indicator circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
circuit to ground, open the warning indicator circuit for short circuit to
circuit, high resistance ground, open circuit, high resistance
Instrument cluster fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the Instrument Cluster (IC) for
index
Cornering lamp(s) Bulb failure Check the bulb condition

Cornering lamps circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
circuit to ground, open the cornering lamps circuit for short circuit to
Lighting control switch fault Test the operation of the lighting control switch
Cornering lamp(s) Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating
dim Cornering lamps circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
resistance the cornering lamps circuit for high resistance
Cornering lamp(s) Steering column left Test the operation of the steering column left
stuck on multifunction switch fault multifunction switch
Cornering lamps circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
circuit to power the cornering lamps circuit for high resistance
index
DTC Index
00.
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Tail lamp(s) condition and installation Fuses
License lamp(s) condition and installation Relays
Bulbs and installation Wiring harness
Bulb holders and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Lighting control switch and installation Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Rain/light sensor condition and installation Central Junction Box (CJB)
Rain/light sensor control module
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) circuits
Symptom Chart

Tail / license plate lamp(s) Bulb failure Check the bulb condition
Tail / license plate Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
lamp(s) circuit short test the tail / license plate lamp(s) circuit for
circuit to ground, open short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
circuit, high resistance resistance
Lighting control switch Test the operation of the lighting control
fault switch
system, check the Central Junction Box
(CJB) for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
Tail / license plate lamp(s) Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating
dim Tail / license plate Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
lamp(s) circuit high test the tail / license plate lamp(s) circuit for
resistance high resistance
fault switch
Tail / license plate lamp(s) Tail / license plate Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
stuck on lamp(s) circuit short test the tail / license plate lamp(s) circuit for
circuit to power short circuit to power
fault switch
relevant DTC index
Tail / license plate lamp(s) Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)

inoperative when the Lighting control switch Test the operation of the lighting control
automatic headlamp switch fault switch
option is selected Autolamps circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, short test the autolamps circuit for short circuit to
circuit to power, open ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
circuit, high resistance high resistance
Rain/light sensor fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Rain/light sensor LIN test the rain/light sensor power and ground
circuit fault circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test the rain/light sensor LIN circuit for
short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance
relevant DTC index
DTC Index
00.
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Front Fog Lamps
and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Front fog lamp condition and installation Fuses
Bulb and installation Wiring harness
Bulb holder and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Adjuster screw Fog lamp warning indicator
Fog lamp switch condition and installation Fog lamp switch
Symptom Chart

Fog lamp Bulb failure Check the bulb condition
inoperative Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)
Front fog lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the front
short circuit to ground, fog lamp circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
open circuit, high power, open circuit, high resistance
resistance Test the operation of the front fog lamp switch
Front fog lamp switch
fault
Fog lamp Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating
dim Front fog lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the front
short circuit to power fog lamp circuits for short circuit to power
Front fog lamp switch Test the operation of the front fog lamp switch
fault
Fog lamp Fog lamp alignment Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
lighting incorrect adjust the front fog lamps alignment
coverage
poor
lamp Front fog lamp switch Test the operation of the front fog lamp switch
inoperative fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Instrument cluster fault check the Instrument Cluster (IC) for related DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index
DTC Index
00.
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Rear Fog Lamps
and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Rear fog lamp condition and installation Fuses
Bulb holder and installation Wiring harness
Bulb and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Rear fog lamp switch condition and installation Rear fog lamp warning indicator
Rear fog lamp switch
Symptom Chart

Rear fog Bulb failure Check the bulb condition
lamp Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)
inoperative Rear fog lamp circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
circuit to ground, open fog lamp circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
Rear fog lamp switch fault Test the operation of the rear fog lamp switch
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
the Central Junction Box (CJB) for related DTCs and refer
to the relevant DTC index
Rear fog Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating
lamp dim Rear fog lamp circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the rear
resistance fog lamp circuit for high resistance
Rear fog lamp switch fault Test the operation of the rear fog lamp switch

lamp Rear fog lamp switch fault Test the operation of the rear fog lamp switch
inoperative Instrument cluster fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
the Instrument Cluster (IC) for related DTCs and refer to
the relevant DTC index
DTC Index
00.
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Reversing Lamps
and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Reverse lamp condition and installation Fuses
Reverse lamp bulb and installation Wiring harness
Reverse lamp bulb holder and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Reverse lamp relay
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Symptom Chart

Reverse Bulb failure Check the bulb condition
lamp(s) Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse condition
inoperative Reverse lamp circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
circuit to ground, short circuit to reverse lamp circuit for short circuit to ground, short
power, open circuit, high circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Missing reverse switch signal check the Central Junction Box (CJB) for related DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC index
Reverse Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating
lamp(s) Reverse lamp circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
dim resistance reverse lamp circuit for high resistance
DTC Index
00.
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Trailer Lamps
and Operation).
NOTES:
Prior to carrying out fault diagnosis of the trailer lamp system, verify the operation of the towing vehicle
lighting system with the trailer lighting plug(s) disconnected from the vehicle socket(s).

Visual Inspection
Trailer lamp(s) condition and installation Fuses
Bulbs and installation Relays
Bulb holders and installation Stop lamp switch
Trailer socket(s), plug(s) and installation Wiring harness
Loose or corroded connector(s)
Trailer socket(s) ground circuit(s)
Trailer fuse box
Trailer relay box
Symptom Chart

Trailer stop Bulb failure Check the bulb condition
inoperative Trailer stop lamp circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
circuit to ground, open trailer stop lamp circuit for short circuit to ground,
circuit, high resistance open circuit, high resistance
Brake lamp switch fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check datalogger signal - Brake Switch
(0x0416)
Trailer stop Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating
lamp(s) dim Trailer stop lamp circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
resistance trailer stop lamp circuit for high resistance
(0x0416)
Trailer stop Trailer stop lamp circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
lamp(s) stuck on circuit to power trailer stop lamp circuit for short circuit to power
(0x0416)
Trailer fog Bulb failure Check the bulb condition

inoperative Trailer fog lamp circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
circuit to ground, open trailer fog lamp circuit for short circuit to ground,
circuit, high resistance open circuit, high resistance
Trailer fog Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating
lamp(s) dim Trailer fog lamp circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
resistance trailer fog lamp circuit for high resistance
Trailer fog Trailer fog lamp circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
lamp(s) stuck on circuit to power trailer fog lamp circuit for short circuit to power
Trailer tail / Bulb failure Check the bulb condition

license plate Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse condition
lamp(s) Trailer tail / license plate Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
inoperative lamp circuit short circuit to trailer tail / license plate lamp circuit for short
ground, open circuit, high circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
resistance
Trailer tail / Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating
license plate Trailer tail / license plate Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
lamp(s) dim lamp circuit high resistance trailer tail / license plate lamp circuit for high
resistance
Trailer tail / Trailer tail / license plate Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
license plate lamp circuit short circuit to trailer tail / license plate lamp circuit for short
lamp(s) stuck on power circuit to power
Trailer turn Bulb failure Check the bulb condition

signal lamp(s) Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse condition
inoperative Trailer turn signal lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
circuit short circuit to ground, trailer turn signal lamp circuit for short circuit to
open circuit, high resistance ground, open circuit, high resistance
Trailer turn Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating
signal lamp(s) Trailer turn signal lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
dim circuit high resistance trailer turn signal lamp circuit for high resistance
Trailer turn Trailer turn signal lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
signal lamp(s) circuit short circuit to power trailer turn signal lamp circuit for short circuit to
stuck on power
Trailer reverse Bulb failure Check the bulb condition

inoperative Trailer reverse lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
short circuit to ground, open trailer reverse lamp circuit for short circuit to
Trailer reverse Incorrect bulb rating Check the bulb condition and rating
lamp(s) dim Trailer reverse lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
high resistance trailer reverse lamp circuit for high resistance
Trailer reverse Trailer reverse lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
lamp(s) stuck on short circuit to power trailer reverse lamp circuit for short circuit to
Trailer reverse lamp relay power
fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Warning lamp(s) Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse condition

inoperative Instrument cluster fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, check the Instrument Cluster (IC) for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Trailer battery Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse condition

power Trailer battery power circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
inoperative short circuit to ground, open trailer battery power circuit for short circuit to
Trailer ignition Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse condition

power Trailer ignition power circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
inoperative short circuit to ground, open trailer ignition power circuit for short circuit to
DTC Index
00.
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Autolamps
and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Lighting control switch and installation Fuses
Rain/light sensor condition and installation Relays
Steering column right multifunction switch condition and Wiring harness
installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Rain/light sensor control module
circuits
Controller Area Network (CAN)
circuits
Symptom Chart

Side and headlamp(s) Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)
inoperative when the Lighting control switch Test the operation of the lighting control
autolamps option is fault switch
selected Steering column left Test the operation of the steering column left
Autolamps circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to ground, short test the autolamps circuit for short circuit to
circuit to power, open ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
Rain/light sensor fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LIN circuit fault system, check the Central Junction Box (CJB)
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
Lighting control switch Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)

illumination inoperative Lighting control switch Test the operation of the lighting control
fault switch
system, check the Central Junction Box (CJB)
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
DTC Index
00. REFER to:
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module A (HCM) (100-00 General
Information, Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module B (HCM2) (100-00 General
Information, Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB) (100-00, Description and
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Adjustment
General Procedures
NOTES:
With self leveling suspension, make sure the vehicle is at the standard ride height.
The headlamp setting is 1.2 % below horizontal and parallel.
NAS vehicles have vertical adjustment only.
1. Align the headlamp beam setting equipment to one

headlamp.
2. Switch the headlamps on and to dipped beam.
3. NOTE: NAS vehicles have vertical

adjustment only.
Adjust the headlamps with a Philips

screwdriver.
Rotate the adjusters A and B by an
equal amount for vertical alignment.
Rotate the adjusters A or B for
horizontal alignment.
4. To adjust the second headlamp, repeat the above

procedure.
Exterior Lighting - Front Fog Lamp Adjustment
General Procedures
Check
NOTE: With self leveling suspension, make sure the vehicle is at the standard ride height.
1. NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may

occur, but the essential information is always
correct.
The fog lamp setting is 2% below

horizontal.
Adjustment
NOTE: With self leveling suspension, make sure the vehicle is at the standard ride height.
1. NOTE: The procedure must be carried out

on both sides.
Exterior Lighting - Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Adjustment
General Procedures
1. Adjust the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.

For vehicles with petrol engine,
For additional information, refer to: Brake Pedal
Position (BPP) Switch Adjustment (303-14A
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel,
General Procedures) /
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Adjustment (303-
14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel,
General Procedures).
For vehicles with diesel engine,
For additional information, refer to: Brake Pedal
Position (BPP) Switch Adjustment (303-14A
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel,
General Procedures) /
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Adjustment (303-
14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 2.7L Diesel,
General Procedures).
Exterior Lighting - Stoplamp Switch
Removal
1. Remove the closing trim panel.
Release the clip.
2. CAUTION: The brake pedal MUST NOT be

depressed during this operation. Failure to
comply will result in damage to the stoplamp
switch.
Remove the stoplamp switch.

Rotate the switch clockwise.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
The brake pedal MUST NOT be depressed during this

operation. Failure to comply will result in damage to the
stoplamp switch.
Make sure that excessive force is not used when

installing the stoplamp switch. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the stoplamp switch.
Install the stoplamp switch.

Rotate the switch counterclockwise.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Assembly
Removal
WARNING: Vehicles fitted with Xenon headlamps, the following precautions must be observed. Failure to
comply may result in exposure to ultra violet rays, severe electric shock, burns or the risk of explosion. Ensure
the headlamps are switched off at all times. Eye and hand protection must be worn. Never switch on the lamps
or test the bulbs with the lamp holder released from the headlamp.

Specifications).

Installation).
3. Remove the headlamp assembly.

4. NOTES:
High intensity discharge lamp bulb

illustrated.
Do not disassemble further if the

If installed, leave the Silica Gel sachet in

place.
Remove the headlamp bulb.

Remove the cover.
Release the clip.
5. Remove the headlamp inner bulb.
Remove the cover.
Release the clip.
6. Remove the headlamp outer bulb.

Remove the headlamp outer retaining
clip.
Remove the cover.
Release the electrical connector.
7. Remove the side lamp bulb.
Release the bulb holder.
8. Remove the side marker bulb.

9. Remove the turn signal indicator bulb.

Remove the cover.
10. Remove the gas discharge module cover.
Remove the seal.
11. Remove the gas discharge module.

Installation
1. Install the gas discharge module.
Tighten the 2 screws.
2. Install the gas discharge module cover.

Install the seal.
Tighten the screws.
3. Install the turn signal indicator bulb.

Secure the bulb holder.
Install the cover.
4. Install the side marker bulb.

Install the bulb holder.
5. Install the side lamp bulb.

Install the bulb holder.
6. Install the headlamp outer bulb.

Install the cover.
Install the headlamp outer retaining clip.
7. CAUTION: Make sure the seal is installed correctly.
Install the headlamp inner bulb.

Install the cover.
8. CAUTION: Make sure the seal is installed correctly.
Install the headlamp bulb.

Install the cover.
9. Install the headlamp assembly.

Secure with the 2 clips.

Installation).

Specifications).
12. NOTE: The headlamp setting is 1.2 % below horizontal

and parallel.
Check the headlamp beam alignment.

Exterior Lighting - Side Turn Signal Lamp
Removal
1. Remove the side turn signal lamp.
Push the lamp forwards to release it
from the door.
Installation
Exterior Lighting - Rear Lamp Assembly
Removal
1. Open the liftgate and tailgate.
2. CAUTION: Always protect paintwork and

glass when removing exterior components.
Remove the rear lamp assembly.

3. NOTES:

Remove the wiring harness.

Release the wiring harness from the 2
clips.
Release the 6 bulb holders.
Installation
Install the 6 bulb holders.
Install the electrical connector.
Secure the wiring harness in the clips.
2. Install the rear lamp assembly.

Secure with the 2 clips.
Tighten the screws.
3. Close the tailgates.

Exterior Lighting - Front Fog Lamp
Removal
1. NOTE: Release each clip individually. Clips

may fall off if care is not taken.
Remove the front fog lamp bezel.

2. Release the front fog lamp.

3. Remove the front fog lamp.

Disconnect the front fog lamp electrical
connector.
Installation
1. Connect the front fog lamp electrical connector.
2. Install the front fog lamp.

Tighten the screws.
3. Install the front fog lamp bezel.

Secure the clips.
4. Check the fog lamp beam alignment.

Exterior Lighting - High Mounted Stoplamp
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00
Specifications).
2. CAUTIONS:
Using a selection of appropriate glazing knife

blades, carefully cut through the sealant.
Protect the surrounding paintwork to avoid

damage.
3. NOTE: Discard the component.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and
free of foreign material.
NOTE: Apply etch primer to any bare metal, apply primer

over the etch primer.
2. CAUTION: Touching the adhesive surface will impair
rebonding.
NOTES:
Apply activator to the high mounted stop lamp.
Apply an 8.0 mm wide continuous bead of sealant, 15.0

mm in, from the outer edge of the high mounted stoplamp.
3. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the component is correctly located on the

locating dowels.
Make sure that no excess sealant residue is evident.

4. For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00
Specifications).
Exterior Lighting - Adaptive Front Lighting Module
Removal
1. Passenger side: Remove the cowl side trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel
Installation).
2. Remove the CJB.

For additional information, refer to: Central Junction Box
(CJB) (418-00 Module Communications Network, Removal
and Installation).
3. Remove the adaptive front lighting module.

Remove the bolt.
Installation
1. Install the adaptive front lighting module.
2. Install the CJB.

and Installation).
3. Install the cowl side trim panel.

Installation).
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Switch
Removal
1. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding trim to

avoid damage.
NOTE: The ignition must be switched off.
Installation

Exterior Lighting - Approach Lamp Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

2. CAUTIONS:

component.

harnesses.
Torque: 0.5 Nm
Installation

Interior Lighting -
Lamp bulbs
Bulb Type Rating
Puddle lamps Capless W5W
Footwell lamps Capless W5W
Map lamps Capless W5W
Courtesy lamps Capless W5W
Interior lamps Capless W5W
Loadspace lamps Capless W5W
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting
Interior Lighting Component Location

1 - Glove compartment lamp and switch
2 - Vanity mirror lamps
3 - 1st row interior lamp and map reading lamps
4 - 2nd row interior lamp and map reading lamps
5 - Luggage compartment lamp
6 - 3rd row map lamps (if fitted)
7 - Puddle lamps
8 - Ignition switch glow ring
9 - Driver footwell lamp
10 - Passenger footwell lamp
GENERAL
The interior lighting system comprises the following interior lamps:
Interior lamps
Map reading lamps
Glove compartment lamp
Luggage compartment lamps
Vanity mirror lamps
Footwell lamps
Puddle lamps
Ignition switch illumination
Interior Bulb/Type Rating
The following table shows the bulbs used for the interior lighting system and their type and specification.
Bulb Type Rating

Front and rear interior lamps Capless 5W
Front and rear map reading lamps Capless 5W
Luggage compartment lamp Capless 5W
Vanity mirror lamps Festoon 14V 0.1A (0.14W)
Door puddle lamps Capless 5W
Lower instrument panel footwell lamps Capless 5W
Glove compartment lamp Festoon 5W
The Central Junction Box (CJB) is an integrated unit located behind the instrument panel on the passenger side of the
bulkhead. The CJB contains fuses, relays and a number of microprocessors which control the power supply and
functionality of the interior lighting system and other vehicle systems.
The interior lamps are controlled by the CJB and have two modes of operation: manual and automatic. In the manual
mode the interior lamps can be switched on and off using the momentary and latching switches adjacent to each
lamp or disabled completely using the same switches. In the automatic mode the interior lamp functionality is
controlled by the CJB on receipt of various input signals.
Input signals
The CJB receives the following inputs which affect the operation of the interior lamps:
Ignition switch
Door switches
Tailgate switch
Glove compartment lamp switch
Unlock signal
Interior lamp switches
Map reading lamp switches
Battery saver relay
Vanity mirror lamp switches
Circuit Protection
The CJB provides circuit protection for all interior lamp circuits. The following interior lamp circuits are protected by
Field Effect Transistors (FETS):

Footwell lamps
Ignition switch glow ring
Puddle lamps.
The above components are protected by FETs which can detect overloads and short circuits. The FETs respond to
heat generated by increased current flow caused by a short circuit. On a normal circuit this would cause the fuse to
blow, rendering that component and circuit inoperative. The FETs respond to the heat increase and disconnect the
supply to the affected circuit. When the fault is rectified or the FET has cooled, the FET will reset and operate the
circuit normally.
The following interior lamps circuits are protected by Fuse 1P (10A) in the CJB:
Glove compartment lamp

Map reading lamps
Vanity mirror lamps.
Interior Lamp Time-out
The interior lamps are controlled by a timer within the CJB which allows a 60 delay period for the lamps to remain on
after the ignition has been switched off or when the vehicle is unlocked. The following interior lamps are subject to
the delay period:
Interior lamps
Footwell lamps
Puddle lamps
Ignition switch glow ring.
The delay period can be adjusted to suit the driver's requirements, refer to following section for adjustment details.
The time-out delay is activated when the CJB receives one of the following signals:
The CJB receives an unlock signal from the remote handset

Ignition switch is moved from the crank position (III) or the ignition position (II) or to the auxiliary position
(I) to the off position (0).
If a second occurrence of one of the above actions occurs within the time-out period, the timer will be reset and the
delay period will start again.
The time-out delay is deactivated when the CJB receives one of the following signals:
The CJB receives a lock signal from the remote handset

Ignition switch is moved from the off position (0) or the auxiliary position (I) to the ignition position (II) or the
crank position (III).
The CJB receives a door opened signal (even if door is subsequently closed)
Interior Lamp Time-out Personalisation
The vehicles customer personalisation options allow the driver or a Land Rover or authorised dealer to adjust the
interior lamp switch-off delay period to suit their specific requirements. The default delay period of 60 seconds can
be adjusted to the following values; OFF, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 40 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds or 240
seconds.
With the vehicle stationary and the ignition switch in nay position, pressing the trip computer button on the end of
the left hand steering multifunction switch gives access to the Customer Personalisation options. Using the audio
search buttons on the steering wheel the options can be scrolled through. The options are displayed in the message
center. When the headlamp delay option is reached the settings can be changed using the audio search buttons on
the steering wheel. When the selection has been made, confirmation is performed by pressing the trip computer
button.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center,
Battery Saver
The battery saver feature provides automatic shut-off of the interior lamps after a period of 15 minutes in order to
prevent excessive drain on the battery. The lamp(s) fade off as described in the 'Interior Lighting' section that
follows.
The battery saver feature is additional to the time-out delay feature and prevents battery drain when an lamp is
accidentally left switched on, e.g. glove compartment left open.
When the ignition switch is moved from the ignition position (II) or the auxiliary position (I) to the off position (0),
the CJB starts a timer which automatically switch off all interior lamps when the 15 minute period has expired.
Once the timer has expired and the lamps are off, any one of the following will 'wake-up' the battery saver and the
interior lamps will function again. The timer will be restarted as soon as an input from one of the following is
received by the CJB:
Ignition switch position changed to auxiliary (I), ignition (II) or crank (III)
Any door, including the tailgate is opened
Unlock request is received
Front interior lamp switch is pressed.
DELIVERY MODE
Delivery mode is set at the factory on vehicles to minimise battery drain. The modes enables the switching off of
non-critical electrical components, including the interior lighting. The delivery mode feature can be cancelled by the
dealer at pre-delivery inspection using T4.
CRASH ILLUMINATION
When a crash signal is received from the restraints control module, the central junction box activates the interior
lamps once the vehicle speed has reduced to 5 km/h (3.1 mph). The lamps remain on until they are switched off
manually or the crash signal no longer exists.
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-
20B Supplemental Restraint System, Description and Operation).
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Interior lighting is lighting provided to enable the safe entry and departure from the vehicle for the driver and
passengers in low ambient light conditions, without any manual switching of the interior lamps.
NOTE: The term interior lamps also includes the door mirror approach lamps.
When the interior lighting system switches the interior lamps on, the central junction box ramps the lamps on up to
full power over period of 1.3 seconds. When the system switches the lamps off, after the time-out delay period has
expired, the central junction box fades the lamps off over a period of 2.6 seconds.
The interior lighting system will illuminate the interior lamps when one of the following events occurs:
The central junction box receives an unlock signal from the remote handset
Any door is opened including the tailgate
The ignition switch is turned from the ignition position (II) or the auxiliary position (I) to the off position (0).
The interior lighting system will turn off the interior lamps when one of the following events occurs:
Once the delay time-out timer has expired since the lamps were either activated or the last door is closed and
the vehicle is not locked
The ignition switch is in the off position (0) and an external lock (using the key or the remote handset) is
requested with all doors closed
The ignition switch is turned from the off position (0) or the auxiliary position (I) to the ignition position (II)
with all doors closed
The last door is closed while or after the vehicle is externally locked using the key or the remote handset
The last door is closed when the ignition switch is in the ignition position.
The interior lamps can be permanently switched off, preventing automatic operation when a door is opened or the
vehicle is unlocked using the remote handset. This is achieved by pressing and holding the central switch of the 1st
row interior lamp for 3 seconds. The interior lamps will remain off until the procedure is repeated.
ROW 1 AND 2 INTERIOR LAMP ASSEMBLY
Row 1 Interior Lamp

1 - Microphone
2 - Sunroof switch
3 - Map reading lamp
4 - Map reading lamp switch
5 - Interior lamp switch
7 - Waterfall lighting LED
8 - Interior lamp
10 - Map reading lamp bulb holder
11 - LED connector
12 - Interior lamp bulb holder
Row 2 Interior Lamp (Low line shown)
3 - Interior lamp switch
7 - Interior lamp bulb holder
The row 1 and 2 interior lamp assemblies are common to all models, however, their location can differ between
model specification. Both lamp assemblies have three switches; one for the main interior lamp and two for the map
reading lamps.
On low line specification vehicles, the interior lamps are located directly into apertures in the headlining with a bezel
finish surround.
On high line specification vehicles, the row 1 (front) interior lamp is located in a housing which can also contain the
sunroof switch and/or the voice activation microphones, depending on specification. The row 2 (rear) interior lamp is
also located in a housing which contains the rear heating controls.
The main interior lamps operate as part of the automatic interior lighting system. The map reading lamps only
operate manually.
Both the interior and map reading lamps use 5W capless bulbs.
The row 1 interior lamp unit also contains an LED for the waterfall lighting. Waterfall lighting is part of the lighting
control switch functionality which also controls the brightness of the switch and instrument cluster display
illumination. Waterfall lighting provides very limited illumination for the center of the fascia and the center console,
when the vehicle is being driven, without affecting the driver's night vision.
Main Interior Lamp
The main interior lamps operate independently of the ignition switch position and can be operated automatically by
one of a number of inputs to the CJB or manually by pressing the central switch on the lamp assembly. The switch is
a momentary switch which is connected directly to and completes a circuit to the CJB. This completed circuit is a
signal for the CJB to activate or deactivate the row 1 interior lamp (and also the row 2 interior lamp, if fitted). The
lamps will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time.
The interior lamps can be permanently switched off as previously described by pressing and holding the central
switch for at least 3 seconds. The 3 second completion of the circuit is sensed by the CJB which grants the
permanent off request.
Map Reading Lamps
Both row 1 and 2 interior lamp assemblies contain map reading lamps which are located adjacent to the main interior
lamp. The lamps are operated by two momentary switches on the lamp unit, which are located on either side of the
main interior lamp switch.
ROW 3 MAP READING LAMPS
The row 3 map reading lamps are located in the headlining, above the rear side windows. These map reading lamps
are only fitted to vehicles fitted with the seven seat, third row seating option.
The lamps operate independently of the ignition switch position. The lamps have a latching rocker switch which allows
the lamps to be manually switched on and off. The map reading lamps have a non-adjustable beam.
The lamps are not part of the automatic interior lighting system and therefore can only be switched on manually.
The map reading lamps use 5W capless bulbs.
GLOVE COMPARTMENT LAMP
The glove compartment lamp is located is located inside the glove compartment and contains an integral switch. The
switch is operated when the glove compartment lid is opened and closed, switching the lamp on and off.
The glove compartment lamp uses a 5W festoon bulb.
PUDDLE LAMPS
Each door is fitted with a puddle lamp which illuminates the ground below the door when the door is opened. The
puddle lamps are located in the bottom of the door trim panel on each front and rear door.
The puddle lamps are part of the automatic interior lighting functionality. Each lamp uses a 5W capless bulb.
FOOTWELL LAMPS
Two footwell lamps are located under the instrument panel, one on each side, to illuminate the footwell area. The
footwell lamps are controlled by the CJB and operate as part of the interior lighting functionality.
The footwell lamps use a 5W capless bulb.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LAMP

A luggage compartment lamp is located in a central position in the rear header trim panel at the rear of the vehicle,
above the tail gate aperture. The luggage compartment lamp is controlled by the CJB and operates as part of the
interior lighting functionality.
The luggage compartment lamp uses a 5W capless bulb.
VANITY MIRROR LAMPS
Four vanity mirror lamps are fitted, two in each vanity mirror. The lamps are illuminated when the mirror cover is
raised. The vanity mirror lamps operate independently of the ignition switch position and separately to the interior
lighting functionality, although they are subject to the battery saver feature of the CJB.
The vanity mirrors use low voltage, 1.2W festoon type bulbs.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired
1 - Fusible link 15E (40A) (Permanent 12V supply)
2 - Fuse 1P (10A)
3 - Battery saver relay (located inside CJB)
5 - Ignition switch
6 - Fusible link 11E (30A)
7 - Passenger door CDL motor
8 - Driver's door CDL motor
9 - RH rear door CDL motor
10 - LH rear door CDL motor
11 - Tailgate release motor
12 - Glove compartment lamp
13 - Luggage compartment lamp
14 - Row 1 interior lamp assembly
15 - Row 2 interior lamp assembly
16 - Row 3 RH map reading lamp
17 - Row 3 LH map reading lamp
18 - RH vanity mirror lamp
19 - LH vanity mirror lamp
20 - Ignition switch glow ring illumination
21 - RH footwell lamp
22 - LH footwell lamp
23 - RH rear puddle lamp
24 - LH rear puddle lamp
25 - RH front puddle lamp
26 - LH front puddle lamp
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting
For a detailed description of the interior lighting system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual.
REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Main interior lamp condition and installation Bulbs
Map reading lamp(s) condition and installation Fuses
Vanity mirror lamp(s) condition and installation Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Glovebox lamp condition and installation Central Junction Box (CJB)
Footwell lamp(s) condition and installation Wiring harness
Door mirror approach lamp(s) condition and installation Loose or corroded connector(s)
Puddle lamp(s) condition and installation Main interior lamp switch
Luggage compartment lamp condition and installation Map reading lamp switches
Vanity mirror lamp switches
Glove compartment lamp switch
Waterfall lighting LED
Luggage compartment lamp switch
Symptom Chart

Main interior Check that the main interior lamp is not toggled
lamp NOTE: Operate the main interior off
inoperative lamp switch for 3 seconds to toggle Check the bulb(s) condition
automatic mode on/off Check the fuse(s)
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
Main interior lamp toggled off main interior lamp circuit for short circuit to
Bulb(s) failure ground, open circuit, high resistance
Fuse(s) blown Test the operation of the main interior lamp switch
Main interior lamp circuit short
circuit to ground, open circuit,
high resistance
Main interior lamp switch fault
Waterfall LED failure Check the LED condition

lighting LED Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)
inoperative LED circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
ground, open circuit, high LED circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
resistance high resistance
Map reading Bulb(s) failure Check the bulb(s) condition

lamp(s) Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)
inoperative Map reading lamp circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
circuit to ground, open circuit, map reading lamp circuit for short circuit to
high resistance ground, open circuit, high resistance
Map reading lamp switch fault Test the operation of the map reading lamp switch
Vanity mirror Bulb failure Check the bulb condition

lamp(s) Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)
inoperative Vanity mirror lamp circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
short circuit to ground, open vanity mirror lamp circuit for short circuit to
Vanity mirror lamp switch fault Test the operation of the vanity mirror lamp switch
Glovebox lamp Bulb failure Check the bulb condition

Glovebox lamp circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
circuit to ground, open circuit, glovebox lamp circuit for short circuit to ground,
high resistance open circuit, high resistance
Glovebox lamp switch fault Test the operation of the glovebox lamp switch
Footwell lamp Bulb failure Check the bulb condition

Footwell circuit short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
ground, open circuit, high footwell circuit for short circuit to ground, open
resistance circuit, high resistance
Door mirror Bulb failure Check the bulb condition

approach Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)
lamp(s) Door mirror approach lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
inoperative circuit short circuit to ground, door mirror approach lamp circuit for short circuit
open circuit, high resistance to ground, open circuit, high resistance
Puddle lamp(s) Bulb failure Check the bulb condition

Puddle lamp circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
circuit to ground, open circuit, puddle lamp circuit for short circuit to ground,
high resistance open circuit, high resistance
Luggage Bulb failure Check the bulb condition

compartment Fuse(s) blown Check the fuse(s)
lamp Luggage compartment lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
inoperative circuit short circuit to ground, luggage compartment lamp circuit for short circuit
open circuit, high resistance to ground, open circuit, high resistance
Luggage compartment lamp Test the operation of the luggage compartment
switch fault lamp switch
DTC Index
00.
Operation).
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
DRL use the full intensity low beam headlamps which are permanently illuminated when the vehicle is being
driven. DRL are used in a number of markets and there are two systems to cover these markets.
DRL CANADIAN MARKET
DRL for this market use full intensity low beam headlamps. The side marker lamps and license plate lamps will
be on, but instrument cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
Parking brake is off on vehicles with manual transmission or PARK is not selected on vehicles with
automatic transmission
Ignition switch is in the ignition position (II)
The central junction box receives an engine running signal
The lighting control switch is in the off or side lamps position.
NOTES:
If the lighting control switch is moved to the headlamp position, DRL are deactivated and normal side lamp
and headlamp functionality is operational.
Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) (where fitted) is not available when the DRL are active.
When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch
will operate normally. The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch
will be deactivated.
When the parking brake is applied on manual transmission vehicles or the selector lever is in the PARK position
on automatic transmission vehicles, DRL are turned off. This is to reduce battery discharge during long periods
of engine idling in cold climate conditions. When the parking brake is released or the selector lever is moved
from the PARK position, normal DRL functionality is restored.
DRL DENMARK, HOLLAND, NORWAY, SWEDEN, FINLAND & POLAND
DRL for these markets use full intensity low beam headlamps. Side lamps and license plate lamps will be on, but
instrument cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
Ignition switch is in the ignition position (II)

The central junction box receives an engine running signal
The lighting control switch is in the off position.
NOTE: When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction
switch will operate normally. The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column multifunction
switch will be deactivated.
If the lighting control switch is moved to the side lamp or headlamp positions, DRL are deactivated and normal
side lamp and headlamp functionality is operational.
Module Communications Network -
Central junction box bracket retaining nuts 10 7
Central junction box bracket retaining bolts 25 18
Engine compartment ground cable nuts 25 18
Body panel ground cable nuts 25 18
Vehicles with auxiliary heating - Heater pipes to body panel nut 10 7
Wiring harness to plenum chamber nuts 4 3
Vehicles with auxiliary climate control - A/C lines to body panel nut 10 7
Battery ground cable to body nut 25 18
Battery junction box retaining bolt 6 4
Ground cables to the lower A-pillar nut 10 7
Battery positive cable to the battery junction box (BJB) nut 25 18
Module Communications Network - Communications Network
For a detailed description of the Communications Network, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in
the workshop manual.
CAUTIONS:
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor
vehicle.
Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result.

Visual Inspection
Electrical
Fuses (refer to electrical guide)
Wiring harness
Correct engagement of electrical connectors
Loose or corroded connections
Routing of fibre optic harnesses
Correct engagement of optical connectors
Correct placement of optical connectors (ring order)
Correct assembly of optical connectors (backout, etc)
Damage to fibre (chafing, abrasion, kinking, cuts, etc)
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart

MOST network fault - Touch screen MOST ring broken GO to
display displaying logo Control module on MOST network power or ground Pinpoint
circuit open circuit, high resistance Test B.
Control module on MOST network internal failure
MOST network fault - Touch screen Touch screen display power or ground circuit open GO to
display blank circuit, high resistance Pinpoint
Touch screen display internal failure Test G.
Controller Area Network (CAN)
Control Module Connections to the CAN Harness
Control modules are connected to the CAN harness either in a 'loop' or 'spur' configuration. In the 'loop' type
configuration the CAN harness loops into the module (via two connector pins) and then loops out of the module (via
another two connector pins). In the 'spur' type configuration, a harness spur is spliced into the main 'backbone' of
the CAN harness and the module is connected to the harness spur via two connector pins.
CAN Harness Architecture
For a detailed description of the CAN Networks and architecture, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the Workshop Manual.
CAN Network Integrity Tests
If a control module is suspected of non-communication, the Network Integrity test application available on the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system can be used to confirm if communication is possible between the control
modules on the vehicle and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system (via the J1962 diagnostic connector ). The
results from the test can be used to determine if either a single module or multiple modules are failing to
communicate.
CAN Terminating Modules
If the Network Integrity test indicates that one or more module on one of the CAN networks (HS or MS) are failing to
communicate, there are several checks that can be made. The first step is to identify if both of the CAN terminating
modules on each individual CAN Bus are communicating. If both CAN terminating modules for each individual CAN
Bus are communicating (identified via the Network Integrity test), then it can be confirmed that the main 'backbone'
of the CAN harness is complete. The main 'backbone' of the CAN harness consists of all the modules connected to the
CAN harness via a 'loop' configuration and also includes the two terminating modules.
Communication with both CAN terminating modules via the Network Integrity test confirms the physical integrity of
the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness (and the harness spur to the J1962 diagnostic connector). This means that
there is no requirement to check the resistance of the CAN Network. This is because the standard check for 60 ohms
across the CAN High and CAN Low lines will not provide any additional information regarding the physical condition of
the CAN harness, beyond what has already been determined from the Network Integrity test.
Non-Communication of a Terminating Module
If a Network Integrity test reveals a terminating module is failing to communicate it can indicate a break in the main
'backbone' of the CAN harness. The first checks should always be to confirm the power and ground supplies to the
non-communicating module are correct. Providing these are correct, the resistance between the CAN High and CAN
Low lines at the J1962 connector can be checked to determine the integrity of the main 'backbone' of the CAN
harness. After disconnecting the battery a reading of 120 ohms would indicate an open circuit in the main 'backbone'
of the CAN harness. Alternatively, a reading of 60 ohms would indicate that there is no open circuit fault with the
main 'backbone' of the CAN harness.
It is worth noting that even if one of the terminating modules is disconnected from the CAN harness, communications
between the modules still connected may still be possible. Therefore communication between the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system and the connected modules may also be possible.
Locating CAN Harness Open Circuits
In the case where multiple modules, including a terminating module, are failing to communicate, having first
confirmed the power and ground supplies are correct, the approximate location of the open circuit can be identified
from analysis of the Network Integrity test results and reference to the relevant CAN network circuit diagrams. For
example, if an open circuit existed in a certain position on the CAN harness, any module positioned on the Network
between the J1962 connector and the open circuit should return a response during the Network Integrity test. No
responses would be returned from any modules past the open circuit fault in the Network.
CAN Harness 'Spur' Type Configuration Circuits
If, after the initial checks (Network Integrity test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and power and
ground supplies to the module have been checked and confirmed as correct), a module that is connected to the CAN
harness via a 'spur' type configuration is suspected of not communicating, then the physical integrity of the CAN
harness 'spur' can be checked.
This is most easily undertaken by individually checking the continuity of the CAN High and CAN Low lines between
the non-communicating module connector (with the module disconnected) and the J1962 diagnostic connector.
'Lost Communications' DTCs
As well as the methods described so far in this document, which can be used to determine the location of an open
circuit in the CAN harness, 'Lost Communications' DTCs can also be used for this purpose. Lost communication DTCs
mean that a module is not receiving CAN information from another module.
For example, if a global DTC read were to be carried out, only DTCs stored in the modules that the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system could communicate with would be displayed. If there was an open circuit fault in a
certain position on the CAN harness, the modules that could display DTCs would all be prior to the open circuit on the
Network, and these modules should display 'Lost Communications' DTCs with all the modules located on the Network
past the open circuit fault.
'Bus off' DTCs
The references to bus and its condition refer to the network concerned and the modules on that network.
If a module logs a 'Bus Off' DTC, it means that the module has detected CAN transmission errors and has disabled
it's own CAN transmissions and disconnected itself from the network in an attempt to allow the rest of the network to
function. At this point the 'Bus Off' DTC is set. A common cause of 'Bus Off' DTCs can be a short circuit in the CAN
network.
Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST)

NOTE: Items 1, 2 and 8 will always be present. The remaining items are optional and/or market specific.
Item Description
1 Audio head unit
2 Touch screen display
3 Portable audio interface module
4 Television receiver
5 Rear seat entertainment module
6 DAB tuner module
7 Telephone module
8 Power amplifier
Overview
The basic guidelines are covered in the description and operation section, such as not attempting to repair fibre optic
cables, but additional precautions include:
Do not touch the exposed ends of the optical fibres (grease from skin can contaminate the fibre)
Whenever the fibre optic cable is disconnected, cover the connectors to prevent dust contamination
Do not expose the fibre optic cable to heat
Do not bend the fibre optic cable through less than a 25 mm (one inch) radius
Do not use laser pens to test the fibre optic cable's ability to pass light
MOST Diagnostic Tools
There are two dedicated tools for testing the MOST system:
MOST tester. The MOST tester is connected to the MOST network in place of a control module. It will confirm receipt
of any existing MOST signal and transmit it to the next control module on the network. Perform the following tests to
validate the operation of the MOST tester. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
MOST prism: The MOST prism is connected in the same way as the MOST tester but will simply reflect any existing
signal onward to the next control module. Using the MOST prism before or after a long run of harness may cause a
ring break as a good signal may be too weak after travelling the extended distance. Also, the MOST prism will pass
light in either direction so will not detect reversed MOST terminals elsewhere in the network. For these reasons, the
MOST tester is the preferred tool and should be used unless limited access does not permit it
MOST Ring Break Indication
A ring break in the MOST network is indicated by a loss of functionality and the touch screen will default to the logo
screen. Possible causes of ring breaks are listed in the symptom chart.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : MOST TESTER TESTS

CONDITIONS
A1: MOST TESTER BATTERY TEST
1 Set the MOST tester power switch to 'on'
Is the power LED illuminated?
Yes
Test passed. GO to A2.
No
Test failed. Install a new battery into the MOST tester. GO to A1.
A2: 2+0 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTES:
'2+0' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 0 electrical terminals.
The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does
not indicate a fault.
2 Set the connector selector switch to '2+0'
3 Set the indication switch to 'beep' or 'LED'
4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector and the 2+0 loop harness connector
5 Connect the 2+0 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
6 Operate the test switch and check the MOST tester beep/LED
Did the MOST tester emit a tone or illuminate the LED?
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+0 harness fault
A3: 2+4 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTES:
'2+4' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 4 electrical terminals.
The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does
not indicate a fault.
4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+4 connector and the 2+4 loop harness connector
5 Connect the 2+4 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+4 connector
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+4 harness fault
A4: ADAPTER HARNESS AND PRISM TEST
NOTE: The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released.
This does not indicate a fault.
4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector, the prism, and the adapter harness
connectors
5 Connect the adapter harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
6 Connect the prism to the adapter harness
Yes
Test passed
No
Test failed. MOST tester, adapter harness or prism fault
PINPOINT TEST B : MOST NETWORK INITIAL TESTS

CONDITIONS
B1: MOST NETWORK INITIAL TEST 1
NOTE: When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector
selector switch to match the socket in use
1 Switch on the audio/video system
2 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the power amplifier
4 Connect the MOST harness connector to the MOST tester
5 Check the touch screen display for indication of a MOST network fault
Has the MOST network been restored?
Yes
The disconnected control module is causing the MOST network fault. GO to Pinpoint Test E.
No
The disconnected control module is not causing MOST network fault. GO to B2.
B2: MOST NETWORK INITIAL TEST 2
1 Check the MOST tester beep/LED
Yes
MOST signal received. The MOST network fault is located downstream of the MOST tester. GO to
Pinpoint Test C.
No
MOST signal not received. The MOST network fault is located upstream of the MOST tester.
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester and reconnect it to the control
module. GO to Pinpoint Test D.
PINPOINT TEST C : MOST NETWORK DOWNSTREAM TESTS

CONDITIONS
C1: MOST NETWORK DOWNSTREAM TEST 1
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the audio head unit
2 Direct the MOST harness connector at a suitable surface and check for the presence of red light
Is red light present?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test H.
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST tester and the audio head unit. Install a
new MOST harness as necessary
PINPOINT TEST D : MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TESTS

CONDITIONS
D1: MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and identify the preceding control module on the MOST
network
Is this control module the touch screen display?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test F.
No
GO to D2.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the control module
Yes
The MOST network fault is in the control module or the MOST harness to the succeeding control
module. GO to D3.
No
The MOST network fault is located upstream of the disconnected control module. Reconnect the
MOST harness connector to the control module. GO to D1.
1 Connect the MOST harness connector to the MOST tester
Yes
The disconnected control module is causing the MOST network fault. GO to Pinpoint Test E.
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST tester and the succeeding control module.
Install a new MOST harness as necessary
PINPOINT TEST E : CONTROL MODULE TESTS

CONDITIONS
E1: CONTROL MODULE TEST 1
1 Connect the MOST tester to the relevant control module using the adapter harness
Yes
MOST signal received. Tests inconclusive. Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the control
module and confirm that the MOST network fault is still present. Repeat the tests from the
beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to E2.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the relevant control module power and ground
circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Are the power and ground circuits within specification?
Yes
GO to E3.
No
Repair the power and/or ground circuit
1 Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the control module
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new control module
PINPOINT TEST F : MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TESTS

CONDITIONS
F1: MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TEST 1
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the touch screen display
2 Direct the touch screen display at a suitable surface and check for the presence of red light
Yes
The fault is in the MOST harness between the touch screen display and the succeeding control
module. Install a new MOST harness as necessary
No
GO to F2.
Yes
GO to F3.
No
GO to F4.
1 Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the touch screen display
2 Set the ignition switch to 'off'
3 Set the ignition switch to 'on'
Has the touch screen display operation been restored?
Yes
No
Install a new touch screen display
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the audio head unit
2 Direct the audio head unit at a suitable surface and check for the presence of red light
Yes
The fault is in the MOST harness between the audio head unit and the touch screen display.
Install a new MOST harness as necessary
No
GO to Pinpoint Test H.
PINPOINT TEST G : BLANK SCREEN TESTS

CONDITIONS
G1: BLANK SCREEN TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the touch screen display power and ground
circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to G2.
No
G2: BLANK SCREEN TEST 2
1 Set the ignition switch to 'off'
2 Set the ignition switch to 'on'
Has the touch screen display operation been restored?
Yes
No
Install a new touch screen display
PINPOINT TEST H : AUDIO HEAD UNIT TESTS

CONDITIONS
H1: AUDIO HEAD UNIT TEST 1
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the audio head unit for related DTCs
Is communication possible between the manufacturer approved diagnostic system and the audio head
unit?
Yes
Refer to the relevant DTC index
No
GO to H2.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the audio head unit power and ground circuits for
open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to H3.
No
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Is the medium speed CAN bus within specification?
Yes
Install a new audio head unit
No
Repair the medium speed CAN bus circuit
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Audio Front Control Module - High Line (ACM) (100-00,
Module Communications Network - Battery Junction Box (BJB) V6 4.0L
Petrol
Removal
NOTE: The BJB is an integral component of the engine compartment wiring harness and cannot be removed
separately.
All vehicles
Specifications).

Operation).
3. Remove both inboard ignition coils.

For additional information, refer to: Ignition Coil (303-07A
Engine Ignition - V6 4.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).

Installation).
5. Remove the air cleaner assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12C
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V6 4.0L Petrol,
6. Remove the four-wheel drive control module.

For additional information, refer to: Four-Wheel Drive
(4WD) Control Module (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems,

For additional information, refer to: Battery Tray (414-01

Installation).
9. Remove the ECM cover.

Disconnect 2 electrical connectors for
access.
Disconnect the 2 ECM electrical
connectors.
10. Remove the ECM.

Remove the ECM top cover.
11. Remove the BJB cover.
Release the clip.
12. Disconnect the battery positive cable from the

BJB.
Remove the nut.
13. Remove both cowl side trim panels.

Installation).
14. Remove the CJB.

and Installation).
15. Release the CJB bracket.

Release the 3 upper wiring harness
clips.
Remove the 2 bolts.
16. Remove the CJB bracket.

Release the 3 lower wiring harness clips.
Remove the 2 nuts.
17. Release the 2 ground cables from the lower A-
pillar.
Remove the nut.
18. Disconnect the heater motor electrical

connector.
19. Release the BJB from the bracket.

Remove the bolt.
20. Remove the battery ground cable.

Remove the nut.
Release the additional ground cable.
21. Release the BJB wiring harness from the
bulkhead.
Release the grommet.
22. Raise and support the vehicle.
23. Remove both front fender splash shields.

24. Remove both headlamps.

For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Assembly
(417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
25. Passenger side: Disconnect the engine wiring harness

26. Passenger side: Disconnect the transfer case

27. LH side: Disconnect the washer jet hose.
28. LH side: Disconnect the adaptive front lighting

control module electrical connector.
Vehicles with auxiliary climate control

29. LH side: Release the A/C lines from the body panel.
Remove the nut.
All vehicles
30. LH side: Disconnect the 3 body panel electrical
connectors.
31. LH side: Release the 3 body panel ground

cables.
Remove the nut.
32. LH side: Release the 2 air suspension pipes from the wiring
harness.
33. LH side: Disconnect the ABS electrical

connector.
34. LH side: Release 3 engine compartment ground

cables.
Remove the 3 nuts.
35. LH side: Release the washer reservoir wiring

harness.
Disconnect the 2 washer jet hoses.
36. LH side: Disconnect the coolant expansion tank
level switch electrical connector.
37. LH side: Disconnect the brake pad wear sensor electrical

connector.
38. LH side: Release the wiring harness.

39. Remove the windshield wiper motor.

For additional information, refer to: Windshield Wiper Motor
40. Remove the hood pad.

Remove the 11 clips.
41. Release the hood wiring harness.

Remove the wiring harness cover.
42. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum pump

43. Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer

44. Disconnect the battery to engine compartment

wiring harness electrical connector.
45. Release the wiring harness from the plenum.

Remove the 3 nuts.
46. Disconnect the brake fluid reservoir electrical connector.
47. Disconnect the ABS module electrical

connector.
48. Remove the air suspension control module.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Control
Module (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
49. Driver side: Disconnect 2 electrical connectors

from the lower A-pillar.
50. Driver side: Release the wiring harness from

the bulkhead.
Vehicles with auxiliary heating

51. RH side: Release the heater pipes from the body panel.
Remove the nut.
All vehicles
52. RH side: Disconnect the 3 body panel electrical
connectors.
53. RH side: Release the 3 body panel ground

cables.
Remove the nut.
54. RH side: Disconnect the ABS electrical connector.
55. RH side: Release the air suspension pipe from

the wiring harness clip.
56. RH side: Release 2 engine compartment ground

cables.
Remove the 2 nuts.
57. Disconnect the ambient air temperature sensor electrical

connector.
58. Disconnect both front impact severity sensor
59. RH side: Release the wiring harness.

60. Disconnect the hood switch electrical connector.
61. Disconnect both horn electrical connectors.

62. If installed, disconnect the speed control module electrical
connector.
63. If installed, disconnect the pollution sensor electrical

connector.
Release the clip.
64. Release the hood release cable.

Release from the 3 clips.
65. Disconnect the front bumper wiring harness

66. With assistance, remove the BJB and wiring harness.

Installation
All vehicles
1. With assistance, install the BJB and wiring harness.
2. Connect the front bumper wiring harness electrical

connector.
3. Attach the hood release cable.

4. If installed, connect the pollution sensor electrical

connector.
Install the grommet.
Secure the clip.
5. If installed, connect the speed control module electrical

connector.
6. Connect the horn electrical connectors.
7. Connect the hood switch electrical connector.
8. RH side: Secure the wiring harness.

Secure the clips.
9. Connect both front impact electrical connectors.

Secure the clips.
10. RH side: Attach the air suspension pipe.
11. Connect the ambient air temperature sensor electrical

connector.
12. RH side: Attach the engine compartment ground cables.

13. RH side: Connect the ABS electrical connector.
14. RH side: Attach the body panel ground cables.

15. RH side: Connect the body panel electrical connectors.

16. RH side: Secure the heater pipes to the body panel.
All vehicles
17. Driver side: Attach the wiring harness to the bulkhead.
18. Driver side: Connect the lower A-pillar electrical connectors.
19. Install the air suspension control module.

Installation).
20. Connect the ABS module electrical connector.
21. Connect the brake fluid reservoir electrical connector.
22. Attach the wiring harness to the plenum.

Secure the clips.
23. Connect the battery to engine compartment wiring harness

24. Connect the A/C pressure transducer electrical connector.
25. Connect the brake booster vacuum pump electrical

connector.
26. Attach the hood wiring harness.

Install the cover.
Connect the washer jet hoses.
27. Install the hood pad.

Install the clips.
28. Install the windshield wiper motor.

29. LH side: Attach the wiring harness.

Secure the clips.
30. LH side: Connect the brake pad wear sensor electrical

connector.
31. LH side: Connect the coolant expansion tank level switch

32. LH side: Attach the washer reservoir wiring harness.

33. LH side: Attach the engine compartment ground cables.

Secure the clips.
34. LH side: Connect the ABS electrical connector.
35. LH side: Attach the air suspension pipes.

Secure the clips.
36. LH side: Attach the body panel ground cables.

37. LH side: Connect the body panel electrical connectors.

38. LH side: Secure the A/C lines to the body panel.
All vehicles
39. LH side: Connect the adaptive front lighting control module
40. LH side: Connect the washer jet hose.
41. Passenger side: Connect the transfer case electrical

connector.
42. Passenger side: Connect the engine wiring harness electrical

connector.
43. Install the headlamps.

44. Install the fender splash shields.

45. Attach the BJB wiring harness to the bulkhead.

46. Install the battery ground cable.

Attach the additional ground cable.
47. Secure the BJB to the bracket.

48. Connect the heater motor electrical connector.
49. Connect the ground cables to the lower A-pillar.

50. Install the CJB bracket.

Secure the clips.
51. Install the CJB.

and Installation).
52. Connect the battery positive cable to the BJB.

53. Install the BJB cover.

Secure the clip.
54. Install the ECM.

Install the ECM top cover.
55. Install the ECM cover.


Installation).
57. Install the battery tray.

58. Install the four-wheel drive control module.

59. Install the air cleaner assembly.


Installation).
61. Install the ignition coils.

For additional information, refer to: Ignition Coil (303-07A
Engine Ignition - V6 4.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).

Specifications).
63. Check the headlamp beam alignment.

For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Adjustment
(417-01 Exterior Lighting, General Procedures).
Module Communications Network - Battery Junction Box (BJB) V8 5.0L
Petrol
Removal
NOTES:
1. For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01 Battery,

Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
2. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12D

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
3. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner RH (303-12D

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9. Remove the front LH road wheel and tire.
10.
11.
12.
13. TORQUE: 10 Nm
14.
15. NOTE: RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.

16.
17. TORQUE: 12 Nm
18.
19.
20. TORQUE: 10 Nm
21.
22.
23. TORQUE: 10 Nm
24. TORQUE: 10 Nm
25. TORQUE: 10 Nm
26. TORQUE: 10 Nm
27.
28. For additional information, refer to: Brake Booster (206-07

Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
29. TORQUE: 10 Nm
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37. TORQUE: 10 Nm
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51. For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel (501-12

52. TORQUE: 10 Nm
53.
54. TORQUE: 10 Nm
55.
56.
57.
58.
Installation
Module Communications Network - Battery Junction Box (BJB) TDV6
2.7L Diesel
Removal
separately.
All vehicles
Specifications).

Operation).


Installation).

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 2.7L Diesel,



Installation).

access.
connectors.
10. Remove the ECM.

Release the clip.

BJB.
Remove the nut.

Installation).
14. Remove the CJB.

and Installation).

clips.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Remove the 2 nuts.
pillar.
Remove the nut.

connector.

Remove the bolt.

Remove the nut.
bulkhead.




27. LH side: Release the wiring harness from the
fuel fired heater.

control module electrical connector.

30. LH side: Release the A/C lines from the body panel.
Remove the nut.
All vehicles
connectors.
cables.
Remove the nut.
harness.

connector.

cables.
Remove the 3 nuts.
harness.


connector.



43. NOTE: 4.0L illustration shown, 2.7L Diesel

is similar.
Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer


is similar.
Disconnect the battery to engine compartment


is similar.
Release the wiring harness from the plenum.

Remove the 3 nuts.

connector.

Installation).


the bulkhead.

51. RH side: Release the heater pipes from the body panel.
Remove the nut.
All vehicles
connectors.

cables.
Remove the nut.
55. RH side: Release the air suspension pipe from

the wiring harness clip.

cables.
Remove the 2 nuts.

connector.


connector.

connector.
Release the clip.

is similar.
Release the hood release cable.



Installation
All vehicles

connector.


connector.
Secure the clip.

connector.

Secure the clips.

Secure the clips.

connector.



16. RH side: Secure the heater pipes to the body panel.
All vehicles

Installation).

Secure the clips.


Install the cover.

Install the clips.


Secure the clips.

connector.



Secure the clips.

Secure the clips.


37. LH side: Secure the A/C lines to the body panel.
All vehicles
38. LH side: Connect the adaptive front lighting control module
40. LH side: Attach the wiring harness to the fuel fired heater.

connector.

connector.






Secure the clips.

and Installation).


Secure the clip.



Installation).




Installation).


Specifications).
63. Check the headlamp beam alignment.

For additional information, refer to: Headlamp Adjustment
(417-01 Exterior Lighting, General Procedures).
Module Communications Network - Battery Junction Box (BJB) TDV6
3.0L Diesel
Removal
separately.


Operation).

and Installation).

Installation).

(4WD) Control Module (308-07 Four-Wheel Drive Systems,


Installation).

access.
connectors.
10. Remove the ECM.

Release the clip.

BJB.
Remove the nut.

Installation).
14. Remove the CJB.

and Installation).

clips.
Remove the 2 bolts.

Remove the 2 nuts.
pillar.
Remove the nut.

connector.

Remove the bolt.

Remove the nut.
bulkhead.




27. LH side: Release the wiring harness from the
fuel fired heater.

module electrical connector.

connectors.
cables.
Remove the nut.
harness.

connector.

cables.
Remove the 3 nuts.
harness.


connector.



42. Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer


is similar.
Disconnect the battery to engine compartment

44. Release the wiring harness from the plenum.

Remove the 3 nuts.
Release the clip.

connector.

Installation).


the bulkhead.

connectors.
cables.
Remove the nut.
53. RH side front: Release the air suspension pipe

from the wiring harness clip.

cables.
Remove the 2 nuts.

connector.


connector.

connector.
Release the clip.

is similar.
Release the hood release cable.



Installation

connector.


connector.
Secure the clip.

connector.

Secure the clips.

Secure the clips.

connector.




Installation).

Secure the clips.


Install the cover.
Install the clips.


Secure the clips.

connector.



Secure the clips.

Secure the clips.

36. LH side: Connect the adaptive front lighting module

38. LH side: Attach the wiring harness to the fuel fired heater.

connector.

connector.






Secure the clips.

and Installation).


Secure the clip.



Installation).


(4WD) Control Module (308-07 Four-Wheel Drive Systems,

Installation).

and Installation).

Module Communications Network - Central Junction Box (CJB)
Removal
1. If the central junction box (CJB) is to be replaced, connect
T4 to the vehicle.

Installation).

Release the clip.
4. Remove the CJB.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the CJB.

Secure the clip.

Installation).
4. Initiate a new CJB using T4.

Wiring Harnesses -
Electrical harness bridge bolts - 4.0 Litre 45 33
Fusebox main feed cable bolt - 4.0 Litre 10 7
Purge valve bolt - 4.4 Litre 6 4
A/C compressor mounting bracket bolts - 4.4 Litre 25 18
A/C compressor bolts - 4.4 Litre 25 18
Upper suspension arm and brake line heat shield nuts and bolts - 4.4 Litre 10 7
Road wheel nuts 140 103
Cylinder head ground connector bolt 10 7
Wiring harness support bracket bolts - 4.4 Litre 10 7
Fusebox main feed cable bolt 10 7
Radiator access panel bolts 10 7
* Starter motor solenoid nut 8 6
PAS pump mounting bracket bolts 25 18
* Caution: damage to the internal connections will result if this torque is exceeded
Wiring Harnesses - Wiring Harness
Introduction
CAUTION: Do not use any other heat shrink sleeve other than the approved glue lined heat shrink sleeve
mentioned in the repair procedure.
The purpose of this document is to promote quick and efficient minor repair to harness connectors or cables using
approved methods. Repairs may only be made to cables and connectors which have been mechanically, not
electrically damaged. It also applies where the whole extent of the damage can be clearly identified and rectified.
Care and neatness are essential requirements in making a perfect repair.
Caution:
This harness repair guide, does not approve repairs to any of the following circuits:
1. Any media orientated system transport network harnesses.

2. Supplement restraint system (SRS) firing circuits (Air bags).
3. Link lead assembles, which are unique to safety critical circuits such as anti-lock brake system (ABS) and
thermocouple circuits. An example of this is the ABS wheel speed sensors with moulded connectors.
4. 4. Screened cables, leads and wiring harness(s).
If any harness(s) with defective electrical connector terminals or wires from the above circuits are a
concern, new components must be installed.
Repair Components
CAUTION: Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply
sufficient heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat
the glue lined heat shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
The wiring harness repair components comprises:
Pre-terminated wiring harness(s) of different sizes and types

Three sizes of butt splice connectors
A selection of colored cable identification sleeves
Two sizes of glue lined heat shrink sleeves
A suitable heat source, for shrinking heat shrink sleeves will be required.
The pre-insulated diamond grip range of electrical connector terminals and in-line, butt splice connectors are the
only acceptable product for the repairs of wiring harnesses. The butt connectors not only grip the wire but also the
insulation, making a very secure joint.
If an electrical connector terminal is not available approval for the repair is NOT given and in these circumstances a
new wiring harness must be installed.
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) and Butt Splice Connectors
The pre-terminated wiring harness(s) are supplied with the insulation in one of three colors, red, blue or yellow. The
colors do not apply to any particular circuit but to the harness wire size. See the Relationship Table in the Repair
Method section.
Butt splice connectors are also supplied with red, blue or yellow coverings, which must be matched to the pre-
terminated wiring harness insulation color.
Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s)

The illustration shows:
The pre-terminated wiring harness(s) which are available via Jaguar/Land Rover authorised parts.
The part number of the pre-terminated wiring harness
The letter showing the extractor tip which must be used to remove this type of electrical connector terminal
Those electrical connector terminals which are gold
Some of the pre-terminated wiring harness(s) have seals installed to the insulation for sealed connector applications.
It is essential for prevention of moisture ingress that a sealed pre-terminated wiring harness must be used where a
sealed terminal was removed.
CAUTION: Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply
sufficient heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat
the glue lined heat shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
Two sizes of heat shrink sleeving are available. Each heat shrink sleeve contains a sealant glue. These must be used
when connecting wiring harness(s) or electrical connector terminal(s) at all times. The smaller diameter heat shrink
sleeve is to be used with the red and blue butt splice connectors and the larger diameter sleeve with the yellow butt
splice connectors.
For ease and speed, some of the pre-terminated wiring harness(s) may already have the insulation partly stripped at
the splice end. If the repair requires insulation to be stripped from the cable, refer to the Relationship Table for the
correct length of insulation to be stripped.
The Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) illustration shows the electrical connector terminal type, the part number of
the pre-terminated wiring harness and the letter of the extractor tip which must be used to extract the electrical
connector terminal from the connector housing. Additionally, those electrical connector terminal(s) which are gold are
identified, all others are therefore, tinned and not gold.
Wiring Harness Cable Identification Sleeves
A selection of colored sleeves are available for maintaining the wiring harness cable identification on the pre-
terminated wiring harness. Place the correct colored sleeve(s) over the pre-terminated wiring harness insulation as
near to the electrical connector as possible with the main wiring harness cable color nearest to the electrical
connector.
For example, if the original wiring harness cable color is pink with a black trace put the pink wiring harness cable
identification sleeve on the pre-terminated wiring harness first followed by a black sleeve, and slide both along the
wiring harness cable to the electrical connector terminal.
List of Parts
Description Part Number Quantity

Pre-Terminated Wiring Harness(s) 418-066 to 418-103 10 each
inclusive
Glue Lined Heat Shrink Pack – small diameter 418-104 25 per
pack
Glue Lined Heat Shrink Pack – larger diameter 418-105 10 per
pack
Case Assembly Comprising – carry case, lid, inner lid, base, insert, trays foam 418-106 1
spacers
Butt Splice Connector – Red 418-107 50 per
pack
Butt Splice Connector – Blue 418-108 50 per
pack
Butt Splice Connector – Yellow 418-109 20 per
pack
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Red insulation 418-112 500
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Blue insulation 418-113 500
Sleeve Identification Pack – for Yellow insulation 418-114 500
Harness repair components can be ordered from Jaguar/Land Rover authorised parts.
Repair Tools
The wiring harness repair tools comprises:
Crimping pliers
A wire cutter and insulation stripper
An electrical connector terminal extraction handle and tips
Extraction Handle and Tips
The extraction handle, in conjunction with the correct tip, is used to remove a terminal from an electrical connector.
Each tip is marked with an identification letter, A to K inclusive. Each tip has been specially designed to extract a
particular type of electrical connector terminal. The use of any other tool is not recommended and is liable to cause
damage to the electrical connector. The tip is fastened to the handle by a screw which holds the tip firmly yet allows
it to be easily replaced.
Extraction Handle and Tips

Insulation Stripper
The moving jaw has an adjuster wheel which has a series of holes in it. Turning the wheel and placing the cable in
the matching size hole will automatically adjust the jaw to the correct pressure. Note that some wiring harness(s)
may have a harder insulation and slight adjustment of the wheel may be needed to make a clean strip but exercise
care not to damage the wire.
Insulation Stripper
By pressing the outer edges of the wiring harness cable length stop together the adjuster can be slid up or down the
jaw. This decreases or increases the length by which the wiring harness cable insulation will be stripped from the
pre-terminated wiring harness or wiring harness wire. The adjuster has a position indicator to align with a graduated
scale and this sets the correct length in millimetres, of insulation to be stripped. The amount of insulation to be
stripped is shown in the Relationship Table.
The illustration shows the insulation stripper tool and a wiring harness correctly gripped in the jaws. A wire cutter is
provided on the outer side of the fixed jaw.
Cable Correctly Gripped in Stripper Blades
Crimping Pliers
Crimping Pliers
The crimping pliers have a moving jaw and a stationary jaw, with three different sized crimping enclosures. Each of
the enclosures is identified by a red, blue or yellow coloured dot which corresponds to the three colours of the pre-
terminated wiring harness(s) and butt splice connector colors.
Description Part Number Quantity

Extraction Tool Handle 418-110 1
Extraction Tip Pack consists of 2 spare screws plus 418-S111 1
Tip A 418-118 1
Tip B 418-119 1
Tip C 418-120 1
Tip D 418-121 1
Tip E 418-122 1
Tip F 418-123 1
Tip G 418-124 1
Tip H 418-125 1
Tip I 418-126 1
Tip J 418-127 1
Tip K 418-128 1
Crimping Pliers YRW500010 1
Wire Stripping Tool 418-117 1
Harness repair tools can be ordered from:
Bosch Automotive Service Solutions
Ironstone Way
Brixworth Industrial Estate
Brixworth
Northants
NN6 9UD
United Kingdom
Telephone: +44 (0) 1327 303400
Fax: +44 (0) 1327 303499
Email: css.uk@bosch-automotive.com
Repair Methods
CAUTION: Several different types and sizes of terminal may be found in a single electrical connector
housing.
It is necessary to identify:
The conductor (wire) size of the affected wiring harness

The electrical connector range from which the damaged wiring harness is to be removed
The terminal type
Use of the approved diagnostic tool will greatly assist in the quick identification of electrical connectors and faulty pin
terminal(s).
Reference can also be made to the vehicle Electrical Guides, held by Dealers, to identify wiring harness(s) and
electrical connector(s).
By using the Relationship Table, the wiring harness conductor (wire) size can be related to a suitable pre-terminated
wiring harness by the color of the insulation. Also, the correct length of insulation to be stripped from the wiring
harness lead is identified.
Relationship Table
CABLE RANGE SPLICE STRIP LENGTH

0.35 mm² to 1.50 mm² RED 6.00 to 7.00 mm
1.00 mm² to 2.50 mm² BLUE 6.00 to 7.00 mm
4.00 mm² to 6.00 mm² YELLOW 9.00 to 9.50 mm
Electrical Connector Terminal Extraction
It must be noted that some electrical connector(s) have anti-backout devices which prevent the terminals from being
removed from the electrical connector. Some examples of these are shown in following illustrations. The anti-backout
device must be released before attempting to remove the terminal from the electrical connector. Some anti-backout
devices require a special tip to release the device. Most can be released by carefully using a suitable small
screwdriver.
Various types of electrical connector have seals installed internally or externally to prevent moisture ingress. These
normally do not have to be removed but make sure that they are installed when the electrical connectors are
connected.
The illustrations show examples of each tip used on different types of electrical connector(s). There are a large
number of different types of electrical connector used on vehicles therefore only one example using each tip is
shown. Technicians experience and judgement will dictate which type of tip should be used for those electrical
connector(s) which are not shown. Care should be exercised to avoid further damage when removing the terminals
from the electrical connector.
NOTE: Examples of the extraction tips and anti-backout tips.

NOTE: The chart shows the electrical connector types, terminal pins/sockets, extractor tip and anti-backout tip.
Electrical connector terminal type Pin or socket Extractor tip Anti-backout tip
Mulitlock 040 series D A
Mulitlock 040 series B A
Mulitlock 070 series B B
Mulitlock 040 series D B
Econoseal III 070 series D B
Econoseal III 070 series B B
Econoseal III 070 series B B
Econoseal III J2 D B
Econoseal III 250 series B F
Micro-timer II 1.5mm D C
Micro-timer II 1.5mm B C
Std power timer 4.8 flat D G
Std power timer 5.8 flat B D
Std power timer 2.8 flat D D
Std power timer 4.8 flat D G
Ford 2.8 flat D E H
Mulitlock 070 series D B
Mulitlock 070 series B B
Junior power timer 2.8 flat D D
Sumitomo TS90 connector B B H
Modu IV gold plated D B
Mulitlock 040 series gold plated D A
Micro qualock D I
EECV D B
EECV D B
Kostal dia 1.50 series D J
AMP 6.3 flat D B
Junior power timer 2.8 flat D D
2.8 series D B I
Sumitomo TS90 connector D B H
Ducon 0.60 gold plated D K
AMP 6.3 flat D D
Repair Procedure
CAUTIONS:
Do not use crimping pliers, insulation strippers, butt splice connectors, heat shrink sleeves or pre-terminated
wiring harness(s) that are not supplied with by authourised Jaguar/Land Rover parts. Each part has been designed to
be used only with the other parts available from Jaguar/Land Rover parts.
Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply sufficient
heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not over heat the glue
lined heat shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
It is not correct to make more than five repair joints on the wiring harness to any electrical connector and if more
damage is found at the same electrical connector then a new wiring harness must be installed.
1. Remove the faulty terminal from the electrical connector using the extractor tool and correct tip. Make sure
that any anti-backout device is released before trying to remove the terminal.
2. CAUTION: A number of electrical connector terminals are gold plated or gold flashed. When defective,
they must be installed with a gold pre-terminated wiring harness(s). It is not always easy to identify the
female as gold but the male pins are visually easier, therefore always check both male and female terminals
to identify those which are gold. Under no circumstances are gold and tin terminals to be mixed as this will
lead to early failure of the electrical contact.
NOTE: Never use a harness lead with a smaller diameter than the original harness lead.
Select the correct size and type of pre-terminated wiring harness and butt splice connector.
3. Using the wire cutter on the stripping tool, cut the pre-terminated wiring harness and the harness cable to
the required length.
4. NOTE: See illustration: Stripping Insulation
From the Relationship Table, find the correct length of insulation to be stripped from the pre-terminated
wiring harness and set the adjustable cable length stop to the correct length. Place the pre-terminated wiring
harness in the wire stripper and remove the insulation.
5. Put the cable identification sleeve(s) on to the wiring harness with the main cable colour nearest to the
terminal.
6. During this next step do not over tighten. Place the selected butt splice connector in the crimping tool,
matching the aperture and the butt connector colours. Make sure that the window indentation in the butt
connector is resting over the guide bar on the lower jaw. Partially close the grip until the butt connector is
securely held in the aperture. This will give support to the butt connector while the pre-terminated wiring
harness is inserted into it.
7. NOTE: See illustration: Splice Correctly Located
Insert the pre-terminated wiring harness into the butt connector and make sure that the wire is against the
wire stop. Close the grip firmly, crimping the lead to the butt connector. When the handles have been
completely closed the butt connector will be freed from the tool as the handles are released. If the handles
have not been completely closed then the jaws will hold the butt connector and it cannot be removed from
the tool until the crimp is fully made by closing the handles completely.
8. Make sure that the harness cable has been squarely cut and the correct length of insulation removed. If more
than one splice is needed the butt connectors must be not be crimped to the wiring harness at the same
distance from the connector. The splices must be staggered to prevent a bulk of splices in the same area of
the wiring harness.
9. It is preferable to cover the butt splice joint with heat shrink sleeve. This is desirable not essential, except
where the electrical connector is a sealed electrical connector. Use the smaller diameter sleeve for red and
blue pre-terminated wiring harness(s) and the large diameter sleeve for the yellow pre-terminated wiring
harness(s). It is advisable to place the heat shrink over the completed joint but in some instances the sleeve
will not pass over the terminal. Check, and if required, place the correct size sleeve onto the harness cable or
pre-terminated wiring harness before crimping the butt splice to the wiring harness.
10. Place the harness cable into the butt splice with the splice window over the guide bar. Make sure that the
cable harness wire is against the stop in the butt splice, crimp the butt splice connector to the wiring harness.
11. Gently pull the harness cables each side of the butt splice to make sure that a secure joint has been made.
12. WARNING: Do not use a naked flame in areas where fuel or oil have been spilt. Clean the area of
residual oil and fuel and wait until the fuel spill has fully evaporated.
CAUTIONS:
When using a heat source make sure that it is localised and causes no damage to surrounding
materials.
Where the repair procedure indicates that a glue lined heat shrink sleeve should be applied, apply
sufficient heat to the glue lined heat shrink to melt the glue in order to provide a water tight seal. Do not
over heat the glue lined heat shrink sleeve so that the wiring harness insulation becomes damaged.
Using a suitable heat source, shrink the sleeve over the butt splice.
13. If further pre-terminated wiring harness(s) are to be installed to the same electrical connector, make sure
that the lead is cut at a different length to the previous joint. This makes sure that the splices will, where
possible, be staggered on the wiring harness and prevent a bulk of splices in one area.
14. When all of the splices have been made, fit the terminal(s) to the electrical connector, taking care that the
terminals are correctly orientated.
15. Install the wiring harness cover and secure with adhesive electrical tape. Do not cover the wiring harness
right to the electrical connector as the terminals must have a little movement and not be firmly bound to the
electrical connector or wiring harness. Make sure that the cable identification sleeve(s) are showing at the
Stripping Insulation
Splice Correctly Located

Wiring Harnesses - Wiring Harness Repair
General Procedures
1. For additional information, refer to: Wiring Harness (418-02

Wiring Harnesses, Description and Operation).
Wiring Harnesses - Engine Wiring Harness V6 4.0L Petrol
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the engine undershield.

For additional information, refer to: Engine Undershield
3. Remove the intake manifold.

For additional information, refer to: Intake Manifold (303-
01C Engine - V6 4.0L Petrol, In-vehicle Repair).

5. Remove the engine compartment fuse box

main feed cable.
Remove the bolt.

shield.
Remove the screw.
Release the 2 mounting clips.

grommet.
8. Release the engine harness from the battery

compartment.
9. Release the 2 clips on the harness protective
cover.
10. Disconnect the fuel injector electrical

connectors.
11. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor

Release the clip.
12. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature

(ECT) sensor electrical connector.
13. Disconnect the generator connector.
14. Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical

connectors.
15. Disconnect the cooling fan control electrical

connector.
16. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor
electrical conector.
Release the clip.
17. Disconnect the purge control valve (PCV)

18. Disconnect the LH breather electrical

connector.
19. Release the wiring harness bridge.

Remove the 2 bolts.
20. Disconnect the LH HO2S and release the clip.
21. Disconnect the RH HO2S and release the clip.
22. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP)

Remove the engine wiring harness.
Installation
Install the engine wiring harness.
2. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
3. Connect the HO2S electrical connectors.
4. Install the electrical harness bridge.

5. Connect the breather electrical connector.
6. Connect the PCV electrical connector.
7. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector.

Secure the clip.
8. Connect the cooling fan electrical connector.

9. Connect the KS electrical connectors.
10. Connect the generator.
11. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the MAF sensor electrical connector.

Secure the clip.
13. Connect the fuel injector electrical connectors.

14. Connect the engine wiring harness.

Install the clips on the harness protective cover.
15. Install the battery compartment side wall.

Secure the clips.
Install the battery positive cable and grommet.
16. Install the engine compartment upper heat shield.

Secure the clips.
Tighten the screw.
17. Install the fusebox main feed cable.

18. Install the battery.

19. Install the intake manifold.

For additional information, refer to: Intake Manifold (303-
01C Engine - V6 4.0L Petrol, In-vehicle Repair).
20. Install the engine undershield.


Specifications).
Wiring Harnesses - Engine Wiring Harness V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles

stands.
2. For additional information, refer to: Specifications (414-00,

Specifications).
3. For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Battery Tray

Installation).
4. For additional information, refer to: Battery Tray (414-01

5. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe

LH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L
6. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe

RH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V8 5.0L
7. For additional information, refer to: Plenum Chamber (412-

8. For additional information, refer to: Exhaust System (309-

00D Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
9. NOTE: Remove and discard the gasket.
TORQUE: 48 Nm
10. NOTE: Remove and discard the gasket.
TORQUE: 48 Nm
11.
12. WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted

tobacco or open flame of any type when
working on or near any fuel related
components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping

fuel.

similar.
14.
15.
16. NOTE: Make sure the electrical

connector is correctly secured.
Vehicles without supercharger
17.
Vehicles with supercharger

18.
All vehicles
19.
20.
21. TORQUE: 10 Nm
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27. TORQUE: 10 Nm
28.
29.
30. TORQUE: 6 Nm
31.
32. TORQUE: 10 Nm

similar.
TORQUE: 47 Nm Nm

similar.
TORQUE: 47 Nm Nm
35.
36.
37.
38.
39. TORQUE: 48 Nm
40.
41.
42.
43.
44. TORQUE: 10 Nm
45. TORQUE: 10 Nm
46. TORQUE: 10 Nm
47. TORQUE: 10 Nm
48.

similar.
Installation
1. NOTE: After the engine harness has been installed,

test using Land Rover/ Jaguar approved diagnostic
equipment.

Wiring Harnesses - Engine Wiring Harness TDV6 2.7L Diesel
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the crankcase vent oil separator.

For additional information, refer to: Crankcase Vent Oil
Separator (303-08, Removal and Installation).

4. NOTE: Right hand drive shown, for Left

hand drive reverse the sequence.
Disconnect the three engine harness electrical

connectors.
5. Release the engine wiring harness from the

bulkhead.
6. NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand

similar.
Disconnect the knock sensor (KS) electrical

connectors.
7. NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connectors.

similar.
Release the engine wiring harness from the fuel

supply manifolds.
9. Disconnect the RH EGR valve electrical

connector.

timing cover.
11. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature

(ECT) sensor electrical connector.
Release the engine wiring harness from
the engine lifting bracket.
timing cover.
13. Remove the LH exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve.

For additional information, refer to: Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH - Vehicles Without: Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF) (303-08A Engine Emission Control -
14. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor

15. Remove the power steering pump.

For additional information, refer to: Power Steering Pump -
2.7L Diesel (211-02, Removal and Installation).
16. Remove the power steering pump mounting

bracket.
Remove the three retaining bolts.
17. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical
connector.
18. Disconnect the turbocharger electrical

connector.
19. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor

20. Remove the engine undershield.

21. Disconnect the engine oil temperature sensor

Release the engine wiring harness from
the oil pan.
22. Disconnect the starter motor solenoid electrical
connector.
23. Disconnect the generator electrical connector.
24. Remove the engine wiring harness.
Installation
1. Install the engine wiring harness.
2. Connect the generator electrical connector.
3. Connect the starter motor solenoid electrical connector.

4. Connect the engine oil temperature sensor electrical

connector.
Attach the engine wiring harness to the oil pan.
5. Install the engine undershield.

6. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
7. Connect the turbocharger electrical connector.
8. Connect the A/C compressor electrical connector.

9. Install the power steering pump mounting bracket.
Tighten the retaining bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
10. Install the power steering pump.

For additional information, refer to: Power Steering Pump -
2.7L Diesel (211-02, Removal and Installation).
11. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector.
12. Install the LH EGR valve.

For additional information, refer to: Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH - Vehicles Without: Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF) (303-08A Engine Emission Control -
13. Attach the engine wiring harness to the timing cover.
14. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector.

Attach the engine wiring harness to the engine lifting
bracket.
15. Attach the engine wiring harness to the timing cover.
16. Connect the RH EGR valve electrical connector.
17. Attach the engine wiring harness to the fuel supply

manifolds.
18. Connect the fuel injector electrical connectors.
19. Connect the KS electrical connectors.
20. Attach the engine wiring harness to the bulkhead.
21. Connect the three engine wiring harness electrical

connectors.
22. Install the battery.

23. Install the crankcase vent oil separator.

For additional information, refer to: Crankcase Vent Oil
Separator (303-08, Removal and Installation).

Specifications).
Wiring Harnesses - Engine Wiring Harness TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:
RHD shown, LHD is similar.

2. For additional information, refer to: Engine Cover - TDV6

3. For additional information, refer to: Exhaust System (309-

00B Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
4. For additional information, refer to: Starter Motor (303-06B

Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
5. For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02B

Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
6. For additional information, refer to: Exhaust Gas

Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH (303-08B Engine Emission
Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
7. For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C)

Compressor (412-03C Air Conditioning - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
8. For additional information, refer to: Power Steering Pump -

TDV6 3.0L Diesel (211-02 Power Steering, Removal and
Installation).

stands.
10. Remove the front road wheels and tires.

TORQUE: 140 Nm
11. TORQUE: 9 Nm
12. TORQUE: 9 Nm
13. TORQUE: 9 Nm
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22. NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.
23. NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.
24.
25.
26. TORQUE: 25 Nm
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35. TORQUE: 10 Nm

NOTE: Note the position of the wiring

harnesses to aid installation.
Installation
Wiring Harnesses - Liftgate Wiring Harness
Removal

Specifications).
3. Remove the liftgate lower trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Trim Panel
Installation).
4. Remove the liftgate upper trim panel.

5. Remove the liftgate side trim panel.

Repeat the above procedure for the
other side.
6. Remove the rear headliner trim panel.

7. Release the liftgate wiring harness.

8. Disconnect the high mounted stoplamp
9. Disconnect both heated rear window electrical

connectors.
10. Disconnect the license plate lamp electrical

connector.
11. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical

connector.
12. If installed, disconnect the diversity amplifier
electrical connector and antenna cable.
13. If installed, disconnect the navigation system

traffic amplifier electrical connector and
antenna cable.
14. Remove the liftgate wiring harness.

Installation
1. Install the liftgate wiring harness.
Secure the clips.
2. If installed, connect the navigation system traffic amplifier

electrical connector and antenna cable.
3. If installed, connect the diversity amplifier electrical

connector and antenna cable.
4. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector.
5. Connect the license plate lamp electrical connector.
6. Connect the heated rear window electrical connectors.
7. Connect the high mounted stoplamp electrical connector.
8. Attach the liftgate wiring harness.

9. Install the rear headliner trim panel.

10. Install the liftgate side trim panel.

Repeat the above procedure for the other side.
11. Install the liftgate upper trim panel.

12. Install the liftgate lower trim panel.

Installation).

Specifications).
Wiring Harnesses - Frame Wiring Harness Vehicles Built From: 01/2007
Removal
All vehicles
1. NOTE: All of the clips on the harness can be access with

the integrated body installed to the frame. The graphic is to give
guidance of the routing of the harness.
The frame wiring harness routing.
2. Open the upper liftgate and lower tailgate.
4. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported

only by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
5. Remove the wheels and tires.

7. Remove the LH front wheel arch liner.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-
02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
8. Remove the windshield washer reservoir filler neck.

9. LH side behind the front headlamp: Disconnect the
frame wiring harness electrical connector.
10. LH side behind the front panel: Disconnect the 2 electrical

connectors from the frame wiring harness.
11. LH side behind headlamp: Release the 2 clips from

the inner fender.
12. LH side behind headlamp: Reposition the frame wiring harness

down to the inner fender.
13. LH side front: Release the 2 windshield washer jet

hoses.
14. Remove the frame wiring harness carrier.
Remove and discard the 4 tie straps.
15. LH side front: Disconnect the height sensor

16. Disconnect the ground cable from the wheel arch

earth stud.
17. LH front side: Release the frame wiring harness
from the frame.
18. Remove the air suspension reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Reservoir
(204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and Installation).
19. LH side: Release air suspension line from the frame

wiring harness.
20. LH side: Release the frame wiring harness from the

frame.
21. Remove the air suspension silencer.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Muffler (204-
05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and Installation).
All except vehicles with diesel engine

22. Remove the evaporative emission canister.
For additional information, refer to: Evaporative Emission
Canister (303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 4.0L, Removal and
Installation).
All vehicles
23. Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors from the air
suspension solenoid.
24. Release the air suspension compressor valve block.

Release the 3 grommets.
25. LH side: Release air suspension line from the frame

wiring harness.
26. CAUTION: Use a wrench on the hexagon

provided to prevent the ball joint rotating.
Release both stabilizer bar links.

Remove the 2 nuts.
27. Release the stabilizer bar.

Remove the 4 bolts.
28. Release the frame wiring harness from the parking

brake cable.
29. Vehicles with differential locking motor: Disconnect

the 2 electrical connectors.
Release the 2 wiring harness clips.
30. Release the parking brake emergency release cable.

31. LH side: Release the frame wiring harness.

Remove the bolt.
32. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear LH
height sensor.
33. LH side rear: Disconnect the air suspension rear

valve block electrical connector.
Release the clip.
34. Release the valve block from its mounting bracket.

Release the 3 grommets.
35. Reposition the frame wiring harness to above the frame.
36. LH side rear: Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors

from the frame wiring harness.
Release the 2 electrical connectors.
37. Disconnect the LH rear ABS sensor.

Release the clip.
38. Release the parking brake actuator mount bracket.
39. Spare wheel aperture: Release the frame wiring

harness.
40. RH side rear: Disconnect the ABS sensor electrical
connector.
41. RH side rear: Disconnect the low brake pad

warning lamp electrical connector.
42. Disconnect the electronic parking brake actuator

Release the clip.
43. Release the RH parking brake cable.
Remove the bolt.
Release the clip.
44. Release the fuel line support bracket.

Remove the inner section of the fuel line
support bracket.
Release the clip.
45. Release the frame wiring harness from the parking

brake cable.
46. RH side: Release the frame wiring harness from the frame.
47. Remove the transmission under shield.

Remove the 6 bolts.
48. Remove the fuel tank heat shield.
Remove the 3 bolts and 2 nuts.
49. Release the parking brake emergency release cable.

Release the 4 clips
50. WARNING: Secure the component to the

transmission jack.
CAUTION: Note the rear bolt is fitted with 2

washers.
Using a transmission jack, lower the fuel tank.

Remove the 6 bolts.
51. Disconnect the fuel pump module electrical

connector.
52. Release the frame wiring harness from the fuel
tank.
53. Rear of fuel tank: Release the frame wiring harness

from the top of the frame crossmember.
Release the clip.
54. Secure the fuel tank.
55. Release the exhaust heat shield for access.

56. Release the brake pipes.
57. With assistance, remove the frame wiring harness.

Position both ends of the frame wiring
harness to the LH center body mount.
Route the front end of the frame wiring
harness between the body and center
crossmember.
With assistance, remove the frame wiring
harness.
Installation
1. Check the old frame wiring harness against the new frame
wiring harness to make sure that they are the same.
2. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed correctly.
With assistance, install the frame wiring harness.

Route all of the frame wiring harness electrical
connectors and clips into position.
3. Secure the brake pipes.
4. Secure the exhaust heat shield.

5. WARNING: Secure the component to the transmission jack.
CAUTION: Note the rear bolt is fitted with 2 washers.
Using a transmission jack, lower the fuel tank.

Remove the 4 bolts.
6. Connect the fuel pump module electrical connector.
7. RH side: Secure the frame wiring harness to the fuel tank.
8. Rear of fuel tank: Secure the frame wiring harness to the top of
the frame crossmember.
9. CAUTION: Note the rear bolt is fitted with 2 washers.
Install the fuel tank.

10. Secure the parking brake emergency release cable.

11. Install the fuel tank heat shield.

12. Install the transmission under shield.

13. RH side: Secure the frame wiring harness to the frame.
14. Secure the frame wiring harness to the RH parking brake cable.
15. Secure the RH parking brake cable bracket.

Install the inner section of the parking brake cable
bracket.
16. Secure the RH parking brake cable.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the new bolts to 22 Nm (16 lb.ft).
17. Connect the electronic parking brake actuator electrical

connector.
Secure the clip.
18. RH side rear: Connect the low brake pad warning lamp electrical
connector.
Secure the 2 clips.
19. RH side rear: Connect the ABS sensor electrical connector.

Secure the 2 clips.
20. Spare wheel aperture: Secure the frame wiring harness.

Secure the 5 clips.
21. Secure the parking brake actuator mount bracket.

22. Connect the LH rear ABS sensor.

Secure the clip.
23. LH side rear: Connect the 2 electrical connectors to the frame

wiring harness.
Secure the electrical connectors.
24. Reposition the rear valve block electrical connector.
25. Reposition the RH side rear height sensor electrical connector.
26. LH side rear: Connect the air suspension valve block electrical
connector.
Secure the clip.
27. Connect the electrical connector to the rear LH height sensor.
Secure the clip.
28. Secure the valve block to its mounting.
29. LH side: Secure the frame wiring harness.

30. Secure the parking brake emergency release cable.

Secure the clips.
31. Secure the frame wiring harness to the LH parking brake cable.
32. Attach both stabilizer bar links.

33. Secure the stabilizer bar.

34. Install the rear wheels and tires.
35. Secure the air suspension compressor valve block.
36. Connect the electrical connectors to the air suspension solenoid.
37. Install the air suspension silencer.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Muffler (204-
05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and Installation).
38. LH side: Secure the air suspension line to the frame wiring
harness.
39. LH side: Secure the frame wiring harness to the frame.

Secure the 6 clips.
40. Install the air suspension reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Reservoir
(204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Removal and Installation).
41. Connect the ground cable to the wheel arch earth stud.
Secure the 2 clips.
42. LH side front: Connect the height sensor electrical connector.
43. Install the frame wiring harness carrier.

Install new tie straps.
Secure to the clips.
44. LH side front: Secure the 2 windshield washer jet hoses.
45. Reposition the frame wiring harness through the inner fender.
46. LH side behind headlamp: Secure the 2 clips to the inner wing.
47. LH side behind the front panel: Connect the 2 electrical

connectors to the frame wiring harness.
48. LH side behind the front headlamp: Connect the frame wiring
harness electrical connector.
49. Install the windshield washer reservoir filler neck.
50. Install the LH front wheel arch liner.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-
02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).

Wiring Harnesses - Front Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness - Front
Section
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that the camera overlay wiring harness is not bent excessively during this procedure.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the harness.
1. Remove the central junction box (CJB). For additional

information, refer to: Central Junction Box (CJB) (418-00
Module Communications Network, Removal and
Installation).
2. NOTE: The left hand front camera wiring

harness connectors are coloured magenta, the
right hand front camera wiring harness
connectors are coloured blue.
3. Remove the battery. For additional information, refer to:

Battery (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal
and Installation).

grommet.
5. Release the engine compartment fuse box.

Remove the bolt.
6. Remove the brake master cylinder cover.
7. Remove the air cleaner.For additional information, refer to:

Air Cleaner (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering -
8. Release the hood seal.
9. Release the wiring harness carrier.

Remove the 4 nuts.
10. Release the 3 clips.

harness connectors are coloured white, the
connectors are coloured green.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the camera

overlay wiring harness is not bent excessively
during this procedure. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the
harness.
Install the camera overlay wiring harness

always correct.
Remove the connector from the camera overlay

wiring harness.
Remove the locking tab.
Carefully release the clip.
Apply suitable tape to protect the end
of the camera overlay wiring harness.
3. Using suitable tape, secure a suitable rod to

the camera overlay wiring harness.
4. Carefully feed the camera overlay wiring
harness under the bracket.

harness through the wiring harness carrier.

harness through the wiring harness carrier.
7. Using a suitable tool, make a hole in grommet

in the position shown.
8. With the aid of another technician, carefully
feed the camera overlay wiring harness
through the grommet.

always correct.
Install the connector to the camera overlay

wiring harness.
Remove the protective tape.
Secure the locking tab.

connectors are coloured green.

12. CAUTION: Make sure that excessive force is not used
when installing the tie straps to the wiring harness. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
harness.
Using suitable tie straps, secure the camera overlay wiring

harness to the main body wiring harness.
13. Secure the 3 clips.
14. Secure the wiring harness carrier.

Tighten the 4 nuts.
15. Secure the engine compartment fuse box.

Tighten the bolt.
16. Install the battery compartment side wall.
Secure the 4 clips.
Install the battery positive cable and
grommet.
17. Install the air cleaner. For additional information, refer to:
Air Cleaner (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering -
18. Install the brake master cylinder cover.
19. Secure the hood seal.
20. Install the CJB. For additional information, refer to: Central
Junction Box (CJB) (418-00 Module Communications
Network, Removal and Installation).
21. Install the battery. For additional information, refer to:

Battery (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal
and Installation).
Wiring Harnesses - Front Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness - Main
Body Section
Removal
1. Remove the LH front seat. For additional information, refer

to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the central junction box (CJB). For additional

information, refer to: Central Junction Box (CJB) (418-00
Module Communications Network, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the LH scuff plate trim panel. For additional

information, refer to: Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05
Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
4. Release the wiring harness cover.



connectors are coloured black.
Installation

harness.


harness.
Feed the camera overlay wiring harness along the main

wiring harness to the camera module.
Using suitable tie straps, secure the camera overlay
wiring harness to the main body wiring harness.

connectors are coloured black.
5. Install the wiring harness cover.

Secure the 3 clips.
6. Install the LH scuff plate trim panel. For additional
7. Install the CJB. For additional information, refer to: Central

Junction Box (CJB) (418-00 Module Communications
8. Install the LH front seat. For additional information, refer

Wiring Harnesses - Left Hand Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness
Removal

Release the clip.
2. Remove the cowl side trim panel. For additional information,

refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and



6. NOTE: Door shown removed for clarity.
Release the gaiter.

7. Remove the wiring harness cover.

Release the electrical connector bracket.

Installation

harness.
Install the camera overlay wiring harness.
2. Connect the electrical connector.

Secure the 4 clips.
4. Install the gaiter.
5. Secure the bracket.

Secure the 6 clips.
6. CAUTION: Make sure that any tie straps used are not
tightened excessively on the camera wiring harness and link
leads, Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the harness.
Feed the camera overlay wiring harness along the main

wiring harness to the parking aid camera module.

Secure the 3 clips.

11. Install the cowl side trim panel. For additional information,
refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
Wiring Harnesses - Right Hand Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness
Removal

2. Repeat procedure for the other side.
3. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer

to: Floor Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,


8. Remove the RH cowl side trim panel. For additional

information, refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel (501-05 Interior
9. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. For additional

information, refer to: Accelerator Pedal (310-02A
Acceleration Control - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
10. Remove the dynamic response module.

Remove the 2 bolts.

Release the clip.

Reposition the floor covering for access.
Using a suitable tool, carefully cut
though the wiring harness cover
retaining tape.
14. NOTES:
Door shown removed for clarity.
Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Release the gaiter.

similar.


similar.

Installation

harness.

vehicle.
Carefully feed the camera overlay wiring harness along the

main body wiring harness from the camera module to the
RH A-pillar.

similar.

similar.
Install the wiring harness cover.

Secure the 4 clips.
similar.
Install the gaiter.

similar.
Secure the bracket.

Secure the 6 clips.
7. Install the dynamic response module.

Connect the 2 electrical connecotrs.
Tighten the 2 bolts.
8. Secure the wiring harness cover.
Secure the 12 clips.
Re-apply suitable tape to the wiring
harness cover in the positions
previously secured.
Install the floor covering.

Secure the 3 clips.
Secure the clip.
12. Install the accelerator pedal assembly. For additional

information, refer to: Accelerator Pedal (310-02A
Acceleration Control - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
13. Install the RH cowl side trim panel. For additional

information, refer to: Cowl Side Trim Panel (501-05 Interior
14. Install the LH wiring harness cover.

Secure the 3 clips.

18. Install the floor console. For additional information, refer to:
Floor Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,


Wiring Harnesses - Rear Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness
Removal
1. Remove the LH D-pillar trim panel.

Installation).

4. Remove the LH front seat.

5. Remove the LH scuff plate trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Installation).

Installation

harness.

2. Feed the camera overlay wiring harness along the main
wiring harness to the parking aid camera module.

harness.

harness to the main body wiring harness.
5. Install the LH D-pillar upper trim panel.

Installation).

Secure the 7 clips.
8. Secure the wiring harness cover.

Secure the 3 clips.
9. Install the LH scuff plate trim panel.

Installation).
10. Install the LH front seat.

Wiring Harnesses - Parking Aid Camera Signal Filter
Removal
NOTE: Identify the correct parking aid camera wiring harness:
The LH front camera has white connectors.

The rear camera has blue connectors.
The LH side view camera has green connectors.
The RH front camera has black connectors.
The RH side view camera has magenta connectors.
1. Re-position the LH front seat to the full forward and full

height position.
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the camera wiring harness

and link leads are not bent excessively during
these procedures. Failure to follow this
harness.
Make sure that any tie straps used are

not tightened excessively on the camera wiring
harness and link leads, Failure to follow this
harness.
Take care when handling the wiring harness

and link lead.
3. NOTES:
RH front camera shown, other parking aid

cameras similar.
LH front seat shown removed for clarity.
Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector.

Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the dual lock tape

is adhered to the side of the parking aid
camera signal filter that has writing on.
Secure one piece of the dual lock tape to the

parking aid camera signal filter.
Remove the backing strip from the dual
lock tape.
2. CAUTION: Do not remove the backing

strip from the second piece of dual lock tape.
Secure another piece of the dual lock tape to

the parking aid camera signal filter.
3. NOTE: RH front camera, LH front camera

and rear camera only.
Install the link lead to the parking aid camera

signal filter.
4. NOTES:
RH front camera, LH front camera and

rear camera only.
RH front camera shown, LH front camera

and rear camera similar.
Connect the parking aid camera signal filter

assembly to the camera wiring harness.
5. NOTES:
RH front camera, LH front camera and

rear camera only.
RH front camera shown, LH front camera
and rear camera similar.
Connect the camera wiring harness link lead to

the module.
6. NOTES:
RH front camera only
Make sure that the parking aid camera

signal filter is in the correct position before
securing the dual lock tape to the seat base.
Secure the parking aid camera signal filter to

the seat base in the position shown.
lock tape.
7. NOTES:
LH front camera only


lock tape.
8. NOTES:
Rear camera only


lock tape.
9. NOTE: RH side view camera and LH side

view camera only
Install the longer link lead to the parking aid

camera signal filter.
10. NOTES:
RH side view camera and LH side view

camera only
RH side view camera shown, LH side view

camera similar.
Install the shorter link lead to the camera

wiring harness.
11. NOTES:
RH side view camera only.

securing the dual lock tape to the vehicle.
Install the parking aid camera signal filter

assembly.
Connect the parking aid camera signal
filter assembly to the module.
filter assembly to the camera wiring
harness link lead.
lock tape.
Secure the parking aid camera signal
filter to the vehicle in the position
shown.
12. NOTE: RH side view camera only.
Using a suitable tie strap, secure the camera

wiring harness to the seat base in the position
shown.
13. NOTES:
LH side view camera only.

securing the dual lock tape to the vehicle.
Install the parking aid camera signal filter

assembly.
filter assembly to the module.
filter assembly to the camera wiring
harness link lead.
lock tape.
Secure the parking aid camera signal
filter to the vehicle in the position
shown.
14. NOTE: LH side view camera only.
Using a suitable tie strap, secure the camera

wiring harness to the seat base in the position
shown.
15. NOTE: RH side view camera and LH side

view camera only
Make sure that the wiring harness is correctly

routed and does not contact against the
modules in the positions shown.
Wiring Harnesses - Front Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness – Bumper
Section
Removal

stands.
2. Remove the front bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-
19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
3. NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the

essential information is always correct.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the camera overlay

wiring harness is not bent excessively during this
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the harness.
Install the wiring harness

2. NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the

essential information is always correct.

3. CAUTION: Make sure that excessive force is not used when
installing the tie straps to the wiring harness. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.

harness to the bumper wiring harness.
4. Install the front bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-
19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
Wiring Harnesses - Rear Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness – Liftgate
Section
Removal


Installation).


7. Release the liftgate conduit.
Installation

harness.

always correct.
Remove the electrical connector from the

camera overlay wiring harness.
Align the camera wiring harness tang
with the electrical connector clip.
of the camera overlay wiring harness.


harness though the conduit.
always correct.
Install the connector to the camera overlay

wiring harness.
Align the camera wiring harness tang
with the electrical connector clip.

vehicle.

harness to the tailgate harness.
9. Secure the liftgate conduit.

Secure the 5 clips.

Secure the 4 clips.

Installation).

Secure the 7 clips.
Wiring Harnesses - Side Parking Aid Camera Wiring Harness – Front
Door Section
Removal
Release the clip.
2. Remove the cowl side trim panel.

Installation).
3. NOTE: RHD shown, LHD is similar.
If equipped, remove the dynamic stability

control module.
Remove the 2 bolts.
4. NOTE: Door shown removed for clarity.
Release the gaiter.

5. Remove the wiring harness cover.


Installation).
Installation
1. Release the grommet.
2. Using a suitable tool, make a hole in grommet

in the position shown.

harness.

always correct.
Remove the connector from the camera wiring

harness.
Remove the locking tab.
of the camera wiring harness.

6. Carefully feed the wiring harness through the
grommet.

harness through the gaiter.

always correct.
Install the connector to the camera wiring

harness.
Secure the locking tab.

Secure the 4 clips.
11. Install the gaiter.
12. Secure the bracket.

Secure the 6 clips.
13. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that excessive force is not used when

installing the tie straps to the wiring harness. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that the camera overlay harness is correctly

routed and clear of the front door window regulator and
motor. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the vehicle.
Using suitable tie straps, secure the camera overlay harness

to the door wiring harness.
14. Secure the grommet.
15. NOTE: RHD shown, LHD is similar.
If equipped, install the dynamic response

control module.
Tighten the 2 bolts.
Connect the 2 electrical connectors.

Installation).

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.

Installation).
Wiring Harnesses - Suspension Air Supply Unit Wiring Harness
Removal
WARNING: Steps 1 and 2 must be carried out within 10 minutes of each other. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing the components, make sure the area around the joint faces and connections are clean.
Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
NOTE: New air suspension components are supplied with new Voss connectors tightened to the correct torque. Therefore, do not
install new Voss connectors if a new component is being installed.
1. CAUTION: Make sure the ignition switch is turned off, the park brake is on and
the selector lever is in park.
Open the front door.
2. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always

support the vehicle on safety stands.
Raise and support the vehicle. Make sure at least one of the wheels is off the ground.
3.
4. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
5. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
6. NOTE: Note the orientation of the component prior to removal.
7.
Installation
1. Torque: 10 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
Make
sure that
these
components
are
installed to
the noted
removal
position.
Make
sure that
the self
tapping
bolts
remains
aligned
during the
tightening
process.
Torque: 10
Nm
3.
4.
5. Torque: 9 Nm
Anti-Theft - Active -
RH Hood latch Torx bolts 10 7
Security antenna 6 4
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft - Active
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - Horns
2 - Hood ajar switch
3 - Battery backed-up sounder and inclination sensor (if fitted)
4 - Passive sounder (if fitted)
5 - Interior motion sensor
6 - Driver door module
7 - Driver door latch
8 - Rear door module
9 - Rear door latch
10 - Keyless vehicle module
11 - Upper tailgate latch
12 - Rear door latch
14 - Passenger door latch
15 - Passenger door module
OVERVIEW
The active anti-theft system is available with three different levels of vehicle protection depending on market
specification:
Hinged panel sensing

Hinged panel and intrusion sensing
Hinged panel, intrusion and inclination sensing.
The system is controlled by software in the CJB (central junction box) which indicates an alarm trigger condition:
Visually, using the direction indicators.

Audibly, using the vehicle horn and, depending on market specification, either a passive or active sounder.
The passive sounder is an anti-theft disc horn and the active sounder is a BBUS (battery backed-up sounder).
The BBUS is an intelligent unit which communicates to the CJB over a LIN (local interconnect network) connection.
The BBUS is fitted with an inclination sensor.
Monitoring of the hinged panels is carried out using switches located in each door latch assembly, the hood latch
assembly, and the tailgate latch assembly. The condition of the switches is monitored by the CJB.
Monitoring of front door lock status is carried out using switches located in the door latch mechanisms. The condition
of the switches is monitored by the front door modules and transmitted to the CJB over the medium-speed CAN
(controller area network).
Monitoring of the cabin interior is carried out using an interior motion sensor, which comprises an ultrasonic sound
wave sensor to determine if there is movement within the cabin. Information from the interior motion sensor is
communicated to the CJB over a LIN connection.
When armed, the active anti-theft system can be triggered in one of the following ways:
A door ajar switch indicates a door is open.

The hood or upper tailgate ajar switches indicate that either is open.
Either front door latch mechanism indicates a door has been unlocked.
The emergency key blade is used to open the LH (left-hand) front door.
The CJB is disconnected (this may result in only a partial trigger).
An attempt is made to start the engine without a valid signal from the Smart Key.
The BBUS is disconnected (partial trigger only).
The vehicle battery is disconnected on a vehicle fitted with a BBUS (partial trigger only).
The inclination sensor detects a change in vehicle attitude.
The interior motion sensor detects movement within the cabin.
Panic alarm from the Smart Key.
CAUTIONS:
The interior motion sensor electrical connections, particularly those to the sensors mounted in the roof console,
are very delicate and must be handled with care.
The interior motion sensor is an electro-statically sensitive part and should only be handled in an electro-
statically controlled environment.
Alarm Indicator
The alarm indicator is a LED (light emitting diode) located in the instrument cluster, operation of the alarm indicator
is controlled by a hardwired input the CJB. When the ignition is off the indicator gives a visual indication of the active
anti-theft system to show if the alarm system is active or not active.
The alarm LED will begin to flash once every 2 seconds to indicate that the vehicle alarm is armed.
Door Modules
The door modules provide the interface between the door latch-motors, the door latch-switches and the CJB. The
door modules provide door switch status information and enable the door latch-motors on request from the CJB or
the keyless vehicle module.
Keyless Vehicle Module
The Keyless Vehicle Module interfaces with the Central locking, RF (radio frequency) receiver and collects RF signal
information which is transmitted from the Smart Key. This information is translated into commands which are passed
on the medium-speed CAN to the:
CJB,
front door modules, and
instrument cluster.
The keyless vehicle module also monitors:
four interior antennas,

two load-space antennas,
four door handle antennas and one rear bumper antenna, if passive entry is fitted.
On vehicles with passive entry, the additional fast latch motors are controlled via the keyless vehicle module and the
locking status is passed to the CJB on the medium speed CAN.
Passive Anti-Theft Horn
The passive anti-theft horn is hardwired to the CJB and activates when the alarm is triggered.
Battery Backed-Up Sounder (BBUS)
The BBUS uses an integral sounder to produce an audio warning when the alarm is triggered. An inclination sensor is
incorporated into the BBUS, to monitor vehicle attitude, see Inclination Sensor.
Operation of the BBUS is controlled by the CJB via exchange signals on the LIN. Under normal operation the BBUS is
powered by a permanent battery power supply from the CJB. However, if the power feed is disrupted an integral
rechargeable battery powers the BBUS.
On receipt of the arming signals, the BBUS sounder and the inclination sensor respond with a status signal. If there is
no response to the arming signals within 12 seconds, the CJB assumes there is a fault and sends a disarm signal to
the sounder or the inclination sensor, as appropriate. The CJB also stores a related fault code.
If the alarm is subsequently triggered, with the BBUS sounder disarmed, the CJB uses the passive anti-theft horn or
vehicle horn to sound the audio warning.
Inclination Sensor
The inclination sensor measures the longitudinal and lateral angle of the vehicle over a range of ±16° from the
horizontal. When the anti-theft alarm system is armed in the intrusion detection mode, the BBUS stores the current
angles in memory and monitors the inclination sensor readings. If the vehicle attitude changes in either direction by
more than the alarm limit, the BBUS activates the sounder.
Interior Motion Sensor
When the vehicle is double locked, the interior motion sensor monitors for movement in the vehicle’s cabin.
The interior motion sensor consists of a micro-controller, two acoustic transmitters and one acoustic receiver. The
receiver and one of the transmitters face forward and the other transmitter faces rearward to ensure complete
coverage of the vehicle’s cabin.
The interior motion sensor is powered by a feed from the CJB and activates and de-activates the interior motion
sensor. When the interior motion sensor is active it outputs ultrasonic pulses from the transmitters and checks the
echoes picked up by the receiver for changes to the passenger compartment profile. If it detects a change of profile,
indicating movement in the passenger compartment, the interior motion sensor reports the alarm to the CJB.
Each time the interior motion sensor is armed, it performs a self test. If there are no faults the interior motion sensor
sends an acknowledgment signal to the CJB. If the CJB does not receive the acknowledgment signal it de-activates
the interior motion sensor.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN Bus; O = LIN Bus

1 - Battery
2 - Engine junction box
3 - Horns
4 - Battery backed-up sounder with integrated inclination sensor (if fitted)
5 - Interior motion sensor
6 - Passive sounder (if fitted)
7 - Upper tailgate latch
8 - Driver door latch
9 - Driver door module
10 - Passenger door latch
11 - Passenger door module
16 - Hood ajar switch
17 - Keyless vehicle module
18 - Left-hand front lamp (indicator)
19 - Right-hand front lamp (indicator)
20 - Left-hand tail lamp (indicator)
21 - Right-hand tail lamp (indicator)
23 - CJB
The active anti-theft system arms and disarms in conjunction with the locking and unlocking of the central locking
system.
For additional information, refer to: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems, Description and Operation).
Depending on the configuration of the CJB, the active anti-theft system can be armed and disarmed when the locking
system is activated with the Smart Key. Visual and audible confirmation of the arming and disarming is provided by
the direction indicators and the BBUS.
On vehicles not fitted with the interior motion sensor and BBUS, the anti-theft alarm system is armed in the
perimeter mode when the vehicle is either single or double locked.
On vehicles with the interior motion sensor the anti-theft alarm system is armed in one of two modes:
Single Locking: only the hinged panels are monitored.

Double Locking: the hinged panels the vehicle interior, and if the BBUS is incorporated the vehicle attitude, are
monitored.
When the vehicle is double-locked, the CJB sends an arming signal to the BBUS and interior motion sensor. If the
CJB does not receive an acknowledgment signal from the BBUS and the interior motion sensor, the CJB disables the
associated alarm feature for the remainder of the armed cycle.
Locking and Arming the Vehicle
NOTE: The vehicle will only lock, if all door, tailgate and hood apertures are closed. If a lock attempt is made
when an aperture is open, the vehicle will not lock and two audible error warnings will sound.
Single locking:
Pressing the lock button briefly on either the door handle or Smart Key, will initiate the CJB to arm the anti-
theft alarm system in the perimeter mode and send an arming signal to the sounder in the BBUS. This secures
the vehicle and prevents the doors being opened from outside of the vehicle; however they can still be
unlocked and opened from inside the vehicle. The hazard warning lamps will flash once as confirmation and ‘if
enabled’ an audible warning will also sound. The alarm indicator in the instrument cluster will flash
continuously.
Double locking:
Pressing the lock button twice within three seconds on either the door handle or Smart Key, will initiate the
CJB to arm the anti-theft alarm system in the perimeter mode and interior motion detection mode. The CJB
will also send an arming signal to the BBUS. Double locking secures the vehicle and prevents the doors being
unlocked or opened from inside or outside of the vehicle, except with a recognized Smart Key. The perimeter
alarm and interior motion protection are turned on. The hazard warning lamps will flash twice, with a long
second flash as confirmation and if enabled an audible warning will also sound.
The vehicle set-up menu in the message center allows the intrusion detection and inclination protection to be
temporarily disabled the next time the vehicle is locked using the Smart Key. This feature prevents accidental
triggering of the active anti-theft system during transportation of the vehicle or if a pet is left in the vehicle.
The sensor override functionality will be active for one lock/unlock cycle only and will default back to sensor
active mode automatically.
Emergency Disarming
If the alarm has been triggered and cannot be disarmed with the Smart Key, it can be disarmed using the
emergency Smart Key blade. This is achieved by unlocking the left-hand front door with the key blade and
deactivating the alarm by:
pressing the unlock button on the Smart Key, or by

pressing the engine START/STOP button with the Smart Key inside the vehicle.
Anti-Theft - Active - Hood Switch
Removal
NOTE: Before installing a new hood switch, diagnose the hood switch by using a digital
multimeter. Make sure that continuity through hood switch is present when the switch is pressed
(hood closed condition). Repeat the test to make sure continuity IS NOT present when the switch IS
NOT pressed. If the hood switch continuity is NOT present, continue with this procedure. If the
continuity is present, install the original hood switch to the vehicle.

2. Release the RH hood latch.

3. Remove the hood switch.
Installation
1. Install the hood switch.
2. Install the RH hood latch.

3. Open and close the hood to check the hood latch operation.
4. Adjust the hood latch.

Loosen the 2 hood latch Torx bolts.
Lower the hood and check for alignment.
Open the hood and tighten the Torx bolts to 10 Nm
(7 lb.ft).
Check for the correct operation of the hood safety
catch.
If necessary, repeat the above adjustment
procedure.
Anti-Theft - Active - Antenna
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the RH A-pillar upper trim panel.

Installation).
3. Remove the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).
4. Remove the RH C-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).
5. Remove the RH sun visor.

Remove the screw covers.
Release and disconnect the electrical
connector.

Remove the screw.
7. Remove the RH passenger assist handles.

8. Release the RH side of the headliner.
9. Remove the alarm antenna.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the alarm antenna.
2. Secure the RH side of the headliner.

3. Install the RH passenger assist handles.

Install the screws.

Install the screw.
5. Install the RH sun visor.

Install the screws.
6. Install the RH C-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).
7. Install the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).

Installation).

Specifications).
Anti-Theft - Active - Anti-Theft Alarm Horn with Integral Battery
Removal
1. Remove the auxiliary battery box cover.
2. Remove the anti-theft alarm horn.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the anti-theft alarm horn.
2. Install the auxiliary battery box cover.

Anti-Theft - Passive - Anti-Theft - Passive
COMPONENT LOCATION

2 - Steering column lock
3 - Immobilizer antenna unit
4 - Interior Antenna – roof lining
6 - Keyless Vehicle Module
7 - Radio frequency receiver
8 - Interior Antenna – luggage compartment
10 - Interior Antenna – front compartment
12 - Start/Stop Switch
OVERVIEW
Passive Start
The passive start system relies on the detection of a uniquely coded Smart Key and low frequency antennas
strategically situated within the vehicle. The antennas ensure the Smart Key is always within the active transmission
zone of the antennas wherever the Smart Key is placed inside the vehicle. For this reason the orientation and
positioning of the antennas is critical to the correct functioning of the system. The Smart Key also operates the
passive entry system.
For additional information, refer to: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems, Description and Operation).
The system provides a secure interface between the CJB (central junction box) and the ECM (engine control module)
to prevent unauthorized starting of the engine. This is achieved by immobilization of the engine crank system and the
fuel system, using encoded data exchange between the Smart Key and multiple control modules.
Engine starting is initiated when the encoded data exchange between the Smart Key and the control modules is
verified. The engine management system will then allow engine crank and fueling when an authorization data
message is received from the CJB.
The engine can be started by pressing the start/stop button and depending on the type of transmission:
Automatic; when the drive selector is in the 'Park' position and the brake pedal is pressed.
Manual; when the gear selector is in 'Neutral' and the clutch pedal is pressed.
Immobilizer Antenna Unit
The IAU (immobilizer antenna unit) is used if the keyless vehicle module is unable to authorize the Smart Key. If the
keyless vehicle module is unable to identify the Smart Key, for example if the Smart Key battery voltage is low or
there is local RF interference, the transponder within the Smart Key can be read in the conventional manner. The
driver will be alerted to this by a chime and a message in the instrument cluster message center 'SMART KEY NOT
FOUND REFER TO HANDBOOK'.
Refer to Keyless Start Backup section.
Low Frequency Antenna
Six LF (low Frequency) antennas for the passive start system are positioned in specific locations within the vehicle.
The keyless vehicle module transmits an LF signal via the antennas which is received by the Smart Key. The Smart
Key then responds by transmitting a RF (radio Frequency) signal which is received by the RF receiver and passed to
the KVM (Keyless Vehicle Module) for authorization.
Keyless Vehicle Module
The keyless vehicle module controls signal transmissions to and from the Smart Key and provides authorization to
allow the vehicle to be started. The module has a medium-speed CAN (controller area network) connection to the
CJB for authorizing vehicle starting.
Radio Frequency Receiver
The RF (radio frequency) receiver transmission is received from the Smart Key to enable key identification.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired connection; F = RF Transmission; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O LIN bus; W = LF
Transmission; AH = Serial Communications Link
1 - Battery
3 - Steering column lock
5 - CJB
6 - Start/Stop Switch
7 - Immobilizer antenna unit
9 - Smart Key
16 - KVM (Keyless Vehicle Module)
Passive Start
At the request of the CJB the KVM (Keyless Vehicle Module) prompts each of the internal low-frequency antennas to
output a signal. When the Smart Key is in the vehicle cabin, it detects the low-frequency signals and responds with a
RF radio frequency data-identification signal back to the KVM via the RF receiver.
If the data received matches that stored in the KVM it continues the passive start process by communicating a 'Smart
Key valid’ signal to the CJB via the medium-speed CAN bus.
Once the CJB receives the authorization and confirms the response with an internal calculation, it passes coded data
to the ECM on the high-speed CAN bus. Upon confirmation from the ECM the ignition is enabled.
Before CJB sends a mobilization signal to the ECM it will exchange encrypted data with the electric steering lock
mechanism to authorize unlocking of the steering column. The instrument cluster only provides a ground for the
steering lock motor.
The CJB will enable the fuel pump relay which, on diesel vehicles operates the fuel pump and on gasoline vehicles
sends a battery voltage supply to the fuel pump driver module to operate the fuel pump in conjunction with the ECM.
NOTE: If the KVM fails to locate the Smart Key, a message 'SMART KEY NOT FOUND REFER TO HANDBOOK' will
appear in the instrument cluster message center and the keyless start back-up process will have to be used to
mobilize and start the vehicle.
To ensure optimum long term reliability of the smart key the battery must be replaced with a brand new, unused
battery. If a used battery is installed the "SMART KEY BATTERY LOW" message may not be cleared. To avoid
contamination of the contacts the battery should be removed from its packaging and installed into the smart key
while wearing gloves. To confirm that the replacement battery is working correctly press the unlock button twice
while holding the smart key outside the vehicle, then enter the vehicle with the smart key, press the start button and
confirm that the "SMART KEY BATTERY LOW" message is not displayed.
Keyless Start Backup
If the vehicle has been unlocked using the emergency key blade or the Smart Key is not detected by the vehicle, it
will be necessary to use the keyless start backup to disarm the alarm and start the engine. The following process
must be followed in this event:
Position the Smart Key against the underside of the fascia, on the outboard side of the steering column, with
the buttons facing downwards. This is the location of the IAU (immobilizer antenna unit).
Holding the Smart Key in position and the brake / clutch pedal depressed, press the start/stop button to start
the engine.
Smart Key positioned next to immobilizer antenna unit
This process bypasses the data exchange between the KVM and the CJB; this is an inductive process and will operate
if the battery in the Smart Key is discharged. A transponder within the Smart Key is detected by the IAU. The IAU
confirms the code output from the transponder and communicates this code confirmation with the CJB via a LIN
(local interconnect network) bus connection. The CJB then initiates the vehicle start process in the normal manner.
Anti-Theft - Passive - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Module
Removal
NOTE: If the PATS module is to be replaced then T4 must be connected and the correct procedures adhered
to, prior to the battery disconnection.

Specifications).
2. Remove the RH A-pillar upper trim panel.

Installation).
3. Remove the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).
4. Remove the RH C-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).
5. Remove the RH sun visor.

Remove the screw covers.

Remove the screw.
7. Remove the RH passenger assist handles.

9. Release the RH side of the headliner.

10. Remove the PATS module.

Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. Install the PATS module.
2. Secure the RH side of the headliner.

Secure the clips.
4. Install the RH passenger assist handles.

Install the screws.

Install the screw.
6. Install the RH sun visor.

Install the screws.
7. Install the RH C-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).
8. Install the RH B-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).

Installation).

Specifications).
11. Initiate a new PATS module using T4.

Remote Convenience - Universal Transmitter

1 - Rear light sensor
2 - Front light sensor
3 - Universal transmitter channel button (market dependant)
4 - Universal transmitter light emitting diode (LED) (market dependant)
WARNING: The universal transmitter must not be used with any garage door that lacks safety 'stop' and
'reverse' features, as required by federal safety standards (this includes any garage or door opener model
manufactured before April 1 1982). A garage door opener which cannot 'detect' an object in the path of a closing
door and then automatically 'stop' and 'reverse' the door, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.
NOTE: HomeLink is a registered trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc.
The universal transmitter can operate up to 3 home or office remotely operated systems (e.g. garage door/gate
openers, lighting and security systems), replacing the individual hand held transmitters required for each system.
The universal transmitter can learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters.
NOTE: Universal transmitter frequencies vary across markets
The universal transmitter incorporates 3 buttons, one for each channel, and an amber LED installed on the underside
of the interior mirror. When one of the buttons is pressed the universal transmitter outputs the radio signal
programmed for the related channel (if any) and illuminates the LED to confirm transmission.
For information on programming the universal transmitter, refer to the 'Owners Handbook'.
Remote Convenience - Universal Transmitter
For a detailed description of the universal transmitter system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Universal Transmitter (419-02 Remote Convenience,
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.

Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Damaged universal transmitter
Damaged receiver
Symptom Chart

Universal transmitter Universal Refer to the electrical circuits and check universal transmitter and
inoperative transmitter receiver unit circuits.
Receiver unit
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Remote Function Actuator (RFA) (100-00 General
Navigation System - Navigation System
COMPONENT LOCATION

1 - VICS (vehicle information and communication system) beacon antenna - Japan only
2 - TSD (touch screen display)
3 - Microphone - voice recognition
4 - Clockspring
5 - Steering wheel switches
6 - GPS (global positioning system) antenna
7 - ‘TMC (traffic message channel) tuner’ or ‘VICS receiver - Japan only’
8 - Power amplifier
9 - IHU (integrated head unit)
10 - Integrated control panel, incorporating navigation switch
11 - Navigation update socket
OVERVIEW
The navigation system provides audible and visual route guidance information to enable the driver to reach a desired
destination. The system allows the driver to choose the route to the destination using minor or major roads or
highways with the option of three routes. Directions to hospitals, museums, monuments and hotels are also
available. Map information stored on a hard-drive located within the TSD (touch screen display) is used to determine
the best route for the journey and provide the driver with details of directions and approaching junctions.
If the vehicle requires a map upgrade or a new region loading, an enabling code along with the map data must be
purchased. Map upgrades to the hard-drive unit need to be carried out by a Land Rover dealer using Land Rover
approved diagnostic equipment.
TRAFFIC MESSAGE CHANNEL
The TMC (traffic message channel) traffic data is received via the FM (frequency modulation) radio antenna and
broadcast in many European countries.
TMC is a function of the FM, RDS (radio data system), which broadcasts real-time traffic and weather information.
Data messages are received and decoded by the TSD and passed onto the navigation system to inform the driver of
impending traffic congestion and if possible provide an alternative route.
TMC conforms to a global standard that has been adopted by:
Traffic data gatherers

Information service providers
Broadcasters
Vehicle/receiver manufacturers
All TMC receivers use the same list of event codes, while the location database (on the hard-drive) contains both a
country-specific set of location codes for the strategic European road network.
VEHICLE INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
VICS (vehicle information and communication system) is broadcast in the Japanese market.
VICS supplies the navigation system with information that enables the TSD to inform the vehicle driver of traffic
conditions in the vehicle's vicinity and calculate an alternative route if necessary. Information is transmitted to the
navigation system through three routes as headlined below:
Radio Frequency Transmission
Radio frequency transmission is generally transmitted from road side beacons mainly on highways. The information
transmitted is:
Traffic congestion
Travel time to next intersection
Traffic conditions in surrounding areas and highway junctions
Traffic accidents
Speed limits
Lane regulations
Tire chains regulations
Parking availability at highway service areas and parking areas.
Infra-red Transmission
Infra-red transmission is received by the VICS beacon antenna mounted on the top of the instrument panel. Infra-red
transmissions are transmitted from road-side beacons on major trunk roads. The information transmitted is:
Traffic congestion and travel time

Traffic accidents
Breakdowns
Road works restrictions
Parking availability.
FM Transmissions
FM transmissions are received via the FM antenna and broadcast as part of the normal RDS FM transmission. The
information transmitted is:
Traffic congestion and travel time for wide areas

Traffic accidents, road works, speed limits and lane restrictions for a wide area
Parking availability information.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN; P = MOST; AF = Firewire.

1 - Battery
2 - Integrated control panel, incorporating navigation switch
3 - Medium speed CAN bus connection to other vehicle systems
5 - Clockspring
6 - IHU (integrated head unit)
7 - Medium speed CAN bus connection to other vehicle systems
8 - Microphone - voice recognition
9 - GPS antenna
10 - VICS beacon antenna - Japan only
11 - ‘TMC (traffic message channel tuner’ or ‘VICS receiver - Japan only’
12 - TSD (touch screen display)
13 - Navigation update socket
15 - Power amplifier
16 - Speakers
The system used to calculate the current position of the vehicle is called the GPS. Satellites transmit radio signals to
provide information about the satellite's position, for example the latitude, longitude, altitude, almanac data and an
accurate time signal generated by an on-board atomic clock. Each satellite contains four atomic clocks.
The vehicle needs to receive data from at least four different satellites to give a three dimensional fix on its current
position.
As the vehicle moves, this information is continually being updated. The TSD determines which satellites are 'visible'
to the system and their current position and relationship to each other. Using this information the TSD can account
for positional deviations of the satellites and compensate to enhance the accuracy of the navigation system.
The GPS signal is also known as the PPS (precision positioning signal).
PPS predictable accuracy is:
22 meters horizontal accuracy

27.7 meters vertical accuracy
200 nanoseconds time accuracy.
The navigation system receives GPS information via the GPS antenna. The GPS signals are used by the TSD to
calculate the vehicles position. Once the driver has input a desired destination the TSD can calculate a route, based
on the driver’s pre-determined preferences or the default settings in the TSD.
The navigation system is accessed by pressing the navigation switch on the integrated control panel.
Navigation is initiated by the driver entering a destination. This can be achieved by:
Entering in an address using the touch screen display.

Entering a post code.
Choosing a previous destination.
Choosing a point of interest from the hard drive database.
Choosing the home location.
Choosing a memory stored location.
The driver is then guided to the destination by a scrolling map display and voice guidance. The display can be varied
by scale and display type.
In addition to the navigation system there are two market dependant systems that supply extra information to the
navigation system and the driver. These are:
TMC (traffic message channel – Europe only.

VICS (vehicle information and communication system) - Japan only.
Limited Satellite Contact
It is possible to maintain the vehicle’s positional information when there is limited or no satellite contact, for example
when the vehicle is in a:
tunnel or underpass
covered car park
street lined with tall buildings
or dense forest.
When the vehicle is in one of these conditions the vehicle’s position is maintained by both the gyroscope sensor
contained in the TSD and the vehicle speed signal. The speed signal is supplied by the ABS module and transmitted
via the high-speed CAN to the CJB it is then transmitted by a hard-wired signal to the TSD.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Touch Screen Display (TSD)

2 - Access Audio/Video Menu
3 - Scroll up down (menu control)
4 - Mode
5 - Traffic/News information
6 - Access Phone Menu
7 - Search up/increase
8 - Search down/increase
9 - Access Navigation Menu
10 - Tone hard key
11 - Audio on/off
12 - Volume
13 - Access touch screen Home Menu
The TSD (touch screen display) and Integrated Control Panel are located in the center of the instrument panel and
are the driver’s control interface for the navigation system. The TSD is connected to the MOST ring and
communicates with the other components in the audio/infotainment system.
The TSD is a seven inch touch sensitive, 1280 X 480 pixels LCD (liquid crystal display) VGA screen.
In addition to the navigation system the TSD and the Integrated Control Panel provides the driver with display and
control of various other vehicle functions.
Microphone
The microphone is located in the front interior lamp console. The standard, directional type microphone is connected
to the Touch Screen Display (TSD) for voice recognition of the navigation system and the telephone. The microphone
has an integrated noise suppression system for hands-free telephone use.
TMC Antenna Amplifier
The TMC (traffic message channel) antenna amplifier is located above the rear left-hand-side window and is
connected to the FM antenna which is integrated into the window. The TMC signals are received through the normal
radio signals via the RDS (radio data system) and are routed separately from the radio signals via the TMC antenna
amplifier to the Touch Screen Display unit.
Global Positioning System Antenna
The GPS antenna is located in the rear spoiler and connected to the Touch Screen Display unit.
VICS Beacon Antenna (Japan only)
The VICS beacon is located on top of the instrument panel on the left-hand-side. The beacon is connected to the TSD
via a screened co-axial cable.
VICS Antenna Amplifier (Japan only)

The VICS antenna amplifier is located above the rear left-hand-side window. The amplifier is connected to the TSD
unit.
Navigation System - Navigation System Compact Disc (CD) Unit
Removal
Specifications).

Operation).
3. Remove the LH front seat.

4. Remove the CD unit.

Remove the 4 bolts.
Disconnect the antenna cable.
Installation
1. Install the CD unit.
Connect the antenna cable.
2. Install the LH front seat.


Specifications).
Navigation System - Navigation System Display Module
Removal
1.
2. Torque: 2.5 Nm
3.
similar.
5.
6.
7.
8. Torque: 2.5 Nm

Installation
2. If a new component has been installed, configure using

Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Navigation System - Navigation System Traffic Amplifier
Removal
NOTE: The navigation system traffic amplifier is located on the LH side of the liftgate. The diversity
amplifier is located on the RH side of the liftgate. The procedure is similar for both components.

2. Remove the navigation system traffic amplifier.

Disconnect the 2 antenna cables.
Remove the Torx bolt.
Release the clip.
Installation
1. Install the navigation system traffic amplifier.
Secure the clip.
Tighten the Torx bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
Connect the antenna cables.

Navigation System - Navigation System Antenna
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the high mounted stoplamp.

For additional information, refer to: High Mounted Stoplamp
3. Remove the liftgate trim panel.

4. Remove the navigation system antenna.

Remove the screw.
Release and disconnect the electrical
connector.
Cut through the adhesive retaining pad.
Installation
1. Clean the adhesive contact area.
2. Install the antenna.

Tighten the screw.

Secure the clips.
4. Install the high mounted stoplamp.
For additional information, refer to: High Mounted Stoplamp

Specifications).
Cellular Phone -
Cellular phone antenna Torx screw 10 7
Cellular Phone - Cellular Phone
Component Location
Cellular Phone Component Location - Lo-Line Audio

1 - Microphone
2 - Clockspring
4 - Vehicle speakers
5 - Audio head unit
6 - Integrated control panel (ICP)
7 - Multi-function display
Cellular Phone Component Location - Mid-Line, High-Line and Premium Audio
1 - Microphone
3 - Clockspring
6 - Integrated audio module (IAM)
OVERVIEW
The Bluetooth® telephone system uses the customers own Bluetooth® capable telephone handset in conjunction with
the vehicle information and entertainment system. The system is controlled by the audio head unit on Lo-Line audio
systems or the Integrated Audio Module (IAM) on Hi-Line and Premium audio systems. Both the audio head unit and
the IAM have a Bluetooth® antenna incorporated into the unit.
Telephone handsets must be paired with the audio head unit or the IAM, requiring the input of a PIN (personal
identification number) before they can be used with the vehicle system.
Once paired, any telephone handset can be 'connected' to the vehicle without re-entering the PIN. In addition,
previous connected devices will be connected automatically the next time they are present in the vehicle and the
ignition is in power mode 6 (ignition on) or power mode 7 (engine running).
Bluetooth® wireless technology allows electronic devices to communicate wirelessly through a short-range RF
network. Bluetooth® wireless technology can simultaneously handle data and voice transmissions which allows the
vehicle's Bluetooth® telephone system to provide hands free operation of the users Bluetooth® telephone.
The Land Rover Bluetooth® system supports Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile (HFP), Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP) and Audio Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP).
Lo-Line Audio Bluetooth® System
The Bluetooth® telephone system uses the audio head unit and the multi-function display which communicate on a
dedicated medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. The system allows the driver to connect their own
Bluetooth® enabled phone into the integrated phone system using Bluetooth® technology. Bluetooth® technology
allowing hands free operation of a Bluetooth® mobile (cell) phone.
The system comprises:
Audio head unit

Multi-function display
Microphone
Steering wheel control switches.
Pairing of new handsets is achieved by searching for the vehicle Bluetooth® system on the users telephone handset.
The user must use their own Bluetooth® telephone handset to search for the vehicle, the vehicle name (Land Rover)
will be displayed in user's handset. Once selected, the user enters a PIN on their Bluetooth® handset. The code is
selected randomly by the audio head unit and is displayed on the multi-function display for the user to enter into their
handset (or device).
Up to 6 telephone handsets can be paired with the vehicle, but only one handset can be used at a time for making or
receiving a call. The multi-function display will show some telephone handset functionality, including dialing and (if
compatible) the telephone handset phone book. The signal strength and battery level can also be displayed if the
telephone handset supports this feature. The displayed information allows the user to operate the telephone handset
without touching the telephone.
NOTE: There is no physical connection or cradle between the telephone handset and the audio head unit.
Communication between the telephone handset and the vehicle system is only via Bluetooth®. This can limit the
available functions dependant on the telephone handset used.
The system allows the driver to make, receive and end telephone calls using the multi-function display or steering
wheel switches.
Compatible Bluetooth® mobile telephones can communicate with the vehicle's in-built telephone system. Pairing and
connection must be made with the ignition on, the engine running or in 10 minute accessory mode.
Mid-Line, Hi-Line and Premium Audio Bluetooth® Systems
The Bluetooth® telephone system uses the Media Oriented System Transport (MOST) ring for communication with the
other components in the entertainment and information system.
The system comprises:
Integrated Audio Module (IAM)

Instrument cluster (for telephone information in message center)
Microphone
Steering wheel control switches
Audio power amplifier.
Pairing of new handsets is achieved by selection of 'Search New' from the device list screen. The system has two
pairing modes; 'vehicle to device' and 'device to vehicle'. Up to 10 Bluetooth® devices can be paired to the vehicle.
NOTE: There is no physical connection or cradle between the telephone handset and the IAM. Communication
between the telephone handset and the vehicle system is only via Bluetooth®. This can limit the available functions
dependant on the telephone handset used.
The system allows the driver to make, receive and end telephone calls using the TSD or steering wheel switches. On
Hi-Line and Premium audio systems the Land Rover Advanced Voice system can be specified.
Compatible Bluetooth® mobile telephones can communicate with the vehicle's in-built telephone system. Pairing and
connection must be made with the ignition on or the engine running.
SYSTEM OPERATION
Lo-Line Audio Bluetooth® System
Primary user control of the Bluetooth® telephone system is via the multi-function display and the steering wheel
switches. Press the 'PHONE' button on the multi-function display to access the telephone sub-menu options.
Incoming calls are received from the Bluetooth® phone by the audio head unit. The information is processed by the
audio head unit and passed to the integral audio power amplifier for audio output through the vehicle’s audio speaker
system. The telephone information is passed to the multi-function display on a dedicated medium speed CAN bus for
display of the appropriate information.
Users can dock their Bluetooth® telephone using their telephone and the multi-function display. The system will try
to automatically dock to the last telephone used by the system. Automatic searching for a handset will occur for the
first minute after ignition on (power mode 6). If the handset is not available during this time, then docking will require
manual control using the select phone option in the phone menu.
NOTE: Pairing a telephone for the first time has to be done from the handset, a pin will appear on the multi-
function display.
Mid-Line, Hi-Line and Premium Audio Bluetooth® System
The Bluetooth phone system is controlled from the TSD, via voice control and the steering wheel mounted switches.
Signals from the steering wheel switches are sent via the clockspring to the TSD. The TSD sends control signals on
the MOST ring to the IAM, where these signals are sent via Bluetooth to the connected mobile phone. Speech is
picked up by the microphone and sent to the IAM. Audio from the mobile phone is sent from the IAM on the MOST
ring to the audio amplifier and is output on the vehicle speaker system.
The upgraded hands free profile of this system allows the display of the network signal strength, network operator
and telephone battery level indication on the vehicle display, where the telephone handset supports this function. Also,
if applicable, the telephone handset will show a "car" or "headset" symbol to indicate it is in hands free profile.
All Bluetooth® Systems
Telephone handset manufacturers continually update hardware and software to standard specifications laid down by
the Bluetooth® Special Interest Group (SIG), which defines how Bluetooth® should work in an automotive
environment. However, because different makes and models may use different software, not all telephone handsets
are fully compatible with Land Rover, but through testing individual telephone handset models, Land Rover has
produced a list of compatible telephone handsets and the appropriate software version for Land Rover Bluetooth®
connectivity.
Refer to the Bluetooth® Connectivity section of the Land Rover website at www.landrover.com, for a list of
compatible phones. The list also describes how to check the software version of each individual telephone
manufacturer. This list must be consulted by users, sales and service teams to confirm whether customer's telephone
handsets are compatible or not. Performance will vary, based on the phone’s software version, battery condition,
coverage and the network provider. Telephones are warranted by their manufacturer, not Land Rover.
Land Rover is continually validating compatible telephone handset and software combinations. The most up-to-date
compatibility list will always be available on-line from Land Rover.
NOTE: To achieve full Bluetooth® telephone handset functionality, it is crucial that the telephone software level
matches the version detailed in the list of compatible telephone handsets.
BLUETOOTH®
Bluetooth® is a short-range Radio Frequency (RF) technology that operates at 2.4 GHz and is capable of transmitting
voice and data wirelessly. The effective range of Bluetooth® devices is 32 feet (10 meters) with a data transfer rate
of 1 Mbps.
Bluetooth® is a wireless RF connection which operates with the user's own telephone handset. It does not have to be
fixed into the vehicle and is designed to function without an external aerial. The telephone handset can be located
anywhere within the cabin, even in a bag, or jacket pocket. It can work from the luggage compartment, although the
signal could be compromised. The telephone handset can be charged from the 12 volt power socket or USB (if
supported) while in use.
Lo-Line Systems
The Bluetooth® system supports Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) and Audio Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP). Bluetooth® Audio Streaming and its control are an optional selection. The operation of Bluetooth® Audio
Streaming depends up on the features supported in the handset.
Mid-Line, Hi-Line and Premium Systems
The Bluetooth® system supports Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile (HFP), Phonebook Access Profile (PBAP), Advanced
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) and Audio Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP).
DESCRIPTION - LO-LINE AUDIO BLUETOOTH® TELEPHONE SYSTEM
Audio Head Unit
The audio head unit is located in the instrument panel, behind the ICP.
The audio head unit contains the following functionality:
Bluetooth™ phone
AM (amplitude modulation)/FM (frequency modulation) radio dual tuner with diversity
Single disc CD (compact disc)/MP3 player
Integrated 80W (4x20W) Amplifier
DAB tuner (if fitted)
USB (universal serial bus)/iPod connectivity (if fitted)
Auxiliary input (for any device featuring a 3.5mm jack plug output)
Provides audible beeps for the park aid system, if fitted.
The audio head unit communicates with the multi-function display on a dedicated CAN bus. The multi-function display
communicates with the other vehicle systems on the medium speed CAN bus and is therefore the 'gateway' for the lo-
line audio system.
The audio head unit contains an internal 80W amplifier which directly drives the vehicle speakers. Amplifier comprises
4 x 20W channels.
When the Bluetooth® telephone is specified, the audio head unit supports the Bluetooth™ telephone functionality and
audio streaming. Bluetooth® telephone software and a Bluetooth® antenna are located within the audio head unit.
The software within the head unit processes the Bluetooth® wireless signals from the users Bluetooth® telephone and
allows audio output and data display on the multi-function display.
A microphone, located in the overhead console, is hardwired directly to the audio head unit which processes the
microphone input into a Bluetooth® output to the users Bluetooth® telephone. Audio from the users Bluetooth®
telephone is transmitted via the Bluetooth® to the audio head unit, which processes the signals and outputs them on
the vehicle speaker system via the integral audio power amplifier.
Multi-Function Display
The multi-function display is located in the instrument panel, above the ICP.
The multi-function display is connected to other vehicle systems on the medium speed CAN bus and to the audio
head unit on a dedicated CAN bus. The multi-function display receives information from other vehicle systems on the
medium speed CAN bus and passes it to the audio head unit on the dedicated CAN bus.
The multi-function display features a 5" color Thin Film Transistor (TFT) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen. Buttons
surrounding the screen operate the infotainment system functions, with the exception of the parking aid button.
Additional controls for audio are also available on the ICP.
The multi-function display has controls for radio, CD, auxiliary input and telephone. A 'Menu' button allows for the
selection and adjustment of audio settings, clock settings and language. Each menu can be scrolled through using a
'four-way' menu navigation control switch and the selected menu can be displayed by pressing the 'OK' button in the
center of the control switch.
The multi-function display also processes signals from the steering wheel switches for telephone functions. The
operation of each steering wheel switch is via a resistive ladder and the multi-function display processes the received
voltage to determine the function selected. This information is then passed to the audio head unit on the dedicated
CAN bus to carry out the request.
Answering/Rejecting/Ending calls
Press the accept call button on the steering wheel control to answer an incoming call
To reject or end a call, press the end call button or the steering wheel control
Dialed
From the PHONE home screen, use the numeric keypad to enter a telephone number
Press OK or the steering wheel control accept call switch to dial the number.
If the audio system is in use when a phone call is active, the audio source is suppressed for the duration of the call.
Parking aid warnings are not suppressed.
Bluetooth® Telephone Controls

1 - PHONE button - press to select the telephone mode
2 - Press to answer call or dial number
3 - Press to end call or reject incoming call.
Microphone
The directional type microphone is fitted to the driver's side of the overhead console so that it is directed towards the
driver. It is connected to the audio head unit for hands free telephony.
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® phone system allows the user to pair and connect their own mobile phone handset (Bluetooth®
enabled only) to the vehicle telephone system.
Once connected, the user can use the vehicle hands free functions. The Bluetooth® system limits the functions to
those available in the Bluetooth® hands free profile.
The available features include:
Make/receive calls
Dial voicemail number
Signal strength, network operator and battery level indication on the multi-function display (if supported by the
telephone handset software)
Phonebook download (if supported by the telephone handset)
Dialed calls (if supported by the telephone handset)
Missed calls (if supported by the telephone handset)
Received calls (if supported by the telephone handset).
Bluetooth® Pairing
Before a Bluetooth® phone handset can be used on the vehicle hands free system, the phone must be 'paired' to the
Bluetooth® phone system. The following steps describe the 'pairing' process:
NOTE: The process of pairing and connecting your phone with the vehicle using the mobile phone will vary
depending on the type of mobile phone used.
Switch the ignition on and ensure that the audio system is active and that no other phone is currently
connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® system.
Using the mobile phone, search for Bluetooth® devices. On some phones, this is referred to as a new paired
device. See the telephone's operating instructions for further information.
When the vehicle's Bluetooth® system is discovered (named Land Rover), select this device from the list.
When prompted, enter the Bluetooth® PIN (Personal Identification Number) into the mobile phone. This
number is randomly generated by the vehicle system and will be displayed on the screen.
Once the phone is paired and connected to the system, it can dock automatically. If it does not automatically
dock, connect manually with the Bluetooth® system, via the mobile phone. Consult the telephone’s
instructions for further information.
NOTE: Some telephones require the Bluetooth® pairing to be set as ‘authorised’ or ‘trusted’ in order to
automatically connect. Refer to the telephone operating instructions for further information.
Changing the connected phone
Up to 6 mobile phones can be paired with the vehicle in the same way. However, only one can be connected and
ready for use as a phone at any one time.
To connect a different paired phone, follow the steps below:
Press the Phone button.

A menu will appear. Choose 'Select Phone'.
Identify and select the phone from the displayed list.
Once the phone is connected to the system, a confirmation message will be displayed.
DESCRIPTION - MID-LINE, HI-LINE AND PREMIUM AUDIO BLUETOOTH® TELEPHONE

SYSTEM
Integrated Audio Module (IAM)
The IAM is located in the instrument panel, behind the Integrated Control Panel (ICP). The IAM communicates with
the Bluetooth® phone using internal hardware and a Bluetooth® antenna and software for telephone functionality.
The IAM is connected to the Media Oriented system Transport (MOST) ring and communicates with the TSD and audio
amplifier in order to provide the telephone feature in the vehicle.
When the Bluetooth® telephone is specified, the IAM supports the Bluetooth™ telephone functionality and audio
streaming. Bluetooth® telephone software and a Bluetooth® antenna are located within the IAM. The software within
the IAM processes the Bluetooth® wireless signals from the users Bluetooth® telephone and allows audio output,
voice input and data display on the TSD.
The hands free microphone is hardwired to the IAM. The microphone is also used by the Land Rover Voice system for
telephone and other infotainment system operation.
For additional information, refer to: Audio System (415-01B, Description and Operation).

1 - Audio settings menu
2 - Valet mode
3 - Menu title
4 - Audio/Video menu
5 - End a call when using the phone or last given navigation instruction repetition
6 - Time display
7 - Navigation menu
8 - Phone menu
9 - Touch screen setup menu
10 - Home menu
11 - Turn off the touch screen display
12 - Extra features menu
13 - Home menu presets
The Touch Screen Display (TSD) provides the user interface of the Bluetooth® telephone system.
The Touch Screen Display (TSD) forms the basis of the telephone system. It communicates with the rest of the
audio/infotainment system on the MOST ring and allows control of the telephone system and other infotainment
systems from a single point.
The TSD communicates with the Integrated Audio Module (IAM) on the MOST ring and provides the driver interface
and driver display of the telephone system. The TSD also provides driver display and control of the audio, the rear
view camera, the navigation system, the Traffic Message Channel and the rear seat entertainment.
The telephone system and other systems are operated by a combination of the physical buttons located on each side
of the screen and the 'virtual' buttons (icons) displayed on the touch screen, in addition to the steering wheel
mounted switches. For clarification, the physical buttons on the TSD are referred to as 'buttons' and the touch screen
virtual buttons are referred to as 'icons'.
For additional information, refer to: Audio System (415-01B, Description and Operation).
Microphone
The directional type microphone is fitted to the driver's side of the overhead console so that it is directed towards the
driver. It is connected to the Integrated Audio Module (IAM) for hands free telephony, voice control and dynamic
volume control (DVC) systems. The IAM has an integrated noise suppression and echo cancellation system for hands-
free telephone use.
Steering Wheel Control Switches

1 - Press to scroll up a displayed list.
2 - Press to increase volume when in a call.
3 - Press to scroll down a displayed list.
4 - Press to decrease volume when in a call.
5 - Press and release to access last 10 dialled list or dial a number/contact. Press and hold to
access phonebook list view.
6 - Press to end a call or to reject an incoming call.
The steering wheel switches for the telephone system are located on the LH (left-hand) side of the steering wheel.
The driver is able to use these switches for several phone related functions including:
Accept incoming calls.

Reject incoming calls.
Make phone calls from the phones own phone book (phone book/call lists).
Audio Power Amplifier
The audio power amplifier is located below the front LH seat. It is connected to the audio system via the MOST bus.
Speaker connections from the amplifier are hardwired.
Telephone audio during a call is played through the front speakers.
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® phone system allows the user to pair and connect their own mobile phone handset (Bluetooth®
enabled only) to the vehicle telephone system.
Once connected, the user can use the vehicle hands free functions. The Bluetooth® system limits the functions to
those available in the Bluetooth® hands free profile.
The available features include:
Make/receive calls
Dial voicemail number
Signal strength, network operator and battery level indication on the TSD (if supported by the telephone
handset software)
Phonebook download (if supported by the telephone handset)
Dialled calls (if supported by the telephone handset)
Missed calls (if supported by the telephone handset)
Received calls (if supported by the telephone handset).
Bluetooth® Pairing
Before a Bluetooth® phone handset can be used on the vehicle hands free system, the phone must be 'paired' to the
Bluetooth® phone system. The following steps describe the 'pairing' process.
There are two ways of pairing a mobile phone to the vehicle system: From vehicle to device or from device to
vehicle.
NOTE: The process of pairing and connecting your phone with the vehicle using the mobile phone will vary
depending on the type of mobile phone used. Selecting 'search new' only appears if pairing for the 1st time,
subsequent attempts to use the 'search new' soft key needs to be accessed by pressing the Change Phone 1st soft
key.
Switch the ignition system on and ensure that the touch screen is active.
From the home menu, select Phone.
A menu will appear. Select Search new.
NOTE: The vehicle’s Bluetooth® system is discoverable for only 3 minutes.
Device to Vehicle
Select Device To Vehicle option. On some phones, this is referred to as new paired device. See your phone's
operating instructions for further information.
When the vehicle's Bluetooth® system is discovered (named Land Rover), follow the on-screen instructions.
Select Yes when prompted, to confirm the pairing. Either the phone or the vehicle system will ask for a PIN
(Personal Identification Number). When prompted, enter a PIN of your choice and select OK to confirm.
Enter the same PIN into the other device.
Once your phone is paired and connected to the system, a confirmation message will be displayed before
switching to the Digit Dial screen.
Vehicle to Device
Select Vehicle To Device option.

Identify your phone from the displayed list and select the corresponding Pair and Connect option.
A PIN will be displayed in the TSD, enter this PIN into your phone.
Once your phone is paired and connected to the system, a confirmation message will be displayed before
switching to the Digit Dial screen.
NOTE: Some mobile phones require the Bluetooth® pairing to be set as ‘authorized’ or ‘trusted’ in order to
automatically connect. Please refer to your phone’s operating instructions for further information.
Changing the connected phone
Up to 10 mobile devices (mobile telephones or other Bluetooth® audio devices) can be paired with the vehicle in the
same way. However, only one can be connected and ready for use as a phone at any one time.
NOTE: Bluetooth audio devices will use one of the 10 allocated pairing slots, but will not be displayed in the
telephone device list if they do not support telephony function.
To connect a different paired phone, follow the steps below:
From the Home menu, select Phone.

A menu will appear. Select Change phone.
Identify and select the phone from the displayed list.
Once the phone is connected to the system, a confirmation message will be displayed before switching to the
Digit Dial screen.
Advanced Land Rover Voice Control (Mid-Line, Hi-Line and Premium Systems Only)
The advanced Land Rover system provides the driver with the option of voice control for a range of supported
functions. The following systems include Land Rover Voice functionality:
Bluetooth® Telephone system

Navigation system
Vehicle notepad
Radio, SDARS and DAB (if fitted)
CD player
Hard disk drive/virtual CD player
USB and auxiliary connections.
There is a help and tutorial function to provide advice on using the system. The 'notepad' facility allows voice notes to
be recorded. Voice tags for phone dialling, radio stations and navigation locations allow the system to be
personalized.
The system allows the vehicle user to concentrate fully on driving the vehicle, without any need to divert their eyes
from the road ahead in order to check information read outs on the vehicle instrument panel information units. The
voice control system also feeds back audible information to the vehicle user.
The advanced Land Rover Voice system uses a 'visual prompter' system known as 'Say What You See' (SWYS). Each
of the Advanced Land Rover Voice functions are supported by 'Help' commands; saying "Help" at each point in the
conversation will give a context sensitive explanation of what the user can do at that point. The SWYS is shown in the
TSD.
Voice control is mainly a software based system. The software for controlling the voice system is resident in the IAM
and the TSD. The IAM and TSD each contain more than one voice control software component and communication
between the two modules is via the MOST ring. A voice control microphone is located in the front overhead console
and is hardwired to the IAM.
1 - Voice button
2 - Voice symbol
3 - SWYS command list
4 - When displayed, say Cancel to cancel the current voice session
5 - When displayed, say Help to get assistance during a voice session
Advanced Land Rover Voice is a key component of the Bluetooth® telephone system, allowing hands free control and
use of the Bluetooth® enabled phone.
NOTE: Telephony voice commands are only accessible when a Bluetooth® device is docked to the vehicle.
The system is operated by the voice button on the LH side of the steering wheel. Voice commands are detected by
the microphone in the overhead console. When giving a voice command audible feedback will be heard through the
vehicle’s audio speakers.
Efficient operation of Advanced Land Rover Voice is reliant on the user understanding some of the following basic
operating conditions;
Face forwards, sitting in a normal driving position

After pressing the voice button, always wait for the end of the audible tone before speaking
Speak naturally, as if you were talking to a passenger or on the phone without pausing between words
When the system asks for more information, always wait for the end of the tone before responding
Always say numbers clearly but at a natural pace
Excessive noise, for example while driving with windows open, may cause voice command mis-recognition. If it
is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized
Most accents are understood without difficulty, but if the system does not recognize the command it will respond
"SORRY" and allow two more attempts to say the command.
Voice feedback is given in the same language as the command recognition. It is possible to change the language of
the speech control system by changing the system language.
Starting a Voice Session
To start a voice session the driver must press the voice button briefly. An audible tone can be heard, followed by the
presentation of the voice command menu list in the SWYS pop-up in the TSD. A voice symbol alongside each item in
the list indicates that the system is listening for one of the available commands. Always wait for the listening tone
before using the command. To end the voice session press and hold the voice button.
When the voice button is pressed on the steering wheel, a voltage signal is received by the TSD via the clockspring.
The voltage is sent on a single wire through a resistive ladder. The voice system activation is processed on the MOST
ring, for example the voice menu list is retained in and presented by the TSD. The accompanying voice instruction is
sent to the audio power amplifier from the IAM on the MOST ring for broadcast over the vehicle speakers. When a
recognized user instruction is received by the IAM via the microphone, the instruction is processed by the IAM and
sent to the TSD to perform the required action.
Voice Tutorial
There is a voice tutorial that can be accessed either by giving the 'voice tutorial' command or by pressing the 'voice
tutorial' button located in the 'operating guide' option in the 'Voice settings' menu on the TSD. The tutorial gives
information on how to use the voice system, useful tips and how an experienced user can speed up their interaction
with the voice system by turning voice feedback off, using barge-in and saying shortcut commands.
Voice Training
The voice system allows two different users to create separate profiles, providing training for a User 1 and User 2.
Voice training is used to help the system recognize the users voice more accurately. When training is activated for
each user, a message is displayed to confirm that training is in progress for that user. The message informs the user
that voice training must be fully completed in order to activate the new voice profile and offers the option of 'OK' to
initiate the session and store data in that user profile, or 'Cancel' to return to the previous menu. Once activated,
another message indicates that training is in progress. Voice training phrases will be shown in the TSD voice menu
and the user will be requested to say each phrase after the listening tone.
NOTE: Voice training can only be conducted when the vehicle is stationary with the engine running and the
climate control NOT in defrost due background noise.
Voice tags and training are stored in a non-volatile memory in the IAM. Disconnection of the vehicle battery will not
cause any loss of data stored.
NOTES:
To enable new voice tags and training to be written to memory, a period of 10 minutes after the last ignition off
cycle must take place. Should the battery be disconnected before this time then the data may be lost.
If the IAM is replaced then all stored data will be lost. If either the IAM or TSD are replaced, it is recommended
that the vehicle language settings and voice language settings (if vehicle language is not supported by voice control)
are reset to the same setting.
Voice Tags
Voice tags allow the user to store voice entries as shortcuts to control dialling numbers (as well as to recall radio
stations and plot to navigation locations). The voice tags sub-menu accesses controls for navigation, telephone, radio
and DAB/SDARS (where fitted).
Phone Dial Number
Phone dial number allows the user to verbally enter a dial string into the voice system to allow the user to dial that
number using a connected Bluetooth® telephone.
Voice Caller Announce
When enabled in the Phone settings, the Voice system will announce the name of the incoming caller identity through
the system speakers.
Dialing from GP2 Phonebook
Provided the phonebook has been downloaded via Bluetooth®, the voice system is able to perform a grapheme-to-
phoneme (GP2) transcription of each of the names stored in the phonebook. This is then used by the voice system to
allow the user to use the 'phone dial contact' command to dial a contact by saying the name stored in the phonebook,
there is no need to store a voice tag first.
NOTE: The phonebook must be fully downloaded for speech to build a recognition dictionary. It does not use the
cached version that the phone does. This is why in some circumstances the phonebook can be seen on the TSD, but if
the phonebook has not yet been fully downloaded, then the voice system will give the audible error feedback 'this
function is currently unavailable'.
The users' voice command is matched against the phonebook entries and a list of likely recognition candidates is
displayed in a 'picklist' for the user to select from. If the chosen contact has more than one number associated with it,
the voice system will work with the user to determine the exact number they wish to dial.
NOTE: For regularly used contacts with more than one number, the user can store a voice tag as a shortcut.
Command List
A full list of all shortcut voice commands can be found on the TSD by pressing the 'command list' button in the 'voice
settings' menu. Select a device name from the list to see all the shortcut commands available to interact with that
device. Pressing the 'i' button next to any command shows alternative ways of saying the same command.
Navigation Destination Entry by Voice
Destination entry uses phonetic transcriptions of the navigation data (stored as part of the map data) to offer the user
the ability to enter an address or postcode into the Navigation system by voice. The user simply follows the visual and
audible instructions given by the voice system and enters their desired address in a step-by-step manner (e.g. city,
then street, then house number). At each address entry stage, the user's voice command is matched against the
phonetic map data and a list of likely recognition candidates is presented in a "picklist" for the user to select from. If
the chosen address has more than one location associated with it, the voice system will work with the user to
determine the exact address they wish to navigate to.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
CONTROL DIAGRAM - LO-LINE AUDIO BLUETOOTH® TELEPHONE SYSTEM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N= Medium Speed CAN bus; P = MOST; AB = Bluetooth®

1 - Battery
4 - Customer telephone
6 - Clockspring
9 - Multi-function display
10 - Microphone
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MID-LINE, HI-LINE AND PREMIUM AUDIO BLUETOOTH® TELEPHONE SYSTEM
1 - Battery
2 - EJB
3 - CJB
4 - Audio power amplifier
5 - TV tuner (Reference only)
6 - Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) module (Reference only)
7 - DAB/SDARS receiver (Reference only)
9 - Steering wheels switches
10 - Clockspring
12 - MOST diagnostic connector
13 - Microphone
14 - Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
16 - Customer telephone
Cellular Phone - Cellular Phone Antenna Vehicles With: Metal Roof
Panel
Removal
NOTE: For certain markets, the SDARS antenna is also part of the cellular phone antenna.

Disconnect the interior light electrical
connector.
2. If installed remove the LH third row seat passenger assist

handle.
Carefully release the screw covers.
3. If installed, remove the RH third row seat

passenger assist handle.
Carefully release the screw covers.
4. Release the rear of the headliner.

5. Remove the cellular phone antenna.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the cellular phone antenna.
2. Attach the rear of the headliner.

3. Install the RH third row seat passenger assist handle, if

installed.
Tighten the screws.
Attach the covers.
4. Install the LH third row seat passenger assist handle, if

installed.
Tighten the screws.
Attach the covers.

Cellular Phone - Cellular Phone Antenna Vehicles With: Glass Roof
Panel
Special Tool(s)
Torx bit, phone/SDARS antenna
419-002
Removal
NOTE: For certain markets, the SDARS antenna is also part of the cellular phone antenna.

Disconnect the interior light electrical
connector.
2. Remove the cellular phone antenna.

Using the special tool, remove the 2
Torx bolts.
Installation
1. Install the cellular phone antenna.

Cellular Phone - Transceiver Module
Removal
1. Remove the RH lower rear quarter trim panel.
Refer to: Rear Quarter Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim

and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2.
3. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Door Module (DDM)
For a detailed description of the Driver/Passenger door systems and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation sections in the workshop manual.

Visusal Inspection
Switches/mechanisms Fuses
Electrical connectors
Harnesses
Modules
Index.
DTC Index
For a list of DTCs that may be logged on this vehicle, refer to the DTC Index in section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM) (100-00
General Information, Description and Operation).
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Seat Module (DSM)
For a detailed description of the Driver/Passenger seat systems and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation sections in the workshop manual.

Visusal Inspection
Switches/mechanisms Fuses
Electrical connectors
Harnesses
Modules
Index.
DTC Index
For a list of DTCs that may be logged on this vehicle, refer to the DTC Index in section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Driver/Passenger Front Seat Module (DSM/PSM) (100-00
Multifunction Electronic Modules - Driver Seat Module (DSM)
Removal
1. Remove the front seat cushion front access
cover.
2. CAUTION: Note of the routing of the

wiring harnesses.
NOTE: Raise the seat base for access.
Remove the driver seat module.

Release the harness clip.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harnesses are

correctly routed.
Install the driver seat module.

Attach the wiring harness clip.
Install and tighten the Torx screws.
2. Install the access cover.

3. If a new moduule has been installed, carry out initialization.

Using each adjustment switch in turn, move the seat
fully in all directions.
Winch - Winch - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
Winch - Winch - Overview
OVERVIEW
The 9.5XP winch is manufactured by WARN in the U.S.A. The winch features a 6 Horse Power (HP) High Output
Parallel Series Wound winch motor.
The winch has 3-stage planetary gearing and full-face contact drum seals, motor and end housing gaskets for
extreme duty water resistance.
SPECIFICATIONS:
WARN Part number: 70100 (12V)

Rated Line Pull: 9,500 lbs. (4310 kgs) single-line
Intended Use/Application: Vehicle Recovery
Motor: 12V 6 hp, High Output Parallel Series Wound
Remote Control: Remote switch, 12' (3.7m) lead
Geartrain: 3-Stage Planetary Gear Ratio: 156:1
Lubrication: 76 Moly low temperature
Clutch (freespooling): Sliding Ring Gear
Brake: Automatic Direct Drive Cone
Wire Rope: 100', 5/16" diameter (30m, 8mm diam.)
Fairlead: Hawse
Recommended Battery: 650 CCA minimum for winching
Battery Leads: 2 gauge, 85" (2.20m)
Finish: High-gloss dark gray powder coat
Drum Diameter/Length: 2.5"/9.0" (6.4cm/23cm)
Weight: 87 lbs. (39.5 kgs.) (winch only, not including mounting cradle).
12V DC PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS:
Line Pull Lbs.(Kgs.) Line Speed FT./min(M/min.) Motor Current Pull by Layer: Layer/Lbs(Kgs.)
0 38 (11.6) 70 Amps 1/9500 (4313)
2000 (910) 16.8 (5.1) 175 Amps 2/8650 (4927)
4000 (1818) 12.8 (3.9) 262 Amps 3/7920 (3595)
6000 (2720) 10.1 (3.1) 335 Amps 4/7400 (3359)
8000 (3630) 8.8 (2.7) 425 Amps 5/6940 (3150)
9500 (4310) 7.6 (2.3) 480 Amps -
The above performance figures are based on the first layer of the drum.
Winch - Winch - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
Vehicle connection
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Battery Junction Box (BJB)
3 Central Junction Box (CJB)
4 Harness connector (C2053-12 LR3 or C2754S-13 LR4) (ref only)
5 Floor console cool box (ref only)
6 Remote control
7 Remote control socket
8 Winch motor ground
9 Winch motor
10 Control box
11 Winch power interrupt solenoid ground
12 Winch power interrupt solenoid
Winch Schematic Electrical Circuit Diagram
Item Description
A Field
B Armature
C Black wire
D White wire
E Green wire
F Brown wire
G Red wire
H Remote control assembly
I Winch power interrupt solenoid
J Ignition power supply - Blue wire
Winch Motor/Control Box Connections
Item Description
1 Field cable F1
2 Armature cable A
3 Black wire
4 Green wire
5 Motor ground wire
6 Battery positive (+) cable
7 Battery positive (+) cable terminal
8 Field cable F2
9 Field cable F1
10 Field cable F2
11 Armature cable A
System Operation
OPERATION
WARNING: Observe all Warnings and Cautions detailed in the WARN Winch Operator's Guide and the WARN
Basic Guide to Winching Techniques before and during winch operation.
The winch motor is powered by the vehicle battery. The motor provides rotational power to the gear mechanism,
which in turn rotates the winch drum and winds the cable.
A remote control is used to operate the winch. The remote lead plugs into a remote control connector which is
connected to the control box and allows the operator to control the winch winding direction while standing at a safe
distance from the wire rope.
The clutch allows rope to be pulled off the drum without motor operation. Refer to the WARN Basic Guide to
Winching Techniques.
DESCRIPTION
Winch
Item Description
1 Motor
2 Winch drum and wire rope
3 Latching hook
4 Fairlead
5 Gear train housing
6 Clutch lever
7 Remote control socket
The winch is mounted on a bracket which is attached to the vehicle chassis frame. Two additional brackets are
attached to the front bumper armature mounting plates. The brackets allow the attachment of the winch mounting
bracket. The winch is secured to the bracket with four bolts, washers and nuts.
The winch control box is located on the rear of the front bumper armature. Two additional holes are drilled in the
armature and the control box is attached with two bolts, washers and nuts.
The winch control box manages the power supplies to the winch motor and also receives the input from the remote
control for winch operation. A remote control socket is located at the LH (left-hand) end of the winch mounting
bracket and allows for the connection of the remote control.
The winch will operate with the ignition on and the engine not running, but this is not recommended due to excessive
battery drain. Therefore it is recommended that the engine is running at all times when the winch is in operation.
Winch/Vehicle Electrical Connections
A blue wire from the winch remote control socket is routed via a joint below the EJB (engine junction box), through
the vehicle bulkhead grommet behind the EJB. The blue wire is then routed behind the glove compartment and along
the floor console to connector C0253-12 on LR3 vehicles (up to VIN 513325) and C2754S-13 on LR4 vehicles (from
VIN 513326), which is located below the cup holder, behind the transmission selector lever. The wire is spliced into
the green/white wire into the connector. This connection on the blue wire provides an ignition on signal to the winch
control box when the remote control is plugged in.
A red cable is attached from the battery positive (+) terminal to the positive terminal on the winch power interrupt
solenoid. This connection is the main power supply to the winch power interrupt solenoid for the winch motor and
control box. The winch power interrupt solenoid is located on the plenum in the driver's side of the engine
compartment.
A white wire from the winch remote control socket is connected to the winch power interrupt solenoid and energizes
the solenoid relay when the ignition on signal is received. A large red wire from the winch power interrupt solenoid is
routed to the winch control box. Power is not supplied to the winch control box until the remote control is connected
to the remote control socket and the ignition is on.
Winch Power Interrupt Solenoid

Item Description
1 Power to winch motor
2 Ground
3 Solenoid power supply (ignition on)
4 Power supply from vehicle battery
Winch Exploded View
Item Description
1 End housing assembly
2 Clutch lever
3 Nylon thrust washer
4 Housing gasket
5 Socket head capscrew (10 off)
6 Gear support drum
7 Ring gear
8 Planet carrier assembly (stage 1)
11 Sun gear
12 Drive shaft
13 Drum bushing
14 V-ring seal
15 Drive spline
16 Brake assembly
17 Motor coupler
18 Drum assembly
19 V-ring seal
20 Drum bushing
21 Motor drum support
22 Motor gasket
23 Tie rod (2 off)
24 Socket head cap screw (4 off)
25 Motor (4.5" Series wound)
26 Electrical cable (black)
27 Helical washer
28 Hex head cap screw
29 Button head cap screw
30 Terminal kit
31 Control pack cover
32 High current solenoid - Power in (2 off)
33 Solenoid - Power out (2 off)
34 Electrical cable (red)
35 Control pack 9.5XP
36 Wire rope assembly
37 Latching hook
38 Remote control assembly
39 Nut (3 off)
40 Fairlead Hawse (roller type shown)
41 Remote control socket assembly
NOTE: The WARN part numbers for the above components are listed on the WARN web site: www.warn.com
Winch - Winch
For a detailed description of the winch system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual. REFER to: (419-12 Winch)
Winch (Description and Operation),

Winch (Description and Operation),
Winch (Description and Operation).
WARNING: Observe all Warnings and Cautions detailed in the WARN Winch Operator's Guide before and
during winch operation.
modules does not guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being
tested and/or the donor vehicle.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity.

Visual Inspection
Incorrect installation Fuses
Winch motor Battery (650 CCA minimum)
Gearbox Loose, corroded or damaged electrical connections
Wire rope Winch power interrupt solenoid
Control box
Remote control
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible causes Action

No winch operation Battery/power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, check the
ground supply winch power interrupt solenoid supply fused link
fault ((Fuse 16 to vin 513325)(Fuse 59p from vin
Remote control 513326)) central junction box
internal failure For midtronics battery test GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Control box For remote control circuit checks GO to Pinpoint Test
internal failure C.
Winch motor For winch circuit checks GO to Pinpoint Test B.
internal failure
No winch operation Battery/power or For midtronics battery test GO to Pinpoint Test A.

(Clicking sound when ground supply For winch circuit checks GO to Pinpoint Test B.
remote control switch is fault
activated) Control box
internal failure
Winch lacks power, pulls Battery/power or For midtronics battery test GO to Pinpoint Test A.
slowly, stalls ground supply For winch circuit checks GO to Pinpoint Test B.
fault
Winch motor
internal failure
Gearbox internal
failure
When the remote control Battery/power or For remote control circuit checks GO to Pinpoint Test
is activated, winch ground supply C.
operates in only one fault For winch circuit checks GO to Pinpoint Test B.
direction Remote control
internal failure
Control box
internal failure
Difficulty in spooling rope Wire rope Confirm the rope is spooled correctly onto the drum
from drum by hand incorrectly wound Install a new winch as required.
on drum REFER to: Winch (419-12 Winch, Removal and
(Rubbing/binding) Installation).
Distorted drum Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual,
flange or determine if any prior approval programme is in
Worn drum operation, prior to the installation of a new
bushes module/component
Damaged free Install a new winch gearbox as required.

spool clutch REFER to: Winch Gear Assembly (419-12, Removal
(inside gear train and Installation).
Corroded clutch Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual,
ring gear or determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
Winch does not hold load Rope is spooled Confirm the rope is spooled correctly onto the drum
onto the drum in Confirm the clutch is fully engaged
the wrong Install a new winch as required.
direction REFER to: Winch (419-12 Winch, Removal and
Winch drum Installation).
brake is worn or Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual,
broken or determine if any prior approval programme is in
module/component
Remote control fault Winch remote For remote control circuit checks GO to Pinpoint Test
connector C.
terminals
damaged
Remote switch
internal failure
Clutch lever fault Cable under load Rotate clutch lever on winch. If clutch lever will not
Clutch or gearbox rotate, remove tension from the rope and hook by
mechanism powering out for about 1 second
internal failure Attempt to rotate the clutch lever with tension
removed. If clutch lever still does not rotate, Install a
new winch gearbox as required.
REFER to: Winch Gear Assembly (419-12, Removal
and Installation).
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual,
or determine if any prior approval programme is in
module/component
PINPOINT TEST A : BATTERY TEST

CONDITIONS
A1: MIDTRONICS BATTERY TEST
1 Confirm that the vehicle battery charged, in good condition, and the correct specification
(650 CCA minimum)
2 Using a Midtronics hand held tester or the Midtronics GR-1 diagnostic charger, carry out the
"Midtronics battery test" as detailed in the battery care manual. Refer to
(Service/Maintenance information/Battery care manual)
3 Record battery diagnostic result on the provided form
Does the battery pass the "Midtronics battery test"?
Yes
Check for correct operation, refer to the symptom chart above if customer concern is still
evident
No
Install a new battery as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component. Check for correct winch operation
PINPOINT TEST B : CIRCUIT CHECKS

CONDITIONS
B1: WINCH POWER INTERRUPT SOLENOID - CONNECTIONS
NOTES:
The winch power interrupt solenoid supplies power to the winch control box
The ignition feed is supplied to the remote control connector (terminal 5) linked internally to (terminal
6) then supplied to (solenoid terminal 3) to energize the winch power interrupt solenoid
1 Refer to the landrover electrical circuit diagrams, check the winch power interrupt solenoid
supply fused link (Fuse 16 to vin 513325)(Fuse 59p from vin 513326) central junction box
2
Refer to the winch circuit diagrams
REFER to: Winch (419-12 Winch, Description and Operation).
3 Confirm the circuit connections to the winch power interrupt solenoid (Terminal 1 - power
to winch control box, Terminal 2 - solenoid ground, Terminal 3 - solenoid power
((C2053-12 to vin 513325)(C2754S-13 from vin 513326)), Terminal 4 - battery
supply)
Are all the electrical connections to the winch power interrupt solenoid clean and secure?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Clean and secure the electrical connections. Check for correct winch operation
B2: WINCH POWER INTERRUPT SOLENOID - OPERATION
1 With the ignition state on, and the remote control connected
2 Using a multimeter, check for battery voltage between terminal 1 (power to winch control
box) and terminal 2 (winch power interrupt solenoid ground)
Is battery voltage present? (approx. 12 volts)
Yes
GO to B3.
No
Replace the winch power interrupt solenoid as required.
REFER to: Winch Solenoid (419-12, Removal and Installation).
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new module/component. Check for
correct winch operation
B3: POWER SUPPLY - CONTROL BOX
WARNING: Ensure the winch clutch is in free spool mode (Refer to winch operation manual)
NOTE: The winch power interrupt solenoid supplies power to the winch control box
1 With the ignition state on, and the remote control connected
2 Using a multimeter, check for battery voltage between the red power feed to the control
box and vehicle ground
Is battery voltage present? (approx. 12 volts)
Yes
GO to B4.
No
Carry out circuit checks to investigate the loss of supply. Rectify as required. Check for
B4: CONTROL BOX INPUT - REMOTE CONTROL
NOTES:
The winch control box controls the winch motor direction
Power out - The remote control supplies power to remote connector terminal 2 and grounds terminal 1
Power in - The remote control supplies power to remote connector terminal 4 and grounds terminal 1
1 Refer to the winch circuit diagrams
2 Using a multimeter, monitor terminal 2 (Black), terminal 4 (Green) and terminal 1
(White)
Do the terminals 2 and 4 (Power) and terminal 1 (Ground) respond correctly when the remote
control is used?
Yes
GO to B5.
No
Carry out circuit checks to investigate the loss of supply. Rectify as required. Check for
B5: CONTROL BOX - OUTPUT
NOTES:
When activated the winch control box supplies power to the winch motor
Power out - The control box supplies power to the winch motor terminal F1 and connects winch motor
terminal F2 to terminal A(Armature)
Power in - The control box supplies power to the winch motor terminal F2 and connects winch motor
terminal F1 to terminal A(Armature)
2 Using a multimeter, monitor terminals F1, F2
Do the terminals F1, and F2 respond correctly when the remote control is used?
Yes
GO to B6.
No
Check the connections to the control box. If all the connections are clean and secure, install
a new control box as required.
REFER to: Winch Control Unit (419-12, Removal and Installation).
B6: MOTOR CONNECTIONS
2 Check the connections to the winch motor
Are all the connections clean and secure?
Yes
GO to B7.
No
Clean and secure the electrical connections. Check for correct winch operation
B7: WINCH MOTOR TEST
1 Disconnect the positive lead from the battery (leave the ground lead attached)
2 Label and disconnect the three cables that run from the control pack to the three posts on
the winch motor
3 Stamped next to the three posts on the winch motor will be A, F1 and F2. Connect a test
cable (Jump leads work well) from A to F1 and supply power from the battery to F2. The
winch motor should operate
4 Connect a test cable from A to F2 and supply power from the battery to F1. The winch
motor should operate in the opposite direction
Does the winch motor operate in both directions?
Yes
evident
No
Check the connections to the winch motor. If all the connections are clean and secure, install
a new winch motor as required.
REFER to: Winch Motor (419-12 Winch, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST C : REMOTE CONTROL

CONDITIONS
C1: REMOTE CONTROL - CONTINUITY TEST
NOTES:
Visually inspect the winch remote connector terminals for damage, repair or replace as required
The winch remote should be tested for continuity using a multimeter

1 With the winch remote disconnected check for continuity, using the instructions below
2 Move the switch to the power out position - Check for continuity between terminals (1) and
(3), Check for continuity between terminals (2) and (6)
3 Move the switch to the power in position - Check for continuity between terminals (1) and
(3), Check for continuity between terminals (4) and (6)
Did the winch remote pass the continuity test (Resistance less than 1 ohm)?
Yes
evident
No
Install a new winch remote as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual,
or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a
new module/component. Check for correct winch operation
Winch - Winch
Removal
NOTES:

2.
3.
4. CAUTION: To prevent damage to

components, use an additional wrench when
loosening or tightening terminals.
NOTE: Note the position of the wiring

harnesses to aid installation.
Torque: 25 Nm
5.
Torque: 40 Nm
6.
Raise the motor end of the winch to
gain access to the winch ground point.
7.
8.
Torque: 25 Nm
9. WARNING: This step requires the aid of

another technician.
Installation

Winch - Winch Motor
Removal

2. Refer to: Winch (419-12 Winch, Removal and Installation).
3. CAUTIONS:
If the armature is dislodged from the

motor, the motor brushes will need to be reset
to allow reinstallation.
Make sure that the armature shaft is

removed with the motor housing.
Use a suitable tool if required to move

the armature with the motor.
Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

Front End Body Panels -
Engine undershield bolts 62 46
Front fender bolts 10 7
Front fender nut 10 7
Front End Body Panels - Fender
Removal
Specifications).


4. Remove the fender splash shield.

5. Remove the fender moulding.

For additional information, refer to: Front Fender Moulding
Installation).
6. Remove the fender lower moulding.

7. Remove the fender air intake grille.

Remove the air ducting.
8. Remove the front fender.

Remove the nut.
Remove the fender rear trim.

Remove the 3 clips.
Installation
1. Install the fender rear trim.
2. Install the front fender.

Install the nut and tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft)
3. Install the fender air intake grille.

Install the air ducting.
4. Install the lower fender moulding.

5. Install the fender moulding.

Installation).
6. Install the fender splash shield.




Specifications).
Front End Body Panels - Fender Splash Shield
Removal

safety stands.

Installation).
3. Remove the fender splash shield.

Remove the 6 retainers.

Remove the tire pressure antenna.

Remove the 2 retainers.
Installation
1. Install the tire pressure antenna.
Install the retainers.

Install the retainers.
Install the screws.
3. Install the fender moulding.

Installation).
Front End Body Panels - Engine Undershield
Removal

safety stands.
2. CAUTION: Note the special washer.
Remove the engine undershield.

Remove the 10 bolts.
Installation
Body Closures - Body Closures
Body Protection
WARNING: The weight of the armoured components fitted to the vehicle are far in excess of those fitted to the
standard vehicle. As an example, the windshield weighs approximately 100 Kg (220 lb). Therefore, always be aware
of the weight of components and have suitable lifting equipment available before attempting to remove any
component from the vehicle.
Body Shell
Armoured cell
The vehicle passengers are protected by a steel armoured cell assembled inside the vehicle’s bodywork. The cell
provides armoured protection to the following areas of the vehicle:
Bulkhead
Roof
Rear three-quarter panels
'A' posts
'B/C' posts
'D' posts
Sills
Floor pan
In addition to the floor pan armour, floor protection is also provided by a woven Kevlar blanket, available as an
optional fit.
Armoured cell in position

Doors and Tailgate
The vehicle’s doors are reinforced with steel armour, with the exception of the tailgate which remains standard. The
armoured cell offers rear-end protection to the vehicle’s occupants with the option of either:
a solid armoured rear end with armoured window; or

an armoured rear access with armoured window.
Armoured cell rear-access

1 - Upper access panel - gas struts
2 - Upper access panel - dead locks
3 - Upper access panel – internal release lever
4 - Lower access panel – gas struts
5 - Lower access panel – internal release handle
6 - Upper access panel – external release lever
7 - Lower access panel
8 - Upper access panel - grab handle
9 - Upper access panel
10 - Armoured glass window *
*
The armoured access option replicates the vehicle’s tailgate by having upper and lower access panels. The access
panels can be opened manually both internally and externally if the dead-locks are in the unlocked position. Gas
struts fitted to the access panels aid their opening and reduce involuntary shutting.
Tailgate interior release button

A release button fitted to the interior of the vehicle’s upper standard tailgate provides access to the tailgate from
inside the vehicle. The release button is a momentary type switch, wired in parallel to the standard release switch on
the exterior tailgate handle.
The door hinges, spindles and door stop mechanisms, on the driver and passenger doors are reinforced to support
the additional weight of the armour. Gas struts have been fitted to aid door opening and reduce involuntary shutting.
CAUTION: It is recommended that the driver and passenger doors are not opened until the vehicle has come to
a complete stop. The combined effect of the vehicle’s residual speed and the weight of the door could overcome the
door stop mechanism.
Body Closures - Liftgate Alignment
General Procedures
1. With the liftgate closed, check the alignment of

the liftgate to roof panel. The liftgate should be
central in its aperture. Profile of the liftgate to
roof panel should be 2 mm below flush.

3. Loosen, but do not remove both liftgate hinge

to body bolts.
4. Position the liftgate central to the aperture.
5. Remove the LH liftgate to body bolt.
6. CAUTION: When setting the liftgate profile, make sure

that the liftgate hinge NOT being adjusted has its retaining
bolt fitted.
NOTE: Turning the Allen key clockwise will raise the

liftgate.
Using a 13 mm Allen key, adjust the LH liftgate hinge until

a profile of 2 mm below flush to the roof panel is achieved.
7. Repeat the above procedure for the RH liftgate hinge.
8. Check for correct operation of the liftgate, and if necessary

adjust the liftgate and tailgate strikers.

Body Closures - Fuel Filler Door Assembly
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the fuel filler interlock catch assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Filler Interlock
Catch (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
3. WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated,

quarantined area and arrange ' No
Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the vehicle.
Do not carry or operate cellular phones

when working on or near any fuel related
components. Highly flammable vapors are
always present and may ignite. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Remove the fuel filler door and inner assembly.

Open the fuel filler door and remove the
cap.
Using a 2mm metal rod, pierce the
inner assembly and release the 4 clips.
Release from the filler neck.
Replace the filler cap.
4. Remove the fuel filler door.

Release the clip.
Installation
1. Install the filler door.
2. Install the fuel filler door assembly.

Install the filler cap.
Close the fuel filler door.
3. Install the fuel filler interlock catch assembly.


Specifications).
Body Closures - Fuel Filler Interlock Catch
Removal
Specifications).

and Installation).
3. Remove the fuel filler interlock catch assembly.

Remove the clip.
Release the cable.
4. Remove the solenoid.

Release the cable.

Release and remove the cable.

Release the clip.
Installation
1. Install the cable.
Secure the clip.
2. Install the solenoid.

Attach the cable.
Install the Torx screws.
3. Install the fuel filler flap latch assembly.


and Installation).

Specifications).
Body Closures - Liftgate
Removal

Specifications).


other side.

6. Disconnect the washer jet hose.

7. Release the liftgate wiring harness.

8. With assistance, remove the liftgate assembly.
Release the clips and disconnect the
struts.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Installation
1. With assistance, install the liftgate assembly.
Connect the struts and secure with the clips.
2. Attach the liftgate wiring harness.

3. Connect the washer jet hose.




Specifications).
7. Check and adjust the liftgate to roof panel profile.

For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Alignment (501-
03 Body Closures, General Procedures).
Interior Trim and Ornamentation -
Safety belt lower anchorage to seat Torx bolt 40 30
Tailgate support strut spigot 25 18
C-pillar lower trim panel Torx screw 8 6
C-pillar upper trim panel Torx screw 3 2
A-pillar trim panel Torx screw 3 2
* Safety belt anchorage Torx bolt 40 30
Foot rest nuts 10 7
* New bolt must be fitted
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Engine Cover V6 4.0L Petrol
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
3. NOTE: Note the fitted position of the

spacers
Remove the engine cover.

Remove the 4 nuts.
Collect the spacers.
4. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is

removed for access only.
Remove the acoustic pad.

Remove the 7 clips.
Remove the 4 mounts and compression limiters.
Installation
1. Install the acoustic pad.
Position and secure the clips.
Install the grommets.
Install the compression limiters.

Install the spacers.

Specifications).
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Engine Cover V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal

always correct.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Engine Cover TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
1. Remove the oil filler cap.
2.
Installation
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Quarter Trim Panel
Removal
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest.
2. Release the door aperture weatherstrip.
3. Release the safety belt anchor.

Remove and discard the bolt.
4. Release the tailgate aperture seal.

5. Remove the support spigot from the tailgate.
Release the clip.
6. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.

Remove the Torx screw.
Lift the storage box lid and using a firm
grip, release the window clips by pulling
the trim inboard.
Release the remaining 6 plastic clips
using a suitable tool.

Remove the stowage tray.

Release the cover.
8. Remove the audio control switch.

9. Remove the accessory socket.
Installation
1. Install the accessory socket.
2. Install the audio control switch.

Secure the clips.
3. Install the stowage tray.

Install the cover.
4. Install the rear quarter trim panel.

Install the clips.
Tighten the Torx screw to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft).
5. Install the support spigot to the tailgate.

Install the clip.
6. Install the tailgate aperture seal.
7. Install the safety belt anchor.

8. Install the door aperture weatherstrip.
9. Return the seat backrest to the upright position.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - A-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
1. Release the door weatherstrip to access the A-
pillar upper trim panel and instrument panel
end panel.
2. Remove the instrument panel end panel.

Release the clip.
3. Remove the A-pillar upper trim panel.

Remove and discard the Torx screw.
Release the clip.

Remove the screw retainer and clip from the A-

pillar upper trim panel.
Installation
1. Install the screw retainer and clip to the A-pillar upper trim
panel.
2. Install the A-pillar upper trim panel.

Install a new Torx screw and tighten to 3 Nm (2
lb.ft).
3. Install the instrument panel end panel.

4. Attach the door weatherstrip.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Cowl Side Trim Panel
Removal
1. Remove the front scuff plate trim panel.
Installation).
2. Driver side: Remove the footrest trim panel

bolt.
Remove the cover.

Driver side: Release the hood release
lever.
Installation
Align the hood release lever.
2. Driver side: Tighten the footrest trim panel bolt to 5 Nm (4

lb.ft).
Install the cover.
3. Install the front scuff plate trim panel.

Installation).
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel
Removal
Operation).
2. Remove the B-pillar lower trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Lower Trim
and Installation).
3. Release the safety belt lower anchor from the

seat.
Remove the bolt cover.
Passenger side, disconnect the electrical
connector.
4. NOTE: Make sure the seat belt height

adjuster is at its lowest point prior to removal
of the B-pillar upper trim panel.
Remove the B-pillar upper trim panel.

Release the front and rear door
weatherstrips for access.
Release the 2 lower clips, then the
remaining upper clip.
Release the safety belt.
Installation
1. Install the B-pillar upper trim panel.
Attach the safety belt.
Attach the door weatherstrips.
2. Attach the safety belt lower anchor to the seat.

Passenger side, connect the electrical connector.
Install the bolt cover.
3. Install the B-pillar lower trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Lower Trim
and Installation).
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel
Removal
Release weatherstrip from both sides of
the B-pillar lower trim panel.

Remove 4 clips from the B-pillar lower trim

panel.
Installation
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - D-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
and Installation).
2. Vehicles fitted with 7 seats: Release the seat belt.

3. Remove the D-pillar upper trim panel.


Remove the speaker.

Installation
Tighten the new Torx bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - C-Pillar Lower Trim Panel
Removal
2. Remove the loadspace trim panel RH. For additional

information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05
4. Release the safety belt anchor.

5. Release the tailgate aperture seal.

6. Remove the support spigot from the tailgate.
Release the clip.

Remove the screw.

Remove the stowage tray.

Release the cover.
9. Remove the audio control switch.

10. Remove the accessory socket.
Installation
1. Install the accessory socket.
2. Install the audio control switch.

Secure the clips.
3. Install the stowage tray.

Install the cover.

Install the clips.
Tighten the screw to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft).
5. Install the support spigot to the tailgate.

Install the clip.
6. Install the tailgate aperture seal.
7. Install the safety belt anchor.

9. Remove the loadspace trim panel RH. For additional

information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - C-Pillar Upper Trim Panel
Removal
3. Release the safety belt lower anchor.

Remove and discard the Torx bolt.
4. Release the upper trim access cover.
5. Remove the C-pillar upper trim panel.

Remove and discard the Torx screw.
Release the safety belt from the seat.

Remove the 4 clips from the C-pillar upper trim

panel.
Installation
1. Install the clips to the C-pillar upper trim panel.
2. Install the C-pillar upper trim panel.

Attach the safety belt.
Install a new Torx screw and tighten to 3 Nm (2
lb.ft).
3. Install the upper trim access cover.
4. Install the safety belt lower anchor.


Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Door Trim Panel
Removal
NOTES:
1. CAUTIONS:

component.
Make sure that the clips are correctly

located.
Disconnect the tweeter speaker electrical

connector.
2.
3.
4. CAUTIONS:

component. Apply masking tape to the end of
the screwdriver.
When removing the chrome finisher from

the trim panel, make sure the components are
not damaged. If necessary protect the
surrounding areas using masking tape.

located.
5. CAUTIONS:

the screwdriver.


located.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Detach the front door trim panel.
12.
13.
14.
15. CAUTION: Make sure that the release
cable is removed from the door trim panel using
the plastic fixing and not using the cable.
16.

19.
20.
21.
22.
23. Release the retaining tang.
24.
Installation
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Door Trim Panel
Removal
NOTES:
1.
2.
3. CAUTIONS:

the screwdriver.


located.
4. CAUTIONS:

the screwdriver.


located.
5.
6.
7.
Detach the rear door trim panel.
9.
10.
11. CAUTION: Make sure that the release

cable is removed from the door trim panel using
the plastic fixing and not using the cable.
12.

15.
16.
17.
18. Release the retaining tang.

19.
Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Liftgate Trim Panel
Removal
Remove the screw.
2. Remove the liftgate striker trim panel.

Remove 6 clips from the liftgate trim panel.
Installation
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Tailgate Trim Panel
Removal
1. Remove the tailgate upper trim panel.
Remove the 4 screw covers.
2. CAUTION: To protect the paintwork, the

tailgate must be supported at all times.
Release the 2 support cables from the tailgate.

3. Remove the 2 support cable spigots from the tailgate.
4. Lift the tailgate hinge cover for access.


Remove the 12 clips from the tailgate trim

panel.
Installation
Install the clips.
2. Lower the tailgate hinge cover.
3. Tighten the support strut spigot to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
4. Position the support cables to the tailgate and secure with

the clips.
5. Install the tailgate upper trim panel.

Install the screws.
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Removal
NOTES:
Some components shown removed for clarity.
RH shown, LH similar.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel
Installation).
2. CAUTION: Care must be taken when releasing the trim

panel from the retaining clips.
Installation
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Headliner
Removal
1. Remove both A-pillar upper trim panels.
Installation).
2. Remove both B-pillar upper trim panels.

and Installation).
3. Remove both C-pillar upper trim panels.

and Installation).
4. Remove both D-pillar upper trim panels.

Installation).
5. Remove the front overhead console.

6. Remove the rear overhead console.

7. Disconnect the RH A-pillar electrical connector.
8. Remove the sun visor.

Remove the cover.
Release from the clip.
other side.

Remove the screw.
other side.
10. Remove the passenger assist handle.
Release the 2 screw covers.
remaining 5 handles.
11. Position the front seats fully forward.
12. Position the rear seats fully forward.

14. Disconnect the headliner wiring harness rear

15. With assistance, carefully remove the

headliner.
Remove the rear interior lamp.

Release the clip.
other side.
17. Remove the headliner wiring harness.
Installation
1. Install the headliner wiring harness.
Secure the wiring harness to the headliner.
2. Install the interior lamp.

3. With assistance, carefully install the headliner.

4. Connect the headliner wiring harness rear electrical

connector.

Secure the clips.
6. Reposition the rear seats.
7. Reposition the front seats.
8. Install the passenger assist handles.

Install the screws.
Secure the screw covers.
9. Install the sun visors.
Install the clips.
Install the screws.
10. Connect the RH A-pillar electrical connector.
11. Install the rear overhead console.

12. Install the front overhead console.

13. Install both D-pillar upper trim panels.

Installation).
14. Install both C-pillar upper trim panels.

and Installation).
15. Install both B-pillar upper trim panels.

and Installation).
16. Install both A-pillar upper trim panels.

Installation).
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Loadspace Trim Panel RH
Removal
1. Remove the loadspace floor panels.
Lift and remove the front panel.
Lift and remove the rear panel.
2. Remove the loadspace compartment anchors.

Remove the bolt.
other anchor.
3. Remove the loadspace trim panel.


Remove the 2 clips.
Installation
1. Install the clips.
2. Install the loadspace trim panel.
Secure the clips.
Position the locating pegs.
3. Install the loadspace compartment anchors.

Position the locating peg.
Repeat the above procedure for the other anchor.
4. Install the loadspace floor panels.

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Door Trim Veneer
Removal
NOTES:
1. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the component.
Make sure that the clips are correctly located.
Disconnect the tweeter speaker electrical connector.
2.
3.
4. CAUTIONS:

Apply masking tape to the end of the screwdriver.
When removing the chrome finisher from the
trim panel, make sure the components are not
damaged. If necessary protect the surrounding
areas using masking tape.
5. CAUTIONS:


6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the

wiring harnesses.
Detach the front door trim panel.

12.
13.
14.
15. CAUTION: Make sure that the release cable is
removed from the door trim panel using the plastic
fixing and not using the cable.
16.
18.
19. Release the retaining tang and remove the veneer.
20. Release the retaining tangs.

Installation

Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Door Trim Veneer
Removal
NOTES:
1.
2.
3. CAUTIONS:


4. CAUTIONS:

5.
6.
7.
8. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.
Detach the rear door trim panel.
9.
10.
11. CAUTION: Make sure that the release cable is

removed from the door trim panel using the plastic
fixing and not using the cable.
12.
14.
15. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur,
but the essential information is always correct.
Release the retaining tang and remove the veneer.
16. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur,

but the essential information is always correct.
Release the retaining tangs.

Installation

Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - A-Pillar Moulding LH
Removal
NOTE: This procedure is also applicable for the RH moulding.
1. Open 2. Remove the

the A-pillar
bonnet. moulding.
Release
and
discard
the 5
clips.
Installation
1. NOTE: The lower clip is unique to the others and must only be installed to the lowest position
on the moulding.

1. New clips must be used.
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Front Fender Moulding
Removal

safety stands.
3. Remove the mud flap.

4. Remove the 4 retainers.


Remove the clips from the moulding.

Installation

Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Quarter Panel Moulding
Removal
1. Remove the mud flap.
2. Remove the rear quarter panel moulding.

Remove the 3 clips from the underside
of the moulding.
Release the 6 clips from the rear quarter
panel.

Remove the clips from the moulding.
Installation
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Radiator Grille
Removal
1.
Open the hood.
Installation
Exterior Trim and Ornamentation - Rear Quarter Window Moulding
Removal
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the rear quarter window moulding.

Remove the 4 clips.
Release the locating peg.
Installation
1. Install the rear quarter window moulding.
Position the locating peg.
Secure the clips.
Rear View Mirrors -
Exterior mirror bolts 6 4
Rear View Mirrors - Rear View Mirrors
For a detailed description of the rear view mirror systems and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual.
REFER to: Rear View Mirrors (501-09, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Door mirror switch condition and installation Battery condition and state of charge
Door mirror condition and installation Fuses
Harnesses and connectors
Washer jet and mirror heater relay
Memory control module(s)
Door mirror switch(s)
Door mirror motor(s)
Ignition switch
Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATC)
Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) circuit
Symptom Chart

Mirrors do not Fuse fault Check the fuses
defrost / Heated washer jets / heated Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
washer jets mirrors circuit short circuit heated washer jets / heated mirrors circuit for short
freeze to ground, open circuit, high circuit to ground, open circuit, high resistance
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Automatic Temperature check the Automatic Temperature Control Module
Control Module (ATC) fault (ATC) for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
Mirrors Door mirror mechanical Operate the mirror switch and listen for the
inoperative in failure motor(s). If each motor operation is audible, check
one or more Door mirror circuit short the mechanical condition of the mirror and linkages
directions circuit to ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
circuit to power, open door mirror circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit, high resistance circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Driver/Passenger Door Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module (DDM/PDM) fault check the Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Memorized Battery voltage below 10.5V Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
mirror position Position not stored manual and test the battery
is not resumed Switch operated during Make sure that the desired position is correctly
"one-touch" memory recall stored
Make sure that the memory store/recall procedure is
being followed
'Lazy entry' Remote transmitter fault Check that the remote transmitter operates the
function (battery, transmitter central locking
inoperative programming, etc) Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Battery voltage below 10.5V manual and test the battery
Position not stored Make sure that the desired position is correctly
Switch operated during stored
"one-touch" memory recall Make sure that the memory store/recall procedure is
being followed
DTC Index
00. REFER to:
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB) (100-00, Description and
Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM) (100-00 General
Rear View Mirrors - Interior Mirror
Removal
1. If installed, remove the interior mirror upper
and lower covers.
2. Vehicles with an auto-dimming interior mirror,

remove the interior mirror.
Rotate the mirror stem at its base to
release from the windshield.
3. Vehicles without an auto-dimming interior

mirror, remove the interior mirror.
Pull the mirror away from the windshield
to release the clip.
Installation
1. Vehicles without an auto-dimming interior
mirror, install the interior mirror.
Slide the mirror onto the boss from
above to engage the clip.
2. Vehicles with an auto-dimming interior mirror,
install the interior mirror.
Rotate the mirror stem at its base to
secure to the windshield.
3. Install the interior mirror covers.

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

NOTE: Support as necessary.
Torque: 6 Nm
3.
Installation

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Vehicles Without: Parking Aid
Camera
Removal
NOTES:
1. CAUTIONS:

component.

located.
2. CAUTIONS:

harnesses.
Make sure the electrical connector is

securely in the service position, before
disconnection. If the connector springs back
after disconnection the internal door trim panel
will have to be removed for access.
Torque: 6 Nm
3.
Installation

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Glass
Removal
NOTES:

the clips.
2.
Installation

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Cover
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Glass (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

2.
3. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the clips.
Protect the surrounding trim to avoid

damage.
Protect the surrounding paintwork to

avoid damage.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the clips.
Protect the surrounding trim to avoid

damage.
Protect the surrounding paintwork to

avoid damage.

Rear View Mirrors - Exterior Mirror Motor
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Glass (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,

2. CAUTION: Make sure the locating tangs

are aligned. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Torque: 1.2 Nm
Installation

Seating -
Seat belt lower anchorage to seat Torx bolt 40 30
Front seat belt buckle to front seat Torx bolt 40 30
Front seat Torx bolts 40 30
Front seat armrest Torx bolt 10 7
Front seat grab handle Torx bolts 25 18
Front seat height adjustment motor nuts 25 18
Front seat position sensor nuts 4 3
Front seat tilt motor Torx bolts 10 7
Front seat backrest assembly Torx bolts 25 18
Front seat recliner motor Torx bolt 10 7
Seat module bracket Torx bolts 10 7
Front seat track motor nuts 25 18
Front seat base nuts 25 18
Front seat cushion Torx bolts 25 18
Third row seat Torx bolts 40 30
Third row seat cushion frame Allen bolts 25 18
Loadspace compartment anchor bolts 25 18
Rear seat Torx bolts 40 30
Rear seat backrest assembly Torx bolts 45 33
Seating - Seats
Component Location
NOTE: RH drive shown, LH drive similar

1 - Driver's seat cushion adjustment motor assembly
2 - Driver's seat memory switch pack
3 - Driver's seat non-memory switch pack
4 - Driver's door ajar switch
5 - Driver's seat squab motor
6 - Driver's seat heating element
7 - Second row RH (right-hand) seat heating element
8 - Second row RH seat heating module
9 - Second row LH (left-hand) seat heating element
10 - Second row heated seat switches (vehicles without rear air conditioning)
11 - Second row LH seat heating module
12 - Front passenger seat heating element
13 - Front passenger seat squab motor
14 - Front passenger seat cushion adjustment motor assembly
15 - Front passenger seat switch pack
17 - Front heated seat switch pack (climate control system)
18 - Memory control module
19 - Front passenger seat power relay
OVERVIEW
LEATHER SEAT COVERS
Leather is a natural product, therefore it bears natural characteristics, such as grain variations, growth & bush
marks. These non-weakening marks show the true nature of the hide and are the hallmarks of Leather. In order to
maintain the beauty of the vehicles natural Leather upholstery it requires regular cleaning, which if neglected, may
cause deterioration. Where dust and dirt are allowed to accumulate and become ingrained in the surface of the
Leather, the upholstery may become permanently damaged.
Light coloured upholstery can be particularly susceptible to soiling and staining and care should be taken to ensure
that where there is evidence of any soiling or staining on the upholstery then this should be cleaned immediately
using the Jaguar/Land Rover approved products, failure to do this could lead to the stain becoming permanent, this
applies to all leather upholstery and is not colour specific.
Leather trimmed seats will naturally exhibit areas of creasing and wrinkling over a period of time and is a normal
characteristic as the Leather ages.
Particular care should be taken where there is evidence of soiling or staining on the leather, this should be cleaned
immediately. Failure to do this could lead to the stain becoming permanent.
Particular care should be taken to prevent damage from studs, zips and buckles.
NOTES:
Please refer to Leather care label attached to seats for more information.
Creasing and wrinkling does not represent a manufacturing defect.
Damage from studs, zips and buckles do not represent manufacturing defects.
Use only Jaguar/Land Rover approved products in accordance with the instructions for use.
SEAT CONFIGURATION
Discovery is available in a 5 or 7 seat configuration. The driver's seat has the option of an 8-way power adjustment,
with or without memory functionality, or a 6-way manual adjustment. The front passenger seat has the option of a 6
way power adjustment or a 4-way, non-height, manual adjustment. On vehicles from 2008MY, the front passenger
seat can be fitted with an 8-way power adjustment.
The type of second row seats depends upon whether the 7-seat option is fitted. If the vehicle supports 5 seats, the
2nd row is designed as a 60/40 split, flip and fold configuration, whereas a vehicle that supports the 7 seat option is
designed as a 35/30/35 split with the 2 outer seats having the ability to 'jack-knife', allowing access to the 3rd row
of seats.
All seats are available in a fabric, duragrain or leather finish depending on model specification.
MANUAL FRONT SEATS

1 - Fore and aft adjustment
2 - Height adjustment
3 - Backrest adjustment
4 - Lumber support adjustment
5 - Armrest height adjustment
Height adjustment (driver's seat only)
Pumping the handle controls seat height. Pumping the lever upwards raises the seat; downwards lowers the seat.
Recline adjustment
The angle of the backrest is adjusted by turning the rotary wheel either clockwise or anticlockwise.
Forward/backward adjustment
Lifting the tomel bar at the front of the seat and sliding the seat to the desired position achieves the
forwards/backwards adjustment.
Lumber support adjustment
A hand wheel in the side of the seat provides for adjustment of lumbar support.
Folding armrest adjustment (if fitted)
Some vehicles are fitted with adjustable front seat armrests. These are used in the horizontal position or can be
stowed vertically alongside the seat back rest. The horizontal position can be adjusted for height by turning the knob
set into the end of the armrest.
POWER OPERATED FRONT SEATS (NON-MEMORY)

1 - Bolster adjustment: A - Bolster inflate; B - Bolster deflate
2 - Lumbar support adjustment
3 - Backrest adjustment
4 - Height adjustment
5 - Cushion tilt adjustment
6 - Fore and aft adjustment
Forward/Backward adjustment
Push and hold the switch forwards or backwards to move the seat to the desired position.
Seat back adjustment
Twist the switch forwards or backwards until the desired seat back angle is achieved.
Seat cushion height adjustment
Push the switch up or down to raise or lower the cushion.
Front Seat Motors

NOTE: On vehicles from 2008MY, the passenger seat can also be fitted with 8-way electrical adjustment.
The seat motors are a permanent magnet motor type coupled to a rack and pinion assembly. Should the motor seize
or stick an internal thermal cut-out switch will trip to remove voltage from the motor. Two pins within each of the
seat switch packs control the seat motors. Both pins are normally earthed. Operating the switch applies voltage to
one of the pins while the other pin remains earthed. Operating the switch in the opposite direction reverses power
and earth to the motor allowing the motor to run in the opposite direction.
DRIVER'S MEMORY SEAT

1 - Lock/unlock button
2 - Memory preset buttons
3 - Memory store button
Once the power operated driver's seat, steering column and exterior mirrors are adjusted, the vehicle can memorize
these settings for future use.
1. Press the memory store (M) button to activate the memory function. The switch indicator will illuminate.
2. Press one of the preset buttons within 5 seconds to memorize the current settings. MEMORY (1, 2 or 3) SETTINGS
SAVED will be displayed on the message center, accompanied by an audible chime to confirm the settings have been
memorized.
3. To recall a stored position press the relevant preset button. MEMORY (1, 2 OR 3) RECALLED will be displayed in
the message center.
NOTES:
A seat position will only be memorized during the 5 second active period. Any existing settings will be over-
written when programming a memory position.
If the driver’s seat or steering column are adjusted during entry or exit operation, automatic movement will
stop.
Memory Recall
Memory recall has three memory positions stored for the seats, exterior mirrors and electric steering column (where
fitted). The switches for this function are located on driver's seat outer side trim panel. Pressing the appropriate
numbered memory switch allows the seat to start moving to the position appropriate to that memory.
When a memory recall is initiated, to limit the overall current consumption, only two-seat axis will move towards
their intended position at any one time. To minimize current load as the motors start, the initiation of each axis is
phased with a 10ms delay between each motor starting.
The following procedure will store a memory position:
Ensure reverse gear is not engaged

Manually adjust the seat to the desired position, using the seat switches
Press and release the 'memory store' switch
Press and release the desired numbered memory switch within 5 seconds
If any of the seat adjustment or memory switches are activated during a 'one touch' memory recall, the recall will be
overridden and the seat will begin to move in the direction corresponding to the switch that has been pressed.
Both mirrors move simultaneously about the vertical axis first (left/right), and then, once all vertical axis movements
are complete, about the horizontal axis (up/down). To minimize the number of mirror motor's required, a method of
sharing is implemented, which dictates that all movement about one axis is complete before movement about the
other axis commences.
Mirror movement coincides with the following table:
Control Module Pin Control Module Pin Control Module Pin Control Module Pin
Action
14 7 13 8
Driver Mirror Up Battery - - -
Driver Mirror Down Ground - - -
Driver Mirror Left - Ground - -
Driver Mirror Right - Battery - -
Passenger Mirror Up - - Battery -
Passenger Mirror
- - Ground -
Down
Passenger Mirror Left - - - Ground
Passenger Mirror
- - - Battery
Right
Lazy Entry
Pressing the unlock button on the remote transmitter will initiate a memory recall. This feature is known as 'lazy
entry'. If the seat movement, memory switch or the lock button on the remote transmitter is pressed, then the 'lazy
entry' feature will stop immediately.
The memory settings are stored within EEPROM (electrically erasable programmable read only memory) of the
memory control module each time the ignition switch is cycled from position II to position I. These are the positional
values that a lazy entry request uses when the remote unlock button for that particular key is next pressed.
The lazy entry feature can be activated or deactivated via the customer personalization feature of the high line
instrument cluster. This provides the driver with the option to enable or disable lazy entry as required.
Immediate Adjustment
Pressing one of the manual adjustment switches will initiate the corresponding motor for that axis until the switch is
released.
Only two seat motors can be driven at any one time. However, due to the sharing of relays, there are certain
combinations of motors that cannot be driven together. The following table indicates which axis can and cannot be
operated at the same time:
Recline Recline Tilt Tilt Height Height Slide Slide

Up Down Up Down Up Down Forward Backward
Recline Up - No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recline Down No - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Tilt Up Yes Yes - No Yes Yes No* No*
Tilt Down Yes Yes No - Yes Yes No* No*
Height Up Yes Yes Yes Yes - No No* No*
Height Down Yes Yes Yes Yes No - No* No*
Slide Forward Yes Yes No* No* No* No* - No
Slide
Yes Yes No* No* No* No* No -
Backward
Key
- = Not applicable
Yes = Can be activated together
No = Cannot be activated together (Physically impossible)
No* = Cannot be activated together (Relay sharing restriction)
If two axis are being driven and a third axis is requested to move, the third switch request is ignored until either of
the two axis switches, already active, are released. The third axis movement may only be initiated providing the
switch has been released and re-selected.
Seat adjustment can be initiated simultaneously with any mirror movement.
REVERSE GEAR MIRROR POSITION
To give the driver a clear view of the kerbs when reversing, the exterior door mirrors can be dipped when reverse
gear is selected. The level of mirror dipping is set to a predetermined amount when the vehicle leaves the factory
but has the ability to be customer programmed.
The following procedure will store a reverse gear mirror position:
Perform a memory recall procedure

Ensure reverse gear is engaged
Manually adjust the mirrors to the desired position
Press and release the 'memory store' switch
Press and release the desired numbered memory switch
Reverse gear mirror dip setting will be stored for that particular memory setting.
A single chime will be emitted from the instrument cluster to indicate that the store operation has been successful
and 'Mirror Dip Stored' message will be displayed in the message center.
Once this sequence has been completed, the stored mirror position will be the position that the mirrors move to
when reverse gear is next selected.
Storing a memory position with reverse gear selected only affects reverse gear mirror positions, the remainder of the
memory positions remain unchanged.
To protect against an accidental setting, the mirror position will only be stored if a mirror adjustment has been made
since reverse gear was selected. If there is no reverse gear mirror position stored, then a default setting, stored in
the memory control module, is adopted.
There are three customer personalization memory settings per key. For each of these settings there are 3 possible
reverse gear mirror position stores. This equates to a possible nine reverse gear mirror position settings.
personalization memory setting relates to the 3 most recent ignition keys.

A - Most recent ignition key
B - Second most recent ignition key
C - Third most recent ignition key
1 - First reverse gear mirror position store
2 - Second reverse gear mirror position store
3 - Third reverse gear mirror position store
The reverse gear mirror position feature can be activated or deactivated via the customer personalization feature of
the high line instrument cluster. This provides the driver with the option to enable or disable reverse gear mirror
position as required.
Information regarding the reverse gear mirror status, for both manual and automatic transmissions, is transmitted as
a message on the LIN (local interconnect network) bus.
When the reverse gear mirror position feature is toggled 'OFF', all 3 memory settings associated with that
personalization memory will return to the default reverse gear mirror settings.
NOTE: Reverse gear status is only available with the ignition in position II.
When reverse gear is de-selected, the mirror position immediately prior to reverse selection will be resumed, unless
a memory recall has been requested whilst reverse has been selected, in which case the mirrors will move to the
requested memory position when reverse is de-selected.
On vehicles fitted with the ZF automatic transmission there is a delay of 0.5 second following the selection of reverse
gear, prior to the reverse mirror position being recalled. This is to prevent any movement of the mirrors as the gear
selector is moved through the reverse position on the way to, and from, the park position.
STEERING COLUMN ADJUST (where fitted)
The memory control module controls the electric adjustable steering column in a rake (up and down) and reach (in
and out). The steering column can be adjusted for rake and reach by operating the rotary joystick control switch on
the LH side of the steering column.

1 - Electric adjustment
2 - Manual adjustment
3 - Heated steering wheel
Entry/Exit Mode
Entry/Exit mode provides automatic movement of the steering column and driver's seat to allow easier entry to or
exit from the vehicle.
Entry/Exit mode is selected by setting the steering column adjustment switch to the 'AUTO' position.
NOTES:
If the adjustment switch is moved away from 'AUTO' whilst the steering column is tilted away, the steering
column will move back to its memorized position. Entry/Exit mode will then be cancelled.
If the adjustment switch is moved during entry/exit operation, steering column movement will stop.
Exit
When the ignition key is removed, the steering column will move to the uppermost rake and innermost reach
positions and the driver's seat will move slightly rearwards and lower.
Entry
When the key is inserted in the ignition the steering column and seat will return to their previous positions. If,
however, the memorised driver position has been changed (using the seat memory switches or another key
transmitter), the steering wheel and seat will move to the new position.
Steering Column Control
Adjustment of the steering column is achieved by a single DC (direct current) motor. Each adjustment movement is
transmitted through a solenoid actuated clutch; one clutch for reach movement and one for rake movement.
When engaged, a clutch can be released only if the system is unstressed. As the clutches are mounted on the same
motor spindle, the sequence for position adjustment is as follows:
Engage the selected clutch by powering the appropriate solenoid

After a time period (approximately 0.1 of a second), the motor is powered in the desired direction
When the motor reaches the stop position the solenoid and motor is released/unpowered. The clutch remains
engaged under stress
After a time period (approximately 0.1 of a second), the motor is powered in the opposite direction to enable
the clutch to disengage when the stress is released.
Motor Rotation Direction Clockwise Counter Clockwise
Reach movement IN OUT
Rake movement UP DOWN
Simultaneous rake and reach movements are not possible since the motor must reverse direction as soon as the first
axis has reached its required position.
Steering column rake and reach is controlled via potentiometer feedback.
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL CONFIRMATIONS
An audible confirmation is generated by the instrument cluster to provide confirmation to the driver that the
requested operation has been successfully completed. The following operations support an audible confirmation:
Audible
Operation Conditions
Confirmation
Memory Store Single Chime Successful store operation completed
Memory Recall Double Chime Only issued if all axis of movement successfully reach the
intended position
Reverse Gear Mirror Position Single Chime Successful store operation for reverse mirror position completed
Store
In addition to audible confirmation there is also a visual confirmation via the instrument cluster message center.
MEMORY CONTROL MODULE

Memory Control Module Location (LHD shown, RHD similar)
The memory control module, located under the driver's seat, relies upon a number of inputs and controls a number
of outputs. As with all electronic control modules, the unit needs information regarding the current operating
conditions of the engine and other related systems before it can make calculations, which determine the appropriate
outputs.
All memory values are stored in the non-volatile memory, EEPROM. The current motor positions, which are
monitored by the control modules integral Hall sensors, are stored in the EEPROM. If a loss of power occurs, upon
power reconnection the current motor position are recalled from memory and adopted as the current positions. This
will allow the relative memory positions to be retained without any need to re-calibrate. The memory control module
checks the integrity of all data stored in the EEPROM each time it exit's stand-by mode. In the event that the data is
corrupt, the control module adopts the default values for all of the programming options. All memory positions are
deemed as invalid and the software will perform as if there are no memory positions stored. Memory store
operations will reset the relevant memory and allow full functionality.
Stall Detection
Seat, steering column (where fitted) and mirror motors are deemed to have stalled if there is no change in the
inputs that are received from the corresponding feedback sensors for 200ms (seat), 1000ms (mirror & steering
column) while that axis is being driven.
If a stall condition is detected then the drive to that axis is cancelled for the remainder of that memory operation
(memory recall) or until the switch is re-selected (manual movement).
If the motor movement has stopped due to loss of sensor feedback, either stall or sensor failure, then that axis may
be activated again, to move past the stall position, by re-selecting the appropriate switch. This allows control of the
motor to be maintained if sensor feedback is lost.
Upon re-selection of movement, if sensor pulses are detected then the motor will continue to be driven until the
switch is released or another stall condition is detected. If sensor feedback is not detected then the motor is only
driven for 0.5 second and then stops until the switch is released and then pressed again, when a further 0.5 second
of activation is permitted, and so on.
For all seat motor and steering column manual movements, whenever a motor is driven and a stall occurs, the
memory control module records the position at which the stall occurred. If movement occurs beyond a stall position,
then that position is erased from the control modules memory. This will always allow movement past a previously
recorded stall position once movement has been registered beyond that position. This is the case for both manual
and memory movement.
Initialization
When a replacement memory control module is fitted to a seat it should be initialized so that the control module can
learn the seats and steering column maximum and minimum adjustment values. This is achieved by:
adjusting all seat movement axis from one end of travel to the other; slide, recline, height and tilt
adjusting all steering column movement from one end of travel to the other; rake and reach.
Battery Monitor
If the battery voltage drops below 10.5 Volts, then the memory control module ignores all requests for a memory
recall, including lazy entry, or easy entry/exit until the battery voltage has reached 11.5 Volts. This will conserve as
much power in the vehicle battery as possible to enable engine cranking.
Stand-by Mode
The memory control module supports a stand-by mode to keep power consumption to a minimum.
The control module will enter stand-by mode upon receipt of a LIN bus 'SLEEP' message from the CJB. Alternatively,
a time period of 3 seconds after the LIN bus network has remained quiet provided there are no motors being driven
at that time and there are no valid switch requests.
If there is a failure with the LIN bus network then the seat will be operational in 'inch mode' only.
If the control module is being prevented from entering stand-by mode due to motor movement, memory recall or
switch operation, then it will enter stand-by mode when the current function has terminated.
NOTE: In the case of a memory recall, all memory recall operations should be carried out before entering
stand-by mode, not just the current motor movement.
The control module will exit stand-by mode if there is any LIN bus activity. When the control module exits stand-by
mode it must verify the 'System Enable Status' in order to recognize when it should respond to a switch request.
SEAT HEATING
Front Seats
Front Seat Heater Switches

1 - LH front seat heater switch
2 - RH front seat heater switch
The heated front seat system is available on both manual and electric seats and is controlled by the Automatic
Temperature Control Module (ATCM).
When the front seat heater switch is operated, power is supplied to the heater elements in the seat, causing the seat
to heat up. The ATCM senses seat temperature via the sensor in the cushion and regulates voltage to the seat
heater elements to maintain a constant temperature.
Rear Seat Heaters
Rear Seat Heater Switches
NOTE: Rear air conditioning variant shown

The RH and LH rear seats support three integral heating elements, squab, back rest and bolster. The optional rear
child booster seat also supports an integral seat-heating element.
NOTE: The rear center seat is not available with seat heating.
The rear seat heaters are enabled when the ignition switch is position II, and operate at one of two temperature
settings. With the first press of a rear seat heater switch the relative rear seat heat control module (RH or LH)
adopts the higher temperature setting, supplies a power feed to the related rear seat heater elements and
illuminates two amber LED (light emitting diode)'s in the switch. At the second press of the switch the control module
adopts the lower temperature setting and extinguishes one of the LED's. At the third press of the switch the control
module de-energizes the heater elements and extinguishes the second LED. The seat heaters remain on until
selected off or the ignition is turned off.
The rear seat heat control modules receive an input from a temperature sensor in RH and LH rear seats, and
regulate the power feed of the heater elements to control the seat temperature at the appropriate temperature
setting between 35 and 45 °C (95 and 113 °F). The actual temperature settings vary with the type of seat covering,
to allow for the different heat conduction properties of the different seat covering materials.
DIAGNOSTICS
The exchange of information between the diagnostic unit and the memory control module is via the CJB, which are
interconnected via the hi-speed CAN (controller area network) bus and LIN bus. There is a non-volatile memory
(EEPROM) for saving detected errors. Its contents are not lost when the power supply is disconnected. Only a Land
Rover approved diagnostic system can erase the error memory.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; J = CAN bus

1 - Driver's door ajar switch
2 - Driver's seat height motor
3 - Driver's seat slide motor
4 - Driver's seat tilt motor
5 - Driver's seat recline motor
6 - Mirror adjustment switch
7 - LH mirror motor
8 - RH mirror motor
9 - LH rear seat heater
10 - RH rear seat heater
11 - LH rear seat heater cut-off switch
12 - RH rear seat heater cut-off switch
13 - LH rear seat heater control module
14 - RH rear seat heater control module
15 - LH rear seat heater switch
16 - RH rear seat heater switch
17 - Driver's seat heater
18 - Front passenger seat heater
19 - Front seat heater switches
21 - Front passenger seat recline motor
22 - Front passenger seat slide motor
23 - Front passenger seat height motor
24 - Front passenger seat power relay
25 - Front passenger seat switch pack
26 - CJB
28 - Driver's seat memory switch pack
Seating - Seats
For a detailed description of the seating systems and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Seat runners Battery condition and state of charge
Seat frames Fuses
Seat movement switch condition and installation Harnesses and connectors
Seat heater switch condition and installation Seat movement switch(s)
Seat motor(s) condition and installation Seat heater switch(s)
Steering column switch condition and installation Seat heater elements
Steering column condition and installation Seat motor(s)
Door mirror switch condition and installation Seat module(s)
Door mirror condition and installation Memory control module(s)
Steering column switch
Steering column motor
Door mirror switch(s)
Door mirror motor(s)
Ignition switch
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) circuit
Symptom Chart

Seat does not move Runner or mechanism Check for obstructions at the seat runners or
when the switch is jammed mechanisms
operated (forward, Seat circuit short circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
backward, tilt, etc) to ground, short circuit relevant seat circuit for short circuit to ground,
to power, open circuit, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
high resistance The thermal cut-out may engage if there is a motor
Thermal cut-out or mechanism fault
engaged Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Driver/Passenger Seat system, check the Driver/Passenger Seat Module
Module (DSM/PSM) fault (DSM/PSM) for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
Steering column Steering column Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
does not move when adjustment circuit short steering column adjustment circuit for short circuit
the switch is circuit to ground, short to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
operated circuit to power, open resistance
circuit, high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Central Junction Box system, check the Central Junction Box (CJB) for
(CJB) fault related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Mirrors do not move Door mirror internal For door mirror tests, refer to the relevant section
when the switch is failure of the workshop manual
operated Door mirror circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
circuit to ground, short door mirror circuits for short circuit to ground,
circuit to power, open short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
circuit, high resistance
Memorized seat / Battery voltage below Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
steering column / 10.5V manual and test the battery
mirror position is not Position not stored Make sure that the desired position is correctly
resumed Switch operated during stored
"one-touch" memory Make sure that the memory store/recall procedure
recall is being followed
"Lazy entry" function Remote transmitter fault Check that the remote transmitter operates the
inoperative (battery, transmitter central locking
programming, etc) Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
Battery voltage below manual and test the battery
10.5V Make sure that the desired position is correctly
Position not stored stored
Switch operated during Make sure that the memory store/recall procedure
"one-touch" memory is being followed
recall
Entry/exit mode Switch not in AUTO Make sure the function is enabled and that the
inoperative mode switch is correctly set
Driver/Passenger Seat Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module (DSM/PSM) fault system, check the Driver/Passenger Seat Module
(DSM/PSM) for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
Seat does not get Switch fault Check the LEDs at the switches as a quick check of
warm Heated seat circuit short the switch function. If the LEDs illuminate when the
circuit to ground, short switches are operated, there is power to the
circuit to power, open switches and the switches are operating at least
circuit, high resistance one level
Temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
Battery voltage is heated seat circuit for short circuit to ground, short
greater than 16.5 volts circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Test the operation of the temperature sensor
If the battery voltage is higher than 16.5 volts for
more than 5 seconds, seat heating is suspended
Part of the seat does Heated seat element Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the
not get warm fault heated seat circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM) (100-00,
Seating - Front Seat Cushion
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the cushion is removed as an assembly. There is a separate procedure showing
removal of the cushion cover.
1. Remove the front seat cushion assembly.

Release and disconnect the 2 electrical
connectors.
Installation
1. Install the front seat cushion assembly.
Seating - Front Seat
Removal
WARNINGS:
It is imperative that before any work is undertaken on the SRS system, the appropriate information is read
thoroughly.
Always disconnect both battery cables before beginning work on the SRS system. Disconnect the ground
cable first. Never reverse connect the battery.

Operation).
2. NOTE: Torx bolts may be re-used.
Release the front seat.

Remove the bolt covers.
Remove and the 5 Torx bolts.
3. Release the safety belt lower anchor from the

seat.
Remove the bolt cover.
Passenger side, disconnect the electrical
connector.
4. With assistance, remove the front seat.

Protect the rocker panel.
Remove the bolt.
Installation
1. With assistance, install the front seat.
Secure the wiring harness clips.
2. Attach the safety belt lower anchor to the seat.

Passenger side, connect the electrical connector.
Install the bolt cover.
3. Secure the front seat.

Install the bolt covers.

Seating - Third Row Seat
Removal
NOTE: Third row seats must be removed as a pair.
1. Remove the loadspace compartment anchors.

2. Remove the loadspace trim panels.

3. NOTE: Torx bolts may be re-used.
Remove the third row seats.

Release the trim cover.
Separate the third row seats.

Remove the seat frame finisher.
Drill out the 6 rivets.
Remove the 2 brackets.
Installation
1. Attach the third row seats.
Install the brackets.
Install the rivets.
2. Install the third row seats.

Secure the trim cover.
3. Install the loadspace trim panels.

4. Install the loadspace compartment anchors.

Seating - Rear Seat Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Removal
NOTE: This procedure shows the removal and installation of both the LH and the RH seats.
1. NOTE: The Torx bolts can be re-used.
Release the RH rear seat.

Fold the LH seat cushion forward.
Fold down the rear seat backrest.
2. Remove the RH rear seat.
Release the LH rear seat.

Fold the LH seat cushion forward.
4. With assistance, remove the LH rear seat assembly.
Installation
1. With assistance, install the LH rear seat assembly.
Position the seat on the dowels.
2. Secure the LH rear seat.

Return the seat backrest to the upright position.
Fold the seat cushion rearwards.
3. Install the RH rear seat.

4. Secure the RH rear seat.

Seating - Rear Seat Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Removal
Release the rear seat.

Remove the front 2 Torx bolts.
Fold the seat assembly forwards.
Remove the rear 2 Torx bolts.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
Installation
1. Install the rear seat assembly.
2. Secure the rear seat.

Tighten the rear Torx bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
Fold seat assembly rearwards.
Tighten the front Torx bolts to 45 Nm (33 lb.ft).
Seating - Front Seat Cushion Cover
Removal
For additional information, refer to: Front Seat Cushion
(501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
2. Release the front seat cushion cover.

3. Remove the front seat cushion cover.

Remove the 12 hog rings.
Installation
1. Install the front seat cushion cover.
Install the hog rings.
Attach the cover and secure with the clips.

Seating - Front Seat Cushion Heater Mat
Removal
Cover (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the front seat cushion heater mat.
Installation
1. Install the front seat cushion heater mat.

Seating - Third Row Seat Cushion Cover
Removal
1. Remove the occasional seat cushion assembly.
2. Remove the third row seat cushion latch

covers.
Remove the third row seat cushion cover.

Remove the 2 spacers.
Installation
Seating - Third Row Seat Cushion
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the cushion is removed as an assembly. There is a separate procedure for
removing and installing the cushion cover.
1. Remove the third row seat cushion.

Release the cushion from the seat
frame.
Installation
1. NOTE: Ensure seat cushion return springs are correctly

located.
Install the third row seat cushion.

Attach the cushion to the seat frame.
Seating - Rear Seat Cushion Cover Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Removal
NOTE: This procedure shows the removal and installation of both the LH and the RH covers.
1. Fold the seat cushion forward.
2. Release the rear LH seat cushion cover.

Release the clip.
3. Remove the rear LH seat cushion cover.

4. Release the rear RH seat cushion cover.

Release the clip.
5. Remove the rear RH seat cushion cover.
Installation
1. Install the rear seat cushion cover.
Attach the retaining clip.
2. Fold the seat cushion rearwards.

Seating - Rear Seat Cushion Cover Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Removal
1. Remove the outer backrest hinge cover.
Remove the screw.
2. Remove the inner backrest hinge cover.

Release the backrest cover side clip.
Remove the screw.
3. Remove the rear seat cushion side finisher.

4. Remove the seat rear release strap finisher.

Remove the screw.
5. Remove the seat front release strap finisher.

Remove the screw.
6. Remove the seat cushion finishers.
7. Remove the rear safety belt buckle.

Release the spring.
8. Release the rear seat cushion cover.

9. Remove the rear seat cushion cover.

Installation
1. Install the rear seat cushion cover.
Install the clips.
2. Install the rear safety belt buckle.

Attach the spring.
3. Install the seat cushion finishers.

Tighten the screws.
4. Install the seat front release strap finisher.

Remove the screw.
Tighten the screw.
5. Install the seat rear release strap finisher.

Tighten the screw.
6. Install the inner backrest hinge cover.

Attach the clips.
Tighten the screw.
7. Install the outer backrest hinge cover.

Tighten the screw.
8. Install the rear seat cushion side finisher.

Tighten the screws.
Seating - Front Seat Track Motor
Removal
1. Raise the seat base for access.
2. Remove the drive cable.

Disconnect the seat motor electrical
connector.
3. Remove the 2 clips.
4. Remove the front seat track motor.
Installation
1. Install the front seat track motor.
Install the drive cable.
Install the 2 clips.
2. Install the drive cable.

Connect the seat motor electrical connector.
Seating - Front Seat Height Adjustment Motor
Removal
NOTE: Front seat height adjustment motor is supplied as part of the front seat frame assembly.
1. Remove the front safety belt buckle.

For additional information, refer to: Front Safety Belt Buckle
(501-20A, Removal and Installation).

3. Remove the front seat backrest assembly.

connectors.
4. Remove the front seat electrical connector

bracket.
5. Remove the front seat tilt motor.

6. Remove the front seat position sensor.

Remove the 2 nuts.
7. Remove the front seat height adjustment

motor.
Remove the 8 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the front seat height adjustment motor.
2. Install the front seat position sensor.

3. Install the front seat tilt motor.

Attach the wiring harness.
4. Install the front seat electrical connector bracket.

Tighten the screws.
5. Install the front seat backrest assembly.


7. Install the front safety belt buckle.

(501-20A, Removal and Installation).
Seating - Front Seat Tilt Motor
Removal
1. Remove the front seat.
2. Remove the front seat cushion side finisher.

3. Release the front seat control switch.

Remove the 2 clips.

5. Remove the front seat tilt motor assembly.


Remove the seat module bracket.
Installation
1. Install the seat module bracket.
2. Install the front seat tilt motor assembly.

Tighten the 4 Torx bolts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).

4. Install the front seat cushion side finisher.

Tighten the screws.
5. Install the front seat control switch.

Tighten the screws.

Seating - Front Seat Recliner Motor
Removal
1. Remove the front seat backrest cover.
For additional information, refer to: Front Seat Backrest
2. Remove the front seat backrest pad.
3. Remove the front seat recliner motor.

Remove the front seat backrest shaft
clip.
Remove the front seat backrest shaft.
Installation
1. Install the front seat recliner motor.
Install the front seat backrest shaft.
Install the front seat backrest shaft clip.
2. Install the front seat backrest pad.
3. Install the front seat backrest cover.

Seating - Front Seat Control Switch
Removal
1. Remove the front seat cushion side finisher.
2. Remove the front seat control switch.

Release the front seat control switch
harness.
Remove the 2 clips.
Installation
1. Install the front seat cushion side finisher.
Tighten the screws.
2. Install the front seat control switch.

Tighten the screws.
Seating - Front Seat Backrest Cover
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the restraints control module backup power supply must be depleted. Wait
at least one minute after disconnecting the battery ground cable(s) before commencing any repair or adjustment
to the supplemental restraint system (SRS), or any component(s) adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Always wear safety glasses when working on an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling an air bag
module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, do not use radio key code savers when working on
the supplemental restraint system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of injury in the event of premature deployment, always carry a live air bag
module with the bag and trim cover pointed away from the body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, live air bag modules must only be placed on work
benches which have been ground bonded and with the trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
Never probe the electrical connectors of air bag modules or any other supplemental restraint system
component. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Painting over the driver air bag module trim cover or instrument panel could lead to deterioration of the
trim cover and air bags. Do not for any reason attempt to paint discolored or damaged air bag module trim
covers or instrument panel. Install a new component. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury.
Make sure that sufficient time has elapsed after disconnecting the battery ground cable(s), before
commencing work on the supplemental restraint system (SRS). Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.

Operation).

(501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the front seat cushion side trim.

4. Remove the front seat backrest hinge cover.
5. Remove the front seat backrest assembly.

Release the retaining clips and
disconnect the three electrical
connectors.
6. Remove the front seat grab handles.

Remove the bolt covers.
Remove the 2 bolts.
7. NOTE: Head restraint release latch is

underneath backrest cover.
Remove the front seat head restraint.

Release the front seat head restraint
latch.
8. Remove the seat armrest.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat Armrest
9. Remove the front seat lumbar adjustment

knob.
Pull sharply to release from lumbar
mechanism.
10. Release the front seat backrest cover.

Release the tension straps.
11. Remove the front seat backrest cushion and
cover from the front seat frame.
Installation
1. Install the front sear backrest cover.
Install the clips.
Attach the tension straps.
2. Install the front seat lumbar adjustment knob.

Push firmly to secure to the lumbar mechanism.
3. Install the seat armrest.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat Armrest
4. Install the front seat head restraint.
5. Install the front seat grab handles.

Install the bolt covers.
6. Install the front seat backrest assembly.

7. Install the front seat backrest hinge cover.

Tighten the screws.
Fit the clip.
8. Install the front seat cushion side trim.

Position and secure in the clips.
Install the screws.

Seating - Third Row Seat Backrest Cover
Removal
1. Fold the seat cushion assembly forwards.
2. Remove the seat backrest hinge inner covers.

Release the clip.
3. Remove the seat backrest latch covers.

4. Remove the seat backrest cover.

Fold the seat cushion forward.
Installation
Seating - Front Seat Backrest Heater Mat
Removal
2. NOTE: Front seat cushion heater mat

shown in illustration. Removal of backrest
heater mat is the same.
Remove the front seat backrest heater mat.
Installation
1. Install the front seat backrest heater mat.

Seating - Rear Seat Backrest Cover Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
Removal
NOTE: This procedure shows the removal of both the LH and RH covers.
1. LH seat only: Remove the safety belt retractor

cover and guide.
2. Remove the rear seat release handle.
3. Remove the rear seat release handle finisher.

Remove the screw.
4. Remove the rear seat head restraint.

Depress the 2 retaining clips.
5. Remove the rear seat head restraint retaining
clips.
6. Release the rear LH seat backrest cover.

7. Remove the rear LH seat backrest cover.

8. Release the rear RH seat backrest cover.

9. Remove the rear RH seat backrest cover.
Installation
1. Install the rear seat backrest cover.
Attach the clips.
2. Install the rear seat head restraint retaining clips.

3. Install the rear seat head restraint.
4. Install the rear seat release handle finisher.

Tighten the screw.
5. Install the rear seat release handle.
6. Install the safety belt guide and retractor cover.

Attach the safety belt guide and retractor cover.
Tighten the screws.
Seating - Rear Seat Backrest Cover Vehicles With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Removal
Remove the screw.
2. Remove the outer backrest hinge cover.

Remove the screw.

4. Remove the luggage strap tether.

Remove the Allen bolt.
5. Remove the rear seat head restraint.

Depress the 2 retaining clips.
6. Remove the rear seat head restraint retaining
clips.
7. Remove the rear seat release handle.
8. Remove the rear seat release handle finisher.

Remove the screw.
9. Disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical

connector.
Release the rear seat cushion side clip.
10. Remove the rear seat backrest assembly.
11. Release the rear seat backrest cover.

12. Remove the rear seat backrest cover.

Installation
1. Install the rear seat backrest cover.
Install the 16 hog rings.
Attach the 4 clips.
2. Install the rear seat backrest assembly.

3. Connect the backrest heater mat electrical connector.
Attach the rear seat cushion side clip.
4. Install the rear seat release handle finisher.

Tighten the screw.
5. Install the rear seat release handle.
6. Install the rear seat head restraint retaining clips.
7. Install the rear seat head restraint.
8. Install the luggage strap tether.

Tighten the screws.
10. Install the outer backrest hinge cover.

Tighten the screws.
Tighten the screw.

Attach the clips.
Tighten the screw.
Attach the backrest cover side clip.
Seating - Seat Track Vehicles Without: Power Seats
Removal

3. Remove the front seat base trim.

Remove the screw.
4. Remove the front seat base.

Remove the 6 nuts.

connectors.
6. Remove the seat track assembly.

Installation
1. Install the seat track assembly.

3. Install the front seat base.

4. Install the front seat base trim.

Tighten the screw.

Tighten the screws.

Seating - Seat Track Vehicles With: Power Seats
Removal
NOTE: The front seat track motor is supplied as part of the front seat lower frame assembly.


3. Release the seat control switch.

Remove the 2 clips.
4. Remove the front seat base trim.

Remove the screw.
5. Remove the front seat base.

Remove the 6 nuts.
6. Remove the front seat track motor.
Remove the 8 nuts.
7. Remove the front seat track motor assembly

from the seat rails.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Release the flexi drive from the seat
rails.
Installation
1. Make sure the seat rails are installed as a
matched pair as supplied.
Make sure the seat rails are correctly
aligned.
2. Install the front seat track motor assembly to the seat rails.
Install the 4 bolts.
3. Install the front seat track motor.

Secure the electrical connector.
4. Install the front seat base.

5. Install the front seat base trim.

Tighten the screw.

Tighten the screws.
7. Install the seat control switch.

Tighten the screws.

Seating - Front Seat Manual Height Adjustment Lever
Removal
1. Remove the drivers side seat slides.
For additional information, refer to: Seat Track - Vehicles With: Power Seats (501-10
2. Remove the front seat cushion base.

For additional information, refer to: Front Seat Cushion (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
3.
4.
5. TORQUE: 25 Nm
6. CAUTIONS:
Tie straps
must be fitted,
failure to follow
this instruction
may result in
personal injury.
Failure to
follow this
instruction may
cause damage
to the vehicle.
Secure the seat

base using the
4 tie straps
supplied, as
shown.
Using
the seat
height
adjuster,
lower
the seat
base to
its
lowest
position.
7. Release the arm from the height adjuster.

8. Drill out the 4 rivets.
Installation
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms -
Sealants
Application Land Rover Sealant kit Part No.
Windshield CES 500020
Liftgate glass CES 500020
Glass roof panel CES 500020
Rear quarter window glass CES 500020
Rear door window fixed glass Torx screw 10 7
Rear door window motor and regulator to door nuts and bolts 10 7
Front door window regulator and motor nuts and bolts 10 7
Front door window glass guide channel bolt 10 7
Liftgate glass retaining nuts 25 18
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
COMPONENT LOCATION - SHEET 1 OF 2

1 - Windshield
2 - Finisher
3 - Heated windshield connectors
4 - Rear window
5 - Heated rear window connectors
6 - Rear wiper motor aperture
7 - Sealant
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) shown, LHD (left-hand drive) similar.

1 - DDM (driver door module)
2 - Driver window switches
3 - Driver window regulator
4 - RH (right-hand) rear window switch
5 - RH rear window regulator
6 - RHRDM (rear door module)
7 - LH (left-hand) rear window regulator
8 - LHRDM
9 - LH rear window switch
10 - Front passenger window regulator
11 - PDM (passenger door module)
12 - Front passenger window switch
GENERAL
Windshield
The laminated windshield is bonded and sealed to the body aperture using PU sealant. Heat bonded to the inner
surface of the screen is the optical unit for the rain sensor and the interior mirror mounting boss.
Vertical fine-wire multi-strand elements are fitted between the glass laminations to de-ice and demist the screen. At
the bottom of the screen six horizontal heating elements bonded to the interior glass surface prevent the wiper
blades freezing to the screen during adverse weather conditions.
The screen is supplied with the heating element flat foil connectors fitted to a sealed terminal block. This terminal
block is wired to a connector for connecting to the vehicle harness.
Rear Window
The tempered glass tinted green rear window is bonded to the upper tail doorframe using PU sealant. Fitted to the
inner surface of the rear window are the heating elements and antennas.
The heating element is connected by two Lucar terminals while the antenna is connected to the vehicle by a twin and
single stud connector at the top of the screen.
Electric Windows
Electric windows are installed in all four doors. All of the electric windows incorporate one-shot up, one-shot down
and anti-trap features.
In each door, the window is operated by a regulator, which is controlled by the related door module in response to
inputs from window switches. The door modules also operate the windows in response to inputs from the CJB (central
junction box) for global opening and closing.
WINDOW SWITCHES
Driver Window Switches
Passenger Window Switch
Individual window switches are installed in each of the three passenger doors. Window switches for all of the
windows and a rear window isolation switch are installed in the driver door switchpack in the top surface of the door
trim.
All window switches are of the non-latching rocker type. The switches have two switching positions in each direction,
inch up/down and one-shot up/down. Operating the switch to the second detent position will activate the one-shot
feature.
The driver door switchpack is powered by a permanent battery feed from the CJB. When the switches in the driver
door switchpack are used, the switchpack translates the switch movement into a LIN (local interconnect network) bus
message. A LIN bus connects the driver door switchpack to the driver door module and the driver side RDM. Each
passenger window switch is hardwired into circuits with the related door module.
DOOR MODULES
Each door module is attached to the inside of the related door casing and connected to the door harness.
The door modules interpret the window operation requests into appropriate outputs for the motor in the related
window regulators. Each door module is powered by a permanent battery feed from the CJB.
A LIN bus connects the two door modules on the driver side of the vehicle to the driver door switchpack. The two
door modules on the front passenger side of the vehicle are connected together by a second LIN bus. The DDM and
the PDM are also connected to the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
WINDOW REGULATORS
Front Window Regulators

1 - Window Glass
2 - Window motor
3 - Mounting frame
4 - Glass carrier
The front window regulator and motor is supplied as an assembly and is handed. Each assembly comprises a front
and rear runner, a continuous cable and a motor.
The runners are secured in the door frame with four screws. The door glass is located in two carriers, which are
located in tracks in the runners. The glass is retained in friction pads in each carrier and secured with clamp screws.
Each carrier is attached to the cable which, in turn, is attached to a drum driven by the motor. When the motor is
operated the drum pulls the cable in the required direction to raise or lower the glass.
Rear Window Regulators

1 - Window Glass
2 - Window motor
3 - Mounting frame
4 - Glass carrier
The rear window regulator and motor is supplied as an assembly and is handed. Each assembly comprises a runner,
a continuous cable and a motor.
The runner is secured in the door frame with four bolts. The door glass is located in a carrier located in a track in the
runner. The glass is retained in friction pads in the carrier and secured with a clamp screw.
The carrier is attached to the cable which, in turn, is attached to a drum driven by the motor. When the motor is
operated, the drum pulls the cable in the required direction to raise or lower the glass.
OPERATION
The electric windows will operate in power modes 6 (ignition on) and 7 (engine running), and for five minutes after
the ignition is switched off provided none of the doors are opened.
When a window open or closed selection is made, the related door module supplies power to the window motor to
drive it in the appropriate direction. In the inch mode, the motor stops when the switch is released or the window
reaches the end of its travel. In the one-shot mode, the motor stops when if the switch is operated again (either up
or down) or the window reaches the end of its travel.
When the passenger window switches are used, they produce an open or close request by completing a circuit with
the related door module.
When the driver window switches are used, the driver door switchpack outputs a request message for the appropriate
door module on the LIN bus. If the message is for a door module on the opposite side of the vehicle to the driver, the
DDM relays the message to the PDM on the medium speed CAN bus. If necessary, the PDM then sends a LIN bus
message to the RDM on its side of the vehicle.
If any of the passenger windows have opposing up and down requests from two separate switches, for example, a
passenger window switch and the related window switch on the driver door switchpack, then the operation of that
window will cease, until one or both of the switches are released.
While the isolator switch engaged, the switch tell-tale is illuminated and the rear door modules ignore requests from
their related passenger window switches.
Global opening and closing requests are output from the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus. The DDM and the PDM
then relay the request to their respective RDM.
One-shot Window Operation Reset
If the battery is disconnected or discharged, or the power supply to a door module is interrupted, one-shot window
operation is disabled until the window position is re-established by the affected door module(s). To reset one-shot
window operation:
1. Close the window fully.
2. Release the switch, then pull up and hold the switch for one second.
3. If necessary, repeat the procedure for the other windows.
Anti-trap Protection
The anti-trap feature is incorporated for all of the door windows in both the inching and one-shot modes. If the anti-
trap function is activated while a window is closing, the window motor reverses for 0.5 second.
Each window motor has a Hall sensor to enable the related door module to monitor the motor speed. If the motor
speed decreases below a set threshold, indicating an obstruction, the power feed to the motor is reversed so the
window goes back down.
If it is still necessary to raise the window, the anti-trap protection can be overridden by attempting to close the
window at intervals of less than 10 seconds. On the third attempt the window will move up with increased force to
try and overcome the obstruction. If the obstruction cannot be overcome, one-shot operation is disabled.
WINDOW CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired, N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus.

1 - Battery
3 - Driver window switches
4 - CJB
5 - DDM
6 - Driver window motor
7 - Driver side rear window motor
8 - Driver side RDM
9 - Driver side rear window switch
10 - Passenger side RDM
11 - Passenger side rear window motor
12 - Passenger side rear window switch
13 - PDM
14 - Passenger window motor
15 - Passenger window switch
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
For a detailed description of the glass, frames and mechanisms and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (501-11)
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (Description and Operation),

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms (Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Window control switches condition and installation Fuses
Window motors/regulators Harnesses and connectors
Window channels/runners Window lift relay
Window cables Window control switches
Door window glass retaining brackets Window motors
Symptom Chart

Window(s) Fuse(s) Check the fuses
inoperative Switch fault Check the suspect window operation from the individual door
Front switch switch and from the driver door master switch (it is unlikely that
isolator fault both switches would fail at the same time, so if the window is
Motor/regulator inoperative from either switch, suspect a fault other than a switch)
fault If the inoperative window is a rear unit, check the function of the
Channel/runner isolator at the master switch.
fault If the concern persists and a noise cannot be heard when
Cable fault operating the door window glass, GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Window circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the window circuit
short circuit to for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
ground, short high resistance
circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
Window(s) Window motor

'one-shot' initialization NOTE: Do not install a new door window regulator motor for this
function required concern.
inoperative
If the battery has been disconnected, carry out the initialization
procedure
Heated Heated rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the heated rear
rear window circuit window circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
window short circuit to resistance
does not ground, open
defrost circuit, high
resistance
Window(s) Channel/runner
noisy fault NOTE: Door window glass retaining bracket adjustment procedure
during Cable fault
operation Motor/regulator GO to Pinpoint Test A.
fault
Slow or Fuse GO to Pinpoint Test C.

partial Switch fault
window Relay fault
operation Element fault
Circuit fault
Rear door Window motor

window initialization NOTE: Do not install a new door window regulator motor for this
glass required (using the concern.
bounce manufacturers
back approve diagnostic Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform the
system) window initialization routine
Front door Window motor

window initialization NOTE: Do not install a new door window regulator motor for this
glass required concern.
bounce Channel/runner
back fault GO to Pinpoint Test D.
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM) (100-00
Pinpoint Test
PINPOINT TEST A : WINDOW(S) NOISY DURING OPERATION

CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS IS SECURE
1 Remove the door window glass outer waist seal.
2 Check if the door glass installed correctly and secured to the door window regulator.
Is the door window glass correctly installed and secure?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Install a new door window glass as necessary.
REFER to: Front Door Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation) /
Rear Door Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
A2: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR
1 Remove the door window glass as necessary.
Installation) /
2 Operate the door window regulator four times.
Does the door window regulator operate correctly (without noise)?
Yes
Ensure that an anti-rattle pad (available from the parts department) is installed to the door
window glass retaining bracket and installed correctly.
Installation).
Test the system for normal operation. If the concern persists, GO to A3.
No
Install a new door window regulator motor as necessary.
REFER to: Front Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
Removal and Installation) /
Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal
and Installation).
A3: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS FREE FROM FOREIGN MATERIAL
1 Check for any foreign material or obstruction in the door window glass seal.
Is the door window glass seal free from foreign material?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
Remove any foreign material from door window glass seal and lubricate the seal. Test the
system for normal operation.
A4: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
1 Check that the door window glass seal is installed correctly.
Is the door window glass seal installed correctly?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Install the door window glass seal correctly. Test the system for normal operation.
A5: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS NOT WORN IN THE CHANNELS
1 Visually check that the door window glass seal is not worn in the door channels.
Is the door window glass seal worn in the channels?
Yes
Install a new door window glass seal as necessary. Test the system for normal operation.
No
Install the door window glass and adjust the door window glass. Test the system for normal
operation.
PINPOINT TEST B : WINDOW(S) INOPERATIVE (MOTOR NOISE CANNOT BE HEARD)

CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FOR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR NOISE
1 Operate the door window regulator motor as necessary.
Is there a noise from the door window regulator motor when operated?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Removal and Installation) /
Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal
and Installation).
B2: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS FREE FROM FOREIGN MATERIAL
Yes
GO to B3.
No
B3: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Yes
GO to B4.
No
B4: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS NOT WORN IN THE CHANNELS
Yes
No
Install the door window glass. Adjust the door window glass referring to the door window
glass retaining bracket procedure at the end of this section (see below). Test the system
for normal operation. If the concern persists, Test the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST C : SLOW OR PARTIAL WINDOW OPERATION

CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR
1 Remove the door window glass as necessary.
Installation) /
2 Operate the door window regulator as necessary.
Does the door window regulator operate correctly?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
GO to C5.
C2: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS FREE FROM FOREIGN MATERIAL
Yes
GO to C3.
No
C3: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Yes
GO to C4.
No
C4: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS NOT WORN IN THE CHANNELS
Yes
No
Adjust the door window glass referring to the door window glass retaining bracket
procedure at the end of this section (see below). Test the system for normal operation.
C5: CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR
NOTE: The door window regulator motor can be removed from the regulator. Install a new door
window regulator motor not the complete assembly for this concern.
1 Using a multimeter, check the voltage to the door window regulator motor.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
No
Repair the wiring harness. Test the system for normal operation. If the concern continues,
install a new door window regulator motor as necessary.
PINPOINT TEST D : FRONT DOOR WINDOW GLASS BOUNCE BACK

CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK WINDOW MOTOR INITIALIZATION
1 Initialize the door window motor.
REFER to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General
Procedures).
Did the initialization work?
Yes
Test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS FREE FROM FOREIGN MATERIAL
Yes
GO to D3.
No
D3: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Yes
GO to D4.
No
D4: CHECK THAT THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS SEAL IS NOT WORN IN THE CHANNELS
Yes
No
GO to D5.
D5: CHECK THE DOOR WINDOW GLASS IS SECURE
1 Remove the door window glass outer waist seal.
2 Check if the door glass installed correctly and secured to the door window regulator.
Is the door window glass correctly installed and secure?
Yes
Test the system for normal operation.
No
Adjust the door window glass referring to the door window glass retaining bracket procedure
in this procedure. Test the system for normal operation. If the concern persists, install a new
door window regulator motor as necessary.
Door window glass retaining bracket adjustment procedure
1. Remove the door window glass as necessary.

REFER to: Front Door Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation) /
2. Check for any foreign material or obstruction in the door window glass seal and channels. Clean all areas
prior to adjustment to allow correct alignment.
3. Release but do not remove the door window glass retaining bracket(s) bolt(s).
4. Push the door window glass retaining bracket(s) to the edge of the door window glass to achieve
minimum parallel gap.
5. Tighten the door window glass retaining bracket(s) bolt(s).

Tighten the retaining bolt(s) to 6Nm.
6. Apply lubricate (RYL500010) to the lower part of the door window glass retaining brackets prior to
installation of the door window glass.
7. Install the door window glass as necessary.

REFER to: Front Door Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation) /
8. Check the system for normal operation.
Door glass channel setting procedure
1. Remove the door trim panel as necessary.

REFER to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation) /
Rear Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2. NOTE: Do not remove the door window glass channel.
Release the door window glass channel retaining bolt.
3. Lower the door window glass.
4. Tighten the door window glass channel retaining bolt.
5. Check the system for normal operation.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Fixed Window Glass
For a detailed description of the Glass, Frames and Mechanisms and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation section of the workshop manual.
NOTES:
Refer to Section 100-00 General Information for window glass health and safety precautions.
2. Visually inspect for obvious mechanical faults.

Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Physical damage to the windshield
Warranty Repairs
NOTES:
The warranty period for the windshield is twelve months with the exception of delamination and electrical
faults.
Warranty repairs should be completed using genuine parts, in accordance with the Warranty Policy and
Procedures Manual.
1. Draw a line around the windshield damage using a marker pen.
2. Photograph the entire windshield. If the damage extends behind any trim, remove the trim and take
further photographs.
3. Photograph the trademark logo and code to validate the windshield as factory fitment.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Cause Action

Scratches Debris trapped under a wiper blade GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Foreign object damage
Fouling by trim
Chips Foreign object damage GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Cracks Foreign object damage GO to Pinpoint Test C.

Impact damage during assembly
Delamination Manufacturing defect GO to Pinpoint Test D.
PINPOINT TEST A : SCRATCH TEST

A1: IDENTIFY SCRATCH
NOTE: A scratch will usually be regular in shape, following the line of the object that caused it.
1 Probe using the tip of a pencil to identify a groove in the windshield surface.
Is there a groove?
Yes
Windshield scratched. GO to A2.
No
Defect not valid.
A2: CAUSE OF SCRATCH
1 Check for trim, body panels, or foreign objects that may have caused the scratch.
Was the scratch caused by a foreign object?
Yes
The damage is not due to a defect or an assembly error.
No
Rectify as appropriate.
PINPOINT TEST B : CHIP TEST

B1: CHIP TEST
NOTE: Impact damage may cause a crack to form.

1 Assess the damage by probing with the tip of a pencil.
Is the damaged area rough (indicating a breach of the windshield surface)?
Yes
Damage caused by the impact of a foreign object. Not a manufacturing defect.
No
Install a new windshield.
PINPOINT TEST C : CRACK TEST

C1: IDENTIFY CRACK
NOTE: A crack will be detectable as a step in the glass.
1 Confirm the presence of a crack by probing with the tip of a pencil.

Is the windshield cracked?
Yes
Windshield cracked. GO to C2.
No
Windshield not cracked. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
C2: CAUSE OF CRACK
NOTE: Multiple cracks will radiate out from the source.

1 Assess the source of the crack by probing with the tip of a pencil.
Is there evidence of impact damage being the source of the crack?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST D : DELAMINATION TEST

D1: DELAMINATION TEST
1 Visually assess the windshield for delamination.
Have the glass laminates separated?

Yes
No
No further action.
DTC Index
For a complete list of all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to
Section 100-00.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Door Window Motor Initialization
General Procedures
1. NOTES:
After the battery has been disconnected it is necessary

to initialize each door window motor separately to operate
the "one-touch" up function.
Make sure a minimum of 2 minutes from initial

disconnect of battery has elapse prior to reconnecting the
battery. The initialising of the window glass motor must be
conducted with the engine running.
Operate the window control switch until the door window

glass is in the fully closed position, continue to operate the
window control switch for a further two seconds.
2. Release the window control switch.
3. Operate the window control switch in the closed position

and continue to operate the window control switch for a
further two seconds.
4. Operate the window control switch until the door window

glass is in the fully open position ("one-touch" down).
5. NOTES:
If the door window motor initialization has been

completed correctly, when the window control switch is
operated, the door window glass should move to the fully
closed position ("one-touch" up) automatically.
If the door window glass does not fully close

automatically ("one-touch" up), repeat the complete
procedure.
Operate the window control switch once to the close

position.
6. Repeat the door window motor initialization for each door

window motor.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Glass
Special Tool(s)
501-114
Release Lever, Door Glass
Removal
1. Special Tool(s): 501-114
2.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the door glass

retaining brackets are pushed to the edge of
the door window glass to achieve minimum
parallel gap.
NOTE: This operation must be done for

both retaining brackets.
Torque: 6 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that any grease or lubricant is

removed from the retaining brackets prior to
installation of the anti-rattle pads.
Make sure that the anti-rattle pad is

installed in the orientation illustrated.
NOTE: This operation must be done for

both retaining brackets.
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Door Window Glass
Removal
NOTES:
Once the rear door window fixed glass has been removed the rear door glass can be simply lifted and
removed from the door.
The door glass should be lowered by approximately one third.
1. Remove the rear door window fixed glass.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Door Fixed
Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
2. Remove the rear door window glass.
3. NOTES:

Remove the glass retaining clip.

Remove the spacer washer.
Remove the flat washer.
Installation
1. Install the glass retaining clip.
Install the spacer.
Install the washer.
Tighten the Torx screws to 8 Nm (6 lb.ft).
2. Install the rear door window glass.
3. Install the rear door window fixed glass.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Door Fixed
Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
Published: 04-Sep-2013
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Liftgate Window Glass
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Always protect paintwork and glass when removing exterior components.
Always protect the interior components when removing body glass.
Lay the glass on felt covered supports. Do not stand on edge as this can cause chips which subsequently
develop into cracks.
NOTE: The following equipment is required: l Cutting wire and handles l Kent knife l Glazing knife l Glass
replacement kit l Sealant applicator gun l Suction cups l A felt covered table or stand to support glass
1. Remove the rear wiper arm.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Wiper Pivot Arm
2. Remove the rear wiper drive spindle seal.

For additional information, refer to: Liftgate
Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

other side.
6. Disconnect both heated rear window electrical

connectors.
7. WARNING: Eye protection must be worn.
With assistance, remove the liftgate window

glass.
Carefully cut through the sealant using
a glazing knife or cutting wire.
Attach the suction cups.
Noting fitted position, remove the 5
spacers.
Installation
1. Carefully remove the sealant from the body to leave a
smooth surface.
2. Install the liftgate window glass.

Install the spacers equally as shown.
Use masking tape to establish reference
marks as an alignment aid.
3. Remove the liftgate window glass.
4. Apply etch primer to any bare metal.
5. CAUTION: Correct preparation of body apertures “post

painting” to ensure satisfactory glass adhesion, must be
carried out in line with industry practise.
Apply primer over the etch primer.
6. Apply glass primer to the sealant face on the liftgate

window glass and allow to cure.
7. Apply activator over the old sealant on the liftgate and allow
to cure.
8. Fit a pre-cut nozzle to the sealer cartridge, remove the lid,

shake out the crystals and fit the cartridge to the applicator
gun.
Modify the nozzle to achieve a bead section in the
shape of a right angle triangle with a base of 8 mm
and a vertical height of 12 mm.
9. Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the

liftgate window glass as shown.
10. With assistance, install and align the liftgate window glass.
Lightly press the window glass to seat the sealer.
11. Test the sealer for leaks, apply additional sealer if

necessary. If water is used, allow sealer to dry before
testing. Spray water around the glass and check for leaks.
Mark any area that leaks. Dry the glass and sealer then
apply additional sealer.
12. Connect the heated rear window electrical connectors.


Installation).
16. Install the rear wiper drive spindle seal.
17. Install the rear wiper arm.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Door Fixed Window Glass
Removal
1. Remove the rear door window motor and regulator
assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Door Window
Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
2. Lower the rear door glass to the bottom of the door.

Remove the wedge.
3. Remove the rear door frame trim.

Carefully release the door trim.
4. Carefully remove the inner waist seal.
5. Release the lining from the glass rear channel.
6. Remove the rear door window fixed glass.

Remove the grommet.
Loosen the Torx screw, but do not
remove it completely at this stage.
Pull the lower edge of the glass forward
to release it from the door frame.
Installation
1. Install the rear door window fixed glass.
Make sure the locating peg on the fixed glass has
engaged with the door frame.
Tighten the Torx screw to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2. Install the channel lining.
3. Install the inner waist seal.
4. Install the door frame trim.

Remove backing tape from adhesive strip.
Secure the clips.
5. NOTE: Wedge the glass in this position.
Raise the rear door glass fully.

Engage the door glass with the channel.
6. Install the rear door window motor and regulator assembly.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Windshield Glass
Removal
CAUTIONS:
NOTE: The following equipment is required: l Cutting wire and handles l Kent knife l Glazing knife l
Windshield replacement kit l Sealant applicator gun l Suction cups l A felt covered table or stand to support glass


Installation).
3. Remove the rain sensor.

For additional information, refer to: Rain Sensor (501-16
Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the roof moulding.

other side.
With assistance, remove the windshield glass.

If installed, disconnect the 4 electrical
connectors.
spacers.
Installation
smooth surface.
2. Install the windshield glass.

3. Remove the windshield glass.


Apply etch primer to any bare metal.
5. Apply primer over the etch primer.
6. Apply glass primer to the sealant face on the windshield

glass and allow to cure.
7. Apply activator over the old sealant on the windshield glass

and allow to cure.

gun.
9. Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the

windshield glass as shown.
10. With assistance, install the window glass.


12. Install the roof mouldings.

13. Install the rain sensor.

For additional information, refer to: Rain Sensor (501-16
Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).

Installation).

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Glass Roof Panel
Removal
CAUTIONS:
NOTE: The following equipment is required: l Cutting wire and handles l Kent knife l Glazing knife l Glass
replacement kit l Sealant applicator gun l Suction cups l A felt covered table or stand to support glass
1. Remove the headliner.

For additional information, refer to: Headliner (501-05
2. Remove the roof moulding.

other side.
3. Remove the antenna.

Disconnect the cable.
With assistance, remove the roof panel fixed

glass.
spacers.
Installation
smooth surface.
2. Install the roof panel fixed glass.

3. With assistance, remove the roof panel fixed glass.


Apply etch primer to any bare metal.
5. Apply primer over the etch primer.
6. Apply glass primer to the sealant face on the roof panel

fixed glass and allow to cure.
7. Apply activator over the old sealant on the roof panel and
allow to cure.

gun.
9. Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the roof

panel fixed glass as shown.
10. With assistance, install and align the roof panel fixed glass.
Lightly press the roof panel fixed glass to seat the
sealer.

12. Install the antenna.

Tighten the screws.
Connect the cable.
13. Install the roof mouldings.

14. Install the headliner.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Quarter Window Glass
Removal
CAUTIONS:
NOTE: The following equipment is required:
Cutting wire and handles

Kent knife
Glazing knife
Glass replacement kit
Sealant applicator gun
Suction cups
A felt covered table or stand to support glass

Installation).
2. Remove the rear quarter window glass panel.

3. Disconnect the rear quarter window glass

antenna connector.
CAUTION: Care must be taken not to

damage the air bag curtain module when
cutting through the sealant.
With assistance, remove the rear quarter

window glass.
spacers.
Installation
smooth surface.
2. Apply etch primer to any bare metal.

Apply primer over the etch primer.
4. Apply glass primer to the sealant face on the rear quarter

5. Apply activator over the old sealant on the rear quarter


gun.
7. Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the rear

quarter window glass as shown.
8. With assistance, install and align the rear quarter window

glass.

10. Connect the rear quarter window glass antenna connector.

11. Install the rear quarter window glass panel.

12. Install the D-pillar upper trim panel.
Installation).
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Regulator and
Motor
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
2. Refer to: Front Door Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames

and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
3.
4. Torque:
Front door window regulator and motor
retaining bolts 10 Nm
Front door window regulator and motor
retaining nuts 10 Nm
Door window glass guide channel retaining
bolt 10 Nm
Installation

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Door Window Regulator and
Motor
Special Tool(s)
Door glass release lever
501-114
Removal
NOTE: The door glass should be lowered by approximately one third.

2. Remove the speaker.

3. Carefully remove the outer waist seal.

Remove the screw.
4. NOTE: Wedge the glass in this position.
Using the special tool, release the clip and lift

the glass to the top of the door frame.
5. Remove the window motor and regulator
assembly.
Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Rotate the assembly 90 degrees
clockwise, to remove the upper part of
the assembly from the rear side of the
aperture first.
Installation
1. Install the window motor and regulator assembly.
Tighten the bolts and nuts to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
2. Secure the glass to the glass regulator.

Remove the wedge.
Lower the glass.
3. Install the outer waist seal.

Tighten the screws.
5. Install the rear door trim panel.

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Front Door Window Control Switch
Removal
1. Remove the window control switch.
Carefully release the switch.
Installation
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Rear Door Window Control Switch
Removal
1. Remove the window control switch.
Carefully release the front of the switch.
Installation
Instrument Panel and Console -
Floor console lid Torx bolts 3 2
Floor console Torx bolts 10 7
Passenger air bag module nuts 10 7
Passenger air bag module bracket Torx screws 25 18
Ground cables to passenger/driver side lower A-pillar nuts 10 7
Adaptor panel(s) nuts 10 7
A/C lines to bulkhead bolt 10 7
A/C lines to body nuts 10 7
EGR coolant crossover pipe bolts 10 7
Instrument panel upper section to body Torx bolt 10 7
Instrument panel center bracket Torx bolts 25 18
Transmission selector lever bolts 10 7
Front door bolts 10 7
Door check strap to A-pillar bolts 10 7
Steering column switch assembly Torx bolts 3 2
Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel

1 - Instrument Panel
2 - Steering column cover
3 - Cup holders
4 - Centre console
5 - Glovebox
COOL BOX
On some vehicles, a cool box is incorporated in the centre console between the two front seats.
1 - Cubby box lid
2 - Cubby box tray
3 - Container
4 - On/Off switch
5 - Thermoelectric cooler heatsink
6 - Fan
The cool box is an open topped container with an aluminum liner and an insulating outer layer. A thermoelectric
cooler is installed in the front of the container. The top of the container is covered by the cubby box tray and the
cubby box lid. An electrical connector on the front of the cool box connects the cool box to the console harness.
Operation of the thermoelectric cooler is controlled by an on/off switch on the top front edge of the container. A
permanent battery feed is supplied to the on/off switch from the central junction box (CJB). A light emitting diode
(LED) in the on/off switch is illuminated while the cool box is selected on.
The thermoelectric cooler is a solid state heat pump that uses the Peltier Effect to cool the inside of the cool box.
The Peltier Effect occurs when a direct current is passed through a circuit of two dissimilar conductors, which are
connected together at two junctions; this causes one junction to become cold and one junction to become hot. The
potential difference between the two conductors creates an electric field at each junction; when a current is then
applied to the circuit the charge flows against the direction of the electric field at one junction, causing it to absorb
heat, and with the direction of the electric field at the other junction, causing it to release heat. In thermoelectric
coolers, a number of these circuits (known as couples) are connected together, in series, and sandwiched between
ceramic plates, then connected to a heatsink and fan. On the cool box, the cold side of the thermoelectric cooler is
attached to the aluminum liner and the heatsink and fan are installed on the insulating outer layer.
Peltier Effect Circuit

1 - Conductor material A
2 - Hot junction
3 - Conductor material B
4 - Battery
5 - Cold junction
When the on/off switch is selected on, the LED in the switch illuminates and power is supplied to the thermoelectric
cooler. The couples in the thermoelectric cooler then transfer heat from the liner of the cool box to the heatsink, and
the fan runs to cool the heatsink.
CONTROL DIAGRAM

1 - Battery
2 - Fusible link 18E, battery junction box (BJB)
3 - Fuse 59P, CJB
4 - Cool box on/off switch
5 - Thermoelectric cooler
Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Description and
Operation).
Instrument Panel and Console - Overhead Console
For additional information, refer to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Description and Operation).
Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Floor Console Upper Section (501-12 Instrument

2. NOTE: Right-hand shown, left-hand

similar.
3.
4.
5.
6.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Floor Console Upper Section
Removal
NOTES:
Make sure that the gear selector lever is in position N before removing any components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel Upper Section
Removal


Operation).


For additional information, refer to: Passenger Side Register
Trim Panel (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal and
Installation).
5. Remove the stowage compartment tray.

6. Remove the instrument panel speaker.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Speaker
(415-03 Speakers, Removal and Installation).

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05
8. Remove the sunload sensor.

Release the clips.
9. Remove the instrument panel passenger side

reinforcement upper retaining screws.
10. Release the passenger air bag module bracket.


passenger air bag module.
12. NOTE: Avoid dropping the screw inside the

instrument panel.
Remove 1 Torx screw and 1 bolt, from the

instrument panel upper section speaker aperture.
13. Release the instrument panel wiring harness.

14. With assistance, remove the instrument panel upper section.

Remove the passenger air bag module.

Remove the 4 nuts.
16. Remove the windshield defroster duct.

Installation
1. Install the windshield defroster duct.
Tighten the screws.
2. Install the passenger air bag module.

3. With assistance, install the instrument panel upper section.

Tighten the screws.
4. Tighten the instrument panel upper section speaker aperture

bolt to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
5. Secure the passenger air bag module bracket.

6. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
7. Install the instrument panel passenger side reinforcement upper

retaining screws.
8. Install the sunload sensor.

9. Install the A-pillar trim panels.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Speaker
(415-03 Speakers, Removal and Installation).
11. Install the stowage compartment tray.

Secure the 4 clips.

Trim Panel (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal and
Installation).


Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel
Removal
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always
correct.

and Installation) /
Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol (501-05 Interior Trim and
Ornamentation, Removal and Installation) /
Engine Cover - 2.7L V6 - TdV6 (501-05 Interior Trim and
Engine Cover - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (501-05 Interior Trim and
2. Evacuate the air conditioning (A/C) system.


safety stands.

TDV6 2.7L Diesel, General Procedures) /
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03B
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures) /
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03C
Engine Cooling - V6 4.0L Petrol, General Procedures) /
Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-
03D Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).


Installation).
7. Remove the driver side closing trim panel.

Release the clip.
Release the clip.
9. Release the door check strap from the A-pillar.

10. NOTE: The door is still attached by its
harness at this stage.
With assistance, release and support the door

assembly.
Remove the 2 bolts.
11. Release the electrical connector from the A-

Pillar.
Carefully release, then slide the latch to
locate in the indents, arrowed.
12. Remove the door.
13. Remove the front seats.

14. Release the transmission selector lever cable.

Remove the clip.
Release the cable.
15. Remove the transmission selector lever.

Remove the 4 bolts.
nut.

housing.
18. Position the heater housing center ducts aside

for access.
19. Remove 2 Torx bolts from the instrument panel
center bracket.
20. Remove the instrument panel center speaker

grille.
21. Remove the instrument panel upper section to

body bolt.

bulkhead Torx bolt.

contamination.

25. Release 2 A/C lines from the body.

Remove the nut.

Release 2 A/C lines from the bulkhead.

Remove the bolt.

Remove the 4 nuts.
Remove the 2 nuts.


Remove the 2 nuts.


connector.
33. Disconnect 2 central junction box (CJB)

35. If installed, disconnect the instrument panel

36. Driver side: Remove the heater housing to bulkhead Torx

bolt.

bulkhead Torx bolt.
Installation


optic cables.

connectors.

lower A-pillar.

pillar.

pillar.

13. Secure the A/C lines to the bulkhead.

14. Secure the A/C lines to the body.



18. Install the instrument panel upper section to body bolt and
tighten to 10 Nm (7 lb.ft).
19. Install the speaker grille.

20. Install the instrument panel center bracket Torx bolts and
21. Attach the heater housing center ducts.

Nm (16 lb.ft).
24. Install the transmission selector lever.

25. Attach the transmission selector lever cable.

Install the clip.
26. Install the front seats.

27. With assistance, install the door assembly.
Secure the electrical connector.
Secure the grommet.
28. Attach the door check strap to the A pillar.

29. Install the driver side closing trim panel.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
31. Install the cowl side trim panels.

Installation).


TDV6 2.7L Diesel, General Procedures) /
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03B
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures) /
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03C
Engine Cooling - V6 4.0L Petrol, General Procedures) /
Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-
03D Engine Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).


and Installation) /
Engine Cover - V8 5.0L Petrol (501-05 Interior Trim and
Engine Cover - 2.7L V6 - TdV6 (501-05 Interior Trim and
Engine Cover - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel Driver Side
Reinforcement
Removal
2. Refer to: Steering Wheel (211-04 Steering Column,

3. Refer to: Instrument Panel Center Reinforcement (501-12


5.
6.
7.
8. NOTE: Left-hand drive shown, right-hand
drive similar.
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel Passenger Side
Reinforcement
Removal
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always
correct.
1. Remove the PAD switch.

For additional information, refer to: Passenger Air Bag
Deactivation (PAD) Switch (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
System, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the instrument panel center reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Center
Reinforcement (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,

Installation).
4. Detach the door weatherstrip and remove the

side trim panel.
1. Release the trim panel retaining clip.
2. Remove the trim panel.

Remove the clip.
6. Remove the stowage compartment tray.
7. Remove the passenger side support bracket

lower retaining screws.
8. Remove the instrument panel passenger side

reinforcement.

Remove the glove compartment lamp.

10. Remove the glove compartment damper.
11. NOTE: Note the position of the hinge pin

and spring prior to removal.
Remove the stowage compartment lid.

Remove the 2 hinge pins.
Release the 2 hinge springs.
Remove the Torx screw and remove the
damper.
12. Remove the glove and stowage compartment

strikers.
Installation
1. Install the glove compartment damper.
Tighten the Torx screw.
2. Install the stowage compartment lid.

Install the damper and tighten the Torx screw.
Attach the hinge springs.
Install the hinge springs.
3. Install the glove and stowage compartment strikers.

Tighten the screws.
4. Install the glove compartment lamp.
5. Install the instrument panel passenger side reinforcement.

6. Install the passenger side support bracket lower retaining

screws.

Install the clip.
8. Install the stowage compartment tray.

Secure the clips.
9. Install the side trim panel and attach the door weatherstrip.

Installation).
11. Install the instrument panel center reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel Center
Reinforcement (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,
12. Install the PAD switch.

For additional information, refer to: Passenger Air Bag
Deactivation (PAD) Switch (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
System, Removal and Installation).
Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel Center
Reinforcement
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Floor Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and

Console, Removal and Installation).
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. NOTE: LHD shown, RHD similar.
7. NOTE: RHD shown, LHD similar.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Glove Compartment
Special Tool(s)
Glove compartment hinge pin remover
501-113
Removal
Release the clip.
2. Open the glove compartment to the service

condition.
Release the glove compartment latch
stops.
3. CAUTION: If the hinge pin will not

release, rotate the pin through 90 degrees to
aid removal.
Using the special tool, remove the glove

compartment.
Apply pressure to the head of the hinge
pin and install the special tool. Remove
the hinge pin.
remaining hinge pin.
Installation
Install the hinge pins.
2. Close the glove compartment.

Secure the latch stops.

Secure the clip.
Tighten the screws.
Instrument Panel and Console - Instrument Panel Console Switch
Assembly
Removal
NOTES:
1. NOTE: LHD shown, RHD similar.
2. NOTE: RHD shown, LHD similar.

3. NOTE: Floor console shown removed for
clarity.
4.
Installation

Instrument Panel and Console - Cool Box
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the floor console upper panel.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console Upper
and Installation).
3. Remove the floor console lid.

Open the lid.
Remove the 2 covers.
4. Remove the floor console cool box.

Installation
1. Install the floor console cool box.
Tighten the screws.
2. Install the floor console lid.

Install the covers.
3. Install the floor console upper panel.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console Upper
and Installation).

Specifications).
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems -
Hood latch release handle bolt 5 3.7
Liftgate latch actuator bolts 10 7
Liftgate latch Torx screws 10 7
Liftgate striker bolts 25 18
Taligate latch striker bolts 25 18
Tailgate latch Torx screws 25 18
Front door latch Torx screws 10 7
Rear door latch Torx screws 10 7
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems
Passive Entry - Antenna and Keyless Vehicle Module Location

1 - Door Antenna - right-hand-front
2 - Door Antenna - right-hand-rear
7 - Bumper Antenna – rear bumper
9 - Door Antenna - left-hand-rear
10 - Door Antenna - left-hand-front
11 - Interior Antenna – front compartment (passive start only)
OVERVIEW
The hinged panels are secured with latches and strikers. A remotely operated central locking system controls the
locking and unlocking of the door and luggage compartment latches.
A radio frequency Smart Key allows the vehicle to be locked and unlocked by pressing the appropriate handset
buttons. Two levels of central locking system are available:
Remote central locking, and an

optional passive entry.
The passive entry and associated passive start system allows the driver to unlock and start the vehicle without using
a vehicle key in a door-lock or ignition switch. The passive entry system is an optional fitment while the passive start
system is a standard fitment on all vehicles. The passive start system is combined with the passive anti-theft
immobilization system.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft - Passive (419-01B Anti-Theft - Passive, Description and Operation).
Emergency access to the vehicle is provided by a concealed key barrel located in the front left-hand door handle. The
key barrel is concealed by a plastic cover which can be removed by inserting the blade of the emergency key into a
slot in the cover. The removable emergency key blade is located in the Smart Key.
Operation of the key barrel unlocks the vehicle but does not disarm the alarm system. Locking and unlocking
conditions using the emergency key in the door key barrel are:
If the alarm is not armed the vehicle can be centrally unlocked.

If the alarm is armed the door only can be opened and the alarm will be triggered.
The vehicle cannot be double locked or the alarm system armed using the emergency key.
The vehicle can be centrally locked and unlocked from inside using the interior handle release levers on the front
doors only. The driver can select locking options, single point entry or drive away locking for example, from a menu
available on the touch screen.
Central Locking – Radio Frequency Remote System
The radio frequency central locking system provides locking and unlocking from inside the vehicle and outside within
a 20 meter range. The system is operated using buttons on the Smart Key, which transmits radio frequency signals
to the radio frequency receiver.
Additional buttons on the Smart Key provide for the convenience operation of the headlamp delay, panic alarm and
tailgate release.
Depending on vehicle market, functions offered by the Smart Key include:
Double locking the doors from outside the vehicle if the lock button on the Smart Key is pressed twice within 3
seconds.
Drive-away locking - switched on or off by the customer using the vehicle security settings menu available on
the touch screen.
Single or two stage unlocking - single-stage unlocking unlocks all doors with a single press; two-stage
unlocking unlocks the driver's door only with a single press and all other doors with a second press.
Changing the unlocking mode between single stage and two-stage also affects the unlocking mode for passive entry
(see below). The single or two-stage unlocking function can be switched on or off, as can remote global open or
close for the electric windows using the vehicle security settings menu available on the touch screen.
The fuel filler flap is locked by the global locking function. It is not locked by drive-away locking, or if doors are
locked from inside the vehicle using the handles.
Actuated from the front door levers only, the doors can be locked from inside the vehicle by pressing the interior door
release levers inwards and unlocked by pulling the levers. The touch-screen incorporates a valet mode feature which
inhibits access to the glove box while also limiting the use of the touch-screen.
On leaving the vehicle with passive entry the user must press an external button on the door handle once to centrally
lock the vehicle or twice within 3 seconds to double lock. The user has a further 3 seconds to pull the door handle to
check the vehicle is locked without the Smart Key proximity function unlocking the door again. Pulling the handle
after the 3 seconds has lapsed will unlock the door as normal.
If any aperture is not fully closed when the locking process is initiated, either passively or by the Smart Key
transmitter, the locking function will be inhibited and an audible error indication will be given. If the ignition is left on
an audible warning will be given if the user exits the vehicle, if the user attempts to lock the vehicle (ignition on),
another audible indication will be given, and the locking function will be inhibited.
If the door is closed without locking and no key left in the car the ignition will be switched off immediately. If the
ignition is left on at any time without starting the vehicle it will switch off automatically after 60 minutes.
If the door is opened by the mechanical key, the full alarm system will sound until the user enters the vehicle and
presses either:
the start/stop button, or

Smart Key unlock button.
NOTE: If the KVM (keyless vehicle module) fails to locate the Smart Key, a message 'SMART KEY NOT FOUND
REFER TO HANDBOOK' will appear in the instrument cluster message center and the keyless start back-up process
will have to be used to mobilize and start the vehicle.
Keyless Start Backup
If the vehicle has been unlocked using the emergency key blade or the Smart Key is not detected by the vehicle, it
will be necessary to use the keyless start backup to disarm the alarm and start the engine. The following process
must be followed in this event:
Position the Smart Key against the underside of the fascia, on the outboard side of the steering column, with
the buttons facing downwards. This is the location of the IAU (immobilizer antenna unit).
Holding the Smart Key in position and the brake / clutch pedal depressed, press the start/stop button to start
the engine.
Smart Key positioned next to immobilizer antenna unit
This process bypasses the data exchange between the KVM and the CJB (central junction box); this is an inductive
process and will operate if the battery in the Smart Key is discharged. A transponder within the Smart Key is detected
by the IAU. The IAU confirms the code output from the transponder and communicates this code confirmation with
the CJB via a LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection. The CJB then initiates the vehicle start process in the
normal manner.
PASSIVE ENTRY SYSTEM
The passive entry system is controlled by the KVM and low frequency antennas in each door handle and one in the
rear bumper; antennas are also strategically situated within the vehicle. When inside the vehicle, the antennas
ensure the Smart Key is always within the active transmission zone of the antennas no matter where the Smart Key
is placed inside the vehicle. For this reason the orientation and positioning of the antennas is critical to the correct
functioning of the system.
The vehicle can be unlocked without the use of a key-blade or buttons on the Smart Key.
When an external door handle is grasped and the Smart Key is within one meter (3.3ft.) of the handle; the Smart
Key receives a low-frequency signal transmitted from the handle.
The Smart Key responds with a radio frequency transmission of its authorization code. The radio frequency signal is
received by the Radio-Frequency receiver and passed to the keyless vehicle module which checks and approves the
code as valid.
The KVM then drives the fast latch directly to allow the door to be opened. The keyless vehicle module also transmits
an unlock request to the CJB. The CJB then passes an unlock request to the door modules.
Door-handle antenna operating area

Locking of the vehicle is performed by pressing one of the buttons located on each exterior door handle, with the
Smart Key within a one meter range of the vehicle. When the door handle button is pressed, the KVM transmits a
low-frequency signal via the handle antenna to the Smart Key. The Smart Key transmits a radio frequency signal
which is verified by the KVM and allows the doors to be locked or double locked and the alarm system to be armed.
To double lock the vehicle, the button on the exterior door handle must be pressed twice within three seconds, with
the Smart Key within one meter range of the vehicle. If a door, hood or the tailgate door is ajar when an attempt to
lock the vehicle is made, an error tone is emitted and no locking action will occur.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
When unlocking the vehicle using passive entry with single stage unlocking selected and a valid Smart key present,
grasping the door handle will centrally unlock the vehicle. When the vehicle is configured for two stage unlocking and
the drivers door handle is grasped with a valid Smart Key present only the drivers door will unlock, however if a
passenger door handle is grasped with a valid Smart Key present the vehicle will centrally unlock.
NOTES:
Placing the key in a metallic container, a metal briefcase for example, may hinder its operation.
Passive locking will only activate if the key is outside the vehicle. If no key is present, two audible error
warnings will sound.
To globally close the vehicle pressing and holding the button on the door handle locks the vehicle, arms the alarm
and closes all open windows, not the sunroof. The windows will stop closing when the button is released.
Capacitive Door Handle
The new exterior door operates using the following principle. A capacitive plate is molded internally within the handle,
the vehicle exterior body acts as a second capacitive plate; air between the two acts as an insulator. The control
electronics within the door handle evaluate the capacitance of the circuit, when a hand interrupts the space between
the electrical field is altered and thus the capacitance of the capacitor. This signal is used to trigger the KVM to
initiate the unlock process. This signal is calibrated so as not to detect false activations, for example, rain water or
soiling.
NOTE: Extreme water levels can trigger an unlock signal, for example, when washing a locked vehicle with a
hose or high powered jet nozzle, providing the key is in the detection zone.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; F = RF transmission; N = Medium Speed CAN; W = LF transmission; AH = Serial

Communication Link
1 - Battery
3 - CJB
4 - Tailgate release switch
5 - Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna – right-hand-front
6 - Door latch and fast latch - right-hand-front
7 - Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna – left-hand-front
8 - Door latch and fast latch - left-hand-front
9 - Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna – right-hand-rear
10 - Door latch and fast latch - right-hand-rear
11 - Door handle, lock/unlock switch and antenna – left-hand-rear
12 - Door latch and fast latch - left-hand-rear
14 - Smart Key
15 - Antenna
16 - Antenna
17 - Antenna
18 - Antenna
19 - Antenna
20 - Antenna
21 - Antenna
Passive Entry - Locking/Unlocking Process
The vehicle unlocking procedure is carried out in the following way.
With the key within one meter of the approached door and the handle grasped a signal is sent to the KVM which
responds with the following simultaneous actions:
The KVM energizes the low frequency antenna in the door handle which transmits a 125 KHz signal to the key.
On receipt of the low frequency signal the Smart Key transmits a radio frequency signal ‘433.92 MHz Europe’
‘315 MHz NAS / ROW’ containing its authorization code to the RF (radio frequency) receiver.
The RF receiver relays the code, via a serial communication line, to the KVM which checks and approves the
code as valid.
- The KVM will only respond if the radio frequency signal produced is from a valid key for the vehicle.
The KVM transmits the unlock request to the CJB via the medium-speed CAN (controller area network) bus.
The CJB confirms and sends the request, via the medium speed CAN bus, to the front door modules.
The front door modules respond with the following simultaneous actions:
- Drive the motors to unlock the front doors.
- Transmit the door unlock request via a LIN (local interconnect network) data signal to the rear door
modules.
The rear door modules drive the motors to unlock the rear doors.
When the door handle reaches 80 percent of its travel the handle clutch switch is closed and grounded sending
a hardwired switched signal to the KVM.
The KVM drives the fast latch release motors in the door latch assemblies releasing the door latches as the
approached door handle is pulled through its full travel, the door can be opened.
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems
For a detailed description of the locks, latches and entry systems and operation, refer to the relevant Description
and Operation section of the workshop manual REFER to: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Description and Operation).
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
1. Verify the customer concern, to be sure the correct issue is investigated
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage

Visual Inspection
Incorrectly aligned door(s), hood or tailgate Fuses
Fuel filler door lock actuator Wiring harness
Hood release handle Wiring connector(s)
Hood release cables Door lock actuator(s)
Hood latch(es) Remote transmitter (key-fob or smart key)
Exterior door handle(s) Central locking switches
Interior door handle(s) Controller Area Network (CAN) circuits
Cable(s) Radio frequency (RF) receiver
Tailgate release switch Central junction box (CJB)
Rear window release switch Loose or corroded connections
Symptom Chart
NOTE: Complete the diagnostic steps below to confirm any concern prior to replacing any
component

The message center indicates that Incorrect striker Check/adjust the strikers as
the hood, the tailgate is open when alignment/adjustment necessary
it appears to be closed Ajar switch circuit short Check for DTCs indicating an ajar
Vehicle indicates a miss-lock when circuit to ground switch fault. Refer to the DTC index
the hood, tailgate appear to be Ajar switch failure
closed
Fuel flap does not lock/unlock Fuel flap cable detached Check the condition and installation
from body of the fuel flap cable
Fuel flap actuator Check the security of the fuel flap
detached from mounting actuator and bracket
bracket Check the security of the actuator
Fuel flap actuator electrical connector
disconnected Check for DTCs indicating a fuel flap
Fuel flap actuator failure actuator fault. Refer to the DTC
index
Door(s) will not unlatch/open when Exterior door handle Check the exterior door handle
using outside door handle condition/installation condition and installation
Exterior release cable Check the condition and security of
disconnected from the exterior release cable
exterior door handle or Single door will not open from
door latch the outside (but opens from the
inside) GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Door(s) will not unlatch/open when Child lock(s) engaged Check that the child locks are
using inside door handle Interior door handle disengaged
condition/installation Check the interior door handle
Interior release cable condition and installation
disconnected from Check the condition and security of
interior door handle or the interior release cable
door latch Single Door Will Not Open From
The Inside (but opens from the
outside) GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Door(s) will not lock/unlock from Wiring Check for relevant stored DTCs
key fob, key or internal lock switch harness/connectors Once any DTC related faults have
Central junction box been rectified continue with the
(CJB) diagnostic steps below
Door lock switch No lock / unlock function from
Cable fault key-fob GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Door ajar or miss lock signal at Wiring harness Latch Mounted Door Ajar Switch
message centre when door(s) are Instrument cluster Test GO to Pinpoint Test D.
closed or alarm triggering Incorrect striker
alignment/adjustment
Ajar switch circuit short
circuit to ground
Ajar switch failure
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB) (100-00 General Information,
Description and Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM) (100-00 General
Pinpoint Test
PINPOINT TEST A : SINGLE DOOR WILL NOT OPEN FROM THE OUTSIDE (BUT OPENS FROM
THE INSIDE)
A1: CHECK THE EXTERIOR DOOR RELEASE CABLE TO EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE IS INSTALLED
CORRECTLY
1 Remove the door trim panel as necessary
REFER to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior
Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation) /
Rear Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
2
Confirm the exterior door release cable is correctly
installed to the exterior door handle
Is the cable correctly installed?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Connect the door release cable correctly. If the
cable is damaged, install a new door release
cable. Test the system for normal operation
A2: CHECK THE EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE RELEASE CONNECTION TO THE DOOR LATCH
1 Confirm the exterior door handle release
connection to the door latch is installed correctly
Is the exterior door handle release cable installed
correctly?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test C.
No
PINPOINT TEST B : SINGLE DOOR WILL NOT OPEN FROM THE INSIDE (BUT OPENS FROM THE
OUTSIDE)
B1: CHECK THE INTERIOR DOOR RELEASE CABLE TO INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE IS INSTALLED
CORRECTLY
NOTE: Figure A - Child lock off position shown
1 Make sure the child lock is disengaged (rear door

only)

Installation) /
3
Confirm the interior door release cable is correctly
installed to the interior door handle
Is the cable correctly installed?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
B2: CHECK THE INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE RELEASE CONNECTION TO THE DOOR LATCH
1 Confirm the interior door handle release connection
to the door latch is installed correctly
Is the interior door handle release cable installed

correctly?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DOOR LATCHING AND LOCKING FUNCTION TEST

C1: HARNESS CONNECTION
NOTE: Test as a single component to ensure that the door latch is not replaced unnecessarily, when
another component may be at fault
Installation) /
2 Disconnect harness from latch, check for corrosion
or damage to both connectors at socket points
and pins. Re-connect harness ensuring robust
assembly when all parts confirmed to be in good
order. If harness or latch connectors are
damaged, install new harness/latch as necessary.
Test the system for normal operation
Check for normal operation, does latch function

correctly?
Yes
Re-assemble door trim and test for normal
operation
No
GO to C2.
C2: LOCK COMMAND SIGNAL FROM VEHICLE HARNESS
1 Close all vehicle doors apart from door being
investigated, please note which door, left side or
right side is under investigation
2
Disconnect harness from latch to enable access to
socket points to carry-out conductivity testing as
detailed
3 Monitor the circuit for momentary power when
locking the vehicle via the key-fob or smart key
between terminals 1 and 10 left side or 8 and
10 right side
Is there momentary power (for approx 8 seconds)
between terminals 1 and 10 left side or 8 and 10
right side when locking the vehicle via the key-fob or
smart key
Yes
The vehicle electrical system is locking correctly,
providing the signal to the latch GO to C3.
No
investigate why vehicle electrical system is not
providing signals to the latch. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
for logged DTCs to localize the fault
C3: UNLOCK COMMAND SIGNAL FROM VEHICLE HARNESS
1 Monitor the circuit for momentary power when
unlocking the vehicle via the key-fob or smart key
between terminals 1 and 9 left side or 8 and 9
right side
Is there momentary power (for approx 8 seconds)
between terminals 1 and 9 left side and 8 and 9
right side when unlocking the vehicle via the key-fob
or smart key?
Yes
The vehicle electrical system is unlocking correctly,
providing the signal to the latch GO to C4.
No
investigate why vehicle electrical system is not
providing signals to the latch. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
for logged DTCs to localize the fault
C4: PHYSICAL TEST 1
1 Remove latch module from door
REFER to: Front Door Latch (501-14 Handles,
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and
Installation) /
Rear Door Latch (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches
and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
2 Inspect latch module for any visual damage
3 With the latch in hand, connect the electrical
connector(s) to connect door latch to door harness
NOTE: THE LATCH IS NOW READY TO TEST
4 Close all vehicle doors except the door being

investigated
NOTES:
Figure 1 - Unlatched position shown
Figure 2 - First safety latched position shown
Figure 3 - Fully latched position shown
Test will not work if latch is only in first safety

latch position
5 Rotate latch claw (using a small screw driver or

similar), to the fully latched position (figure 3)
NOTE: Unlocked position shown
6 Confirm that the latch interior release lever is in

the unlocked position as shown
NOTE: Locked position shown
7 Press the lock button on the key-fob or smart key
Does the latch interior release lever move from the

unlocked position to the locked position?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
If this is a repeat test and the vehicle electrical
test section has been completed and confirmed
that vehicle is working correctly, then replace the
door latch. If replacing latch as part of a warranty
claim, please quote reference code LKINOP in the
technician comments section of the warranty claim
C5: PHYSICAL TEST 2
1 With the latch in the locked state (i.e. the latch

interior release lever is in the locked position),
press the key-fob or smart key unlock button
Does the latch interior release lever move from the
locked position to the unlocked position?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
If this is a repeat test and the vehicle electrical
test section has been completed and confirmed
that vehicle is working correctly, then replace the
door latch. If replacing latch as part of a warranty
claim, please quote reference code LKINOP in the
technician comments section of the warranty claim
C6: PHYSICAL TEST 3
NOTE: Fully latched position shown
1 With the latch in its unlocked state, push the latch

exterior release lever against its return spring,
whilst simultaneously applying a light pressure to
release the latch claw using a small screw driver
or similar
Does the latch claw release?

Yes
GO to C7.
No
Repeat tests C5 and C6 to confirm the fault GO to
C5. If the repeat test has confirmed that the
exterior release lever will not release the claw on
an unlocked latch replace the door latch. If
replacing latch as part of a warranty claim, please
quote reference code EXTINOP in the technician
comments section of the warranty claim
C7: PHYSICAL TEST 4
NOTE: Fully latched position shown
1 Using a small screw driver or similar, rotate latch

claw to the second fully latched position
NOTE: Figure A - Child lock off position shown
2 If testing a rear door latch, ensure that the child

lock is turned to the off position
3 Confirm that the latch interior release lever is in

the unlocked position as shown
4 Whilst the latch is still in its unlocked state, push

the latch interior release lever against its return
spring, whilst simultaneously applying a light
pressure to release the latch claw using a small
screw driver or similar
Does the latch claw release?
Yes
Latch has passed all tests to confirm its correct
function. DO NOT REPLACE LATCH as part of
any attempts to resolve any locking functionality
issues
No
Repeat test GO to C7. If repeat test has confirmed
that the interior release lever will not release the
claw when the latch is in the unlocked state, then
replace the latch. If replacing latch as part of a
warranty claim, please quote reference code
INTINOP in the technician comments section of
the warranty claim
PINPOINT TEST D : LATCH MOUNTED DOOR AJAR SWITCH TEST

D1: TEST 4 DOOR LATCH
NOTES:
If a customer is complaining of issues relating to a door ajar signal e.g. door latch won’t lock, or alarm
system triggering (indicated via DTC’s), there may be several components that generate the fault, including
Body wiring harness / connectors

Door wiring harness / connectors
Alarm control module
Central junction box (CJB)
Door Latch ajar switch
To investigate the functioning of the door ajar switch contained within the door latch, to prove or eliminate
the door latch mounted door ajar switch as the root cause, follow the process below. This will prevent the
unnecessary replacement of a correctly functioning door latch
1 Remove door trim from door
Installation) /
2 Disconnect door harness from latch for access to
connector pins for latch electrical testing
3 Inspect latch module for any visual damage
NOTES:
Figure 1 - Unlatched position shown
Figure 2 - First safety latched position shown
Figure 3 - Fully latched position shown

Test will not work if latch is only in first
safety latch position
4 Using a small screw driver or similar, rotate latch

claw to the second fully latched position (figure 3)
5 Carry out continuity test between terminals 1 and

4 (left side) or 8 and 4 (right side) with claw
closed
Does the continuity test pass?

Yes
The latch ajar switch is working correctly. Do not
replace latch. Investigate for fault elsewhere in
vehicle system
No
Release latch claw and repeat test from step 4 to
confirm result. If this is a repeat test and you are
sure that the ajar switch does not provide
continuity when fully latched. Replace the latch. If
replacing latch as part of a warranty claim, please
quote reference code AJARINOP in the technician
comments section of the warranty claim
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Tailgate Striker
Adjustment
General Procedures
1. Check for an equal gap and alignment to the

adjacent panels. If incorrect, follow the adjust
procedure below.
2. Remove the tailgate striker trim panel.
3. Loosen the 2 tailgate striker bolts.
4. Close the tailgate and check for an equal gap and alignment
to the adjacent panels.
5. Open the tailgate and tighten the tailgate striker bolts to 25

Nm (18 lb.ft).
6. Install the tailgate striker trim panel.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Liftgate Striker
Adjustment
General Procedures
1. Check for an equal gap and alignment to the

adjacent panels. If incorrect, follow the adjust
procedure below.
2. Remove the liftgate striker trim panel.
3. Loosen the 2 liftgate striker bolts.
4. Close the liftgate and check for an equal gap and alignment
to the adjacent panels.
5. Open the liftgate and tighten the liftgate striker bolts to 25

Nm (18 lb.ft).
6. Install the liftgate striker trim panel.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal
NOTE: This procedure is for removal and installation of the ignition lock cylinder. The ignition lock and door
lock cylinders are replaced in sets.


lever.
4. Remove the passive coil.

5. Remove the ignition lock cylinder.

Turn the ignition key to position 1.
Insert a pin, not exceeding 2 mm
diameter, through the access hole in the
ignition lock cylinder housing to depress
the plunger, and release the ignition
lock cylinder.
Installation
1. Install the ignition lock cylinder.
Turn the ignition key to position 1.
Locate into guides and depress the
plunger.
2. Install the passive coil.
Secure the clips.

Secure the clips.
Secure the adjustment lever.
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Hood Latch Release
Handle
Removal
Installation).
2. Disconnect the hood release cable from the

connecting box.
Open the connecting box cover.
3. Remove the hood release lever housing.

Remove the bolt.
Disconnect the hood release cable.
Installation
1. Install the hood release lever housing.
Connect the hood release cable.
Tighten the bolt to 5 Nm (3.7 lb.ft).
2. Attach the hood release cable to the connecting box.

Close the connecting box cover.

Installation).
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Front Door Latch
Removal
1. Remove the window motor and regulator assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Front Door Window
Regulator and Motor (501-11, Removal and Installation).
2. CAUTION: Release the exterior door handle and screw

cover clips from inside the door.
Remove the front door exterior handle.

For additional information, refer to: Exterior Front Door
Handle (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,
3. Release the remote control cable.

4. Release the door exterior handle mechanism.

Remove the adhesive tape from the access hole.
Remove the locking pin.
5. Remove the front door latch assembly.


Remove the door latch remote control cable.

Release the cable from the abutment
bracket.
Remove the cable from the lever.
7. Release the exterior door handle mechanism
cable from the door latch.
bracket.
8. LH side: Release the door lock cylinder cable

from the door latch.
bracket.
Installation
1. LH side: Connect the door lock cylinder cable to the door
latch.
Connect the cable to the lever.
Secure the cable to the abutment bracket.
2. Connect the door exterior handle mechanism cable to the

door latch.
3. Install the remote control cable to the door latch.

4. Set the exterior handle mechanism.

Rotate the lever.
Engage the retaining tang.
5. Install the front door latch assembly.
6. Install the door exterior handle mechanism.

Position the mechanism to the door.
Fit the locking pin.
Fit and tighten the Torx screw.
7. LH side: Position the control cables into the retainers.
8. Position the remote control cable to the door.

9. Install the front door exterior handle.

For additional information, refer to: Exterior Front Door
10. Install the window motor and regulator assembly.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Rear Door Latch
Removal
1. Remove the rear door window motor and regulator
assembly.
2. CAUTION: Release the exterior door handle and screw

cover clips from inside the door.
Remove the rear door exterior handle.

For additional information, refer to: Exterior Rear Door
3. Release the remote control cable.

4. Release the door exterior handle mechanism.

Remove the locking pin.
5. Remove the rear door latch assembly.


Remove the door latch remote control cable.

bracket.
7. Release the exterior door handle mechanism

cable from the door latch.
bracket.
Installation
1. Connect the door exterior handle mechanism cable to the
door latch.
2. Install the remote control cable to the door latch.

3. Set the exterior handle mechanism.

Rotate the lever.
Engage the retaining tang.
4. Install the rear door latch assembly.

5. Install the door exterior handle mechanism.

Position the mechanism to the door.
Fit the locking pin.
Install and tighten the Torx screws.
6. Position the remote control cable to the door.

7. Install the rear door exterior handle.

For additional information, refer to: Exterior Rear Door
8. Install the rear door window motor and regulator assembly.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Liftgate Latch
Removal
Installation).
2. Remove the tailgate water shedder.
3. Release the liftgate latch.

4. Remove the liftgate latch.

Release the liftgate latch to actuator
cable.
Installation
1. Install the liftgate latch.
Attach the liftgate latch to actuator cable.
2. Install the tailgate water shedder.

Installation).
4. Adjust the liftgate striker.

For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Striker
Adjustment (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems, General Procedures).
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Door Lock Cylinder
Removal
1. Remove the front door lock cylinder cover.
Use the ignition key.
2. NOTE: The Torx screw remains in the

door lock housing.
Remove the front door lock cylinder.

Open the door.
Remove the access plug.
Loosen the Torx screw to release the
lock.
Installation
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Tailgate Latch
Removal
1. Remove the tailgate speaker assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Tailgate Speaker (415-
03 Speakers, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the tailgate latch assembly.

Remove the latch.
Remove the latch plate.
Remove the latch actuator assembly.

Remove the latch actuator.

Installation
1. Install the latch actuator.
Tighten the screws.
2. Install the tailgate latch assembly.

Install the latch actuator assembly.
Install the latch plate.
Install the latch.
3. Install the tailgate speaker assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Tailgate Speaker (415-
03 Speakers, Removal and Installation).
4. Adjust both the tailgate strikers.

For additional information, refer to: Tailgate Striker
Adjustment (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems, General Procedures).
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Exterior Front Door
Handle
Removal
NOTES:
This procedure details removal and installation of both the LH and RH exterior front door handles.
If the exterior handle is to be removed in conjunction with additional door internal items, then it is
recommended that the exterior handle and screw cover be released from the inside of the door, after removal of
the door trim pad, regulator and motor.
1. NOTE: Vehicles with passive entry system.
Remove the window regulator assembly.

3. NOTE: All vehicles.
LH side: Remove the private lock.

For additional information, refer to: Door Lock Cylinder
(501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,
4. NOTES:
Removal of the screw cover may break

the retaining clips.
If the screw cover is to be removed in

conjunction with additional door internal items,
then it is recommended that the screw cover
be released from the inside of the door, after
removal of the door trim pad, regulator and
motor.
RH side: Remove the screw cover.

5. To remove the exterior front door handle, after
removal of the door trim pad and regulator.
Using a nylon mallet, carefully release
the clip.
Remove the 2 gaskets.
6. NOTE: Vehicles without passive entry

system.
To remove the exterior front door handle,

without removal of the door trim pad.
Slide the handle firmly rearward, then
pivot the handle away from the door to
remove it.
Installation
1. NOTE: Use a length of cord to hold the

lock lever against spring pressure while
engaging the outside handle.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Exterior Rear Door
Handle
Removal
NOTE: If the exterior handle is to be removed in conjunction with additional door internal items, then it is
recommended that the exterior handle and screw cover be released from the inside of the door, after removal of
the door trim pad, regulator and motor.
1. NOTE: Vehicles with passive entry system.

3. NOTES:
All vehicles.
Removal of the screw cover may break

the retaining clips.
If the screw cover is to be removed in

conjunction with additional door internal items,
then it is recommended that the screw cover
be released from the inside of the door, after
removal of the door trim pad, regulator and
motor.
Remove the screw cover.

4. NOTE: Vehicles without passive entry

system.
To remove the exterior rear door handle,

without removal of the door trim pad.
Slide the handle firmly rearward, then
pivot the handle away from the door to
remove it.
5. To remove the exterior rear door handle, after

removal of the door trim pad and regulator.
Using a nylon mallet, carefully release
the clip.
Installation
1. NOTE: Use a length of cord to hold the

lock lever against spring pressure while
engaging the outside handle.

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Liftgate Latch Actuator
Removal
Installation).
2. Release the liftgate actuator.

Loosen the 2 bolts.
3. Remove the actuator cover.

4. Remove the liftgate actuator.

Release the liftgate latch to actuator
cable.
Installation
1. CAUTION: It is possible to incorrectly

install the cable, ensure the ferrule and clip are
fully engaged.
Attach the actuator to the liftgate latch cable.

2. Install the cover.
3. Install the liftgate actuator.


Installation).
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Module
Removal
1. NOTE: RH side only.
Refer to: Rear Quarter Trim Panel (501-05, Removal and

Installation).
2. Torque: 9 Nm
Installation
1. To install reverse the removal procedure.
2. Using the diagnostic tool, calibrate the component.

Wipers and Washers -
Capacities
Item Description
Windscreen washer reservoir 6.3 litres (11.0 pints) (6.6 US quarts)
General Specifications
Item Description
Front wiper motor make Trico
Rear wiper motor make Mitsuba
Windscreen washer pump make MES
Power washer pump make Textron
Front wiper arms to linkage nut 18 13
Rear window wiper motor nuts 10 7
Rear wiper arm to motor nut 18 13
Wiper linkage to front wiper motor:
Nut 25 18
Bolts 10 7
Wiper linkage to body bolts 6 4
Washer reservoir and pump assembly to body bolts 6 4
Washer reservoir and pump assembly to bumper armature bolts 22 16
Wipers and Washers - Wipers and Washers
Wiper and Washer System Component Location

1 - Front washer jets
2 - Wiper control switch
3 - Rain/Light sensor
4 - Rear wiper linkage and motor assembly
5 - Rear wiper relay (located in the Central Junction Box (CJB))
6 - Wiper relay 1 (located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB))
7 - Wiper relay 2 (located in the BJB)
8 - Front wiper linkage and motor assembly, including wiper arms and blades
9 - Washer reservoir and pumps
10 - Headlamp washer jets
GENERAL
The wiper and washer system is controlled by the Central Junction Box (CJB) on receipt of requests made by the
driver or the rain/light sensor unit (if fitted). All wiper functions for the front and rear wipers are controlled from a
multi-function wash/wipe switch assembly located on the right hand side of the steering column.
The wiper and washer system comprises:
Front and rear wiper motors

A front wiper linkage
Two front and one rear wiper arms and blades
Two front washer jets and one rear washer jet
A washer reservoir and pump
A wash/wipe control column switch.
The following optional items can be added to enhance the wiper system:
A rain/light sensor for automatic wiper control

Heated front washer jets
Headlamp washers
Low fluid level sensor (fitted to vehicles with headlamp washers).
The wiper system can be optionally equipped with a rain/light sensor. The sensor, located below the interior rear
view mirror, detects rain drops on the windscreen and automatically operates the wipers in the intermittent mode.
The column stalk switch must be in the intermittent position for rain/light sensor controlled wiper operation.
The front wiper system has five stages of operation and six intermittent delay periods.
The five wiper stages are as follows:
1. Flick wipe
2. Off
3. Intermittent
4. Normal (slow) speed continuous
5. Fast speed continuous
Speed Control Intermittent Mode
The intermittent, slow and fast speeds are affected by road speed, providing the speed control intermittent wipe
mode has been configured. The intermittent wiper delay periods change with the road speed, with the delay
decreasing as the road speed increases.
Speed Dependant Wipe Mode
When the speed dependant wipe mode has been configured, the normal continuous operation changes to intermittent
operation when the vehicle is stationary. The fast speed operation changes to normal operation when the vehicle is
stationary.
The wiper and washers operate with the ignition switch in positions I or II. Wiper functions are suspended during
engine cranking to reduce battery power consumption under high load conditions.
Diagnostic information for the wiper system is available and can be retrieved using T4.
The CJB is an integrated unit located behind the fascia on the passenger side of the bulkhead. The CJB contains
fuses, relays and a number of microprocessors, which control the power supply and functionality of the wash/wipe
system and other vehicle systems.
Inputs and Outputs
The CJB receives and sends the following wiper and washer system inputs and outputs:
Inputs Outputs
Intermittent front wipe switch Front wiper motor (normal)
Rear wipe park switch Front wiper motor (fast)
Rain/light sensor, if fitted Washer motors
Normal (slow) speed continuous switch Heated washer jets (if fitted)
Fast speed continuous switch Rear wiper motor relay
Flick wipe switch Headlamp power wash motor
Front screen wash switch -
Rear screen wash switch -
Ignition switch -
Lighting switch -
Low level reservoir status, via CAN -
Vehicle speed, via CAN -
Front wiper motor park switch -
Reverse switch, via CAN -
Tail gate open switch -
Ambient temperature, via CAN -
FRONT WIPER ASSEMBLY
The front wiper assembly comprises:
Wiper motor and linkage assembly

Wiper arms and blades
Washer reservoir and pumps.
Wiper Linkage

1 - RH pivot housing assembly
2 - Link rod
3 - Bracket
4 - Bush
5 - Motor assembly
6 - Bush
7 - Washer
8 - Bolt
9 - Link rod
The wiper linkage and motor assembly are available as separate components. The wiper linkage and motor differs
between LH and RH drive models.
The assembly is located below the plenum grill in the engine compartment and is secured with bushes, sleeves and
bolts. The rubber bushes isolate the assembly from the body mountings.
The linkage assembly comprises a main tube, with a pivot housing at each end and the motor is attached directly to
the tube. A motor crank is positively attached to the motor output shaft. Two link rods then attach to the motor
crank which transfers power directly to each pivot crank.
The motor crank converts rotary motion from the motor output shaft into linear movement of the link rods. The
cranks, connected between the each link rod and pivot housing, convert the linear motion to reciprocating motion at
the pivot housing. This reciprocating motion is passed to the wiper arms and blades causing the blades to wipe an
arc across the windscreen.
Wiper Motor
The motor assembly comprises a dc motor, which drives a gear wheel via a worm drive attached to the motor
spindle. The gear wheel has a central spigot, which provides the attachment point for the motor crank.
The motor is connected electrically by a five-pin connector. The connector supplies two battery voltage feeds to the
motor (when switched). The motor has three sets of brushes with one brush connected to ground. One feed is direct
to the motor brush opposite the ground brush and operates the motor at normal (slow) speed. The second feed is
connected to a motor brush, which is offset from the ground brush and operates the motor at fast speed. With the
power supplied through this brush, the current flows through fewer coil windings. This results in a lower resistance to
the current flow to the ground brush and gives a higher motor rotational speed.
Output control of the wiper motor is through a double contact relay. The relay is located in the Battery Junction Box
(BJB).
The motor has an internal track switch, which signals the CJB when the wipers have reached the park position. The
park signal is closed circuit when the wipers are in the park position. When the wipers are switched off and the CJB
receives the park position signal from the motor, the CJB shorts the motor via a relay bridge circuit. This short circuit
has the effect of applying a brake to the motor, giving precise positioning of the wiper blades in the park position.
Wiper Arms

1 - Spindle caps
2 - RH Wiper arm
3 - Wiper blades
4 - LH wiper arm
5 - Self locking nuts
The wiper arms are positively located on tapered splines on the wiper linkage spindles.
The wiper arm has a pivot point, midway between the spindle attachment and the blade. A tension spring is
connected to the wiper arm on each side of the pivot point and applies pressure to maintain the wiper blade in
contact with the windscreen.
The wiper blades are attached to the wiper arms with clips that allow the blade to pivot. The wiper blades comprise
of a sprung steel curved backbone which applies the pressure evenly to the windscreen, to which is applied the
wiping lip to the bottom surface and an aerofoil section to the top which presses the blades onto the windscreen at
high vehicle speeds.
REAR WIPER ASSEMBLY
The rear wiper assembly comprises:
Wiper motor
Rear washer pump
Rear washer jet
Wiper arm and blade.
Wiper Motor
1 - Motor assembly
2 - Harness connector
3 - Washers
4 - Pivot housing connection
5 - Wiper arm
6 - Spindle cap
7 - Self locking nut
The rear wiper and washers operation is controlled by the CJB, via the rear wiper relay, which is located in the LH
rear 'D' post.
The rear wiper motor is located in the upper tail gate, behind a trim panel. The assembly is secured to the body of
the upper tail gate with three M6 nuts. Bushes isolate the motor assembly from the body, which help reduce the
transmission of motor operating noise to the tail gate.
The motor is located on a worm drive gearbox mechanism, which converts the rotary motion of the motor output
spindle into the required arc for the rear wiper blade.
The feed hose, for the separate rear washer jet, is located at the rear of the motor spindle. The hose is connected to
a 90 degrees connector allowing the washer fluid to flow through the centre of the motor spindle. A Non-Return Valve
(NRV) is located in the hose, near the motor, and prevents fluid returning to the reservoir.
The motor spindle is a conventional design with a taper spline location for the wiper arm and a threaded shank to
secure the arm to the spindle.
Wiper Arm
The wiper arm is similar in design to the front wiper arms. The arm attachment hole has tapered splines, which mate
with the splines on the wiper spindle. The arm is secured to the wiper motor spindle with a nut. The wiper arm has a
pivot point, close to the spindle attachment. A tension spring is connected to the wiper arm on each side of the pivot
point and applies pressure to maintain the wiper blade in contact with the windscreen.
The wiper blade is attached to the wiper arm with a clip that allows the blade to pivot. The blade comprises a
number of levers and yokes to, which the rubber wiper blade is attached. The levers and yokes ensure that the
pressure applied by the arm tension spring is distributed evenly along the full length of the blade and also allow the
blade to adjust to the curvature and contour of the windscreen.
A plastic cap located on the arm pivot point, covers the spindle attachment nut.
WASHER RESERVOIR AND PUMPS

1 - Filler tube and cap
2 - Front and rear washer pump
3 - Headlamp washer pump (if fitted)
4 - Fluid level sensor
5 - Reservoir
The windscreen washer system comprises:
Vehicles without headlamp washers:
A reservoir
A washer pump
Two washer jets
Hoses
Vehicles with headlamp washers:
A reservoir
Two washer pumps
A level sensor
Four washer jets - two windshield and two headlamp washers
Hoses
The plastic, moulded reservoir is located in the LH wheel arch, behind the liner and has a capacity of 11.08 pints (6.3
litres). It is secured to the body and front panel with bolts. A boss on the reservoir locates in a slot in the front panel
and provides additional support.
The reservoir has two recessed holes on its rear face, which provide location for the combined front pump, rear
pump and headlamp washer pumps. The pumps are push fitted into grommets, which seal the pumps in their
locations. A hole in the top of the reservoir allows for the fitment of a flexible filler tube. The front and rear wash
hoses are integrated into the harness and so follow it's routing. The headlamp washer hose comes front the bumper
around the bottle to attach to the headlamp washer pump.
A hole with a grommet in the side of the reservoir provides the location for the fluid level sensor.
The low level sensor has a float, with integral magnet. The sensor has a contact, which is normally closed when the
reservoir is full. When the fluid level reduces to approximately 1 litre, the magnetic float pivots down, which causes
the switch contact to open. This open circuit is sensed by the instrument cluster, which displays the low fluid level
message and transmits the switch status on the CAN bus.
The sensor cannot determine the precise amount of fluid in the reservoir, but can detect when the fluid level has
fallen below a certain point. When the fluid level is low, the magnetic float closes the sensor contacts, completing a
circuit through the sensor. This completed circuit is sensed by the instrument cluster, to which the sensor is directly
connected.
The fluid level sensor is monitored continuously by the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster checks the fluid
level sensor when the ignition is switched on to give the driver an early warning of the low fluid level. The instrument
cluster then monitors the sensor value over a 25 second period when the ignition is on to prevent invalid messages
due to fluid 'sloshing' in the reservoir.
When a low fluid level signal is transmitted to the high line instrument cluster, a 'WASHER FLUID LOW' message is
displayed in the instrument cluster's message centre. On the low line instrument cluster a low fluid level indicator is
illuminated. The first display of this message, or illumination of the indicator, is accompanied by a 'chime' sound to
alert the driver to the low fluid level.
HEADLAMP WASHERS

1 - Headlamp washer jets
2 - Reservoir
3 - Washer fluid tube
The headlamp washer assembly is located below each headlamp.
The headlamp washer operation is controlled by the CJB via a headlamp washer relay. The relay is located in the
Battery Junction Box (BJB).
Head Lamp Wash Only (No Wipe Function)
The headlamp washers are only active when the headlamps and ignition are switched on. If the washer reservoir fluid
level becomes low, the instrument cluster sends a message, via the CAN bus, to the CJB, which suspends headlamp
wash operation to preserve washer fluid in the reservoir.
With the ignition and lights on, headlamp wash is activated on the first operation of the wiper column control switch
in the wash/wipe position. The CJB then suspends headlamp wash activation for the next 10 minutes and four
operations of the wash/wipe switch.
The CJB monitors the operation of the wash/wipe switch and maintains a counter to restrict headlamp washer
operation to every fourth operation of the wash/wipe switch in conjunction with a 10 minute timer. The timer
prevents a second operation of the headlamp washers within a 10 minute period. Should the washer switch be
activated for more than four programmed wipe requests during the 10 minute period, the headlamp washer will
remain disabled. Only the next consecutive programmed wipe request, after the 10 timer has expired, will the
headlamp washers be enabled. The counter and timer are reset when the ignition is switched off.
When headlamp wash is active, the CJB energises the washer pump twice per cycle. The headlamp washer pump is
powered for a 0.5 second period.
RAIN/LIGHT SENSOR
1 - Adhesive pad
2 - Optical element
3 - Sub-assembly light guide
4 - Heater
5 - Housing
6 - Locking device
7 - Printed Circuit Board (PCB)
8 - Screws
9 - Cover
10 - Contact pins
The rain/light sensor is located at the upper edge of the windscreen, behind the interior rear view mirror. The sensor
is mounted on an optical unit, which is heat bonded to the inner surface of the windscreen during manufacture. If
damage occurs to the optical unit or the windscreen, then a new windscreen will be required and installation can
only be performed by an authorised Land Rover dealer.
The rain sensor must be re-initialised to a new windscreen, if fitted, or if transferred to another vehicle, the new rain
sensor assembly will automatically re-initialise when powered-up for the first time. In order for this to occur
successfully it must be fitted and connected to the optical filaments (bonded to the screen assembly).
The rain/light sensor unit attaches to the optical unit via two clips, which latch onto formed tags on the optical unit.
Positive retention is achieved by two retaining clips, which force the clips onto the tags. The retaining clips must be
withdrawn to facilitate sensor removal.
The sensor provides information to the CJB for the optimum wiper operation for the prevailing conditions to maintain
the screen in a clear condition at all times. The rain/light sensor is an optical unit, which operates on an infrared
waveband. The sensor uses the principle of the laws of reflection on interfacing surfaces between materials with
differing refraction properties.
Rain Sensor Functionality

A - Clean and dry windscreen
B - Wet and dirty windscreen
1 - Windscreen - Outside surface
2 - Optical unit
3 - Transmitter diodes (100% light transmitted)
4 - Rain/Light sensor unit
5 - Receiver diodes (100% received)
6 - Water droplets/film
7 - Receiver diodes (less than 100% light received)
8 - Lost light
The rain/light sensor contains transmitter and receiver diodes, which transmit and receive infrared light, which is
directed onto the windscreen via an optical unit. The light is directed at an angle so that the light is reflected 100%
on the outside surface of the screen and is transmitted back into the optical unit. To receive a 100% reflection, the
outer screen surface must be clean and dry.
The rain/light sensor is active when the wiper column control switch is in the intermittent position. The rain/light
sensor suspends wiper operation when the area of the windscreen for the rain/light sensor is dry and operates the
wipers continuously when the windscreen is subject to heavy rainfall.
The sensitivity of the rain/light sensor can be adjusted by the driver using the intermittent rotary switch on the wiper
stalk. Six sensitivity levels of the sensor can be selected, which has the effect of increasing or decreasing the wiper
delay period, allow driver adjustment for the prevailing conditions. When several continuous wipe cycles have taken
place, the sensor will maintain the continuous operation to avoid switching back to intermittent from a continuous
wipe and back again.
The rain/light sensor receives vehicle speed information from the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) module on the
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus via the CJB. The sensor increases the sensitivity as the speed increases to
optimise wiper operation. When the vehicle speed is reduced to less than 5 mph (8 km/h), the sensitivity is
automatically reduced. Below this speed the wipers will only operate continuously in very heavy rain.
Automatic Headlamp Operation
A light sensor is incorporated in the housing of the rain/light sensor to control the operation of the automatic
headlamps.
The automatic headlamps will function when the lighting control switch is in the 'AUTO' position and the CJB receives
a lights on signal from the rain/light sensor.
For additional information, refer to: Exterior Lighting (417-01, Description and Operation).
WIPER CONTROL COLUMN SWITCH

1 - Wash/wipe control column switch
2 - Intermittent variable delay rotary control
3 - Intermittent/continuous rear wipe
4 - Rear wash position
5 - Fast speed wipe position
6 - Normal speed wipe position
7 - Intermittent/rain sensor wipe position
8 - Flick wipe position
9 - Front windscreen washer control
The wiper control column switch is located on the right hand side of the steering column and controls all front and
rear wiper functions.
The switch comprises 8 switch positions and the intermittent rotary control. The switch positions each complete a
combination of earth paths to connections on the CJB. The CJB interprets the selected combination of switches and
operates the respective function accordingly.
Flick Wipe
Moving the switch down selects the front wiper flick wipe function. The front wipers will operate at fast speed for as
long as the flick wipe switch position is operated. Once the switch is released the front wiper motor will revert to a
normal (slow) speed operation until a park position has been detected.
Intermittent
Moving the switch up one position from 'OFF', selects intermittent front wiper operation. The rotary potentiometer on
the stalk selects one of six delay periods. The delay period is also influenced by vehicle speed (should speed control
intermittent wipe mode be configured), using a signal value derived from the ABS control module. The selected delay
period decreases with an increase in road speed. When a rain/light sensor is incorporated into the system, the
intermittent position also initiates wiper operation controlled by the rain/light sensor. The sensitivity of the rain/light
sensor is also adjusted by rotating the rotary switch to one of the six positions.
The rotary switch selects differing output values for each position. The switch is wired to three data input terminals
of the CJB.
Rotary Switch Position Output Data 1 Output Data 2 Output Data 3

1 Yes - -
2 Yes Yes -
3 - Yes -
4 - Yes Yes
5 Yes Yes Yes
6 Yes - Yes
The time delay periods for the vehicle stationary and when moving at different speeds are shown in seconds (by
speed CLASS) in the following tables:
Class Speed Increase - MPH (KPH) Speed Decrease - MPH (KPH)

0 Vehicle speed <5 (8), remain in class 0 -
Vehicle speed >5 (8), increment to class 1 -
1 Vehicle speed >5 (8) and <20 (32), remain in class 1 Vehicle speed = 0, Revert to class 0
Vehicle speed >20 (32), increment to class 2 Vehicle speed > 0 and <20 (32), remain in class 1
2 Vehicle speed >20 (32) and <40 (64), remain in class Vehicle speed <10 (16), revert to class 1
2 Vehicle speed >10 (16) and <40 (64), remain in class
Vehicle speed >40 (64), increment to class 3 2
3 Vehicle speed >30 (48) and 60< (96), remain in class
4 Vehicle speed >50 (80) and <80 (128), remain in class
5 Vehicle speed >80 (128), remain in class 5 Vehicle speed <70 (112), revert to class 4
- -
Key:
< = Less than

> = Greater than.
Rear Wiper Speed Class Matrix
Speed Class
Rotary Position 0 1 2 3 4 5
Position 1 6 5 4 3 2 0
Position 2 10 8 6 4 2 1
Position 3 14 11 8 5 3 1
Position 4 18 15 11 8 5 2
Position 5 22 18 13 9 6 3
Position 6 26 21 16 11 7 4
Front Wiper Speed Class Matrix
Speed Class
Rotary Position 0 1 2 3 4 5
Position 1 3.5 3 2.5 2 1.5 1
Position 2 5 4 3.5 3 2.5 2
Position 3 7 6.5 6 5 4 3
Position 4 9 8 7 6 5 4
Position 5 11 9.5 8 7 6 5
Position 6 13 11 9 8 7 6
The rotary switch positions also influence the operation of the rain/light sensor (when fitted) by adjusting its
sensitivity. Refer to the Rain/Light Sensor section for details.
Normal (Slow) Speed
The normal (slow) speed continuous wiper operation is selected by moving the switch vertically to the second detente
position from 'OFF'. The wipers will operate continuously when the vehicle is moving. When the vehicle is stationary,
or less than 5 mph (8 km/h), the CJB operates the wipers in the intermittent mode (if speed dependant wipe mode is
configured), using a 3 second intermittent delay period.
Fast Speed
The fast speed continuous wiper operation is selected by moving the switch vertically to the third detente position.
The wipers will operate continuously at fast speed when the vehicle is moving. When the vehicle is stationary, or less
than 5 mph (8 km/h), the CJB operates the wipers in normal (slow) speed mode (if speed dependant wipe mode is
configured).
Wash/Wipe
When the non-latching wiper stalk button is pushed the front screen washer is operated. If the wipers are off and the
button is pressed for less than 0.5 seconds, only the washer will operate. If the button is pressed for more than 0.5
seconds, the wipers will come on and perform two wipes. When headlamp washers are fitted, the headlamp washers
will operate if the front windscreen washer is operated and the headlamps are on – refer to headlamp wash section
for detail of operation. The CJB monitors the wash/wipe switch operation and after the switch is released, if a
programmed wipe is enabled, the CJB allows two further wipe cycles to be completed.
Rear Wash/wipe
Moving the switch rearwards, towards the driver, selects the intermittent rear wash/wipe function. The intermittent
delay period will vary according to the sensitivity settings and vehicle speed.
When the switch is moved rearwards to the second position and held, the washer pump will operate. If the switch is
operated for more than 10 seconds, the pump will be disabled. When the switch is released, the rear wiper will
complete a further two full wipe cycles and then operate on an intermittent function until selected off.
HEATED WINDSCREEN WASHER JETS
Two windscreen washer jets are located in the rear trim panel on the bonnet outer surface. The washer fluid feed
hose from the front screen pump is connected to a 'Y' piece connector located between the two jets. Two short
lengths of hose connect the jets to the 'Y' piece. Each jet contains a NRV to prevent washer fluid draining back to the
reservoir and also to limit the amount of washer fluid, which can be forced by gravity from the jet during cornering.
Each washer jet has two ball nozzles, which can rotate in their housing's to obtain the optimum fluid application onto
the windscreen. Each washer jet contains a heater element, which prevents the fluid freezing in the nozzles in very
cold conditions and a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) sensor, which regulates the temperature. The jet heater
elements are controlled by the Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATCM) and a heated washer jet relay in the
BJB.
REVERSE GEAR INPUT
The intermittent delay period (below) depends on speed dependant wipe mode being enabled or disabled.
The rear wiper also operates if reverse gear is selected and the front wipers are on. If the front wipers are operating
continuously when reverse is selected, the rear wiper will also operate continuously as long as reverse gear is
engaged. If the front wipers are operating intermittently when reverse is engaged, the rear wiper will complete one
wipe cycle then wipe intermittently.
On vehicles fitted with rain/light sensor, when reverse gear is selected while the front wipers are in intermittent mode
but the rain/light sensor indicates that the front wipers are off, the rear wiper will not operate. If the rain/light sensor
subsequently calls for a single wipe, the rear wiper will operate a single wipe cycle. If the rain/light sensor calls for a
slow or fast wipe, the rear wiper will operate continuously.
The CJB will operate the rear wiper (providing the front wipers are on) upon receipt of a reverse gear signal from the
Electronic Automatic Transmission (EAT) module on the CAN bus, via the instrument cluster. On vehicles with manual
transmission, the gear position signal is transmitted directly from the transfer box control module and picked by the
CJB as an CAN bus message, via the instrument cluster.
'TAIL GATE OPEN' DISABLE
If the rear wiper is switched on or is already running and the tail gate is opened, the rear wiper should not start to
run, or should immediately become disabled during a wipe cycle. If the tail gate is subsequently closed, the wiper will
resume its normal operation after a delay of three seconds. Should the vehicle speed input be more than 4 mph
(6km/h), then the tail gate switch will be deemed as closed.
The CJB receives the 'tail gate open' signal directly from the upper tail gate central locking motor.
FRONT AND REAR WIPER MOTOR BLOCKING PROTECTION
The wiper park signal is also used by the CJB for blocking protection of the front wiper motor. This feature protects
the motor in the event of the wiper operation being obstructed.
If the CJB does not receive a wiper park signal status change for a period of 6 seconds, when the wiper motor is
active, the CJB removes the power supply to the motor. The motor will remain disabled until either an alternative
motor mode has been selected, or the ignition has been moved to position 0 and back to position I. Should a stall
condition be achieved 3 times during a single ignition position I status, then the wiper relay will remain disabled,
regardless of wiper switch positions, for 180 seconds. The CJB will not automatically switch the motor on, to prevent
the risk of injury. The wiper switch must be moved off and then on to reactivate the wiper motor. The blocking
protection is active in all wiper switch positions and can only be reset by turning the ignition off.
The rear wiper algorithm contains the same logic as mentioned above.
DIAGNOSTICS
The diagnostic socket allows the transfer of information between the CJB, the rain/light sensor and T4. The diagnostic
socket is located in the lower fascia closing panel, on the driver's side, below the steering column.
The rain/light sensor performs an internal self-test in the first 50ms from the ignition being switched to position I and
can store fault codes, which can be used to diagnose, faults or non-function of the rain/light sensor. The faults are
stored in a non-volatile memory which retains the logged fault codes even when the power supply is disconnected. If
a rain/light sensor fault prevents the sensor from operating, the CJB will control wiper operation as if a rain/light
sensor is not installed in the system.
The CJB monitors all inputs and outputs relative to the wiper system and other CJB controlled functions on the LIN
bus. If a fault is detected, a code applicable to that fault is stored in a fault log. Two fault logs are provided within
the CJB for internal and external faults.
CONTROL DIAGRAM
1 - Fusible link 11
2 - Fuse 29
3 - Wiper relay 1
4 - Wiper relay 2
5 - Front wiper motor
6 - ABS module
7 - Diagnostic socket
8 - Fusible link 18
9 - Fuse 48
10 - Wiper switch
11 - Rear wiper relay
12 - Rear wiper motor and park switch
13 - Light switch
15 - Fusible link 7
16 - Headlamp washer relay
18 - Headlamp washer pump
19 - ATCM
20 - Fuse 12
21 - RH heated washer jet
22 - Upper tailgate central locking motor
23 - LH heated washer jet
24 - Heated washer jet relay
25 - Fuse 28
27 - Fuse18
28 - Front and rear washer pump
29 - Washer pump relay
30 - CJB
31 - Fuse 11
32 - Ignition switch
Wipers and Washers - Wipers and Washers
For a detailed description of the wipers and washers systems and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers,

Visual Inspection
Windshield and rear window for damage or contamination e.g. road Battery condition and state of
film or general residue deposits charge
Wiper blades, arms and linkage for wear, security, damage and Fusible links
freedom of movement Fuses
Windshield / rear window / headlamp washer fluid level Relays
Washer hoses and jets for leaks, restrictions and damage Electrical connections
Front and rear wiper motors
Wiper switch
Washer pumps
Rain/light sensor
Heated front washer jets
Light switch
Ambient air temperature
sensor
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
control module
Automatic Temperature
Control Module (ATC)
module
Controller Area Network
(CAN) circuits
Symptom Chart

Wiper blade(s) Contamination of the Clean the windshield / rear window
drag/judder across the windshield / rear window Check the wiper arm installation
windshield / rear window Wiper arm(s) incorrectly Check the wiper arm alignment
installed Check the wiper arm tension
Wiper arm(s) incorrectly
aligned to the screen
Wiper arm(s) spring
tension inadequate
Very slow operation of Low battery voltage Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
the wiper(s) across the Front wiper linkage seized manual and test the battery
windshield / rear window or fouling Check the wiper linkage for seizure and
Wiper(s) inoperative Wiper circuit short circuit fouling
to ground, short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
power, open circuit, high test the wiper circuit for short circuit to
resistance ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance
Noisy operation of Wiper motor/linkage fault Lift the wiper arm(s) from the windshield /
wiper(s) rear window and recheck the noise level
during the wiper sweep operation
Noisy operation of Washer motor(s) faulty Listen for washer motor operation. Check and
washers Washer system blocked or top up washer fluid level. Check and rectify
partially blocked blocked washer circuit
Washers do not operate Fluid level low system, check the Central Junction Box (CJB)
Washer circuit blocked for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Washer circuit faulty DTC index
DTC Index
00.
Operation).
Wipers and Washers - Windshield Washer Reservoir
Removal
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover
2. Remove the windshield washer reservoir filler

neck.
Release the windshield washer reservoir
filler neck from the coolant expansion
tank.
Remove and if necessary, discard the
seal.
3. NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable

during this operation.
Disconnect the 2 hoses from the windshield

washer reservoir pumps.
Drain the washer reservoir fluid.
4. Remove the windshield washer reservoir.

Remove the 4 bolts.
Remove the windshield washer pump.

Remove and if necessary, discard the seal.
6. Remove the headlamp washer pump.

Remove and if necessary, discard the
seal.
Installation
1. Install the windshield washer pump.
If necessary, install a new seal.
2. Install the headlamp washer pump.

3. Install the windshield washer reservoir.

Tighten the M6 bolts to 6 Nm (4 lb.ft).
Tighten the M8 bolt to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
4. Connect the 2 hoses to the windshield washer reservoir

pumps.

Lubricate the seal.
Secure in the clip.
6. Install the front bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper Cover
Wipers and Washers - Windshield Washer Pump
Removal

safety stands.
2. Remove the LH fender splash shield.

3. Release the windshield washer pump hoses.

4. Disconnect the windshield washer pump electrical

connector.
5. Remove the windshield washer pump.

Discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. Install the windshield washer pump.
2. Connect the windshield washer pump electrical connector.
3. Connect the windshield washer pump hoses.

6. Top-up the windshield washer reservoir.

Wipers and Washers - Rain Sensor
Removal
1. Remove the interior mirror.
For additional information, refer to: Interior Mirror (501-09
Rear View Mirrors, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the rain sensor.

Installation
Wipers and Washers - Front Wiper Pivot Arm
Removal
1. Noting the fitted position, remove the front wiper pivot arm.
Remove the nut cover.
Remove the nut.

Remove the wiper blade.

Release the clip.
Installation
Wipers and Washers - Windshield Wiper Motor
Removal
2. Remove the windshield wiper motor and

linkage.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the 2 clips.

Noting the fitted position, remove the wiper

linkage.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Remove the nut.
Installation
1. Install the wiper linkage.
2. CAUTION: Make sure the windshield wiper motor is

located on its stud prior to installing the bolts.
Install the windshield wiper motor and linkage.

Install the clips.

Wipers and Washers - Headlamp Washer Jet
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the front fog lamp.

For additional information, refer to: Front Fog Lamp (417-01
Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
3. Release the washer jet assembly.

Release the clip.
4. Remove the washer jet.

Release the hose clip and disconnect the
hose.
Installation
Wipers and Washers - Headlamp Washer Pump
Removal

safety stands.
2. Remove the LH fender splash shield.

3. Release the headlamp washer pump hose.

4. Disconnect the headlamp washer pump electrical connector.
5. Remove the headlamp washer pump.

Installation
1. Install the headlamp washer pump.
2. Connect the headlamp washer pump electrical connector.
3. Connect the headlamp washer pump hose.

6. Top-up the windshield washer reservoir.

Wipers and Washers - Rear Wiper Pivot Arm
Special Tool(s)
General purpose puller
100-005A (LRT-99-500A)
Removal
1. Noting the fitted position and using the special
tool, remove the rear wiper pivot arm.
Remove the nut cover.
Remove the nut.

Remove the wiper blade.

Release the clip.
Installation
Wipers and Washers - Rear Window Wiper Motor
Removal
Installation).
2. Remove the rear window wiper arm.

3. Remove the rear window wiper motor.

Release the clip.
Remove the 3 nuts.

Remove the 3 rubber insulators.

Remove the metal inserts.
Installation
Roof Opening Panel -
Roof opening panel motor Torx screws 4 3
Roof opening panel bolts 10 7
Roof opening panel alignment Torx screws 6 4
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel
Roof Opening Panel Components

1 - Glass panel assembly
2 - Glass panel seal
3 - Frame assembly
4 - Sunblind
5 - Motor
6 - Control module
7 - RH rear drain tube
8 - LH rear drain tube
9 - LH front drain tube
10 - Deflector
11 - Access panel
12 - RH front drain tube
GENERAL

1 - Access panel
2 - Switch
The sunroof is electrically operated through a two-way rocker switch located on the roof mounted centre console. An
electric motor, attached to the sunroof frame, drives the glass sunroof panel to the tilt or open positions. The glass
panel is operated by two cables, which are driven by the motor.
The sunroof frame is bolted to eleven mounting points on the roof panel. The frame is a large injection moulding and
supports all of the sunroof components. Two aluminium guides held in the frame, on each side. The sunroof motor
attaches to the rear of this frame. The motor is supported on the frame with three screws.
The sunroof glass panel is attached to the guide at the extreme front and rear. The tilt and slide positions are
achieved by driving the attachment points on the panel over two fixed curves, one in the guide and one fixed to the
panel.
Sunroof Motor
The sunroof motor has a worm drive, which drives a gear in a cast housing attached to the end of the motor. The
gear has a small pinion gear attached to the outer part of its spindle. The pinion engages with the helixed cables to
form a rack and pinion drive. Rotation of the motor turns the pinion, which in turn drives the cables in the required
direction.
Sunroof Motor Pin Out Information
Pin Description Input/Output
1 Hall sensor Ground -
2 Hall sensor Supply Input
3 Hall sensor Speed Output
4 Hall sensor Direction Output
5 Motor A Input
6 Motor B Input
The two cables are attached either side of the pinion. One end of each cable is attached to the guide. The opposite
end is trapped in its position on the pinion by a metal insert in the frame. The cables run in channels in the frame to
the guides. As the sunroof panel is closed, the cables are pushed through channels in the rear of the frame. The
displaced cable is guided into a further two channels in the frame, which protect the cable and prevent the cable
snagging creating noise. The cables are made from rigid spring steel and therefore can pull as well as push the
sunroof along the guides.
A sun blind is also located in the guides integrated into the frame. The sunblind is operated manually, independently
of the glass panels position. To move to the closed position the sunblind handle is pushed forward until it latches into
the frame. To move the sunblind to the open position the sunblind handle is pushed up, to unlatch and either
released or retracted to the open position. The sunblind can only be in either the fully open or fully closed positions.
Drain hoses are connected to the front and rear corners of the frame. The drain hoses are located inside of the cabin
on the ’A’ and ’C’ post pillars to allow water, which has collected in the frame to escape. A one-way valve is fitted to
the end of each drain hose to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture.
SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE
The sunroof control module is mounted on the rear of the frame, and is connected to the motor at one end as
described above, and to the vehicle electrical system at the other. It takes the inputs from the vehicle, such as LIN
(Local Interconnect Network) bus signals and switch signals, and controls motor movement appropriately. It also
contains the algorithm for the anti-trap system.
Sunroof Control Module Pin Out Information
Pin Description Input/Output
1 Switch Ground -
2 Switch Open Input
3 Switch Close Input
4 Not used -
5 Not used -
6 Emergency (see note below) Input
7 ECU Ground -
8 Battery Input
9 Not used -
10 Not used -
11 Not used -
12 LIN Input
NOTES:
Pin 6 is for use in an emergency only in the event of the vehicle LIN bus not being functional. It is not
connected on the vehicle harness or in the connector.
Putting pin 6 to ground will enable the sunroof control module but without one touch operation or anti trap. The
sunroof will not require re-calibrating unless the battery has been disconnected.
The sunroof control module will remain awake and enabled until pin 6 is disconnected again. Under no
circumstances is this pin to be left grounded for long periods.
There is no emergency key access in the headlining for manual sunroof operation should the motor fail for any
reason.
OPERATION
The sunroof can be operated with the ignition in power modes 4 accessory or 6 on. The sunroof can also be operated
for up to 40 seconds after the ignition power mode 0 'off' provided the driver’s or passenger's door is not opened.
During the 40 second period the one touch function is inoperative.
The motor contains a micro-switch and a Hall effect sensor. Two gears, driven by the motor at one end of the pinion
drive spindle, trip the micro-switch every thirteen revolutions of the spindle. When the micro-switch is tripped, the
sunroof control module senses an open circuit signal. The sunroof control module, to calculate the exact position of
the sunroof, uses the signal from the micro-switch combined with signals received from the Hall effect sensor. The
Hall effect sensor is also responsible for the operation of the anti-trap function.
If the anti-trap feature is activated while the sunroof is closing, the roof panel is reversed for 200mm or as far as
possible. The Hall sensor, located in the sunroof motor, monitors the speed of the motor and if the speed decreases
below a set threshold, indicating an obstruction, the power feed to the motor is reversed so the sunroof goes back. In
an emergency the anti-trap function can be overridden by holding the sunroof switch in the closed position.
Tilt
With the sunroof panel closed, pushing the upper part of the rocker switch operates the sunroof motor to 'tilt' the
rear of the sunroof upwards. The motor operates for as long as the switch is operated until the glass is tilted to its
full extent. If the switch is released before the full tilt position is reached, the sunroof panel stops at the chosen
position. A single press (between 0.5 and 1 second) of the switch operates the motor so that the panel automatically
retracts to the fully tilted position.
When the tilt function is requested, the cables pull the guide rearward, forcing the panel attachment up a curve,
which raises the sunroof panel to the tilt position.
With the sunroof panel in the tilted position, pushing the lower part of the rocker switch operates the sunroof motor
to lower the sunroof panel. The motor operates to lower the panel for as long as the switch is operated until the
panel is fully lowered. If the switch is released before the fully lowered position is reached, the sunroof panel stops at
the chosen position.
Open (slide)
With the sunroof panel tilted, pushing the upper part of the rocker switch operates the sunroof motor to raise the
sunroof panel and retract it backwards. A single press (between 0.5 and 1 second) of the switch operates the motor
so that the panel automatically retracts to the fully open position. When the panel retracts, a wind deflector
automatically raises at the front of the sunroof aperture, which serves to reduce wind noise.
When the open function is requested, the cables pull in a rearward direction, driving the glass panel attachments to
slide the panel over the exterior roof skin.
With the sunroof panel half or fully open, pushing the lower part of the switch operates the motor to close the
sunroof panel. A single press (between 0.5 and 1 second) of the switch operates the motor so that the panel
automatically closes to the fully tilted position.
If only partial opening or closing is desired, pressing the switch momentarily (less than 0.5 seconds) in either
direction will stop the sunroof panel movement. When movement is desired in either direction, pressing the switch
will operate the motor to move the panel.
The sunroof has an 'anti-trap' function which prevents the sunroof panel from closing if an obstruction is sensed.
When an obstruction is sensed, the motor will automatically retract the panel by 200mm or as far as possible. When
the obstruction is removed, the panel can be closed by the normal method.
Battery Disconnection
If the battery has been disconnected, the one touch and anti-trap function will become inoperative. Pressing the
lower part of the sunroof switch for 60 seconds will start the sunroof's calibration routine. The sunroof will complete a
full cycle in order to re-learn the parameters required for one-touch open and close and the anti-trap function. The
sunroof will still have manual movement available until the sunroof is re-calibrated.
SUNROOF CONTROL DIAGRAM
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus
1 - Battery
2 - Sunroof control module
3 - Sunroof motor
4 - Sunroof switch
5 - Keyless Vehicle Module (KVM)
For a detailed description of the roof opening panel system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Roof Opening Panel (501-17 Roof Opening Panel,

Visual Inspection
Glass panel assembly Fuses
Glass panel seal Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Frame assembly Central Junction Box (CJB)
Sunblind Wiring harness
Deflector Loose or corroded connector(s)
Access panel Roof opening panel motor and control module
Roof opening panel cables Roof opening panel switch
Drain tube(s)
Symptom Chart

Roof opening panel Fuse(s) blown Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
inoperative Circuit fault Check the fuse(s) (see visual inspection)
Switch fault Check the roof opening panel circuits
Motor fault Check the switch and motor function
Module fault One touch switch inoperative GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Roof opening panel inoperative GO to Pinpoint Test
B.
Roof opening panel Debris in the Check for general debris

sticking/jamming channels/guides Inspect, clean and lubricate the cable(s) and guides
Cable(s) Check the roof opening panel alignment
sticking/damaged REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Alignment (501-17
Roof opening panel Roof Opening Panel, General Procedures).
not correctly aligned Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Switch fault Check the switch and motor function
Motor fault GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Roof opening panel Debris in the Check for general debris

juddering channels/guides Inspect, clean and lubricate the cable(s) and guides
not correctly aligned Check the motor function
Motor fault GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Water ingress from Debris in the Check for general debris

roof opening panel channels/guides Check for blocked drain tube(s)
Drain tube(s) Inspect, clean and lubricate the cable(s) and guides
blocked Check the glass panel seal
Damage to the glass Check the roof opening panel alignment
panel seal REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Alignment (501-17
not correctly aligned Water ingress GO to Pinpoint Test H.
Noise Damage to the glass Check the glass panel seal
panel seal Inspect, clean and lubricate the cable(s) and guides
not correctly aligned Noise during operation GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Noise in open or tilt position GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Wind noise GO to Pinpoint Test I.
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB) (100-00 General Information,
PINPOINT TEST A : ROOF OPENING PANEL - ONE TOUCH SWITCH OPERATION INOPERATIVE
A1: ONE TOUCH SWITCH OPERATION INOPERATIVE
1 Operate the roof opening panel through all
possible positions using the roof mounted switch
(1) (slide open / slide close / tilt open / tilt close)
without using one touch operation
Set the ignition to the ON position
Ensure that the glass is in the closed position

using the 'close' switch on the overhead console
Press and hold the open switch (1), the opening

panel moves to tilt position, and then to open
Press and hold the close switch (2), the panel

moves forward into the tilt position, then closed
position
Does the roof opening panel operate through all

possible positions correctly?
Yes
Perform the manual roof opening panel
initialization procedure
REFER to: Power Roof Opening Panel Initialization
(501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General Procedures).
Check for correct roof opening panel operation GO
to A2.
No
A2: ONE TOUCH SWITCH - OPERATION
1 Operate one touch function the roof opening panel
using the roof mounted switch
2 Set the ignition to the ON position
3 Press once and release the open switch on the roof
console
Panel should move to tilt position
4 Press once and release the open switch on the roof

console
Panel should move from tilt position to full open

position
5 Press once and release the close switch on the roof

console
Panel should move from full open position to tilt

position
6 Press once and release the close switch on the roof

console
Panel should move from tilt position to closed

position
Does the one touch function of the roof opening panel

switch operate correctly?
Yes
No further action required
No
GO to A3.
A3: ONE TOUCH SWITCH - OPERATION
1 Perform the manual roof opening panel
initialization procedure using the manufacturers
approve diagnostic system. Check for correct roof
opening panel operation
Does the one touch function of the roof opening panel
switch operate correctly?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST B : ROOF OPENING PANEL - INOPERATIVE

B1: INOPERATIVE
NOTE: These tests are to be carried out to determine the cause of the loss of roof opening panel
functionality
Check for correct roof opening panel operation
Does the roof opening panel operate correctly?

Yes
No
GO to B2.
B2: FUSE
NOTE: These tests are to be carried out to determine the cause of the loss of roof opening panel
functionality
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the fused link to the roof opening panel motor
Is the fused link (VBATT) circuit to the roof opening
panel motor intact?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
The fused link to the roof opening panel motor has
failed. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the circuit - VBATT - between the fused link
and the roof opening panel motor for short circuit
to ground. Replace the fused link or repair the
circuit as required. Perform the manual roof
opening panel initialization procedure
Check for correct operation, If correct no further
action required
B3: SWITCH CONNECTOR
1 Access to the connector for the front overhead
console
REFER to: Overhead Console (501-12 Instrument
the roof opening panel switch terminals and
housing for location and condition
Are the roof opening panel switch terminals and
housing located correctly and in good condition?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
Correctly relocate or replace any roof opening
panel switch connector terminals as required.
action required
B4: MOTOR CONNECTOR
1 Access the roof opening panel motor
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Motor (501-17 Roof
Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
the roof opening panel motor terminals and
housing for location and condition
Are the roof opening panel motor connector terminals
and housing located correctly and in good condition?
Yes
GO to B5.
No
Correctly relocate or replace any roof opening
panel motor connector terminals as required.
Check for correct roof opening panel operation.
action required
B5: SWITCH - CIRCUIT CHECK
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor gives a voltage out on the open and close circuits which is grounded
when the switch is operated, this voltage should be greater than 7volts (switch inactive) and less than 1volt
(switch active) with the ignition state switched to on
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and locate
the open and close circuits between the roof
opening panel motor and the roof opening panel
switch, monitor the voltage on each circuit as the
switch is operated
Do both open and close switch circuit voltages
change from greater than 7 volts to less than 1 volt
when the roof opening panel open or close switches
are pressed?
Yes
GO to B8.
No
GO to B6.
B6: SWITCH - CIRCUIT CHECK 2
NOTES:
During the previous check, if the voltage remained high (greater than 7 volts), refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the switch circuit for fault
During the previous check, if the voltage remained low (less than 1 volt), refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the roof opening panel motor circuit for fault
1 Refer to notes above
Did the voltage remain low (less than 1 volt)?
Yes
GO to B7.
No
The voltage remained high (greater than 7
volts) refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the roof opening panel switch circuit for
fault. Repair as required. Perform the manual roof
action required
B7: MOTOR SUPPLY
the voltage between the power (VBATT) and
ground (GND) circuits to the roof opening panel
motor for battery supply voltage (approx. 12
volts)
Is the supply voltage to the (VBATT) and (GND)
circuits correct ?
Yes
GO to B8.
No
Check the (VBATT) and (GND) circuits to the
roof opening panel motor for fault. Repair as
required. Perform the manual roof opening panel
action required
B8: MOTOR - FAILURE
1 Uninstall the motor from the roof opening panel
2 Operate the roof opening panel using the roof
mounted switch
When operating the switch, does the motor operate?
Yes
GO to B9.
No
Replace the roof opening panel motor
action required
B9: MANUAL - ROOF OPERATION
1 Reinstall the roof opening panel motor to the roof
opening panel frame
2 Using a large flathead screwdriver applied to the
motor, operate the roof opening panel through all
possible positions (slide open / slide close / tilt
open / tilt close)
Can the roof opening panel be manually operated
through all possible positions?
Yes
Install a new roof opening panel module
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Module (501-17
Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
action required
No
GO to B10.
B10: GLASS PANEL – REMOVAL
1 Remove the glass panel from the roof opening
panel
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Glass (501-17 Roof
Can the glass panel be removed?
Yes
GO to B11.
No
Contact dealer technical support
B11: GLASS PANEL REMOVED
1 Carry out visual and manual inspection of the
rail(s) for debris
Are the rail(s) free from debris?

Yes
GO to B12.
No
Clear any obstructions from the rails. Apply grease
(KP 1N-30 or ISO-L-X-CDBE1) to the areas
shown. Then, GO to B12.
B12: LIFTER ARMS - CONDITION
1 Carry out visual inspection of the lifter arms for
cracks or damage (pieces broken)
Are the lifter arms cracked or damaged?

Yes
Replace the lifter arms. Perform the manual roof
action required
No
GO to B13.
B13: REAR MECHANISM - CONDITION
1 Carry out visual inspection of the rear mechanism
Are the rear mechanisms free from cracking and
damage?
Yes
GO to B14.
No
Install a new roof opening panel
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel (501-17 Roof
action required
B14: GLASS PANEL - RE-ASSEMBLY
1 Re-assemble the glass panel onto the roof opening
panel
3 Check for correct roof opening panel operation
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : ROOF OPENING PANEL - DURING OPERATION

C1: NOISE
NOTES:
These tests are to be carried out to determine the cause of the noise in relation to the roof opening panel
If the customer concern is related wind noise, refer to the symptom chart above
1 Confirm customer complaint, locate the noise, by
operating the roof opening panel through all
open / tilt close) using the roof mounted switch
2 Determine the cause of the noise
Is the noise evident only during operation of the roof
opening panel?
Yes
The noise is evident during (slide open / slide
close / tilt open / tilt close) operation GO to
Pinpoint Test D.
No
(1) The noise is evident during inputs from the
vehicle GO to C2. Or, (2) the customer symptom
is not evident. No further action required
C2: AIR DEFLECTOR – ALIGNMENT AND NOISE
1 Carry out visual inspection of the wind deflector,
confirm the position is correct, the left / right
buffers are present and the springs are in good
condition
2
Is the position of the wind deflector correct, with the

left / right buffers present and the springs are in good
condition?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
Correctly reinstall or replace the wind deflector
(buffers or springs) as required. Check for correct
operation, If correct no further action required. If
customer concern is still evident GO to C3.
C3: MOTOR FIXING - SECURITY, LOCATION AND TORQUE
1 Carry out visual inspection of the roof opening
panel motor for location and security of fixings
Is the roof opening panel motor correctly located and
securely installed?
Yes
GO to C4.
No
Re-torque the fixings, TORQUE 3NM ± 0.25 if
this is not possible replace the roof opening panel
C4: ROLLO BLIND NOISE
1 Operate the rollo blind
Does the rollo blind retract correctly without noise?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
C5: MOTOR NOISE
1 Operate the roof opening panel
During operation is the motor noise acceptable?
(compare to other vehicles)
Yes
If customer concern is still evident contact dealer
technical support
No
Install a new roof opening panel motor
action required
PINPOINT TEST D : ROOF OPENING PANEL - NOISE IN OPEN / TILT POSITION

D1: OPEN / TILT POSITION MECHANISM NOISE
NOTES:
These tests are to be carried out to determine the cause of the noise in relation to the roof opening panel
If the customer concern is related wind noise or noise during movement, refer to the symptom chart above
1 Confirm customer complaint, locate the noise, by
operating the roof opening panel through all
2 Roof panel fully open position
3 Check for movement in the roof opening panel
mechanism by manually moving the glass panel
upwards / downwards
Is there up and down movement?
Yes
GO to D2.
No
D2: DAMAGED LIFTER ARMS
1 Remove the glass panel
2 Carry out visual inspection of the lifter arms for
cracks or damage (pieces broken)
Are the lifter arms cracked or damaged?

Yes
Replace the lifter arms, reinstall the glass panel.
Check for correct operation. (1) If correct no
further action required. (2) If customer concern is
still evident GO to D3.
No
GO to D3.
D3: REAR SLIDER MECHANISM
1 Carry out a visual inspection of the rear slider
mechanisms
Are the rear slider mechanisms damaged or bent?

Yes
action required. If customer concern is still evident
contact dealer technical support GO to D4.
No
GO to D4.
D4: SLIDE PADS AND SIDE COVERS
1 Carry out a visual inspection of the slide pads and
the side covers
Are the slide pads and the side covers damaged or

bent?
Yes
Replace the glass panel assembly
No
GO to D5.
D5: ROOF OPERATION
1 Reinstall the glass panel as required
2 Check for correct operation
Is the customer concern is still evident?
Yes
technical support
No
PINPOINT TEST E : ROOF OPENING PANEL - BOUNCE BACK

E1: INITIALIZATION
NOTE: These tests are to be carried out to determine the cause of the unnecessary roof opening panel
bounce back
Check for correct roof opening panel operation
2 Operate the roof opening panel through all
3 Operate the roof opening panel one touch function
five times in succession using the roof mounted
switch
Does the roof opening panel operate correctly five
times in succession?
Yes
No
GO to E2.
E2: GUIDES - INSPECTION
NOTE: Image shows glass panel removed for

clarity. Do not remove the glass panel at this time
1 Carry out visual inspection of the guides

Are the guides free from debris and obstruction?
Yes
GO to E3.
No
Remove any debris or obstruction. Check for
correct operation. (1) If correct no further action
required. (2) If customer concern is still evident
GO to E3.
E3: SIDE COVERS
1 Carry out visual inspection of the side covers
attached to the glass panel
Are the side covers bent or damaged?

Yes
Replace the glass panel
Check for correct operation. (1) If correct no
further action required. (2) If customer concern is
still evident GO to E4.
No
GO to E4.
E4: WIND DEFLECTOR
1 Carry out visual inspection of the wind deflector
Is the wind deflector damaged or incorrectly located?

Yes
Re-install or replace the wind deflector as
required. Check for correct operation. Check for
contact dealer technical support
No
If concern still evident contact dealer technical
support
PINPOINT TEST F : ROOF OPENING PANEL BLIND - OPERATION

CONDITIONS
F1: OPERATION
1 Operate the roof opening panel blind through all movements and latch to the frame
Does the roof opening panel blind operate through all movements and retract correctly?
Yes
If concern still evident contact dealer technical support
No
Disassemble rollo blind from roof
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Blind (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
Use following procedure to rewind the rollo blind
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Blind Rewind Procedure (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General
Procedures).
Then GO to F2.
F2: ROLLO BLIND MECHANISM
1 Once the rollo blind rewind procedure has been attempted
Could the rewind procedure be completed successfully?
Yes
Re-install the rollo into the roof. Check for correct operation. (1) If correct no further action
required. (2) If customer concern is still evident contact dealer technical support
No
Install a new rollo blind. Check for correct operation, If correct no further action required
PINPOINT TEST G : ROOF OPENING PANEL BLIND - NOISE

G1: GUIDES - INSPECTION
1 Carry out visual inspection of the guides
Are the guides free from debris and obstruction?
Yes
GO to G2.
No
Remove any debris or obstruction. Check for
GO to G2.
G2: SLIDESHOES
1 Remove the slide shoes from the guide
2 Carry out visual inspection of the slide shoes

Are the slide shoes broken / damaged or is the felt on
the slide shoes missing or damaged?
Yes
If the felt on the slide shoe is adrift then it may be
possible to secure the felt using a small amount of
glue. Replace the rollo blind as required. Check for
GO to G3.
No
GO to G3.
G3: MOUNTING PINS
1 Lower the headliner to gain access to see the
ends of the blind assembly mounted into the roof
REFER to: Headliner (501-05 Interior Trim and
(remove grab handle, remove headliner clips to
roof opening panel)
2 Carry out visual inspection of the mounting pins of
the rollo blind
Are the rollo pins correctly mounted?
Yes
technical support
No
Remove the rollo blind. Carry out blind rewind
procedure.
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Blind Rewind
Procedure (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General
Procedures).
Re-install the rollo blind. Check for correct
operation. (1) If correct no further action
contact dealer technical support
PINPOINT TEST H : WATER INGRESS

CONDITIONS
H1: GLASS PANEL
NOTE: These tests are to be carried out to determine the cause of the water ingress around the roof
opening panel
1 Carry out visual inspection of the glass panel alignment to the roof aperture
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Alignment (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General
Procedures).
Correctly relocate the glass panel as required
2 Perform the manual roof opening panel initialization procedure
REFER to: Power Roof Opening Panel Initialization (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General
Procedures).
Is the alignment correct?
Yes
GO to H2.
No
H2: SEAL - LOCATION
1 Carry out visual inspection of the seal on the glass panel for location and damage
Is the glass panel seal correctly located and intact?
Yes
GO to H3.
No
Install new glass panel.
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Glass (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal and
Installation).
Conduct a water leak test
REFER to: Water Leaks (501-25C Body Repairs - Water Leaks, Description and
Operation).
(1) If correct no further action required. (2) If leak still evident GO to H3.
H3: DRAIN TUBES – FREE FROM DEBRIS
1 Carry out inspection of the drain tubes REFER to: (501-17 Roof Opening Panel)
Driver Side Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose (Removal and Installation),
Passenger Side Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose (Removal and Installation).
Are the drain tubes free from debris?
Yes
GO to H4.
No
Remove the obstruction to ensure flow through the drain tubes and conduct water leak
test
REFER to: Water Leaks (501-25C Body Repairs - Water Leaks, Description and
Operation).
(1) If correct no further action required. (2) If leak still evident GO to H4.
H4: ASSEMBLY FRAME
1 Carry out visual inspection of the frame for cracks and damage
Is the frame damaged (allowing water ingress)?
Yes
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
No
If concern still evident contact dealer technical support
PINPOINT TEST I : ROOF OPENING PANEL - WIND NOISE

CONDITIONS
I1: VERIFY CUSTOMER CONCERN
NOTE: These tests are to be carried out to determine the cause of the wind noise around the roof opening
panel area
1 Perform the manual roof opening panel initialization procedure
REFER to: Power Roof Opening Panel Initialization (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General
Procedures).
2 Carry out a road test to verify the customer complaint, drive at the speed indicated by the
customer
Can the noise be confirmed?
Yes
If the customer concern is still evidentGO to I2.
No
I2: OPERATION
1 Operate the roof opening panel through all possible positions (slide open / slide close / tilt
Yes
GO to I3.
No
I3: GLASS PANEL ALIGNMENT
1 Correctly relocate the glass panel as required.
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Alignment (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General Procedures).
2 Carry out visual inspection of the glass panel alignment to the roof aperture
Is the alignment correct?
Yes
GO to I4.
No
I4: GLASS SEAL
1 Carry out visual inspection of the glass panel seal
Is the glass panel seal correctly installed?
Yes
GO to I5.
No
Install a new roof opening panel glass
REFER to: Roof Opening Panel Glass (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
I5: WIND NOISE
1 Carry out a road test, drive at the speed indicated by the customer
Is the wind noise still evident?
Yes
No
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Blind Rewind Procedure
General Procedures
Inspection
1. Refer to: Headliner (501-05 Interior Trim and
2. Close the roof opening panel blind (but do not

latch the handle to the frame).
3. Using a suitable tool, release the roof opening

panel blind locking tang on the right.
4.
Release the roof opening panel
blind from the mounting bracket
and remove the roof opening panel
blind from the vehicle.
1. Push the roof opening panel blind to
the right.
2. Rotate the roof opening panel blind
counter clockwise.
5. Remove the roof opening panel blind.
6.
Rewind the roof opening panel.
1. Push the spring axle into the roof
opening panel blind.
2. Using a suitable tool, hold and rotate
the spring axle 13 turns (360°).
3. Release the spring axle 17 mm from
the roof opening panel blind once the 13
rotations have been completed.
7.
Install the roof opening panel blind
sliders to the runners.
1. Push the roof opening panel blind
right slider in to the runner
2. Install the left slider clockwise to the
runner.
8. Close the roof opening panel blind.
9. NOTE: Make sure that the spring axle is correctly

located into the roof opening panel.
Open the roof opening panel blind and check for

correct operation.
10. Refer to: Headliner (501-05 Interior Trim and

Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Alignment
General Procedures
1. With the roof opening panel closed, check the alignment of

the glass to the roof panel. The glass should be central in
its aperture. Profile of sunroof to body:
1. Front edge, set flush or up to 1.0 mm (0.040") low.
1. Rear edge, set flush or up to 1.0 mm (0.040") high.
2. Open the roof opening panel blind.
3. Loosen the 6 roof opening panel Torx bolts.
4. Align the roof opening panel.


Roof Opening Panel - Power Roof Opening Panel Initialization
General Procedures
Initialization
NOTES:
Make sure that the battery voltage is between 11-14 Volts. Connect a suitable approved battery charger to
the vehicle battery if required.
The vehicle needs to be inside the workshop for a minimum of 1 hour, with the temperature between 5 -
30 degrees.
1. Switch the ignition ON.
2. NOTES:
Do not release the roof opening panel switch during

the initialization.
If the roof opening panel does not operate after

60 seconds. Connect the approved diagnostic tool and
read the diagnostic troubles code(s) (DTC(s)), then
clear the DTC(s).
Press and hold the front of the roof opening panel switch.
3. NOTES:
A time delay may occur during the initialization of the

roof opening panel.
The cycle time will depend on the glass panel position.
The initialization process:

The roof opening panel will close.
The roof opening panel will open to the tilt position.
The roof opening panel will fully open.
The roof opening panel will fully close.
4. Release the roof opening panel switch once the roof opening
panel has fully closed.
5. Check the roof opening panel for correct operation.
6. Switch the ignition OFF.
7. If installed, disconnect and remove the suitable battery

charger and diagnostic tool.
Roof Opening Panel - Lifter Arms
Removal
1. Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Glass (501-17 Roof Opening

Panel, Removal and Installation).
2. Set the roof opening panel motor to the fully open position.
3. CAUTION: Care must be taken during this

step.
1. Using a suitable tool, release the locking

tang.
2. Slide the driving wedge forward until the
lifter arm becomes free.
4.
1. Raise the rear of the lifter arm to
release the lifter arm from the guides
and the tangs.
2. Push the lifter arm forward.
5.
1. Push the lifter arm fully forward.
2. Remove the lifter arm.
Installation
1.
1. Install the lifter arm.
2. Slide the lifter arm rearwards.
2.
1. Push the lifter arm rearwards and locate
in the tangs.
2. Push the lifter arm downwards and
locate in the guides.
3.
Slide the driving wedge rearward until
the locking tab is fully located.
4. Repeat the procedure to the other side.
5. Refer to: Roof Opening Panel Glass (501-17 Roof Opening

Panel, Removal and Installation).
Removal
2. Release the 4 drain hoses from the roof opening panel.
3. Disconnect the roof opening panel motor

4. With assistance, remove the roof opening panel

assembly.
Remove the 11 bolts.
5. CAUTION: Do not depress the RH plunger

to remove the blind.
NOTES:

Remove the roof opening panel blind.

Twist to release the handle.
Depress the LH plunger.
6. Remove the roof opening panel motor.
Remove the spacer.
Installation
1. Install the roof opening panel motor.
Install the spacer.
Install the roof opening panel blind.

Secure in the guides.
Locate the tensioner peg.
Depress the LH plunger.
3. With assistance, install the roof opening panel assembly.

4. Connect the roof opening panel motor electrical connector.
5. Connect the drain hoses.

Make sure the drain hoses are clear prior to
connection.

7. Using T4, configure a new roof opening panel.
8. If the battery has been disconnected, the one touch and

anti-trap function will become inoperative. Close the roof
opening panel and continue to hold the switch for a further
20 seconds to allow the sunroof to complete a full cycle.
This will complete the roof opening panels calibration
routine and reset these functions.
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Glass
Removal
1. Open the roof opening panel blind.
2. Open the roof opening panel to the tilt position.
3. Remove the roof opening panel glass.

other side.
Installation
1. Install the roof opening panel glass.
Install the Torx bolts, but do not tighten fully at this
stage.
2. Align the roof opening panel glass.

For additional information, refer to: Roof Opening Panel
Alignment (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General
Procedures).
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Motor
Removal
Installation).
2. Remove both B-pillar upper trim panels.

and Installation).
3. Remove the front overhead console.

4. Remove the sun visor.

Remove the cover.
other side.

Remove the screw.
other side.
6. Remove the passenger assist handle.
Release the 2 screw covers.
other side.
7. Lower the headliner for access.

8. Remove the roof opening panel motor.

Remove the spacer.
Installation
1. Install the roof opening panel motor.
Install the spacer.
2. Position the headliner.

3. Install the passenger assist handles.
Install the screws.
Secure the screw covers.
4. Install the sun visors.

Install the clips.
Install the screws.
5. Install the front overhead console.

6. Install both B-pillar upper trim panels.

and Installation).

Installation).
8. Using T4, configure a new roof opening panel motor.

This will complete the roof opening panel calibration routine
and reset these functions.
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Module
Removal
1. Remove the rear overhead console.
2. Remove the roof opening panel module.

Slide the module to the LH side to
release it from the bracket.
Installation
1. Install the roof opening panel module.
Secure the module to the bracket.
2. Install the rear overhead console.

3. Using T4, configure a new roof opening panel module.

This will complete the roof opening panels calibration
routine and reset these functions.
Roof Opening Panel - Roof Opening Panel Blind
Removal
1. NOTE: Repeat the procedure for both sides.
Refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

Refer to: B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim

Refer to: C-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim

Refer to: D-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

5.
Remove the overhead console.
6. NOTE: Repeat the procedure for both

sides.
Remove the sun visor.

sides.
Remove the sun visor retaining clip.

sides.
Remove the passenger assist handle.
9.
Lower the headliner for access.
10. Close the roof opening panel blind (but do not

latch the handle to the frame).
11. Using a suitable tool, release the roof opening
panel blind locking tang on the right.
12.
Release the roof opening panel
blind from the mounting bracket
and remove the roof opening panel
blind from the vehicle.
1. Push the roof opening panel blind to
the right.
2. Rotate the roof opening panel blind
counter clockwise.
13. Remove the roof opening panel blind.
Installation
1. NOTE: This step must be followed if

the roof opening panel blind tension has
been lost.
Rewind the roof opening panel.
CAUTION: Make sure that all

tension is removed from the roof
opening panel blind. Push the
spring axle 3-4 times until all
tension is removed, then follow the
steps below.
1. Push the spring axle into the roof

opening panel blind.
2. Using a suitable tool, hold and rotate
the spring axle 13 turns (360°).
NOTE: This step is to lock the

tension to the roof opening panel blind
prior to installation.
3. Pull the spring axle 17 mm from the

roof opening panel blind once the 13
rotations have been completed.
2.
sliders to the runners.
1. Push the roof opening panel blind
right slider in to the runner.
2. Install the left slider clockwise to the
runner.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the roof

opening panel blind tension remains
during installation.

to the mounting brackets.
Carefully locate the roof opening panel
blind tube to the left-hand mounting
bracket.
Using a suitable tool, push the roof
opening panel blind locking tang inwards
of the blind and install the blind to the
mounting bracket (as illustrated).

5. CAUTION: Make sure that the spring axle is
correctly located into the roof opening panel.
Open the roof opening panel blind and check for

correct operation.
6.
Install the headliner.
7.
Install the passenger assist handle.
Install the sun visor retaining clip.
Install the sun visor.
10.
Install the overhead console.
Refer to: D-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

Refer to: C-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim

Refer to: B-Pillar Upper Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim

Refer to: A-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

Roof Opening Panel - Driver Side Roof Opening Panel Front Drain
Hose
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Headliner (501-05, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the driver side closing trim panel.
3. Release the side air bag curtain and detach the

drain hose from the opening roof panel.
4. Detach the drain hose from the body panel.

5. Using suitable tape, secure the drain hose to a
suitable rod to aid removal from the A-pillar
area.
6. Remove the drain hose.
Installation

Roof Opening Panel - Passenger Side Roof Opening Panel Front Drain
Hose
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Headliner (501-05, Removal and Installation).
3. Release the side air bag curtain and detach the

drain hose from the opening roof panel.
4. Detach the drain hose from the body panel.

5. Using suitable tape, secure the drain hose to a
suitable rod to aid removal from the A-pillar
area.
6. Remove the drain hose.
Installation

Bumpers -
Front bumper bolts 25 18
Windshield washer reservior bolts 5 3.5
Front bumper cover bolts 5 3.5
Bumpers - Front Bumper
Removal
2. Refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal

and Installation).
3. NOTE: Support as necessary.
Torque: 10 Nm

the component.
5. NOTE: With assistance remove the

component.
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Bumpers - Front Bumper Cover
Removal
2. Refer to: Front Fender Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and


stands.
4. Remove both the front wheels and tires.
5.

on both sides.
Torque: 1 Nm

8. Torque: 5 Nm
9. Torque: 5 Nm
10. Torque: 5 Nm
11. NOTE: With assistance remove the

component.
Torque: 1 Nm
13. Torque: 1.5 Nm

14.
15. Torque: 1 Nm
16. CAUTION: Make sure the locating tangs
are aligned. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the vehicle.
17.
18.
Installation

Bumpers - Front Bumper Lower Cover
Removal
1.
Installation

Bumpers - Rear Bumper Cover
Removal
All vehicles

safety stands.
2. Remove both rear lamp assemblies.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Lamp Assembly
3. Remove both rear quarter panel mouldings.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Panel
Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation,
4. Remove 4 scews, 2 clips and 2 bolts from the

rear bumper cover.
5. With assistance, remove 4 clips from the inner

edge of the bumper cover.
Tilt the tailgate for access.
Open the tailgate hinge cover.

If installed, disconnect the parking aid
sensor wiring harness electrical
connector.
Remove the towing eye cover.

8. Remove the rear bumper trim panel.

9. Remove the bumper insert.

Vehicles with parking aid

10. Remove the parking aid sensor wiring harness.
remaining 3 sensors.

remaining 3 sensor trim panels.
Installation

1. Install the parking aid sensor trim panels.

2. Install the parking aid sensors.

3. Install the parking aid sensor wiring harness.
4. Install the bumper insert.

If installed, secure the parking aid sensor wiring
harness.
Tighten the screws.
5. Install the rear bumper trim panel.

6. Install the towing eye cover.
Tighten the screws.

If installed, connect the parking aid sensor wiring
harness electrical connector.
Tighten the screws.
8. Install both rear quarter panel mouldings.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Panel
Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation,
9. Install both of the rear lamp assemblies.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Lamp Assembly
Safety Belt System -
Front safety belt retractor Torx bolt 40 30
Front safety belt buckle Torx bolt 40 30
+ Front safety belt upper anchor Torx bolt 40 30
Second row safety belt retractor Torx bolt 40 30
+ Second row safety belt upper anchor Torx bolt 40 30
Third row safety belt retractor Torx bolt 40 30
+ Third row safety belt upper anchor Torx bolt 40 30
Luggage compartment Torx bolts 25 18
Rear safety belt buckle Torx bolt 25 18
Rear safety belt buckle - RH - Torx bolt 40 30
Rear safety belt buckle - LH - Torx bolt - 60-40 split 25 18
Rear center safety belt buckle Torx bolt - 40-20-40 split 40 30
Rear safety belt buckle Torx bolt - 40-20-40 split 25 18
+ Rear seat Torx bolts 40 30
+ New Torx bolt must be fitted
Safety Belt System - Safety Belt System
For a detailed description of the seatbelt system and operation, refer to the relevant description and operation
section of the workshop manual REFER to: Safety Belt System (501-20 Safety Belt System, Description and
Operation).
Safety Information
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment the back-up power supply must be depleted before beginning any work on
the SRS system or its components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury
Do not use a multimeter to probe an SRS module. It is possible for the power from the multimeter battery
to trigger the activation of the module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury
NOTE: Do not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the
SRS system or components
Power supply depletion
Before beginning any work on the SRS system or related components:
1. Remove the ignition key
2. Disconnect the battery leads, ground first
3. Wait 2 minutes for the power circuit to discharge
There are comprehensive instructions on the correct procedures for SRS system repairs, refer to the relevant
section of the workshop manual
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines including pinpoint tests
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the seatbelt
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage

Visual Inspection
Check for the installation of non-standard accessories which may affect Fuses
or obstruct the function of the seatbelt system Wiring harness fault
Frayed or damaged webbing Correct engagement of
Missing or damaged button stop electrical connectors
Pretensioner(s) Buckles/Stalks Loose or corroded
connections
Warning lamp bulb(s)
Impact sensor(s)
Buckle sensor(s)
Pretensioner(s)
Belt tension sensor(s)
Restraints control module
4. If the cause is not visually evident, carry out the test methods described below, alternatively check for
diagnostic trouble codes and refer to the relevant diagnostic trouble code index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to section
100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (100-00 General
Symptom Chart for Seatbelt Rows 1, 2 and 3

Seatbelt jammed Backlock effect-in action (webbing retracted quickly GO to Pinpoint Test A.
- Webbing tight and came to sudden stop) GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly GO to Pinpoint Test H.
Rear centre seatbelt only. Mini-button (webbing See the automatic locking
travel limit stop) missing and seat squab has been retractor description
moved causing tight fit below
Automatic locking retractor activated (clicking –
during retraction only)
Seat squab will GO to Pinpoint Test H.

not fold/jammed NOTE: Rear centre seatbelt only
Mini-button (webbing travel limit stop) missing and

seat squab has been moved causing excessive
tension
Seatbelt jammed Seatbelt webbing trapped in seat GO to Pinpoint Test B.

- Webbing loose Seatbelt retractor webbing guide loose GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Twist in webbing GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Interference in webbing routing GO to Pinpoint Test E.
D-loop not rotating correctly GO to Pinpoint Test G.
Seatbelt - Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly GO to Pinpoint Test F.

Intermittent
jamming
Seatbelt - Slow Seatbelt retractor webbing guide loose GO to Pinpoint Test C.
retraction Twist in seatbelt webbing GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Foreign object/debris GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Seatbelt - Not Seatbelt retractor webbing guide loose GO to Pinpoint Test C.

retracting Twist in seatbelt webbing GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Foreign object/debris GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Seatbelt - Not Backlock effect-in action (webbing retracted quickly GO to Pinpoint Test A.
extracting and came to sudden stop) GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Seatbelt retractor not installed correctly GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Seatbelt retractor webbing guide loose GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Twist in seatbelt webbing GO to Pinpoint Test G.
D-loop not rotating correctly GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Foreign object/debris See the automatic locking
Automatic locking retractor activated (clicking – retractor description
during retraction only) below
Seatbelt - Noisy Automatic locking retractor activated (clicking–during GO to Pinpoint Test B.

during operation retraction only) GO to Pinpoint Test E.
Interference in webbing routing (rubbing)
Seatbelt buckle - Foreign object/debris

Not latching / CAUTION: Do not insert
jammed any objects or tools into the
buckle head
GO to Pinpoint Test I.
Inertia Reel Seatbelts
The vehicle is equipped with (two row one), (three row two), and (two row three (seven seat versions only))
inertia reel seatbelts
These seatbelts are "dual sensitive" which means that they have:
Car sense system - A vehicle motion sensor, which locks the seatbelt webbing under braking,
cornering, on steep hills and in adverse camber conditions, when parked on a steep incline or
driveway or two wheels on a high curb
Webb sense system - A webbing motion sensor, which locks when the seatbelt webbing is
extracted suddenly
The seatbelts in the following positions are equipped with an automatic locking retractor function:
Seat Automatic Locking Retractor From Model
Carline Market position Installed Year
Defender (L316) All All No 2007
Discovery / Range Rover Sport All Driver No 2008
(L319/L320)
Discovery / Range Rover Sport US Passenger Yes 2005
(L319/L320)
Discovery / Range Rover Sport All Driver No 2005
(L319/L320)
Discovery / Range Rover Sport ROW Passenger No 2005
(L319/L320)
Discovery (L319) All Row 2 Yes 2005
Discovery (L319) All Row 3 Yes 2005
Range Rover Sport (L320) All Row 2 Yes 2006
Freelander (L359) All Driver No 2007
Freelander (L359) ROW Passenger No 2007
Freelander (L359) US Passenger Yes 2007
Freelander (L359) ROW Row 2 No 2007
Freelander (L359) US Row 2 Yes 2007
Range Rover Evoque (L538) All Driver No 2011
Range Rover Evoque (L538) ROW Passenger No 2011
Range Rover Evoque (L538) US Passenger Yes 2011
Range Rover Evoque (L538) ROW Row 2 No 2011
Range Rover Evoque (L538) US Row 2 Yes 2011
Range Rover (L322) All Driver No 2003
Range Rover (L322) ROW Passenger No 2003
Range Rover (L322) US Passenger Yes 2003
Range Rover (L322) ROW Row 2 No 2003
Range Rover (L322) US Row 2 Yes 2003
The automatic locking retractor function is a feature to secure a child seat or heavy load to the seat
Activation Deactivation
Automatic locking retractor is
NOTE: When automatic locking retractor is activated, no further deactivated by allowing the webbing to
webbing can be drawn from the seatbelt retractor, prior to retract until the clicking stops (close to
disengagement of the automatic locking. This can be mistaken as a park position)
jammed seatbelt retractor
Activated by total extraction of the webbing

When activated the automatic locking retractor is identified by a clicking When deactivated the automatic locking
noise during webbing retraction retractor seatbelt changes state, from a
static seatbelt to an automatic
seatbelt
Seatbelt Locking Test
With the vehicle stationary and on level ground take firm hold of the seatbelt webbing (on the tongue side of the
upper seatbelt anchor) and withdraw sharply, the retractor should lock. Preventing further webbing release
(repeat this test 3 times). Any seatbelt retractor which fails to lock must not be used and a new seatbelt
must be installed.
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00 or for
removal and installation/description and operation see Section 501-20
Diagnostic Guide Inertia Reel Seatbelts
PINPOINT TEST A : BACKLOCK

CONDITIONS
A1: BACKLOCK
1 Visually inspect the condition of the suspect seatbelt
2 Draw a maximum of 20mm of the webbing from the seatbelt retractor with moderate force.
Then release the webbing
3 Check for correct operation twice
Does the webbing move freely then retract correctly?
Yes
No
For first row seatbelt GO to Pinpoint Test C. For second and third row seatbelts GO to
Pinpoint Test B.
PINPOINT TEST B : WEBBING - TRAPPED IN SEAT
CONDITIONS
B1: WEBBING - TRAPPED IN SEAT
1 Visually inspect the condition of the suspect seatbelt
2 Lift the seat base or release the seat backrest as required
3 Free the trapped webbing, allow the webbing to retract Note: If the automatic locking
retractor is activated, allow the webbing to retract until the clicking stops
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : SEATBELT RETRACTOR - WEBBING GUIDE LOOSE

CONDITIONS
C1: SEATBELT RETRACTOR - WEBBING GUIDE LOOSE
1 Refer to 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove any trim
panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and seatbelt retractor
2 Check the webbing is not trapped or twisted and is centrally located on the seatbelt retractor
spindle
3 Attempt to withdraw the webbing from the seatbelt retractor NOTE: If the seatbelt
webbing is jammed, the automatic locking retractor could be engaged
4 To release the automatic locking retractor, manually wind the webbing onto the spindle until
the automatic locking retractor deactivates (clicking stops)
5 Fully extract webbing
6 Confirm webbing guide location is correct , Confirm the fixing lugs are correctly located in
the retractor frame
7 Allow webbing to retract
Yes
Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, reinstall any
trim panels, ensure there are no obstructions and the webbing does not catch or rub. No
further action required
No
GO to Pinpoint Test D.
PINPOINT TEST D : TWIST IN WEBBING

CONDITIONS
D1: TWIST IN WEBBING
1 Refer to section 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove
any trim panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point)
2 Twist the webbing back the correct way in the loop
3 Pass the twist through the pillar loop or escutcheon as required
Yes
No
GO to Pinpoint Test E.
PINPOINT TEST E : INTERFERENCE - WEBBING ROUTING

CONDITIONS
E1: INTERFERENCE - WEBBING ROUTING
1 Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove any
trim panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point)
2 Remove obstructions and foreign objects ensure the webbing does not catch or rub
3 Confirm the seatbelt does not contact the wiring harness
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST F : SEATBELT RETRACTOR - INCORRECT INSTALLATION
CONDITIONS
F1: SEATBELT RETRACTOR - INCORRECT INSTALLATION
trim panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and the seatbelt retractor
2 Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, correctly
reinstall the seatbelt retractor ensure that the locating "T bar" and "anti rotation pins" are
correctly located
Yes
No
Replace as required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if
any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
PINPOINT TEST G : D-LOOP NOT ROTATING CORRECTLY

CONDITIONS
G1: D-LOOP NOT ROTATING CORRECTLY
trim panels required to expose the D loop (anchor point) and the seatbelt retractor
2 Ensure there are no obstructions and the webbing does not catch or rub, the D loop (anchor
point) rotates correctly and if installed the confirm the height adjuster operates correctly
Yes
No
module/component
PINPOINT TEST H : MINI BUTTON - MISSING/DAMAGED

CONDITIONS
H1: MINI BUTTON - MISSING/DAMAGED
NOTE: This test applies to the rear centre seatbelt retractor installed in the seat back
1 Refer to the 501-20 removal and installation section of the workshop manual, remove the
seat cushion and the plastic escutcheon at the top of the seat back (where the webbing exits
to expose the lower anchor fixing point of the center seatbelt)
2 Remove the lower anchorage of the seatbelt
3 With the seat back correctly latched, allow up to 20mm webbing to retract, then extract the
webbing
Is the mini-button (webbing travel limit stop) correctly installed to the webbing and in good
condition?
Yes
Feed the mini-button back through the plastic escutcheon if required. Correctly reinstall the
escutcheon to the seat back, extract the webbing then allow to retract, ensure the mini-
button comes to rest outside the escutcheon stop
No
module/component
PINPOINT TEST I : SEATBELT BUCKLE - NOT LATCHING/JAMMED

CONDITIONS
I1: SEATBELT BUCKLE - NOT LATCHING/JAMMED
CAUTION: Do not insert any objects or tools into the buckle head
1 Visually inspect the buckle head for evidence of damage. If damaged replace as required
2 Depress the buckle release (red button) and (Using a torch) carry out visual inspection for
any evidence of debris/material or foreign objects in the buckle head
3 If required remove the pretensioner from the vehicle. Remove the seat. Remove the
pretensioner from the seat frame
4 Do not insert any objects or tools buckle head With the buckle removed invert and
attempt to shake out any debris
5 Attempt to latch the tongue in the buckle
Does the seatbelt buckle operate correctly
Yes
Reinstall any components, no further action required
No
Replace the pretensioner, Refer to section 501 20
Safety Belt System - Front Safety Belt Retractor
Removal
1. Position the front seat fully forwards.

Operation).
3. Remove the B-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).
4. Release the safety belt upper anchor from the

B-pillar.
5. Release the front seat switch pack trim panel

for access.
6. Remove the front safety belt retractor.

Installation
1. Install the front safety belt retractor.
2. Install the front seat switch pack trim panel.

Tighten the screws.
3. Attach the safety belt upper anchor.

4. Install the B-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).
Safety Belt System - Second Row Center Safety Belt Retractor Vehicles
With: 60/40 Split Seat
Removal
1. Release the safety belt retractor cover and
guide
Remove the safety belt guide.
Remove the retractor cover.
2. Remove the safety belt lower anchor.

Raise the seat cushion.
Remove and discard the nut.
3. Remove the safety belt retractor assembly.

Installation
1. Install the safety belt retractor assembly.

Tighten the screws.

Tighten the new nut to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).
Lower the seat cushion.
Safety Belt System - Second Row Center Safety Belt Retractor Vehicles
With: 40/20/40 Split Seat
Removal
1. Remove the center seat.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat - Vehicles
With: 40/20/40 Split Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
2. Release the safety belt retractor cover and

guide
Remove the safety belt guide.
Remove the retractor cover.
3. Remove the safety belt lower anchor.

Fold the LH outer seat assembly
forwards.
4. Remove the safety belt retractor assembly.

Installation
1. Install the safety belt retractor assembly.

Tighten the screws.
Tighten the new nut to 40 Nm (30 lb.ft).
4. Install the center seat.

With: 40/20/40 Split Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
Safety Belt System - Second Row Safety Belt Retractor
Removal
1. Remove the C-pillar upper trim panel.
and Installation).

and Installation).
3. Release the safety belt upper anchor.

4. Remove the second row safety belt retractor.

Installation
1. Install the second row safety belt retractor.
2. Install the safety belt upper anchor.


and Installation).
4. Install the C-pillar upper trim panel.

and Installation).
Safety Belt System - Third Row Safety Belt Retractor
Removal
Installation).
2. Release the safety belt upper anchor.

3. Remove the third row safety belt retractor.

Installation
1. Install the third row safety belt retractor.
2. Install the safety belt upper anchor.

3. Install the D-pillar upper trim panel.

Installation).
Safety Belt System - Front Safety Belt Buckle
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.

Specifications).

Operation).

4. Remove the seat backrest hinge cover.


Release the wiring harness.
Installation
2. Install the seat backrest hinge cover.

Tighten the screws.


Safety Belt System - Rear Safety Belt Buckle Vehicles With: 40/20/40
Split Seat
Removal
Remove the screw.

Release the tension strap.
3. Remove the safety belt buckle.

Release the tension spring.
Installation
1. Install the safety belt buckle.
Attach the tension spring.

Attach the tension strap.
Tighten the screws.

Attach the clips.
Tighten the screw.
Attach the backrest cover side clip.
Safety Belt System - Rear Safety Belt Buckle LH Vehicles With: 60/40
Split Seat
Removal
Release the retaining strap.
Release the tension spring.
Installation
Attach the tension spring.
Attach the retaining strap.
Safety Belt System - Rear Safety Belt Buckle RH Vehicles With: 60/40
Split Seat
Removal
1. Release the RH rear seat.
Remove and discard the 4 Torx bolts.

Remove the screw.

Installation

Tighten the screw.


Safety Belt System - Rear Center Safety Belt Buckle Vehicles With:
60/40 Split Seat
Removal
1. Release the RH rear seat.
Remove and discard the 4 Torx bolts.

Remove the screw.

Installation

Tighten the screw.


Supplemental Restraint System -
Passenger air bag module bracket nuts 10 7
Passenger air bag module nuts 10 7
Rear side air curtain module Torx screws 10 7
C-pillar side impact sensor Torx bolts 8 6
Side air curtain module Torx screws 10 7
B-pillar side impact sensor Torx screws 8 6
Restraints control module (RCM) Torx screws 10 7
Front door side impact sensor Torx bolts 8 6
Side air bag module nuts 10 7
Front impact sensor Torx bolts 8 6
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

1 - supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning indicator
2 - Driver air bag
3 - Clockspring
4 - Passenger air bag deactivation indicator
5 - Passenger air bag
6 - Passenger air bag deactivation switch (all except NAS (north American specification) and
Australia)
7 - restraints control module (RCM)
1 - Door side impact sensor
2 - B pillar side impact sensor
3 - Rear quarter side impact sensor
4 - Third row side air curtain
5 - First and second row side air curtain
6 - Safety belt pretensioner and buckle switch
7 - Seat position sensor
8 - Occupant classification module (NAS only)
9 - Seat cushion pressure sensor (NAS only)
10 - Seat cushion pressure pad (NAS only)
11 - Safety belt tension sensor (NAS only)
12 - Side air bag
13 - Front impact sensors
GENERAL
The SRS provides additional protection for occupants in certain vehicle accident conditions. The SRS consists of:
A driver air bag

A passenger air bag
A side air bag on each front seat
Side air curtains for first and second row seats
Side air curtains for third row seats (where fitted)
A pretensioner for each front safety belt
A buckle sensor for each front safety belt
Front and side impact sensors
A passenger air bag deactivation indicator
A passenger air bag deactivation switch (all except NAS and Australia)
An occupant monitoring system for the front passenger seat
A position sensor for the driver seat
A SRS warning indicator
A clockspring
A RCM.
WARNING: WARNING:All pyrotechnic devices are dangerous. Before performing any procedures on any
pyrotechnic device, read all information contained within the Standard Workshop Practices section of this manual.
For additional information, refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
The SRS features selective activation of the air bags and pretensioners, and two stage driver and passenger air
bags. The RCM monitors internal and external sensors and activates the required safety belt pretensioners and air
bags if the sensors detect an impact or roll-over above preset limits.
DRIVER AIR BAG

1 - Release tool slot and guide channel
2 - Inflator stage 1 connector
3 - Inflator stage 2 connector
4 - Latch spring
5 - Locating pin and spring
6 - Latch hook
The driver air bag forms the center pad of the steering wheel. Four pins and two latches locate and secure the driver
air bag to the steering wheel. The latches consist of wire springs on each side of the driver air bag which engage
with hooks in the steering wheel. The driver air bag is released from the steering wheel by pulling on the wire springs
with a special tool inserted through a slot on each side of the steering wheel hub. Springs on the locating pins then
push the driver air bag away from the steering wheel.
A Lucar connector attaches a ground to the driver air bag.
The driver air bag has a two stage inflator, with separate electrical connectors for each stage. The inflator contains a
non-azide propellant as the gas generator.
Lines moulded into the inner surface of the driver air bag cover provide weak points that split open in a controlled
manner when the driver air bag deploys. The inflated volume of the air bag is 57 liters (2.01 ft 3).
PASSENGER AIR BAG

1 - Reinforcement lid
2 - Chute
4 - In-vehicle crossbeam
5 - Mounting bracket
6 - Lucar connector
7 - Inflator connector
8 - Deployment doors
The passenger air bag is located in the instrument panel, behind the upper glove compartment. The bottom of the
passenger air bag is attached to a mounting bracket on the in-vehicle crossbeam. The top of the passenger air bag is
attached to a chute, which, in turn, is attached to a reinforcement lid in the top of the instrument panel. When the air
bag deploys, the chute guides the air bag to the underside of the reinforcement lid. The reinforcement lid
incorporates two deployment doors that are forced open, splitting the instrument panel covering, when the air bag
deploys.
A Lucar connector attaches a ground to the passenger air bag.
The passenger air bag has a two stage inflator, with separate electrical connectors for each stage. The inflator
contains a non-azide propellant as the gas generator. The inflator uses a high pressure mix of air and hydrogen gas
as the inflation medium. The inflated volume of the air bag is 130 liters (4.59 ft 3).
SIDE AIR BAGS
NOTE: Left side air bag shown, right side air bag is mirror image
1 - Seat backrest frame
2 - Side air bag
3 - Cable
4 - Inflator
A side air bag is attached to the outside of each front seat backrest frame, under the backrest cover.
The side air bags are handed, and each consist of a moulded plastic case which contains the folded air bag and the
inflator. A cable connects the igniter of the inflator to a connector in the main seat harness connector block located
under the front edge of the seat cushion.
When the air bag deploys it forces the front edge of the moulded plastic case apart and splits open the backrest
cover.
The side air bags use compressed argon as the inflation medium. The inflated volume of each side air bag is 12 liters
(0.42 ft 3).
SIDE AIR CURTAINS
The side air curtains are designed to protect the head and upper body in side impact and roll-over situations. The
first and second row side air curtains are a standard fit on all vehicles. The third row side air curtains are fitted on
seven seat vehicles only. The side air curtains use compressed argon as the inflation medium.
First and Second Row Side Air Curtain
NOTE: Right side air curtain shown, left side air curtain is mirror image
1 - Air curtain anchorage points
2 - Non inflatable section of air curtain
3 - Air curtain clip (manufacturing aid)
4 - Front gas guide attachment
5 - Inflatable section of air curtain
6 - B pillar ramp
7 - Securing screws
8 - Active tether device
9 - Rear tether anchor
10 - Rear tether
11 - Cant rail clip
12 - Gas guide pipe
13 - Inflator electrical connector
14 - Inflator
15 - Inflator mounting bracket
The first and second row side air curtains are installed on the cant rails above the front and rear doors, behind the
headliner.
Each side air curtain has an inflator, which is attached to the header rail by a mounting bracket and two screws. The
inflator is connected to the air curtain by a gas guide pipe.
The gas guide pipe and air curtain are secured along the cant rail by a fixing at the front of the gas guide pipe, two
fixings at the B pillar ramp, two clips and two screws, and two fixings at the end of the gas guide pipe and C pillar
ramp.
At the rear of the air curtain, an active tether device is clipped in two positions down the C pillar. At the bottom of
the active tether device is a fixing anchorage.
The front of the air curtain is secured to the A pillar by two fixings.
When the side air curtain deploys, it breaks out of the B pillar ramp and the clips on the cant rail and extends
downwards from behind the headliner. The deploying air curtain is tensioned between the anchorage points on the A
pillar and the active tether device on the C pillar. This retains the air curtain in position against the upper part of the
doors and the B pillar.
Third Row Side Air Curtain
NOTE: Right side air curtain shown, left side air curtain is mirror image
1 - Securing screw
2 - Air curtain
3 - Securing screw
4 - Rear tether
5 - Gas guide pipe
6 - Inflator mounting bracket
7 - Inflator
8 - Rear tether anchor
9 - Tether housing
10 - Rear tether
11 - Front tether anchor
The third row side air curtains are installed on the cant rails above the rear quarter windows, behind the headliner.
Each side air curtain has an inflator, which is attached to the D pillar by a mounting bracket and two screws. The
inflator is connected to the air curtain by a gas guide pipe. The gas guide pipe and air curtain are secured to the
cant rail by two screws. Tethers are attached to the front and rear of the air curtain. The front tether is anchored to
the C pillar. The rear tether is anchored to the D pillar and held in position by a tether housing.
When a third row side air curtain deploys, it extends downwards from behind the headliner. The expanding air
curtain tightens the tethers, which retain the air curtain in position against the rear quarter window.
PRETENSIONERS
1 - Safety belt buckle
2 - Boot
3 - Anchor bolt
4 - Piston and tube
5 - Electrical connectors for inflator and buckle switch
The pretensioners are used to tighten the front safety belts during a collision to ensure the occupants are securely
held in their seats. A pretensioner is integrated into each front safety belt buckle.
Each pretensioner has a tube containing an inflator and a piston. The inflator is connected to the RCM. The piston is
attached to a steel cable, the opposite end of which is attached to the safety belt buckle.
On receipt of a fire signal from the RCM, the inflator generates nitrogen gas that rapidly expands to drive the piston
along the tube, pulling the cable and drawing the safety belt buckle downwards.
SAFETY BELT SENSORS
The buckle of each front safety belt incorporates a Hall effect sensor that provides a safety belt status signal to the
RCM. The RCM broadcasts the status of the two front safety belts on the high speed controller area network (CAN)
bus for use by the instrument cluster.
IMPACT SENSORS
Impact sensors are installed in the front and both sides of the vehicle. The use of multiple impact sensors provides
shorter air bag trigger times, through faster detection of lateral and longitudinal acceleration, and improves detection
accuracy.
There are two front impact sensors attached to brackets on the body front support frame, just above each front
longitudinal.
There are six side impact sensors located in the passenger compartment, as follows:
One attached to each front door.

One attached to the base of each B pillar.
One installed in each rear quarter, above the rear wheelarch.
Each impact sensor incorporates an accelerometer and a microcontroller powered by a feed from the RCM. The power
feed also provides the interface connection through which the impact sensor communicates with the RCM using serial
data messages. Acceleration is evaluated by the microcontroller and transmitted to the RCM, which then makes the
decision on whether or not to activate the air bags and pretensioners.
When the ignition is switched on the RCM supplies power to the impact sensors, which perform a self test. After
satisfactory self tests the impact sensors continually output 'sensor active' messages to the RCM. If a fault is
detected the relevant impact sensor sends a fault message, instead of the sensor active message, to the RCM. The
RCM then stores a related fault code and illuminates the SRS warning indicator.
PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION INDICATOR

1 - Deactivation indicator (NAS and Japan)
2 - Deactivation indicator (all except NAS and Japan)
The passenger air bag deactivation indicator is installed on the center switch pack of the instrument panel. When
appropriate, the indicator illuminates to advise front seat occupants that the passenger air bag is disabled. Operation
of the indicator is controlled by the RCM based on seat occupancy status derived from the occupant classification
system (NAS vehicles) or the passenger air bag deactivation switch (all except NAS and Australian specification
vehicles).
The RCM illuminates the indicator when:
The passenger air bag is deactivated with the passenger air bag deactivation switch (where fitted). OR
Required by passenger seat occupant monitoring (NAS vehicles only).
PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION SWITCH

The passenger air bag deactivation switch provides a method of manually disabling the passenger air bag on all
vehicles except Australian specification and those fitted with the occupant classification system. The switch is
installed in the front passenger end of the instrument panel and is operated by the ignition key.
When the passenger air bag deactivation switch is operated, it changes a ground connection between two pins in the
connectors of the RCM. When the passenger air bag deactivation switch is selected to OFF, the RCM disables the
passenger air bag and, if the front passenger seat is occupied, illuminates the passenger air bag deactivation
indicator.
OCCUPANT SENSING
There are 2 types of occupant sensing:
In all markets except North America, vehicles have an occupant detection system to activate the seat belt
minder
On NAS vehicles, an occupant classification system provides signals to the RCM to allow the correct arming of
the passenger air bag and corresponding indicator.
Occupant Detection System

1 - Seat cushion
2 - Pressure switch
The occupant detection system can only determine if the front passenger seat is occupied or unoccupied. The
occupant detection system consists of a pressure switch installed between the foam padding and the cover of the
front passenger seat cushion.
The pressure switch incorporates a number of load cells connected in series and embedded in a plastic film. Weight
on the pressure sensor increases the resistance of the circuit.
The instrument cluster supplies a reference voltage to the pressure switch and measures the current draw to
determine the occupancy status. From the occupancy status, and the status of the front passenger safety belt
(received from the RCM on the high speed CAN bus), the instrument cluster determines the belt minder status.
Occupant Classification System
WARNING: All Land Rover vehicles, with the exception of Defender, are equipped with passenger air bags.
Passenger air bags offer well documented benefits in crash protection for adult front passenger seat occupants but
their deployment can be harmful to children and infants sat in the front passenger seat of the vehicle. Land Rover
recommends that children and infants are placed in the rear seats of the vehicle.
NOTE: All new Land Rover vehicles sold in North America comply with the FMVSS208 legislation due to the
fitment of the occupant classifications system.

1 - Seat cushion
2 - Pressure pad
3 - Pressure tube
4 - Pressure sensor
5 - Safety belt tension sensor
6 - Occupant classification module
Occupant classification system comprises an ECU, attached to the underside of the seat, a silicon filled bladder with a
pressure sensor fitted between the cushion foam and the seat pan and a seat belt tension sensor. When an occupant
sits on the seat a pressure is created in the bladder and the occupant weight is determined from the pressure
generated. The weight is compared against 4 classification thresholds. These are:
Empty
Occupied inhibit status (6 year old child, 3 year old child, rear facing/forward facing 12 month infant seats and
booster seats)
Occupied allow status (weight greater than 5th precentile female) and the airbag enabled/disabled as
appropriate
Indeterminate state.
Classification Deactivation Indicator SRS Warning Indicator

Seat unoccupied OFF OFF
Occupied inhibit ON OFF
Occupied allow OFF OFF
Indeterminate state OFF ON
OCS module contains accelerometers and algorithms to compensate for the effects of longitudinal, lateral and vertical
forces acting on the vehicle whilst being driven. The belt tension sensor is used to offset loads forced into the seat
by 'cinched' child seats (where a child seat load on the seat is increased by a highly tensioned seat belt) and also
dynamic belt loading (Off-road/aggressive driving styles).
The belt minder system on cars equipped with the occupant classification system uses the RCM to detect seat
occupancy status based on calculations within the RCM, with the instrument cluster then determining whether a seat
belt reminder should be activated based on the status of the seat belt buckle switches and vehicle speed.
SEAT POSITION SENSOR

1 - Seat frame
2 - Mounting plate
5 - Target plate
6 - Seat base
The seat position sensor allows the RCM to detect when the driver seat is forward of a given point on the seat track.
The seat position sensor consists of a Hall effect sensor attached to the driver seat frame and a target plate on the
seat base. While the ignition is on, the RCM supplies the sensor with a power supply of 12V nominal, and monitors
the return voltage. When the seat frame moves forwards, the sensor moves over the target plate, which changes the
reluctance of the sensor. The change of voltage is detected by the RCM and used as a switching point. The switching
point is when the center of the sensor is 3 ± 4 mm from the leading edge of the target plate.
When the driver seat is forward of the switching point, the RCM increases the time delay between firing the two
stages of the inflator in the driver air bag. When the driver seat is rearward of the switching point, the RCM uses the
normal time delay between firing the two stages.
SRS WARNING INDICATOR

The SRS warning indicator consists of a red light emitting diode (LED) behind a SRS graphic in the tachometer of the
instrument cluster.
Operation of the SRS warning indicator is controlled by a high speed CAN bus message from the RCM to the
instrument cluster. The RCM illuminates the SRS warning indicator if a fault is detected, and for approximately 6
seconds during the bulb check at the beginning of each ignition cycle.
CLOCKSPRING

1 - Electrical connector for steering wheel switch packs and horn
2 - Inner rotor
3 - Outer housing securing lug
4 - Driver air bag link leads
5 - Viewing window
6 - Drive peg
7 - Stopper
8 - Electrical connector for steering column harness
9 - Outer cover
The clockspring is installed on the steering column to provide the electrical interface between the fixed wiring harness
of the steering column and the components that rotate with the steering wheel, i.e. the driver air bag, the horn and
the steering wheel switch packs.
The clockspring consists of a plastic cassette which incorporates an outer cover fixed to the steering column and an
inner rotor which turns with the steering wheel. Four securing lugs attach the cover to the multifunction switch on
the steering column. The rotor is keyed to the steering wheel by a drive peg. A lug on the underside of the rotor
operates the self-cancelling feature of the turn signal indicator switch. A ribbon lead, threaded on rollers in the rotor,
links two connectors on the cover to two connectors on the rotor. Link leads for the driver air bag are installed in
one of the connectors on the rotor.
To prevent damage to the ribbon lead, both the steering and the clockspring must be centralized when removing and
installing the clockspring or the steering wheel. The clockspring is centralized when the drive peg is at six o'clock and
50 - 100% of a yellow wheel is visible in the viewing window.
Replacement clocksprings are fitted with a stopper, which locks the cover to the rotor, in the central position. The
stopper must be broken off when the replacement clockspring is installed.
RCM
The RCM is installed on the top of the transmission tunnel, in line with the B pillars, and controls operation of the
SRS. The main functions of the RCM include:
Crash detection and recording.

Air bag and pretensioner firing.
Self test and system monitoring, with status indication via the SRS warning lamp and non volatile storage of
fault information.
A safing sensor in the RCM provides confirmation of an impact to verify if air bag and pretensioner activation is
necessary. A roll-over sensor monitors the lateral attitude of the vehicle. Various firing strategies are employed by
the RCM to ensure that during an accident only the appropriate air bags and pretensioners are fired. The firing
strategy used also depends on the inputs from the safety belt switches and the occupant monitoring system.
An energy reserve in the RCM ensures there is always a minimum of 150 milliseconds of stored energy available if
the power supply from the ignition switch is disrupted during a crash. The stored energy is sufficient to produce firing
signals for the driver air bag, the passenger air bag and the safety belt pretensioners.
When the ignition is switched on the RCM performs a self test and then performs cyclical monitoring of the system. If
a fault is detected the RCM stores a related fault code and illuminates the SRS warning indicator. The faults can be
retrieved by the Land Rover approved diagnostic system on a dedicated link between the RCM and the diagnostic
socket. If a fault that could cause a false fire signal is detected, the RCM disables the respective firing circuit, and
keeps it disabled during a crash event.
SRS OPERATION
General
In a collision, the sudden deceleration or acceleration is measured by the safing sensor in the RCM and by the impact
sensors. The RCM evaluates the readings to determine the impact point on the vehicle and whether the
deceleration/acceleration readings exceed the limits for firing any of the air bags or pretensioners. During a collision,
the RCM only fires the air bags and pretensioners if the safing sensor confirms that the data from the remote
sensor(s) indicates an impact limit has been exceeded. The RCM also monitors the vehicle for a roll-over accident
using the internal roll-over sensor and high speed CAN bus messages from the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module
and the steering angle sensor.
The RCM incorporates the following impact thresholds to cater for different accident scenarios:
Front impact, pretensioners.

Front impact, driver and passenger air bags stage 1, belt unfastened.
Front impact, driver and passenger air bags stage 2, belt unfastened.
Front impact, driver and passenger air bags stage 1, belt fastened.
Front impact, driver and passenger air bags stage 2, belt fastened.
Rear impact.
LH side impact.
RH side impact.
Roll-over.
The front impact thresholds increase in severity from pretensioners, through to driver and passenger air bag stage 2,
belt fastened.
Firing Strategies
The seat belt pretensioners are fired when either the pretensioner impact limit or the roll-over limit is exceeded. The
RCM only fires the pretensioners if the related safety belt is fastened. For the front passenger pretensioner to fire, the
seat must also be occupied by a large person, i.e. someone over a given weight (NAS only).
The driver and passenger air bags are only fired in a frontal impact that exceeds the stage 1 threshold. Both stages
of the inflator in the driver and passenger air bags are fired. At impacts between the stage 1 and 2 thresholds, the
delay between the firing of the two stages varies with the severity of the impact; the more severe the impact the
shorter the delay. At stage 2 impact thresholds and above, the two stages of the inflator are fired almost
simultaneously. The passenger air bag is disabled unless the front passenger seat is occupied by a large person (NAS
only), or the passenger air bag deactivation switch is on (all except NAS). The time delay between firing the two
stages of the inflator in the driver air bag is increased if the driver seat is forward of the seat position sensor
switching point.
If there is a fault with a safety belt buckle sensor, the RCM assumes the related safety belt is fastened for the
pretensioner firing strategy and unfastened for the driver and passenger air bag firing strategies. If there is a fault
with the occupant detection system, or if there is a fault with the passenger air bag deactivation switch, the RCM
increase the time delay between firing the two stages of the inflator in the passenger air bag.
If a side impact limit is exceeded, the RCM fires the side air bag and the side air curtain(s) on that side of the
vehicle. If the side impact limit on the front passenger side of the vehicle is exceeded, the RCM also evaluates the
input from the occupant classification system, and fires the side air bag only if the front passenger seat is occupied
by a large person (NAS only).
The side air curtain(s) on both sides of the vehicle are fired if the roll-over limit is exceeded.
If multiple impacts occur during a crash event, after responding to the primary impact the RCM will output the
appropriate fire signals in response to any further impacts if unfired units are available.
Crash Signal
When the RCM outputs any of the fire signals, it also outputs a hard wired crash signal to the Engine Control Module
(ECM) and changes the high speed CAN bus output message from 'no crash' to 'crash condition'. The high speed CAN
bus message is used by the central junction box (CJB) and the FFBH (fuel fired booster heater).
On receipt of the crash signals:
The engine control module (ECM) disables the fuel pump.

Operation of the FFBH is disabled.
The CJB enters the crash mode and:
- Activates all of the unlock signals of the vehicle locking system, even if the vehicle is already unlocked.
After 3 seconds, the CJB activates the unlock signals again, in case a lock button is pressed during the
crash, by flailing limbs for example.
- Ignores all locking and superlocking inputs until the crash mode is cancelled, when it returns the
locking system to normal operation.
- Activates all of the courtesy lamps, except for the approach lamps. The activated courtesy lamps
remain on until they are manually switched off at the lamp unit, or the CJB crash mode is cancelled,
when they return to normal operation.
- Activates the hazard warning lamps. The hazard warning lamps remain on until cancelled by turning
the ignition switch from position II to position I or 0, or until the crash mode is cancelled.
The crash mode is cancelled by cycling the ignition switch.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - SHEET 1 OF 2 (ALL EXCEPT NAS)
NOTE: A = Hardwired connections; D = High speed CAN bus

1 - Fusible link 11E, battery junction box (BJB)
2 - Battery
3 - Left front impact sensor
4 - Right front impact sensor
5 - Left side impact sensor
6 - Right side impact sensor
7 - Passenger air bag deactivation switch
8 - Left safety belt buckle sensor
10 - Right safety belt buckle sensor
11 - Occupant detection pressure sensor
13 - RCM
14 - Fuse 9P, CJB
16 - Fuse 68P, CJB
CONTROL DIAGRAM - SHEET 1 OF 2 (NAS ONLY)
NOTE: A = Hardwired connections; D = High speed CAN bus

1 - Fusible link 11E, BJB
2 - Battery
3 - Left front impact sensor
4 - Right front impact sensor
5 - Left side impact sensor
6 - Right side impact sensor
7 - Left safety belt buckle switch
8 - Right safety belt buckle switch
10 - Safety belt tension sensor
11 - Occupant classification module
12 - Pressure pad and sensor
14 - RCM
15 - Fuse 9P, CJB
17 - Fuse 68P, CJB
CONTROL DIAGRAM - SHEET 2 OF 2 (ALL MARKETS)
NOTE: A = Hardwired connections

2 - Driver air bag
3 - Clockspring
4 - ECM
5 - Diagnostic socket
6 - Left pretensioner
7 - Left side air bag
8 - Left third row side air curtain
9 - Left first and second row side air curtain
10 - Right third row side air curtain
11 - Right first and second row side air curtain
12 - RCM
13 - Right side air bag
14 - Right pretensioner
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)
For a detailed description of the air bag supplemental restraint system and operation, refer to the relevant
Description and Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Description and Operation).
Safety Information
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment the back-up power supply must be depleted before beginning any work on
the SRS system or its components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Do not use a multimeter to probe an SRS actuator. It is possible for the power from the multimeter battery
to trigger the activation of the actuator. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTES:
It is advisable not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on
the SRS system or components.
Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to Air Bag module circuits are not
acceptable. Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a harness.
Power supply depletion
Before beginning any work on the SRS system or related components:
1. Remove the ignition key.
2. Disconnect the battery leads, ground first.
3. Wait 2 minutes for the power circuit to discharge.
There are comprehensive instructions on the correct procedures for SRS system repairs in the workshop manual.
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual.

Confirm the function of the warning lamp (if the warning lamp is inoperative, system faults will be
signaled by an audible chime)

Visual Inspection
Check for the installation of non-standard accessories Fuses
which may affect or obstruct the function of the system Wiring harness
Check the condition of trim, etc at the SRS system Confirm all electrical connector(s) are
components engaged correctly on the air bag circuits
Sensor(s) Confirm the restraints control module
Pretensioner(s) (RCM) is correctly installed
Air bag module(s) Warning lamp bulb(s)
Occupant detection/classification sensors Impact sensor(s)
Seat position sensor Buckle sensor(s)
Pretensioner(s)
Air bag module(s)
Air bag deactivation switch
Air bag deactivation warning lamp
Occupant detection/classification
sensors
Seat position sensor
Clockspring
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant
DTC Index.
Seatbelt Buckle Pre Tensioner Diagnostics
This procedure should be used to aid diagnosis of the following supplementary restraints system (SRS) - buckle
pre tensioner (PBP) fault codes
SRS Light Status DTC

On B1212-11
On B1212-12
On B1212-1A
On B1212-1B
On B1213-11
On B1213-12
On B1213-1A
On B1213-1B
PINPOINT TEST A : BUCKLE PRE TENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC

CONDITIONS
A1: DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
WARNINGS:
Prior to any work on the SRS system the vehicle battery must be disconnected system the vehicle battery
must be disconnected
Please wait for 120 seconds to allow the air bag deployment energy reserve to dissipate
1 Check location of harness fly-lead ensuring there is no risk snagging and sufficient strain
relief during full seat travel
2 Disconnect under-seat buckle pre tensioner connectors
3 Check connector for water ingress or signs of corrosion (white/green residue)
4 Check for debris in female connector and remove as required
5 Check for debris in male harness end connector and remove
6 Check that male connector pins are secure and in good condition
7 Check that all connector terminals are clean secure and in good condition
8 Reconnect the connector
An audible click should be heard confirming security
9 Check actuator harness fly-lead is connected and correctly routed

10 Reconnect the vehicle battery
11 Clear the DTC, cycle the ignition state off / on wait 30 seconds and re-test
12 To confirm repair. Whilst sitting in seat, retest as follows:
Seat fully up - move fully backwards and forwards
Seat fully down - move fully backwards and forwards
Is the warning lamp illuminated?

Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST B : BUCKLE PRE TENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC

B1: DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
WARNINGS:
1 Check routing and condition of harness along buckle pre tensioner tube
Pre 10 model year : x2 cable tie & tape
Post 10 model year : Cradle
2 Ensure harness is in good condition with no damage

3 Ensure harness is securely routed

Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : BUCKLE PRE TENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC

C1: DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
WARNINGS:
1 Remove seat and check routing and condition of under-seat harness
2 Ensure harness is in good condition with no damage
4 Ensure all fir tree clips and cable ties are correctly installed
5 Reinstall seat

Yes
Install new component
No
DTC Index
00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (100-00 General
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Occupant Classification System (OCS) (100-00 General Information,
Supplemental Restraint System - Driver Air Bag Module
Special Tool(s)
Airbag module remover
501-106
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.
NOTE: If the SRS component is to be replaced, the bar code of the new unit must be recorded.

Specifications).

Operation).
3. Remove the driver air bag module.

Using the special tool, release the clip.
other side.
Disconnect the ground cable.
Release the clips and disconnect the 2
Installation
1. WARNING: The SRS electrical connectors are unique.
DO NOT force, or attempt to connect electrical connectors
to the wrong sockets.
CAUTION: Make sure the cables/harnesses are not

twisted before connecting them to the airbag module. Once
connected, do not rotate the air bag module as this will
cause the wires to twist, which can lead to harness damage
and SRS faults.
Attach the driver air bag module.

Connect the ground cable.
2. WARNING: Driver air bag module

installation can be confirmed by hearing 2
audible clicks, 1 for each spring. The module
edges should also be flush with the steering
wheel.
Install the driver air bag module.

Install top edge of module, then hinge
upwards and make sure wires are
connected to clips.
Make sure the wires are not trapped
behind the module.
Hold wires in place while hinging module
closed.
Align the locating pins and springs.
Supplemental Restraint System - Passenger Air Bag Module
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.

Specifications).

Operation).

and Installation).
4. Remove the passenger air bag module.

Remove the 4 nuts.

Remove the passenger air bag module bracket.

Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the passenger air bag module bracket.
2. Install the passenger air bag module.

and Installation).
Supplemental Restraint System - Rear Side Air Curtain Module
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.

Specifications).

Operation).

4. Remove the side air curtain module.

Installation
1. Install the side air curtain module.
Secure the retaining strap.

Specifications).
Supplemental Restraint System - Front Impact Severity Sensor
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.

Operation).

3. Remove the front impact sensor.

Installation
1. Install the front impact sensor.

Supplemental Restraint System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation
(PAD) Switch
Removal
Operation).

Trim Panel (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal
and Installation).
3. Remove the PAD switch.

Installation
1. Install the PAD switch.

Trim Panel (412-01 Air Distribution and Filtering, Removal
and Installation).
Supplemental Restraint System - Clockspring
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the components.
Correct clockspring alignment can be found by viewing a yellow marker through the window situated on the
clockspring face. If the marker is not visible, carefully turn the clockspring. If the turning force increases before
the marker is visible, reverse the direction to avoid component damage.
NOTES:
test piece
If the SRS component is to be replaced, the bar code of the new unit must be recorded.

Operation).
3. Remove the steering wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Steering Wheel (211-
04, Removal and Installation).


lever.
6. CAUTION: Do not dismantle the
clockspring, it has no servicable parts and
must be replaced as a complete assembly.
Remove the clockspring.

Installation
1. CAUTION: Correct clockspring alignment can be found

by viewing a yellow marker through the window situated on
the clockspring face. If the marker is not visible, carefully
turn the clockspring. If the turning force increases before
the marker is visible, reverse the direction to avoid
component damage.

Supplemental Restraint System - B-Pillar Side Impact Sensor
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.

Operation).
2. Remove the scuff plate trim panel.

Installation).
3. Remove the side impact sensor.

Installation
1. Install the side impact sensor.
2. Install the scuff plate trim panel.

Installation).
Supplemental Restraint System - C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.

Operation).

and Installation).
3. Remove the side impact sensor.

Installation
1. Install the side impact sensor.

and Installation).
Supplemental Restraint System - Front Door Side Impact Sensor
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.

Operation).

3. Remove the front door side impact sensor.

Installation
1. Install the front door side impact sensor.

Supplemental Restraint System - Side Air Bag Module
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.

Operation).

3. Remove the front seat backrest pad.

Remove the front seat head restraint
retaining clips.
4. NOTE: If the SRS component is to be

replaced, the bar code of the new unit must be
recorded.
Remove the side air bag module.

Release the side air bag module
harness.
Remove the 2 nuts.
Installation
1. Install the side air bag module.
2. Install the front seat backrest pad.

Install the front seat head restraint retaining clips.

Supplemental Restraint System - Side Air Curtain Module
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.

Operation).

3. Release the roof opening panel drain tube from the securing
clips.
4. Release the tire deflation wiring harness from securing clips.

Installation
1. Install the side air curtain module.
Tighten the screws.
2. Secure the tire deflation wiring harness into the clips.
3. Secure the roof opening panel drain tube into the clips.

Supplemental Restraint System - Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal
WARNINGS:
thoroughly.
NOTES:
If the restraints control module (RCM) is to be replaced then T4 must be connected and the correct
procedures adhered to, prior to battery disconnection.
If the SRS component is to be replaced, the bar code of the new unit must be recorded.

Specifications).

Operation).

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12,
4. CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness is

protected when cutting the carpet.
Remove the restraints control module (RCM).

Cut the carpet for access.
Installation
1. Install the RCM.
Position the carpet.

For additional information, refer to: Floor Console (501-12,
3. Initiate a new RCM using T4.

Supplemental Restraint System - Occupant Classification Sensor
Removal
NOTE: The occupant classification sensor is part of the passenger seat cushion. The sensor is only fitted to
NAS models.

Specifications).

Installation

Specifications).
3. Using T4, configure a new occupant classification sensor.

Body Repairs - General Information - Body Repairs
General Information
Introduction
The body plays a significant role in the increasing trend of ever more rapidly changing model variants. The different
customer groups are strongly influenced by the design and shape of the body. At the same time the stability of the
body plays the most important part in ensuring passenger and driver safety. Lightweight construction, alternative
materials, composite materials, plastics and appropriate joining processes are all design features that characterise
modern Land Rover vehicle bodies.
In terms of manufacturing technology, modern safety cell bodies can be produced almost without any problems.
Land Rover guarantee high quality standards by ensuring that mechanical strength properties are tried and tested in
numerous computer simulations, crash tests, by testing materials and by employing sophisticated manufacturing
technologies. In the event of repairs it is vital that the production quality standards are upheld. This requires a well-
equipped workshop, and places particular emphasis on the qualifications of the workshop technicians. Up-to-date
knowledge of current manufacturing technologies and continuous training on new repair methods and techniques are
vital for high-quality body repairs. The model-specific repair manuals and the general repair techniques provide
valuable support when undertaking body repairs.
Always follow the repair instructions published in this manual. Failure to observe this instruction can result in serious
impairment of vehicle safety. All specified safety requirements must be met after the work has been carried out.
Vehicle design
Vehicle design
1 - Body
2 - Integral body Frame
High Strength Steels
Land Rover vehicles are constructed from a number of different steels, partly to obtain an optimised body (collision,
safety, rigidity, fuel economy,etc).
Steels are divided into several groups according to their tensile and yield strength, that is to say the force necessary
to bring about plastic deformation of the material.
Yield Summary
Yield is the strength at which the metal changes from elastic to plastic in behaviour, the point of no return.
Tensile Summary
Tensile strength is the breaking strength of a material when subjected to a tensile (stretching) force, the point of no
return.
Abbreviation Steel type Yield Point

SS Soft Steel Maximum Yield point of 220 MPa
DP Dual Phase Steel Steel With a Yield Point up tp 400 MPa
HS High Strength Steel Steel With a Yield Point 220 - 450 MPa
EHS Extra High Strength Steel Steel With a Yield Point 450 - 800 MPa
UHS Ultra High Strength Steel Steel With a Yield Point up to 1400 MPa
Ultra High Strength
The addition of ultra high strength steel in the A Pillar, B-Pillar and cantrail gives the body greater strength in a front
or side impact.
No attempt should be made to straighten ultra high strength steel, due to its brittleness.
Ultra High Strength steel in body structure
Aluminium
Aluminium 6000 series is used in the hood, tailgate and liftgate. It is made from magnesium/copper aluminium alloy
and is heat treated during manufacturing/paint bake process resulting in a panel with increased strength and dent
resistance.
When repairing aluminium you must use tools that have only been used on aluminium and never on steel panels,
this is to prevent cross-contamination
Aluminium in body structure

Magnesium
Magnesium AM60B is used to make the hood latch panel. It has good ductility and energy absorbing properties. It is
also used on the instrument panel mounting beam.
No attempt should be made to weld or straighten the hood latch panel and it should be replaced in the event of an
accident. If the corrosive coating is damaged it must be repaired using 'Land Rover Low Temperature Anti-Corrosion
Coating', service part no VEP 501 840 PMA
Magnesium in body structure
Accident damage and diagnosis
General notes
Exact diagnosis of the extent of damage enables proper repair planning.

All body repairs must be carried out in accordance with the guidelines in this Body Repair Manual.
The stability and strength properties of the body must be taken into account during body repairs. The body
has exactly defined deformation patterns that must not be affected by any repair work.
For instance, the crumple zones absorb the bulk of the impact energy. If any unprofessional repair techniques
or methods are used in these areas then this can pose a fundamental threat to vehicle safety.
Hidden damage
As well as looking at external indicators like flaked off paint, it is vital to check for hidden body damage or
deformation that is not visible from the outside. Large attached parts like bumpers and inner fenders often
need to be removed to allow accurate assessment of damage to underlying body parts.
Gap dimensions
For additional information, refer to: Body and Frame (501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and
Tolerance Checks, Description and Operation).
Gap dimensions offer another alternative for diagnosis by visual inspection. If any changes or misaligned edges are
apparent, then this usually indicates that the dimensions of the affected part are incorrect.
Changes in gap dimension

1 - Gap too wide
2 - Gap too small
Planning a repair
The following decisions have to be made before the repairs are started:
Does the vehicle need to be put on a straightening jig, or can it be straightened by other means?
Does the body need to be measured?
Do aggregates like engine or axles need to be removed?
NOTE: It is preferable to repair body parts rather than to renew them, as this keeps the complete body-
shell intact.
Which body parts need to be renewed?

Which body parts can be repaired?
Obtaining spare parts
The availability of spare parts often determines how easily the body repairs can be carried out. The following
procedure is recommended:
Obtain all the data for the vehicle, including type, vehicle identification number, trim code, engine
identification letters, initial registration etc.
Establish all of the metal parts that need to be renewed.
Establish all of the attached parts that need to be renewed, including small parts like rivets, clips etc.
Straightening repairs
Straightening repairs are often required to restore the body to its original shape after an accident. This can be done
with:
Alignment jigs
Universal straightening and measuring jigs
The following points must be followed to ensure that the repairs are carried out professionally and that all the
dimensions are correct after the repairs have been carried out.
Structure:
- The repair sequence depends on the individual repair plan (taking any necessary disassembly work into
account).
- Clean the attachment areas.
- Anchor the vehicle free of stress on the relevant system.
- Support the aggregates to take strain off the body.
- Decide on at least three measuring/mounting points that are undamaged and as far apart as possible
(for basic adjustment).
- Check the dimensions of the measuring/mounting points.
Straightening:
-
NOTE: Check dimensions and gaps continuously during straightening.
A body is always straightened in the opposite direction to that of the impact. Always carry out
straightening repairs with the complete body shell assembled (do not cut out any parts beforehand).
Carry out the straightening work in several stages. This prevents the risk of over stretching or of
welded joints tearing out. During the individual straightening steps, relieve tension by striking with an
aluminium hammer while the part is subjected to a tensile load (in the area of pre-determined folding
points, dents, welded joins etc.).
CAUTION: Ultra High Strength steel in the A-Pillar, B-Pillar and cantrail cannot be straightened.
Panel Beating
Fundamentals of panel beating
Before carrying out any sectional replacements or complete replacements of body panels, always check
carefully whether the damaged panel(s) can be rectified by panel beating.
Panel beating is usually the easiest and most economical method of repairing a damaged panel.
Examples of applications of different panel beating techniques:
Aluminium hammer and mallet

- Advantage: Low risk of overstretching the panel.
- Used for repairs of small dents on panels that are accessible from both sides.
- These two panel beating tools are usually used for "finishing repairs".
Fine straightening with an aluminium hammer and a universal dolly
Sliding hammer
- If the damaged panel is only accessible from the outside, use a sliding hammer to pull it back into
shape. The discs or studs needed to mount the sliding hammer are welded onto the bare surface.
Dents in the panel can be flattened out using controlled application of the sliding hammer.
Cutting out body parts
Depending on how the parts are joined/connected, different tools are suitable for cutting/separating body parts.
NOTES:
All other parts like interior equipment, window glass etc. must be protected against flying sparks.
Ensure that the milling depth is set correctly to prevent the remaining flange from being weakened.
Spot-weld mill
Spot-weld mill
Rod sander
-
NOTE: Wear protective clothing. Protect any vulnerable body or glass areas against flying sparks.
Remove explosive materials from the vicinity.
Any spot welds that are inaccessible for the spot-weld mill (diameter > 8 mm) should be ground out
using a rod sander. The same applies to MIG spot welds or seams.
Rod sander
-
NOTE: Underlying metal parts, wiring harnesses, hoses etc. must not be damaged - remove them
beforehand if necessary.
Body saws are particularly versatile and are therefore very suitable for making severance cuts on body
parts.
Short stroke saw
Reciprocating saw
- In addition to the short stroke saw, the reciprocating saw can be used. With this, it is possible to
make narrow and straight cuts to an exact depth.
Reciprocating saw
Carrying out the repairs
Complete replacement
- In a complete replacement the entire damaged old part is removed at its original joins/connections,
and a complete new part is then installed. The following illustration shows a replacement new back
panel.
Replacement of a new back panel

Sectional replacement
- In many cases it makes technical and economical sense to carry out a sectional replacement. The two
main considerations are firstly, maintaining the original overall body shell structure and secondly,
keeping the repair costs to a minimum.
The main method for sectional replacement:
- Butt joints
- New part and old part are joined with a continuous MIG weld seam.
- Butt joints are most commonly used for sectional replacements on members and pillars, or on short
severance cuts.
Butt joint
NOTE: The severance cut should always be kept as short as possible on sectional replacement. Only cut at the
severance lines shown in the repair chapters.
Do not make any cuts near reinforcements or pre-determined folding lines.
Prepare parts remaining on the vehicle / new parts.

- Reshape the adjoining surface of any dented body parts that are to remain on the vehicle using a
hammer and a counterhold (ensure that the old part matches the shape of the new part). Grind off left
over spot welds or seams with a suitable tool.
- Cut the new parts to shape.
- If necessary punch or drill holes for mig plug welding.
-
NOTE: Do not use a welding torch to remove paint residue (the heat could cause the metal to
deform).
Prepare all joining flanges to a bright metal finish on both sides. Do not use an angle grinder for this
purpose (this could weaken the metal and damage the zinc layer). Suitable tools: rotating wire brush,
belt sander or plastic disc.
- Apply welding primer liberally to all weld flanges.
- The primer must be well stirred os shaken before use.
NOTE: When using aerosols, take care not to contaminate adjacent parts with spray mist.
fitting the new part.
It must be ensured that the new part fits exactly to the specified dimensions, to help this it is recommended
to use such equipment as:
- Alignment jig
- Universal measuring system
- Jig system
- Ruler or tape measure
Any attached body parts that require accurate alignment and fitting must be incorporated in this step; for
instance bumpers, seals, headlamps, rear lamps and lock assembly components. If this is not done carefully it
may result in water leaks, wind noises and substantial follow-on work.
Ensure that edges line up with adjacent parts and check that gaps are consistent (compare left and right-hand
sides). Make sure that the shape of the vehicle is retained.
Secure the new part
NOTE: The need for subsequent follow-on work can be significantly reduced if aligning and tack-welding
are carried out with due care.
Depending on accessibility the following methods for securing are available:

- Grip pliers (set of)
- Screw clamp (set of)
- Self-tapping screws
- Tack welds
Using a suitable tool ensure that the edges of sectional replacements of profiled parts line up. The edge is
then tack welded to ensure that it lines up.
Aligning and tack weld

1 - Tack welds
2 - Using a suitable tool to align
Longer joins are usually tack welded to prevent the panel from warping. It is important to carry out the tack
welds in the correct sequence (see diagram).
Weld in the new part following the instructions in the repair manual.
Correct tack welding sequence
Safety measures
The electronic control modules (ECM) fitted to vehicles make it advisable to follow suitable precautions prior
to carrying out welding repair operations. Harsh conditions of heat and vibration may be generated during
these operations which could cause damage to the modules. In particular, it is essential to follow the
appropriate precautions when disconnecting or removing the airbag RCM.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Specifications).
Do not allow electronic modules or lines to come into contact with the ground connection or the welding
electrode.
Connect the ground connection of the electrical welder directly to the part that is to be welded. Ensure that
there are no electrically insulating parts between the ground connection and the welding point.
Resistance spot welding
Where resistance spot welds have been used in production, they must be reproduced with new spot welds in
replacement where possible. All such reproduction spot welds should be spaced 25 to 30mm apart.
Setting up the equipment and co-ordinating the welding parameters
Equipment:
- Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions for the equipment settings.
- Select the correct electrode arms (as short as possible).
- Align the electrode arms and tips exactly.
- Electrode tips should be convex (rough shaping with a file, fine shaping with a sanding block).
Body:
- Ensure that the flanges to be joined lie perfectly flat to one another.
- Prepare a bare metal joint surface (inside and outside).
Notes on technique/method:
- Carry out a test weld on a sample piece of the material coated in welding paste.
- If any metal parts are located between the electrode arms then there will be a loss of induction and
therefore power (adjust current setting).
- The power needs to be adjusted for high and ultra high-strength steel.
- Repeated welding on old welding points often leads to poor quality welds.
- Keep the electrode tips as near as possible to an angle of 90° to the contact surface.
- The electrodes work best if their shape is convex. Clean the contact surface of the electrodes regularly.
Resistance spot welding panels where the total thickness is 3 mm or more
For all repairs to modern Land Rover vehicles, spot-welding equipment should be suitable for reliable welding of zinc-
plated, high-strength and high-tensile steels in three or more layers, up to 5 mm total thickness. If these
requirements are not fulfilled, plug welding must be used for safety reasons. The electrical specifications (current,
resistance, heat) of the spot-welding equipment have different validity, depending upon the type of equipment.
Therefore, it is essential that the equipment manufacturer's instructions are observed with regard to the actual
welding performance.
MIG / MAG welding
Setting up the equipment and co-ordinating the welding parameters
Any joins that are MIG/MAG welded in production must also be MIG/MAG welded during repairs. Also during
repairs, some resistance spot welds need to be replaced by plug welds.
If access is difficult, or if a suitably powerful spot welder (see above) for total panel thicknesses of 3 mm or
more is not available, resistance spot welding must be partially replaced by plug welding during repairs. In
this case, the increased time needed and the correspondingly more demanding corrosion protection
requirements, must be taken into account.
Welding repairs can only be carried out properly if the equipment is set up correctly and all the welding
parameters are co-ordinated.
Equipment:
- Set up the equipment as directed by the manufacturer.
- The hoses must be untwisted.
- The core must be free of abraded rod particles.
- The gas and current nozzles must be free of slag and scale residue.
- Pay attention to the quality of the welding wire and the throughput of gas.
Body:
- Ensure that the joint surface is correct.
- Prepare a bare metal joint surface.
- Maintain the correct gaps (formation of roots).
Notes on technique/method:
-
NOTES:
The increased application of heat during MIG welding destroys the welding primer/zinc layer over a
much larger area than during resistance spot welding, as a result of which much more care needs to
be taken when applying anti-corrosion protection afterwards.
A test weld should always be carried out to ensure that the welded joint is not just a surface
connection.
Attach the ground cable right next to the welding point (ensure that good contact is made).
- During plug welding start welding on the lower panel to ensure adequate penetration.
Plug welding

1 - Welding direction: circular pattern working from the inside outwards
2 - Welding starting point: centre of hole on lower panel
Bonded glazing
- The windscreen, side and rear windows are bonded directly onto the window frames on the body and
liftgate.
- The windows are bonded primarily for reasons of adhesive strength. Bonded glazing provides additional
torsional stiffness to the body.
Adhesive bonding of bonded windows

1 - Rubber strip
2 - Window frame
3 - Adhesive
4 - Window glass
Removing and installing bonded windows
Safety measures
The following safety measures must always be followed to prevent personal injury:
- Wear protective gloves.
- Wear protective goggles.
Preparations
Before cutting out a bonded window, undo and remove any attached parts in the cutting area that are at risk,
e.g. trim panels and decorative strips, as well as all electrical connections.
Mask any painted areas that are adjacent to the window.
Cut off any surplus adhesive, as this makes it easier to cut out the window.
Secure vertical windows against dropping out.
Cutting out the window
Cut into the adhesive bead at easily accessible points using the cutting tool.
Carefully guide the cutting tool around the window, cutting through the adhesive bead.
Avoid touching the window frame and the body flange.
Use cup suction tools to lift the cut-out window out of the window aperture.
General preparations for bonding
Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Cut back the remaining adhesive bead on the metal flange to a residual height of about 1mm. Do not touch or
clean the cut surface afterwards.
Carefully rectify any paint damage (apply primer and top coat).
Renew the window stops as necessary.
Bonding the window glass
Apply an even bead of adhesive to the window or to the body flange.

Insert the window glass into the window aperture and centre it (2 technicians required).
Check the gaps.
NOTE: Open the windows and doors while the window is left to dry and do not move the vehicle
(slamming doors creates excess pressure which could cause the window to become loose).
Use adhesive tape to prevent the window from falling out or slipping.
Finishing operations
Reconnect all electrical connections and check that the components operate correctly.
Install the attached parts and check that the fit is accurate and secure.
- Carry out a visual inspection to ensure that the gaps and joints are even.
Thoroughly clean the window glass.
Protective equipment and safety at work
Various safety measures and legal requirements must be met when carrying out repairs. All regulations
relating to health and safety at work must be followed.
Welding safety precautions
The following safety precautions must be observed to prevent the risk of personal injury:
- Safety hood (face protection)
- Welding shield
- Safety gloves
- Safety shoes
- Extraction unit for welding smoke
Welding should always be carried out in well ventilated areas. A fire extinguisher must also always be within
reach.
General body repair safety measures
Extraction unit
Sealing compound, underbody protection etc. must not be burned off with a naked flame. This would produce
toxic gases. If for instance PVC is burned, then gases containing hydrochloric acid are produced. For this
reason a suitable extraction unit should always be used when performing grinding, welding or soldering work.
Always ensure good ventilation when working with materials that contain solvents, wear breathing equipment
and use an extraction unit.
Ear defenders should always be worn when cutting, grinding or straightening metal, as the noise levels can
reach or even exceed 85 - 90 dB(A).
When removing components from a vehicle mounted on a lifting ramp, watch out for a shift in its centre-of-
gravity. When first placing the vehicle on the ramp, take into account that it may need to be secured against
tipping over.
Chains and chain clamps must be secured with safety ropes during straightening work.
Safety rope
Paint Preparation
Paint repairs
Before carrying out paintwork repairs, clean the vehicle thoroughly using either a steam cleaner or high pressure
washer.
Wash locally repaired areas using a mild water-mixable detergent and wipe them clean with solvent, immediately
before paint application.
Ensure damaged paintwork which has led to exposed metal is abraded until the metal is clean, extending beyond the
area of the original damage. Treat the bare metal with an etch phosphate to remove all traces of rust and to provide
a key for new paint coats. Re-treat the affected area using either a separate acid-etch primer and two pack surfacer
or an integrated etch primer/filler, and follow with a two pack paint system. Treat those surfaces not receiving paint
using an approved cavity wax, following paint operations
CAUTIONS:
When preparing bumpers for painting, ensure the PDC sensors are not damaged. Only remove the clear coat if
possible. When painting the PDC sensors, do not apply excessive layers of paint as this can hinder the performance
of the sensors.
When heat curing paint repairs, the temperature must not exceed 65°C (149°F). Temperature above this figure
will cause the reflective elements within the headlamps and tail lamps to distort and may damage other components.
Body Repairs - Corrosion Protection - Corrosion Protection
General
The corrosion protection provided in production must be carefully maintained and/or reproduced during and after
body repair work. It is only then that the long-term warranty against penetrative rust damage can be assured.
Only Land Rover original bodywork components and Land Rover approved repair materials (sealer, paint etc.), are to
be used for bodywork repairs.
Land Rover original parts
All Land Rover bodywork components have a cathodic base coating. Individual bodywork components are zinc plated
on one or both sides (in different areas depending on vehicle model).
Together with elastic paint coating, this guarantees an optimum, highly resistant protection against corrosion caused
by the impact of small objects such as gravel.
NOTE: If possible, the individual protective layers (zinc, cathodic base coat) on Land Rover bodywork
components must not be damaged or destroyed by sanding or other mechanical operations.
If hairline cracks at "bodywork connection areas" appear after reshaping work (e.g. at door hinges), it must be
ensured that the corrosion protection provided in production is recreated. The complete paint covering must be re-
created if necessary. The same applies to reshaping work on heavily profiled bodywork components (e.g. floor pan).
Renew or touch-up the paint coating, sealing beads and underbody protection as necessary.
After repair, any interior surfaces which are no longer visible or accessible must be primed before cavity wax is
applied. To be certain of an even coating on inner surfaces, careful application of spray (twice, with drying time in-
between) must be carried out throughout the whole cavity.
If bodywork panels are strongly heated during repair work, this will invariably result in damage to or even destruction
of the applied corrosion protection material. The effectiveness of the cavity protection material is reduced if heating
occurs. Reworking of the affected areas is therefore vital.
Welded areas should be made good before corrosion protection is applied.
The corrosion protection measures to be taken when bodywork components are renewed are described on the
following pages.
Corrosion protection of new components
All new components must be inspected for transport or storage damage such as scratches or dents. The following
operations may be necessary, depending on the extent of damage:
Undamaged new component
Do not grind the cathodic dip primer.

Thoroughly clean with silicone remover and rob dry.
Slightly damaged new component
Sand out scratches

Finely sand the surrounding surface.
Thoroughly clean with silicone remover and rub dry.
Apply corrosion protection primer to bare areas.
Damaged new components (bumps and dents)
Beat out the dented area sand down to bare metal.

Apply polyester filler (only onto bare metal)
Apply filler.
Lightly sand the whole components.
Thoroughly clean with silicone remover and rob dry.
Apply corrosion protection primer to bare areas.
The clinched flanges on the hood, doors, tailgate and liftgate must be sealed with clinched flange sealer.
Weld Components
Use a rotating tress wire brush to remove the dip coat on the inside and outside of the area to be welded, taking
care not to damage the zinc coating.
NOTES:
The area to be ground should be kept as small as possible, the corrosion protection applied in production
(cathodic primer) should be retained as much as is possible.
The welding primer must be stirred well or shaken before application.
Clean the repair area thoroughly (silicone remover).
Apply welding primer evenly to all weld flanges (old and new components).
NOTE: The welding primer must be allowed to dry before welding is carried out.
Apply welding primer
All weld beads must be ground down after all welding is completed, taking care not to weaken the material.
Any unevenness at the joint must be made good.
If necessary, spot weld missing T-pins for trim strip clamps into position. The vehicle must be completely cleaned of
sanding dust and metal swarf because of the danger of corrosion.
Clean and prime all internal areas and those to be sealed.
NOTE: The primer must be dry before sealing mastic or underbody protection is applied. Do not use thinners
when applying sealing mastic (the mastic would not dry).
Partial renewal
The procedure to follow when partially renewing components is the same as described in the section "Welded
components".
The main difference when components are partially, rather than completely renewed, concerns the preparation of butt
or lap joints.
When bodywork components are cut through, attention must be paid to the adequate removal of the paint
and zinc coatings on inner areas. This specially applies to areas which are difficult to access internally.
It is important for the weld quality that the inner area is bare metal. Zinc and paint residues in the weld area
burn and cause serious hole formation during welding.
If the zinc layer and the paint coating are not removed, the zinc and paint will burn during welding. The soot
produced prevents satisfactory cavity protection.
Procedure
The paint layer must be removed for a width of 30mm from the line of the weld using a rotating tress wire
brush.
This operation must be carried out on both the new and the old parts of the bodywork.
Depending on the bodywork component, a 10mm width of the underlying zinc layer must also be removed
along the weld line.
NOTE: A flat scraper or a wire brush can be used instead of the rotating brush if the cavity is small. Do not use
an angle grinder, which would weaken the structure.
Application of cavity wax protection on a door rocker panel after partial repair
1 - Weld bead
2 - Spray head
3 - Distance maintainer
4 - Spray gun
Classification of the different corrosion protection measures for dent removal

Corrosion protection method Exterior surfaces Accessible inner surfaces Inaccessible inner surfaces
Painting X X
Cavity protection X
Classification of different corrosion protection measures for installation of new components
Corrosion
protection Weld flanges before welding in All bare Weld flange area Weld flange area
method place (contact surfaces) sanded areas accessible not accessible
Welding primer X
Painting X X
Clinched flange X
protection
Cavity protection X
Body sealing materials
1 - Between Panels - Bolted
2 - Panel Edge Bolted
3 - Between Panels - spot welded
4 - Panel edges - spot welded
5 - Between panels - bonded
6 - Panel edges - bonded
7 - Clinch joints - type A
8 - Clinch joints - type B
9 - Clinch joints - type C
10 - Gaps between panels - type A
11 - Gaps between panels - type B
12 - Lap joint
Description - Usage Supplier Part Number

Cavity - Wax - -
Inner Cavity Wax (Amber) 3M 0890/11/21
Inner Cavity Wax (Transparent) 3M 08909/19/29
Cavity Wax Croda PW57
Engine Bay Waxes/Lacquers
Astrolan Engine Bay Wax and Cosmetic Wax Astors DA3243/1
Engine Bay and Cosmetic Wax/Lacquer Croda PW197
Engine Bay Cosmetic Lacquer Dinol 4010
Miscellaneous Materials - -
Aerosol Auto Adhesive (Trim) - impact Adhesive for trim Parts 3M 08080
Flexible Parts Repair Material - rubber modified polypropylene parts 3M 05900
Acoustic Foam (sika baffle 278) - expanding foam block repair Sika LR Part No AZL
500021. Ford Part No
6H22-11840-AA
Flexible Foam (anti - flutter) - between panels Duramix 4320
Water Shedder Repair (Aerosol) Teroson -
Low Temperature Anti-Corrosion Coating (Magnesium) Land VEP 501 840 PMA
Rover
Seam Sealers
Body Caulking - type (b) gaps between panels 3M 08568
Drip Chek Clear - bolted, spot welded and bonded panel edges; type (a) and (b) 3M 08401
gaps between panels; type ©) clinch joints
Drip Chek Heavy - type (b) gaps between panels; type ©) clinch joints 3M 08531
Polyurethane Seam Sealer - bolted, spot welded and bonded panel edges; type (a) 3M 08684/89/94
and (b) gaps between panels; type (b) clinch joints
Polyurethane Sealer (Sachet) - bolted panel edges; type (b) clinch joints 3M 08703/83/88
Sprayable Sealer - lap joints 3M 08800/23
Super Seam Sealer - lap joints; type (b) clinch joints 3M 08537
Weld Thru' Sealer - between spot welded panels 3M 08626
Betafill Clinch and Brushable Sealer - type (b) clinch joints Gurit- 10211/15/20
Essex
Clinch, Joint and Underbody Coating - lap joint Gurit- 10101/10707
Essex
Leak Chek Clear - between bolted panels; spot welded and bonded panel edges; Kent 10075
type ©) clinch joints; type (a) gaps between panels Industries
Putty - type (b) gaps between panels Kent -
Industries
Polyurethane Seam Sealer - bolted, spot welded and bonded panel edges; between PPG 6500
bonded panels; type (a) and (b) gaps between panels
Polyurethane Seam Sealer - bolted, spot welded and bonded panel edges; between Teroson 92
bonded panels; type (b) gaps between panels
Terolan Light Seam Sealer - bolted, spot welded and bonded panel edges; between Teroson -
bonded panels; type (a) and (b) gaps between panels; between bonded panels; type
©) clinch joints
Terolan Special Brushable Seam Sealer - lap joints Teroson -
Terostat Sprayable Seam Sealer - bolted, spot welded and bonded panel edges; Teroson 9320
between bonded panels; type (b) gaps between panels
Terostat 1K PU Seam Sealer (SE 20) - type (a) and (b) gaps between panels; spot Teroson -
welded and bonded panel edges
Sealing Compound - bolted, spot welded and bonded panel edges; between bonded Wurths 8901001/-/6
panels; type (b) gaps between panels
Structural Adhesives
Automotive Structural Adhesive - between bonded panels; type (a) clinch joints 3M 08115
Two Part structural Epoxy - between bonded and spot welded panels; type (a) clinch Ciba- XB5 106/7
joints Geigy
Underbody Sealers
Body-Schutz 3M 08861
Spray-Schutz 3M 08877
Crodapol Brushable Underbody sealer Croda PV75
Terotex Underseal (CP02) Teroson 9320
Underbody Waxes
Stone Chip Coating (smooth) 3M 08158/9
Underbody Wax Croda PW61
Underbody Wax Dinol Tectacote 205
Weld - through Primers
Weld Thru' Coating 3M 05913
Zinc Spray 3M 09113
Zinc Rich Primer ICI p-565 634
Material Equipment/Suppliers
3M
Automotive Trade Group

3M UK Plc
3M House
PO Box 1
Market Place
Bracknell
Berks.
RG12 1JU
Telephone (01344) 858611
Cooper Pegler
Burgess Hill
Sussex
RH 15 9LA
Telephone (014446) 42526
SATA Spray Equipment
Minden Industrial equipment

16 Greyfriars Road
Moreton Hall
Bury St Edmunds
Suffolk
IP32 7DX
Telephone (01284) 760791
Teroson
Watchmead
Welwyn Garden City
Hertfordshire
AL7 1JB
Telephone 01707 358800
Underbody sealer
Under floor areas and rocker outer panels are treated with a plastisol PVC underbody sealer. This material is not
suitable for re-treatment. When repairing areas of underbody sealer, strip the factory-applied underbody sealer back
to a suitable break point. Ensure that a clean metal surface is exposed and that the edge of the existing adheres
soundly to the panel.
Apply new underbody sealer between primer and surface paint operations. Apply seam sealer as necessary before
application of underbody sealer. Ensure that blanking plugs and grommets in the floor pan (except those used for
wax injection) are fitted before underbody sealer application. Refit any heat-fusible plugs which have been disturbed
in repair with the aid of a hot air blower, or replace with rubber grommets
CAUTION: Ensure that suspension units, wheels, tires, power unit, drive shafts, exhaust and brakes (including
all mounting points) are shielded prior to application of fresh underbody sealer.
Area of underbody sealer application
Precautions during body repairs and handling
Take care when handling the vehicle in the workshop. Underbody sealers, seam sealers, underbody wax and body
panels may be damaged if the vehicle is carelessly lifted.
Proprietary anti-corrosion treatments
The application of proprietary anti corrosion treatments in addition to the factory-applied treatment could invalidate
the corrosion warranty and should be discouraged. This does not apply to approved, compatible, preservative waxes
which may be applied on top of existing coatings.
Fitting approved accessories
When fitting accessories ensure that the vehicle corrosion protection is not affected, either by breaking the protective
coating or by introducing a moisture trap.
Do not screw self-tapping screws directly into body panels. Fit suitable plastic inserts to the panel beforehand. Always
ensure that the edges of holes drilled into panels, chassis members and other body parts are protected with a
suitable zinc rich or acid etch primer, and follow with a protective wax coating brushed onto the surrounding area.
Do not attach painted metal surfaces of any accessory directly to the vehicle's bodywork unless suitably protected.
Where metal surfaces are bolted together always interpose a suitable interface material such as weldable zinc rich
primer, extruded strip, or zinc tape.
Steam Cleaning
Due to the high pressure/temperature generated by steam cleaning equipment, there is a risk that certain adhesives
and corrosion prevention material may become softened or liquified.
Take care not to allow the steam jet to dwell on one area, and keep the nozzle at least 300mm from the panel
surface.
CAUTION: Do not remove wax or lacquer from underbody areas during repairs.
Inspection during maintenance servicing
It is a requirement of the corrosion warranty that the vehicle is checked for corrosion by an authorised Land Rover
Authorised Repairers at least once a year, to ensure that the factory-applied protection remains effective.
Rectify any bodywork damage or evidence of corrosion found during inspection as soon as is practicable, both to
minimise the extent of the damage and to ensure the long term effectiveness of the factory-applied corrosion
prevention treatment.
Underbody protection repairs
Whenever body repairs have been carried out, ensure that full sealing and corrosion protection treatments are
reinstated. this applies both to the damaged areas and also to areas where protection has been indirectly impaired,
as a result either of accident damage or repair operations.
Remove corrosion protection from the damaged areas before straightening or panel beating. This applies in particular
to panels coated with wax, PVC underbody sealer, sound deadening pads etc.
CAUTION: Do not use oxy-acetylene to remove corrosion prevention material. Large volumes of fumes and
gases are liberated by these materials when they burn.
The most common method of removal is by means of a hot air blower with an integral scraper. High temperatures
can be generated with this equipment which may cause fumes. Take care during its use.
Structural Adhesive
Metal to metal adhesive is applied to critical joint areas during factory assembly. The material used is a high
temperature, heat cured, nitrile phenolic which serves to bond two metal surfaces and also to seal the joint against
ingress of dust, moisture and fumes. This material is not suitable for service use and, during repair, should be
substituted by an approved structural adhesive.
CAUTION: When separating a joint with metal to metal adhesive, it is important to avoid distortion. Heat
gradually until the bond weakens sufficiently to permit panel separation.
NOTE: When spot welding through metal to metal adhesive, take particular care to adjust the equipment setting
to ensure a suitable weld.
Areas of structural adhesive

Item Application Function
1 B-pillar upper hinge RH/LH Structural
2 B-pillar upper hinge RH/LH Structural
3 Rear rocker panel RH/LH Structural
4 B-pillar lower hinge RH/LH Structural
5 Front rocker panel RH/LH Structural
6 Front rocker panel RH/LH Structural
7 A-pillar lower hinge RH/LH Structural
8 A-pillar upper hinge RH/LH Structural
9 C-pillar striker reinforcement Structural
10 B pillar rear door aperture Structural
11 B-pillar latch face Structural
12 A-pillar to front door aperture Structural
13 A-pillar to W/shield aperture Structural
Joints symmetrically opposite to those shown are also treated. Apply 3mm diameter beads to all joints shown. Leave
rocker drain points free of adhesive.
Expanding Foam Acoustic Seals
Expanding foam acoustic seals are used in various closed-sections of the body to improve vehicle refinement. The
seals are installed during the vehicle body manufacture and expand during the paint process up to ten times original
size, thus locking them into position. They are located such that they prevent noise accentuation along a section and
reflect air borne noise away from the cabin.
The seals have spilt functionality depending on location. The seals located at the base of the body pillars have a
primary function of preventing water ingress when wading. Their secondary function is to prevent noise and dust
ingress.
The seal around the fuel filler has a primary function of preventing both fuel and water ingress. With a secondary
function of preventing noise and dust ingress.
The remaining seals primary function is to prevent noise accentuation along a section and reflect air borne noise
away from the cabin.
Another advantage of the seals is that they marginally increase the overall stiffness of the body and its structural
performance in case of a crash.
The seals are manufactured from an expandible polymer, 'Sika Baffle 250.'
Replacing Foam Acoustic Seals
As paint oven temperatures used in a repair workshop are significantly lower than those that are used during
manufacture of the vehicle, a different process is required to replace the seals.
After a repair that involves replacement of a section containing expanding foam acoustic seals, the new expanding
foam acoustic seal is installed to the new section and injected with an approved acoustic foam. The acoustic foam
should be injected after paint refinishing, where possible. When injecting the foam, ensure the foam fills a complete
cross section of the cavity and around the expanding foam acoustic seal.
Position of acoustic seals, front reinforcement
Item Description Function Service part No

1 A-pillar upper inner Acoustic EUH000520
2 B-pillar lower inner Water Ingress/Acoustic EUH000560
3 Rocker panel middle Acoustic EUH000670
4 A-pillar lower inner Water Ingress/Acoustic EUH000550
5 B-pillar lower outer Water Ingress/Acoustic EUH000570
6 Rocker panel outer Acoustic EUH000680
7 A-pillar lower inner Water Ingress/Acoustic EUH000540
8 A-pillar upper outer Acoustic EUH000530
Position of acoustic seals, rear quarter panel
Item Description Function Service part No
1 Cantrail rear Acoustic EUH000650
2 C-pillar outer Acoustic EUH000610
3 Rear wheel arch outer Water Ingress/Acoustic EUH000590
4 Fuel filler aperture Water/Fuel Ingress ARY 780030
5 D-pillar outer Acoustic EUH000630
Seam Sealer
A heat cured, PVC based sealant is applied to specific joint seams during factory assembly. This material is not
suitable for service use and during repair, should be substituted by an approved seam sealer.
Apply seam sealers after the application of primer and before the application of top coat. The sealer must form a
continuous bead, with the profile of the bead dependent on the type of seam. If the seam sealer is applied with a
brush take particular care to maintain the required coverage of the seam.
Ensure that all accessible repair seams are sealed following a repair. Damaged to a vehicle often flexes areas of the
body remote from the impact. As a result the seam sealer in these areas may be disturbed by subsequent
straightening and repair operations. Check all seams in the vicinity of the area undergoing repair for evidence of
cracked seam sealer, then clean out as required and apply fresh seam sealer using the following procedure:
Clean the affected seam and re-treat any exposed metal areas with a suitable etch phosphate primer.
Treat affected area with an etch-acid primer.
Apply appropriate seam sealer as necessary.
apply appropriate colour coat (and under body sealer as applicable).
Where seams are inaccessible following the reassembly or fitting of components, ensure that a paste-type seam
sealer is applied to such seams Certain seams also become inaccessible after the completion of panel repairs. In such
instances apply seam sealer and paint before final assembly
Provided access is adequate, apply seam sealer to both sides of a repair joint. Where access is limited to one side
only (eg box section), treat the affected box member with cavity wax
Seam sealer on the rear end

Underbody seam sealer
Cavity Wax
After repairs, always re-treat theses areas with an approved cavity wax. In addition, treat all interior surfaces which
have been disturbed during repairs whether they have been treated in production or not. This includes all Box
members, cavities and door interiors.
Before wax injection, ensure that the cavity to be treated is free from any contamination or foreign matter. Where
necessary, clear out any debris.
Ensure that cavity wax is applied after the final paint process and before refitting any trim components.
During application ensure that the wax covers all flanges and seam areas and that it is adequately applied to all
repaired areas of both new and existing panels.
It should be noted that new panel assemblies and complete body shells are supplied without wax injection treatment.
Ensure that such treatment is carried out after repairs.
Effective cavity wax protection is vital. Always observe the following points:
Complete all paint refinish operations before wax application.

Check the spray pattern of injection equipment.
Mask all areas not to be waxed
Remove body fixings, such as seat belt retractors, if contamination is at all likely.
Move door glasses to fully closed position before treating door interiors.
Treat body areas normally covered by trim before refitting items.
Check that body and door drain holes are clear after the protective wax has dried.
Keep all equipment clean, especially wax injection nozzles
Wax injection areas, body
Wax injection areas, doors

Body Repairs - Water Leaks - Water Leaks
General
If water leaks occur after bodywork repairs, the cause can be established using the checks described below. A
systematic and logical procedure is required to locate water leaks. Before beginning extensive checks, a
thorough visual inspection must be carried out.
Visual Inspection
- The following characteristics may indicate existing leaks:
- Check the clearance and accurate fit of ancillary components such as the hood, tailgate, liftgate, doors,
and so on.
- Check for correct fit and possible damage to sealing elements such as blanking plugs, rubber door
seals, and so on.
- Check water drain holes for unhindered flow.
Various tests can be used to provide further information on possible leaks:
- Water test
- Washer test
- Road test
- Chalk (powder) test
Practical execution of tests and checks
Water test
NOTE: Never aim a jet of water directly at a rubber seal.
Carry out the water test with a second person present (passenger compartment).
Use variable washer nozzles (concentrated water jet to fine spray mist).
Start in the lower section and spray the whole area, working upwards in stages.
Washer test
Further tests can be carried out in the washer system.

Some leaks originate here, or only occur here.
The relevant passenger compartment should be checked using a torch during the wash procedure.
Road test
If no leaks are located during the tests above, road tests should be carried out on wet roads.
Road tests under various conditions:
- At various speeds.
- On various road surfaces (asphalt to cobbles).
- With loaded or unloaded vehicle.
- Driving through puddles (splash water).
Chalk test (powder test)
In this test, the clamping load and the bearing surface of the seal are checked.
Performing the test:
- Dust the door seal with powder or coat with chalk.
- Coat the bearing surface of the seal with a thin film of grease.
- Slowly close the door and open it again.
- Check the width and continuity of the imprint on the door seal.
Other test equipment
Other equipment such as stethoscopes, UV lamps, special mirrors or ultrasound measuring instruments can be
used to locate leaks.
Rectifying the leak using recommended tools, auxiliary equipment and materials
Tools and auxiliary equipment:

- Dry, absorbent cloths
- Variable washer nozzle
- Torch, fluorescent tube
- Mirror
- Compressed air
- Seal lip installer
- Wet/dry vacuum cleaner
- Sealing compound compressor
- Remover for interior trim
- Cutter blade or pocket knife
- Wedge (wood or plastic)
- Hot air blower
- Special mirror for concealed leaks
- Air flow checker
- Sealing compound (tape and plastic compound)
- Multi-purpose sticker
- Clinched flange sealer
- Window sealing compound
- Water shield (PVC)
- Double-sided adhesive tape for water shield
- Methylated spirit (available from trade outlets)
- PU adhesive
- Silicone remover
- Tar remover
Water leaks according to mileage or running time
Increasing mileage has an effect on the problem of leaks in a vehicle. Possible influencing factors are:
Servicing and maintenance of seals:

- No maintenance, lack of maintenance or incorrect maintenance
- Using an incorrect agent
Damaged seals:
- As a result of aging, wear or incorrect handling/assembly.
Heavy soiling of the vehicle:
- Heavy soiling of a vehicle can seriously impair the function of water drainage channels in particular,
and also of rubber seals.
Age-related factors:
- Environmental factors
- UV radiation
- Extreme climatic conditions
Corrosion can have a serious impact on bodywork, in particular as a result of:
- Lightly or heavily rusted seal carriers
- Rusted body seal welds
- Perforation corrosion
Water leaks after body repairs
If a vehicle develops a leak after body repairs, the following points must be taken into consideration in particular:
The correct seating of ancillary components and their seals must be checked.
The correct alignment of doors/tailgate and liftgate must be checked. The associated seals must not be
damaged and must be installed correctly.
Check that welded seams are correctly sealed.
The correct seating of rubber grommets must be checked.
Directly-glazed windows must have correct and complete bonding.
Water drainage system
If a vehicle develops water leaks, then areas into which water is routed or drained should be checked first.
Water drainage system

1 - Water drainage, front
2 - Water drainage, side and rear
3 - Roof drainage
4 - Engine compartment drainage
Water leaks, diagnosis and corrective action: Front passenger compartment
Windscreen
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into A-pillar area or instrument cluster area and rocker panel area.
Cause:
- Breaks in adhesive beads
Corrective action:
- The breaks in adhesive beads can be located from inside by using compressed air. The leak can be
identified from outside by the escaping air.
- The second test method is by means of a water test. The outer trims must be raised carefully using a
plastic wedge. The leak should be located from inside by a second assistant.
Side windows
In the case of side windows, the same problems can arise as for a windscreen. The same corrective actions must
therefore be used.
Door seal
Diagnosis:
- Water ingress in the lower part of the interior door trim or in the rocker panel area.
Cause:
- The water shield fitted behind the interior door trim exists to drain off water that has entered the door
via the drainage holes, either downwards or outwards. If the water shield seal is damaged or has been
fitted incorrectly, then water can get into the passenger compartment.
- In addition to this, the drainage holes can become clogged with leaves, dirt or excess cavity protection
agents. Water gathers in the door and ingresses into the passenger compartment.
- Check water shield for damage or correct fitting.
- If the water shield needs to be re-bonded, then approved seam sealer should be used.
- Before the water shield is installed, the drainage holes must be checked for unhindered flow.
Door seals
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into the rocker panel area
Cause:
- Insufficient clamping load between seal and door.
Corrective action:
- Check clamping load:
- The easiest way to check the clamping load of a seal to the respective bearing surface is by means of
a paper strip test. This consists of trapping strips of paper at various points between the door and the
seal, and fully closing the door. If it is possible to pull out the paper with no great resistance, then the
clamping load is too low.
- Adjust the clamping load:
-
NOTE: When adjusting the clamping load, the profile alignment of the relevant components must
always be taken into consideration.
The clamping load is normally adjusted using the striker. When doing so, the edge alignment from the
door to the side panel, or from the front door to the rear door must be taken into account.
- Another setting method is to realign the panel flange for the seal mounting. The clamping load is
increased by moving the flange towards the door.
-
NOTE: Do not realign the flange too far in the direction of the door, as this can reduce the bearing
surface of the seal to the door.
Check the bearing surface:

- Apply chalk evenly to the surface of the seal. Evenly coat the bearing surface of the door with vaseline.
- Close the door fully, the lock must engage. Open the door. The imprint of the chalk (bearing surface)
can be identified in the film of grease.
- The bearing surface should be at least 5mm across at all points.
Other causes:
- The door seal must completely seal the door where it meets the bodywork.
- Water can ingress directly or indirectly into the interior of the vehicle if the seal is damaged at any
point.
Corrective action:
- A damaged or worn door seal must always be renewed in full.
- When renewing the seal, the following must be taken into account:
- Always fit the seal first in the area of the narrow radii (corner points).
- Next, secure the seal to the flange evenly by tapping lightly with a rubber hammer. The installed seal
must not be kinked at any point.
NOTE: The prescribed length of a seal must not be shortened.
Other cause:
- The door seal is attached to the welded flange all the way round. If this welded flange is uneven or
damaged at any point (usually in areas with narrow radii) then this point could be subject to leaks.
- A stretched seal carrier can also cause a leak.
- In both cases, water gets into the vehicle interior under the seal carrier.
Corrective action:
- Align the deformed welded flange using a hammer and anvil block, prevent and if necessary repair any
paint damage.
Other cause:
- The door seal is attached to the welded flange all the way round. If this welded flange is uneven or
damaged at any point (usually in areas with narrow radii) then this point could be subject to leaks.
- A stretched seal carrier can also cause a leak.
- In both cases, water gets into the vehicle interior under the seal carrier.
Sliding roof/tilting roof
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water at sliding roof aperture
Cause:
- The sliding roof/tilting roof is installed in a water trap. The water drains off via the water trap, water
drain holes and drain hoses. The drain hoses lead downwards on both sides via the A-pillar and C-
pillar.
- The drain holes or drain hoses can become clogged with leaves, dirt, underbody protection and so on.
Corrective action:
-
NOTE: In the case of a sliding or tilting roof, the external rubber seal and the lock actuator or latch
mechanism must be checked first of all.
Check the water trap for leaks.

- Check the drain hoses for leaks and for correct connection to the water trap.
- Check the drainage system for unhindered flow, and blow out with compressed air if necessary.
- Check the external seal and the correct adjustment of the sliding roof.
Tailgate and Liftgate
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into rear headlining area and luggage area.
Cause:
- The leak problems of the tailgate and liftgate correspond to those of the doors.
- In addition to this, the area to be sealed is much bigger. The routing holes for cables and hoses must
also be sealed.
- The rubber grommets for the routing holes must be checked for damage and correct seating (fully
unhooked).
- The mounting points of the tailgate and liftgate hinges may leak.
Corrective action:
- Check the rubber grommets and renew if necessary.
- Check the hinge mounting points, and re-seal with sealing compound if necessary.
Forced air extraction
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into side luggage compartment area
Cause:
- The forced air extraction for the vehicle interior is located in the D-pillar behind the rear lights.
- The rubber flap of the forced air extraction must be able to move freely.
Corrective action:
- Remove the forced air extraction.
- Check the seal area between the bodywork and housing, as well as the rubber flap.
- Renew seal if necessary.
Rear window and moon roof
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into the luggage compartment area
Cause:
- Rear window and moon roof leaking.
- Check for leak in the same way as for leaking windscreen.
Panel connections with seal welds
Diagnosis:
- Ingress of water into the luggage compartment area
Cause:
- Several panel connections must be fitted in production in the wheelhouse and luggage compartment
areas. These connections are sealed with sealing compound.
- Uneven application of sealing compound can lead to a break in a seal weld.
Corrective action:
- Expose the seal weld.
- Locate the leak in the seal weld.
- Re-seal using sealing compound.
Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks - Body
and Frame
Body Repairs - Tolerance Checks
Measurements shown are in millimetres and inches. The measurements shown in brackets are in inches.
Point-to-Point Dimensional Information
Point-to-point measurements are actual distances between two points. These points can be holes or intersections
points. Where holes are taken, the point of measurement is always from the hole centres.
Front end dimensions
Item From To Length

A Hood latch panel, lower LH outer fixing Hood latch panel, lower RH outer fixing 1503.2 (59.18)
B Hood latch panel, LH locator slot Hood latch panel, RH locator slot 900 (35.43)
C Hood latch panel, LH locator dowel Hood latch panel, RH locator dowels 1540.4 (60.64)
D Fender, front LH fixing Fender, front RH fixing 1617.8 (63.69)
E Fender, front RH fixing Fender, rear LH fixing 1780.2 (70.08)
F Fender, rear LH fixing Fender, rear RH fixing 1620 (63.77)
G Fender, front fixing Hood latch panel, locator dowel 114.23 (4.49)
Front end dimensions
Item From To Length
A LH hood hinge, middle fixing hole RH windshield side upper finisher, fixing hole 1827 (71.92)
B LH windshield side upper finisher, fixing hole RH windshield side upper finisher, fixing hole 1431.5 (56.35)
Side view dimensions
Item From To Length

A Front door top hinge, top fixing hole Rear door top hinge, top fixing hole 1078.9 (42.47)
B Front door top hinge, top fixing hole Rear door bottom hinge, top fixing hole 1138.3 (44.81)
C Front door bottom hinge, top fixing hole Rear door top hinge, top fixing hole 1174.4 (46.23)
D Front door bottom hinge, top fixing hole Rear door bottom hinge, top fixing hole 1078.9 (42.47)
E Rear door top hinge, top fixing hole D pillar striker fixing hole 983.5 (38.72)
F Rear door bottom hinge, top fixing hole D pillar striker fixing hole 1069.9 (42.12)
Internal dimensions
Item From To Length

A LH safety belt anchorage, top fixing RH safety belt retractor, lower fixing 1743.6
(68.64)
B RH inner rear wheelarch, lower safety belt LH inner rear wheelarch, lower safety belt 1518.2
retractor fixing retractor fixing (59.77)
Rear view dimensions
Item From To Length
A Liftgate, RH alignment fixing Tailgate, LH striker fixing 1222.1 (48.11)
B Liftgate, RH alignment fixing Liftgate, LH alignment fixing 1186.6 (46.71)
C Tailgate, LH hinge cover, fixing hole Rear header, RH location hole 1184.3 (46.62)
Underbody Dimensional Information
Front integral body frame dimensions
Item From To Length

A Body Mount 1 (front) Body Mount 3 2113 (83.12)
B Body Mount 1 (front) Body Mount 2 1139 (44.84)
C Body Mount 3 (LH) Body Mount 3 (RH) 1275 (50.196)
D Body Mount 1 (LH front) Body Mount 1 (RH front) 1015 (39.96)
E Body Mount 2 (LH) Body Mount 2 (RH) 1258 (49.53)
F Datum Line (Z) Body Mount 3 136.5 (5.374)
G Datum Line (Z) Body Mount 2 105.5 (4.15)
H Datum Line (Z) Body Mount 1 78.8 (3.102)
Item From To Length
A Body Mount 1 (LH front) Damper Mounting (RH) 1063.1 (41.85)
B Body Mount 1 (LH front) Body Mount 2 (RH) 1609 (63.34)
C Body Mount 1 (LH front) Body Mount 3 (RH) 24.3.3 (94.61)
D Body Mount 2 (LH front) Body Mount 3 (RH) 1597.7 (62.90)
E Body Mount 1 (LH front) Body Mount 2 (LH) 1139 (44.84)
Item From To Length
A Front Bumper Mount (L/H) Front Bumper Mount (R/H) 810 (31.8)
B Lower Arm (L/H front) Lower Arm (R/H front) 635.7 (25.02)
C Steering Gear (L/H) Steering Gear (R/H) 520 (20.4)
D Upper Arm (L/H front) Upper Arm R/H front) 748.7 (29.47)
E Upper Arm (L/H rear) Upper Arm (R/H rear) 836.8 (32.9)
F Lower Arm ((L/H rear) Lower Arm ((L/H rear) 678.6 (26.71)
Item From To Length
A Datum Line (Z) Front Bumper Mount 37.81 (1.488)
B Datum Line (Z) Lower Arm 249.22 (9.811)
C Datum Line (Z) Steering Gear 201.84 (7.946)
D Datum Line (Z) Upper Arm front 170.09 (6.696)
E Datum Line (Z) Upper Arm Rear 134.17 (5.282)
F Datum Line (Z) Lower Arm Rear 236.37 (5.282)
Rear integral body frame dimensions
Item From To Length
A Body Mount 4 (LH) Body Mount 4 (RH) 806 (31.732)
B Body Mount 5 ( rear) Damper Mounting 533.5 (21.00)
C Body Mount 5 ( rear) Body Mount 4 882.8 (34.755)
D Body Mount 5 (LH rear) Body Mount 5 (RH rear) 1114 (43.858)
E Body Mount 5 ( rear) Rear Crossmember 332 (13.07)
F Datum Line (Z) Body Mount 5 (rear) 127.5 (5.01)
G Datum Line (Z) Body Mount 4 61.2 (2.40)
Item From To Length
A Body Mount 5 (LH rear) Body Mount 4 (RH) 1304.2 (51.34)
B Body Mount 5 (LH rear) Rear Damper Mounting (RH) 1156 (45.51)
C Body Mount 5 (LH rear) Rear Damper Mounting (LH) 533.5 (21.00)
Item From To Length
A Damper (L/H) Damper (R/H) 937.1 (36.9)
B Upper Arm (L/H rear) Upper Arm (R/H rear) 757.4 (29.81)
C Lower Arm (L/H front) Lower Arm (R/H front) 818.4 (32.2)
D Upper Arm (L/H front) Upper Arm (R/H front) 946.5 (37.2)
E Toe Link (L/H) Toe Link (R/H) 439 (17.2)
F Lower Arm (L/H rear) Lower Arm (R/H rear) 508.4 (20.01)
Item From To Length
A Datum Line (Z) Damper 169.97 (6.691)
B Datum Line (Z) Upper Arm Rear 32.27 (1.270)
C Datum Line (Z) Lower Arm Front 161.04 (6.340)
D Datum Line (Z) Upper Arm Front 55.07 (2.168)
E Datum Line (Z) Toe Link 200.87 (7.908)
F Datum Line (Z) Lower Arm Rear 250.81 (9.874)
Gap and Profile Measurements
The following information is to be used as a guide to assist the technician in installing exterior body panels and trim
items so as to achieve a correctly aligned and cosmetically acceptable vehicle.
Front view dimensions

Section Description Gap Profile
A-A Headlamp to Hood 22.0 (0.866) ± 1.4 (0.055) N/A
B-B Headlamp to Bumper 6.0(0.236) ± 1.8 (0.070) N/A
C-C Headlamp to Fender 4.0(0.157) ± 1.2 (0.0472) 0.0 ± 1.2 (0.047)
D-D Headlamp to Grille 4.0(0.157) ± 1.2 (0.0472) 0.0 ± 1.0 (0.039)
Side view dimensions

E-E Hood to Fender 22.0 (0.866) ± 1.4(0.055) + 1.0 (0.039)
F-F Rear Door to Bodyside 4.5 (0.177) ± 1.1 (0.043) 0.0 + 1.0 (0.039) - 0.0
G-G Front Door to Rear Door 5.0 (0.196) ± 1.0 (0.039) 0.0 + 1.0 (0.039) - 0.0
H-H Front Fender to Front Door 5.0 (0.196) ± 1.0 (0.039) 0.0 + 1.4 (0.055) - 0.0
X-X Fuel Filler Flap to Bodyside 2.9 (0.114) ± 1.0 (0.039) 1.0 (0.039) ± 1.0 (0.039)
Rear view dimensions

L-L Liftgate to Tailgate 6.0 (0.236) ± 1.0 (0.039) 0.0 ± 1.0 (0.039)
M-M Tailgate to Bumper 12.8 (0.503) ± 2.1 (0.0826) N/A
N-N Liftgate to Roof 10 (0.393) ± 1.3 (0.0511) -2.0 (0.078) ± 1.3 (0.0511)
O-O Tailgate to Rear Lamp 5.0 (0.196) ± 1.6 (0.062) 5.0 (0.196) ± 1.3 (0.0511)
P-P Liftgate to Rear Lamp 5.0 (0.196) ± 1.6 (0.062) 3.0 (0.118) ± 1.9 (0.074)
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs -
Air deflector bolts 10 7
Hood latch Torx bolts 10 7
Hood panel bolts 25 18
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front End Sheet Metal
Front end service panels
Item Description Service part No

1 Fender apron panel closing. R/H ABD780100
L/H ABD780110
2 Fender apron panel reinforcement. R/H ABD780140
L/H ABD780150
3 Fender apron panel. R/H ABD780220
L/H ABD780230
4 Front wheelhouse. R/H ANJ780040
L/H ANJ780050
5 Front side member. R/H AB1780040
L/H AB1780050
6 Front wheelhouse reinforcement. R/H AWW780020
L/H AWW780030
7 Front crossmember. ABC780060
8 Hood latch panel. DIN500020
Time sechedules, front end
The following information shows the total time taken to replace single panels and complete assembilies. This time
includes removal of Mechanical, Electrical and Trim (MET) items, plus paint times based on Metalic Clear Over Base
Paint.
The times shown were generated by Thatcham (the motor insurance repair and research centre) and are to be used
as a guide only.
Single panel times
Panel Description Petrol Diesel
Hood 7.8 7.8
Hood latch panel 2.7 2.7
Front fender L/H 7.5 7.5
Front Fender R/H 7.5 7.5
Front Crossmember 6.0 6.0
Combination panel replacement times
The following panel combination times show the total time to remove/refit body panels, MET items and any paint
process.
Combination panel times
Hood
Front bumper
Hood latch panel
Front crossmember
Front grille
Front fender
Total Time 17.6 17.6

Hood
Front bumper
Hood latch panel
Front crossmember
Front grille
Front fender L/H and R/H

Body off integrated frame
Hood
Front bumper
Hood latch panel
Front side member
Fender apron panel
Fender apron panel reinforcement
Front wheelhouse
Front crossmember
Front grille
Total Time L/H 39.2 R/H 39.1 L/H 39.6 R/H 39.4

Body off integrated frame
Hood
Front bumper
Hood latch panel
Front side member L/H and R/H
Fender apron panel L/H and R/H
Fender apron panel reinforcement L/H and R/H
Front wheelhouse L/H and R/H
Front crossmember
Front grille
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Hood Latch Panel
Removal
NOTE: If the hood latch panel coating is damaged or scratched, it must be repaired using the approved
coating.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Specifications).

Specifications).
2. Remove the front bumper.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper (501-19,
3. Release the power steering fluid reservoir and

position aside.
Release the clip.
4. Release the washer reservoir filler neck from the coolant

tank clip.
5. Remove the 2 coolant expansion tank mounting bolts.
6. Release the coolant expansion tank.

Lift coolant expansion tank vertically.

8. Disconnect the hood release cable from the
connecting box.
Release the wiring harness.

Carefully tie the harness aside.
10. Remove the panel upper fixings.
11. Remove the panel lower fixings.

With assistance, remove the hood latch panel.
13. Noting the fitted position, remove the 6

spacers.
Remove the 2 clips.
Remove the 2 horn assemblies.

Remove the 2 air deflectors.
15. Remove the hood switch.

16. Remove the RH hood latch.

Release and remove the cable.
17. Remove the LH hood latch.

Installation
1. Install the horn assemblies.
Install the air deflectors.
2. Install the LH hood latch.

3. Install the RH hood latch.

Attach the hood release cable.
Install the hood switch.
4. Install the spacers.

Install the clips.
With assistance, install the hood latch panel.
6. Install the panel fixings.

Install and tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb.ft).
Install the wiring harness.

8. Connect the hood release cable.
10. Install the coolant expansion tank.

Position the coolant expansion tank, locate the spigot
and lug.

Locate in clip.
12. Install the power steering fluid reservoir.

Position and secure to mounting bracket.
13. Install the front bumper.

For additional information, refer to: Front Bumper (501-19,
14. Open and close the hood to check the hood latch operation.
15. Adjust both of the hood latches.

Loosen the 4 hood latch Torx bolts.
Lower the hood and check for alignment.
Open the hood and tighten the Torx bolts to 10 Nm
(7 lb.ft).
Check for the correct operation of the hood safety
catch.
If necessary, repeat the above adjustment
procedure.

Specifications).
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Crossmember
Removal
1. Disconnect both battery cables.
2. Remove the hood latch panel.

For additional information, refer to: Hood Latch Panel (501-
27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the radiator.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator (303-03A
Installation).
4. Remove both front impact sensors.

For additional information, refer to: Front Impact Severity
Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal
and Installation).
5. Release wiring harness from crossmember

Installation).
7.
Part Number Item Description
- 1 8 spot welds.
- 2 8 spot welds.
8. For additional information:

Welding.
For additional information, refer to: Body Repairs
(501-25A Body Repairs - General Information,
Corrosion protection.
For additional information, refer to: Corrosion
Protection (501-25B Body Repairs - Corrosion
Protection, Description and Operation).
Tolerance checks.
For additional information, refer to: Body and Frame
(501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information
and Tolerance Checks, Description and Operation).
Installation
1. Install is the reversal of removal.
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member
Removal
NOTES:
This procedure requires the body to be removed from the integrated body frame.
In this procedure the front side member is replaced in cojunction with hood latch panel, front wheelhouse
and the front crossmember.
1. Load vehicle onto ramp.
2. Disconnect both the battery cables.

3. L/H side: Remove the battery.

For additional information, refer to: Fender (501-02 Front
End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).

Installation).
6. Remove the front crossmember.

For additional information, refer to: Front Crossmember
(501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
7. Remove the front wheelhouse.

For additional information, refer to: Front Wheelhouse (501-
Installation).
8. Remove the hood.
9. Remove both hood support struts.
10. Remove the hood wiring harness.

12. Remove both wiper arms and blades.
13. L/H side: Remove the power steering fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Power Steering Fluid
Reservoir - TDV6 2.7L Diesel (211-02 Power Steering,
14. Remove the instrument panel.

For additional information, refer to: Instrument Panel - 2.7L
Diesel (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and
Installation).
15. Remove the insulation from outer and inner bulkhead.
16. R/H side: Release the ABS modulator.
17. R/H side: Remove the accelerator pedal.

For additional information, refer to: Accelerator Pedal (310-
02B Acceleration Control - V6 4.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
18. L/H side: Remove the battery junction box.

For additional information, refer to: Battery Junction Box
(BJB) - TDV6 2.7L Diesel (418-00 Module Communications
19. Release the wiring harness from bulkhead.
20. Release the wiring harness from fender apron panel

reinforcement.
21. Release the wiring harness from the side member.
22. L/H side: Remove the fuel fired booster heater.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Fired Booster
Heater (412-02B Auxiliary Heating, Removal and
Installation).
23. Remove the scuff plate trim panel trim

Installation).
24. Remove the footrest

Installation).
26. Release the front carpet.
27.
- 1 18 spot welds.
- 2 16 spot welds.
28.
- 1 6 plug welds and a
butt weld.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Side Member Section
Removal
NOTES:
In this procedure the front side member section is replaced in conjunction with hood latch panel, front
wheelhouse and the front crossmember.



Installation).

Installation).
7. Remove the front crossmember.

Installation).
8. Remove the hood.


Cooler - TDV6 2.7L Diesel (211-02 Power Steering, Removal
and Installation).

Diesel (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and
Installation).
14. Remove the insulation from outer and inner bulkhead.

Installation).

18. Release the wiring Harness from bulkhead.
19. Release the wiring harness from fender apron panel

reinforcement.
20. Release the wiring harness from the side member.

Installation).
22. Remove the scuff plate trim panel trim

Installation).
23. Remove the footrest

Installation).
26.
- 1 Butt weld
- 2 7 spot welds.
- 3 8 spot welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the fender apron panel reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with fender apron
panel closing.

Specifications).


Installation).



Installation).
8. L/H side: Remove fuel fired booster heater pipes.
9. R/H side: Remove the air cleaner.

11. Remove the wiring harness.

13. Remove the hood.
16.
- 1 Acoustic seal.
- 2 34 plug welds.
- 3 13 spot welds.
- 4 3 spot welds.
- 5 14 spot welds.
Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel
Removal


Installation).
4. Remove the radiator.

For additional information, refer to: Radiator (303-03A
Installation).
5. Remove the radiator coolant expansion tank.

For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank
Installation).

7. Remove the hood.
10. Remove both wiper arms and blades.

13. Remove the wiring harness
15. Remove the air cleaner.

16. Remove the insulation from outer bulkhead.

Installation).

19.
- 1 14 spot-welds.
- 2 2 mig welds.
- 3 11 mig-plug welds
- 4 19 mig-plug welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel Section
Removal


Installation).
4. Remove the radiator coolant expansion tank.

Installation).

6. Remove the air cleaner.

7. Remove the hood.
11. Remove the Wiring harness.

Installation).

15.
- 1 5 spot-welds
- 2 Butt weld

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Wheelhouse
Removal
NOTES:
In this procedure the front wheelhouse is replaced in conjunction with the front side member, hood latch
panel and front crossmember.

Specifications).
2. Remove the front side member.

For additional information, refer to: Front Side Member
Installation).
3. Remove the crossmember.

Installation).
4. Rmove the hood latch panel.

Installation).
5.
- 1 19 plug welds.
- 2 9 plug welds.
- 3 18 spot welds.
- 4 7 plug welds.
6.
- 1 13 spot welds.
- 2 16 spot welds.
- 3 9 spot welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Wheelhouse Reinforcement
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the front wheelhouse reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with the front side
member and front wheelhouse.

2. Remove the front side member.

Installation).

Installation).
4.
- 1 4 spot welds.
- 2 7 plug welds.
- 3, 4 20 plug welds.
- 5 9 spot welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Front Wheelhouse Section
Removal
NOTES:
In this procedure the front wheelhouse section is replaced in conjunction with the front side member
section, front wheelhouse reinforcement, hood latch panel and front crossmember.

Specifications).
2. Remove the front side member section.

Section (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal
and Installation).
3. Remove the front wheelhouse reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Front Wheelhouse
Reinforcement (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,

Installation).

Installation).
6.
- 1 Butt weld
- 2 15 spot welds.
- 3 7 plug welds, 9 spot
welds.
- 4 20 spot welds.
- 5 9 plug welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs - Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the fender apron closing panel is replaced in conjunction with the fender apron
panel or the fender apron panel reinforcement.

2. Remove the fender apron panel.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel
Installation).
3. Remove the fender apron panel reinforcement.

For additional information, refer to: Fender Apron Panel
Reinforcement (501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs,
4.
- 1 7 plug welds.
- 2 2 spot welds.
- 3 2 spot welds.
- 4 5 plug welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Front Section
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the fender apron panel reinforcement front section is replaced in conjunction with
fender apron panel closing.

Specifications).


Installation).

5. L/H side: Remove the radiator coolant expansion tank.

(303-03C Engine Cooling - V6 4.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).


Installation).
9. L/H side: Remove fuel fired booster heater pipes.
12. Remove the hood.
15.
- 1 Butt weld.
- 2 20 spot welds.
- 3 3 spot welds.
- 4 11 spot welds.
Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear Section
Removal
Specifications).


5. R/H side: Remove the air cleaner.


9. Remove the hood.
12.
- 1 3 spot welds.
- 2 34 plug welds.
- 3 7 spot welds.
- 4 Acoustic seal.
- 5 Butt weld.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Roof Sheet Metal Repairs - Roof
Roof service panels

1 Roof panel AKA780012
2 Header assembly AKC780050
3 Roof panel (with roof opening panel) AKB780040
4 Roof reinforcement AKR780080
5 Roof reinforcement AKB780031
6 Rear assembly AKC780090
7 Rail assembly R/H AK1780021
L/H AK1780031
paragraph
Paint.
as a guide only.
Single panel times
Roof panel 25.8 25.8
Roof glass support panel 1.1 1.1
Roof Sheet Metal Repairs - Roof Panel
Removal
NOTES:
The roof opening panel is supplied with the reinforcement roof aperture.
This procedure shows removal of the roof opening panel. For vehicles with a fixed roof, the procedure is
similar.

2. Remove both side air curtain modules.

For additional information, refer to: Side Air Curtain Module
(501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and
Installation).

For additional information, refer to: Windshield Glass (501-
11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
4. Remove both rear quarter window glass.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Quarter Window
Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
5. If applicable, remove roof opening panel.

For additional information, refer to: Roof Opening Panel
(501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Removal and Installation).
6. If applicable, remove glass roof panel.

For additional information, refer to: Glass Roof Panel (501-
Installation).
7. Remove both front seats.

8. Remove the rear seat.

With: 60/40 Split Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
9. Release the wiring harness from both A-pillars.
10. Release the wiring harness from the roof.
11. Remove the liftgate.
12. Remove both front door and rear door aperture

weatherstrip.
13. Remove the tailgate weatherstrip.
14. Remove both front safety belt retractors.

For additional information, refer to: Front Safety Belt
Retractor (501-20A Safety Belt System, Removal and
Installation).
15. Remove both second row safety belt retractors.

For additional information, refer to: Second Row Safety Belt
Installation).
16. If applicable, remove both third row safety belt retractors.

For additional information, refer to: Third Row Safety Belt
Installation).
17. Release the carpet
18. Remove the load space trims.
19. Remove the load space carpets.
20.
- 1 33 spot welds.
- 2 31 spot welds.(R/H
is symmetrically
opposite to L/H).
- 3 43 spot welds.
21.
- 1 12 plug welds and
27 spot welds.
- 2 7 plug welds and 40
spot welds (R/H is
symmetrically
opposite to L/H).
- 3 23 spot welds.
- 4 32 spot welds.
- 5 4 plug welds. (R/H
is symmetrically
opposite to L/H).

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Side Panel Sheet Metal
Outer bodyside service panels

1 Side panel outer R/H ALA80060
L/H ALA780070
2 B-Pillar outer R/H ALA780140
L/H ALA780150
3 Side panel front section R/H ALA780120
L/H ALA780130
4 Rocker panel outer R/H ALA780200
L/H ALA780210
5 A-Pillar outer R/H ALA780160
L/H ALA780170
Inner bodyside service panels

1 A-Pillar inner R/H ALR780520
L/H ALR780530
2 B-Pillar inner R/H ALR780640
L/H ALR780650
3 B-Pillar closing R/H AME780280
L/H AME780290
paragraph
Paint.
as a guide only.
Single panel times
Front door 9.4 9.4
Rear door 8.4 8.4
Rocker panel L/H 22.1 22.1
Rocker panel R/H 21.4 21.4
process.
Front door
Front fender

Rear door
Quarter panel

B-Pillar
Front door
Rear door

Front door
front fender
Rear door
Quarter panel

A-Pillar
A-Pillar reinforcement
Front door
Windshield glass
Front fender

Rear bumper
Rear door
Rear wheelhouse outer
Quarter panel

Bodyside
Front door
Rear door
Windshield glass
Front fender
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Rocker Panel
Removal

3. Remove the rear wheel and tire.
4. Remove the rear fender splash shield.

6. Release the front door check strap from the A-

pillar and release the rear door check strap
from the B-pillar.
7. Remove the front and rear door assemblies.

Disconnect the electrical connector
Release the wiring harness grommet
Release the wiring harness retaining clip
Remove the 2 bolts
8. Remove the front and rear door weatherstrips.


Installation).

Installation).
12. Release the wiring harness from A-pillar.

Installation).
14. Remove the B-pillar side impact sensor.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Side Impact
and Installation).
15. Remove the second row safety belt retractor.

For additional information, refer to: Second Row Safety Belt
Installation).
16. Remove the C-pillar side impact sensor.

For additional information, refer to: C-Pillar Side Impact
and Installation).
17. Release the rocker panel and B-pillar wiring harness.
18. Release the carpet away from the area of repair.

19. Release the wiring harness from rocker panel and B-pillar.
20. Remove the rocker panel finisher.
21.
- 1 Butt weld.
- 2 20 spot-welds.
- 3 Butt weld.
- 4 9 spot welds.
- 5 8 spot welds.
- 6 Butt weld.
- 7 35 spot welds.
22.
- 1 3 plug welds.
- 2 3 plug welds.
- 3 38 plug welds.
- 4 3 plug welds.
- 5 4 plug welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - A-Pillar Outer Panel
Removal
Specifications).

Installation).


5. R/H side: Remove the ABS module.

For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Module (206-09A Anti-Lock Control - Traction
Control, Removal and Installation).

Installation).
7. R/H side: Remove the brake booster.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Booster (206-07,
8. Remove the front door assembly.

Remove the 2 bolts
9. Remove the insulation from the outer and inner bulkhead.
10. Remove the front and rear door weatherstrip.

Installation).
12. Release the A-Pillar wiring harness.
13. Remove the footrest.


Installation).
16. Remove the rocker panel outer trim.
18.
- A Cut line 55mm
(2.165 inches) from
A-Pillar trim hole.
- 1 Butt welds.
- 2 30 spot welds.
- 3 8 spot welds.
- 4 15 spot welds.
19.
- 1 6 plug welds.
- 2 4 plug welds.
- 3 12 plug welds.
- 4 10 plug welds.
- 5 13 plug welds.
20.
- 1 Areas of adhesive.
- 2 Acoustic seal.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Side Panel
Removal

Specifications).

Installation).


Remove the 2 bolts
6. Remove front and rear door strikers.

Installation).


For additional information, refer to: Brake Booster (206-07
Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).

Installation).


Installation).

Installation).
19. Remove the Second row safety belt retractor.

For additional information, refer to: Second Row Center
Safety Belt Retractor - Vehicles With: 60/40 Split Seat
20. Remove the third row safety belt retractor.

For additional information, refer to: Third Row Safety Belt
Installation).
21. Remove the B-Pillar side impact sensor.

and Installation).

Installation).
23. Remove the C-Pillar side impact sensor.

and Installation).
24. Remove the wiring harness from the B-Pillar.
25. Release the wiring harness from the rocker panel.
26. Release wiring harness from roof panel.
28. Release the front and back carpet.
29. Remove rear wheel and tire.
30. Remove rear bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover
(501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
31. Remove forced air extraction grille.
32. R/H side: Remove fuel tank.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank (310-01A
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
33. R/H side: Remove the fuel tank filler pipe.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
(310-01B Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
34. R/H side: Remove the fuel filler interlock catch.

35. Remove the rear quarter window glass.

Installation).
36. Remove the exhaust heatshields.
37. Remove the tailgate latch.

For additional information, refer to: Liftgate Latch (501-14
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and
Installation).
38. Remove tailgate weatherstrip.
39. With assistance remove the tailgate.
42. Release wiring harness.
43.
- A Cut line is 55mm
(2.165 inches) from
A-Pillar trim hole.
- 1 Butt weld.
- 2 Cut line and butt
weld.
- 3 Butt weld.
- 4 50 spot welds.
- 5 Butt weld.
- 6 5 spot welds.
- 7 40 spot welds.
- 8 9 spot welds.
- 9 100 spot welds.
- 10 98 spot welds.
- 11 8 spot welds.
- 12 15 spot welds.
44.
- 1 22 plug welds.
- 2 3 plug welds.
- 3 38 plug welds.
- 4 4 plug welds.
- 5 10 plug welds.
- 6 6 plug welds.
- 7 13 plug welds.
- 8 6 plug welds.
45.
- 2 Acoustic seal.
- 3 Acoustic seals.
- 4 Acoustic seal.
- 5 Acoustic seal.

Welding.
Protection (501-25B, Description and Operation).
Tolerance checks.
(501-26, Description and Operation).
Installation
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - B-Pillar Outer Panel
Removal
Specifications).
2. Remove the rear door assembly.

Remove the 2 bolts
3. Remove front door striker.


Installation).
6. Remove the B-pillar side impact sensor.

and Installation).

For additional information, refer to: Side Air Bag Module
Installation).
8. Remove the wiring harness from the B-pillar.

Installation).

12. Release the carpet.
13.
- 1 Cut line and butt
weld.
- 2,4 81 spot welds.
- 3 Butt welds.
14.
- 1 Adhesive.
- 2 6 plug welds.
- 3 19 plug welds.
- 4 Acoustic seal.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - A-Pillar Reinforcement
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the A-Pillar reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with the A-Pillar outer panel.

Specifications).
2. Remove the A-Pillar outer panel.

For additional information, refer to: A-Pillar Outer Panel
(501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).

Diesel (501-12, Removal and Installation).
4.
- A Cut line 80mm
(3.149 inches) from
edge of A Pillar
reinforcement.
- 1 Butt weld.
- 2 30 spot welds.
- 3 17 spot welds.
5.
- 1 Butt weld
- 2 7 Plug welds.
- 3 16 plug welds.
- 4 Acoustic seal.
Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - B-Pillar Reinforcement
Removal
NOTES:
In this procedure the B-Pillar reinforcement is replaced in conjunction with the B-pillar outer panel.
The B-Pillar closing panel is fitted with the B-Pillar reinforcement.

2. Remove the B-pillar outer panel.

For additional information, refer to: B-Pillar Outer Panel
(501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
3.
- A Cut line 140.0mm
(5.51 inches)
- 1 Butt weld.
- 2,3 81 spot welds.
(including the B-
Pillar closing panel.)
4.
- 1 Butt weld.
- 2 Acoustic seal.
- 3 12 plug welds.
5. The B-Pillar closing panel is supplied with the
cantrail. Remove the B-Pillar closing panel from
the cantrail and fit the B-pillar closing panel to
the B-Pillar reinforcement, as shown in graphic
E55948 and E55947.
- 1 9 plug welds.
- 2 4 spot welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs - Side Panel Front Section
Removal
Specifications).

Installation).



For additional information, refer to: Brake Booster (206-07,


Installation).

Remove the 2 bolts
9. Remove front door striker.

Installation).
15. Remove the B-Pillar side impact sensor.

and Installation).

For additional information, refer to: Side Air Bag Module
Installation).


Installation).
19. Remove the wiring harness from the B-Pillar.
21. Release wiring harness from roof panel.
23. Release the front and back carpet.
24.
- A Cut line is 55 mm (
2.165 inches) from
A-Pillar trim hole.
- 1 98 spot welds.
- 2 Butt weld.
- 3 80 spot welds.
- 4 Butt weld.
- 5 8 spot welds.
- 6 15 spot welds.
- 7 Butt weld.
25.
- 1 6 plug welds.
- 2 31 plug welds.
- 3 4 plug welds.
- 4 10 plug welds.
- 5 13 plug welds.
- 6 6 plug welds.
26.
- 2 Acoustic seal.
- 3 Acoustic seal.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear End Sheet Metal
Rear end service panels

1 R/H ALA780100
Quarter panel outer
L/H ALA780110
2 Rear side member R/H AGA780021
L/H AGA780031
3 R/H AFD780080
Rear side member
L/H AFD780090
4 Rear floor panel AFD780010
5 Rear crossmember AQA780050
6 Rear panel reinforcement AQR780080
7 Rear panel outer AQA780030
Rear end service panels
1 R/H ALK780100
Rear wheelhouse outer
L/H ALK780110
2 R/H AME780320
Rear lamp mounting panel
L/H AME780330
3 R/H AME780300
Water drain panel
L/H AME780310
4 R/H AFF780060
D-pillar closing panel
L/H AFF780070
5 R/H AGY780060
D-pillar inner lower panel assembly
L/H AGY780070
6 R/H ALR780220
Inner quarter panel
L/H ALR780230
7 R/H ALJ780120
Inner quarter panel/side panel rear section
L/H ALJ780130
Paint.
as a guide only.
Single panel times
Liftgate 9.0 9.0
Tailgate 6.7 6.7
Quarter panel L/H 23.4 23.4
Quarter panel R/H 23.7 23.7
process.
Rear bumper
D-Pillar closing panel L/H and R/H
Rear lamp panel
Rear crossmember
Rear panel
Quarter panel
Tailgate

Rear bumper
Rear lamp panel L/H and R/H
Rear panel
Rear crossmember
Tailgate
Quarter panel L/H and R/H

Body off integraed frame
Rear floor panel section
Rear bumper
Rear side member section
D-Pillar closing panel
D-Pillar inner lower panel assembly
Rear lamp panel
Rear panel
Rear crossmember
Tailgate
Quarter panel

Body off integraed frame
Rear floor panel section
Rear bumper
Rear side member section L/H and R/H
D-Pillar inner lower panel assembly L/H and R/H
Rear lamp panel L/H and R/H
Rear panel
Rear crossmember
Tailgate
Quarter panel L/H and R/H

Rear bumper
D-Pillar closing panel
D-Pillar inner lower panel assembly
Rear lamp panel
Rear panel
Rear crossmember
Tailgate
Quarter panel

Rear bumper
Rear lamp panel
Rear panel
Rear crossmember
D Pillar closing panel L/H and R/H
Tailgate
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Quarter Panel
Removal

3. Remove the rear wheel and tire.

5. Remove the forced air extraction grille.
6. R/H side: Remove fuel tank.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank (310-01A
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
7. R/H side: Remove the fuel tank filler pipe.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
(310-01C Fuel Tank and Lines - 2.7L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
8. R/H side: Remove the fuel filler interlock catch.



Installation).
11. Remove the C-pillar side impact sensor.

and Installation).

Installation).
13. Remove the rear quarter window glass.

Installation).
14. Remove the rocker panel finisher.
15. Remove the exhaust heatshield.
16. Remove the tailgate latch.

For additional information, refer to: Tailgate Latch (501-14
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and
Installation).
17. Remove the tailgate weatherstrip.

21. Release the wiring harness.
22.
- 1 Butt weld.
- 2 Butt weld.
- 3 50 spot welds.
- 4 5 spot welds.
- 5 40 spot welds.
- 6 9 spot welds.
- 7 Butt weld.
- 8 40 spot welds.
23.
- 1 Acoustic seal.
- 2 16 plug welds.
- 3 Acoustic seal R/H.
- 4 7 plug welds.
- 5 3 plug welds.
- 6 Acoustic seal.
- 7 Acoustic seal.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Inner Quarter Panel
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure, the inner quarter panel is replaced in conjunction with the quarter panel.

2. Remove the quarter panel.

For additional information, refer to: Quarter Panel (501-30
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and Installation).
3.
- 1 Butt weld.
- 2 24 spot welds.
- 3 11 spot welds.
- 4 Butt weld.
- 5 40 spot welds.
4.
- 1 5 plug welds.
- 2 8 plug welds.
- 3 Acoustic seals
Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Water Drain Panel
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure, the water drain panel is replaced in conjunction with the quarter panel.


3.
- 1 Butt weld.
- 2 12 spot-welds.
- 3 2 plug-welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Wheelhouse Outer
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure, the rear wheelhouse outer is replaced in conjunction with the quarter panel.

2. Disconnect the parking brake cables.

For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake Cable
(206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the brake line.
4. Remove the rear suspension.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Suspension (204-
02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation).

6.
- 1 60 spot welds.
- 2 10 spot welds.
7.
- 1 160mm (6.29)
adhesive.
- 2 2 plug welds and 5
spot welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
1. Install is the reversal of remova.l
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Lamp Mounting Panel
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure, the rear lamp mounting panel is replaced in conjunction with the quarter panel.


3.
- 1 18 plug welds.
- 2 Adhesive.
- 3 3 plug welds.
- 4 2 plug welds.
4.
- 1 16 spot welds.
- 2 11 spot welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Back Panel
Removal
NOTE: When replacing the back panel it is necessary to remove a section of the rear lamp panel.


3. Remove both D-pillar trim panels.

Installation).
4. Remove the tailgate hinge trim cover.
5. Remove the tailgate weather seal.
9. Remove the L/H exhaust heatshield tailpipe.
10. Remove the R/H exhaust heatshield tailpipe.
12. Release the back panel wiring harness.
13.
- 1 20 plug welds.
- 2 42 spot welds.
- 3 4 plug welds.
- 4 21 plug welds.
- 5 4 plug welds.
14.
- 1 2 plug welds. (R/H
is symmetrically
opposite to L/H)
- 2 30 spot welds.
- 3 7 spot welds. (R/H
is symmetrically
opposite to L/H)

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Floor Panel Section
Removal
NOTE: In this procdure, the rear floor panel section is replaced in conjunction with the back panel and rear
crossmember.

2. Remove the back panel.

For additional information, refer to: Back Panel (501-30
3. Remove the rear crossmember.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Crossmember
(501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
4.
- 1 Mig-weld.
- 2 Mig-weld.
- 3 Mig-welds and 18
plug-welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Crossmember
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure, the rear crossmember is replaced in conjunction with the back panel.


3.
- 1 Mig weld.
- 2 3 spot welds.
- 3 12 plug welds.
- 4 3 spot welds.
- 5 Mig weld.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Quarter/Side Panel Rear Section LH
Removal
NOTES:
The quarter / side panel rear section R/H is symmetrically opposite to the L/H.
In this procedure, quarter / side panel rear section is replaced in conjunction with the quarter panel.


3.
- 1 15 spot welds.
- 2 Butt weld.
- 3 Butt weld.
- 4 Acoustic seal.
- 5 3 plug welds.
- 6 8 plug welds.
- 7 Mig weld.
- 8 5 plug welds.
- 9 Butt weld.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - Rear Side Member Section
Removal
NOTE: In this procdure, the rear side member section is replaced in conjunction with the back panel and
rear crossmember.


3. Remove the rear crossmember.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Crossmember
(501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs, Removal and
Installation).
4.
- 1 2 plug welds. (also
see graphic E55932)
- 2 2 plug welds.
- 3 Butt weld.
5.
- 1 Butt weld.
- 2 2 plug welds.
- 3 4 plug welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - D-Pillar Inner Lower Panel
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the D-Pillar inner lower panel is replaced in conjunction with the quarter panel.


3.
- 1 8 plug welds.
- 2 3 plug welds.
- 3 4 plug welds.
- 4 Mig weld.
- 5 7 plug welds.
- 6 6 plug welds.
- 7 4 plug welds.
- 8 Butt weld.
- 9 Adhesive
- 10 4 plug welds.
- 11 6 plug welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs - D-Pillar Closing Panel
Removal
NOTE: In this procedure the D-Pillar closing panel is replaced in conjunction with the quarter panel.


3.
- 1 Mig weld.
- 2 2 plug welds.
- 3 1 plug weld.
- 4 4 plug welds.

Welding.
Tolerance checks.
Installation
Full Frame and Body Mounting -
HO2s harness bracket bolt 10 7
Transmission support crossmember nuts and bolts 90 66
Transmission support insulator through-bolt 175 129
Transmission undershield bolts 10 7
*Integrated-body frame to body bolts 133 98
* New bolts must be installed
Full Frame and Body Mounting - Tow Bar Mounting Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Tow Bar Gauge
JLR-501-201
1. Pre test: Check the detachable tow bar locking pin is

moving freely without sticking.
2. Insert the tow bar into the chassis following the owners
handbook instruction.
3. CAUTION: The special tool must be flat

against the tow bar ball before taking
measurements.
Hold the special tool JLR-501-201 against the

tow bar as shown, failure to follow this
instruction may result in an incorrect
measurement.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the special tool is

mounted flush to the tow ball.
NOTE: Note the position of the tow bar

release handle.
Install the special tool as shown.

5. Check the position of the tow bar release handle against the
special tool, and observe the following:
If the tow bar release handle points to the red area
of the special tool, go to Step 6.
If the tow bar release handle points outside of the
red area of the special tool, then the tow bar
mounting is correct and no further action is required.
6. Install a new tow bar and check the tow bar mounting
following Steps 3 - 5.
If the tow bar release handle points to the red area
of the special tool, install a new rear crossmember.
For additional information, refer to: Rear
Crossmember (502-02 Full Frame and Body
Mounting, Removal and Installation).
Full Frame and Body Mounting - Transmission Support
Crossmember TDV6 2.7L Diesel/V6 4.0L Petrol
Removal
All vehicles

safety stands.
2. Remove the transmission undershield.

Remove the 6 bolts.
Vehicles with diesel engine

3. Release the 3 fuel lines.
4. Release the exhaust front mounting.
Vehicles with petrol engine

5. Release the HO2S wiring harness and bracket
from the crossmember.
Remove the 2 bolts.
Tie the bracket aside.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission support insulator
through-bolt.
Support the transfer case.

Remove the 4 nuts and bolts.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Install the crossmember.
Tighten the nuts and bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb.ft).
2. Install the transmission support insulator through-bolt and

Vehicles with petrol engine
3. CAUTION: Make sure the H02S wiring harness is not

twisted more than 180 degrees and is not in contact with
either the exhaust or driveshaft.
Attach the HO2S wiring harness and bracket to the

crossmember.
Vehicles with diesel engine

4. Secure the 3 fuel lines.
5. Connect the exhaust front mounting.
All vehicles
6. Install the transmission undershield.
Crossmember TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:

safety stands.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Support the transfer case.
6.
Installation
1. TORQUE: 115 Nm
2. TORQUE: 175 Nm
3. TORQUE: 10 Nm
4.
5. TORQUE: 10 Nm
Crossmember V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
NOTES:

safety stands.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Installation
1. TORQUE: 115 Nm
2. TORQUE: 175 Nm
3. TORQUE: 10 Nm
4. TORQUE: 10 Nm

Full Frame and Body Mounting - Rear Crossmember
Removal
NOTE: Some illustrations may show the body removed for clarity.

stands.
2. Disconnect battery ground cable.

Specifications).
3. Disconnect the battery positive cable.

6. NOTES:
If equipped.
The procedure must be carried out on

both sides.
Remove both rear body mount dampers.

on both sides.
Remove both rear body mass dampers.

on both sides.
Remove the rear bumper cover lower brackets.

Remove the 2 scrivets.
9. Remove the rear bumper foam pads.

10. NOTES:
Up to the end of 06MY.

both sides.
Remove the bracket.

Remove the 2 nuts.
11. NOTES:
Up to the end of 06MY.

both sides.
Remove the bracket.

Remove the bolt.
12. NOTES:
07MY onwards.
Vehicles built from 07MY onwards have

welded rear body mass damper brackets, these
must be removed and replaced with the bolt-on
style brackets.

both sides.
Using suitable tools, remove and discard the 4

rear body mass damper brackets.
Item Description
- Mig weld. (Right-hand is symmetrically
opposite to left-hand).

on both sides.
Using suitable tools, remove and discard the

rear crossmember.
Item Description
- Mig weld. (Right-hand is symmetrically
opposite to left-hand).
Installation

on both sides.
Install the rear crossmember.

For additional information:
Welding.
Body Repairs (501-25A Body Repairs -
General Information, Description and
Operation).
Corrosion Protection (501-25B Body
Repairs - Corrosion Protection,
Tolerance checks.
Body and Frame (501-26 Body Repairs -
Vehicle Specific Information and
Tolerance Checks, Description and
Operation).
2. Install the rear bumper foam pads.

on both sides.
Install the rear bumper cover lower brackets.

Secure the 2 scrivets.
4. NOTES:
07MY onwards.

both sides.
Install the stiffener inside the chassis.

5. NOTES:
All Vehicles.

both sides.
Install the bracket.

Tighten the bolt to 175 Nm.

on both sides.
Remove the bracket.

Tighten the M14 nut to 175 Nm.
Tighten the M10 nut to 45 Nm
7. NOTES:

both sides.
Install both rear body mass dampers.

Tighten the M8 bolts to 25 Nm.
Tighten the M10 bolts to 40 Nm
8. NOTES:
If equipped.

both sides.
Install both rear body mount dampers.
Tighten the bolts to 45 Nm.
9. Install the spare wheel and tire.

11. Connect the battery positive cable.

Tighten the battery terminal to 5 Nm.

Specifications).
Full Frame and Body Mounting - Body V6 4.0L Petrol/V8 5.0L Petrol
Removal
NOTES:
Some illustrations may show the engine removed for clarity.
All vehicles
For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,
2.
3.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
10. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner RH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and
11. For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation
and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, General
Procedures).
12.
13. For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and
Installation).
Vehicles with active damping

14.
All vehicles
15. CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking
caps.
caps.
17. WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
18.
19.
20. For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Battery Tray (414-01 Battery,
21.
22.
23.
24. For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank (303-03D Engine Cooling - V8
5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing the components, make sure

the area around the joint faces and connections are clean. Plug open
Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid spillage.

Disconnect the line union.
Remove the clip.


Remove the clip.
40.
41. For additional information, refer to: Fuel Filler Door Assembly (501-03 Body
Closures, Removal and Installation).
42. Remove the fuel filler cap.
43.


Remove the clip.


Remove the clip.
46.
47.
48.
49. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the seal.
50.
51.
53.
54. Remove and

discard the 10
body mount
bolts.
Remove
the 10
spacing
washers.
55. CAUTION:
To prevent the
body becoming
unstable when
raised from the
integrated body
frame, install
the vehicle tie
down straps.
NOTE:
Note the fitted
position of the
body mounts.
Using an
assistant raise
and support the
body.
Remove
the body
mounts.
56.
Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure
that new bolts
are installed.
Make sure
that all
components are
free and do not
get caught up
whilst lowering
the body onto
the integrated
body frame.
Using an
assistant install
the body to the
integrated body
frame.
Install the
body
mounts.
With
assistance
align the
body and
integrated
body
frame
mounts.
Install the
bolts, but
do not
tighten
fully at
this
stage.
2. Remove the tie down straps securing the body.
3. TORQUE: 133
Nm
4.
5. TORQUE: 25 Nm
6.
7.
8. TORQUE: 12 Nm
9. TORQUE: 12 Nm
10.
11.
12. TORQUE: 12 Nm
13. For additional information, refer to: Fuel Filler Door Assembly (501-03 Body Closures,
14. NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps.
TORQUE: 16 Nm
Secure the clip.
TORQUE: 16 Nm
Secure the clip.
TORQUE: 16 Nm
Secure the clip.
TORQUE: 16 Nm
Secure the clip.
18. WARNING: Make sure that a new bolt is installed.
TORQUE: 25 Nm
19.
20.
21.
22. TORQUE: 12 Nm
23.
24. TORQUE: 20 Nm
25.
26.
27.
28. TORQUE: 20 Nm
29.
30.
31.
caps.
TORQUE: 12 Nm
caps.
TORQUE: 12 Nm
34. WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
35.
36.
37.
38. TORQUE: 8 Nm
39. For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Battery Tray (414-01 Battery, Mounting and
Cables, Removal and Installation).
40. TORQUE: 10 Nm
41. For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank (303-03D Engine
Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
Vehicles with active damping
42.
All vehicles
43. TORQUE: 10 Nm
All vehicles
44.
45. For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and
Installation).
46. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner LH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and
47. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner RH (303-12D Intake Air Distribution and
48.
49. TORQUE: 10 Nm
50.
51.

53.
54.
55. For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation
and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, General
Procedures).
56. For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,
57. Bleed the braking system.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System -
58. Check and top-up the coolant.

Full Frame and Body Mounting - Body TDV6 2.7L Diesel/TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:
Some illustrations may show the engine removed for clarity.
All vehicles

For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01 Battery,
3.
4.

6.
7.
8.
9. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12B Intake
Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
10.
11. For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19
Bumpers, Removal and Installation).



14. WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluid.
15. For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Battery Tray (414-
01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
16.
17.
18.
19.
20. For additional information, refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank

(303-03B Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
21.
22.
23.
24.

25.
26.
27.
All vehicles
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37. CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing

the components, make sure the area around the
joint faces and connections are clean. Plug open
Position an absorbent cloth to collect fluid

spillage.
Remove the clip.

spillage.
Remove the clip.
39.
40. For additional information, refer to: Fuel Filler Door

Assembly (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and
Installation).
41.


spillage.
Remove the clip.


spillage.
Remove the clip.
44.
45.
46. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the seal.
47. NOTE: Discard the bolt.

48.
49.
50.
51.
52. Lower the vehicle onto its wheels.
53. Remove and discard the 10 body mount bolts.

Remove the 10 spacing washers.
54. CAUTION: To prevent the body becoming unstable when

raised from the integrated body frame, install the vehicle tie
down straps.
NOTE: Note the fitted position of the body mounts.
Using an assistant raise and support the body.

Remove the body mounts.
55.
Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Make sure that all components are free and do not get
caught up whilst lowering the body onto the integrated body
frame.
Using an assistant install the body to the integrated body frame.

Install the body mounts.
With assistance align the body and integrated body
frame mounts.
Install the bolts, but do not tighten fully at this stage.
2. Remove the tie down straps securing the body.
3. TORQUE: 133 Nm
4.
5. TORQUE: 25 Nm
6.
7.
8. TORQUE: 12 Nm
9. TORQUE: 12 Nm
10.
11.
12. TORQUE: 12 Nm
13. For additional information, refer to: Fuel Filler Door Assembly
(501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
TORQUE: 16 Nm
Secure the clip.
TORQUE: 16 Nm
Secure the clip.
TORQUE: 16 Nm
Secure the clip.
TORQUE: 16 Nm
Secure the clip.
18. WARNING: Make sure that a new bolt is

installed.
TORQUE: 25 Nm
19.
20.
21.
22. TORQUE: 12 Nm
23.
24. TORQUE: 20 Nm
25.
26.
27.
28. TORQUE: 20 Nm
29.
30. TORQUE: 10 Nm
31.
All vehicles
32.
33.
34.
35. TORQUE: 12 Nm
36. TORQUE: 12 Nm
37.
38.
39.
40. TORQUE: 8 Nm
41. For additional information, refer to: Auxiliary Battery Tray (414-
01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
42.
coolant.
For additional information, refer to: Coolant

Expansion Tank (303-03B Engine Cooling - TDV6
3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
44. TORQUE: 10 Nm
All vehicles
45.
46. For additional information, refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19
Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
47. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12B Intake
Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
48.
49.
50.

52.
Cut the cable tie.
53. TORQUE: 10 Nm
54. For additional information, refer to: Battery (414-01 Battery,

56. Check and top-up the coolant.
57. Bleed the braking system.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding
(206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).

Discovery 4 - LR4 2010-2012 - Sec4 & 5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Discovery 4 - LR4 2010-2012 - Sec4 & 5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

4: Electrical

412: Climate Control System

Inspection and Verification

1. Verify the customer concern

2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity

Distribution motor self-test

Observe the operation of the programmed defrost LED.

Symptom Possible Causes Action

Air conditioning Refrigerant GO to Pinpoint Test A.

PINPOINT TEST A : PRELIMINARY TESTS

This test is performed with the engine not running.

PINPOINT TEST B : FUNCTIONALITY TESTS

PINPOINT TEST C : GAUGE TESTS

NOTE: This test is performed with the engine not running.

NOTE: This test is performed with the engine not running.

NOTE: This test is performed with the engine not running.

PINPOINT TEST D : NITROGEN LEAK TESTS

NOTE: This test is performed with the engine not running.

1. Refrigerant recovery: Remove the dust

2. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate

3. Open the valves on the connections.

4. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.

5. Turn the process switch to the correct position.

6. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.

7. WARNING: Refrigerant must always be recycled before

Allow the system to recover the refrigerant from the

8. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.

9. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.

10. Close the valves on the connections.

11. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.

12. Install the dust covers to the connectors.

14. Measure and record the quantity of refrigerant oil recovered

18. Open the valves on the connections.

19. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.

20. Turn the process switch to the correct position.

21. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.

22. Allow the station to evacuate the A/C system.

23. CAUTION: The system must be evacuated immediatley

Recharging: Close the valves on the refrigerant station.

24. Close the valve on the oil charger.

25. Disconnect the yellow line from the refrigerant station.

26. Remove the cover from the oil charger.

28. Install the cover to the oil charger.

29. Connect the yellow line to the refrigerant station.

30. Open the valve on the oil charger.

31. Move the pointer on the refrigerant gauge to mark the

34. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.

35. Close the valves on the connections.

36. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.

1. Set the ignition to the on position, make sure the air

2. Start the engine and allow to run for a minimum of 5

4. Switch on the A/C system.

5. Open all air vents in the dashboard.

6. Run the A/C system for a minimum of 5 minutes, while the

7. Once this is achieved the compressor is stabilized, with the

NOTE: LHD installation shown, RHD similar

Item Part Number Description

AIR REGISTERS AND VENTS

CABIN AIR FILTER

2. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the

Remove the register.

3. Remove the headlamp switch.

2. Install the register.